Professional Documents
Culture Documents
In Put Out Put Reference
In Put Out Put Reference
In Put Out Put Reference
0 Documentation
Build: 08d2e308bb
COPYRIGHT (c) 1996-2019 THE BOARD OF TRUSTEES OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS,
THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA THROUGH THE ERNEST ORLANDO
LAWRENCE BERKELEY NATIONAL LABORATORY, OAK RIDGE NATIONAL LABORATORY,
MANAGED BY UT-BATTELLE, ALLIANCE FOR SUSTAINABLE ENERGY, LLC, AND OTHER
CONTRIBUTORS. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THIS MATERIAL MAY BE REPRO-
DUCED OR TRANSMITTED IN ANY FORM OR BY ANY MEANS WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRIT-
TEN PERMISSION OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS OR THE ERNEST ORLANDO LAWRENCE
BERKELEY NATIONAL LABORATORY. ENERGYPLUS IS A TRADEMARK OF THE US DEPART-
MENT OF ENERGY.
Contents
1 Input-Output Reference 25
1.1 What’s different about EnergyPlus Input and Output? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.1.1 EnergyPlus Input Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.1.2 General Input Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.1.3 EnergyPlus Output Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.2 IDD Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.2.1 IDD – IP Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1.3 Input – Output Descriptions (Document) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.3.1 Input Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.3.2 Output Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.4 Group – Simulation Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.4.1 Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.4.2 Timestep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.4.3 ConvergenceLimits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.4.4 Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.4.5 SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
1.4.6 SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
1.4.7 HeatBalanceAlgorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
1.4.8 HeatBalanceSettings:ConductionFiniteDifference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
1.4.9 ZoneAirHeatBalanceAlgorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
1.4.10 ZoneAirContaminantBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
1.4.11 ShadowCalculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
1.4.12 Output:Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
1.4.13 Output:DebuggingData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
1.4.14 Output:PreprocessorMessage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
1.4.15 ZoneCapacitanceMultiplier:ResearchSpecial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
1.4.16 SimulationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
1.4.17 HVACSystemRootFindingAlgorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
1.4.18 Meter:Custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
1.4.19 Meter:CustomDecrement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
1.4.20 Custom Meter Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
1.4.21 Simulation Parameter Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
1.5 Group – Compliance Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
1.5.1 Compliance:Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
1.6 Group – Location – Climate – Weather File Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
1.6.1 Site:Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2
CONTENTS 3
1.6.2 Site:VariableLocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
1.6.3 SizingPeriod:DesignDay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1.6.4 Longer Design Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
1.6.5 SizingPeriod:WeatherFileDays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
1.6.6 SizingPeriod:WeatherFileConditionType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
1.6.7 RunPeriod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
1.6.8 RunPeriodControl:SpecialDays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
1.6.9 RunPeriodControl:DaylightSavingTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
1.6.10 WeatherProperty:SkyTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
1.6.11 Site:WeatherStation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
1.6.12 Site:HeightVariation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
1.6.13 Site:GroundTemperature:BuildingSurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
1.6.14 Site:GroundTemperature:Shallow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
1.6.15 Site:GroundTemperature:Deep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
1.6.16 Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:FiniteDifference . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
1.6.17 Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach . . . . . . . . . . . 91
1.6.18 Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:Xing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
1.6.19 Site:GroundDomain:Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
1.6.20 Site:GroundDomain:Basement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
1.6.21 Site:GroundTemperature:FCfactorMethod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
1.6.22 Site:GroundReflectance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
1.6.23 Site:GroundReflectance:SnowModifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
1.6.24 Site:WaterMainsTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
1.6.25 Site:Precipitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
1.6.26 RoofIrrigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
1.6.27 Solar and Visible Spectrum Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
1.6.28 Site:SolarAndVisibleSpectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
1.6.29 Site:SpectrumData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
1.6.30 Outputs for local temperature/wind speed calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
1.7 Group – Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
1.7.1 Day Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
1.7.2 ScheduleTypeLimits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
1.7.3 Day Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
1.7.4 Schedule:Day:Hourly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
1.7.5 Schedule:Day:Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
1.7.6 Schedule:Day:List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
1.7.7 Week Schedule(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
1.7.8 Schedule:Week:Daily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
1.7.9 Schedule:Week:Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
1.7.10 Schedule:Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
1.7.11 Schedule:Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
1.7.12 Schedule:Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
1.7.13 Schedule:File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
1.7.14 Schedule:File:Shading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
1.8 Group – Surface Construction Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
1.8.1 Specifying the Building Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
4 CONTENTS
6 Output 2667
6.1 Using ReadVarsESO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2668
6.1.1 Creating Charts and Spreadsheet files from Output Variables . . . . . . . . 2668
Input-Output Reference
This document is intended to be an encyclopedic reference for the EnergyPlus Input Data Dictionary
(IDD), Input Data File (IDF) and potential resultant outputs (various output files).
The following descriptions are “grouped” by the elements in the IDD (ref: Getting Started
Document and the IDD Conventions). In some cases, the descriptions of reporting will be done for
an object (e.g., Lighting electrical consumption or thermal comfort value for a group of people) and
in some cases for the entire group (e.g., ambient condition reports).
25
26 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
all its input the first time it is called. The implication for the user is that error messages may show
up in somewhat peculiar places. A further implication is that no order is needed in the input data
file! Data that is not needed by a particular simulation is not processed.
3) The data dictionary has the capability to do “automatic” range checking on numeric fields
as well as fill in numeric defaults. Both filling in defaults and “automatic” range checking are done
when the data is read. Other checks may need a combination of fields and won’t be done until the
data is “processed” (after the simulation starts).
4) A couple of other differences that might not be true in other programs: Blanks are
significant in alpha fields SO DesignDay is not the same as Design Day (1 space between Design
and Day) nor Design Day (2 spaces between Design and Day). Alpha objects, however, are case
insensitive SO DesignDay is the same as ‘designday’ or ‘SizingPeriod:DesignDay’.
• Fields do not extend over line boundaries. Usually, if a comma or (as appropriate) semi-colon
is not the last field value on a line, one will be inserted. Of course, several fields may appear
on a single line as long as they are comma separated. (And the last could be followed by a
semi-colon).
• Commas delimit fields – therefore, no fields can have embedded commas. No error will
occur but you won’t get what you want. You cannot surround a field with “ to accommodate
commas in the fields.
• The comment character is a exclamation “!”. Anything on a line after the exclamation is
ignored.
• Input records (aka input line length) can be up to 500 characters in length. If you go over
that, no error will occur but you won’t get what you want.
• Each Alpha string in the input data file (aka alpha field length) can be up to 100 characters
in length. Anything beyond that is truncated. This would apply to all names (such as zone
name, node name, schedule name) in fields.
• Each Alpha string (including Section and Class/Object keywords) is mapped to UPPER case
during processing, unless the “retaincase” flag marks the field in the IDD. Get routines from
1.2. IDD CONVENTIONS 27
the EnergyPlus code that use the Section and Object keywords automatically map to UPPER
case for finding the item. The primary drawback with this is that error messages coming out
of the input processor will be in UPPER case and may not appear exactly as input.
• Special characters, such as tabs, should NOT be included in the file. However, tabs can be
accommodated and are turned into spaces.
• All numbers can be flexibly input and are processed into single precision variables (i.e. 1.0,
1.000, 1, .1E+1 are all processed equally).
!
! \memo Memo describing the object. If multiple lines , start each line
! with \memo.
! Limit line length to 100 characters.
!
! \unique -object To flag objects which should appear only once in an idf
! (this comment has no "value ")
!
! \required -object To flag objects which are required in every idf
! (this comment has no "value ")
!
! \min -fields Minimum number of fields that should be included in the
! object. If appropriate , the Input Processor will fill
! any missing fields with defaults (for numeric fields).
! It will also supply that number of fields to the "get"
! routines using blanks for alpha fields (note -- blanks
! may not be allowable for some alpha fields).
!
! \obsolete This object has been replaced though is kept (and is read)
! in the current version. Please refer to documentation as
! to the dispersal of the object. If this object is
! encountered in an IDF , the InputProcessor will post an
! appropriate message to the error file.
! usage: \obsolete New = >[New object name]
!
! \extensible :<\#> This object is dynamically extensible -- meaning , if you
! change the IDD appropriately (if the object has a simple list
! structure -- just add items to the list arguments (i.e. BRANCH
! LIST). These will be automatically redimensioned and used during
! the simulation. <\#> should be entered by the developer to signify
! how many of the last fields are needed to be extended (and EnergyPlus
! will attempt to auto -extend the object). The first field of the first
! instance of the extensible field set is marked with \begin -extensible.
!
! \begin -extensible See previous item , marks beginning of extensible fields in
! an object.
!
! \format The object should have a special format when saved in
! the IDF Editor with the special format option enabled.
! The options include SingleLine , Vertices , CompactSchedule ,
! FluidProperties , ViewFactors , and Spectral.
! The SingleLine option puts all the fields for the object
! on a single line. The Vertices option is used in objects
! that use X, Y and Z fields to format those three fields
! on a single line.
! The CompactSchedule formats that specific object.
! The FluidProperty option formats long lists of fluid
! properties to ten values per line.
! The ViewFactor option formats three fields related to
! view factors per line.
! The Spectral option formats the four fields related to
! window glass spectral data per line.
!
! \reference -class -name Adds the name of the class to the reference list
! similar to \reference.
!
! Group -level comments:
!
! \group Name for a group of related objects
!
!
! Notes on comments
! -----------------
!
! 1. If a particular comment is not applicable (such as units , or default)
! then simply omit the comment rather than indicating N/A.
!
! 2. Memos and notes should be brief (recommend 5 lines or less per block).
! More extensive explanations are expected to be in the user documentation
1.2. IDD CONVENTIONS 31
! kmol/s
! m3/m3
! minutes
! Mode
! ms
! ohms
! percent
! ppm
! rev/min
! s
! V
! VA
! W/m2 or deg C
! W/m2 , W or deg C
! W/s
! W/W
! years
! **************************************************************************
The IDD excerpt above is the complete definition as seen in the IDD file.
34 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
First, the object name is given. (Site:Location) This is followed by a comma in both the
definition (IDD) and in an input file (IDF). In fact, all fields except the terminating field of an IDD
class object and IDF object are followed by commas. The final field in an IDD class object or in an
IDF object is terminated by a semi-colon.
Next is an alpha field, the location name. As noted above, for input, spaces are significant in
this field. The main inputs for Site:Location are numeric fields. These are numbered (as is the
alpha field) for convenience. The \ designations will show various information about the objects as
described above in the IDD conventions discussion. Of importance for reading this document are
the units and possible minimum and maximum values for a field.
There is automatic processing of the \minimum, \maximum and \default data for numeric fields.
Any infractions of the \minimum, \maximum fields are automatically detected and messages will
appear in the standard error file. After all the input is checked, infractions will cause program
termination (before the bulk of the simulation is completed). Defaults are also enforced if you leave
the numeric field blank.
Some objects need all the parameters listed by the definition; some do not. In the descriptions
that follow, we will try to indicate which parts are optional. Usually, these will be the last fields in
the object input or definition. Even if items are not used for a particular object (e.g. Multiplier in
the FenestrationSurface:Detailed and type = Door), the field must be included unless it is the last
field in the object. So, for this instance, one must include a multiplier field (must be numeric and
would need to obey any \minimum, \maximum rules) for doors.
Two spreadsheet files are included with the installation:
• ExampleFiles.xls – shows many details about the included example files including highlights
of features.
• ExampleFiles-ObjectsLink.xls – shows, for each object, the first three occurrences of that
object in an example file.
Note that the eplusout.mdd file is similar, but meters are only available at the Zone timestep.
• Zone,Meter,Electricity:Facility [J]
• Zone,Meter,ExteriorLights:Electricity [J]
• Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Facility [J]
• Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Building [J]
The IDF display has all the same information in an IDF-ready form (i.e., you could copy and
paste it into your input file using a text editor).
Example from the eplusout.rdd file:
All of the same information appears in a slightly different form and defaults to “hourly” reporting
frequency (which, of course, can be changed when you put it into your input file). The “*” is
preselected so that you would be reporting for all those items.
1.4.1 Version
1.4.1.1 Inputs
1.4.1.1.1 Field: Version Identifier
The Version object allows you to enter the proper version that your IDF was created for. This
is checked against the current version of EnergyPlus and a Severe error issued (non-terminating)
if it does not match the current version string. Note that versions are often significant and there
is no guarantee that the older file will run in the newer versions of the program. See IDF Version
Updater (Auxiliary Programs Document) for methods of changing the older files to newer versions.
1.4.2 Timestep
1.4.2.1 Inputs
1.4.2.1.1 Field: Number of Timesteps per Hour
The Timestep object specifies the “basic” timestep for the simulation. The value entered here is
usually known as the Zone Timestep. This is used in the Zone Heat Balance Model calculation as
the driving timestep for heat transfer and load calculations. The value entered here is the number of
timesteps to use within an hour. Longer length timesteps have lower values for Number of Timesteps
per Hour. For example a value of 6 entered here directs the program to use a zone timestep of 10
1.4. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 37
minutes and a value of 60 means a 1 minute timestep. The user’s choice for Number of Timesteps
per Hour must be evenly divisible into 60; the allowable choices are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20,
30, and 60.
The choice made for this field has important implications for modeling accuracy and the overall
time it takes to run a simulation. Here are some considerations when choosing a value:
• The solution technique used in EnergyPlus has been designed to be stable with zone timesteps
of up to sixty minutes (Number Timesteps in Hour = 1). However, 60 minutes is considered a
“long” timestep and it should only be used in rare occasions where there is no HVAC system,
accuracy is not a concern, and short run times are critical. Such long timesteps are not recom-
mended to use because simulation results are more accurate for shorter timesteps, of say 10
minutes or less (Number of Timesteps per Hour of 6 or more). Shorter zone timesteps improve
the numerical solution of the Zone Heat Balance Model because they improve how models
for surface temperature and zone air temperature are coupled together. Longer timesteps
introduce more lag and lead to more a dampened dynamic response.
• Simulation run time increases with shorter timesteps or larger values for Number of Timesteps
per Hour. The effect varies with the nature of the model. The user can test out different
values on their particular model to understand the implications for his or her particular case.
Sometimes large models with multizone HVAC and Plant systems execute nearly as fast with
15 minute timesteps as with 60 minute timesteps because fewer iterations are required in
the system modeling since the prior timestep’s results are close to the final outcome of next
timestep.
• The weather data files usually have 60-minute (or hourly) data. However, it does not follow
that this should be used as the basis for choosing the zone timestep because:
• EnergyPlus carefully interpolates the weather data between data points for use at shorter
timesteps. This is discussed in a later section: Weather Data Hourly Interpolation
• Many aspects of a model have time scales that differ from the that of the weather data. A
goal of the modeling is to predict how the building will respond to the weather. However,
the building’s response is not governed by the time scale that the weather data are available
at, but rather the time scales of the dynamic performance of the thermal envelope as well as
things like schedules for internal gains, thermostats, and equipment availability.
• If the model will include calculating the cost of electricity, then the user should be aware that
many electric utility tariffs base charges on demand windows of a specified length of time.
If the choice of Number of Timesteps per Hour is not consistent with the demand window,
then unexpected results may be obtained. For reasonable prediction of the maximum rates
for electricity use for in calculating demand charges, the length of the zone timestep needs
to be consistent with the tariff’s demand window. The following table lists what values are
consistent with various demand windows.
There is also second type of timestep inside EnergyPlus that is known as the System Timestep.
This is a variable-length timestep that governs the driving timestep for HVAC and Plant system
modeling. The user cannot directly control the system timestep (except by use of the Conver-
genceLimits object). When the HVAC portion of the simulation begins its solution for the current
zone timestep, it uses the zone timestep as its maximum length but then can reduce the timestep,
as necessary, to improve the solution. The technical details of the approach are explained in the
Engineering Documentation under “Integrated Solution Manager”.
Users can see the system timestep used if they select the “detailed” frequency option on an
HVAC output variable (e.g. Zone Air Temperature). To contrast, the “Zone” variables will only be
reported on the zone timestep (e.g. Zone Mean Air Temperature).
And, the IDF example:
Timestep , 6; !- Suggested default for most system simulations
Suggested defaults are 4 for non-HVAC simulations, 6 for simulations with HVAC, 20 is the
minimum for ConductionFiniteDifference and HeatAndMoistureFiniteElement simulations. Green
roof (ref: Material:RoofVegetation) also may require more timesteps.
Note that hourly data (such as outdoor conditions expressed by Design Days or Weather data)
are interpolated to the Zone Timestep. This is discussed in a later section: Weather Data Hourly
Interpolation
1.4.3 ConvergenceLimits
This item is an “advanced” feature that should be used only with caution. It is specifically included
to assist some users “speed up” calculations while not overly compromising accuracy. The user
must judge for him/herself whether the reduced run time is useful.
1.4.3.1 Inputs
1.4.3.1.1 Field: Minimum System Timestep
Usually the minimum system timestep is allowed to vary from the zone timestep (as maximum)
to a minimum timestep of 1 minute during certain system calculations. This might be when the
system turns on or off, for example. Entering 0 in this field sets the minimum system timestep to
be the same as the zone timestep. Otherwise the units of the field are minutes. It’s probably a
good idea to have any minimum entered be a divisor of the zone timestep.
In order to reduce time used in simulating your building, you may choose to enter a lesser
number than the default of 20 for the maximum number of iterations to be used. Or, you may
wish to enter a bigger number for certain buildings. To get more information printed with a “max
iteration” message, you need to enter a “Output:Diagnostics, DisplayExtraWarnings;” command
(which may also generate other warnings than just this one).
1.4.4 Building
The Building object describes parameters that are used during the simulation of the building.
There are necessary correlations between the entries for this object and some entries in the
Site:WeatherStation and Site:HeightVariation objects, specifically the Terrain field.
1.4.4.1 Inputs
and cooling loads that are experienced within the spaces. Those are compared individually to the
values for the previous day. If they are both in tolerance, then the simulation has passed the third
and fourth warm-up check. The simulation stays in the warm-up period until ALL FOUR checks
have been passed. See Engineering Reference and Output Details document for further explanation
and outputs.
Please note–other “convergence tolerance” inputs are required for certain HVAC equipment (unit
ventilator, unit heater, window AC, etc.). The purpose and units of these parameters are different
from “load convergence tolerance” and “temperature convergence tolerance” in the BUILDING
object.
If you use FullInteriorAndExterior the program will also calculate how much beam radiation
falling on the inside of an exterior window (from other windows in the zone) is absorbed by the
window, how much is reflected back into the zone, and how much is transmitted to the outside. In
this calculation the effect of a shading device, if present, is accounted for.
Reflection calculations
Note: Using the reflection calculations can be very time-consuming. Even error-prone. As a
possible alleviation, you can use the Output:Diagnostics,DoNotMirrorDetachedShading; in many
cases to get past a fatal error.
If using reflections, the program calculates beam and sky solar radiation that is reflected from
exterior surfaces and then strikes the building. These reflecting surfaces fall into three categories:
1) Shadowing surfaces. These are surfaces like overhangs or neighboring buildings entered
with Shading:Site, Shading:Building, Shading:Site:Detailed, Shading:Building:Detailed, Shading:-
Overhang, Shading:Overhang:Projection, Shading:Fin, Shading:Fin:Projection or Shading:Zone:-
Detailed objects. See Figure 1.3.
These surfaces can have diffuse and/or specular (beam-to-beam) reflectance values that are
specified with the ShadingProperty:Reflectance object which specifies those parameters. They have
a default value of .2 for both visible and diffuse reflection.
2) Exterior building surfaces. In this case one section of the building reflects solar radiation
onto another section (and vice-versa). See Figure 1.4.
The building surfaces are assumed to be diffusely reflecting if they are opaque (walls, for exam-
ple) and specularly reflecting if they are windows or glass doors. The reflectance values for opaque
surfaces are calculated by the program from the Solar Absorptance and Visible Absorptance val-
ues of the outer material layer of the surface’s construction (ref: Material object properties). The
reflectance values for windows and glass doors are calculated by the program from the reflectance
properties of the individual glass layers that make up surface’s construction assuming no shading
44 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
device is present and taking into account inter-reflections among the layers (ref: Window Proper-
ties).
3) The ground surface. Reflection from the ground is calculated even if reflections option is
not used;l but then the ground plane is considered unobstructed, i.e., the shadowing of the ground
by the building itself or by obstructions such as neighboring buildings is ignored. Shadowing by the
building itself or neighboring buildings is taken into account when the “with reflections” option is
used but then the “view factor to ground” is NOT used. This is shown in Figure 1.5.
Figure 1.3: Solar reflection from shadowing surfaces. Solid arrows are beam solar radiation; dashed
arrows are diffuse solar radiation. (a) Diffuse reflection of beam solar radiation from the top of an
overhang. (b) Diffuse reflection of sky solar radiation from the top of an overhang. (c) Beam-to-
beam (specular) reflection from the façade of an adjacent highly-glazed building represented by a
vertical shadowing surface.
As noted in the message, there will be more information in the .eio file. (Refer to Output Details
document as well for examples.)
You may be able to increase the Maximum Number of Warmup Days and get convergence, but
some anomalous buildings may still not converge. Simulation proceeds for x warmup days until
“convergence” is reached (see the discussion under the Temperature Convergence Tolerance Value
field in this object, just above).
Figure 1.4: Solar reflection from building surfaces onto other building surfaces. In this example
beam solar reflects from a vertical section of the building onto a roof section. The reflection from
the window is specular. The reflection from the wall is diffuse.
46 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Figure 1.5: Shadowing from building affects beam solar reflection from the ground. Beam-to-diffuse
reflection from the ground onto the building occurs only for sunlit areas, A and C, not from shaded
area, B.
This field specifies the minimum number of “warmup” days before EnergyPlus will check if it has
achieved convergence and can thus start simulating the particular environment (design day, annual
run) in question. Research into the minimum number of warmup days indicates that 6 warmup days
is generally enough on the minimum end of the spectrum to avoid false predictions of convergence
and thus to produce enough temperature and flux history to start EnergyPlus simulation. This was
based on a study that used the benchmark reference buildings. It also was observed that convergence
performance improved when the number of warmup days increased. As a result, the default value
for the minimum warmup days has been set to 6. Users should decrease this number only if they
have knowledge that a specific file converges more quickly than 6 days. Users may wish to increase
the value in certain situations when, based on the output variables described in the Output Details
document, it is determined that EnergyPlus has not converged. While this parameter should be
less than the previous parameter, a value greater than the value entered in the field “Maximum
Number of Warmup Days” above may be used when users wish to increase warmup days more than
the previous field. In this particular case, the previous field will be automatically reset to the value
entered in this field and EnergyPlus will run exactly the number of warmup days specified in this
field.
An example from an IDF:
Building ,
PSI HOUSE DORM AND OFFICES , !- Name
36.87000 , !- North Axis {deg}
Suburbs , !- Terrain
0.04, !- Loads Convergence Tolerance Value
0.4000000 , !- Temperature Convergence Tolerance Value {deltaC}
FullInteriorAndExterior , !- Solar Distribution
40, !- Maximum Number of Warmup Days
6; !- Minimum Number of Warmup Days
1.4. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 47
1.4.5 SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Inside
This input object is used control the choice of models used for surface convection at the inside face of
all the heat transfer surfaces in the model. This object sets the selection for convection correlations
in a global way. The Zone Inside Convection Algorithm input field in the Zone object may be used
to selectively override this value on a zone-by-zone basis. Further, individual surfaces can refine
the choice by each surface or surface lists – see object SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients and
object SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients:MultipleSurface.
1.4.5.1 Inputs
1.4.5.1.1 Field: Algorithm
The model specified in this field is the default algorithm for the inside face all the surfaces.. The
key choices are Simple, TARP, CeilingDiffuser, and AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm.
The Simple model applies constant heat transfer coefficients depending on the surface orienta-
tion.
The TARP model correlates the heat transfer coefficient to the temperature difference for
various orientations. This model is based on flat plate experiments.
The CeilingDiffuser model is a mixed and forced convection model for ceiling diffuser config-
urations. The model correlates the heat transfer coefficient to the air change rate for ceilings, walls
and floors. These correlations are based on experiments performed in an isothermal room with a
cold ceiling jet. To avoid discontinuities in surface heat transfer rate calculations, all of correlations
have been extrapolated beyond the lower limit of the data set (3 ACH) to a natural convection
limit that is applied during the hours when the system is off.
The AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm model is an dynamic algorithm that organizes a
large number of different convection models and automatically selects the one that best applies.
The adaptive convection algorithm can also be customized using the SurfaceConvectionAlgo-
rithm:Inside:AdaptiveModelSelections input object. These models are explained in detail in the
EnergyPlus Engineering Reference Document.
The default is TARP.
IDF Example:
1.4.6 SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Outside
Various exterior convection models may be selected for global use. The optional Zone Outside
Convection Algorithm input field in the Zone object may be used to selectively override this
value on a zone-by-zone basis. Further, individual surfaces can refine the choice by each sur-
face or surface lists – see object SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients and object SurfaceProp-
erty:ConvectionCoefficients:MultipleSurface.
1.4.6.1 Inputs
1.4.6.1.1 Field: Algorithm
The available key choices are SimpleCombined, TARP, MoWiTT, DOE-2, and Adap-
tiveConvectionAlgorithm.
48 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
The Simple convection model applies heat transfer coefficients depending on the roughness and
windspeed. This is a combined heat transfer coefficient that includes radiation to sky, ground, and
air. The correlation is based on Figure 1.142, Page 25.1 (Thermal and Water Vapor Transmission
Data), 2001 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. Note that if Simple is chosen here or in the
Zone field and a SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients object attempts to override the calculation
with a different choice, the action will still be one of combined calculation. To change this, you
must select one of the other methods for the global default.
All other convection models apply heat transfer coefficients depending on the roughness, wind-
speed, and terrain of the building’s location. These are convection only heat transfer coefficients;
radiation heat transfer coefficients are calculated automatically by the program.
The TARP algorithm was developed for the TARP software and combines natural and wind-
driven convection correlations from laboratory measurements on flat plates.
The DOE-2 and MoWiTT were derived from field measurements. DOE-2 uses a correlation
from measurements by Klems and Yazdanian for rough surfaces. MoWitt uses a correlation from
measurements by Klems and Yazdanian for smooth surfaces and, therefore, is most appropriate
for windows (see SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients:MultipleSurface for how to apply to only
windows).
The AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm model is an dynamic algorithm that organizes a
large number of different convection models and automatically selects the one that best applies.
The adaptive convection algorithm can also be customized using the SurfaceConvectionAlgo-
rithm:Outside:AdaptiveModelSelections input object. All algorithms are described more fully in
the Engineering Reference.
The default is DOE-2.
Note that when the surface is wet (i.e. it is raining and the surface is exposed to wind) then
the convection coefficient appears as a very large number (1000) and the surface is exposed to the
Outdoor Wet-bulb Temperature rather than the Outdoor Dry-bulb Temperature.
IDF Example:
1.4.7 HeatBalanceAlgorithm
The HeatBalanceAlgorithm object provides a way to select what type of heat and moisture transfer
algorithm will be used for calculating the performance of the building’s surface assemblies. This
input controls the overall algorithm used for all the surfaces unless one or more of the SurfaceProp-
erty:HeatTransferAlgorithm:* objects are used to alter the selection for particular surfaces.
1.4.7.1 Inputs
1.4.7.1.1 Field: Algorithm
Four values are allowed to select which solution will be used.
• The ConductionTransferFunction selection is a sensible heat only solution and does not
take into account moisture storage or diffusion in the construction elements.
• The MoisturePenetrationDepthConductionTransferFunction selection is a sensible
heat diffusion and an inside surface moisture storage algorithm that also needs additional
1.4. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 49
moisture material property information. Sometimes, this is referred to as the Effective Mois-
ture Penetration Depth or EMPD. See the moisture material property object for additional
information and description of outputs:
– MaterialProperty:MoisturePenetrationDepth:Settings
– MaterialProperty:PhaseChange
– MaterialProperty:VariableThermalConductivity
– MaterialProperty:PhaseChangeHysteresis
– MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Settings
– MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:SorptionIsotherm
– MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Suction
– MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Redistribution
– MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Diffusion
– MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:ThermalConductivity
And, after careful perusal, you cannot find a solution as suggested in the error description. You
may then want to enter a higher number than the default for this field.
50 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.4.8 HeatBalanceSettings:ConductionFiniteDifference
This object is used to control the behavior of the Conduction Finite Difference algorithm for surface
heat transfer. The settings are global and affect how the model behaves for all the surfaces.
1.4.8.1 Inputs
Where
α is the thermal diffusivity of the material layer, in m2 /s
∆t is the length of the timestep in seconds.
C is a constant set by this field.
The default is 3. Typical values are from 1 to 3. Lower values for this constant lead to more
nodes and finer-grained space discretization.
1.4. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 51
1.4.9 ZoneAirHeatBalanceAlgorithm
The ZoneAirHeatBalanceAlgorithm object provides a way to select what type of solution algorithm
will be used to calculate zone air temperatures and humidity ratios. This object is an optional
object. If the default algorithm is used, this object is not required in an input file.
1.4.9.1 Inputs
1.4.9.1.1 Field: Algorithm
Three choices are allowed to select which solution algorithm will be used. The ThirdOrder-
BackwardDifference selection is the default selection and uses the third order finite difference
approximation to solve the zone air energy and moisture balance equations. The AnalyticalSo-
lution selection uses the integration approach to solve the zone air energy and moisture balance
equations. The EulerMethod selection uses the first order finite backward difference approxima-
tion to solve the zone air energy and moisture balance equations.
And, a default IDF example is shown below:
ZoneAirHeatBalanceAlgorithm , ThirdOrderBackwardDifference ; !- Algorithm
1.4.10 ZoneAirContaminantBalance
The ZoneAirContaminantBalance object provides a way to select which contaminant type will be
simulated. Although carbon dioxide is not considered as an indoor contaminant but it is used as an
indicator of indoor air quality in buildings. From modeling point of view EnergyPlus treats carbon
dioxide as a type of contaminant. In addition to carbon dioxide, a generic contaminant type model
was also added. This object is optional, only required in the input data file if the user wishes to
model contaminant concentration levels as part of their simulation.
52 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.4.10.1 Inputs
1.4.10.1.1 Field: Carbon Dioxide Concentration
Input is Yes or No. The default is No. If Yes, simulation of carbon dioxide concentration levels
will be performed. If No, simulation of carbon dioxide concentration levels will not be performed.
1.4.10.2 Outputs
The following output variables are available when Carbon Dioxide Concentration = Yes.
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Air CO2 Internal Gain Volume Flow Rate
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Air CO2 Concentration [ppm]
1.4.10.2.2 Zone Air CO2 Internal Gain Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This is the rate of carbon dioxide added to a zone from all types of sources or sinks, in m3 /s.
1.4.10.3 Outputs
The following output variable is available when Generic Contaminant Concentration = Yes.
HVAC,Average,Zone Generic Air Contaminant Generation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
HVAC,Average,Zone Air Generic Air Contaminant Concentration [ppm]
1.4. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 53
1.4.10.3.2 Zone Generic Air Contaminant Generation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This is the rate of generic air contaminant added (or subtracted) to a zone from all types of
sources or sinks.
1.4.11 ShadowCalculation
This object is used to control some details of EnergyPlus’s solar, shadowing and daylighting models.
There are two basic methods available for the calculations. In order to speed up the calculations,
shadowing calculations (sun position, etc.) for the default method are performed over a period of
days. Note that this value may be very important for determining the amount of sun entering your
building and by inference the amount of cooling or heating load needed for maintaining the building.
Though termed “shadowing” calculations, it in affect determines the sun position for a particular
day in a weather file period simulation. (Each design day will use the date of the design day object).
Even though weather file data contains the amount of solar radiation, the internal calculation of
sun position will govern how that affects various parts of the building. By default, the calculations
are done for every 20 days throughout a weather run period; an average solar position is chosen
and the solar factors (such as sunlit areas of surfaces) remain the same for that number of days.
When more integrated calculations are needed for controlling dynamic windows or shades, a second
method is available where solar calculations are performed at each zone timestep.
This object also allows setting up global flags to import and export exterior shading calculations
results. This enables importing pre-calculated results of the shading fractions for each exterior
building surface from external simulation tools. This also enables reusing the shading results for
parametric runs which usually do not change external shading.
The object also allows input to disable self-shading effect from exterior surfaces from all zones,
or from a subset of zones. Two flags are defined to enable the maximal flexibility of various inter-
pretation of self-shading: one to disable shading between zones of a same zone group, the other to
disable shading between different zone groups. The shading by exterior surfaces of the specified
zones groups will be bypassed.
1.4.11.1 Inputs
1.4.11.1.1 Field: Calculation Method
This field is used to control how the solar, shading, and daylighting models are calculated
with respect to the time of calculations during the simulation. The default and fastest method is
selected using the keyword AverageOverDaysInFrequency. A more detailed and slower method can
be selected using the keyword TimestepFrequency. The TimestepFrequency method must be used
for modeling dynamic fenestration and shading surfaces.
AverageOverDaysInFrequency is used in the previous field. Using this field will allow you to syn-
chronize the shadowing calculations with changes in shading devices. Using the default of 20 days in
each period is the average number of days between significant changes in solar position angles. For
these shadowing calculations, an “average” (over the time period) of solar angles, position, equation
of time are also used.
If ScheduledShading is chosen, the shading calculation results are imported during the
initialization of an EnergyPlus run with the schedule object defined by the SurfaceProp-
erty:LocalEnvironment object of this surface. If some exterior surfaces do not have their
SurfaceProperty:LocalEnvironment objects, no shading is assigned on those exterior surfaces.
If ImportedShading is chosen, a Schedule:File:Shading object is required to define the
external file that stores all shading calculation results. The results are imported altogether by
reading the Schedule:File:Shading object during initialization. The file explicitly defines the
mappings to the surfaces. If the data for a surface is not listed in the file, no shading is assigned
on this surface.
The default choice is InternalCalculation, indicating EnergyPlus will do the external shading
calculations and no external results will be used.
The sunlit fraction to overwrite accounts for the shading of both direct and sky diffuse solar
radiation caused by all exterior shadowing surfaces. In this case, shadow patterns on exterior
surfaces caused by detached shading, side-fins, overhangs, and exterior surfaces of all zones are
overwritten. The interior shading devices, such as window shades and blinds, should be further
calculated and applied after the importing.
1.4.11.1.7 Field: Output External Shading Calculation Results This fields indicates
whether or not (Yes or No)to save internal shading calculation results to an external file, which
can be imported back as needed. This file saves external sunlit fractions for all surfaces. If Yes is
chosen, hourly shading fraction of all surfaces will be exported as a CSV file, naming as ”output
file prefix + shading” (the default name is ”eplusshading.csv” if no output file prefix is defined).
Each column of the CSV file lists the annually calculated shading fraction of each surface with
time-step interval. It only writes data for each simulation day that shadows are calculated, e.g.
once every 20 days by default. If the results are intended to be reused to be imported back
using ImportedShading in Field: External Shading Calculation Method, the Calculation
Frequency should be set as one to write year-round hourly results. Design days are not included.
The default choice is No.
1.4.11.1.8 Field: Disable Self-Shading Within Shading Zone Groups This fields spec-
ifies during shading calculation, for all surfaces in a targeted Zone Group, whether or not (Yes or
No ) the self-shading effect by exterior surfaces of all zones within the target Zone Group is dis-
abled. If Yes, self-shading will be disabled from all exterior surfaces in a given Shading Zone Group
to surfaces within the same Shading Zone Group. If both Disable Self-Shading Within Shading
Zone Groups and Disable Self-Shading From Shading Zone Groups to Other Zones = Yes, then all
self-shading from exterior surfaces will be disabled.If only one of these fields = Yes, then at least
one Shading Zone Group must be specified, or this field will be ignored. Shading from Shading:*
surfaces, overhangs, fins, and reveals will not be disabled.
1.4.11.1.9 Field: Disable Self-Shading From Shading Zone Groups to Other Zones
This fields specifies during shading calculation, for all surfaces in a targeted Zone Group, whether
or not (Yes or No ) the self-shading effect from all exterior surfaces in the target Zone Group to
other zones is disabled. If Yes, self-shading will be disabled from all exterior surfaces in a given
Shading Zone Group to all other zones in the model. If both Disable Self-Shading Within Shading
Zone Groups and Disable Self-Shading From Shading Zone Groups to Other Zones = Yes, then all
56 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
self-shading from exterior surfaces will be disabled. If only one of these fields = Yes, then at least
one Shading Zone Group must be specified, or this field will be ignored. Shading from Shading:*
surfaces, overhangs, fins, and reveals will not be disabled.
1.4.11.1.10 Field: Shading Zone Group ZoneList Name The shading zones group speci-
fies group of zones which are controlled by the Disable Self-Shading fields. This field is extensible.
Examples of this object in IDF: (note this object must be unique in an IDF)
ShadowCalculation ,AverageOverDaysInFrequency ,1;
Note that the use of “1” in the examples is NOT the same as using DetailedTimestepIntegration
– “1” causes daily calculation of the sun position variables but does not change the shadowing
calculations more frequently than daily.
1.4.12 Output:Diagnostics
Sometimes, messages only confuse users – especially new users. Likewise, sometimes certain output
variables exist for only a certain condition but some take them at face value/name. Some features
may be very important but under certain instances cause problems. Thus, we have added the
diagnostic output object to be able to turn on or off certain messages, variables, and features
depending on conditions.
Both fields of the Output:Diagnostics command can accept all the applicable keys. More than
one object may be entered.
1.4.12.1 Inputs
1.4.12.1.1 Field: key1, key2
Allowable choices are:
DisplayAllWarnings – use this to get all warnings (except the developer warnings “Display-
ZoneAirHeatBalanceOffBalance”). This key sets all other display warning values to on.
DisplayExtraWarnings – use this to get all extra warnings. An example of an extra warning
is when a user enters a ceiling height or volume with the Zone object and EnergyPlus calculates
something significantly different based on the entered zone geometry.
DisplayUnusedSchedules – use this to have the unused schedules (by name) listed at the end
of the simulation.
DisplayUnusedObjects – use this to have unused (orphan) objects (by name) listed at the
end of the simulation.
DisplayAdvancedReportVariables – use this to be able to use certain advanced output
variables where the name may be misleading and you need to understand the concepts or reasons
for use. If you put in this field, then you will be able to report on these features. They are noted
in the descriptions of objects or output variables.
DisplayZoneAirHeatBalanceOffBalance – this is a developer diagnostic which you can turn
on, if you desire.
1.4. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 57
1.4.13 Output:DebuggingData
There may be times when a particular input file requires additional debugging. The Out-
put:DebuggingData object may be used to report all available node data (e.g., temperature, mass
flow rate, set point, pressure, etc.). The debug data is reported to the DBG text file. The debug
file first reports the node number and name, and then all available node information for each zone
time step (Ref. Timestep).
The 2 fields of the Output:DebuggingData object can accept either a 1 (turn on) or any other
value (turn off). Only one object may be entered.
1.4.13.1 Inputs
1.4.13.1.1 Field: Report Debugging Data
This field turns on debug reporting when a value of 1 is entered. Any other value (usually 0)
disables debug reporting.
In IDF use:
Output:DebuggingData ,
1,1;
1.4.14 Output:PreprocessorMessage
The Output:PreprocessorMessage object can be used by preprocessor programs to EnergyPlus for
passing certain conditions/errors that might not be detected by scripts executing the EnergyPlus
system of programs. This allows EnergyPlus to intercept problems and terminate gracefully rather
than the user having to track down the exact conditions.
There is no reason for a user to enter an Output:PreprocessorMessage object but you should
encourage interface developers to use this feature. More than one Output:PreprocessorMessage
objects may be entered. Of course, no preprocessor message objects are necessary if there is no
error information to be passed.
1.4.14.1 Inputs
1.4.14.1.1 Field: Preprocessor Name
The preprocessor name (e.g. EPMacro, ExpandObjects) is entered here. Case is retained so
that messages from EnergyPlus look very similar to what a preprocessor would produce.
Output:PreprocessorMessage ,
No Preprocessor Used , !- preprocessor name
Information , !- error severity
Illustrative Message , !- message line 1
No problems for processing; !- message line 2
1.4.15 ZoneCapacitanceMultiplier:ResearchSpecial
This object is an advanced feature that can be used to control the effective storage capacity of
the zone. Capacitance multipliers of 1.0 indicate the capacitance is that of the (moist) air in the
volume of the specified zone. This multiplier can be increased if the zone air capacitance needs to
be increased for stability of the simulation or to allow modeling higher or lower levels of damping
of behavior over time. The multipliers are applied to the base value corresponding to the total
capacitance for the zone’s volume of air at current zone (moist) conditions.
1.4. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 59
1.4.15.1 Inputs
1.4.16 SimulationControl
The input for SimulationControl allows the user to specify what kind of calculations a given Ener-
gyPlus simulation will perform. For instance the user may want to perform one or more of the sizing
calculations but not proceed to an annual weather file simulation. Or the user might have all flow
rates and equipment sizes already specified and desire an annual weather without any preceding
sizing calculations. Sizing runs, even for large projects, are quickly run – they do not add much to
the overall simulation time. The SimulationControl input allows all permutations of run selection
by means of 5 yes/no inputs.
60 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Only one SimulationControl object is permitted for each EnergyPlus input file. While a Simulation-
Control is needed to trigger sizing calculations, it is optional for other runs (design days, run periods).
The actions will still be shown in the eplusout.eio file (see Output Details and Examples Document).
1.4.16.1 Inputs
1.4.16.1.1 Field: Do Zone Sizing Calculation
Input is Yes or No. The default is No. Zone Sizing (see Sizing:Zone object) performs a special
calculation, using a theoretical ideal zonal system, and determines the zone design heating and
cooling flow rates and loads, saving the results in the zone sizing arrays.
1.4.17 HVACSystemRootFindingAlgorithm
The HVACSystemRootFindingAlgorithm object provides a way to select what type of solution
algorithm will be used to find a part load ratio or mass flow rate at given equipment/system load
in HVAC system simulations. This object is an optional object. If the default algorithm is used,
this object is not required in an input file.
1.4.17.1 Inputs
1.4.18 Meter:Custom
A custom meter allows the user to group variables or meters onto a virtual meter that can be used
just like a normal meter created by EnergyPlus. For consistency, the items being grouped must all
be similar. A Meter:Custom cannot reference another Meter:Custom.
1.4.18.1 Inputs
1.4.18.1.1 Field: Name
This is a user defined name for the custom meter. Names for custom meters cannot duplicate
internal meter names.
• Electricity
• NaturalGas
• PropaneGas
• FuelOil#1
• FuelOil#2
• Coal
• Diesel
• Gasoline
• Water
• Generic
• OtherFuel1
• OtherFuel2
Fuel types are generally self-explanatory. Generic is included for convenience when a custom
meter is defined that doesn’t quite fit the “fuel” categories. See the examples below.
1.4.19 Meter:CustomDecrement
The decrement custom meter is very similar to the custom meter specification but additionally
allows a predefined meter to be used as the “source” meter and the remaining items subtract from
that predefined meter.
1.4.19.1 Inputs
1.4.19.1.1 Field: Name
This is a user defined name for the custom meter. Names for custom meters cannot duplicate
internal meter names.
• Electricity
• NaturalGas
• PropaneGas
• FuelOil#1
• FuelOil#2
• Coal
• Diesel
• Gasoline
• Water
• Generic
• OtherFuel1
• OtherFuel2
Meter:Custom ,
MyBuildingElectric , !- Name
Electricity , !- Fuel Type
, !- Key Name #1
Electricity:Building; !- Output Variable or Meter Name #1
Meter:CustomDecrement ,
MyBuildingOther , !- Name
Electricity , !- Fuel Type
Electricity:Building , !- Source Meter Name
, !- Key Name #1
MyGeneralLights; !- Output Variable or Meter Name #1
For an example of “generic” fuel type, one might put the Building Infiltration Heat Loss & Heat
Gain on a set of custom meters:
Meter:Custom ,
Building Infiltration Heat Loss , !- Name
Generic , !- Fuel Type
*, !- Key Name 1
1.5. GROUP – COMPLIANCE OBJECTS 65
Meter:Custom ,
Building Infiltration Heat Gain , !- Name
Generic , !- Fuel Type
*, !- Key Name 1
Zone Infiltration Total Heat Gain Energy; !- Output Variable Name 1
One can then report these values the same way one reports other standard meters.
1.5.1 Compliance:Building
The Compliance:Building object describes parameters related to compliance to building standards,
building codes, and beyond energy code programs.
1.5.1.1 Inputs
1.5.1.1.1 Field: Building Rotation for Appendix G
Building Rotation for Appendix G allows for the building model to be rotated for use with
compliance such as ASHRAE 90.1 Appendix G. Appendix G requires the building to be rotated 0,
90, 180 and 270 degrees and the values averaged to establish baseline energy use. This input works
with relative or world coordinate systems.
An example from an IDF:
Compliance:Building ,
90; !- Building Rotation for Appendix G
1.6.1 Site:Location
The location class describes the parameters for the building’s location. Only one location is allowed.
Weather data file location, if it exists, will override any location data in the IDF. Thus, for an annual
simulation, a Location does not need to be entered.
66 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.6.1.1 Inputs
1.6.1.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field is used as an identifying field in output reports.
Most examples in this document include the comment lines that illustrate each data field’s value.
However, this is not necessary (though it makes the IDF more readable). The previous example
could also be:
Site:Location , DENVER COLORADO ,39.75 , -104.87 , -7 ,1610.26;
1.6.2 Site:VariableLocation
This variable location class describes the parameters for a moving and/or rotating building’s loca-
tion. The applications for this include:
The latitude, longitude, and orientation are all defined according to the same conventions as in
the regular “Site:Location” object.
1.6. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 67
1.6.2.1 Inputs
1.6.2.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field is used as an identifying field in output reports.
Schedule:File ,
LatitudeSchedule , !- Name
, !- Schedule Type Limits Name
TripLog.csv , !- File Name
2, !- Column Number
1; !- Rows to Skip at Top
Schedule:File ,
LongitudeSchedule , !- Name
, !- Schedule Type Limits Name
TripLog.csv , !- File Name
3, !- Column Number
1; !- Rows to Skip at Top
Schedule:File ,
OrientationSchedule , !- Name
, !- Schedule Type Limits Name
TripLog.csv , !- File Name
4, !- Column Number
1; !- Rows to Skip at Top
1.6.3 SizingPeriod:DesignDay
The design day input describes the parameters to effect a “design day” simulation, often used for
load calculations or sizing equipment. Using the values in these fields, EnergyPlus “creates” a
complete days’ worth of weather data (air temperatures, solar radiation, etc.) Normal operation
uses the default range multipliers as shown in Figure 1.6 though users may choose to input their
own multiplier schedule. Likewise, normal operation specifies one “humidity indicating condition”
68 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
which is used to calculate the humidity ratio at maximum temperature – this is used as the constant
humidity ratio for the entire day. Again, this can be overridden by specifying a relative humidity
schedule or requesting generation of an hourly wet-bulb temperature profile. Multiple design days
may be specified.
We refer you to the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals for philosophy of what parameters
are important for use as “design conditions” in sizing equipment.
In the install, the “design day files” are included for the weather file locations that are included
(weatherdata folder). All the design day definitions from the ASHRAE design conditions (latest pub-
lication date) are included, grouped by WMO region, on the main web site with the weather data.
https://www.energyplus.net/weather These files are in “macro” form but it is easy to cut and paste
the appropriate definition segments. These files include the location information as well as some loca-
tions have RunPeriodControl:DaylightSavingTime objects.
1.6.3.1 Inputs
1.6.3.1.1 Field: Name
This field, like the location name, is used simply for reporting and identification. This name
must be unique among the SizingPeriod names entered.
The multipliers are taken from the ASHRAE 2009 HOF. More explicitly, EnergyPlus creates
an air temperature for each timestep by using the entered maximum dry-bulb temperature in
conjunction with the entered daily range and the above multiplier values. The actual equation used
is shown below:
where
Tcurrent = Air temperature of current Hour of Day
TM ax = User supplied Max Dry-bulb Temperature
Trange = User supplied Daily Temperature Range
TM ultiplier = Range multiplier as shown on the above graph
The range multiplier values represent typical conditions of diurnal temperatures (i.e. the low
temperature for the day occurring about 5:00 AM and the maximum temperature for the day
occurring about 3:00 PM. Note that EnergyPlus does not shift the profile based on the time of solar
noon as is optionally allowed in ASHRAE procedures.
ASHRAE research indicates that dry-bulb and wet-bulb temperatures typically follow the same
profile, so EnergyPlus can use the default profile to generate humidity conditions (see Humidity
Indicating Type = WetBulbProfileDefaultMultipliers below).
If you specify MultiplierSchedule in this field, then you need to create a day schedule that
specifies a multiplier applied to the temperature range field (above) to create the proper dry-bulb
temperature range profile for your design day.
If you specify DifferenceSchedule in this field, then you need to create a day schedule that
specifies a number to be subtracted from dry-bulb maximum temperature for each timestep in the
day. Note that numbers in the delta schedules cannot be negative as that would result in a higher
maximum than the maximum previously specified.
If you specify TemperatureProfileSchedule in this field, then you need to create a day
schedule that specifies the actual dry-bulb temperatures throughout the day. You will not need
to include a Maximum Dry-Bulb Temperature in that field.
If you leave this field blank or enter DefaultMultipliers, then the default multipliers will be
used as shown in the “temperature range” field above.
1.6.3.1.24 Field: ASHRAE Clear Sky Optical Depth for Beam Irradiance (taub)
Optical depth for beam radiation, used only when Solar Model Indicator is ASHRAETau or
ASHRAETau2017. See next field.
1.6.3.1.25 Field: ASHRAE Clear Sky Optical Depth for Diffuse Irradiance (taud)
Optical depth for diffuse radiation, used only when Solar Model Indicator is ASHRAETau or
ASHRAETau2017. Taub and Taud values are tabulated by month for 5564 locations worldwide on
the CD that accompanies the ASHRAE HOF. ASHRAETau model Taub and Taud values are used
from the 2009 ASHRAE HOF and ASHRAETau2017 model Taub and Taud values are used from
either 2013 or 2017 ASHRAE HOF as needed.
SizingPeriod:DesignDay ,
Denver Centennial Golden Ann Htg 99% Condns DB - sched solar , !- Name
1, !- Month
13, !- Day of Month
WinterDesignDay , !- Day Type
-16, !- Maximum Dry -Bulb Temperature {C}
0.0, !- Daily Dry -Bulb Temperature Range {deltaC}
, !- Dry -Bulb Temperature Range Modifier Type
, !- Dry -Bulb Temperature Range Modifier Schedule Name
Wetbulb , !- Humidity Condition Type
-16, !- Wetbulb or DewPoint at Maximum Dry -Bulb {C}
, !- Humidity Indicating Day Schedule Name
, !- Humidity Ratio at Maximum Dry -Bulb {kgWater/kgDryAir}
, !- Enthalpy at Maximum Dry -Bulb {J/kg}
, !- Daily Wet -Bulb Temperature Range {deltaC}
83411. , !- Barometric Pressure {Pa}
2.3, !- Wind Speed {m/s}
180, !- Wind Direction {deg}
No , !- Rain Indicator
No , !- Snow Indicator
No , !- Daylight Saving Time Indicator
Schedule , !- Solar Model Indicator
Winter (1/13) Beam Solar ,!- Beam Solar Day Schedule Name
Winter (1/13) Diffuse Solar; !- Diffuse Solar Day Schedule Name
Schedule:Day:Hourly ,
Winter (1/13) Beam Solar ,
Any Number ,
0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,190 ,698 ,852 ,892 ,919 ,957 ,953 ,856 ,700 ,213 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0;
Schedule:Day:Hourly ,
Winter (1/13) Diffuse Solar ,
Any Number ,
0,0,0,0,0,0,0,35,118,116,92,65,40,14,0,0,5,0,0,0,0,0,0,0;
1.6.3.2 Outputs
For the schedule fields in the object, several output variables can be used:
• Zone,Average,Sizing Period Site Drybulb Temperature Range Modifier Schedule Value [deltaC]
• Zone,Average,Sizing Period Site Drybulb Temperature Range Modifier Schedule Value [C]
1.6.3.2.5 Sizing Period Site Drybulb Temperature Range Modifier Schedule Value []
1.6.3.2.6 Sizing Period Site Drybulb Temperature Range Modifier Schedule Value
[deltaC]
1.6.3.2.7 Sizing Period Site Drybulb Temperature Range Modifier Schedule Value [C]
This schedule value is active when any Design Day objects have / use the drybulb temperature
range modifier schedule option. For those objects that don’t have this option, the value will be
displayed as -999.
1.6.5 SizingPeriod:WeatherFileDays
The SizingPeriod:WeatherFileDays object describes using a selected period from the “attached”
weather file to be used in load calculations or sizing equipment. The period selected can be as small
as a single day or larger. Multiple periods may be input. While this object may be used for sizing
calculations, you should also consider using design days that represent more long term extremes or
conditions.
1.6.5.1 Inputs
1.6.5.1.1 Field: Name
This field allows for an assigned name for this run period so it can be tracked easily in sizing
and other outputs.
SizingPeriod:WeatherFileDays ,
Winter including Extreme Winter days , !- Name
1,25,2,1, !- Begin/end Day/Month
WinterDesignDay , !- Day type
No , !- Use Weather File Daylight Saving Period
No; !- Use Weather File Rain and Snow Indicators
1.6.6 SizingPeriod:WeatherFileConditionType
When the EPW files are created, a heuristic procedure identifies extreme and typical periods in
the actual weather file. This object will allow one of those periods to be selected for sizing or load
calculations (typically). Multiple objects may be input. While this object may be used for sizing
calculations, you should also consider using design days that represent more long term extremes or
conditions.
1.6.6.1 Inputs
1.6.6.1.1 Field: Name
This field allows for an assigned name for this run period so it can be tracked easily in sizing
and other outputs.
• SummerExtreme
• SummerTypical
• WinterExtreme
• WinterTypical
• AutumnTypical
• SpringTypical
• WetSeason
• DrySeason
• NoDrySeason
• NoWetSeason
• TropicalHot
• TropicalCold
SizingPeriod:WeatherFileConditionType ,
Extreme Summer Weather Period for Design , !- Name
SummerExtreme , !- Period Selection
SummerDesignDay , !- Day Type
No , !- Use Weather File Daylight Saving Period
No; !- Use Weather File Rain and Snow Indicators
SizingPeriod:WeatherFileConditionType ,
Extreme Winter Weather Period for Design , !- Name
WinterExtreme , !- Period Selection
WinterDesignDay , !- Day Type
No , !- Use Weather File Daylight Saving Period
No; !- Use Weather File Rain and Snow Indicators
1.6.7 RunPeriod
The RunPeriod object describes the elements necessary to create a weather file simulation. Multi-
ple run periods may be input. EnergyPlus accepts weather files in the special EnergyPlus weather
format (described briefly below this document and in more detail in the Auxiliary Programs doc-
ument). These files can describe Daylight Saving Time periods as well as holidays within their
definitions. Note that the weather file also may contain design condition information, typical and
extreme period information, ground temperatures based on air temperature calculations. The Run-
Period object allows the user to override the use of both the Daylight Saving Period (i.e. use or
ignore) and holidays that are embedded within the weather file. The object also describes the ele-
ments necessary to use a specially crafted (likely multiple year) weather file in a simulation. These
kinds of weather files and simulations might be useful for matching utility periods or simulating
several years of differing weather data. Leap days are required when using actual weather (see
“Treat as Actual Weather” below), but will be processed and used during leap years when the days
are present in the weather file and enabled in the weather file header. Note that when the weather
is treated as non-actual, the leap day will be skipped if it is not present, resulting in incorrect day
types for the remainder of the year.
1.6.7.1 Inputs
1.6.7.1.1 Field: Name
This optional field allows the RunPeriod to be named for output reporting. When left blank,
the weather file location name is used. Note that the weather file location name will be appended
to this name in tabular/summary reports.
is valid. If this field is not specified, then a year will be selected based upon other inputs (which,
in the case of the day of the week, may be defaulted).
using the value in this field. If the field is Yes, then specific date holidays that have a duration of
one day, will be “observed” on the Monday after the day. (Specific day holidays are such as January
1 – a day-month combination). If the field is blank or No, then the holiday will be shown on the
day-month as entered. As this option is listed at the RunPeriod, all applicable special days for the
run will use the rule – there is no override for individual special days.
Note that a blank or null field in this field will indicate No.
Note: EnergyPlus processed weather files available on the EnergyPlus web site: https://www.
energyplus.net/weather have neither special days specified nor daylight saving period. However, DDY
(Design Day) files produced from the ASHRAE Design Conditions that accompany the EPW files may
include a DaylightSavingPeriod object for certain locations.
RunPeriod ,
Multiple Years , !- Name
1, !- Begin Month
1, !- Begin Day of Month
2010, !- Begin Year
12, !- End Month
31, !- End Day of Month
, !- End Year
UseWeatherFile , !- Day of Week for Start Day
Yes , !- Use Weather File Holidays and Special Days
Yes , !- Use Weather File Daylight Saving Period
No , !- Apply Weekend Holiday Rule
Yes , !- Use Weather File Rain Indicators
Yes , !- Use Weather File Snow Indicators
Yes; !- Treat Weather as Actual
1.6.8 RunPeriodControl:SpecialDays
For weather file run periods, special day run periods can be described. These will always be in
effect for the selected days in the run period. Depending on the Use Special Days value in the
RunPeriod:* object(s), these can augment any special days included on the weather file.
Note: EnergyPlus processed weather files available on the EnergyPlus web site: https://www.
energyplus.net/weather have neither special days specified nor daylight saving period. However, DDY
(Design Day) files produced from the ASHRAE Design Conditions that accompany the EPW files may
include a DaylightSavingPeriod object for certain locations.
1.6.8.1 Inputs
1.6.8.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field is the title for the special day period. It must be unique among all the special
day period objects entered.
In the table, Month can be one of (January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August,
1.6. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 83
September, October, November, December). Abbreviations of the first three characters are also
valid.
In the table, Weekday can be one of (Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday,
Saturday). Abbreviations of the first three characters are also valid.
1.6.9 RunPeriodControl:DaylightSavingTime
Similar to a special day period, a daylight saving period may be entered to be applied to weather
file run periods. These will always be in effect, regardless of the value entered on the RunPeriod
object. Note that this period will always override any daylight saving period specified in a weather
file.
Note: EnergyPlus processed weather files available on the EnergyPlus web site: https://www.
energyplus.net/weather have neither special days specified nor daylight saving period.
Note: For EnergyPlus Output:Variable and Output:Meter reporting, the time stamps
are always in standard time. When daylight saving time is active, scheduled loads and
controls will shift one hour relative to standard time.
1.6.9.1 Inputs
1.6.9.1.1 Field: Start Date
This is the starting date of the daylight saving period. Note that it can be entered in several
formats as shown in Table 1.4. Date Field Interpretation.
Of course, these could not all appear in the same IDF as only one DaylightSavingPeriod ob-
ject per input file is allowed. More information on Daylight Saving Periods can be seen on the
web at: http://www.webexhibits.org/daylightsaving/. The ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals
[ASHRAE 2005] also contains information about daylight saving periods and their climatic infor-
mation now includes start and end dates for many locations.
1.6.10 WeatherProperty:SkyTemperature
Sky Temperature, or radiative sky temperature, is internally calculated by EnergyPlus using an
algorithm using horizontal infrared radiation from sky, cloudiness factors and current temperature.
The algorithm is fully described in the Engineering Reference document. For flexibility, the following
object can be entered to override the internal calculations. Much of the literature describes the sky
temperature as relative to either drybulb or dewpoint temperature.
1.6.10.1 Inputs
1.6.10.1.1 Field: Name
This name references an existing design period (i.e., SizingPeriod:DesignDay, SizingPe-
riod:WeatherFileDays, or SizingPeriod:WeatherFileConditionType) or run period (by name or
blank for all run periods).
WeatherProperty:SkyTemperature ,
DENVER_STAPLETON Ann Clg 1% Sky Temperature modifier , !- Name
ScheduleValue , !- Calculation Type
DaySchedule5; !- Schedule Name
Schedule:Day:Interval ,
DaySchedule5 , !- Name
Temperature , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Yes , !- Interpolate to Timestep
until: 24:00 , !- Time 1
5; !- Value Until Time 1
1.6.11 Site:WeatherStation
The Site:WeatherStation object is used to specify the measurement conditions for the climatic data
listed in the weather file. These conditions indicate the height above ground of the air temperature
sensor, the height above ground of the wind speed sensor, as well as coefficients that describe
the wind speed profile due to the terrain surrounding the weather station. There are necessary
correlations between the entries for this object and some entries in the Building object, specifically
the Terrain field.
Weather stations throughout the world (ref: WMO – World Meteorological Organization) take
their measurements at standard conditions:
• Weather station is in a flat, open field with little protection from the wind.
When using weather data from standard sources (e.g., TMY2, IWEC, TMY, or ASHRAE design
day data), it is not necessary to use the Site:WeatherStation object. However, if you are using
custom weather data or real-time weather data, you may need to read and understand the concepts
in the Site:WeatherStation object.
The measurement conditions at the weather station (i.e., the weather file) are used by En-
ergyPlus in conjunction with the Terrain field of the Building object, or optionally with the
Site:HeightVariation object (see below), to calculate the local variation in atmospheric proper-
ties as a function of height above ground. Outdoor air temperature decreases with height, while wind
speed increases with height. The algorithms for this calculation are in the Engineering Reference.
The Site:WeatherStation object is useful when working with a custom weather file that in-
cludes data that were not measured at the WMO standard conditions. For example, the weather
86 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
data could be measured on site, or on the roof top of a nearby building. The wind speed profile co-
efficients can be estimated from the table below or calculated beforehand using more sophisticated
techniques such as CFD modeling of the weather station terrain.
1.6. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 87
If the Site:WeatherStation object is omitted from the input file, the WMO standard mea-
surement conditions are assumed.
1.6.11.1 Inputs
1.6.11.1.1 Field: Wind Sensor Height Above Ground
The height [m] above ground for the wind speed sensor.
This would change if you had a different wind speed profile exponent or wind speed profile
boundary layer thickness at your site.
88 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.6.12 Site:HeightVariation
The Site:HeightVariation object is used to specify the local variation in atmospheric properties at the
site and should be used only if you require advanced control over the height-dependent variations
for wind speed and temperature. The coefficients set by this object are used by EnergyPlus, in
conjunction with the Site:WeatherStation object (see above), to calculate the local variation in
atmospheric properties as a function of height above ground. Outdoor air temperature decreases
with height, while wind speed increases with height. The local outdoor air temperature and wind
speed are calculated separately for all zones and surfaces, and optionally for outdoor air nodes
for which a height has been specified (see OutdoorAir:Node object). With the default inputs,
wind speed falls significantly at heights lower than the weather station measurement height, and
temperature increases slightly. The algorithms for this calculation are in the Engineering Reference.
There are necessary correlations between the entries for this object and some entries in the Building
object, specifically the Terrain field.
Note that using this object overrides the wind speed profile coefficients implied by the Terrain
field of the Building object even if the wind speed profile fields are left blank. The wind speed
profile coefficients can be estimated from the table above (see Site:WeatherStation) or calculated
beforehand using more sophisticated techniques such as CFD modeling of the site terrain.
1.6.12.1 Inputs
1.6.12.1.1 Field: Wind Speed Profile Exponent
The wind speed profile exponent for the terrain surrounding the site. The exponent can be
estimated from the table above (see Site:WeatherStation) or calculated beforehand using more
sophisticated techniques, such as CFD modeling of the site terrain. Note that using this object
overrides the wind speed profile coefficients implied by the Terrain field of the Building object
even if this field is left blank. This field can be set to zero to turn off all wind dependence on height.
The air temperature gradient coefficient [K/m] is a research option that allows the user to control
the variation in outdoor air temperature as a function of height above ground. The real physical
value is 0.0065 K/m. This field can be set to zero to turn off all temperature dependence on height.
Note that the Air Temperature Sensor Height in the Site:WeatherStation object should also be
set to zero in order to force the local outdoor air temperatures to match the weather file outdoor
air temperature. This change is required because the Site:WeatherStation object assumes an
air temperature gradient of 0.0065 K/m. This field can be set to zero to turn off all temperature
dependence on height.
Site:HeightVariation ,
0.22, !- Wind Speed Profile Exponent
370, !- Wind Speed Profile Boundary Layer Thickness {m}
0.0065; !- Air Temperature Gradient Coefficient {deltaC/m}
1.6.13 Site:GroundTemperature:BuildingSurface
Ground temperatures are used for the ground heat transfer model. There can be only one ground
temperature object included, and it is used as the outside surface temperature for all surfaces
with Outside Boundary Condition = Ground. The object is options if you have no surfaces with
ground contact. The outside surface temperature for individual surfaces can be specified using the
OtherSideCoefficients (ref: SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients) object that allows Toutside to
be set with a schedule. This permits using any number of different outside face temperatures in
addition to the ground temperature.
Caution: The “undisturbed” ground temperatures calculated by the weather converter should not
be used in building losses but are appropriate to be used in the Site:GroundTemperature:Shallow and
Site:GroundTemperature:Deep objects. The reasoning (for building losses) is that these values are
too extreme for the soil under a conditioned building. For best results, use the Slab or Basement
program described in this document to calculate custom monthly average ground temperatures (see
the Ground Heat Transfer section). This is especially important for residential applications and very
small buildings. If one of these ground temperature preprocessors is not used, for typical commercial
buildings in the USA, a reasonable default value is 2C less than the average indoor space temperature.
More information about determining appropriate ground temperatures is given in the Auxiliary
Programs document.
1.6.13.1 Inputs
1.6.13.1.1 Field: Month Temperature(s) – 12 fields in all
Each numeric field is the monthly ground temperature (degrees Celsius) used for the indicated
month (January = 1st field, February = 2nd field, etc.)
An IDF example:
Site:GroundTemperature:BuildingSurface ,19 ,20 ,20 ,20 ,20 ,20 ,20 ,20 ,20 ,20 ,20 ,20;
1.6.14 Site:GroundTemperature:Shallow
Site:GroundTemperature:Shallow are used by the Surface Ground Heat Exchanger (i.e. object:
GroundHeatExchanger:Surface). Only one shallow ground temperature object can be included.
90 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Note that the ground temperatures included in full year weather files may be suitable of being used
for the values in these fields – namely, the .5 m depth temperatures that are calculated for “undisturbed”
soil of “typical” conditions. However, you may wish to use some other change effect – based on the
weather conditions of the building location.
This object may be used for objects requiring “undisturbed” ground temperatures. In these
instances, the “name” input field is not required.
1.6.14.1 Inputs
1.6.14.1.1 Field: Month Temperature(s) – 12 fields in all
Each numeric field is the monthly surface ground temperature (degrees Celsius) used for the
indicated month (January = 1st field, February = 2nd field, etc.)
An IDF example:
Site:GroundTemperature:Shallow ,4,4,6,6,10,10,15,15,14,14,8,8;
1.6.15 Site:GroundTemperature:Deep
Site:GroundTemperature:Deep are used by the Pond Ground Heat Exchanger object (i.e. object:
GroundHeatExchanger:Pond). Only one deep ground temperature object can be included.
Note that the ground temperatures included in full year weather files may be suitable of being used
for the values in these fields – namely, the 4 m depth temperatures that are calculated for “undisturbed”
soil of “typical” conditions. However, you may wish to use some other change effect – based on the
weather conditions or special knowledge of the building location.
This object may be used for objects requiring “undisturbed” ground temperatures. In these
instances, the “name” input field is not required.
1.6.15.1 Inputs
1.6.15.1.1 Field: Month Temperature(s) – 12 fields in all
Each numeric field is the monthly deep ground temperature (degrees Celsius) used for the
indicated month (January = 1st field, February = 2nd field, etc.)
An IDF example:
Site:GroundTemperature:Deep , 16 ,16 ,16 ,16 ,16 ,16 ,16 ,16 ,16 ,16 ,16 ,16;
1.6.16 Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:FiniteDifference
Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:FiniteDifference may be used by all objects requiring “undis-
turbed” ground temperatures. The object uses a 1D finite difference heat transfer model which uses
the weather file to obtain surface boundary conditions. An annual simulation is run on the model
during it’s initialization until the annual ground temperature profile has reached steady periodic be-
havior. Once steady periodic behavior is reached, the ground temperatures are cached for retrieval
during the rest of the simulation.
1.6. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 91
1.6.16.1 Inputs
1.6.16.1.1 Field: Soil Thermal Conductivity
The thermal conductivity of the soil, in W/m-K.
1.6.17 Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach
Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach may be used by all objects requiring
“undisturbed” ground temperatures. It provides an undisturbed ground temperature based on
the correlation developed by Kusuda T. and P. Achenbach. 1965. The correlation uses three
parameters for ground temperature at the surface to define a correlation for undisturbed ground
temperatures as a function of depth and time. If one thinks of the ground temperature for a
given depth as a sinusoid, the average ground temperature, amplitude (average difference between
maximum ground temperature and minimum ground temperature), and the phase shift (day of
minimum surface temperature) are all required to define the correlation.
If the parameters are left blank they can be autocalculated by including soil surface temperatures
in the input using the Site:GroundTemperature:Shallow object. They can also be calculated by using
the CalcSoilSurfTemp preprocessor.
Kusuda, T. and P.R. Achenbach. 1965. ‘Earth Temperatures and Thermal Diffusivity at Selected
Stations in the United States.’ ASHRAE Transactions. 71(1): 61-74.
92 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.6.18 Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:Xing
Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:Xing may be used by all objects requiring “undisturbed”
ground temperatures. It provides an undisturbed ground temperature based on the correlation
developed by Xing, 2014. The correlation is a 5 parameter, 2 harmonic model based on the work
of Lord Kelvin (Thomson, 1862). The average soil surface temperature and two sets of surface
temperature amplitude and phase shift must be provided. Parameters for 4000+ international
locations can be found in Xing, 2014.
Thomson, W. 1862. ‘On the Reduction of Observations of Underground Temperature, with
applications to Professor Forbes’ Edinburgh Observations and the continued Calton Hill Series.’
Proceedings of the Royal Society of Edinburgh. IV: 342-346.
Xing, L. 2014. Estimations of Undisturbed Ground Temperatures using Numerical and Analyt-
ical Modeling. Ph.D. Diss. Oklahoma State University, Stillwater, OK.
1.6.18.1 Inputs
1.6.18.1.1 Field: Soil Thermal Conductivity
The thermal conductivity of the soil, in W/m-K.
1.6. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 93
1.6.19 Site:GroundDomain:Slab
This section documents the input object used to simulate ground coupled heat transfer with horizon-
tal building surfaces within EnergyPlus. Horizontal ground surfaces within EnergyPlus interact with
the Site:GroundDomain object by utilizing the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel object.
By utilizing this object, multiple horizontal surfaces can be coupled to the same Site:GroundDomain
object. Each horizontal surface may also have its unique ground domain, however, runtime will be
adversely affected.
Generally, there are two scenarios which Site:GroundDomain is equipped to model: in-grade
slabs, and on-grade slabs.
The in-grade slab option can be used to simulate situations when the upper slab surface is near
the ground surface level. For this situation, slab’s upper surface must interact with the zone via
an OSCM boundary. Due to this, the FloorConstruction object for the zone floor must include
a thin layer of the upper floor material. Horizontal and vertical insulation are modeled by the
GroundDomain in this scenario. Horizontal insulation can be modeled as covering the full horizontal
94 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
surface, or it can be limited to the perimeter regions only. In the latter case, the perimeter insulation
width must be specified.
The on-grade slab option can be used to simulate situations when the lower slab surface is
near the ground surface level. In this situation, the entire floor must be included within the
floor construction object. Vertical insulation is modeled by the GroundDomain in this scenario.
Horizontal insulation can only be modeled as covering the full horizontal surface.
1.6.19.1 Inputs
1.6.19.1.1 Field: Name
Alpha field used as a unique identifier for each ground domain.
Site:GroundDomain:Slab ,
IngradeCoupledSlab , !- Name
5, !- Ground Domain Depth
1, !- Aspect Ratio
5, !- Domain Perimeter Offset
1.8, !- Soil Thermal Conductivity
3200, !- Soil Density
836, !- Soil Specific Heat
30, !- Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction
50, !- Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction at Saturation
Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach , !- Type of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object
KATemps , !- Name of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object
1, !- Evapotranspiration Ground Cover Parameter
GroundCoupledOSCM , !- Name of Floor Boundary Condition Model
InGrade , !- Slab Location (InGrade/OnGrade)
Slab Material -In -grade , !- Slab Material Name
Yes , !- Horizontal Insulation
Slab Insulation , !- Horizontal Insulation Material Name
Perimeter , !- Full Horizontal or Perimeter Only
1, !- Perimeter insulation width
Yes , !- Vertical Insulation
Slab Insulation , !- Vertical Insulation Name
2, !- Vertical perimeter insulation depth from surface
Hourly; !- Simulation timestep
1.6.19.2 Outputs
The following output variables are available.
1.6.20 Site:GroundDomain:Basement
This section documents the input object used to simulate ground coupled heat transfer with
underground zones within EnergyPlus. Zone surfaces within EnergyPlus interact with the
Site:GroundDomain:Basement object by utilizing the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel
object. Two separate OSCM are required for the basement vertical and horizontal surfaces.
Vertical wall surfaces will interact with the first OSCM while the horizontal floor surface will
interact with the second OSCM. Basement floor and wall surfaces are constructed normally
by using the BuildingSurface:Detailed object, with the outside boundary condition being the
OtherSideConditionsModel for the basement floor or wall. The outside surface of the wall being
the interface between the ground domain and the EnergyPlus zone. Horizontal and vertical ground
insulation are simulated by the ground domain, and therefore should not be included in the wall
and floor construction objects.
Site:GroundDomain:Basement ,
100 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
CoupledBasement , !- Name
10, !- Ground Domain Depth {m}
1, !- Aspect ratio
5, !- Perimeter offset {m}
1.8, !- Soil Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
3200, !- Soil Density {kg/m3}
836, !- Soil Specific Heat {J/kg -K}
30, !- Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction {percent}
50, !- Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction at Saturation {percent}
Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach , !- Type of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object
KATemps , !- Name of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object
1, !- Evapotranspiration Ground Cover Parameter
BasementFloorOSCM , !- Name of Basement Floor Boundary Condition Model
Yes , !- Basement Horizontal Underfloor Insulation Present (Yes/No)
Basement Insulation , !- Basement Horizontal Insulation Underfloor Material Name
Full , !- Full Horizontal or Perimeter Only (Full/Perimeter)
, !- Perimeter width (m)
2.5, !- Depth of Basement Wall In Ground Domain {m}
BasementWallOSCM , !- Name of Basement Wall Boundary Condition Model
Yes , !- Basement Wall Vertical Insulation Present(Yes/No)
Basement Insulation , !- Basement Wall Vertical Insulation Material Name
2.5, !- Vertical insulation depth from surface (m)
Hourly; !- Domain Update interval. (Timestep , Hourly)
4; ! Mesh Density Parameter
1.6.20.1 Inputs
1.6.20.1.1 Field: Name
Alpha field used as a unique identifier for each basement domain. Multiple basements domains
can be simulated simultaneously, however, each domain must have a unique name. Additionally,
despite the ability to simulate multiple domains simultaneously, these domains do not interact with
each other and are treated as independent domains with boundary conditions given by the model
parameters below.
1.6.20.2 Outputs
The following output variables are available.
1.6.21 Site:GroundTemperature:FCfactorMethod
Site:GroundTemperature:FCfactorMethod is used only by the underground walls or slabs-on-grade
or underground floors defined with C-factor (Construction:CfactorUndergroundWall) and F-factor
(Construction:FfactorGroundFloor) method for code compliance calculations where detailed con-
struction layers are unknown. Only one such ground temperature object can be included. The
monthly ground temperatures for this object are close to the monthly outside air temperatures
delayed by three months. If user does not input this object in the IDF file, it will be defaulted to
the 0.5m set of monthly ground temperatures from the weather file if they are available. Entering
these will also overwrite any ground temperatures from the weather file in the F and C factor usage.
If neither is available, an error will result.
1.6.21.1 Inputs
1.6.21.1.1 Field: Month Temperature(s) – 12 fields in all
Each numeric field is the monthly ground temperature (degrees Celsius) used for the indicated
month (January = 1st field, February = 2nd field, etc.)
And, the IDF example:
Site:GroundTemperature:FCfactorMethod , 9.5, 3.5, -0.7, -1.7, -0.6, 3.6, 9.3, 14, 18.2, 22.7, 21.2, 16.8;
1.6.22 Site:GroundReflectance
Ground reflectance values are used to calculate the ground reflected solar amount. This fractional
amount (entered monthly) is used in this equation:
1.6.22.1 Inputs
1.6.22.1.1 Field: Month Average Ground Reflectance(s) – 12 fields in all
Each numeric field is the monthly average reflectivity of the ground used for the indicated month
(January = 1st field, February = 2nd field, etc.)
And use in an IDF:
Site:GroundReflectance ,
0.600 , !January Ground Reflectance
0.600 , !February Ground Reflectance
0.400 , !March Ground Reflectance
0.300 , !April Ground Reflectance
0.200 , !May Ground Reflectance
0.200 , !June Ground Reflectance
0.200 , !July Ground Reflectance
0.200 , !August Ground Reflectance
0.200 , !September Ground Reflectance
0.200 , !October Ground Reflectance
0.300 , !November Ground Reflectance
0.400; !December Ground Reflectance
1.6.23 Site:GroundReflectance:SnowModifier
It is generally accepted that snow resident on the ground increases the basic ground reflectance.
EnergyPlus allows the user control over the snow ground reflectance for both “normal ground
reflected solar” calculations (see above) and snow ground reflected solar modified for daylighting.
These are entered under this object and both default to 1 (same as normal ground reflectance – no
special case for snow which is a conservative approach).
1.6.23.1 Inputs
1.6.23.1.1 Field: Ground Reflected Solar Modifier
This field is a decimal number which is used to modified the basic monthly ground reflectance
when snow is on the ground (from design day input or weather data values).
Outputs will show both the inputs from the above object as well as monthly values for both
Snow Ground Reflectance and Snow Ground Reflectance for Daylighting.
1.6. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 105
1.6.24 Site:WaterMainsTemperature
The Site:WaterMainsTemperature object is used to calculate water temperatures delivered by under-
ground water main pipes. The mains temperatures are used as default, make-up water temperature
inputs for several plant objects, including: WaterUse:Equipment, WaterUse:Connections,
WaterHeater:Mixed and WaterHeater:Stratified. The mains temperatures are also used in
the water systems objects to model the temperature of cold water supplies.
Water mains temperatures are a function of outdoor climate conditions and vary with time of
year. A correlation has been formulated to predict water mains temperatures based on two weather
inputs:
These values can be easily calculated from annual weather data using a spreadsheet or from the
“.stat” file available with the EnergyPlus weather files at www.energyplus.net. Monthly statistics for
dry-bulb temperatures are shown with daily averages. The daily averages are averaged to obtain the
annual average. The maximum and minimum daily average are subtracted to obtain the maximum
difference. If the calculation method selected is ”CorrelationFromWeatherFile”, energyplus
calculates these two values internally from either “.stat” or weather file. For more information on
the water mains temperatures correlation, see the EnergyPlus Engineering Document.
Alternatively, the Site:WaterMainsTemperature object can read values from a schedule. This is
useful for measured data or when water comes from a source other than buried pipes, e.g., a river
or lake.
If there is no Site:WaterMainsTemperature object in the input file, a default constant value of
10 C is assumed.
1.6.24.1 Inputs
1.6.25 Site:Precipitation
The Site:Precipitation object is used to describe the amount of water precipitation at the building
site over the course of the simulation run period. Precipitation includes both rain and the equivalent
water content of snow. Precipitation is not yet described well enough in the many building weather
data files. So this object can be used to provide the data using Schedule objects that define rates
of precipitation in meters per hour.
A set of schedules for site precipitation have been developed for USA weather locations and
are provided with EnergyPlus in the data set called PrecipitationSchedulesUSA.idf. The user can
develop schedules however they want. The schedules in the data set were developed using En-
ergyPlus’ weather file (EPW) observations and the average monthly precipitation for the closest
weather site provided by NOAA. EPW files for the USA that were based on TMY or TMY2 include
weather observations for Light/Moderate/Heavy rainfall, however most international locations do
not include these observations. The values were modeled by taking the middle of the ranges quoted
in the EPW data dictionary. The assumed piecewise function is shown below.
Light = 0.0125
Amount (m/hour) = Moderate = 0.052 (1.6)
Heavy = 0.1
The values were inserted on hour by hour basis for the month based on the observations. Then
each month was rescaled to meet the average precipitation for the month based on the 30-year
average (1971-2000) provided by the NOAA/NCDC. Therefore, the flags in the EPW file match the
precipitation schedules for the USA. Note that summing the average monthly precipitation values
will not give you the average yearly precipitation. The resulting value may be lower or higher than
the average yearly value.
Once the typical rainfall pattern and rates are scheduled, the Site:Precipitation object provides
a method of shifting the total rainfall up or down for design purposes. Wetter or drier conditions
can be modeled by changing the Design Annual Precipitation although the timing of precipitation
throughout the year will not be changed.
1.6.25.1 Inputs
1.6.25.1.1 Field: Precipitation Model Type
Choose rainfall modeling options. Only available option is ScheduleAndDesignLevel.
1.6. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 107
1.6.26 RoofIrrigation
The RoofIrrigation object is used to describe the amount of irrigation on the ecoroof surface over
the course of the simulation runperiod. This object is used to provide irrigation data using Schedule
objects that define rates of irrigation in meters per hour. These schedules can be one of two types:
Schedule, or SmartSchedule.
1.6.26.1 Inputs
1.6.26.1.1 Field: Irrigation Model Type
Choose irrigation modeling options. Available options are Schedule and SmartSchedule. The
Schedule type is used to force an irrigation schedule regardless of the current moisture state of the
soil. The SmartSchedule type allows the precipitation schedule to be overridden if the current
moisture state of the soil is greater than 40% saturated.
IDF example:
RoofIrrigation ,
Schedule , !- Irrigation Model Type
IrrigationSchd; !- Schedule Name for Irrigation Rates
1.6.28 Site:SolarAndVisibleSpectrum
The SolarAndVisibleSpectrum object is used to specify the solar and visible spectrum data which
is used as spectral weighting function to calculate the window performance (transmittance and
absorptance) in EnergyPlus. This is a unique object, if it is missing from an IDF file, the default
(same as EnergyPlus version 8.0) solar and visible spectrum data will be used.
1.6.28.1 Inputs
1.6.28.1.1 Field: Name
This field specifies the name of the SolarAndVisibleSpectrum object.
1.6.29 Site:SpectrumData
The Site:SpectrumData object holds the user defined solar or visible spectrum data. For solar
spectrum, up to 107 pairs of (wavelength, spectrum) can be entered. For visible spectrum, up to
81 pairs can be entered.
1.6.29.1 Inputs
1.6.29.1.1 Field: Name
This field specifies the name of the SpectrumData object. The name must be unique across all
SpectrumData objects.
1.6.29.2 Outputs
Climate related variables appear in two places for EnergyPlus outputs. Certain objects that are
invariant throughout a simulation period have lines appear in the eplusout.eio file. For descriptions
of this reporting, please see the Output Details and Examples document.
1.6.29.3 Outputs
Variables related to ambient environment data are available at timestep and higher resolutions.
Below is a variable dictionary of these variables and subsequent definitions:
Note that these data values may be interpolated from “hour” points (ref: Weather Data Hourly
Interpolation). Most of the data values represent the “average” over the reporting resolution period.
( ) 14
Horizontal IR
Sky T emperature = − 273.15Conversion f rom Kelvin to Centigrade (1.7)
Sigma
1.6.29.3.14 Site Ground Reflected Solar Radiation Rate per Area [W/m2]
The ground reflected solar amount (W/m2 ) is derived from the Beam Solar, Diffuse Solar, User
specified Ground Reflectance (for month) and Solar Altitude Angle:
Groundreflectedsolar
= (Beamsolar · cos (SolarAltitudeAngle) + Diffusesolar) · Groundreflectancemonth (1.8)
where if the calculation returns a value < 0.0, then 0.0 will be reported.
The outdoor air dry-bulb temperature calculated at the height above ground of the zone centroid.
The outdoor air wet-bulb temperature calculated at the height above ground of the zone centroid.
The outdoor wind speed calculated at the height above ground of the zone centroid.
The outdoor air dry-bulb temperature calculated at the height above ground of the surface centroid.
The outdoor air wet-bulb temperature calculated at the height above ground of the surface centroid.
The outdoor wind speed calculated at the height above ground of the surface centroid.
When reporting for the OutdoorAir:Node object, this is the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature
calculated at the height above ground of the node, if height is specified in the input.
1.7. GROUP – SCHEDULES 117
1.7.2 ScheduleTypeLimits
Schedule types can be used to validate portions of the other schedules. Hourly day schedules,
for example, are validated by range – minimum/maximum (if entered) – as well as numeric type
(continuous or discrete). Annual schedules, on the other hand, are only validated for range – as the
numeric type validation has already been done.
1.7.2.1 Inputs
1.7.2.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field should contain a unique (within the schedule types) designator. It is referenced
wherever Schedule Type Limits Names can be referenced.
• Dimensionless
• Temperature
• DeltaTemperature
• PrecipitationRate
• Angle
• Convection Coefficient
• Activity Level
• Velocity
• Capacity
1.7. GROUP – SCHEDULES 119
• Power
• Availability
• Percent
• Control
• Mode
1.7.4 Schedule:Day:Hourly
The Schedule:Day:Hourly contains an hour-by-hour profile for a single simulation day.
1.7.4.1 Inputs
1.7.4.1.1 Field: Name
This field should contain a unique (within all DaySchedules) designation for this schedule. It is
referenced by WeekSchedules to define the appropriate schedule values.
1.7.5 Schedule:Day:Interval
The Schedule:Day:Interval introduces a slightly different way of entering the schedule values for a
day. Using the intervals, you can shorten the “hourly” input of the “Schedule:Day:Hourly” object to
2 fields. And, more importantly, you can enter an interval that represents only a portion of an hour.
Schedule values are “given” to the simulation at the zone timestep, so there is also a possibility of
“interpolation” from the entries used in this object to the value used in the simulation.
1.7.5.1 Inputs
1.7.5.1.1 Field: Name
This field should contain a unique (within all DaySchedules) designation for this schedule. It is
referenced by WeekSchedules to define the appropriate schedule values.
1.7.6 Schedule:Day:List
To facilitate possible matches to externally generated data intervals, this object has been included.
In similar fashion to the Schedule:Day:Interval object, this object can also include “sub-hourly”
values but must represent a complete day in its list of values.
1.7.6.1 Inputs
1.7.6.1.1 Field: Name
This field should contain a unique (within all day schedules) designation for this schedule. It is
referenced by week schedules to define the appropriate schedule values.
1.7.6.1.5 Field Value 1 (same definition for each value – up to 1440 (24*60) allowed)
1.7.8 Schedule:Week:Daily
1.7.8.1 Inputs
1.7.8.1.1 Field: Name
This field should contain a unique (within all WeekSchedules) designation for this schedule. It
is referenced by Schedules to define the appropriate schedule values.
1.7.8.1.2 Field: Schedule Day Name Fields (12 day types – Sunday, Monday, … )
These fields contain day schedule names for the appropriate day types. Days of the week (or
special days as described earlier) will then use the indicated hourly profile as the actual schedule
value.
An IDF example:
Schedule:Week:Daily , Week on Peak ,
Day On Peak ,Day On Peak ,Day On Peak ,
Day On Peak ,Day On Peak ,Day On Peak ,
Day On Peak ,Day On Peak ,Day On Peak ,
Day On Peak ,Day On Peak ,Day On Peak;
1.7.9 Schedule:Week:Compact
Further flexibility can be realized by using the Schedule:Week:Compact object. In this the fields,
after the name is given, a “for” field is given for the days to be assigned and then a dayschedule
name is used.
1.7. GROUP – SCHEDULES 123
1.7.9.1 Inputs
1.7.9.1.1 Field:Name
This field should contain a unique (within all WeekSchedules) designation for this schedule. It
is referenced by Schedules to define the appropriate schedule values.
1.7.10 Schedule:Year
The yearly schedule is used to cover the entire year using references to week schedules (which in
turn reference day schedules). If the entered schedule does not cover the entire year, a fatal error
will result.
1.7.10.1 Inputs
1.7.10.1.1 Field: Name
This field should contain a unique (between Schedule:Year, Schedule:Compact, and Sched-
ule:File) designation for the schedule. It is referenced by various “scheduled” items (e.g. Lights,
People, Infiltration) to define the appropriate schedule values.
1.7.10.1.3 Field Set (WeekSchedule, Start Month and Day, End Month and Day)
Each of the designated fields is used to fully define the schedule values for the indicated time
period). Up to 53 sets can be used. An error will be noted and EnergyPlus will be terminated if an
incomplete set is entered. Missing time periods will also be noted as warning errors; for these time
periods a zero (0.0) value will be returned when a schedule value is requested. Each of the sets has
the following 5 fields:
The following definition will generate an error (if any scheduled items are used in the simulation):
Schedule:Year ,MySchedule ,Fraction ,4,1,9,30;
1.7.11 Schedule:Compact
For flexibility, a schedule can be entered in “one fell swoop”. Using the Schedule:Compact object,
all the features of the schedule components are accessed in a single command. Like the “regular”
schedule object, each schedule:compact entry must cover all the days for a year. Additionally, the
validations for DaySchedule (i.e. must have values for all 24 hours) and WeekSchedule (i.e. must
have values for all day types) will apply. Schedule values are “given” to the simulation at the zone
timestep, so there is also a possibility of “interpolation” from the entries used in this object to the
value used in the simulation.
This object is an unusual object for description. For the data the number of fields and position
are not set, they cannot really be described in the usual Field # manner. Thus, the following
description will list the fields and order in which they must be used in the object. The name and
schedule type are the exceptions:
1.7. GROUP – SCHEDULES 125
1.7.11.1 Inputs
1.7.11.1.1 Field: Name
This field should contain a unique (between Schedule:Year, Schedule:Compact, and Sched-
ule:File) designation for the schedule. It is referenced by various “scheduled” items (e.g. Lights,
People, Infiltration) to define the appropriate schedule values.
If “Linear” is entered, then the value that is used is based on the linear interpolation between
successive values. With linear, if the value at 1:00 is 0.0 and the value at 2:00 is 10.0, with fifteen
minute timesteps, the value at 1:15 would be 2.5, the value at 1:30 would be 5.0 and the value at
1:45 would be 7.5.
! Schedule Continuous
Schedule:Compact ,
Continuous ,
on/off ,
Through: 12/31 ,
For: AllDays ,
Until: 24:00 , 1.0;
1.7.12 Schedule:Constant
The constant schedule is used to assign a constant hourly value. This schedule is created when a
fixed hourly value is desired to represent a period of interest (e.g., always on operation mode for
supply air fan).
1.7. GROUP – SCHEDULES 127
1.7.12.1 Inputs
1.7.12.1.1 Field: Name
This field should contain a unique name designation for this schedule. It is referenced by
Schedules to define the appropriate schedule value.
ScheduleTypeLimits ,
On/Off , !- Name
0, !- Lower Limit Value
1, !- Upper Limit Value
DISCRETE , !- Numeric Type
Availability; !- Unit Type
1.7.13 Schedule:File
At times, data is available from a building being monitored or for factors that change throughout
the year. The Schedule:File object allows this type of data to be used in EnergyPlus as a schedule.
Schedule:File can also be used to read in hourly or sub-hourly schedules computed by other software
or developed in a spreadsheet or other utility.
The format for the data file referenced is a text file with values separated by commas (or other
optional delimiters) with one line per hour. The file may contain header lines that are skipped. The
file should contain values for an entire year (8760 or 8784 hours of data) or a warning message will
be issued. Multiple schedules may be created using a single external data file or multiple external
data files may be used. The first row of data must be for January 1, hour 1 (or timestep 1 for
subhourly files).
Schedule:File may be used along with the FuelFactors object and TDV files in the DataSets
directory to compute Time Dependent Valuation based source energy as used by the California
Energy Commission’s Title 24 Energy Code. See Fuel Factor for more discussion on Time Dependent
Valuation.
Two optional fields: Interpolate to Timestep and Minutes per Item allow for the input of
sub-hourly schedules (similar to the Schedule:Day:List object).
1.7.13.1 Inputs
1.7.13.1.1 Field: Name
128 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
This field should contain a unique (between Schedule:Year, Schedule:Compact, and Sched-
ule:File) designation for the schedule. It is referenced by various “scheduled” items (e.g. Lights,
People, Infiltration, FuelFactors) to define the appropriate schedule values.
“No” is entered, then the value that occurs on the appropriate minute in the hour will be used as
the schedule value.
For example, if “yes” is entered and the minutes per item is 15 minutes (say a value of 0 for
the first 15 minutes, then .5 for the second 15 minutes) AND there is a 10 minute timestep for the
simulation: the value at 10 minutes will be 0 and the value at 20 minutes will be .25. For the same
input entries but “no” for this field, the value at 10 minutes will be 0 and the value at 20 minutes
will be .5.
A sub-hourly indication. Note that this is identical to an hourly file because there are 60 minutes
per item – the number of hours defaults to 8760 and the column separator defaults to a comma. If
the number of minutes per item had been, say, 15, then the file would need to contain 8760*4 or
35,040 rows for this item.
Schedule:File ,
elecTDVfromCZ06com , !- Name
Any Number , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
DataSets\TDV\TDV_2008_kBtu_CTZ06.csv , !- File Name
1, !- Column Number
4, !- Rows to Skip at Top
, !- Number of Hours of Data
, !- Column Separator
, !- Interpolate to Timestep
60; !- Minutes per Item
1.7.13.2 Outputs
An optional report can be used to gain the values described in the previous Schedule objects. This
is a condensed reporting that illustrates the full range of schedule values – in the style of input:
DaySchedule, WeekSchedule, Annual Schedule.
! will give them on hourly increments (day schedule resolution)
Output:Reports , Schedules , Hourly;
! will give them at the timestep of the simulation
Output:Reports , Schedules , Timestep;
This report is placed on the eplusout.eio file. Details of this reporting are shown in the Output
Details and Examples document.
130 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.7.14 Schedule:File:Shading
The Schedule:File:Shading object allows shading schedules to be imported altogether from a file
exported using ShadowCalculation Output External Shading Calculation Results. The object can
also be used to read in hourly or sub-hourly schedules of the sunlit fraction of all exterior surfaces
computed by other software or developed in a spreadsheet or other utility.
The format for the data file is Comma-separated values (CSV). The CSV file referenced is a
text file with values separated by commas (or other optional delimiters) with one line per timestep.
Each column stores the annual shading sunlit fraction schedule data of an exterior surface. The
sunlit fraction is only overwritten and used when the sun is above horizon at a certain time step. To
map to the surface, each column should name its column header exactly the same with the surface
name defined in the Surface:Detailed object. If any surface name is missing, the sunlit fraction
of this surface will be set to 1.0 during the run period, which means no shading will be assigned
for this surface, and a warning message will be issued. The file should contain values for an entire
year with the exact same number of rows as the total number of time steps in a year (number of
days in a year * number of hours per day * number of time steps per hour). Time step should be
consistent with the setting in the Timestep object. Otherwise, an error will be issued.
The first row of the CSV file should be the header, and the first column of the CSV file should
be the timestamp and is not imported.
With a Schedule:File:Shading object defined, the shading schedules for all exterior surfaces
(if defined) can be imported altogether without repeatedly defining Schedule:File objects.
1.7.14.1 Inputs
1.7.14.1.1 Field: File Name
This field contains the name of the file that contains the data for the shading schedules. The
field should include a full path with file name, for best results. The field must be ≤ 100 characters.
The file name must not include commas or an exclamation point. A relative path or a simple
file name should work with version 7.0 or later when using EP-Launch even though EP-Launch
uses temporary directories as part of the execution of EnergyPlus. If using RunEPlus.bat to run
EnergyPlus from the command line, a relative path or a simple file name may work if RunEPlus.bat
is run from the folder that contains EnergyPlus.exe.
Here is an IDF example:
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 131
Schedule:File ,
eplusshading.csv; !- Name of File
• Material
• Material:NoMass
• Material:AirGap
• Material:RoofVegetation
• Material:InfraredTransparent
Material is the “preferred” type of material. This requires knowledge of many of the thermal
properties of the material, but it allows EnergyPlus to take into account the thermal mass of
the material and thus allows the evaluation of transient conduction effects. Material:NoMass is
similar in nature but only requires the thermal resistance (R-value) rather than the thickness,
thermal conductivity, density, and specific heat. Note that using a simple R-value only material
forces EnergyPlus to assume steady state heat conduction through this material layer. Finally,
Material:AirGap should only be used for an air gap between other layers in a construction. This
type assumes that air is sufficiently lightweight to require only an R-value. In addition, since it is
not exposed to any external environment, surface properties such as absorptance are not necessary.
Material:RoofVegetation is used to help model “green roofs”. Material:InfraredTransparent is used
similarly to the NoMass materials. Each of these materials is described in more detail below.
There are several material additions that can be made to the basic material properties. These
additional material types are:
• MaterialProperty:MoisturePenetrationDepth:Settings
132 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:SorptionIsotherm
• MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Diffusion
• MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Settings
• MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Redistribution
• MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Suction
• MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:ThermalConductivity
• MaterialProperty:PhaseChange
• MaterialProperty:PhaseChangeHysteresis
These material property objects are used in conjunction with the basic material specification and
reference back to the name of the basic material type. Without the basic material type specified the
program, will give a severe error and terminate. For example, specifying the moisture materials and
changing the HeatBalanceAlgorithm to a moisture simulation will allow the moisture simulation to
take place.
1.8.3 Material
This definition should be used when the four main thermal properties (thickness, conductivity,
density, and specific heat) of the material are known. This syntax is used to describe opaque
construction elements only.
When a Material is used for the Construction of a building surface, care should be taken to
not attempt to model assemblies that were not included in the intended scope of applicability for
the underlying heat transfer models. The building surface models are for normal applications
to building energy efficiency where the main focus is on assemblies with some thermal resistance.
Extremely thin and/or highly conductive material layers should be neglected from the Construction
rather than included because they will not contribute to the assembly’s overall thermal resistance
or heat capacity. For some cases, thin and/or highly conductive materials are a serious problem
for the heat transfer modeling and the values for thickness, conductivity, density and specific heat
are checked for appropriateness. This check calculates the Material’s thermal diffusivity from the
inputs for conductivity, density, and specific heat and compares it to a maximum threshold of 1.E-5
(m2 /s). If the diffusivity is above this threshold, then the program checks if the layer is sufficiently
thick and may issue a warning if it is too thin and highly conductive.
The absorptance values in this object impart surface properties to the construction and should
be applied to the thermally significant inner and outer layers in the overall assembly. Attempting
to trick the program by modeling thin “paint” layers to apply surface properties is not a good idea;
the models were not intended to support such strategies.
1.8.3.1 Inputs
1.8.3.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a unique reference name that the user assigns to a particular material. This name
can then be referred to by other input data (ref: Construction object).
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 133
balances (both inside and outside as appropriate). If solar reflectance (or reflectivity) data is
available, then absorptance is equal to 1.0 minus reflectance (for opaque materials). Values for this
field must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value for this field is 0.7.
1.8.4 Material:NoMass
Use this definition when only the thermal resistance (R value) of the material is known. This object
is used to describe opaque construction elements.
1.8.4.1 Inputs
1.8.4.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a unique reference name that the user assigns to a particular material. This name
can then be referred to by other input data (ref: Construction object).
1.8.5 Material:InfraredTransparent
A Infrared Transparent surface is similar to a resistance-only surface. The idd object for this type
of surface is shown below. The surface will actually participate in the transfer of visible and solar
radiation by doing a wavelength transformation and making all short wave length radiation that
is incident on the surface into long wave length radiation and having it participate in the long
wavelength radiant exchange. Note the ConvectionCoefficient instructions that follow the
Infrared Transparent construction object below.
136 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.8.5.1 Inputs
Material:InfraredTransparent ,
IRTMaterial1; !- Name
Construction ,
IRTSurface , !- Name
IRTMaterial1; !- Outside Layer
SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients ,
Bottom:Top , !- SurfaceName
Outside , !- Convection Type 1
value , !- Convection Value Type 1
0.1, !- Convection value 1 {W/m2 -K}
, !- Convection Schedule 1
Inside , !- Convection Type 2
value , !- Convection Value Type 2
0.1; !- Convection value 2 {W/m2 -K}
SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients ,
SecondLevel:Bottom , !- SurfaceName
Outside , !- Convection Type 1
value , !- Convection Value Type 1
0.1, !- Convection value 1 {W/m2 -K}
, !- Convection Schedule 1
Inside , !- Convection Type 2
value , !- Convection Value Type 2
0.1; !- Convection value 2 {W/m2 -K}
SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients ,
SecondLevel:Top , !- SurfaceName
Outside , !- Convection Type 1
value , !- Convection Value Type 1
0.1, !- Convection value 1 {W/m2 -K}
, !- Convection Schedule 1
Inside , !- Convection Type 2
value , !- Convection Value Type 2
0.1; !- Convection value 2 {W/m2 -K}
SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients ,
ThirdLevel:Bottom , !- SurfaceName
Outside , !- Convection Type 1
value , !- Convection Value Type 1
0.1, !- Convection value 1 {W/m2 -K}
, !- Convection Schedule 1
Inside , !- Convection Type 2
value , !- Convection Value Type 2
0.1; !- Convection value 2 {W/m2 -K}
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 137
1.8.6 Material:AirGap
This material is used to describe the air gap in an opaque construction element. Glass elements use
a different property (WindowGas) to describe the air between two glass layers.
1.8.6.1 Inputs
1.8.6.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a unique reference name that the user assigns to a particular material. This name
can then be referred to by other input data (ref: Construction object).
1.8.7 MaterialProperty:MoisturePenetrationDepth:Settings
This material is used to describe the nine moisture material properties that are used in the EMPD
(Effective Moisture Penetration Depth) heat balance solution algorithm. The EMPD algorithm
is a simplified, lumped moisture model that simulates moisture storage and release from interior
surfaces. The model uses convective mass transfer coefficients that are determined by existing heat
and mass transfer relationships, e.g. the Lewis relation. The EMPD model includes two fictitious
layers of material with uniform moisture content: a surface layer, which accounts for short-term
moisture buffering, and a deep layer, which accounts for more slowly responding moisture buffering.
The model calculates the moisture transfer between the air and the surface layer and between the
surface layer and the deep layer. This moisture transfer impacts the zone humidity, and also impacts
the zone temperature through latent-to-sensible conversion from the heat of adsorption.
This moisture model is used when the appropriate EMPD moisture materials are specified and
the Solution Algorithm parameter is set to MoisturePenetrationDepthConductionTransferFunction.
1.8.7.1 Inputs
1.8.7.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a unique reference name that the user assigns to a particular material. This name
can then be referred to by other input data (ref: Construction object).
δperm,air
µ=
δperm
where δperm,air is the permeability of water vapor in air [kg/m-s-Pa], and δperm is the permeability
of water vapor in the material. The permeability of water vapor in air can be estimated as:
2 × 10−7 · T 0.81
δperm,air =
Pambient
where T is the temperature [C] and Pambient the ambient atmospheric pressure [Pa].
u = a · ϕb + c · ϕd
where
a, b, c, d = Coefficients to define the relationship between the material’s moisture content and
the surface air relative humidity
u = Moisture content defined as the mass fraction of water contained in a material, per mass of
dry material [kg/kg]
ϕ = Surface air relative humidity [0 to 1],
If this field is left blank or set to autocalculate, the above equation will be used to calculate
the surface layer penetration depth assuming a τsurf of 24 hours. To use a period different than
24 hours, the equation above can be used to calculate the penetration depth based on a different
value of τsurf . The penetration depth can also be entered as an empirical value, as in Woods and
Winkler, 2016. If calculating dEM P D,surf , the assumed value of τsurf should not be less than 4x the
simulation timestep to ensure an accurate and stable solution.
This set of inputs is for gypsum board with density 750 kg/mˆ3. This also assumes 2 coats of
latex paint:
MaterialProperty: MoisturePenetrationDepth :Settings ,
Concrete , !- Name
6.0, !- Water Vapor Diffusion Resistance Factor {dimensionless}
0.0065 , !- Moisture Equation Coefficient a {dimensionless}
0.65, !- Moisture Equation Coefficient b {dimensionless}
0.022 , !- Moisture Equation Coefficient c {dimensionless}
10, !- Moisture Equation Coefficient d {dimensionless}
0.021 , !- Surface Layer Penetration Depth {m}
0.08, !- Deep Layer Penetration Depth {m}
0.0003 , !- Coating Layer Thickness {m}
6000; !- Coating Layer Water Vapor Diffusion Resistance Factor {dimensionless}
Finally, here are values representing the empirical whole-house inputs from Woods et al., 2014
(see Engineering Reference). Density is 800 kg/mˆ3:
MaterialProperty: MoisturePenetrationDepth :Settings ,
Concrete , !- Name
8.0, !- Water Vapor Diffusion Resistance Factor {dimensionless}
0.012 , !- Moisture Equation Coefficient a {dimensionless}
1, !- Moisture Equation Coefficient b {dimensionless}
0, !- Moisture Equation Coefficient c {dimensionless}
1, !- Moisture Equation Coefficient d {dimensionless}
0.019 , !- Surface Layer Penetration Depth {m}
0.113 , !- Deep Layer Penetration Depth {m}
0, !- Coating Layer Thickness {m}
1; !- Coating Layer Water Vapor Diffusion Resistance Factor {dimensionless}
Other materials inputs can be estimated using the equations above and material properties
from a variety of sources, such as Kumaran, 1996, the WUFI simulation software, or the ASHRAE
1018-RP report.
1.8.7.2 Outputs
1.8.7.2.1 EMPD Surface Inside Face Water Vapor Density [kg/m3]
The vapor density at the inside face of the surface, where the EMPD moisture balance solution
algorithm is applied. This is the actual surface, separated from the zone air only by the convective
mass transfer coefficient.
Units are kg of water per cubic meter of air.
1.8.8 MaterialProperty:PhaseChange
Advanced/Research Usage: This material is used to describe the temperature dependent mate-
rial properties that are used in the Conduction Finite Difference solution algorithm. This conduction
model is done when the appropriate materials are specified and the Solution Algorithm parame-
ter is set toConductionFiniteDifference. This permits simulating temperature dependent thermal
conductivity and phase change materials (PCM) in EnergyPlus.
1.8.8.1 Inputs
1.8.8.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a regular material name specifying the material with which this additional temper-
ature dependent property information will be associated.
where:
ko is the 20C value of thermal conductivity(normal idf input)
k1 is the change in conductivity per degree temperature difference from 20C
HeatBalanceAlgorithm ,
ConductionFiniteDifference ;
Timestep ,
12;
Material ,
E1 - 3 / 4 IN PLASTER OR GYP BOARD , !- Name
Smooth , !- Roughness
1.9050000E-02, !- Thickness {m}
0.7264224 , !- Conductivity {W/m-K}
1601.846 , !- Density {kg/m3}
836.8000 , !- Specific Heat {J/kg -K}
0.9000000 , !- Thermal Absorptance
0.9200000 , !- Solar Absorptance
0.9200000; !- Visible Absorptance
MaterialProperty:PhaseChange ,
E1 - 3 / 4 IN PLASTER OR GYP BOARD , !- Name
0.0, !- Temperature coefficient ,thermal conductivity(W/m K2)
-20., !- Temperature 1, C
0.01, !- Enthalpy 1 at –20C, (J/kg)
20., !- Temperature 2, C
33400 , !- Enthalpy 2, (J/kg)
20.5, !- temperature 3, C
70000 , !- Enthalpy 3, (J/kg)
100., !- Temperature 4, C
137000; !- Enthalpy 4, (J/kg)
1.8.9 MaterialProperty:PhaseChangeHysteresis
This object is used to describe an advanced level of physics belonging to phase change materials
used in building envelopes. The base phase change input object describes a single process curve
whereby a material moves from a crystallized to liquid state and back. This input object adds a
hysteresis effect, allowing the melting/freezing process to follow different curves, representing an
effect that is commonly seen in actual building envelope phase change material applications. This
object also allows users to enter characteristic properties of the processes instead of a detailed
temperature/enthalpy curve, making it more amenable for studies in which the user does not have
the detailed test data required to generate the temperature/enthalpy curve.
144 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.8.9.1 Inputs
The MaterialProperty:PhaseChangeHysteresis object includes the following inputs. For the charac-
teristic curve properties, see the engineering reference.
1.8.9.1.2 Field: Latent Heat during the Entire Phase Change Process
This is the total amount of latent heat absorbed or discharged during the transition from solid
to liquid or back, in Joules. The shapes of the enthalpy curves differ based on direction, but the
total amount of energy from one state to the other does not.
HeatBalanceAlgorithm , ConductionFiniteDifference ;
Timestep , 12;
Material ,
E1 - 3 / 4 IN PLASTER OR GYP BOARD , !- Name
Smooth , !- Roughness
1.9050000E-02, !- Thickness {m}
0.7264224 , !- Conductivity {W/m-K}
1601.846 , !- Density {kg/m3}
836.8000 , !- Specific Heat {J/kg -K}
0.9000000 , !- Thermal Absorptance
0.9200000 , !- Solar Absorptance
0.9200000; !- Visible Absorptance
MaterialProperty:PhaseChangeHysteresis ,
E1 - 3 / 4 IN PLASTER OR GYP BOARD , !- Name
10000 , !- Latent Heat of Fusion {J/kg}
0.5, !- Liquid State Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
1500, !- Liquid State Density {kg/m3}
2000, !- Liquid State Specific Heat {J/kg -K}
1, !- High Temperature Difference of Melting Curve {deltaC}
20, !- Peak Melting Temperature {C}
1, !- Low Temperature Difference of Melting Curve {deltaC}
0.5, !- Solid State Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
1600, !- Solid State Density {kg/m3}
2000, !- Solid State Specific Heat {J/kg -K}
1, !- High Temperature Difference of Freezing Curve {deltaC}
23, !- Peak Freezing Temperature {C}
1; !- Low Temperature Difference of Freezing Curve {deltaC}
1.8.10 MaterialProperty:VariableThermalConductivity
This object is used to describe the temperature dependent material properties that are used in the
CondFD (Conduction Finite Difference) solution algorithm. This conduction model is used when
the appropriate CondFD materials are specified and the Solution Algorithm parameter is set to
condFD.
146 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.8.10.1 Inputs
1.8.10.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a regular material name specifying the material with which this additional temper-
ature dependent property information will be associated.
HeatBalanceAlgorithm ,
ConductionFiniteDifference ;
Timestep ,
12;
Material ,
PCMPlasterBoard , !- Name
Smooth , !- Roughness
1.9050000E-02, !- Thickness {m}
4.2, !- Conductivity {W/m-K}
1601.846 , !- Density {kg/m3}
836.8000 , !- Specific Heat {J/kg -K}
0.9000000 , !- Thermal Absorptance
0.9200000 , !- Solar Absorptance
0.9200000; !- Visible Absorptance
MaterialProperty:VariableThermalConductivity ,
PCMPlasterBoard , !- Name
0, !- Temperature 1 {C}
4.2, !- Thermal Conductivity 1 {W/m-K}
22, !- Temperature 2 {C}
4.2, !- Thermal Conductivity 2 {W/m-K}
22.1, !- Temperature 3 {C}
2.5, !- Thermal Conductivity 3 {W/m-K}
100, !- Temperature 4 {C}
2.5; !- Thermal Conductivity 4 {W/m-K}
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 147
1.8.10.2 Outputs
The Conduction Finite Difference solution algorithm uses a finite difference solution technique,
the surfaces are divided into a nodal arrangement. The only output specific to Conduction Finite
Difference solution (that is not include in other surface outputs) is node temperatures.
The following output variables are applicable to all opaque heat transfer surfaces when using
Solution Algorithms ConductionFiniteDifference:
1.8.10.2.4 CondFD Surface Heat Capacitance Outer Half Node <X> [W/m2-K]
1.8.10.2.5 CondFD Surface Heat Capacitance Inner Half Node <X> [W/m2-K]
These will output the half-node heat capacitance in surfaces being simulated with Conduc-
tionFiniteDifference. The key values for this output variable are the surface name. The nodes are
numbered from outside to inside of the surface. The full listing will appear in the RDD file. For this
output, the heat capacitance is defined as the product of specific heat, density, and node thickness.
Zero is reported for R-layer half-nodes and for undefined half-nodes. There is no outer half-node
for Node 1 which is the outside face of the surface, and there is no inner half-node for Node N
which is the inside face of the surface. CondFD Surface Heat Capacitance is only available with
Output:Diagnostics,DisplayAdvancedReportVariables.
1.8.11 MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Settings
Advanced/Research Usage: This object is used to describe two of the seven additional ma-
terial properties needed for the CombinedHeatAndMoistureFiniteElement heat balance solution
algorithm. The settings object is used when the solutions algorithm is set to CombinedHeatAnd-
MoistureFiniteElement and the appropriate material properties are assigned to each material. This
148 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
permits the simulation of the moisture dependent thermal properties of the material as well as the
transfer of moisture through, into and out of the material into the zone or exterior.
In addition to the Porosity and Initial Water content properties described here, five additional
properties, described by tabulated relationships between variables, are required. These properties
are;
• MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:SorptionIsotherm
• MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Suction
• MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Redistribution
• MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Diffusion
• MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:ThermalConductivity
All materials in a construction are required to have all material properties defined for HAMT
to work.
Within the MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Settings object the following fields are
defined.
1.8.11.1 Inputs
1.8.11.1.1 Field: Material Name
This field is a unique reference name that the user assigns to a particular material. This name
can then be referred to by other input data.
1.8.12 MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:SorptionIsotherm
Advanced/Research Usage: This material property is used in conjunction with the Combined-
HeatAndMoistureFiniteElement heat balance solution algorithm.
The Isotherm data relates the moisture, or water content [kg/m3] of a material with the relative
humidity (RH). The water content is expected to increase as relative humidity increases, starting
at zero content at 0.0relative humidity fraction and reaching a maximum, defined by the porosity,
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 149
at 1.0 relative humidity fraction, which corresponds to 100% relative humidity. Relative humidities
are entered as fraction for this object ranging from 0.0 to 1.0. These two extremes (0.0 and 1.0) are
automatically set by the HAMT solution. However, if they are entered they will be used as extra
data points. Data should be provided with increasing RH and moisture content up to as high an
RH as possible to provide a stable solution. One possible reason for the following error message
may be that a material has a very rapid increase in water content for a small change in RH, which
can happen if the last entered water content point is at a low RH and the material has a very high
porosity.
** Warning ** HeatAndMoistureTransfer: Large Latent Heat for Surface ROOF
Another potential reason for this error being generated is the use of inappropriate values for
Vapor Transfer Coefficients. See the SurfaceProperties:VaporCoefficients object in the Advanced
Surface Concepts group.
1.8.12.1 Inputs
1.8.12.1.1 Field: Material Name
This field is a unique reference name that the user assigns to a particular material. This name
can then be referred to by other input data.
1.8.13 MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Suction
Advanced/Research Usage:This material property is used in conjunction with the Combined-
HeatAndMoistureFiniteElement heat balance solution algorithm.
The suction data relates the liquid transport coefficient, under suction, to the water content
of a material. A data point at zero water content is required. The liquid transport coefficient at
the highest entered water content value is used for all liquid transport coefficient values above this
water content. These coefficients are used by HAMT when the rain flag is set in the weather file.
1.8.13.1 Inputs
1.8.13.1.1 Field: Material Name
This field is a unique reference name that the user assigns to a particular material. This name
can then be referred to by other input data.
1.8.14 MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Redistribution
Advanced/Research Usage:This material property is used in conjunction with the Combined-
HeatAndMoistureFiniteElement heat balance solution algorithm.
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 151
The redistribution data relates the liquid transport coefficient to the water content of a material
under normal conditions. A data point at zero water content is required. The liquid transport
coefficient at the highest entered water content value is used for all liquid transport coefficient
values above this water content. These coefficients are used by the Heat and Moisture Transfer
algorithm when the rain flag is NOT set in the weather file.
1.8.14.1 Inputs
1.8.15 MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Diffusion
Advanced/Research Usage:This material property is used in conjunction with the Combined-
HeatAndMoistureFiniteElement heat balance solution algorithm.
The MU data relates the vapor diffusion resistance factor (dimensionless) to the relative humidity
as fraction(RH). A data point at zero RH is required. The vapor diffusion resistance factor at the
highest entered relative humidity (RH) value is used for all vapor diffusion resistance factor values
above this RH. The relative humidity maximum value in fraction is 1.0.
152 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.8.15.1 Inputs
1.8.15.1.1 Field: Material Name
This field is a unique reference name that the user assigns to a particular material. This name
can then be referred to by other input data.
1.8.16 MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:ThermalConductivity
Advanced/Research Usage:This material property is used in conjunction with the Combined-
HeatAndMoistureFiniteElement heat balance solution algorithm.
The thermal data relates the thermal conductivity [W/m-K] of a material to the moisture or
water content [kg/m3]. A data point at zero water content is required. The thermal conductivity
at the highest entered water content value is used for all thermal conductivity values above this
water content. If this object is not defined for a material then the algorithm will use a constant
value entered in the Material object for all water contents.
1.8.16.1 Inputs
1.8.16.1.1 Field: Material Name
This field is a unique reference name that the user assigns to a particular material. This name
can then be referred to by other input data.
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 153
Detailed profile data for the variables Temperature [C], Relative Humidity [%] and Water Content
[kg/kg] within each surface can also be reported. To calculate the heat and moisture transfer
through surfaces HAMT splits up surfaces into discrete cells. Each cell is composed of a single
material and has a position within the surface. HAMT automatically assigns cells to construction
objects so that there are more cells closer to boundaries between materials and also at the “surfaces”
of the surface. It is not possible for users to define their own cells.
Each surface is made from a particular construction. The construction-surface relationship is
output by HAMT to the eplusout.eio file with the following format. The output also contains the
HAMT cell origins and cell number for each surface combination. The coordinate system origin is
defined as the exterior surface of the construction.
! <HAMT cells >, Surface Name , Construction Name , Cell Numbers
! <HAMT origins >, Surface Name , Construction Name , Cell origins (m)
HAMT cells , FLOOR ,FLOOR , 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16,
17
HAMT origins ,FLOOR ,FLOOR , 0.0000000 , 0.0122726 , 0.0601616 , 0.1512518 , 0.2766268 , 0.4240140 , 0.5789860 ,
0.7263732 , 0.8517482 , 0.9428384 , 0.9907274 , 1.0035729 , 1.0056459 , 1.0090000 , 1.0123541 , 1.0144271 ,
1.0150000
Users can select any one of the Temperature, Relative Humidity or Water Content variables for
any cell to be reported, using the following naming scheme for the output variable.
1.8.18 WindowMaterial:Glazing
In the following, for exterior windows, “front side” is the side of the glass closest to the outside air
and “back side” is the side closest to the zone the window is defined in. For interzone windows,
“front side” is the side closest to the zone adjacent to the zone the window is defined in and “back
side” is the side closest to the zone the window is defined in.
1.8.18.1 Inputs
1.8.18.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the glass layer. It corresponds to a layer in a window construction.
1.8.18.1.15 Field: Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
This is a factor that corrects for the presence of dirt on the glass. The program multiplies the
fields “Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence” and “Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence”
by this factor if the material is used as the outer glass layer of an exterior window or glass door.1
If the material is used as an inner glass layer (in double glazing, for example), the dirt correction
factor is not applied because inner glass layers are assumed to be clean. Using a material with dirt
correction factor < 1.0 in the construction for an interior window will result in an error message.
Representative values of the dirt correction factor are shown in Table 1.8.
The default value of the dirt correction factor is 1.0, which means the glass is clean.
It is assumed that dirt, if present, has no effect on the IR properties of the glass.
the window. The result is that beam solar radiation that would be transmitted by a transparent
window and get absorbed by particular interior surfaces will be diffused by a translucent window
and be spread over more interior surfaces. This can change the time dependence of heating and
cooling loads in the zone.
In a zone with Daylighting:Detailed, translucent glazing—which is often used in skylights—will
provide a more uniform daylight illuminance over the zone and will avoid patches of sunlight on the
floor.
Figure 1.12: Comparison between transmittance properties of transparent glass (Solar Diffusing =
No) and translucent glass (Solar Diffusing = Yes).
1.8.18.1.19 Field: Window Glass Spectral and Incident Angle Transmittance Data
Set Table Name
If Optical Data Type = SpectralAndAngle, this is the name of a spectral and angle data set of
transmittance defined with a Table:TwoIndependentVariables object. The first and second indepen-
dent variables must be Angle, and Wavelength, respectively. The restriction is based on internal
dataset use. Each dataset is divided into subsets for each incident angle internally.
1.8.18.1.20 Field: Window Glass Spectral and Incident Angle Front Reflectance Data
Set Table Name
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 159
If Optical Data Type = SpectralAndAngle, this is the name of a spectral and angle data set
of front reflectance defined with a Table:TwoIndependentVariables object. The first and second
independent variables must be Angle, and Wavelength, respectively. The restriction is based on
internal dataset use. Each dataset is divided into subsets for each incident angle internally.
1.8.18.1.21 Field: Window Glass Spectral and Incident Angle Back Reflectance Data
Set Table Name
If Optical Data Type = SpectralAndAngle, this is the name of a spectral and angle data set
of back reflectance defined with a Table:TwoIndependentVariables object. The first and second
independent variables must be Angle, and Wavelength, respectively. The restriction is based on
internal dataset use. Each dataset is divided into subsets for each incident angle internally.
It should be pointed out that when Optical Data Type = SpectralAndAngle for a glass layer
in a construction, the table input data are converted into polynomial curve fits with 6 coefficients,
so that all outputs of optical properties for the same construction will be curve values for a given
incident angle. Therefore, the values may be slightly different from input values.
IDF examples of Spectral average and using a Spectral data set:
WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
Glass_5012_Layer , !- Layer name : CLEAR_6.PPG
BSDF , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Spectral Data name
0.005664 , !- Thickness
, !- Solar Transmittance
, !- Solar Front Reflectance
, !- Solar Back Reflectance
, !- Visible Transmittance
, !- Visible Front Reflectance
, !- Visible Back reflectance
0.000000 , !- IR Transmittance
0.840000 , !-Front Emissivity
0.840000 , !-Back Emissivity
1.000000 , !-Conductivity
, !-Dirt Correction Factor for Sol/Vis Transmittance
, !-Solar Diffusing
7.2e10 , !-’Youngs modulus
0.22; !-’Poissons ratio
1.8.19 WindowMaterial:Glazing:RefractionExtinctionMethod
This is an alternative way of specifying glass properties. Index of refraction and extinction coeffi-
cient are given instead of the transmittance and reflectance values used in WindowMaterial:Glazing.
However, unlike WindowMaterial:Glazing, WindowMaterial:Glazing:RefractionExtinctionMethod
is restricted to cases where the front and back optical properties of the glass are the same.
This means it cannot be used for glass with a coating on one side. In that case Win-
dowMaterial:Glazing should be used. Also, unlike WindowMaterial:Glazing, WindowMate-
rial:Glazing:RefractionExtinctionMethod does not allow input of glass wavelength-by-wavelength
(spectral) properties.
1.8.19.1 Inputs
1.8.19.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the glass layer. It corresponds to a layer in a window construction.
1.8.19.1.10 Field: Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
This is a factor that corrects for the presence of dirt on the glass. It multiplies the solar and
visible transmittance at normal Incidence (which the program calculates from the input values of
thickness, solar index of refraction, solar extinction coefficient, etc.) if the material is used as the
outer glass layer of an exterior window or glass door. If the material is used as an inner glass layer
(in double glazing, for example), the dirt correction factor is not applied because inner glass layers
are assumed to be clean. Using a material with dirt correction factor < 1.0 in the construction for
an interior window will result in an error message.
Representative values of the direct correction factor are shown in Table 1.8.
The default value of the dirt correction factor is 1.0, which means the glass is clean. It is assumed
that dirt, if present, has no effect on the IR properties of the glass.
In a zone with Daylighting:Detailed, translucent glazing, which is often used in skylights, will
provide a more uniform daylight illuminance over the zone and will avoid patches of sunlight on the
floor.
An IDF example:
WindowMaterial:Glazing:RefractionExtinctionMethod ,
4MM CLEAR GLASS , !- Material name
0.004 , !- Thickness {m}
1.526 , !- Solar index of refraction
30.0 , !- Solar extinction coefficient (1/m)
1.526 , !- Visible index of refraction
30.0 , !- Visible extinction coefficient (1/m)
0.0, !- IR transmittance at normal incidence
0.84, !- IR emissivity
0.9; !- Conductivity {W/m-K}
T = 0.86156
n = 1.526
( )2
1.526 − 1
r=
1.526 + 1
τ = 0.93974
R = 0.07846
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 163
1.8.21 WindowMaterial:GlazingGroup:Thermochromic
Thermochromic (TC) materials have active, reversible optical properties that vary with temper-
ature. Thermochromic windows are adaptive window systems for incorporation into building en-
velopes. Thermochromic windows respond by absorbing sunlight and turning the sunlight energy
into heat. As the thermochromic film warms it changes its light transmission level from less ab-
sorbing to more absorbing. The more sunlight it absorbs the lower the light level going through
it. By using the suns own energy the window adapts based solely on the directness and amount of
sunlight. Thermochromic materials will normally reduce optical transparency by absorption and/or
reflection, and are specular (maintaining vision).
A thermochromic window is defined with a Construction object which references a special
layer defined with a WindowMaterial:GlazingGroup:Thermochromic object. The WindowMate-
rial:GlazingGroup:Thermochromic object further references a series of WindowMaterial:Glazing
objects corresponding to each specification temperature of the TC layer.
This object specifies a layer of thermochromic glass, part of a thermochromic window. An
example file ThermochromicWindow.idf is included in the EnergyPlus installation.
1.8.21.1 Inputs
1.8.21.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user assigned name for a particular thermochromic glass material.
1.8.21.1.2 Field Set (Optical Data Temperature, Window Material Glazing Name) is
extensible.
WindowMaterial:Gas ,
AIR 6MM , !- Name
Air , !- Gas Type
0.0063; !- Thickness {m}
35, TCGlazing35 ,
40, TCGlazing40 ,
45, TCGlazing45 ,
50, TCGlazing50 ,
55, TCGlazing55 ,
60, TCGlazing60 ,
65, TCGlazing65 ,
75, TCGlazing75 ,
85, TCGlazing85;
WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing0 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing
WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing20 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing
WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing25 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing
WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing30 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 165
WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing35 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing
WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing40 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing
WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing45 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing
WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing50 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
166 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing
WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing55 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing
WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing60 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing
WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing65 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing
WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing75 , !- Name
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 167
WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing85 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing
1.8.21.2 Outputs
1.8.22 WindowMaterial:Gas
This object specifies the properties of the gas between the panes of a multi-pane window. Gas Type
= Custom allows you to specify the properties of gases other than air, Argon, Krypton or Xenon.
There is an EnergyPlus Reference Data Set for Material:WindowGas that contains several types
of gas of different thicknesses. See Material:WindowGasMixture for the case that the gas fill is a
mixture of different gases.
168 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.8.22.1 Inputs
1.8.22.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the gas fill. It refers to a layer in a window construction.
WindowMaterial:Gas ,AIRGAP ,
AIR , ! Gas type (Air - Argon - Krypton - Xenon - Custom)]
0.0125; ! Thickness {m} 1/2 inch
WindowMaterial:Gas ,
Gas_1_W_0_0100 , !- gap name - Air
Air , !- type
0.0100; !- thickness
WindowMaterial:Gas ,
Gas_16_W_0_0003 , !- gap name
Custom , !- type
0.0003 , !- thickness
2.873000e-003, !- Conductivity Coefficient A
7.760000e-005, !- Conductivity Coefficient B
0.000000e+000, !- Conductivity Coefficient C
3.723000e-006, !- Conductivity Viscosity A
4.940000e-008, !- Conductivity Viscosity B
0.000000e+000, !- Conductivity Viscosity C
1002.737000 , !- Specific Heat Coefficient A
0.012324 , !- Specific Heat Coefficient B
0.000000 , !- Specific Heat Coefficient C
28.969999 , !- Molecular Weight
1.400000; !- Specific Heat Ratio
1.8.23 WindowMaterial:GasMixture
This object allows you to specify the fill between the panes of a multi-pane window to be a mixture
of two, three or four different gases chosen from air, argon, krypton and xenon. It can also be used
if only one type of gas in the fill. In this case you can also use WindowMaterial:Gas. Note that the
fractions of gas types in the mixture should add up to 1.0.
1.8.23.1 Inputs
1.8.23.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the gas mixture. It refers to a layer in a window construction.
170 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
WindowMaterial:GasMixture ,ArgonKryptonMix ,
0.0125 , ! Thickness {m} 1/2 inch
2, ! Number of Gases in Mixture
Argon , ! Gas 1 Type
0.6, ! Gas 1 Fraction
Krypton , ! Gas 2 Type
0.4; ! Gas 2 Fraction
1.8.24 WindowMaterial:Gap
This input object is used to define the gap between two layers in a complex fenestration system,
where the Construction:ComplexFenestrationState object is used. It references the gas or gas mix-
tures defined in the WindowMaterial:Gas and WindowMaterial:GasMixture objects. It is referenced
as a layer in the Construction:ComplexFenestrationState object ;it cannot be referenced as a layer
from the Construction object.
1.8.24.1 Inputs
1.8.24.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name of the gap.
WindowMaterial:Gas ,
Gas_1_W_0_0120 , !- gap name - Air
Air , !- type
0.0120; !- thickness
WindowMaterial:Gap ,
Gap_1_Layer , !- gap name: Air
0.0120 , !- thickness
Gas_1_W_0_0120 , !- Gas (or Gas Mixture) name
101325.0000; !- pressure
WindowMaterial:Gap ,
Gap_16_Layer , !- gap name: Vacuum_0 .001_pr -0.5_ps -50.8
0.0003 , !- thicknessGas_16_W_0_0003 ,
!- Gas (or Gas Mixture) name
0.1333 , !- pressure
, !- deflection state
SupportPillar_16_Gap_1; !- SupportPillar
WindowGap:SupportPillar ,
SupportPillar_16_Gap_1 , !- Name
0.0508 , !- spacing
0.0005; !- radius
1.8.25 WindowGap:DeflectionState
This input object is used to enter data describing deflection state of the gap. It is referenced from
WindowMaterial:Gap object only and it is used only when deflection model is set to MeasuredDe-
flection (see WindowThermalModel:Params), otherwise it is ignored.
1.8.25.1 Inputs
WindowMaterial:Gap ,
Gap_1_Layer , !- gap name: Air
0.0120 , !- thickness
Gas_1_W_0_0120 , !- Gas (or Gas Mixture) name
101325.0000 , !- pressure
Gap_1_Deflection; !- deflection state
1.8.26 WindowGap:SupportPillar
This input object is used to enter data describing support pillar of the gap. Support pillars are
used in vacuum glazing in order to prevent deflection of glass layers.
1.8.26.1 Inputs
1.8.26.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name of the support pillar.
1.8.27 WindowMaterial:SimpleGlazingSystem
This model should be used with caution. There may be significant differences in performance
between the simple window system and the usual more detailed model.
This input object differs from the other WindowMaterial objects in that it describes an entire glazing
system rather than individual layers. This object is used when only very limited information is available
on the glazing layers or when specific performance levels are being targeted. The layer by layer description
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 173
offers superior method of modeling windows that should be used instead of this object when sufficient data
are available. This object accesses a model that turns simple performance indices into a fuller model of
the glazing system.
The performance indices are U-factor and Solar Heat Gain Coefficient, and optionally Visible Transmit-
tance. The values for these performance indices can be selected by the user to represent either glazing-only
windows (with no frame) or an average window performance that includes the frame. Inside the program
the model produces an equivalent window glazing layer with no frame. The properties of the modeled glaz-
ing layer are reported to the EIO file using the IDF input object syntax for the WindowMaterial:Glazing
input object. This equivalent layer could be reused in subsequent models if desired, however there will
be important differences in the modeled window performance because the simple glazing system model
includes its own special model for angular dependence when incident beam solar is not normal to the plane
of the window.
When this object is referenced in a Construction object, it cannot be used with other glazing or gas
material layers. Shades or blinds cannot be located between the glass, but these can be used on the inside
or the outside of the glazing system. If the glazing system does have between-the-glass shades or blinds,
then the U and SHGC values entered in this object should include the impacts of those layers. Adding
window treatment layers such as shades or screens will alter the overall performance to be different than
the performance levels prescribed in this object.
1.8.27.1 Inputs
1.8.27.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the glazing system. This value is unique across all constructions.
WindowMaterial:SimpleGlazingSystem ,
SimpleWindow:DOUBLE PANE WINDOW , !- Name
2.716 , !- U-Factor
0.763 , !- Solar Heat Gain Coefficient
0.812 ; !- Visible Transmittance
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 175
1.8.28 WindowMaterial:Shade
This object specifies the properties of window shade materials. Reflectance and emissivity properties are
assumed to be the same on both sides of the shade. Shades are considered to be perfect diffusers (all trans-
mitted and reflected radiation is hemispherically-diffuse) with transmittance and reflectance independent
of angle of incidence. There is an EnergyPlus Reference Data Set for WindowMaterial:Shade that contains
properties of generic window shades.
Window shades can be on the inside of the window (“interior shades”), on the outside of the window
(“exterior shades”), or between glass layers (“between-glass shades”). When in place, the shade is assumed
to cover all of the glazed part of the window, including dividers; it does not cover any of the window frame,
if present. The plane of the shade is assumed to be parallel to the glazing.
WindowMaterial:Shade can be used for diffusing materials such as drapery and translucent roller shades.
For slat-type shading devices, like Venetian blinds, that have a strong angular dependence of transmission,
absorption and reflection, it is better to use WindowMaterial:Blind. WindowMaterial:Screen should be
used to model wire mesh insect screens where the solar and visible transmission and reflection properties
vary with the angle of incidence of solar radiation.
Transmittance and reflectance values for drapery material with different color and openness of weave
can be obtained from manufacturers or determined from 2001 ASHRAE Fundamentals, Chapter 30, Fig.
31.
There are two methods of assigning a shade to a window:
1.8.28.1 Inputs
1.8.28.1.1 Method 1:
1) Define the construction of the window without the shade, the so-called “bare” construction.
2) Reference the bare construction in the FenestrationSurface:Detailed for the window.
3) Define the WindowMaterial:Shade.
4) Define a WindowShadingControl for the window in which you (a) specify that this WindowMate-
rial:Shade is the window’s shading device and (b) specify how the shade is controlled.
1.8.28.1.2 Method 2:
1) Define the Construction of the window without the shade, the so-called “bare” construction.
2) Reference the bare construction in the FenestrationSurface:Detailed for the window.
3) Define the WindowMaterial:Shade.
4) Define another Construction, called the “shaded construction,” that includes the WindowMate-
rial:Shade.
5) Define a WindowShadingControl for the window in which you (a) reference the shaded construction
and (b) specify how the shade is controlled.
Note that WindowShadingControl has to be used with either method, even if the shade is in place
at all times. You will get an error message if you try to reference a shaded construction directly from
FenestrationSurface:Detailed.
εeff ≈ ε (1 − η) (1.11)
Teff ≈ η + T (1 − η) (1.12)
Teff ≈ η (1.13)
1.8.29 WindowMaterial:Blind
This object specifies the properties of a window blind consisting of flat, equally-spaced slats. Unlike
window shades, which are modeled as perfect diffusers, window blinds have solar and visible transmission
and reflection properties that strongly depend on slat angle and angle of incidence of solar radiation. There
is an EnergyPlus Reference Data Set for WindowMaterial:Blind that contains properties of generic window
blinds.
Blinds can be located on the inside of the window (“interior blinds”), on the outside of the window
(“exterior blinds”), or between two layers of glass (“between-glass blinds”). When in place, the blind is
assumed to cover all of the glazed part of the window, including dividers; it does not cover any of the
window frame, if present. The plane of the blind is assumed to be parallel to the glazing. When the blind
178 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Figure 1.14: Vertical section (a) and perspective view (b) of glass and interior shade layers showing
variables used in the gap air flow analysis. In (b), the air-flow opening areas Abot , Atop , Al , Ar and
Ah are shown schematically. See Engineering Manual for definition of thermal variables.
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 179
Figure 1.15: Examples of air-flow openings for an interior shade covering glass of height H and width
W . Not to scale. (a) Horizontal section through shade with openings on the left and right sides
(top view). (b) Vertical section through shade with openings at the top and bottom (side view).
In (a) Left-Side Opening Multiplier = Al /sH = min(l/s, 1) and Right-Side Opening Multiplier =
Ar /sH = min(r/s, 1). In (b) Top Opening Multiplier = Atop /sW = t/s and Bottom Opening
Multiplier = Abot /sW = b/s.
180 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
is retracted it is assumed to cover none of the window. The solar and thermal effects of the blind’s support
strings, tapes or rods are ignored. Slat curvature, if present, is ignored.
There are two methods of assigning a blind to a window:
1.8.29.1 Inputs
1.8.29.1.1 Method 1:
1) Define the construction of the window without the blind, the so-called “bare” construction.
2) Reference the bare construction in the FenestrationSurface:Detailed for the window.
3) Define the WindowMaterial:Blind.
4) Define a WindowShadingControl for the window in which you (a) specify that this WindowMate-
rial:Blind is the window’s shading device and (b) specify how the blind is controlled.
1.8.29.1.2 Method 2:
1) Define the Construction of the window without the blind, the so-called “bare” construction.
2) Reference the bare construction in the FenestrationSurface:Detailed for the window.
3) Define the WindowMaterial:Blind.
4) Define another Construction, called the “shaded construction,” that includes the WindowMate-
rial:Blind.
5) Define a WindowShadingControl for the window in which you (a) reference the shaded construction
and (b) specify how the blind is controlled.
Note that WindowShadingControl has to be used with either method, even if the blind is in place at
all times. You will get an error message if you try to reference a construction with a blind directly from
Window objects (FenestrationSurface:Detailed or Window).
Note also that WindowShadingControl is used to determine not only when the blind is in place, but
how its slat angle is controlled.
WindowMaterial:Blind ,
White Painted Metal Blind , !- Name
HORIZONTAL , !- Slat orientation
0.025 , !- Slat width (m)
0.01875 , !- Slat separation (m)
0.001 , !- Slat thickness (m)
45.0 , !- Slat angle (deg)
44.9 , !- Slat conductivity (W/m-K)
0.0 , !- Slat beam solar transmittance
0.8 , !- Front Side Slat beam solar reflectance
0.8 , !- Back Side Slat beam solar reflectance
0.0 , !- Slat diffuse solar transmittance
0.8 , !- Front Side Slat diffuse solar reflectance
0.8 , !- Back Side Slat diffuse solar reflectance
0.0 , !- Slat beam visible transmittance
0.7 , !- Front Side Slat beam visible reflectance
0.7 , !- Back Side Slat beam visible reflectance
0.0 , !- Slat diffuse visible transmittance
0.7 , !- Front Side Slat diffuse visible reflectance
0.7 , !- Back Side Slat diffuse visible reflectance
0.0 , !- Slat Infrared hemispherical transmittance
0.9 , !- Front Side Slat Infrared hemispherical emissivity
0.9 , !- Back Side Slat Infrared hemispherical emissivity
0.050 , !- Blind -to -glass distance
0.0 , !- Blind top opening multiplier
0.0 , !- Blind bottom opening multiplier
0.5 , !- Blind left -side opening multiplier
0.5 , !- Blind right -side opening multiplier
, !- Minimum slat angle (deg)
; !- Maximum slat angle (deg)
184 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Figure 1.16: (a) Side view of a window blind with horizontal slats (or top view of blind with vertical
slats) showing slat geometry. The front face of a slat is shown by a heavy line. The slat angle is
defined as the angle between the glazing outward normal and the slat outward normal, where the
outward normal points away from the front face of the slat. (b) Slat orientations for representative
slat angles. The slat angle varies from 0o , when the front of the slat is parallel to the glazing and
faces toward the outdoors, to 90o , when the slat is perpendicular to the glazing, to 180o , when the
front of the slat is parallel to the glazing and faces toward the indoors. The minimum and maximum
slat angles are determined by the slat thickness, width and separation.
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 185
1.8.30 WindowMaterial:ComplexShade
This input object is used to define shade layers used in the Construction:ComplexFenestrationState object.
1.8.30.1 Inputs
1.8.30.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name of the shading layer.
• BSDF – for modeling shades whose properties are represented by a BSDF file
• OtherShadingType – for modeling shading systems which do not belong to the any of the previous
group
• Woven – the conductivity of the woven shade material (such as the thread for a fabric shade)
• BSDF – for modeling shades whose properties are represented by a BSDF file
• OtherShadingType – for modeling shading systems which do not belong to the any of the previous
group
Figure 1.17: Three cases for the Dtop calculation for an indoor/outdoor shade: Case a) A shading
device between the frame; Case b) A shading device outside the frame, covering the frame; Case c)
a shading device outside the frame, not covering the frame.
In the case where the distance between the frame and the shading device is bigger than the gap width,
the dtop multiplier is equal to one. Therefore, the calculation of the Dtop opening multiplier is:
Figure 1.18: Calculation of Dtop for a shading device between glass layers
188 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Where
Smin = min(S1 , S2 )
Figure 1.20: Side view of horizontal venetian blind slats or top view of blinds with vertical slats.
Front face of slats is marked with red line.
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 191
1.8.31 WindowMaterial:Screen
This object specifies the properties of exterior window screen materials. The window screen model assumes
the screen is made up of intersecting orthogonally-crossed cylinders. The surface of the cylinders is assumed
to be diffusely reflecting, having the optical properties of a Lambertian surface.
The beam solar radiation transmitted through a window screen varies with sun angle and is made up
of two distinct elements: a direct beam component and a reflected beam component. The direct beam
transmittance component is modeled using the geometry of the screen material and the incident angle of the
sun to account for shadowing of the window by the screen material. The reflected beam component is an
empirical model that accounts for the inward reflection of solar beam off the screen material surface. This
component is both highly directional and small in magnitude compared to the direct beam transmittance
component (except at higher incident angles, for which case the magnitude of the direct beam component is
small or zero and the reflected beam component, though small in absolute terms can be many times larger
than the direct beam component). For this reason, the reflected beam transmittance component calculated
by the model can be a. disregarded, b. treated as an additive component to direct beam transmittance
(and in the same direction), or c. treated as hemispherically-diffuse transmittance based on a user input
to the model.
The window screen “assembly” properties of overall beam solar reflectance and absorptance (including
the screen material ‘cylinders’ and open area) also change with sun angle and are calculated based on the
values of the beam solar transmittance components (direct and reflected components described above) and
the physical properties of the screen material (i.e., screen material diameter, spacing, and reflectance).
192 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Transmittance, reflectance, and absorptance of diffuse solar radiation are considered constant values
and apply to both the front and back surfaces of the screen. These properties are calculated by the model
as an average value by integrating the screen’s beam solar properties over a quarter hemisphere of incident
radiation. Long-wave emissivity is also assumed to be the same for both sides of the screen.
There is an EnergyPlus Reference Data Set for WindowMaterial:Screen that contains properties for
generic window screens. Window screens of this type can only be used on the outside surface of the window
(“exterior screens”). When in place, the screen is assumed to cover all of the glazed part of the window,
including dividers; it does not cover any of the window frame, if present. The plane of the screen is assumed
to be parallel to the glazing.
WindowMaterial:Screen can be used to model wire mesh insect screens where the solar and visible
transmission and reflection properties vary with the angle of incidence of solar radiation. For diffusing
materials such as drapery and translucent roller shades it is better to use the WindowMaterial:Shade
object. For slat-type shading devices like Venetian blinds, which have solar and visible transmission and
reflection properties that strongly depend on slat angle and angle of incidence of solar radiation, it is better
to use WindowMaterial:Blind.
There are two methods of assigning a screen to a window:
1.8.31.1 Inputs
1.8.31.1.1 Method 1:
1) Define the construction of the window without the screen, the so-called “bare” construction.
2) Reference the bare construction in the FenestrationSurface:Detailed for the window.
3) Define the WindowMaterial:Screen object.
4) Define a WindowShadingControl for the window in which you (a) specify that this Mate-
rial:WindowScreen is the window’s shading device, and (b) specify how the screen is controlled.
1.8.31.1.2 Method 2:
1) Define the Construction of the window without the screen, the so-called “bare” construction.
2) Reference the bare construction in the FenestrationSurface:Detailed for the window.
3) Define the WindowMaterial:Screen object.
4) Define another Construction, called the “shaded construction,” that includes the WindowMate-
rial:Screen.
5) Define a WindowShadingControl for the window in which you (a) reference the shaded construction,
and (b) specify how the screen is controlled.
Note that WindowShadingControl has to be used with either method, even if the screen is in place
at all times. You will get an error message if you try to reference a shaded construction directly from a
FenestrationSurface:Detailed object.
to direct solar beam and in the same direction), or ModelAsDiffuse (i.e., model as hemispherically-diffuse
radiation). The default value is ModelAsDiffuse.
Commercially-available gray scale or grayscale reflecting chart references can be purchased for improved
accuracy in estimating visible reflectance (by visual comparison of screen reflected brightness with that of
various known-reflectance portions of the grayscale).
Effective area for air flow at the left side of the screen divided the vertical area between the glass and
screen (see the same field for the Material:WindowShade object for additional description). The opening
multiplier fields can be used to simulate a shading material that is offset from the window frame. Since
window screens are typically installed against the window frame, the default value is equal to 0. This input
value can range from 0 to 1.
WindowMaterial:Screen ,
EXTERIOR SCREEN , !- Name
ModelAsDiffuse , !- Reflected Beam Transmittance Accounting Method
0.6, !- Diffuse Solar Reflectance
0.6, !- Diffuse Visible Reflectance
0.9, !- Thermal Hemispherical Emissivity
221.0 , !- Conductivity {W/m-K}
0.00154 , !- Screen Material Spacing (m)
0.000254 , !- Screen Material Diameter (m)
0.025 , !- Screen -to -Glass Distance {m}
0.0, !- Top Opening Multiplier
0.0, !- Bottom Opening Multiplier
0.0, !- Left -Side Opening Multiplier
0.0, !- Right -Side Opening Multiplier
0; !- Angle of Resolution for Output Map {deg}
Construction ,
DOUBLE PANE WITHOUT SCREEN , !- Name
GLASS - CLEAR SHEET 1 / 8 IN , !- Outside Layer
WinAirB1 - AIRSPACE RESISTANCE , !- Layer \#2
GLASS - CLEAR SHEET 1 / 8 IN; !- Layer \#3
WindowShadingControl ,
DOUBLE PANE WITH SCREEN , !- Name
West Zone , !- Zone Name
1, !- Shading Control Sequence Number
ExteriorScreen , !- Shading Type
, !- Name of construction with shading
AlwaysOn , !- Shading Control Type
ScreenSchedule , !- Schedule Name
20.0, !- SetPoint {W/m2 , W or deg C}
YES , !- Shading Control Is Scheduled
NO , !- Glare Control Is Active
EXTERIOR SCREEN , !- Material Name of Shading Device
, !- Type of Slat Angle Control for Blinds
, !- Slat Angle Schedule Name
, !- Setpoint 2 {W/m2 or deg C}
196 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.8.32 WindowMaterial:Shade:EquivalentLayer
This object specifies the properties of Equivalent Layer window shade (roller blind) materials. Shades are
considered to be thin, flat and perfect diffusers (all transmitted and reflected radiation is hemispherically-
diffuse). However, shades can have beam-beam transmittance by virtue of their material openness. The
beam-beam transmittence is assumed to be the same for both sides of the shade and is the same as
the openness area fraction. Beam-diffuse transmittance and reflectance, and emissivity properties can be
different for front and back side of the shade.Window shades can be placed on the inside of the window,
on the outside of the window, or between glass layers. WindowMaterial:Shade:EquivalentLayer is used
for roller blinds. The off-normal solar property calculation of shades (roller blind) is based on a set of
correlations developed from measurement of samples of commercially produced roller blind material with
openness fraction less than 0.14. The model is not intended for materials with unusually high values
of openness and should be limited to a maximum openness fraction of 0.20. The visible spectrum solar
properties input fields are not used currently hence can be left blank. The equivalent layer window shade
model does not support WindowShadingControl.
1.8.32.1 Inputs
1.8.32.1.1 Field: Name
Name of the shade. It is referenced as an inside, inbetween or outside layer in an equivalent layer window
construction.
WindowMaterial:Shade:EquivalentLayer ,
Shade1 , !- Name
0.190 , !- Shade Beam -Beam Solar Transmittance
0.206 , !- Front Side Shade Beam -Diffuse Solar Transmittance
0.206 , !- Back Side Shade Beam -Diffuse Solar Transmittance
0.499 , !- Front Side Shade Beam -Diffuse Solar Reflectance
0.499 , !- Back Side Shade Beam -Diffuse Solar Reflectance
0.0, !- Shade Beam -Beam Visible Transmittance
0.0, !- Shade Beam -Diffuse Visible Transmittance
0.0, !- Shade Visible Reflectance
0.0, !- Shade Material Infrared Transmittance
0.84, !- Front Side Shade Material Infrared Emissivity
0.84; !- Back Side Shade Material Infrared Emissivity
1.8.33 WindowMaterial:Drape:EquivalentLayer
Specifies the optical and thermal properties of equivalent layer window drape fabric materials.
Drapery fabric shades are commonly placed on the the inside of the window. The long-wave (Thermal)
properties for commonly used drapery fabrics are assumed to be the same on both sides but different values
can be specified when required. Drape fabric shade layers are considered to be perfect diffusers (reflected
198 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.8.33.1 Inputs
1.8.33.1.1 Field: Name
Name of the drape fabric shade layer. It is referenced as an inside, in between or outside layer in an
equivalent layer window construction.
1.8.34 WindowMaterial:Blind:EquivalentLayer
This object specifies the properties of an Equivalent Layer window blind consisting of thin and equally-
spaced slats. The the model assumes that slats are flat and thin, and applies correction for the slat curvature
effect based on the user specified slat crwon. Slats are assumed to transmit and reflect diffusely. The
effective shortwave optical and longwave optical properties of venetian blind layer is estimated analytically.
The Equivalent Layer blind model requires optical properties and geometry of the slats shown in Figure 1.24.
Likewise, effective longwave properties are obtained for the layer knowing longwave properties of the slats.
The input data required to characterize a venetian blind are: front and back side reflectance and
transmittance of the slat, geometry (Slat width, w, slat spacing, s, slat crown, c, and slat angle, ϕ, and
long wave emittance and transmittance of the slat. Blinds can be located on the inside of the window, on
the outside of the window, or between two layers of glass. The blind is assumed to cover all of the glazed
part of the window. The equivalent layer window blind model allows three slat angle control types (see
Slat Angle Control input field) but does not support WindowShadingControl.
1.8.34.1 Inputs
1.8.34.1.1 Field: Name
Name of the venetian blind. It is referenced as an inside, outside or in between layers in an equivalent
layer window construction.
Figure 1.24: Geometry and Properties used for venetian blind analysis
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 203
WindowMaterial:Blind:EquivalentLayer ,
VBU8D6 +45SW1 , ! - Name
Horizontal , ! - Slat Orientation
0.025 , ! - Slat Width
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 205
1.8.35 WindowMaterial:Screen:EquivalentLayer
This object specifies the optical and thermal properties of exterior screen materials for Equivalent Layer
Window. Can only be placed on the exterior side of window construction. The window screen model
assumes the screen is made up of intersecting orthogonally-crossed cylinders. The surface of the cylinders
is assumed to be diffusely reflecting. The beam solar radiation transmitted through an equivalent Layer
window screen varies with sun angle and is made up of two distinct elements: a beam-beam component
and a beam-diffuse component. The beam-beam transmittance component is calculated using screen
openness area fraction determined from the geometry of the screen and the incident angle of the sun.
Empirical correlations are used to obtain the effective off-normal solar and longwave properties of insect
screens. Insect screen geometry is shown in Figure 1.25. The calculation of effective solar properties
requires a set of properties measured at normal incidence. The equivalent layer window screen shade
model does not support WindowShadingControl.
The formulation of the model, assumption and correlations used to calculate effective solar and longwave
properties of insect screens are described in the Engineering Reference.
1.8.35.1 Inputs
1.8.35.1.1 Field: Name
Name of the insect screen. It is referenced as an outside layer in an equivalent layer window construction.
WindowMaterial:Screen:EquivalentLayer ,
INSCRN , !- Name
0.763 , !- Screen Beam -Beam Solar Transmittance
0.052 , !- Screen Beam -Diffuse Solar Transmittance
208 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.8.36 WindowMaterial:Glazing:EquivalentLayer
Glass material properties for equivalent layer window model. Uses transmittance/reflectance input
method. For exterior windows, “front side” is the side of the glass closest to the outside air and “back
side” is the side closest to the zone the window is defined in. For interzone windows, “front side” is the
side closest to the zone adjacent to the zone the window is defined in and “back side” is the side clos-
est to the zone the window is defined in. The equivalent layer window glazing model does not support
WindowShadingControl.
1.8.36.1 Inputs
1.8.36.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the glass layer. It corresponds to a layer in an equivalent layer window construction.
visible transmittance is assumed to be the same for both sides of the glazing. If this input field is specified
as “Autocalculate”, then the calculated transmittance will be used. The minimum value is 0.0, and the
maximum value is less than 1.0. This input field is not used currently.
WindowMaterial:Glazing:EquivalentLayer ,
GLZCLR , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.83, !- Front Side Beam -Beam Solar Transmittance
0.83, !- Back Side Beam -Beam Solar Transmittance
0.08, !- Front Side Beam -Beam Solar Reflectance
0.08, !- Back Side Beam -Beam Solar Reflectance
0.0, !- Front Side Beam -Beam Visible Transmittance
0.0, !- Back Side Beam -Beam Visible Transmittance
0.0, !- Front Side Beam -Beam Visible Reflectance
0.0, !- Back Side Beam -Beam Visible Reflectance
0.0, !- Front Side Beam -Diffuse Solar Transmittance
0.0, !- Back Side Beam -Diffuse Solar Transmittance
0.0, !- Front Side Beam -Diffuse Solar Reflectance
0.0, !- Back Side Beam -Diffuse Solar Reflectance
0.0, !- Front Side Beam -Diffuse Visible Transmittance
0.0, !- Back Side Beam -Diffuse Visible Transmittance
0.0, !- Front Side Beam -Diffuse Visible Reflectance
0.0, !- Back Side Beam -Diffuse Visible Reflectance
212 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.8.37 WindowMaterial:Gap:EquivalentLayer
This object is used in windows equivalent layer construction object and specifies the properties of the
gap between the layers in multi-layer equivalent layer window object. There is an EnergyPlus Reference
Data Set for Material:WindowGas that contains several types of gas. This object uses the gas types:
Air, Argon, Xenon, Crypton, and Custom. For Custom gas type users are required to entering the
thermophicial properties.
1.8.37.1 Inputs
1.8.37.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the gap. It refers to a layer in a window construction equivalent layer.
WindowMaterial:Gap:EquivalentLayer ,
Custom CO2 Sealed 12mm , !- Name
CUSTOM , !- Gas Type
0.0120 , !- Thickness {m}
Sealed , !- Gap Vent Type
-5.8181E-3, !- Conductivity Coefficient A {W/m-K}
7.4714E-5, !- Conductivity Coefficient B {W/m-K2}
0.0, !- Conductivity Coefficient C {W/m-K3}
8.5571E-7, !- Viscosity Coefficient A {kg/m-s}
4.7143E-8, !- Viscosity Coefficient B {kg/m-s-K}
0.0, !- Viscosity Coefficient C {kg/m-s-K2}
5.76903E2 , !- Specific Heat Coefficient A {J/kg -K}
9.18088E-2, !- Specific Heat Coefficient B {J/kg -K2}
0.0, !- Specific Heat Coefficient C {J/kg -K3}
44.01; !- Molecular Weight {g/mol}
214 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.8.38 Material:RoofVegetation
This definition must be used in order to simulate the green roof (ecoroof) model. The material becomes
the outside layer in a green roof construction (see example below). In the initial release of the green roof
model, only one material may be used as a green roof layer though, of course, several constructions using
that material may be used. In addition, the model works only with the ConductionTransferFunction heat
balance solution algorithm. This model was developed for low-sloped exterior surfaces (roofs). It is not
recommended for high-sloped exterior surfaces (e.g., walls).
1.8.38.1 Inputs
1.8.38.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a unique reference name that the user assigns to a particular ecoroof material. This name
can then be referred to by other input data.
Material:RoofVegetation ,
BaseEco , !- Name
0.5, !- Height of Plants {m}
5, !- Leaf Area Index {dimensionless}
0.2, !- Leaf Reflectivity {dimensionless}
0.95, !- Leaf Emissivity
180, !- Minimum Stomatal Resistance {s/m}
EcoRoofSoil , !- Soil Layer Name
MediumSmooth , !- Roughness
0.18, !- Thickness {m}
0.4, !- Conductivity of Dry Soil {W/m-K}
641, !- Density of Dry Soil {kg/m3}
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 217
Material:RoofVegetation ,
LowLAI , !- Name
0.5, !- Height of Plants {m}
0.5, !- Leaf Area Index {dimensionless}
0.2, !- Leaf Reflectivity {dimensionless}
0.95, !- Leaf Emissivity
180, !- Minimum Stomatal Resistance {s/m}
EcoRoofSoil , !- Soil Layer Name
MediumSmooth , !- Roughness
0.18, !- Thickness {m}
0.4, !- Conductivity of Dry Soil {W/m-K}
641, !- Density of Dry Soil {kg/m3}
1100, !- Specific Heat of Dry Soil {J/kg -K}
0.95, !- Thermal Absorptance
0.8, !- Solar Absorptance
0.7, !- Visible Absorptance
0.4, !- Saturation Volumetric Moisture Content of the Soil Layer
0.01, !- Residual Volumetric Moisture Content of the Soil Layer
0.2, !- Initial Volumetric Moisture Content of the Soil Layer
Simple; !- Moisture Diffusion Calculation Method
Construction ,
ASHRAE 90.1 -2004 _Sec 5.5-2_Roof , !- Name
BaseEco , !- Outside Layer
ASHRAE 90.1 -2004 _Sec 5.5-2 _Roof Insulation_1 , !- Layer \#2
ASHRAE 90.1 -2004 _Sec 5.5-2_MAT -METAL; !- Layer \#3
• Zone,Average,Green Roof Soil Sensible Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]
• Zone,Average,Green Roof Vegetation Sensible Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]
• Zone,Average,Green Roof Vegetation Latent Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]
• Zone,Average,Green Roof Soil Latent Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]
218 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.8.39.5 Green Roof Soil Sensible Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]
Sensible heat flux to ground (W/m2 )
1.8.39.6 Green Roof Vegetation Sensible Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]
Sensible heat transfer to foliage (W/m2 )
1.8.39.9 Green Roof Vegetation Latent Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]
Latent heat flux from vegetation (W/m2 )
1.8.39.10 Green Roof Soil Latent Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]
Latent heat flux from ground surface (W/m2 )
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 219
1.8.40 MaterialProperty:GlazingSpectralData
With the MaterialProperty:GlazingSpectralData object, you can specify the wavelength-by-wavelength
transmittance and reflectance properties of a glass material. To determine the overall optical properties of
a glazing system (solar and visible transmittance and solar absorptance vs. angle of incidence) EnergyPlus
first calculates transmittance and absorptance vs. angle of incidence for each wavelength. This is then
weighted by a standard solar spectrum to get the solar transmittance and absorptance vs. angle of incidence
(for use in the solar heat gain calculations), and further weighted by the response of the human eye to get
the visible transmittance vs. angle of incidence (for use in the daylighting calculation).
MaterialProperty:GlazingSpectralData should be used for multi-pane windows when one or more of
the glass layers is spectrally selective, i.e., the transmittance depends strongly on wavelength. An example
is glass with a coating that gives high transmittance in the daylight part of the solar spectrum (roughly 0.4
to 0.7 microns) and low transmittance at longer wavelengths, thus providing better solar heat gain control
than uncoated glass. If spectral data is not used in case, the overall optical properties of the glazing system
that EnergyPlus calculates will not be correct.
You can input up to 450 sets of values for wavelengths covering the solar spectrum. Each set consists
of {wavelength (microns), transmittance, front reflectance, back reflectance}
Spectral data of this kind are routinely measured by glass manufacturers. Data sets for over 800
commercially available products are contained in an Optical Data Library maintained by the Windows
Group at Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory. This library can be downloaded from http://windows.
lbl.gov/. You will have to edit entries from this library to put them in the format required by the EnergyPlus
WindowGlassSpectralData object.
An alternative to using the MaterialProperty:GlazingSpectralData object is to run the WINDOW
window analysis program. This program has built-in access to the Optical Data Library and let’s you
easily create customized, multi-layer glazing systems that can be exported for use in EnergyPlus. For more
details, see “StormWindow”.
220 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.8.40.1 Inputs
1.8.40.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the spectral data set. It is referenced by WindowMaterial:Glazing when Optical Data
Type = Spectral.
MaterialProperty:GlazingSpectralData ,
TestSpectralDataSet ,
! { from WINDOW 4 library }
! { actual 9.91 mm clear laminate: 15 _mil PVB , ID :37966/50032 -39 -9 } 10.38
! { conductivity PVB adjusted , W/M/K } 0.798
! { thermal IR transmittance , assumed } tir = 0.00
! { thermal IR hemispherical emittance , assumed } emis = 0.84 0.84
! WL T Rfront Rback
.300, 0.000 , 0.045 , 0.045 ,
.310, 0.000 , 0.044 , 0.044 ,
.320, 0.000 , 0.044 , 0.044 ,
.330, 0.000 , 0.042 , 0.042 ,
.340, 0.000 , 0.041 , 0.041 ,
.350, 0.000 , 0.040 , 0.040 ,
<snip >
2.450 , 0.200 , 0.040 , 0.040 ,
2.500 , 0.214 , 0.039 , 0.039;
1.8.41 Construction
For walls, roofs, floors, windows, and doors, constructions are “built” from the included materials. Each
layer of the construction is a material name listed in order from “outside” to “inside”. Up to ten layers
(eight for windows) may be specified (one of the few limitations in EnergyPlus!). “Outside” is the layer
furthest away from the Zone air (not necessarily the outside environment). “Inside” is the layer next to
the Zone air. In the example floor below, for example, the outside layer is the acoustic tile below the floor,
the next layer is the air space above the tile, and the inside layer is the concrete floor deck.
Window constructions are similarly built up from items in the Window Materials set using similar
layers.. See Figure 1.27. Illustration for material ordering in windows, which shows the case where an
interior shading layer such as a blind is present. The gap between the inside glass layer (layer #3) and the
interior shading layer is not entered. Similarly, for an exterior shading layer, the gap between the outside
glass layer and the shading layer is not entered.
However, for a between-glass shading device the gaps on either side of the shading layer must be entered
and they must have the same gas type. In addition, the gap widths with and without the between-glass
shading layer must be consistent (see Figure 1.28).
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 221
A maximum of four glass layers and one shading layer is allowed. A gas layer must always separate
adjacent glass layers in a multi-pane glazing without a between-glass shading layer.
Outside and inside air film resistances are never given as part of a construction definitions since they
are calculated during the EnergyPlus simulation. Note also that constructions are assumed to be one-
dimensional in a direction perpendicular to the surface.
1.8.41.1 Inputs
1.8.41.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a user specified name that will be used as a reference by other input syntax. For example,
a heat transfer surface (ref: Building Surfaces) requires a construction name to define what the make-up
of the wall is. This name must be identical to one of the Construction definitions in the input data file.
Figure 1.28: Window construction with and without a between-glass shading layer. Shown are gap
widths g, g1 and g2 , and shading layer width, w. An error will result if g1 + g2 + w is not equal to
g, where w is zero for a blind and greater than zero for a shade.
224 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
The next fields are optional and the number of them showing up in a particular Construction definition
depends solely on the number of material layers present in that construction. The data expected is identical
to the outside layer field (see previous field description). The order of the remaining layers is important
and should be listed in order of occurrence from the one just inside the outside layer until the inside layer is
reached. As noted above, the inside layer should NOT be a film coefficient since EnergyPlus will calculate
inside convection and radiation heat transfer more precisely.
IDF Example (floor construction):
Construction , DOUBLE PANE WITH ROLL SHADE , !- Material layer names follow:
GLASS - CLEAR SHEET 1 / 8 IN ,
WinAirB1 - AIRSPACE RESISTANCE ,
GLASS - CLEAR SHEET 1 / 8 IN ,
ROLL SHADE - LIGHT
1.8.42 Site:GroundTemperature:FCfactorMethod
Site:GroundTemperature:FCfactorMethod is used only by the underground walls or slabs-on-grade or un-
derground floors defined with C-factor (Construction:CfactorUndergroundWall) and F-factor (Construc-
tion:FfactorGroundFloor) method for code compliance calculations where detailed construction layers are
unknown. Only one such ground temperature object can be included. The monthly ground temperatures
for this object are close to the monthly outside air temperatures delayed by three months. If user does not
input this object in the IDF file, it will be defaulted to the 0.5m set of monthly ground temperatures from
the weather file if they are available.
1.8.42.1 Inputs
1.8.42.1.1 Field: Month Temperature(s) – 12 fields in all
Each numeric field is the monthly ground temperature (degrees Celsius) used for the indicated month
(January = 1st field, February = 2nd field, etc.)
And, the IDF example:
Site:GroundTemperature:FCfactorMethod , 9.5 ,3.5 , -0.7 , -1.7 , -0.6 ,3.6 ,9.3 ,14 ,18.2 ,22.7 ,21.2 ,16.8;
A simplified approach is introduced to create equivalent constructions and model the ground heat
transfer through underground walls and ground floors for the building energy code compliance calcula-
tions. The approach is to create constructions based on the user defined C or F factor with two layers:
one concrete layer (0.15 m thick) with thermal mass, and one fictitious insulation layer with no thermal
mass. Three new objects were created for such purpose: Construction:CfactorUndergroundWall,
Construction:FfactorGroundFloor, and Site:GroundTemperature:FCfactorMethod. Details of
the approach are described in the Engineering Reference document. The wall and floor construction objects
are described in this section; the ground temperature object is described with the other ground temperature
objects.
When a underground wall or ground floor surface (BuildingSurface:Detailed, Floor:Detailed, and
Wall:Detailed) references one of the two construction objects, its field ‘Outside Boundary Condition’
needs to be set to GroundFCfactorMethod. For simple (rectangular) wall and floor objects, the outside
boundary condition is inferred from the construction type.
The Site:GroundTemperature:FCfactorMethod is described in the section for ground temperatures, the
following section describes the two new construction objects.
1.8.44 Construction:CfactorUndergroundWall
This input object differs from the usual wall construction object in that it describes an entire construction
rather than individual layers. This object is used when only the wall height (depth to the ground) and the
C-factor are available. This object accesses a model that creates an equivalent layer-by-layer construction
for the underground wall to approximate the heat transfer through the wall considering the thermal mass
of the earth soil.
This object is referenced by underground wall surfaces with their fields ‘Outside Boundary Condition’
set to GroundFCfactorMethod.
1.8.44.1 Inputs
1.8.44.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the underground wall construction.
Construction:CfactorUndergroundWall ,
CfactorUGWall ,
0.436 , ! C-factor (W/m2K), does not include soil or air films
4.57; ! Height (m)
BuildingSurface:Detailed ,
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Name
Wall , !- Surface Type
CfactorUGWall , !- Construction Name
226 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.8.45 Construction:FfactorGroundFloor
This input object differs from the usual ground floor construction object in that it describes an entire
construction rather than individual layers. This object is used when only the floor area, exposed perimeter,
and the F-factor are available. This object accesses a model that creates an equivalent layer-by-layer
construction for the slab-on-grade or underground floor to approximate the heat transfer through the floor
considering the thermal mass of the earth soil.
This object is referenced by slab-on-grade or underground floor surfaces with their fields ‘Outside
Boundary Condition’ set to GroundFCfactorMethod.
1.8.45.1 Inputs
1.8.45.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the ground floor construction.
Construction:FfactorGroundFloor ,
slabconst ,
0.12, !F-factor in W/m-K
232.26 , !Area in m2
61.0; !Exposed perimeter in m
BuildingSurface:Detailed ,
Zn001:Flr001 , !- Name
Floor , !- Surface Type
slabconst , !- Construction Name , FLOOR
ZONE ONE , !- Zone Name
GroundFCfactorMethod , !- Outside Boundary Condition , Surface
, !- Outside Boundary Condition Object , Zn001:Flr001
NoSun , !- Sun Exposure
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 227
1.8.46 Construction:InternalSource
In some cases such as radiant systems, a construction will actually have resistance wires or hydronic tubing
embedded within the construction. Heat is then either added or removed from this building element to
provide heating or cooling to the zone in question. In the case of building-integrated photovoltaics, the
energy removed in the form of electricity will form a sink. It is possible to enter such constructions into
EnergyPlus with the syntax described below. The definition is similar to the Construction definition with
a few additions related to radiant or other systems that will lead to source/sink terms. The internal source
capability is available with both the ConductionTransferFunction and ConductionFiniteDifference
solution algorithms. The only difference is that the two dimensional pipe arrangements are not available
to ConductionFiniteDifference. Those fields are ignored in that implementation.
1.8.46.1 Inputs
1.8.46.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a user specified name that will be used as a reference by other input syntax. For example,
a heat transfer surface (ref: Building Surfaces) requires a construction name to define what the make-up
of the wall is.
This may be necessary for hydronic radiant cooling situations since chiller performance is affected by the
water temperatures provided.
A few things should be noted about requesting two-dimensional solutions. First, the calculation of the
conduction transfer functions (CTF) is fairly intensive and will require a significant amount of computing
time. Second, the solution regime is two-dimensional internally but it has a one-dimensional boundary
condition imposed at the inside and outside surface (i.e., surface temperatures are still isothermal is if the
surface was one-dimensional).
1.8.46.2 Outputs
• Zone,Average,Surface Internal Source Location Temperature [C]
The materials here are not real materials but are “equivalent” materials obtained from finite-difference
modeling. (The thickness, conductivity, density and specific heat values of the material layers for the
different constructions have been taken from the ASHRAE report “Modeling Two- and Three-Dimensional
Heat Transfer through Composite Wall and Roof Assemblies in Hourly Energy Simulation Programs (1145-
TRP),” by Enermodal Engineering Limited, Oak Ridge National Laboratory, and the Polish Academy of
Sciences, January 2001.). EnergyPlus will calculate conduction transfer functions using these materials.
The heat transfer based on these conduction transfer functions will then be very close to what would be
calculated with a two- or three-dimensional heat transfer calculation.
For stud walls, using these composite constructions will give more accurate heat flow than you would
get by manually dividing the wall into a stud section and a non-stud section.
If your wall’s exterior or interior roughness or thermal, solar or visible absorptances are different from
those in the data set, you can make the appropriate changes to the first material (the outside layer) or the
third material (the inside layer). None of the other values should be changed.
Complete description of the CompositeWallConstructions data set are found in the OutputDetail-
sAndExamples document.
1.8.48 Construction:ComplexFenestrationState
This input object is used to describe the properties of a single state for complex fenestration. There are
two parts to the input, 1) layer-by-layer physical description of fenestration system and 2) a set of matrices
that describe overall system optical performance. Each layer also has associated with it two matrices that
give the layer absorptance (for front and back incidence on the system.
The optical properties are given as a two-dimensional matrix describing the basis and four two-
dimensional matrices of system bidirectional optical properties.
These input objects will generally be exported directly from the WINDOW program and it is expected
that users usually will not develop the input themselves. However, this is an option for users who prefer
to use a different method (e.g., Monte-Carlo ray-trace or measurement) of determining optical properties.
Multiple instances of this object are used to define the separate operating states of complex fenestra-
tion. For example, blinds could be deployed or redirected to create a new state, or electrochromic glazings
could change transmittance. Each separate state defines the materials present and the overall optical
performance. If the glazing system has only one state, then only one of these objects is needed.
If there is more than one complex fenestration state, it will be controlled using the EMS actuator called
“Surface” with the control type “Construction State” and the EMS input object called EnergyManage-
mentSystem:ConstructionIndexVariable.
1.8.48.1 Inputs
1.8.48.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name of this construction. Used to identify type of window in surface objects.
CFS_Glz_1_RbSol , !- Rbsol
CFS_Glz_1_Tfvis , !- Tfvis
CFS_Glz_1_Tbvis , !- Tbvis
Glass_102_Layer , !- layer 1 name
CFS_Glz_1_Layer_1_fAbs , !- fAbs
CFS_Glz_1_Layer_1_bAbs ; !- bAbs
An complex fenestration IDF example with double layer (first layer is shading device):
1.8.49 WindowThermalModel:Params
This input object is used with the Construction:ComplexFenestrationState
1.8.49.1 Inputs
1.8.49.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name of the window thermal model parameters.
WindowThermalModel :Params ,
ThermParam_59 , !- name
ISO15099 , !- standard
ISO15099 , !- thermal model standard
1.00, !- SD scalar
NoDeflection; !- deflection model
WindowThermalModel :Params ,
ThermParam_59 , !- name
ISO15099 , !- standard
ISO15099 , !- thermal model standard
1.00, !- SD scalar
TemperatureAndPressureInput , !- deflection model
, !- vacuum pressure limit
21.00 , !- temperature at time of fabrication
10000.00; !- pressure at time of fabrication
WindowThermalModel :Params ,
ThermParam_1006 , !- name
ISO15099 , !- standard
ISO15099 , !- thermal model
1.0000 , !- SDScalar
NoDeflection , !- deflection model
13.238; !- vacuum pressure limit
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 233
1.8.50 Matrix:TwoDimension
This is input object is only used with Construction:ComplexFenestrationState object to enter a two-
dimensional matrix of values.
It is used to define the Basis Matrix for BSDF input data, and is also used to define the actual BSDF
matrices data for the complete fenestration definition as well as the individual layers of the system.
The data are entered in row-major order: all the elements of row 1, followed by all the elements of
row 2, etc. The number of values to be entered depends on the number of rows and the number of
columns. Blank fields are treated as having been set to zero.
See example IDF file “SmOff_ CmplxGlz_IntExtShading.idf” for the definition of two complex shading
layers with matrix data defined.
1.8.51 Construction:WindowEquivalentLayer
This object defines the construction for equivalent layer window (ASHWAT) model. This window can
model various mix of glazing and shading layers combination. Shadings are defined as an integral part of
the construction. The construction is defined by listing the layers name starting with outside layer and
work your way to the inside Layer. Up to six solid layers (glazing and shade) and up to five gaps, i.e.,
a total of up to 11 layers maximum are allowed in equivalent layer window object. The solid layer types
allowed are: Glazing, Insect Screen, Roller Blinds, Venetian Blind, and Drape Fabrics. This window model
requires optical data of the individual glazing and shading layers to calculate the effective optical properties
of the composite fenestration construction. Venetian blinds in equivalent layer window model can be in
a fixed slat angle or has the option to control the slat angle in order to maximize visibility, or maximize
solar gains. An equivalent-layer concept can simulate wide range of multiple glazing and shading layers
combination and provides unlimited flexibility to combine different types of shading layers in a fenestration.
The equivalent-layer window model does not support daylighting control. For the gap layer object any
one of the five different Gas types can be specified: AIR, ARGON, XENON, KRYPTON, or CUSTOM.
This window object is referenced by fenestration surfaces. For details of the model description refer to
Equivalent Layer Fenestration Model section in Engineering Reference. The various layer objects that can
be referenced in Equivalent Layer window model are:
WindowMaterial:Glass:EquivalentLayer
WindowMaterial:Shade:EquivalentLayer
WindowMaterial:Drape:EquivalentLayer
WindowMaterial:Blind:EquivalentLayer
WindowMaterial:Screen:EquivalentLayer
WindowMaterial:Gap:EquivalentLayer
1.8.51.1 Inputs
1.8.51.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a user specified name that will be used as a reference by other input syntax. For example,
a heat transfer surface (ref: Fenestration) requires a construction name to define what the make-up of
the fenestration is. This name must be identical to one of the Window Construction Equivalent Layer
definitions in the input data file.
Construction:WindowEquivalentLayer ,
Six Solid Layers Window , !- Name
1.8. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 235
1.8.52 Construction:WindowDataFile
The WINDOW program, which does a thermal and optical analysis of a window under different design
conditions, writes a data file (“Window data file”) containing a description of the window that was analyzed.
The Construction:WindowDataFile object allows a window to be read in from the WINDOW data file—
see “Importing Windows from WINDOW.” For information on adding a shading device to the window see
“WindowShadingControl.”
1.8.52.1 Inputs
1.8.52.1.1 Field: Name
This is the name of a window on the Window data file. An error will result if EnergyPlus cannot find
a window of this name on the file, or if the file, shown in the next field, is not present. The location of the
data file should be specified in the File Name field. For details on what is done with the data if a matching
window is found on the file see “Importing Windows from WINDOW.”
FenestrationSurface:Detailed ,
Zn001:Wall001:Win001 , !- Name
Window , !- Class
DoubleClear , !- Construction Name
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Base Surface Name , and Target (if applicable)
0.5, !- View Factor to Ground
, !- Frame/Divider name
1.0, !- Multiplier
4, !- Number of vertices
0.548 , 0.0, 2.5000 , !- X,Y,Z of Vertices
0.548 , 0.0, 0.5000 ,
5.548 , 0.0, 0.5000 ,
5.548 , 0.0, 2.5000;
An example showing use of specific data file name and complete path location follows:
236 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Construction:WindowDataFile ,
DoubleClear , !- Name of a Window on the Window Data File
C:\ EnergyPlusData\DataSets\MyWindow.dat;
1.8.52.2 Outputs
An optional report (contained in eplusout.eio) gives calculational elements for the materials and construc-
tions used in the input. These reports are explained fully in the Output Details and Examples document.
1.9.1 Zone
This element sets up the parameters to simulate each thermal zone of the building.
1.9.1.1 Inputs
1.9.1.1.1 Field: Direction of Relative North
The Zone North Axis is specified relative to the Building North Axis. This value is specified in
degrees (clockwise is positive). For more information, see the figure below as well as the description under
“GlobalGeometryRules”.
zone. If this field is 0.0, negative or autocalculate, then the calculated zone ceiling height will be used
in subsequent calculations. If this field is positive, then the calculated zone ceiling height will not be used
– the number entered here will be used as the zone ceiling height. If this number differs significantly from
the calculated ceiling height, then a warning message will be issued. If a zone ceiling height is entered, but
no Volume is entered, then the floor area (if there is one) times the zone ceiling height will be used as the
volume.
Note that the Zone Ceiling Height is the distance from the Floor to the Ceiling in the Zone, not an
absolute height from the ground.
on Figure 1.142, Page 25.1 (Thermal and Water Vapor Transmission Data), 2001 ASHRAE Handbook of
Fundamentals.
The other convection models apply heat transfer coefficients depending on the roughness, windspeed,
and terrain of the building’s location. These are convection only heat transfer coefficients; radiation heat
transfer coefficients are calculated automatically by the program. The TARP algorithm was developed
for the TARP software and combines natural and wind-driven convection correlations from laboratory
measurements on flat plates. The DOE-2 and MoWiTT were derived from field measurements. The
AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm model is an dynamic algorithm that organizes a large number of different
convection models and automatically selects the one that best applies. The adaptive convection algorithm
can also be customized using the SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Outside:AdaptiveModelSelections input ob-
ject. All algorithms are described more fully in the Engineering Reference.
If omitted or blank, the algorithm specified in the SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Outside object is the
default.
Zone ,
DORM ROOMS AND COMMON AREAS , !- Name
0.0000000E+00, !- Direction of Relative North {deg}
0.0000000E+00, !- X Origin {m}
6.096000 , !- Y Origin {m}
0.0000000E+00, !- Z Origin {m}
1, !- Type
1, !- Multiplier
autocalculate , !-Ceiling Height {m}
autocalculate; !- Volume {m3}
1.9.1.2 Outputs
• Zone,Average,Zone Outdoor Air Drybulb Temperature [C]
• HVAC,Average,Zone Air Heat Balance Internal Convective Heat Gain Rate [W]
• HVAC,Average,Zone Air Heat Balance System Convective Heat Gain Rate [W]
These two variable outputs are/should be identical. However, note that they can be reported at different
time intervals. “Zone Mean Air Temperature” is only available on the Zone/HB timestep (Number of
Timesteps per Hour) whereas “Zone Air Temperature” can be reported at the HVAC timestep (which can
vary).
1.9.2.7 Zone Air Heat Balance Internal Convective Heat Gain Rate [W]
The Zone Air Heat Balance Internal Convective Heat Gain Rate is the sum, in watts, of heat transferred to
the zone air from all types of internal gains, including people, lights, equipment etc. This and the following
provide results on the load components of the zone air heat balance. This field is not multiplied by zone
or group multipliers.
1.9.2.9 Zone Air Heat Balance Interzone Air Transfer Rate [W]
The Zone Air Heat Balance Interzone Air Transfer Rate is the sum, in watts, of heat transferred to the
zone air from all the transfers of air from other thermal zones. This field is not multiplied by zone or group
multipliers.
1.9.2.10 Zone Air Heat Balance Outdoor Air Transfer Rate [W]
The Zone Air Heat Balance Outdoor Air Transfer Rate is the sum, in watts, of heat transferred to the
zone air from all the transfers of air from the out side, such as infiltration. This field is not multiplied by
zone or group multipliers.
1.9.2.11 Zone Air Heat Balance System Air Transfer Rate [W]
The Zone Air Heat Balance System Air Transfer Rate is the sum, in watts, of heat transferred to the zone
air by HVAC forced-air systems and air terminal units. Such HVAC systems are connected to the zone by
an inlet node (see ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections input field called Zone Air Inlet Node or Node List
Name) This field is not multiplied by zone or group multipliers. The Zone Air Heat Balance System Air
Transfer Rate may not agree exactly with the equipment-level delivered energy transfer rate when the zone
temperature is changing significantly over a timestep (e.g. during thermostat setback and setup), but the
energy will balance out over time.
1.9.2.12 Zone Air Heat Balance System Convective Heat Gain Rate [W]
The Zone Air Heat Balance System Convective Heat Gain Rate is the sum, in watts, of heat transferred
directly to the zone air by “non-air” HVAC systems. Such HVAC systems are not connected to the zone by
an inlet node but rather add or subtract heat directly to the zone air in a manner similar to internal gains.
These include the convective fraction of zone HVAC baseboards and high temperature radiant systems,
zone HVAC refrigeration chiller set, and the extra convective cooling provided by the cooled beam air
terminal unit. This field is not multiplied by zone or group multipliers.
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 243
1.9.2.13 Zone Air Heat Balance Air Energy Storage Rate [W]
The Zone Air Heat Balance Air Energy Storage Rate is the heat stored, in watts, in the zone air as result
of zone air temperature changing from one timestep to the next. This field is not multiplied by zone or
group multipliers.
Zone Air System Sensible Heating (and Cooling) Energy (and Rate) all report the heating or cooling
delivered by the HVAC system to a zone. These values are calculated by multiplying the supply air
mass flow rate by the difference between the supply air temperature and the zone air temperature.
This does not always indicate the operation of heating or cooling coils. For example, cooling will be
reported if the supply air is cooled due to the introduction of outside air, even if all coils are off.
Note that these variables are calculated at the system timestep. When reported at the “detailed” re-
porting frequency, these variable will never show heating and cooling both in the same system timestep.
If reported at a frequency less than “Detailed” (for example, Hourly) values may appear in both the
heating and cooling variable for the same hour if the system cooled the zone for part of the reporting
period and heated the zone for another part of the reporting period.
1.9.3 ZoneList
The ZoneList object defines a list of Zone objects. It is primarily used with the ZoneGroup object to
provide a generalized way for doing “Floor Multipliers”. (See the ZoneGroup description below.) The
associated ZoneList output variables also provide a way to aggregate and organize zone loads.
Zone lists are not exclusive. A zone can be referenced be more than one ZoneList object.
1.9.3.1 Inputs
1.9.3.1.1 Field: Zone List Name
The name of the ZoneList object. Must be unique across ZoneLists.
246 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
ZoneList ,
Mid Floor List , !- Name
Mid West Zone , !- Zone 1 Name
Mid Center Zone , !- Zone 2 Name
Mid East Zone; !- Zone 3 Name
1.9.3.2 Outputs
The following output variables are reported by the ZoneList object:
All ZoneList variables are the sum of the corresponding Zone variables. Zone Multiplier fields in the
Zone objects are also taken into account.
1.9.4 ZoneGroup
The ZoneGroup object adds a multiplier to a ZoneList. This can be used to reduce the amount of input
necessary for simulating repetitive structures, such as the identical floors of a multi-story building. To
create a “Floor Multiplier”, use the ZoneList object to organize several zones into a typical floor. Then
use the Zone List Multiplier field in the ZoneGroup object to multiply the system load for the zones in the
list will also be multiplied. Zones with a Multiplier field greater than one in the Zone object are effectively
double-multiplied.
NOTE: Although ZoneLists are not exclusive by themselves, ZoneLists used to form a ZoneGroup
are exclusive; the ZoneLists used with a ZoneGroup must not have any zones in common.
1.9.4.1 Inputs
1.9.4.1.1 Tips for Multi-Story Simulations:
• For floors that are multiplied, connect exterior boundary conditions of the floor to the ceiling and
vice versa.
• Since exterior convection coefficients vary with elevation, locate the typical middle floor zones mid-
height between the lowest and highest middle floors to be modeled.
• Shading must be identical for all multiplied floors or less accurate results may be obtained by using
the zone list multiplier.
ZoneGroup and ZoneList can also be used to simulate other repetitive cases, such as clusters of zones
on the ground.
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 247
ZONE GROUP ,
Mid Floor , !- Zone Group Name
Mid Floor List , !- Zone List Name
8; !- Zone List Multiplier
1.9.4.2 Outputs
The following output variables are reported by the ZoneGroup object:
All ZoneGroup variables report the associated ZoneList value multiplied by the Zone List Multiplier.
1.9.5 Surface(s)
What’s a building without surfaces?
EnergyPlus allows for several surface types:
• BuildingSurface:Detailed
• FenestrationSurface:Detailed
• Shading:Site:Detailed
• Shading:Building:Detailed
• Shading:Zone:Detailed
248 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Each of the preceding surfaces has “correct” geometry specifications. BuildingSurface and Fenestration
surfaces (heat transfer surfaces) are used to describe the important elements of the building (walls, roofs,
floors, windows, doors) that will determine the interactions of the building surfaces with the outside
environment parameters and the internal space requirements. These surfaces are also used to represent
“interzone” heat transfer. All surfaces are modeled as a thin plane (with no thickness) except that material
thicknesses are taken into account for heat transfer calculations.
During specification of surfaces, several “outside” environments may be chosen:
• Ground – when the surface is in touch with the ground (e.g. slab floors)
• Outdoors – when the surface is an external surface (e.g. walls, roofs, windows directly exposed to
the outdoor conditions)
– A interzone surface in which the other surface is not put in the input file.
• OtherSideCoefficients – when using a custom profile to describe the external conditions of the
surface (advanced concept – covered in subject: SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients)
• The zone that contains the other surface that is adjacent to this surface but is not entered in input.
Note that heat transfer surfaces are fully represented with each description. As stated earlier in
the Construction description, materials in the construction (outside to inside) are included but film
coefficients neither inside nor outside are used in the description – these are automatically calculated
during the EnergyPlus run. Interzone surfaces which do not have a symmetrical construction (such
as a ceiling/floor) require two Construction objects with the layers in reverse order. For example,
CEILING with carpet, concrete, ceiling tile and FLOOR with ceiling tile, concrete, carpet. If interzone
surfaces have a symmetrical construction, the specification for the two surfaces can reference the same
Construction. When a surface is connected as the outside boundary condition for another surface, the
two surfaces may be in the same plane, or they may be separated to imply thickness.
Shading surfaces are used to describe aspects of the site which do not directly impact the physical
interactions of the environmental parameters but may significantly shade the building during specific hours
of the day or time so the year (e.g. trees, bushes, mountains, nearby buildings which aren’t being simulated
as part of this facility, etc.)
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 249
Note that surfaces which are part of the simulated building automatically shade other parts of the
building as geometry and time of day dictate – there is no need on the user’s part to include surfaces
that might be in other zones for shading.
• InternalMass
is used to specify the construction/material parameters and area of items within the space that are
important to heat transfer calculations but not necessarily important geometrically. (For example, furniture
within the space – particularly for large spaces). Internal mass can also be used for internal walls that
are not needed (when FullInteriorAndExterior Solar Distribution is in effect) for solar distribution or to
represent many, if not all, interior walls when solar is distributed to the floors only.
• Adiabatic Surfaces – These surfaces would be represented as common surfaces (between two zones)
where both zones are typically the same temperature. Thus, no transfer is expected in the surface
from one zone to the next. These surfaces should be described as simply internal surfaces for the
zone referencing as their Outside Boundary Condition Object (see later description in individual
surface objects) their own surface names.
• Surfaces in Middle Zones – Middle zones in a building can be simulated using a judicious use of
surfaces and zone multipliers to effect the correct “loads” for the building. Thus, middle zone
behavior can be simulated without modeling the adjacent zones. This is done by specifying a surface
within the zone. For example, a middle floor zone can be modeled by making the floor the Outside
Boundary Condition Object for the ceiling, and the ceiling the Outside Boundary Condition Object
for the floor.
• Surfaces between Zones with differing temperatures – These zones represent the true use of interzone
surfaces. In a residence that has an attached garage, the garage may be unheated/uncooled or at
least not conditioned to the same degree as the residence interior. In this case, EnergyPlus can be
used to accurately calculate the effects of the differently conditioned space to the other spaces.
Second, surfaces with approximately the same azimuth (facing direction) and tilt (“same” being within a
built in limit) will not see each other. This means that a window will not see the wall that it is placed on,
for example. Third, floors cannot see each other. Fourth, if the surface is a floor, ceiling, roof, or internal
mass, the rule for the same azimuth and tilt eliminating radiant exchange between surface is waived when
the receiving surface is floor, roof, ceiling, or internal mass as long as both surfaces are not floors.
Note that this does not take into account that surfaces may be “around the corner” from each other
and in reality not see each other at all. Rooms are assumed to be convex rather than concave in this
method.
To summarize, using the Surface “Class”, the approximate view factors have:
7. All other surfaces whose tilt or facing angle differences are greater than 10 degrees see each other.
If geometry is correct, conditions 1, 3, and 7 should take care of all surfaces, but the other conditions
supply common sense when the geometry is incorrect. More information about the EnergyPlus view factor
calculation is contained in the Engineering Reference document.
1.9.8 GlobalGeometryRules
Before the surface objects are explained in detail, a description of geometric parameters used in EnergyPlus
will be given. Since the input of surface vertices is common to most of the surface types, it will also be
given a separate discussion.
Some flexibility is allowed in specifying surface vertices. This flexibility is embodied in the GlobalGe-
ometryRules class/object in the input file. Note that the parameters specified in this statement are used
for all surface vertice inputs – there is no further “flexibility” allowed.
In order to perform shadowing calculations, the building surfaces must be specified. EnergyPlus uses
a three dimensional (3D) Cartesian coordinate system for surface vertex specification. This Right Hand
coordinate system has the X-axis pointing east, the Y-axis pointing north, and the Z-axis pointing up. See
figure below.
1.9.8.1 Inputs
1.9.8.1.1 Field: Starting Vertex Position
The shadowing algorithms in EnergyPlus rely on surfaces having vertices in a certain order and po-
sitional structure. Thus, the surface translator needs to know the starting point for each surface entry.
The choices are: UpperLeftCorner, LowerLeftCorner , UpperRightCorner, or LowerRightCorner. Since
most surfaces will be 4 sided, the convention will specify this position as though each surface were 4 sided.
Extrapolate 3 sided figures to this convention. For 5 and more sided figures, again, try to extrapolate the
best “corner” starting position.
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 251
1.9.9 Surfaces
Surfaces make up the buildings and the elements that shade buildings. There are several methods to
inputting surfaces, ranging from simple rectangular surfaces to detailed descriptions that describe each
vertex in the order specified in the GlobalGeometryRules object. The simple, rectangular surface objects
are described first with the more detailed descriptions following.
1.9.10 Walls
Walls are usually vertical (tilt = 90 degrees). These objects are used to describe exterior walls, interior
walls (adiabatic), underground walls, and walls adjacent to other zones.
1.9.11 Wall:Exterior
The Wall:Exterior object is used to describe walls that are exposed to the external environment. They
receive sun, wind – all the characteristics of the external world.
1.9.11.1 Inputs
1.9.11.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique name associated with the exterior wall. It is used in several other places as a reference
(e.g. as the base surface name for a Window or Door).
1.9.12 Wall:Adiabatic
The Wall:Adiabatic object is used to describe interior walls and partitions. Adiabatic walls are used to
describe walls next to zones that have the same thermal conditions (thus, no heat transfer).
1.9.12.1 Inputs
1.9.12.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique name associated with the interior wall. It is used in several other places as a reference
(e.g. as the base surface name for a Window or Door).
1.9.13 Wall:Underground
The Wall:Underground object is used to describe walls with ground contact. The temperature at the
outside of the wall is the temperature in the GroundTemperature:BuildingSurface object.
1.9.13.1 Inputs
1.9.13.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique name associated with the underground wall. It is used in several other places as a
reference (e.g. as the base surface name for a Window or Door).
1.9.14 Wall:Interzone
The Wall:Interzone object is used to describe walls adjacent to zones that are significantly different condi-
tions than the zone with this wall.
1.9.14.1 Inputs
1.9.14.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique name associated with the interzone wall. It is used in several other places as a reference
(e.g. as the base surface name for a Window or Door).
1.9.15 Roofs/Ceilings
Roofs and ceilings are, by default, flat (tilt = 0 degrees). These objects are used to describe roofs, interior
ceilings (adiabatic) and ceilings adjacent to other zones.
1.9.16 Roof
The Roof object is used to describe roofs that are exposed to the external environment.
1.9.16.1 Inputs
1.9.16.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique name associated with the roof. It is used in several other places as a reference (e.g. as
the base surface name for a Window or Door).
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 257
1.9.17 Ceiling:Adiabatic
The Ceiling:Adiabatic object is used to describe interior ceilings that separate zones of like conditions.
1.9.17.1 Inputs
1.9.17.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique name associated with the ceiling. It is used in several other places as a reference
(e.g. as the base surface name for a Window or Door).
258 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.9.18 Ceiling:Interzone
The Ceiling:Interzone object is used to describe interior ceilings that separate zones of differing conditions
(and expect heat transfer through the ceiling from the adjacent zone).
1.9.18.1 Inputs
1.9.18.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique name associated with the interzone ceiling. It is used in several other places as a
reference (e.g. as the base surface name for a Window or Door).
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 259
1.9.19 Floors
Floors are, by default, flat (tilt = 180 degrees). These objects are used to describe floors on the ground,
interior floors (adiabatic) and floors adjacent to other zones.
260 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.9.20 Floor:GroundContact
The Floor:GroundContact object is used to describe floors that have ground contact (usually called slabs).
The temperature at the outside of the floor is the temperature in the GroundTemperature:BuildingSurface
object.
1.9.20.1 Inputs
1.9.20.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique name associated with the floor.
1.9.21 Floor:Adiabatic
The Floor:Adiabatic object is used to describe interior floors or floors that you wish to model with no heat
transfer from the exterior to the floor.
1.9.21.1 Inputs
1.9.21.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique name associated with the floor.
1.9.22 Floor:Interzone
The Floor:Interzone object is used to describe floors that are adjacent to other zones that have differing
conditions and you wish to model the heat transfer through the floor.
1.9.22.1 Inputs
1.9.22.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique name associated with the floor.
1.9.23 Windows/Doors
The following window and door objects can be used to specify simple, rectangular doors and windows.
In each case, the lower left corner (locator coordinate) of the window or door is specified relative to the
surface it is on. Viewing the base surface as a planar surface, base the relative location from the lower left
corner of the base surface. Vertex entry description as well as provisions for a few other surface types can
be entered with the FenestrationSurface:Detailed object.
1.9.24 Window
The Window object is used to place windows on surfaces that can have windows, including exterior walls,
interior walls, interzone walls, roofs, floors that are exposed to outdoor conditions, interzone ceiling/floors.
These, of course, can be entered using the simple rectangular objects or the more detailed vertex entry
objects. Shades and screens may be applied by referencing this subsurface in a window shading control
(ref: WindowShadingControl object). To assign a shade to a window or glass door, see WindowMaterial:
Shade. To assign a screen, see WindowMaterial:Screen. To assign a blind, see WindowMaterial:Blind. To
assign switchable glazing, such as electrochromic glazing, see WindowShadingControl.
1.9.24.1 Inputs
1.9.24.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique name associated with the window.
1.9.25 Door
The Door object is used to place opaque doors on surfaces that can have doors, including exterior walls,
interior walls, interzone walls, roofs, floors that are exposed to outdoor conditions, interzone ceiling/floors.
These, of course, can be entered using the simple rectangular objects or the more detailed vertex entry
objects.
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 265
1.9.25.1 Inputs
1.9.25.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique name associated with the door.
1.9.26 GlazedDoor
The GlazedDoor object is used to place doors on surfaces that can have doors, including exterior walls,
interior walls, interzone walls, roofs, floors that are exposed to outdoor conditions, interzone ceiling/floors.
These, of course, can be entered using the simple rectangular objects or the more detailed vertex entry
objects. Shades and screens may be applied by referencing this subsurface in a window shading control
(ref: WindowShadingControl object). To assign a shade to a window or glass door, see WindowMaterial:
Shade. To assign a screen, see WindowMaterial:Screen. To assign a blind, see WindowMaterial:Blind. To
assign switchable glazing, such as electrochromic glazing, see WindowShadingControl.
1.9.26.1 Inputs
1.9.26.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique name associated with the glass door.
multiplication, may not be representative of the results you would get if you entered each of the multiple
subsurfaces separately.
If Multiplier > 1, you will get
–a warning if Solar Distribution = FullExterior or FullInteriorAndExterior (ref: Building - Field: Solar
Distribution), indicating that the shadowing on the input window or the interior solar radiation distribution
from the input window may not be representative of the actual group of windows. No warning is issued if
Solar Distribution = MinimalShadowing.
–an error if the window is an exterior window/glass door in a zone that has a detailed daylighting
calculation (Daylighting:Detailed specified for the zone). Since a single window with a multiplier can never
give the same daylight illuminance as the actual set of windows, you are not allowed to use Multiplier in
this situation.
1.9.27 Window:Interzone
The Window:Interzone object is used to place windows on surfaces that can have windows, including
interzone walls, interzone ceiling/floors. These, of course, can be entered using the simple rectangular
objects or the more detailed vertex entry objects.
1.9.27.1 Inputs
1.9.27.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique name associated with the window.
1.9.28 Door:Interzone
The Door:Interzone object is used to place opaque doors on surfaces that can have doors, including interzone
walls, interzone ceiling/floors. These, of course, can be entered using the simple rectangular objects or the
more detailed vertex entry objects.
1.9.28.1 Inputs
1.9.28.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique name associated with the door.
1.9.29 GlazedDoor:Interzone
The GlazedDoor:Interzone object is used to place doors on surfaces that can have doors, including interzone
walls, interzone ceiling/floors. These, of course, can be entered using the simple rectangular objects or the
more detailed vertex entry objects.
1.9.29.1 Inputs
1.9.29.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique name associated with the glass door.
Wall:Exterior ,
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Name
EXTERIOR , !- Construction Name
ZONE 1, !- Zone Name
180, !- Azimuth Angle {deg}
90, !- Tilt Angle {deg}
0, !- Starting X Coordinate {m}
0, !- Starting Y Coordinate {m}
0, !- Starting Z Coordinate {m}
20, !- Length {m}
272 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Window ,
Zn001:Wall001:Win001 , !- Name
SINGLE PANE HW WINDOW , !- Construction Name
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Building Surface Name
, !- Frame and Divider Name
1, !- Multiplier
4, !- Starting X Coordinate {m}
3, !- Starting Z Coordinate {m}
3, !- Length {m}
5; !- Height {m}
Door ,
Zn001:Wall001:Door001 , !- Name
HOLLOW WOOD DOOR , !- Construction Name
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Building Surface Name
1, !- Multiplier
14, !- Starting X Coordinate {m}
0, !- Starting Z Coordinate {m}
3, !- Length {m}
5; !- Height {m}
Wall:Adiabatic ,
Zn001:Wall004 , !- Name
INTERIOR , !- Construction Name
ZONE 1, !- Zone Name
90, !- Azimuth Angle {deg}
90, !- Tilt Angle {deg}
20, !- Starting X Coordinate {m}
0, !- Starting Y Coordinate {m}
0, !- Starting Z Coordinate {m}
20, !- Length {m}
10; !- Height {m}
Floor:Adiabatic ,
Zn001:Flr001 , !- Name
FLOOR , !- Construction Name
ZONE 1, !- Zone Name
90, !- Azimuth Angle {deg}
180, !- Tilt Angle {deg}
0, !- Starting X Coordinate {m}
0, !- Starting Y Coordinate {m}
0, !- Starting Z Coordinate {m}
20, !- Length {m}
20; !- Width {m}
Ceiling:Interzone ,
Zn001:Roof001 , !- Name
CEILING34 , !- Construction Name
ZONE 1, !- Zone Name
Zn003:Flr001 , !- Outside Boundary Condition Object
180, !- Azimuth Angle {deg}
0, !- Tilt Angle {deg}
0, !- Starting X Coordinate {m}
0, !- Starting Y Coordinate {m}
10, !- Starting Z Coordinate {m}
20, !- Length {m}
20; !- Width {m}
Window ,
Zn002:Wall001:Win001 , !- Name
SINGLE PANE HW WINDOW , !- Construction Name
Zn002:Wall001 , !- Building Surface Name
, !- Frame and Divider Name
1, !- Multiplier
4, !- Starting X Coordinate {m}
3, !- Starting Z Coordinate {m}
3, !- Length {m}
5; !- Height {m}
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 273
• BuildingSurface:Detailed
• Wall:Detailed
• RoofCeiling:Detailed
• Floor:Detailed
• FenestrationSurface:Detailed
• Shading:Site:Detailed
• Shading:Building:Detailed
• Shading:Zone:Detailed
use the same vertex input. The numeric parameters indicated below are taken from the Building-
Surface:Detailed definition; the others may not be exactly the same but are identical in configuration.
They are also “extensible” – so, if you want more vertices for these surfaces, you may add to the IDD
definition as indicated in the “extensible” comment or, as EnergyPlus is “auto-extensible” just add the
number of vertices into your input file.. Note that FenestrationSurface:Detailed is not extensible and is
limited to 4 (max) vertices. If you leave the Number of Surface Vertex groups blank or enter autocalcu-
late, EnergyPlus looks at the number of groups entered and figures out how many coordinate groups are
entered.
Note that the resolution on the surface vertex input is 1 millimeter (.001 meter).
Therefore, using vertices that are very close together (< 1 mm) may result in invalid dot
product and fatal errors during shading calculations.
The figure above will help illustrate Surface Vertex entry. The convention used in “GlobalGeome-
tryRules” dictates the order of the vertices (ref: GlobalGeometryRules). In this example, the conventions
used are Starting Vertex Position = UpperLeftCorner and Vertex Entry Direction = CounterClockwise.
The surfaces for this single zone are:
4,0,0,H, 0,0,0, A,0,0, A,0,H; ! (4 vertices , South Wall)
4,A,0,H,A,0,0,A,B,0,A,B,H; ! (4 vertices , East Wall)
ignore other walls that are not shown in this figure
4,C,0,J,A,0,H,A,B,H,C,B,J; ! (4 vertices , roof)
3,C,0,J,0,0,H,A,0,H; ! (3 vertices , gable end)
4,0,0,H, 0,0,0, A,0,0, A,0,H; ! (4 vertices , South Wall)
Note that in this example, point 1 of the entry is the Upper Left Corner of the rectangular surfaces
and the point of the triangle for the 3 sided surface. The east wall shows the order of vertex entry. For
horizontal surfaces, any vertex may be chosen as the starting position, but the Vertex Entry Direction
convention must be followed. The surface details report (Output: Surfaces:List, Details;) is very useful for
reviewing the accuracy of surface geometry inputs (ref: Surface Output Variables/Reports and Variable
Dictionary Reports).
274 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
From the detailed vertices, EnergyPlus tries to determine the “height” and “width” of the surface.
Obviously, this doesn’t work well for >4 sided surfaces; for these, if the calculated height and width are
not close to the gross area for the surface, the height and width shown will be the square root of the area
(and thus a square).
1.9.32 Wall:Detailed
The Wall:Detailed object is used to describe walls.
1.9.32.1 Inputs
1.9.32.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique name associated with each building surface. It is used in several other places as a
reference (e.g. as the base surface name for a Window or Door).
y and then the layers to the inside layer – the material that shows in zone x. For symmetric constructions,
the same construction can be used in the surfaces described in both zones.
1. Surface – if this surface is an internal surface, then this is the choice. The value will either be
a surface in the base zone or a surface in another zone. The heat balance between two zones can
be accurately simulated by specifying a surface in an adjacent zone. EnergyPlus will simulate a
group of zones simultaneously and will include the heat transfer between zones. However, as this
increases the complexity of the calculations, it is not necessary to specify the other zone unless the
two zones will have a significant temperature difference. If the two zones will not be very different
(temperature wise), then the surface should use itself as the outside environment or specify this field
as Adiabatic. The surface name on the “outside” of this surface (adjacent to) is placed in the next
field.
2. Adiabatic – an internal surface in the same Zone. This surface will not transfer heat out of the
zone, but will still store heat in thermal mass. Only the inside face of the surface will exchange heat
with the zone (i.e. two adiabatic surfaces are required to model internal partitions where both sides
of the surface are exchanging heat with the zone). The Outside Boundary Condition Object can be
left blank.
3. Zone – this is similar to Surface but EnergyPlus will automatically create the required surface in
the adjacent zone when this is entered for the surface. If there are windows or doors on the surface,
EnergyPlus automatically creates appropriate sub-surfaces as well.
4. Outdoors – if this surface is exposed to outside temperature conditions, then this is the choice. See
Sun Exposure and Wind Exposure below for further specifications on this kind of surface.
5. Foundation - uses an alternative model (currently only the KivaTM model) to account for the multi-
dimensional heat transfer of foundation surfaces. The Outside Boundary Condition Object will refer
to the name of a Foundation:Kiva object (or be left blank to use the default foundation without
extra insulation).
6. Ground - The temperature on the outside of this surface will be the Site:GroundTemperature:Surface
value for the month.
7. GroundFCfactorMethod – if this surface is exposed to the ground and using the Construc-
tion:CfactorUndergroundWall, then this is the choice. The temperature on the outside of this
surface will be the Site:GroundTemperature:FcfactorMethod value for the month.
8. OtherSideCoefficients – if this surface has a custom, user specified temperature or other param-
eters (See SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients specification), then this is the choice. The outside
boundary condition will be the name of the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients specification.
10. GroundSlabPreprocessorAverage – uses the average results from the Slab preprocessor calcula-
tions.
11. GroundSlabPreprocessorCore – uses the core results from the Slab preprocessor calculations.
12. GroundSlabPreprocessorPerimeter – uses the perimeter results from the Slab preprocessor cal-
culations.
13. GroundBasementPreprocessorAverageWall – uses the average wall results from the Basement
preprocessor calculations.
14. GroundBasementPreprocessorAverageFloor – uses the average floor results from the Basement
preprocessor calculations.
15. GroundBasementPreprocessorUpperWall – uses the upper wall results from the Basement
preprocessor calculations.
16. GroundBasementPreprocessorLowerWall – uses the lower wall results from the Basement pre-
processor calculations.
Note: Zones with interzone heat transfer are not adiabatic and the internal surfaces contribute to
gains or losses. Adiabatic surfaces are modeled by specifying the base surface itself in this field. Also,
for interzone heat transfer, both surfaces must be represented – for example, if you want interzone heat
transfer to an attic space, the ceiling in the lower zone must have a surface object with the outside
face environment as the floor in the attic and, likewise, there must be a floor surface object in the attic
that references the ceiling surface name in the lower zone.
Equally, if the Outside Boundary Condition is “OtherSideCoefficients”, then this field’s value must be
the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients name. Or if the Outside Boundary Condition is “OtherSide-
ConditionsModel” then this field’s value must be the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel name.
Note: When a surface is specified with “NoWind”, this has several implications. Within the heat
balance code, this surface will default to using the simple ASHRAE exterior convection coefficient
correlation with a zero wind speed. In addition, since the ASHRAE simple method does not have
a separate value for equivalent long wavelength radiation to the sky and ground, using “NoWind”
also eliminates long wavelength radiant exchange from the exterior of the surface to both the sky and
the ground. Thus, only simple convection takes place at the exterior face of a surface specified with
“NoWind”.
This field specifies the number of sides in the surface (number of X,Y,Z vertex groups). For further
information, see the discussion on “Surface Vertices” above.
1.9.33 RoofCeiling:Detailed
The RoofCeiling:Detailed object is used to describe walls.
1.9.33.1 Inputs
1.9.33.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique name associated with each building surface. It is used in several other places as a
reference (e.g. as the base surface name for a Window or Door).
1. Surface – if this surface is an internal surface, then this is the choice. The value will either be
a surface in the base zone or a surface in another zone. The heat balance between two zones can
be accurately simulated by specifying a surface in an adjacent zone. EnergyPlus will simulate a
group of zones simultaneously and will include the heat transfer between zones. However, as this
increases the complexity of the calculations, it is not necessary to specify the other zone unless the
two zones will have a significant temperature difference. If the two zones will not be very different
(temperature wise), then the surface should use itself as the outside environment or specify this field
as Adiabatic. The surface name on the “outside” of this surface (adjacent to) is placed in the next
field.
2. Adiabatic – an internal surface in the same Zone. This surface will not transfer heat out of the
zone, but will still store heat in thermal mass. Only the inside face of the surface will exchange heat
with the zone (i.e. two adiabatic surfaces are required to model internal partitions where both sides
of the surface are exchanging heat with the zone). The Outside Boundary Condition Object can be
left blank.
3. Zone – this is similar to Surface but EnergyPlus will automatically create the required surface in
the adjacent zone when this is entered for the surface. If there are windows or doors on the surface,
EnergyPlus automatically creates appropriate sub-surfaces as well.
4. Outdoors – if this surface is exposed to outside temperature conditions, then this is the choice. See
Sun Exposure and Wind Exposure below for further specifications on this kind of surface.
5. Ground – The temperature on the outside of this surface will be the Ground Temperature.
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 279
6. OtherSideCoefficients – if this surface has a custom, user specified temperature or other param-
eters (See SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients specification), then this is the choice. The outside
boundary condition will be the name of the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients specification.
7. OtherSideConditionsModel – if this surface has a specially-modeled multi-skin component, such
as a transpired collector or vented photovoltaic panel, attached to the outside (See SurfaceProp-
erty:OtherSideConditionsModel specification), then this the choice. The outside face environment
will be the name of the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel specification.
8. GroundSlabPreprocessorAverage – uses the average results from the Slab preprocessor calcula-
tions.
9. GroundSlabPreprocessorCore – uses the core results from the Slab preprocessor calculations.
10. GroundSlabPreprocessorPerimeter – uses the perimeter results from the Slab preprocessor cal-
culations.
11. GroundBasementPreprocessorAverageWall – uses the average wall results from the Basement
preprocessor calculations.
12. GroundBasementPreprocessorAverageFloor – uses the average floor results from the Basement
preprocessor calculations.
13. GroundBasementPreprocessorUpperWall – uses the upper wall results from the Basement
preprocessor calculations.
14. GroundBasementPreprocessorLowerWall – uses the lower wall results from the Basement pre-
processor calculations.
Note: Zones with interzone heat transfer are not adiabatic and the internal surfaces contribute to
gains or losses. Adiabatic surfaces are modeled by specifying the base surface itself in this field. Also,
for interzone heat transfer, both surfaces must be represented – for example, if you want interzone heat
transfer to an attic space, the ceiling in the lower zone must have a surface object with the outside
face environment as the floor in the attic and, likewise, there must be a floor surface object in the attic
that references the ceiling surface name in the lower zone.
Equally, if the Outside Boundary Condition is “OtherSideCoefficients”, then this field’s value must be
the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients name. Or if the Outside Boundary Condition is “OtherSide-
ConditionsModel” then this field’s value must be the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel name.
280 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Note: When a surface is specified with “NoWind”, this has several implications. Within the heat
balance code, this surface will default to using the simple ASHRAE exterior convection coefficient
correlation with a zero wind speed. In addition, since the ASHRAE simple method does not have
a separate value for equivalent long wavelength radiation to the sky and ground, using “NoWind”
also eliminates long wavelength radiant exchange from the exterior of the surface to both the sky and
the ground. Thus, only simple convection takes place at the exterior face of a surface specified with
“NoWind”.
surfaces are considered to have the same emissivity and temperature as the ground, so they are lumped
together with the ground in calculating the ground IR view factor.
1.9.34 Floor:Detailed
The Floor:Detailed object is used to describe walls.
1.9.34.1 Inputs
1.9.34.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique name associated with each building surface. It is used in several other places as a
reference (e.g. as the base surface name for a Window or Door).
1. Surface – if this surface is an internal surface, then this is the choice. The value will either be
a surface in the base zone or a surface in another zone. The heat balance between two zones can
be accurately simulated by specifying a surface in an adjacent zone. EnergyPlus will simulate a
group of zones simultaneously and will include the heat transfer between zones. However, as this
increases the complexity of the calculations, it is not necessary to specify the other zone unless the
two zones will have a significant temperature difference. If the two zones will not be very different
(temperature wise), then the surface should use itself as the outside environment or specify this field
as Adiabatic. The surface name on the “outside” of this surface (adjacent to) is placed in the next
field.
2. Adiabatic – an internal surface in the same Zone. This surface will not transfer heat out of the
zone, but will still store heat in thermal mass. Only the inside face of the surface will exchange heat
with the zone (i.e. two adiabatic surfaces are required to model internal partitions where both sides
of the surface are exchanging heat with the zone). The Outside Boundary Condition Object can be
left blank.
3. Zone – this is similar to Surface but EnergyPlus will automatically create the required surface in
the adjacent zone when this is entered for the surface. If there are windows or doors on the surface,
EnergyPlus automatically creates appropriate sub-surfaces as well.
282 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
4. Outdoors – if this surface is exposed to outside temperature conditions, then this is the choice. See
Sun Exposure and Wind Exposure below for further specifications on this kind of surface.
5. Foundation - uses an alternative model (currently only the KivaTM model) to account for the multi-
dimensional heat transfer of foundation surfaces. The Outside Boundary Condition Object will refer
to the name of a Foundation:Kiva object (or be left blank to use the default foundation without
extra insulation).
6. Ground - The temperature on the outside of this surface will be the Site:GroundTemperature:Surface
value for the month..
7. GroundFCfactorMethod – if this surface is exposed to the ground and using the Construc-
tion:CfactorUndergroundWall, then this is the choice. The temperature on the outside of this
surface will be the Site:GroundTemperature:FcfactorMethod value for the month.
8. OtherSideCoefficients – if this surface has a custom, user specified temperature or other param-
eters (See SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients specification), then this is the choice. The outside
boundary condition will be the name of the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients specification.
10. GroundSlabPreprocessorAverage – uses the average results from the Slab preprocessor calcula-
tions.
11. GroundSlabPreprocessorCore – uses the core results from the Slab preprocessor calculations.
12. GroundSlabPreprocessorPerimeter – uses the perimeter results from the Slab preprocessor cal-
culations.
13. GroundBasementPreprocessorAverageWall – uses the average wall results from the Basement
preprocessor calculations.
14. GroundBasementPreprocessorAverageFloor – uses the average floor results from the Basement
preprocessor calculations.
15. GroundBasementPreprocessorUpperWall – uses the upper wall results from the Basement
preprocessor calculations.
16. GroundBasementPreprocessorLowerWall – uses the lower wall results from the Basement pre-
processor calculations.
the floor the Outside Boundary Condition Object for the ceiling, and the ceiling the Outside Boundary
Condition Object for the floor.
If the Outside Boundary Condition is Zone, then this field should contain the zone name of the adjacent
zone for the surface.
Note: Zones with interzone heat transfer are not adiabatic and the internal surfaces contribute to
gains or losses. Adiabatic surfaces are modeled by specifying the base surface itself in this field. Also,
for interzone heat transfer, both surfaces must be represented – for example, if you want interzone heat
transfer to an attic space, the ceiling in the lower zone must have a surface object with the outside
face environment as the floor in the attic and, likewise, there must be a floor surface object in the attic
that references the ceiling surface name in the lower zone.
Equally, if the Outside Boundary Condition is “OtherSideCoefficients”, then this field’s value must be
the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients name. Or if the Outside Boundary Condition is “OtherSide-
ConditionsModel” then this field’s value must be the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel name.
Note: When a surface is specified with “NoWind”, this has several implications. Within the heat
balance code, this surface will default to using the simple ASHRAE exterior convection coefficient
correlation with a zero wind speed. In addition, since the ASHRAE simple method does not have
a separate value for equivalent long wavelength radiation to the sky and ground, using “NoWind”
also eliminates long wavelength radiant exchange from the exterior of the surface to both the sky and
the ground. Thus, only simple convection takes place at the exterior face of a surface specified with
“NoWind”.
For example, this gives 0.5 for a wall of tilt 90°. If the tilt of the wall changes, then the View Factor
to Ground must also change.
If you enter autocalculate in this field, EnergyPlus will automatically calculate the view factor to
ground based on the tilt of the surface.
If you do use the reflections option in the Solar Distribution field in your Building object
input, you do not have to enter View Factor to Ground values. In this case the program will automatically
calculate the value to use for each exterior surface taking into account solar shadowing (including shadowing
of the ground by the building) and reflections from obstructions (ref: Building, Field: Solar Distribution).
However, if you do use the reflections option AND you are modeling a DaylightingDevice:Shelf or
DaylightingDevice:Tubular, then you still need to enter some values of View Factor to Ground. For Day-
lightingDevice:Shelf you need to enter View Factor to Ground for the window associated with the shelf.
And for DaylightingDevice:Tubular you need to enter the View Factor to Ground for the FenestrationSur-
face:Detailed corresponding to the dome of the tubular device.
Note 1: The corresponding view factor to the sky for diffuse solar radiation is not a user input; it is
calculated within EnergyPlus based on surface orientation, sky solar radiance distribution, and shadowing
surfaces.
Note 2: The view factors to the sky and ground for thermal infrared (long-wave) radiation are not user
inputs; they are calculated within EnergyPlus based on surface tilt and shadowing surfaces. Shadowing
surfaces are considered to have the same emissivity and temperature as the ground, so they are lumped
together with the ground in calculating the ground IR view factor.
Floor:Detailed ,
Floor_NorthZone_1stFloor ,!- Name
FLOOR -SLAB -ASSEMBLY , !- Construction Name
NorthZone_1stFloor , !- Zone Name
Ground , !- Outside Boundary Condition
, !- Outside Boundary Condition Object
NoSun , !- Sun Exposure
NoWind , !- Wind Exposure
0.0, !- View Factor to Ground
4, !- Number of Vertices
0, 11, 0, !- X,Y,Z 1 {m}
25, 11, 0, !- X,Y,Z 2 {m}
25, 5.5, 0, !- X,Y,Z 3 {m}
0, 5.5, 0; !- X,Y,Z 4 {m}
RoofCeiling:Detailed ,
Ceiling_SouthZone_1stFloor , !- Name
CEILING -FLOOR -ASSEMBLY , !- Construction Name
SouthZone_1stFloor , !- Zone Name
Surface , !- Outside Boundary Condition
Floor_SouthZone_2ndFloor ,!- Outside Boundary Condition Object
NoSun , !- Sun Exposure
NoWind , !- Wind Exposure
0.0, !- View Factor to Ground
4, !- Number of Vertices
0, 0, 3.4, !- X,Y,Z 1 {m}
25, 0, 3.4, !- X,Y,Z 2 {m}
25, 5.5, 3.4, !- X,Y,Z 3 {m}
0, 5.5, 3.4; !- X,Y,Z 4 {m}
Wall:Detailed ,
InteriorWall_SouthZone_1stFloor , !- Name
INTERIOR -WALL -ASSEMBLY , !- Construction Name
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 285
1.9.35 BuildingSurface:Detailed
The BuildingSurface:Detailed object can more generally describe each of the surfaces.
1.9.35.1 Inputs
1.9.35.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique name associated with each building surface. It is used in several other places as a
reference (e.g. as the base surface name for a Window or Door).
1. Surface – if this surface is an internal surface, then this is the choice. The value will either be
a surface in the base zone or a surface in another zone. The heat balance between two zones can
be accurately simulated by specifying a surface in an adjacent zone. EnergyPlus will simulate a
group of zones simultaneously and will include the heat transfer between zones. However, as this
increases the complexity of the calculations, it is not necessary to specify the other zone unless the
286 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
two zones will have a significant temperature difference. If the two zones will not be very different
(temperature wise), then the surface should use itself as the outside environment or specify this field
as Adiabatic. The surface name on the “outside” of this surface (adjacent to) is placed in the next
field.
2. Adiabatic – an internal surface in the same Zone. This surface will not transfer heat out of the
zone, but will still store heat in thermal mass. Only the inside face of the surface will exchange heat
with the zone (i.e. two adiabatic surfaces are required to model internal partitions where both sides
of the surface are exchanging heat with the zone). The Outside Boundary Condition Object can be
left blank.
3. Zone – this is similar to Surface but EnergyPlus will automatically create the required surface in
the adjacent zone when this is entered for the surface. If there are windows or doors on the surface,
EnergyPlus automatically creates appropriate sub-surfaces as well.
4. Outdoors – if this surface is exposed to outside temperature conditions, then this is the choice. See
Sun Exposure and Wind Exposure below for further specifications on this kind of surface.
5. Foundation - uses an alternative model (currently only the KivaTM model) to account for the multi-
dimensional heat transfer of foundation surfaces. The Outside Boundary Condition Object will refer
to the name of a Foundation:Kiva object (or be left blank to use the default foundation without
extra insulation).
6. Ground - The temperature on the outside of this surface will be the Site:GroundTemperature:Surface
value for the month.
7. GroundFCfactorMethod – if this surface is exposed to the ground and using the Construc-
tion:CfactorUndergroundWall, then this is the choice. The temperature on the outside of this
surface will be the Site:GroundTemperature:FcfactorMethod value for the month.
8. OtherSideCoefficients – if this surface has a custom, user specified temperature or other param-
eters (See SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients specification), then this is the choice. The outside
boundary condition will be the name of the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients specification.
10. GroundSlabPreprocessorAverage – uses the average results from the Slab preprocessor calcula-
tions.
11. GroundSlabPreprocessorCore – uses the core results from the Slab preprocessor calculations.
12. GroundSlabPreprocessorPerimeter – uses the perimeter results from the Slab preprocessor cal-
culations.
13. GroundBasementPreprocessorAverageWall – uses the average wall results from the Basement
preprocessor calculations.
14. GroundBasementPreprocessorAverageFloor – uses the average floor results from the Basement
preprocessor calculations.
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 287
15. GroundBasementPreprocessorUpperWall – uses the upper wall results from the Basement
preprocessor calculations.
16. GroundBasementPreprocessorLowerWall – uses the lower wall results from the Basement pre-
processor calculations.
Note: Zones with interzone heat transfer are not adiabatic and the internal surfaces contribute to
gains or losses. Adiabatic surfaces are modeled by specifying the base surface itself in this field. Also,
for interzone heat transfer, both surfaces must be represented – for example, if you want interzone heat
transfer to an attic space, the ceiling in the lower zone must have a surface object with the outside
face environment as the floor in the attic and, likewise, there must be a floor surface object in the attic
that references the ceiling surface name in the lower zone.
Equally, if the Outside Boundary Condition is “OtherSideCoefficients”, then this field’s value must be
the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients name. Or if the Outside Boundary Condition is “OtherSide-
ConditionsModel” then this field’s value must be the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel name.
Note: When a surface is specified with “NoWind”, this has several implications. Within the heat
balance code, this surface will default to using the simple ASHRAE exterior convection coefficient
correlation with a zero wind speed. In addition, since the ASHRAE simple method does not have
a separate value for equivalent long wavelength radiation to the sky and ground, using “NoWind”
also eliminates long wavelength radiant exchange from the exterior of the surface to both the sky and
the ground. Thus, only simple convection takes place at the exterior face of a surface specified with
“NoWind”.
288 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.9.36 FenestrationSurface:Detailed
This surface class is used for subsurfaces, which can be of five different types: Windows, Doors, GlassDoors,
TubularDaylightDomes, and TubularDaylightDiffusers. A subsurface (such as a window) of a base surface
(such as a wall) inherits several of the properties (such as Outside Boundary Condition, Sun Exposure,
etc.) of the base surface. Windows, GlassDoors, TubularDaylightDomes, and TubularDaylightDiffusers
are considered to have one or more glass layers and so transmit solar radiation. Doors are considered to be
opaque. For Surface Type = Window and GlassDoor, shades and screens may be applied by referencing
this subsurface in a window shading control (ref: WindowShadingControl object). To assign a shade to a
window or glass door, see WindowMaterial: Shade. To assign a screen, see WindowMaterial:Screen. To
assign a blind, see WindowMaterial:Blind. To assign switchable glazing, such as electrochromic glazing,
see WindowShadingControl.
The surface can be of 3 sides or 4 sides. A 4-sided but non-rectangular fenestration surface is allowed
and will be transferred to an equivalent rectangular surface with the same area and aspect ratio for the
convection calculations at window air gaps.
1.9.36.1 Inputs
1.9.36.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique name associated with the heat transfer subsurface. It may be used in other places as
a reference (e.g. as the opposing subsurface of an interzone window or door).
TubularDaylightDomes cannot have shades, screens or blinds. In the following, the term “window” ap-
plies to Window, GlassDoor, TubularDaylightDome, and TubularDaylightDome, if not otherwise explicitly
mentioned.
As noted in the description of the BuildingSurface:Detailed, Azimuth (facing angle) and Tilt are cal-
culated from the entered vertices. Tilts of subsurfaces will normally be the same as their base surface. If
these are significantly beyond the “normals” for the base surface, warning messages may be issued. If the
facing angles are not correct, you may have a window pointing “into” the zone rather than out of it – this
would cause problems in the calculations. Note, too, that a “reveal” (inset or outset) may occur if the
plane of the subsurface is not coincident with the base surface; the reveal has an effect on shading of the
subsurface.
Unused if reflections option in Solar Distribution field in Building object input unless a Daylighting
Device:Shelf or Daylighting Device:Tubular has been specified.
If you do not use the reflections option in the Solar Distribution field in your Building object input,
you are responsible for entering the View Factor to Ground for each heat-transfer surface. Typical values
for a surface that is not shadowed are obtained by the simple equation:
View Factor to Ground = (1-cos(SurfTilt))/2
For example, this gives 0.5 for a wall of tilt 90°. If the tilt of the wall changes, then the View Factor
to Ground must also change.
If you enter autocalculate in this field, EnergyPlus will automatically calculate the view factor to
ground based on the tilt of the surface.
If you do use the reflections option in the Solar Distribution field in your BUILDING object
input, you do not have to enter View Factor to Ground values. In this case the program will automatically
calculate the value to use for each exterior surface taking into account solar shadowing (including shadowing
of the ground by the building) and reflections from obstructions (ref: Building, Field: Solar Distribution).
However, if you do use the reflections option AND you are modeling a DaylightingDevice:Shelf or
DaylightingDevice:Tubular, then you still need to enter some values of View Factor to Ground. For Day-
lightingDevice:Shelf you need to enter View Factor to Ground for the window associated with the shelf.
And for DaylightingDevice:Tubular you need to enter the View Factor to Ground for the FenestrationSur-
face:Detailed corresponding to the dome of the tubular device (ref: DaylightingDevice:Tubular).
Note 1: The corresponding view factor to the sky for diffuse solar radiation is not a user input; it is
calculated within EnergyPlus based on surface orientation, sky solar radiance distribution, and shadowing
surfaces.
Note 2: The view factors to the sky and ground for thermal infrared (long-wave) radiation are not user
inputs; they are calculated within EnergyPlus based on surface tilt and shadowing surfaces. Shadowing
surfaces are considered to have the same emissivity and temperature as the ground, so they are lumped
together with the ground in calculating the ground infrared view factor.
from the input window may not be representative of the actual group of windows. No warning is issued if
Solar Distribution = MinimalShadowing.
–an error if the window is an exterior window/glass door in a zone that has a detailed daylighting
calculation (Daylighting:Detailed specified for the zone). Since a single window with a multiplier can never
give the same daylight illuminance as the actual set of windows, you are not allowed to use Multiplier in
this situation.
FenestrationSurface:Detailed ,
Zn001:Wall001:Win001 , !- SubSurface Name
Window ,SINGLE PANE HW WINDOW , !- Class and Construction Name
Zn001:Wall001 ,, !- Base Surface Name and Target (if applicable)
0.5000000 , !- VF to Ground
WINDOW -CONTROL -DRAPES , !- Window Shading Control
TestFrameAndDivider , !- Frame/Divider name
5, !- Multiplier
4, !- Rectangle (number of sides)
1.524000 , 0.1520000 , 2.743000 ,
1.524000 , 0.1520000 , 0.3050000 ,
4.572000 , 0.1520000 , 0.3050000 ,
4.572000 , 0.1520000 , 2.743000 ;
1.9.38 InternalMass
Any surface that would logically be described as an interior wall, floor or ceiling can just as easily be
described as Internal Mass. Internal Mass surface types only exchange energy with the zone in which they
are described; they do not see any other zones. There are two approaches to using internal mass. The first
approach is to have several pieces of internal mass with each piece having a different construction type.
The other approach is to choose an average construction type and combine all of the interior surfaces into a
single internal mass. Similar to internal surfaces with an adiabatic boundary condition, the zone will only
exchange energy with the inside of the Internal Mass construction. If both sides of the surface exchange
energy with the zone then the user should input twice the area when defining the Internal Mass object.
Note that furniture and other large objects within a zone can be described using internal mass. However,
simplifying calculations using internal mass must be used with caution when the “FullInteriorAndExterior”
or “FullInteriorAndExteriorWithReflections” Solar Distribution model (see Building parameters) is chosen.
1.9.38.1 Inputs
Example
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 295
When zoning an office building, five west-facing offices have been combined into one zone. All of the
offices have interior walls made of the same materials. As shown in the figure below, this zone may be
described with 5 exterior walls and 11 internal walls or 1 exterior wall and 1 internal mass. Note that fewer
surfaces will speed up the EnergyPlus calculations.
Example
A five-story building has the same ceiling/floor construction separating each of the levels. Zones that
are on floors 2 through 4 may be described using a single piece of internal mass to represent both the floor
and ceiling. The construction for this internal mass would be identical to the ceiling/floor construction
that would be used to describe separate surfaces and the area of the internal mass surface would be the
total surface area of the combined ceilings/floors (i.e. twice the total floor area).
InternalMass ,
Zn002:IntM002 , !- Surface Name
PARTITION02 , !- Construction Name
DORM ROOMS AND COMMON AREAS , !- Zone
371.6122; !- Total area exposed to Zone {m2}
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Thermal Radiation to Ground Heat Transfer Coefficient [W/m2 -K]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Exterior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Inside Face Exterior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Exterior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Interior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Interior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
Zone , Sum ,Surface Inside Face Interior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Initial Transmitted Diffuse Absorbed Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Initial Transmitted Diffuse Transmitted Out Window Solar Radiation Rate
[W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Absorbed Shortwave Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Construction Index []
Output variables applicable to opaque heat transfer surfaces (FLOOR, WALL, ROOF, DOOR). Note
– these are advanced variables – you must read the descriptions and understand before use
– then you must use the Diagnostics object to allow reporting.
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Rate per Area [W/m2]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Inside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Lights Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Lights Radiation Heat Gain Rate per Area [W/m2]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Inside Face Lights Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Conduction Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Conduction Heat Loss Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Inside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Conduction Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Conduction Heat Loss Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Outside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Average Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Average Face Conduction Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Average Face Conduction Heat Loss Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Average Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Average Face Conduction Heat Transfer Energy [J]
298 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Reveal Absorbed Beam Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Face Glazing Condensation Status []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Face Frame Condensation Status []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Face Divider Condensation Status []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Shading Device Is On Time Fraction []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Blind Slat Angle [deg]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Blind Beam to Beam Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Blind Beam to Diffuse Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Blind Diffuse to Diffuse Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Blind and Glazing System Beam Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Blind and Glazing System Diffuse Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Screen Beam to Beam Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Screen Beam to Diffuse Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Screen Diffuse to Diffuse Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Screen and Glazing System Beam Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Screen and Glazing System Diffuse Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,State ,Surface Storm Window On Off Status []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Face Frame and Divider Zone Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Frame Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Frame Heat Loss Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Divider Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Divider Heat Loss Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Frame Inside Temperature [C]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Frame Outside Temperature [C]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Divider Inside Temperature [C]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Divider Outside Temperature [C]
If the user requests to display advanced report/output variables (e.g. see Output:Diagnostics keyword
DisplayAdvancedReportVariables) the the following additional output variables are available for exterior
windows and glass doors
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Face Glazing Zone Convection Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Face Glazing Net Infrared Heat Transfer Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Shortwave from Zone Back Out Window Heat Transfer Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Face Frame and Divider Zone Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Face Gap between Shade and Glazing Zone Convection Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Face Shade Zone Convection Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Face Shade Net Infrared Heat Transfer Rate [W]
If the user requests to display advanced report/output variables (e.g. see Output:Diagnostics keyword
DisplayAdvancedReportVariables) the the following additional output variable is available for Equivalent
Layer Window;
Zone ,Average , Surface Window Inside Face Other Convection Heat Gain Rate [W]
Output variables applicable to interior and exterior windows and doors are:
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Total Absorbed Shortwave Radiation Rate Layer <x> [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Front Face Temperature Layer <x> [C]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Back Face Temperature Layer <x> [C]
1.9.40.1 Surface Window Total Absorbed Shortwave Radiation Rate Layer <x> [W]
This will output shortwave radiation absorbed in a window layer. The key values for this output variable
are the surface name. Layers are numbered from the outside to the inside of the surface. The full listing
will appear in the RDD file.
300 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
heat is being added to the surface’s face by convection. Different versions of the report are available
including the basic heat gain rate (W), and a per unit area flux (W/m2), and an energy version (J).
Former Name: Prior to version 7.1, these outputs were called “Surface Int Convection Heat *” and had
used the opposite sign convention.
This is the coefficient that describes the convection heat transfer. It is the value of “Hc” in the classic
convection model Q = Hc* A* (T – T). This is the result of the surface convection algorithm used for the
inside face. Former Name: Prior to version 7.1, this output was called “Surface Int Convection Coeff.”
1.9.41.9 Surface Inside Face Net Surface Thermal Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]
1.9.41.10 Surface Inside Face Net Surface Thermal Radiation Heat Gain Rate per
Area [W/m2]
1.9.41.11 Surface Inside Face Net Surface Thermal Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]
These “inside face net surface thermal radiation heat gain” output variables describe the heat transferred
by longwave infrared thermal radiation exchanges between the inside faces of other surfaces in the zone.
The values can be positive or negative with positive indicating heat is being added to the surface’s face
by thermal radiation. Different versions of the report are available including the basic heat gain rate (W),
and a per unit area flux (W/m2), and an energy version (J).
1.9.41.12 Surface Inside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]
1.9.41.13 Surface Inside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Rate per Area [W/m2]
1.9.41.14 Surface Inside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]
These “inside face solar radiation heat gain” output variables describe the heat transferred by solar radiation
onto the inside face. The values are always positive and indicate heat is being added to the surface’s face
by solar radiation. This is sunlight that has entered the zone through a window and been absorbed on the
inside face of the surface. Different versions of the report are available including the basic heat gain rate
(W), and a per unit area flux (W/m2), and an energy version (J).
1.9.41.15 Surface Inside Face Lights Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]
1.9.41.16 Surface Inside Face Lights Radiation Heat Gain Rate per Area [W/m2]
1.9.41.17 Surface Inside Face Lights Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]
These “inside face lights radiation heat gain” output variables describe the heat transferred by shortwave
radiation onto the inside face. The values are always positive and indicate heat is being added to the
surface’s face by shortwave radiation that emanated from electric lighting equipment and was absorbed by
the surface. Different versions of the report are available including the basic heat gain rate (W), and a per
unit area flux (W/m2), and an energy version (J).
302 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.9.41.18 Surface Inside Face Internal Gains Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]
1.9.41.19 Surface Inside Face Internal Gains Radiation Heat Gain Rate per Area
[W/m2]
1.9.41.20 Surface Inside Face Internal Gains Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]
These “inside face internal gains radiation heat gain” output variables describe the heat transferred by
longwave infrared thermal radiation onto the inside face that emanated from internal gains such as lights,
electric equipment, and people. The values are always positive and indicate heat is being added to the
surface’s face by the absorption of longwave thermal radiation. Different versions of the report are available
including the basic heat gain rate (W), and a per unit area flux (W/m2), and an energy version (J).
1.9.41.21 Surface Inside Face System Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]
1.9.41.22 Surface Inside Face System Radiation Heat Gain Rate per Area [W/m2]
1.9.41.23 Surface Inside Face System Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]
These “inside face system radiation heat gain” output variables describe the heat transferred by infrared
thermal radiation onto the inside face that emanated from HVAC equipment such as baseboard heaters or
high-temperature radiant heating panels. The values are always positive and indicate heat is being added
to the surface’s face by the absorption of thermal radiation. Different versions of the report are available
including the basic heat gain rate (W), and a per unit area flux (W/m2), and an energy version (J).
1.9.41.28 Surface Outside Face Net Thermal Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]
1.9.41.29 Surface Outside Face Net Thermal Radiation Heat Gain Rate per Area
[W/m2]
1.9.41.30 Surface Outside Face Net Thermal Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]
These “outside face net thermal radiation” output variables describe the heat transferred by longwave
infrared thermal radiation exchanges between the surface and the surroundings of the outside face. This
is the net of all forms of longwave thermal infrared radiation heat transfer. The values can be positive
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 303
or negative with positive indicating the net addition of heat to the outside face. Different versions of the
report are available including the basic heat gain rate (W), and a per unit area flux (W/m2), and an energy
version (J).
Former Name: Prior to version 7.1, these outputs were called “Surface Ext Thermal Radiation Heat
*” and used the opposite sign convention.
1.9.41.31 Surface Inside Face Exterior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate
[W]
1.9.41.32 Surface Inside Face Exterior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate
per Area [W/m2]
1.9.41.33 Surface Inside Face Exterior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation En-
ergy [J]
Beam solar radiation from the exterior windows in a zone incident on the inside face of a surface in the
zone. If Solar Distribution in the BUILDING object is equal to MinimalShadowing or FullExterior, it is
assumed that all beam solar from exterior windows falls on the floor. In this case the value of this output
variable can be greater than zero only for floor surfaces. If Solar Distribution equals FullInteriorExterior
the program tracks where beam solar from exterior windows falls inside the zone, in which case the value
of this variable can be greater than zero for floor as well as wall surfaces. Different versions of the report
are available including the basic incident rate (W), a per unit area flux (W/m2), and an energy version
(J).
1.9.41.34 Surface Inside Face Interior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate
[W]
1.9.41.35 Surface Inside Face Interior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate
per Area [W/m2]
1.9.41.36 Surface Inside Face Interior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation En-
ergy [J]
Beam solar radiation from the interior (i.e., interzone) windows in a zone incident on the inside face of a
surface in the zone. This value is calculated only if Solar Distribution in the BUILDING object is equal to
FullInteriorExterior. However, the program does not track where this radiation falls. Instead, it is treated
by the program as though it were diffuse radiation uniformly distributed over all of the zone surfaces. See
Figure 1.33. Different versions of the report are available including the basic incident rate (W), a per
unit area flux (W/m2), and an energy version (J).
1.9.41.37 Surface Inside Face Initial Transmitted Diffuse Absorbed Solar Radiation
Rate [W]
As of Version 2.1, diffuse solar transmitted through exterior and interior windows is no longer uniformly
distributed. Instead, it is distributed according to the approximate view factors between the transmitting
window and all other heat transfer surfaces in the zone. This variable is the amount of transmitted diffuse
solar that is initially absorbed on the inside of each heat transfer surface. The portion of this diffuse solar
that is reflected by all surfaces in the zone is subsequently redistributed uniformly to all heat transfer
surfaces in the zone, along with interior reflected beam solar and shortwave radiation from lights. The
total absorbed shortwave radiation is given by the next variable.
304 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Figure 1.33: Beam solar radiation entering a zone through an interior window is distributed inside
the zone as though it were diffuse radiation.
1.9.42.6 Surface Outside Face Thermal Radiation to Air Heat Transfer Coefficient
[W/m2-K]
This is the coefficient that describes thermal radiation heat transfer between the outside face and the air
mass surrounding the surface. It is the value of “Hr” in the classic linearized model for thermal radiation
Q = Hr * A * (T_surf – T_surfodb) when applied to the ambient air. Where T_surf = Surface Outside
Face Temperature, and T_surfodb = Surface Outside Face Outdoor Air Drybulb Temperature. Former
Name: Prior to version 7.1, this output was called “Surface Ext Rad to Air Coeff.”
1.9.42.7 Surface Outside Face Thermal Radiation to Sky Heat Transfer Coefficient
[W/m2-K]
This is the coefficient that describes thermal radiation heat transfer between the outside face and the sky
surrounding the surface. It is the value of “Hr” in the classic linearized model for thermal radiation Q =
Hr * A * (T_surf – T_sky) when applied to the sky. Where T_surf = Surface Outside Face Temperature,
and T_sky = Site Sky Temperature. Former Name: Prior to version 7.1, this output was called “Surface
Ext Rad to Sky Coeff.”
1.9.42.8 Surface Outside Face Thermal Radiation to Ground Heat Transfer Coefficient
[W/m2-K]
This is the coefficient that describes thermal radiation heat transfer between the outside face and the
ground surrounding the surface. It is the value of “Hr” in the classic linearized model for thermal radiation
Q = Hr * A * (T_surf – T_odb) when applied to the ground. Where T_surf = Surface Outside Face
Temperature, and T_odb = Site Outdoor Air Drybulb Temperature (used as an approximation for the
ground surface temperature). Former Name: Prior to version 7.1, this output was called “Surface Ext Rad
to Ground Coeff.”
1.9.42.9 Surface Outside Face Thermal Radiation to Air Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This is thermal radiation heat transfer rate between the outside face and the air mass surrounding the
surface.
1.9.42.11 Surface Outside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]
1.9.42.12 Surface Outside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Rate per Area [W/m2]
1.9.42.13 Surface Outside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]
These “outside face solar radiation” output variables describe the heat transferred by the absorption of
solar radiation at the outside face. This is the result of incident solar radiation being absorbed at the
surface face. The values are always positive.
306 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.9.42.14 Surface Outside Face Incident Solar Radiation Rate per Area [W/m2]
The total solar radiation incident on the outside of an exterior surface. It is the sum of:
• Surface Outside Face Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate per Area
• Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per Area
• Surface Outside Face Incident Ground Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per Area
• Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Surface Reflected Solar Radiation Rate per Area
• Surface Outside Face Incident Beam To Beam Surface Reflected Solar Radiation Rate per Area
• Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Surface Reflected Solar Radiation Rate per Area
1.9.42.15 Surface Outside Face Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate per Area [W/m2]
The solar beam radiation incident on the outside of an exterior surface, including the effects of shadowing,
if present. The beam here is that directly from the sun; it excludes beam specularly reflected from
obstructions.
1.9.42.16 Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per Area
[W/m2]
The solar diffuse radiation from the sky incident on the outside of an exterior surface, including the effects
of shadowing, if present.
1.9.42.17 Surface Outside Face Incident Ground Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per
Area [W/m2]
The solar diffuse radiation incident on the outside of an exterior surface that arises from reflection of beam
solar and sky diffuse solar from the ground. This is the sum of the next two output variables, “Surface
Outside Face Incident Beam To Diffuse Ground Reflected Solar Radiation Rate per Area” and “Surface
Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Ground Reflected Solar Radiation Rate per Area.” The reflected solar
radiation from the ground is assumed to be diffuse and isotropic (there is no specular component).
If “Reflections” option is not chosen in the Solar Distribution Field in the BUILDING object, the effects
of shadowing are accounted for by the user-specified value of View Factor to Ground for the surface. If
“Reflections” option is chosen, the program determines the effects of shadowing, including time-varying
shadowing of the ground plane by the building itself.
1.9.42.18 Surface Outside Face Incident Beam To Diffuse Ground Reflected Solar
Radiation Rate per Area [W/m2]
The solar diffuse radiation incident on the outside of an exterior surface that arises from beam-to-diffuse
reflection from the ground. It is assumed that there is no beam-to-beam (specular) component. The beam
here is that directly from the sun; it excludes beam specularly reflected from obstructions.
1.9.42.19 Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Ground Reflected Solar Radiation
Rate per Area [W/m2]
The solar diffuse radiation incident on the outside of an exterior surface that arises from sky diffuse solar
reflection from the ground. The sky diffuse here is that directly from the sky; it excludes reflection of sky
diffuse from obstructions.
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 307
1.9.42.20 Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Surface Reflected Solar Radiation
Rate per Area [W/m2]
The solar diffuse radiation incident on the outside of an exterior surface that arises from sky diffuse
reflection from one or more obstructions. This value will be non-zero only if “Reflections” option is chosen
in the BUILDING object.
1.9.42.21 Surface Outside Face Incident Beam To Beam Surface Reflected Solar Ra-
diation Rate per Area [W/m2]
The solar beam radiation incident on the outside of an exterior surface that arises from beam-to-beam
(specular) reflection from one or more obstructions. This value will be non-zero only if “Reflections”
option is chosen in the BUILDING object. For windows, the program treats this beam radiation as diffuse
radiation in calculating its transmission and absorption.
1.9.42.22 Surface Outside Face Incident Beam To Diffuse Surface Reflected Solar Ra-
diation Rate per Area [W/m2]
The solar diffuse radiation incident on the outside of an exterior surface that arises from beam-to-diffuse
reflection from building shades or building surfaces. This value will be non-zero only if “Reflections” option
is chosen in the BUILDING object.
1.9.42.23 Surface Outside Face Beam Solar Incident Angle Cosine Value []
The cosine of the angle of incidence of (unreflected) beam solar radiation on the outside of an exterior
surface. The value varies from 0.0 for beam parallel to the surface (incidence angle = 90O ) to 1.0 for beam
perpendicular to the surface (incidence angle = 0O ). Negative values indicate the sun is behind the surface,
i.e the surface does not see the sun.
1.9.43.2 Surface Inside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]
These “inside face conduction” output variables describe heat flow by conduction right at the inside face of
an opaque heat transfer surface. A positive value means that the conduction is from just inside the inside
face toward the inside face. A negative value means that the conduction is from the inside face into the
core of the heat transfer surface.
Note that Inside Face Conduction, when positive, does not indicate the heat flow from the surface to
the zone air, which is governed by the inside face convection coefficient and the difference in temperature
between the inside face and the zone air.
Different versions of the reports are available. The basic heat gain rate (W) and a per unit area flux
(W/m2 ) can have positive or negative values with the sign convention that positive indicates heat flowing
toward the face itself. There are also directed “gain” and “loss” versions that have only positive values or
zero when the heat flow direction opposes.
Former Name: Prior to version 7.1, these outputs were called “Opaque Surface Inside Face Conduction
*.”
Former Name: For Conduction Finite Difference simulations (CondFD), CondFD Inside Surface Heat
Flux is replaced with Surface Inside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate Per Area. Likewise for CondFD
Inside Heat Flux to Surface.
1.9.43.6 Surface Outside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]
These “outside face conduction” output variables describe heat flow by conduction right at the outside
face of an opaque heat transfer surface. A positive value means that the conduction is from just inside the
outside face toward the outside face. A negative value means that the conduction is from the outside face
into the core of the heat transfer surface.
Note that outside face conduction, when positive, does not indicate the heat flow from the surface
to the surrounding air, which is governed by the outside face convection coefficient and the difference in
temperature between the inside face and the surrounding air.
Different versions of the reports are available. The basic heat transfer rate (W) and a per unit area flux
(W/m2 ) can have positive or negative values with the sign convention that positive indicates heat flowing
toward the face itself. There are also directed “gain” and “loss” versions that have only positive values or
zero when the heat flow direction opposes.
Former Name: For Conduction Finite Difference simulations (CondFD), CondFD Outside Surface Heat
Flux is replaced with Surface Outside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate Per Area. Likewise for CondFD
Outside Heat Flux to Surface.
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 309
1.9.43.10 Surface Average Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]
These “average face conduction” output variables combine the inside face conduction and outside face
conduction reports together to describe the conduction situation in a heat transfer surface in a nominal
way. This is simply the average of the inside and outside face conduction rates, but with the sign convention
for the outside face switched to match the inside face so that positive values here indicate heat flowing into
the thermal zone.
Different versions of the reports are available. The basic heat conduction rate (W) and a per unit area
flux (W/m2 ) can have positive or negative values with the sign convention that positive indicates heat
flowing toward the thermal zone. There are also directed “gain” and “loss” versions that have only positive
values or zero when the heat flow direction opposes (W). Finally there is a version for total energy transfer
(J).
These “heat storage” output variables combine the inside face conduction and outside face conduction
reports together to describe the thermal storage situation in a heat transfer surface in a nominal way.
This is simply the difference between the inside and outside face conduction, but with the sign convention
arranged so that positive values indicate heat being added to the core of the surface.
Different versions of the reports are available. The basic heat storage rate (W) and a per unit area flux
(W/m2 ) can have positive or negative values with the sign convention that positive indicates heat being
added to the surface’s mass. There are also directed “gain” and “loss” versions that have only positive
values or zero when the heat storage direction opposes (W). Finally there is a version for total energy
stored (J).
The sum of the Opaque Surface Inside Face Conduction values for all opaque surfaces in a zone for both
positive and negative sums. For example, assume a zone has six opaque surfaces with Opaque Surface
Inside Face Conduction values of 100, -200, 400, 50, 150 and –300 W. Then Zone Opaque Surface Inside
Face Conduction = 700 - 500 = 200 W. Or if a zone has six opaque surfaces with Opaque Surface Inside
Face Conduction values of -100, -200, 400, -50, 150 and –300W. Then Zone Opaque Surface Inside Face
Conduction = 550 – 650 = -100 W.
310 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.9.43.20 Zone Opaque Surface Inside Faces Total Conduction Heat Gain Rate [W]
1.9.43.21 Zone Opaque Surface Inside Faces Total Conduction Heat Gain Energy [J]
These are the power and energy sums for the Opaque Surface Inside Face Conduction values for all opaque
surfaces in a zone when that sum is positive. For example, assume a zone has six opaque surfaces with
Opaque Surface Inside Face Conduction values of 100, -200, 400, 50, 150 and –300 W. Then Zone Opaque
Surface Inside Faces Total Conduction Heat Gain Rate = 700 - 500 = 200 W.
1.9.43.22 Zone Opaque Surface Inside Faces Total Conduction Heat Loss Rate [W]
1.9.43.23 Zone Opaque Surface Inside Faces Total Conduction Heat Loss Energy [J]
These are the power and energy absolute value for the sums of the Opaque Surface Inside Face Conduction
values for all opaque surfaces in a zone when that sum is negative. For example, assume a zone has six
opaque surfaces with Opaque Surface Inside Face Conduction values of -100, -200, 400, -50, 150 and –300W.
Then Zone Opaque Surface Inside Faces Total Conduction Heat Loss Rate = |550 – 650| = |-100| = 100
W.
1.9.43.29 Surface Inside Face Beam Solar Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]
Beam solar radiation from exterior windows absorbed on the inside face of an opaque heat transfer surface.
For Solar Distribution = FullInteriorAndExterior, this quantity can be non-zero for both floor and wall
surfaces. Otherwise, for Solar Distribution = FullExterior or MinimalShadowing, it can be non-zero only
for floor surfaces since in this case all entering beam solar is assumed to fall on the floor. Note that this
variable will not be operational (have a real value) unless there are exterior windows in the zone.
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 311
1.9.44.7 Surface Window Total Glazing Layers Absorbed Shortwave Radiation Rate
[W]
1.9.44.8 Surface Window Total Glazing Layers Absorbed Solar Radiation Rate [W]
1.9.44.9 Surface Window Total Glazing Layers Absorbed Solar Radiation Energy [J]
The total exterior beam and diffuse solar radiation absorbed in all of the glass layers of an exterior window.
1.9.44.10 Surface Window Shading Device Absorbed Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Surface Window Shading Device Absorbed Solar Radiation Energy [J]
The exterior beam and diffuse solar radiation absorbed in the shading device, if present, of an exterior
window.
1.9.44.15 Surface Window Transmitted Beam To Beam Solar Radiation Rate [W]
1.9.44.16 Surface Window Transmitted Beam To Beam Solar Radiation Energy [J]
For a window with a blind, this transmitted radiation consists of beam radiation that passes between the
slats. For a window with a screen, this value consists of direct beam radiation that is transmitted through
the screen (gaps between the screen material).
1.9.44.17 Surface Window Transmitted Beam To Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate [W]
1.9.44.18 Surface Window Transmitted Beam To Diffuse Solar Radiation Energy [J]
For a window with a blind, this transmitted radiation consists of diffuse radiation reflected from beam
by the slats. For a window with a screen, this value consists of diffuse radiation reflected by the screen
material.
1.9.44.19 Zone Exterior Windows Total Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Rate [W]
1.9.44.20 Zone Exterior Windows Total Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Energy
[J]
The sum of the Surface Window Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Rate (see definition above) from all
exterior windows in a zone.
1.9.44.21 Zone Interior Windows Total Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Rate [W]
1.9.44.22 Zone Interior Windows Total Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Energy [J]
The sum of the Surface Window Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Rate (see definition above) from all
interior windows in a zone.
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 313
1.9.44.25 Zone Exterior Windows Total Transmitted Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate
[W]
1.9.44.26 Zone Exterior Windows Total Transmitted Diffuse Solar Radiation Energy
[J]
The combined beam and diffuse solar that first entered adjacent zones through exterior windows in the
adjacent zones, was subsequently reflected from interior surfaces in those zones (becoming diffuse through
that reflection), and was then transmitted through interior windows into the current zone.
1.9.44.27 Zone Interior Windows Total Transmitted Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate [W]
1.9.44.28 Zone Interior Windows Total Transmitted Diffuse Solar Radiation Energy
[J]
The sum of the Surface Window Transmitted Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate (see definition above) from all
interior windows in a zone.
present) that the air comes in contact with as it flows through the gap. If the gap airflow goes to the zone
indoor air, the gap convective heat flow is added to the zone load. Applicable to exterior windows only.
• [Convective heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the glazing]
• [Net IR heat flow to the zone from zone side of the glazing]
Here, short-wave radiation is that from lights and diffuse interior solar radiation.
For a window with an interior shading device, this heat flow is equal to:
• [Convective heat flow to the zone from the air flowing through the gap between glazing and shading
device]
• [Convective heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the shading device]
• [Net IR heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the glazing]
• [Net IR heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the shading device]
The total window heat flow can also be thought of as the sum of the solar and conductive gain to the
zone from the window.
Here, short-wave radiation is that from lights and diffuse interior solar radiation.
For a window with an interior shading device, this heat flow is equal to:
1.9.44.46 Surface Window Outside Reveal Reflected Beam Solar Radiation Rate [W]
1.9.44.47 Surface Window Outside Reveal Reflected Beam Solar Radiation Energy
[J]
Beam solar radiation reflected from the outside reveal surfaces of a window (ref: Reveal Surfaces under
WindowProperty:FrameAndDivider object). There are both rate and energy versions.
1.9.44.48 Surface Window Inside Reveal Reflected Beam Solar Radiation Rate [W]
1.9.44.49 Surface Window Inside Reveal Reflected Beam Solar Radiation Energy [J]
Beam solar radiation reflected from the inside reveal surfaces of a window (ref: Reveal Surfaces under
WindowProperty:FrameAndDivider object). There are both rate and energy versions.
1.9.44.50 Surface Window Inside Reveal Absorbed Beam Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Beam solar radiation absorbed at the inside reveal surfaces of a window, in Watts.
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 317
Figure 1.34: Vertical exterior window showing solar horizontal profile angle, solar vertical profile
angle and solar incidence angle.
318 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.9.44.51 Surface Window Inside Reveal Reflected Diffuse Zone Solar Radiation Rate
[W]
Diffuse solar radiation reflected from inside reveal surfaces of a window into the zone, in Watts.
1.9.44.52 Surface Window Inside Reveal Reflected Diffuse Frame Solar Radiation
Rate [W]
Diffuse solar radiation reflected from inside reveal surfaces onto the frame surfaces of a window, in Watts.
1.9.44.53 Surface Window Inside Reveal Reflected Diffuse Glazing Solar Radiation
Rate [W]
Diffuse solar radiation reflected from inside reveal surfaces onto the glazing surfaces of a window, in Watts.
• For airflow source = indoorair, temperature of either face in contact with airflow < zone air dewpoint
temperature.
• For airflow source = outdoorair, temperature of either face in contact with airflow < outside air
dewpoint temperature.
As for regular windows, the value will also be 1 if condensation occurs on the innermost glass face.
For a time interval longer a timestep, this is the fraction of the time interval that the shading device is
on. For example, take the case where the time interval is one hour and the timestep is 10 minutes. Then
if the shading device is on for two timesteps in the hour and off for the other four timesteps, then the
fraction of time that the shading device is on = 2/6 = 0.3333.
1.9.44.62 Surface Window Blind and Glazing System Beam Solar Transmittance []
The fraction of exterior beam solar radiation incident on an exterior window with a blind (excluding window
frame, if present) that is transmitted through the blind/glass system as beam solar radiation. Depends on
various factors, including type of glass; solar incidence angle; slat angle, width, separation, and thickness;
and horizontal solar profile angle (for blinds with horizontal slats) or vertical solar profile angle (for blinds
with vertical slats).
320 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.9.44.63 Surface Window Blind and Glazing System Diffuse Solar Transmittance []
The fraction of exterior diffuse solar radiation incident on an exterior window with a blind (excluding
window frame, if present) that is transmitted through the blind/glass system as diffuse solar radiation.
Depends on various factors, including type of glass and slat angle, width, separation, thickness and re-
flectance. For blinds with a fixed slat angle the transmittance value reported here will be constant.
1.9.44.67 Surface Window Screen and Glazing System Beam Solar Transmittance[]
The fraction of exterior beam solar radiation incident on an exterior window with a screen (excluding
window frame, if present) that is transmitted through the screen/glass system as beam solar radiation.
Depends on various factors, including the screen reflectance and the relative angle of the incident beam with
respect to the screen. This value will include the amount of inward reflection of solar beam off the screen
material surface if the user specifies this modeling option (i.e., Material: WindowScreen, field Reflected
Beam Transmittance Accounting Method = Model as Direct Beam).
1.9.44.68 Surface Window Screen and Glazing System Diffuse Solar Transmittance []
The fraction of exterior diffuse solar radiation incident on an exterior window with a screen (excluding
window frame, if present) that is transmitted through the screen/glass system as diffuse solar radiation.
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 321
1.9.44.72 Surface Inside Face Initial Transmitted Diffuse Transmitted Out Window
Solar Radiation Rate [W]
As of Version 2.1, the diffuse solar transmitted through exterior windows that is initially distributed to
another window in the zone and transmitted out of the zone through that window. For exterior windows,
this transmitted diffuse solar is “lost” to the exterior environment For interior windows, this transmitted
diffuse solar is distributed to heat transfer surfaces in the adjacent zone, and is part of the Surface Inside
Face Initial Transmitted Diffuse Absorbed Solar Radiation Rate for these adjacent zone surfaces.
1.9.44.74 Surface Window Inside Face Glazing Zone Convection Heat Gain Rate [W]
The surface convection heat transfer from the glazing to the zone in watts. This output variable is the
term called “[Convective heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the glazing]” under the description
above for Surface Window Heat Gain Rate output variable. If the window has an interior shade or blind,
then this is zero and the glazing’s convection is included in the report called “Surface Window Inside Face
Gap between Shade and Glazing Zone Convection Heat Gain Rate”.
1.9.44.75 Surface Window Inside Face Glazing Net Infrared Heat Transfer Rate [W]
The net exchange of infrared radiation heat transfer from the glazing to the zone in watts. This output
variable is the term called “[Net IR heat flow to the zone from zone side of the glazing]” under the
322 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
description above for Surface Window Heat Gain Rate output variable.
1.9.44.76 Surface Window Shortwave from Zone Back Out Window Heat Transfer
Rate [W]
This is the short-wave radiation heat transfer from the zone back out the window in watts. This is a
measure of the diffuse short-wave light (from reflected solar and electric lighting) that leave the zone
through the window. This output variable is the term called “[Short-wave radiation from zone transmitted
back out the window]” under the description above for Surface Window Heat Gain Rate output variable.
1.9.44.77 Surface Window Inside Face Frame and Divider Zone Heat Gain Rate [W]
This is the heat transfer from any frames and/or dividers to the zone in watts. This output variable is the
term called “[Conduction to zone from window frame and divider, if present]” under the description above
for Surface Window Heat Gain Rate output variable. (The word “conduction” here is used because the
models is simplified compared to the complexities of surface convection and radiation.)
1.9.44.86 Surface Window Inside Face Gap between Shade and Glazing Zone Convec-
tion Heat Gain Rate [W]
This is the convection surface heat transfer from the both the glazing and the shade’s back face to the zone
in Watts. This output variable is the term called “[Convective heat flow to the zone from the air flowing
through the gap between glazing and shading device]” under the description above for Surface Window
Heat Gain Rate output variable. For Equivalent Layer window this output variable is the convection heat
gain from vented interior air gap to the zone in Watts.
1.9.44.87 Surface Window Inside Face Shade Zone Convection Heat Gain Rate [W]
This is the convection surface heat transfer from the front side of any interior shade or blind to the zone
in Watts. This output variable is the term called “[Convective heat flow to the zone from the zone side
of the shading device]” under the description above for Surface Window Heat Gain Rate output variable.
For equivalent Layer window this output variable is the convection heat gain rate from the inside face of
a glazing or a shade to the zone in Watts.
1.9.44.88 Surface Window Inside Face Shade Net Infrared Heat Transfer Rate [W]
The net exchange of infrared radiation heat transfer from the shade or blind to the zone in watts. This
output variable is the term called “[Net IR heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the shading device]”
under the description above for Surface Window Heat Gain Rate output variable.
1.9.44.89 Surface Window Inside Face Other Convection Heat Gain Rate [W]
The other (extra) convection heat transfer rate from the inside face of a an equivalent layer window. This
output is computed from the difference in convection flux when using equivalent inside surface temperature
of a window instead of the inside surface temperature from the standard surface heat balance calculation.
1.9.46.1 DXF
This report produces a special file (eplusout.dxf) in the industry standard DXF (Drawing Interchange
Format) for drawings. It is produced and accepted by many popular, commercial CAD programs. Detailed
reference can be found on the AutoCAD™ website at: http://www.autodesk.com/techpubs/autocad/
acadr14/dxf/index.htm.
EnergyPlus produces this file from the Report command:
• Shading:Site
• Shading:Building
• Shading:Site:Detailed
• Shading:Building:Detailed
Similarly to the surfaces, the detailed objects use vertex entry whereas the other objects are limited to
rectangular representation.
Objects for attached shading surfaces:
• Shading:Overhang
• Shading:Overhang:Projection
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 325
• Shading:Fin
• Shading:Fin:Projection
• Shading:Zone:Detailed
EnergyPlus creates “bi-directional” shades from each shading surface entered. This means that the
shade you input will cast a shadow no matter which side of the shade the sun is on. For example, a vertical
fin will cast a shadow whether the sun is on the left side or right side of the fin. Prior to V1.0.2, a shading
surface cast a shadow only in the hemisphere toward which the surface faced. This hemisphere is the one
pointed to by the shading surface’s outward normal vector, which is the cross product V23 x V21, where
V23 is the vector from vertex 2 to vertex 3 of the shading surface and V21 is the vector from vertex 2
to vertex 1. Beginning with V1.0.2, the shades in EnergyPlus are “bi-directional” so that they can cast
shadows in both hemispheres depending on the time-varying position of the sun relative to the shading
surface.
It is important to note that EnergyPlus will automatically account for “self-shading” effects—such as
in L-shaped buildings—in which some of the building’s wall and roof surfaces shade other parts of the
building, especially windows. This means that you only need to describe shading elements that aren’t
building heat-transfer surfaces.
Shading surfaces can also reflect solar radiation onto the building. This feature is simulated if you
choose FullExteriorWithReflections or FullInteriorAndExteriorWithReflections in the Building object (ref:
Building - Field: Solar Distribution). In this case, you may specify the reflectance properties of a shading
surface with the ShadingProperty:Reflectance object. Note: If no ShadingProperty:Reflectance object is
defined, then the shading surface reflectance values are assumed to be 0.2 and the fraction of shading
surface that is glazed is assumed to be 0.0.
Shading surfaces also automatically shade diffuse solar radiation (and long-wave radiation) from the
sky. And they will automatically shade diffuse solar radiation from the ground if Solar Distribution
Field = FullExteriorWithReflections or FullInteriorAndExteriorWithReflections in the Building object. (If
the reflections option for Solar Distribution is used, the program also takes into account the reduction
of solar radiation reflected from the ground due to shading of the ground by shading surfaces and by
the building itself.) Otherwise, shading surfaces will not shade diffuse radiation from the ground unless
you enter a reduced value for View Factor to Ground for those building surfaces that are shaded (ref:
BuildingSurface:Detailed - Field: View Factor to Ground and FenestrationSurface:Detailed - Field: View
Factor to Ground).
Shading:Building ,
Bushes -East , !- Name
90, !- Azimuth Angle {deg}
90, !- Tilt Angle {deg}
45, !- Starting X Coordinate {m}
0, !- Starting Y Coordinate {m}
0, !- Starting Z Coordinate {m}
50, !- Length {m}
1; !- Height {m}
Shading:Site ,
Bushes -North , !- Name
0, !- Azimuth Angle {deg}
90, !- Tilt Angle {deg}
45, !- Starting X Coordinate {m}
50, !- Starting Y Coordinate {m}
0, !- Starting Z Coordinate {m}
50, !- Length {m}
1; !- Height {m}
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 327
• Both sides of the shading surface have the same transmittance properties.
• The transmittance is the same for both beam and diffuse solar radiation.
• Beam radiation incident on a shading surface is transmitted as beam radiation with no change in
direction, i.e., there is no beam-to-diffuse component.
• If two shading surfaces with non-zero transmittance overlap, the net transmittance is the product
of the individual transmittances. Inter-reflection between the shading surfaces (and between the
shading surfaces and the building) is ignored.
• For the daylighting calculation (ref: Group – Daylighting) the shading surface’s visible transmittance
is assumed to be the same as its solar transmittance.
• Shading devices are assumed to be opaque to long-wave radiation no matter what the solar trans-
mittance value is.
Note that shading devices only shade solar radiation when the sun is up, which is automatically
determined by EnergyPlus from latitude, time of year, etc. The user need only account for the time-
varying transmittance of the shading device in the transmittance schedule, not whether the sun is up or
not.
328 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Shading:Building:Detailed ,
EAST SIDE TREE , !- Detached Shading
ShadingTransmittance :0002 , !- Shadowing Transmittance & Schedule
3, !-Triangle
33.52800 , 10.66800 , 10.05800 ,
33.52800 , 13.71600 , 0.9140000 ,
33.52800 , 4.572000 , 0.9140000 ;
Shading:Building:Detailed ,
WEST SIDE TREE , !- Detached Shading
ShadingTransmittance :0002 , !- Shadowing Transmittance & Schedule
3, !-Triangle
-3.048000 , 7.620000 , 10.05800 ,
-3.048000 , 4.572000 , 0.9140000 ,
-3.048000 , 13.71600 , 0.9140000 ;
1.9.52 Shading:Overhang
An overhang typically is used to shade a window in a building.
1.9.52.1 Inputs
1.9.52.1.1 Field: Name
This is the name of the overhang. It must be different from other surface names.
1.9.53 Shading:Overhang:Projection
An overhang typically is used to shade a window in a building. This object allows for specifying the depth
of the overhang as a fraction of the window or door’s height.
1.9.53.1 Inputs
1.9.53.1.1 Field: Name
This is the name of the overhang. It must be different from other surface names.
1.9.54 Shading:Fin
Fins shade either side of windows/doors in a building. This object allows for specification of both fins for
the window. Fin placement is relative to the edge of the glass and user must include the frame width when
a frame is present.
1.9.54.1 Inputs
1.9.54.1.1 Field: Name
This is the name of the overhang. It must be different from other surface names.
1.9.55 Shading:Fin:Projection
Fins shade either side of windows/doors in a building. This object allows for specification of both fins for
the window. This object allows for specifying the depth of the overhang as a fraction of the window or
door’s width. Fin placement is relative to the edge of the glass and user must include the frame width
when a frame is present.
1.9.55.1 Inputs
1.9.55.1.1 Field: Name
This is the name of the overhang. It must be different from other surface names.
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 331
Shading:Overhang:Projection ,
Zn001:Wall001:Win001:Shade001 , !- Name
Zn001:Wall001:Win001 , !- Window or Door Name
.7, !- Height above Window or Door {m}
90, !- Tilt Angle from Window/Door {deg}
.2, !- Left extension from Window/Door Width {m}
.2, !- Right extension from Window/Door Width {m}
.6; !- Depth as Fraction of Window/Door Height {m}
Shading:Overhang ,
Zn001:Wall001:Door001:Shade001 , !- Name
Zn001:Wall001:Door001 , !- Window or Door Name
.6, !- Height above Window or Door {m}
90, !- Tilt Angle from Window/Door {deg}
0, !- Left extension from Window/Door Width {m}
0, !- Right extension from Window/Door Width {m}
3; !- Depth {m}
Shading:Fin:Projection ,
Zn001:Wall001:Shade003 , !- Name
Zn001:Wall001:Win001 , !- Window or Door Name
.1, !- Left Extension from Window/Door {m}
.1, !- Left Distance Above Top of Window {m}
.1, !- Left Distance Below Bottom of Window {m}
90, !- Left Tilt Angle from Window/Door {deg}
.6, !- Left Depth as Fraction of Window/Door Width {m}
.1, !- Right Extension from Window/Door {m}
.1, !- Right Distance Above Top of Window {m}
.1, !- Right Distance Below Bottom of Window {m}
90, !- Right Tilt Angle from Window/Door {deg}
.6; !- Right Depth as Fraction of Window/Door Width {m}
1.9.56 Shading:Zone:Detailed
This object is used to describe attached “subsurfaces” such as overhangs, wings or fins that project outward
from a base surface. This classification is used for convenience; actually, a device of this type can cast
shadows on the surface to which it is attached as well as on adjacent surfaces. For example, a fin may
shade its parent wall as well as adjacent walls.
Note that a zone surface can cast shadows on other zone surfaces. However, you don’t have to worry
about such effects—for example, one wall of an L-shaped building shading another wall–because EnergyPlus
will automatically check for this kind of “self shadowing” and do the proper calculations.
Unlike attached (or detached) shading surfaces, building surfaces can only cast shadows in the hemi-
sphere towards which they face. This means, for example, that a roof that faces upward will not cast a
shadow downward. (Thus, specifying an oversized roof in an attempt to account for the shading effects of
overhangs will not work). Interior surfaces do not cast shadows of any kind.
1.9.56.1 Inputs
1.9.56.1.1 Field: Name
This is the name of the attached shading surface. It must be different from other surface names.
The name of a schedule of solar transmittance values from 0.0 to 1.0 for the shading surface. If a blank
is entered in this field, the transmittance value defaults to 0.0, i.e., the shading surface is opaque at all
times. This scheduling can be used to allow for seasonal transmittance change, such as for deciduous trees
that have a higher transmittance in winter than in summer. Transmittance based on time of day can also
be used—a movable awning, for example, where the transmittance is some value less than 1.0 when the
awning is in place and is 1.0 when the awning is retracted.
The following assumptions are made in the shading surface transmittance calculation:
• Both sides of the shading surface have the same transmittance properties.
• The transmittance is the same for both beam and diffuse solar radiation.
• Beam radiation incident on a shading surface is transmitted as beam radiation with no change in
direction, i.e., there is no beam-to-diffuse component.
• If two shading surfaces with non-zero transmittance overlap, the net transmittance is the product
of the individual transmittances. Inter-reflection between the shading surfaces (and between the
shading surfaces and the building) is ignored.
• For the daylighting calculation (ref: Group – Daylighting) the shading surface’s visible transmittance
is assumed to be the same as its solar transmittance.
• Shading devices are assumed to be opaque to long-wave radiation no matter what the solar trans-
mittance value is.
Note that shading devices only shade solar radiation when the sun is up, which is automatically
determined by EnergyPlus from latitude, time of year, etc. The user need only account for the time-
varying transmittance of the shading device in the transmittance schedule, not whether the sun is up or
not.
Note that for horizontal surfaces, any corner may be chosen as the starting corner. The order of
vertices determines whether the surface is facing up or down. Shading surfaces are mirrored automat-
ically unless the user specifies “DoNotMirrorDetachedShading”, so each shading surface need only be
described once.
Shading:Zone:Detailed ,
Zn003:Wall001:Shade001 , !- Surface Name
Zn003:Wall001 , !- Base Surface Name
ShadingTransmittance :0001 , !- Shadowing Transmittance Schedule
4, !-RectangularLeftFin
57.97000 , 8.450000 ,10.00000 ,
57.97000 , 8.450000 , 0.0000000E+00,
57.97000 , 6.450000 , 0.0000000E+00,
57.97000 , 6.450000 ,10.00000 ;
Shading:Zone:Detailed ,
Zn003:Wall001:Shade002 , !- Surface Name
Zn003:Wall001 , !- Base Surface Name
ShadingTransmittance :0003 , !- Shadowing Transmittance Schedule
4, !-RectangularRightFin
77.97000 , 6.450000 ,10.00000 ,
77.97000 , 6.450000 , 0.0000000E+00,
77.97000 , 8.450000 , 0.0000000E+00,
77.97000 , 8.450000 ,10.00000 ;
1.9.57 ShadingProperty:Reflectance
Specifies the reflectance properties of a shading surface when the solar reflection calculation has requested,
i.e., when if “WithReflections” option is chosen in the Building object (ref: Building - Field: Solar Distri-
bution). It is assumed that shading surfaces are divided into an unglazed, diffusely reflecting portion and a
glazed, specularly-reflecting portion, either of which may be zero. The reflectance properties are assumed
to be the same on both sides of the shading surface.
Note that a shadowing transmittance schedule (ref: Shading Surfaces, Field: Transmittance Schedule
Name) can be used with a reflective shading surface. However, EnergyPlus assumes that the reflectance
properties of the shading surface are constant even if the transmittance varies.
If no ShadingProperty:Reflectance objects are entered, the default values shown here will be used for
shading surfaces. Other surfaces have their reflectance properties defined by the materials in the outer
layers of the constructions.
1.9.57.1 Inputs
1.9.57.1.1 Field: Shading Surface Name
The name of the Shading:Site, Shading:Building, Shading:Site:Detailed, Shading:Building:Detailed,
Shading:Overhang, Shading:Overhang:Projection, Shading:Fin, Shading:Fin:Projection or Shad-
ing:Zone:Detailed object to which the following fields apply.
If this ShadingProperty:Reflectance object is not defined for a shading surface the default values listed
in each of the following fields will be used in the solar reflection calculation.
Shading:Site:Detailed ,
Adjacent Glazed Facade , !- User Supplied Surface Name
, !- Shadowing Transmittance Schedule
4, !- Number of Surface Vertex Groups -- Number of (X,Y,Z) groups
0,-24,30, !- Vertex 1 X,Y,Z coordinates
0,-24,0, !- Vertex 2 X,Y,Z coordinates
0,0,0, !- Vertex 3 X,Y,Z coordinates
0,0,30; !-Vertex 3 X,Y,Z coordinates
ShadingProperty:Reflectance ,
Adjacent Glazed Facade , !- Name of Surface:Shading Object
0.3, !- Diffuse Solar Reflectance of Unglazed Part of Shading Surface
0.3, !- Diffuse Visible Reflectance of Unglazed Part of Shading Surface
0.7, !- Fraction of Shading Surface That Is Glazed
GlassCon -1; !- Name of Glazing Construction
IDF example of Shading Surface Reflectance for shading surface without specular reflection
Shading:Site:Detailed ,
Adjacent Blank Facade , !- User Supplied Surface Name
, !- Shadowing Transmittance Schedule
4, !- Number of Surface Vertex Groups -- Number of (X,Y,Z) groups
0,-24,30,
0,-24,0,
0,0,0,
0,0,30;
ShadingProperty:Reflectance ,
Adjacent Blank Facade , !- Name of Surface:Shading Object
0.4, !- Diffuse Solar Reflectance of Unglazed Part of Shading Surface
0.4, !- Diffuse Visible Reflectance of Unglazed Part of Shading Surface
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 337
1.9.58 WindowShadingControl
Window shading with coverings like drapes, blinds, screens or pull-down shades can be used to reduce the
amount of solar radiation entering the window or reduce daylighting glare. It can also be used to reduce
heat loss through the window (movable insulation). Leaving the window covering open in the winter can
maximize solar heat gain and thereby reduce heating loads.
With WindowShadingControl you specify the type and location of the shading device, what variable or
combination of variables controls deployment of the shading device, and what the control setpoint is. If the
shading device is a blind, you also specify how the slat angle is controlled. Each WindowShadingControl
object is associated with a zone and has a list of one or more windows and glass doors to which the shading
control is applied (ref: FenestrationSurface:Detailed with Type = Window or GlassDoor, Window, and
GlazedDoor).
NOTE: WindowShadingControl does not work with complex fenestration systems. Controlled complex
fenestration systems can be made only with Energy Management Systems objects. Refrencing a Fenestra-
tionSurface:Detailed in a WindowShadingControl while using complex fenestration systems will be ignored
by program.
As shown in Figure 1.36, a shading device can be inside the window (Shading Type = InteriorShade or
InteriorBlind), outside the window (Shading Type = ExteriorShade or ExteriorBlind), or between panes
of glass (Shading Type = BetweenGlassShade or BetweenGlassBlind). The exception is window screens
which can only be outside the window (Shading Type = ExteriorScreen).
When a shading device is present it is either retracted or activated. When it is retracted it covers
none of the window. When it is activated it covers the entire glazed part of the window (but not the
frame). Whether the shading device is retracted or activated in a particular timestep depends on the
control mechanism: see “Shading Control Type,” below. To model a case in which the shading device,
when activated, covers only part of the window you will have to divide the window into two separate
windows, one with the shading device and one without the shading device.
338 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
A shading device can also be of a kind in which the optical properties of the glazing switch from one
set of values to another in order to increase or decrease solar or visible transmittance (Shading Type =
SwitchableGlazing).
There are two ways of specifying the actual shading device:
Most Shading Control Types allow you to specify a schedule that determines when the control is active.
One example is a control that is active seasonally. For example, to deploy shading only in the summer
when the incident solar is high enough, use Shading Control Type = OnIfHighSolarOnWindow with a
schedule that is 1 during the summer months and 0 otherwise and specify Shading Control Is Scheduled
= YES.
In addition, most Shading Control Types also allow you to specify that glare control is active in addition
to the specified Control Type. For example, you might want to deploy shading when the solar incident on
a window is too high OR the glare from the window is too high. This type of joint control requires that
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 339
the window be in a daylit zone, that the maximum allowed glare be specified in the Daylighting object for
the zone, and that Glare Control Is Active = YES in WindowShadingControl.
If Shading Type = InteriorBlind, ExteriorBlind or BetweenGlassBlind you can use WindowShading-
Control to specify how the slat angle of the blind is controlled when the blind is in place.
A special type of WindowShadingControl is SwitchableGlazing. An example is electrochromic glazing
in which the transmittance and reflectance of the glass is controlled electronically. For example, you could
have electrochromic glazing switch from clear (high transmittance) to dark (low transmittance) to control
solar gain. If you choose the Shading Type = SwitchableGlazing option for WindowShadingControl, the
unswitched (clear) state is specified by the Construction referenced by the window and the switched (dark)
state is specified by the Construction referenced by WindowShadingControl for that window. For example,
if you specify Shading Type = SwitchableGlazing and Shading Control Type = OnIfHighSolarOnWindow,
then the glazing will switch to the dark state whenever the solar radiation striking the window exceeds the
Setpoint value.
For Shading Type = SwitchableGlazing the state of the window is either clear (unswitched) or dark
(fully switched) for all Shading Control Types except MeetDaylightIlluminanceSetpoint. In this case,
the transmittance of the glazing is adjusted to just meet the daylight illuminance set point at the first
daylighting reference point (see Daylighting). This type of control assures that there is just enough solar
gain to meet the daylighting requirements in a zone, and no more, thus reducing the cooling load.
To specify the order of when shades are deployed, the two different approaches can be used:
- If shades for each window are independently controlled, than a single WindowShadingControl object
should be used and the Multiple Surface Control Type field should be set to Sequential. The windows
should be specified in the Fenestration Surface N Name fields in the order that they should be deployed.
The Shading Control Sequence Number field is not used being used since only one WindowShadingControl
is used so it can be set to any value or left blank.
- If shades for a group of windows are deployed together and shades for another group of windows are
deployed after that, than multiple WindowShadingControl objects should be used. Each WindowShading-
Control should have Multiple Surface Control Type field should be set to Group and the names of each
window in the group should be specified in the Fenestration Surface N Name fields. The Shading Control
Sequence Number in the WindowShadingControl object that controls the first group of shades should be
set to 1. The Shading Control Sequence Number in the WindowShadingControl object that controls the
second group of shades should be set to 2. Any number of additional groups of shades can be added and
Shading Control Sequence Number can be incremented by one for each group.
It is possible to mix these two approaches. For example, if first a group of shades is controlled together
followed by a sequence of individual windows than these approaches can be combined with the Multiple
Surface Control Type field should be set to Sequential in the second WindowShadingControl object.
1.9.58.1 Inputs
1.9.58.1.1 Field: Name
Name of the window shading control.
OnIfHighSolarOnWindow: Shading is on if beam plus diffuse solar radiation incident on the window
exceeds SetPoint (W/m2 ) and schedule, if specified, allows shading.
OnIfHighHorizontalSolar: Shading is on if total (beam plus diffuse) horizontal solar irradiance exceeds
SetPoint (W/m2 ) and schedule, if specified, allows shading.
OnIfHighOutdoorAirTemperature: Shading is on if outside air temperature exceeds SetPoint (C) and
schedule, if specified, allows shading.
OnIfHighZoneAirTemperature: Shading is on if zone air temperature in the previous timestep exceeds
SetPoint (C) and schedule, if specified, allows shading.
OnIfHighZoneCooling: Shading is on if zone cooling rate in the previous timestep exceeds SetPoint
(W) and schedule, if specified, allows shading.
OnIfHighGlare: Shading is on if the total daylight glare index at the zone’s first daylighting reference
point from all of the exterior windows in the zone exceeds the maximum glare index specified in the day-
lighting input for zone (ref: Group – Daylighting). Applicable only to windows in zones with daylighting.
Note: Unlike other Shading Control Types, glare control is active whether or not a schedule is specified.
MeetDaylightIlluminanceSetpoint: Used only with ShadingType = SwitchableGlazing in zones with
daylighting controls. In this case the transmittance of the glazing is adjusted to just meet the daylight
illuminance set point at the first daylighting reference point. Note that the daylight illuminance set point
is specified in the Daylighting:Controls object for the Zone; it is not specified as a WindowShadingControl
SetPoint. When the glare control is active, if meeting the daylight illuminance set point at the first day-
lighting reference point results in higher discomfort glare index (DGI) than the specified zone’s maximum
allowable DGI for either of the daylight reference points, the glazing will be further dimmed until the DGI
equals the specified maximum allowable value.
The following three control types can be used to reduce zone heating load during the winter by reducing
window conductive heat loss at night and leaving the window unshaded during the day to maximize solar
gain. They are applicable to any Shading Type except ExteriorScreen but are most appropriate for interior
or exterior shades with high insulating value (“movable insulation”). “Night” means the sun is down and
“day” means the sun is up.
OnNightIfLowOutdoorTempAndOffDay: Shading is on at night if the outside air temperature is less
than SetPoint (C) and schedule, if specified, allows shading. Shading is off during the day.
OnNightIfLowInsideTempAndOffDay: Shading is on at night if the zone air temperature in the previous
timestep is less than SetPoint (C) and schedule, if specified, allows shading. Shading is off during the day.
OnNightIfHeatingAndOffDay: Shading is on at night if the zone heating rate in the previous timestep
exceeds SetPoint (W) and schedule, if specified, allows shading. Shading is off during the day.
The following two control types can be used to reduce zone heating and cooling load. They are
applicable to any Shading Type except ExteriorScreen but are most appropriate for translucent interior or
exterior shades with high insulating value (“translucent movable insulation”).
OnNightIfLowOutdoorTempAndOnDayIfCooling: Shading is on at night if the outside air temperature
is less than SetPoint (C). Shading is on during the day if the zone cooling rate in the previous timestep is
non-zero. Night and day shading is subject to schedule, if specified.
OnNightIfHeatingAndOnDayIfCooling: Shading is on at night if the zone heating rate in the previous
timestep exceeds SetPoint (W). Shading is on during the day if the zone cooling rate in the previous
timestep is non-zero. Night and day shading is subject to schedule, if specified.
The following control types can be used to reduce zone cooling load. They are applicable to any Shading
Type except ExteriorScreen but are most appropriate for interior or exterior blinds, interior or exterior
shades with low insulating value, or switchable glazing.
OffNightAndOnDayIfCoolingAndHighSolarOnWindow: Shading is off at night. Shading is on during
the day if the solar radiation incident on the window exceeds SetPoint (W/m2 ) and if the zone cooling rate
in the previous timestep is non-zero. Daytime shading is subject to schedule, if specified.
342 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
SetPoint is unused for Shading Control Type = OnIfScheduleAllows, OnIfHighGlare and DaylightIllu-
minance.
fields of fenestration surface names can be added to the object. All of the fenestration surfaces must be
either in the zone specified in the Zone Name field or in an adjacent zone connected by an interior window.
An IDF example: window with interior roll shade that is deployed when solar incident on the window
exceeds 50 W/m2 .
! Example 1: Interior movable shade specified by giving name of shaded construction
! in WindowShadingControl
Construction , SINGLE PANE WITH INT SHADE , ! Name of construction with shade
GLASS - CLEAR SHEET 1 / 8 IN , !- First material layer
ROLL SHADE ; !- Second material layer
WindowShadingControl ,
CONTROL ON INCIDENT SOLAR , !- Name
West Zone , !- Zone Name
1, !- Shading Control Sequence Number
InteriorShade , !- Shading Type
SINGLE PANE WITH INT SHADE , !- Name of construction with shading device
OnIfHighSolarOnWindow , !- Shading Control Type
, !- Schedule name
50.0, !- Setpoint {W/m2}
NO , !- Shading Control Is Scheduled
NO , !- Glare Control Is Active
, !- Material Name of Shading Device
, !- Type of Slat Angle Control for Blinds
, !- Slat Angle Schedule Name
, !- Setpoint 2 {W/m2 or deg C}
West Zone_DaylCtrl , !- Daylighting Control Object Name
Sequential , !- Multiple Surface Control Type
Zn001:Wall001:Win001; !- Fenestration Surface 1 Name
FenestrationSurface:Detailed ,
Zn001:Wall001:Win001 , !- SubSurface Name
Window , !- Class
SINGLE PANE WITH NO SHADE , !- Name of construction without shading device
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Base Surface Name
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 345
, !- Target
0.5000000 , !- VF to Ground
, !- Frame/Divider name
1.0 , !- Multiplier
4 , !- Number of vertices (assumed rectangular)
0.548 , 0.0 , 2.5 , !- x,y,z of vertices {m}
0.548 , 0.0 , 0.5 ,
5.548 , 0.0 , 0.5 ,
5.548 , 0.0 , 2.5 ;
! Example 2: Interior movable shade specified by giving name of shading device in WindowShadingControl
WindowShadingControl ,
CONTROL ON INCIDENT SOLAR , !- Name
West Zone , !- Zone Name
1, !- Shading Control Sequence Number
InteriorShade , !- Shading Type
, !- Name of shaded construction
OnIfHighSolarOnWindow , !- Shading Control Type
, !- Schedule name
50.0, !- Setpoint {W/m2}
NO , !- Shading Control Is Scheduled
NO , !- Glare Control Is Active
ROLL SHADE , !- Material Name of Shading Device
, !- Type of Slat Angle Control for Blinds
, !- Slat Angle Schedule Name
, !- Setpoint 2 {W/m2 or deg C}
West Zone_DaylCtrl , !- Daylighting Control Object Name
Sequential , !- Multiple Surface Control Type
Zn001:Wall001:Win001; !- Fenestration Surface 1 Name
FenestrationSurface:Detailed ,
Zn001:Wall001:Win001 , !- SubSurface Name
Window , !- Class
SINGLE PANE WITH NO SHADE , !- Name of construction without shade
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Base Surface Name
346 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
, !- Target
0.5000000 , !- VF to Ground
, !- Frame/Divider name
1.0 , !- Multiplier
4 , !- Number of vertices (assumed rectangular)
0.548 , 0.0 , 2.5 , !- x,y,z of vertices {m}
0.548 , 0.0 , 0.5 ,
5.548 , 0.0 , 0.5 ,
5.548 , 0.0 , 2.5 ;
1.9.59 WindowProperty:FrameAndDivider
The WindowProperty:FrameAndDivider object is referenced by exterior windows that have
• a frame, and/or
• a divider, and/or
A frame surrounds the glazing in a window (see Figure 1.37 and Figure 1.38). It is assumed that
all frame characteristics—such as width, conductance and solar absorptance—are the same for the top,
bottom and side elements of the frame. If the frame elements are not the same then you should enter
area-weighted average values for the frame characteristics.
The window vertices that you specify in the FenestrationSurface:Detailed object are those of the glazed
part of the window, not the frame. EnergyPlus automatically subtracts the area of the frame—determined
from the glazing dimensions and the frame width—from the area of the wall containing the window.
A divider, as shown in Figure 1.37, Figure 1.38 and Figure 1.39, divides the glazing up into separate
lites. It is assumed that all divider elements have the same characteristics. If not, area-weighted average
values should be used. EnergyPlus automatically subtracts the divider area from the glazed area of the
window.
Reveal surfaces, as shown in Figure 1.40, are associated with the setback of the glazing from the
outside and/or inside surface of the parent wall. If the depth and solar absorptance of these surfaces
are specified, the program will calculate the reflection of beam solar radiation from these surfaces. The
program also calculates the shadowing (onto the window) of beam and diffuse solar radiation by outside
reveal surfaces.
In EnergyPlus, a window can have any combination of frame, divider and reveal surfaces, or none of
these.
The best source of frame and divider characteristics is the WINDOW program, which will calculate the
values required by EnergyPlus for different frame and divider types. In particular, the THERM program
within the WINDOW program will calculate the effective conductance of frames and dividers; this is the
conductance taking 2-D heat transfer effects into account.
Note that a window’s frame and divider characteristics, along with other window information, can
be read in from the Window Data File (see “Importing Windows from the WINDOW program” and
“Construction:WindowDataFile object”). In this case the WindowProperty:FrameAndDivider referenced
by the window is not applicable and should be blank unless you want to specify reveal surfaces for beam
solar reflection.
In the illustration above, the divider has two horizontal elements and one vertical element.
1.9.59.1 Inputs
1.9.59.1.1 Field: Name
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 347
The net effect of beam solar reflected from outside reveal surfaces is to increase the heat gain to the
zone, whereas the effect of beam solar reflected from inside reveal surfaces is to decrease the heat gain to
the zone since part of this reflected solar is transmitted back out the window.
If the window has a frame, the absorption of reflected beam solar by the inside and outside surfaces
of the frame is considered. The shadowing of the frame onto interior reveal surfaces is also considered.
Figure 1.40: (a) Vertical section through a window (with frame) showing outside and inside reveal
surfaces and inside sill. (b) Perspective view looking from the outside of a window (without frame)
showing reveal surfaces. Note that “Outside Reveal Depth” is not a user input; it is calculated by
the program from the window and wall vertices.
An IDF example:
WindowProperty:FrameAndDivider ,
TestFrameAndDivider , ! Frame/Divider Name
0.05, ! Frame Width
0.04, ! Frame Outside Projection
0.03, ! Frame Inside Projection
5.0, ! Frame Conductance
1.3, ! Ratio of Frame -Edge Glass Conductance to Center -Of -Glass Conductance
0.8, ! Frame Solar Absorptance
354 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.9.60 WindowProperty:AirflowControl
This object is used to specify the control mechanism for windows in which forced air flows in the gap
between adjacent layers of glass. Such windows are called “airflow windows.” They are also known as
“heat-extract windows” or “climate windows.”
A common application is to reduce the zone load by exhausting indoor air through the window. In the
cooling season this picks up and expels some of the solar heat absorbed by the window glass (and by the
between-glass shade or blind, if present). In the heating season this warms the window, reducing the heat
loss from the window. A side benefit is increased thermal comfort. This is because the inside surface of
the window will generally be cooler in summer and warmer in winter.
The surface output variable “Surface Window Gap Convective Heat Transfer Rate” gives the heat
picked up (or lost) by the gap airflow.
1.9.60.1 Inputs
1.9.60.1.1 Field: Name
Name of the window that this WindowProperty:AirflowControl refers to. It must be a window with
two or three glass layers, i.e., double- or triple-glazing. For triple-glazing the airflow is assumed to be
between the two inner glass layers.
An error will result if the gas in the airflow gap is other than air. If an airflow window has a between-
glass shade or blind, the gas in the gap on either side of the shade or blind must be air.
exceeds the return airflow, then the difference between this sum and the return airflow goes to the indoor
air. The name of the Return Air Node may be specified below.
Figure 1.41 shows the allowed combinations of Airflow Source and Airflow Destination. The allowed
combinations of Airflow Source and Airflow Destination are:
IndoorAir -> OutdoorAir
IndoorAir -> IndoorAir
IndoorAir -> ReturnAir
OutdoorAir -> IndoorAir
OutdoorAir -> OutdoorAir
Figure 1.41: Gap airflow configurations for airflow windows. (a) Air exhaust window: Airflow
Source = InsideAir, Airflow Destination = OutsideAir; (b) Indoor air curtain window: Airflow
Source = InsideAir, Airflow Destination = InsideAir; (c) Air supply window: Airflow Source =
OutsideAir, Airflow Destination = InsideAir; (d) Outdoor air curtain window: Airflow Source
= OutsideAir, Airflow Destination = OutsideAir; (e) Airflow to Return Air: Airflow Source =
InsideAir, Airflow Destination = ReturnAir. Based on “Active facades,” Version no. 1, Belgian
Building Research Institute, June 2002.
1.9. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 357
1.9.61 WindowProperty:StormWindow
This object allows you to assign a movable exterior glass layer (“storm window” or “storm glass”) that is
usually applied to a window in the winter to reduce heat loss and removed in the summer. A WindowProp-
erty:StormWindow object is required for each window that has an associated storm window. It is assumed
that:
• When the storm glass is in place it is the outermost layer of the window, it covers only the glazed
part of the window and not the frame, and it forms a tight seal. See Figure 1.42.
• When the storm glass is not in place it is completely removed and has no effect on window heat
transfer.
• The gap between the storm glass and rest of the glazing is filled with air.
Figure 1.42: Section through a single-glazed window without (left) and with (right) a storm glass
layer. Not to scale.
With the addition of a storm window, single glazing effectively becomes double glazing, double glazing
becomes triple glazing, etc.
The presence of a storm window is indicated by the output variable “Surface Storm Window On Off
Status” (see “Window Output Variables”). This flag is 0 if the storm window is off, 1 if it is on, and –1 if
the window does not have an associated storm window.
The program automatically creates a window construction (ref: Construction) that consists of the storm
window glass layer and its adjacent air layer added to the original (unshaded, or “bare”) window construc-
tion. In the eplusout.eio file this construction is called BARECONSTRUCTIONWITHSTORMWIN:n,
where n is the number of the associated StormWin object. If the window has a shaded construction, the
358 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.9.61.1 Inputs
1.9.61.1.1 Field: Window Name
This is the name of a window (or glass door) to which the storm glass is applied. Not all windows can
accept WindowProperty:StormWindow. The rules are:
• The window construction (without the storm glass layer) can have up to three glass layers.
• If the window has an associated shaded construction (ref: WindowShadingControl), that construction
can have an interior shade or blind and up to three glass layers, or a between-glass shade or blind
and two glass layers. The shaded construction cannot have an exterior shade or blind, cannot have
a between-glass shade or blind and three glass layers, and cannot be switchable glazing.
• The window cannot be an airflow window, i.e., a window that has an associated WindowProp-
erty:AirflowControl.
1.9.61.1.3 Field: Distance Between Storm Glass Layer and Adjacent Glass
The separation between the storm glass and the rest of the window (Figure 1.42). It is measured from
the inside of the storm glass layer to the outside of the adjacent glass layer.
1.9.61.1.7 Field: Day of Month that Storm Glass Layer Is Taken Off
The day of the month that the storm window is removed. It is assumed that the storm window is
removed at the beginning of this day, i.e., during the first simulation timestep of the day, and stays off
until the month and day given by Month that Storm Glass Layer Is Put On, Day of Month that Storm
Glass Layer Is Put On.
In the northern hemisphere, the month the storm window is put on is generally greater than the month
it is taken off (for example put on in month 10, when it starts to get cold, and taken off in month 5, when
it starts to warm up). In the southern hemisphere this is reversed: month on is less than month off.
An IDF example of WindowProperty:StormWindow. The storm window is put in place on October 15
and removed on May 1.
WindowProperty:StormWindow ,
Window1 , !- Name of Window to Which Storm Window Glass Layer is Applied
GlassA , !- Name of Material:WindowGlass or MATERIAL:WindowGlass:AltInput that is the storm window
layer
0.060 , !- Distance from storm window to adjacent glass (m)
10, !- Month that Storm Window Is Put On
15, !- Day of Month that Storm Window Is Put On
5, !- Month that Storm Window Is Taken Off
1; !- Day of Month that Storm Window Is Taken Off
WINDOW v6.3 and later is capable of writing IDF excerpts for Window data. This is the preferred
method as no external file is necessary. See the Tips document for details on obtaining the IDF excerpt.
The WINDOW program calculates the U-value, Solar Heat Gain Coefficient, solar transmission/absorption
characteristics, visible transmission characteristics and other properties of a window under standard indoor
and outdoor conditions. WINDOW treats the whole window system—glazing, frame and divider. A sub-
program of WINDOW called THERM uses a 2-D finite element calculation to determine the effective
conductance of frame, divider and edge-of-glass elements. Another sub-program, OPTICS, determines the
solar-optical properties of glazing, including laminates and coated glass.
WINDOW can write a data file containing a description of the window that was analyzed. An example
of this file (which is no longer the preferred method) is shown in the Tips document under WINDOW
generated files. is shown below. This file, which can be named by the user, can be read by EnergyPlus.
For more complete description and examples, see the object description – Construction:WindowDataFile.
In this way, the same window that was created in WINDOW can be imported into EnergyPlus for annual
energy analysis without having to re-input the window data. To obtain WINDOW, THERM, or OPTICS
go to http://windows.lbl.gov and choose the software link. A major advantage of using WINDOW to create
window input for EnergyPlus is that you will have direct access to WINDOW’s expanding database of over
1000 different glass types; and you will be able to browse through this database according to different
criteria (color, transmittance, solar heat gain coefficient, etc.) to help you select the best glass type for
your application.
Although WINDOW writes only one window entry on the WINDOW data file, EnergyPlus users can
combine two or more of these files to end up with a single data file with multiple window entries of different
types. In this way a library of windows from WINDOW can be built up if so desired. If you combine files
like this you should be sure not to leave out or change any of lines from the original files.
There are four methods for inputting window constructions in EnergyPlus:
Note: When using method 4, the overall glazing system angular dependent properties,
including Tsol, Abs, Rfsol, Rbsol, Tvis, Rfvis, and Rbvis, are not used by EnergyPlus.
Therefore, methods 1 and 2 and preferably 3 are recommended.
• The SHGC calculations in EnergyPlus for window layers input using full spectral data use a spectral
weighting data set (derived from Optics5 data file ISO-9845GlobalNorm.std) that is different from
the WINDOW default spectral weighting data set (W5_NFRC_2003.std). This difference accounts
for most of the variation in SHGC values reported by EnergyPlus and WINDOW for full spectral
data window layer input. This variation is more pronounced for window constructions of three glass
layers or more.
• Users intending to select a window construction based on SHGC value for energy code compliance
should base their selection on the value reported by WINDOW since this is the officially recognized
value.
In EnergyPlus, the Window data file is searched for each “Construction:WindowDataFile” object in
the EnergyPlus input. This object has a very simple form:
Construction:WindowDataFile ,
ConstructionName ,
FileName; ! Default is Window5DataFile.dat in the "run" folder.
If there is a window called ConstructionName on the Window data file, the data for that window is
read from the file and the following EnergyPlus objects and their names are created. The “W5” prefixed
to these names indicates that the object originated in the Window data file.
These two variable outputs are/should be identical. However, note that they can be reported at different
time intervals. “Zone Mean Air Temperature” is only available on the Zone/HB timestep (Number of
Timesteps per Hour) whereas “Zone Air Temperature” can be reported at the HVAC timestep (which can
vary).
Zone Air System Sensible Heating (and Cooling) Energy (and Rate) all report the heating or cooling
delivered by the HVAC system to a zone. These values are calculated by multiplying the supply air
mass flow rate by the difference between the supply air temperature and the zone air temperature.
This does not always indicate the operation of heating or cooling coils. For example, cooling will be
reported if the supply air is cooled due to the introduction of outside air, even if all coils are off.
Note that these variables are calculated at the system timestep. When reported at the “detailed” re-
porting frequency, these variable will never show heating and cooling both in the same system timestep.
If reported at a frequency less than “Detailed” (for example, Hourly) values may appear in both the
heating and cooling variable for the same hour if the system cooled the zone for part of the reporting
period and heated the zone for another part of the reporting period.
1.10.1 SurfaceProperty:HeatTransferAlgorithm
This object, and three other related objects, can be used to control which surface heat transfer model is
used on specific surfaces. The separate object called HeatBalanceAlgorithm is used to control the heat
transfer model in an overall way while this object can be used to revise the algorithm selections for specific
surfaces. This object allows selectively overriding the global setting in HeatBalanceAlgorithm to choose
one of the following models for a particular surface:
1.10.1.1 Inputs
1.10.1.1.1 Field: Surface Name
This is the name of the surface that will be assigned to use the heat transfer algorithm selected in the
next field. This should be a name of a surface defined elsewhere.
• ConductionTransferFunction
• MoisturePenetrationDepthConductionTransferFunction
• ConductionFiniteDifference
• CombinedHeatAndMoistureFiniteElement
1.10.2 SurfaceProperty:HeatTransferAlgorithm:MultipleSurface
This object can be used to control the surface heat transfer model used for specific types of surfaces. The
separate object called HeatBalanceAlgorithm is used to control the heat transfer model in an overall way
while this object can be used to revise the algorithm selections for specific types of surfaces. This object
allows selectively overriding the global setting in HeatBalanceAlgorithm to choose one of the following
models for all surfaces of a particular type:
1.10.2.1 Inputs
1.10.2.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique, user-defined name for the object.
• ConductionTransferFunction
• MoisturePenetrationDepthConductionTransferFunction
• ConductionFiniteDifference
• CombinedHeatAndMoistureFiniteElement
SurfaceProperty:HeatTransferAlgorithm:MultipleSurface ,
my exterior wall override ,
AllExteriorWalls ,
ConductionFiniteDifference ;
1.10.3 SurfaceProperty:HeatTransferAlgorithm:SurfaceList
This object can be used to control the surface heat transfer model used for a list of surfaces. The separate
object called HeatBalanceAlgorithm is used to control the heat transfer model in an overall way while
this object can be used to revise the algorithm selections for a list of specific surfaces. This object allows
selectively overriding the global setting in HeatBalanceAlgorithm to choose one of the following models for
listed:
1.10.3.1 Inputs
1.10.3.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique, user-defined name for the object.
• ConductionTransferFunction
• MoisturePenetrationDepthConductionTransferFunction
• ConductionFiniteDifference
• CombinedHeatAndMoistureFiniteElement
366 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
SurfaceProperty:HeatTransferAlgorithm:SurfaceList ,
my wall construct override , !- Name
ConductionFiniteDifference , !- Algorithm
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Surface Name 1
Zn001:Wall002 , !- Surface Name 2
Zn001:Wall003 , !- Surface Name 3
Zn001:Wall004; !- Surface Name 4
1.10.4 SurfaceProperty:HeatTransferAlgorithm:Construction
This object can be used to control the surface heat transfer model used for surfaces that have a specific type
of construction. The separate object called HeatBalanceAlgorithm is used to control the heat transfer model
in an overall way while this object can be used to revise the algorithm selections for specific constructions.
This object allows selectively overriding the global setting in HeatBalanceAlgorithm to choose one of the
following models for all surfaces with particular type of construction:
1.10.4.1 Inputs
1.10.4.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique, user-defined name for the object.
• ConductionTransferFunction
• MoisturePenetrationDepthConductionTransferFunction
• ConductionFiniteDifference
• CombinedHeatAndMoistureFiniteElement
SurfaceProperty:HeatTransferAlgorithm:Construction ,
my wall construct override , !- Name
ConductionFiniteDifference , !- Algorithm
R13WALL; !- Construction Name
1.10.5 SurfaceControl:MovableInsulation
Movable insulation can be used/scheduled on any surface regular surface (such as a wall, floor, roof, etc.)
but not on a subsurface (such as a window, use WindowShadingControl instead). With movable insulation,
no reference is made in the surface that is using the insulation – rather the movable insulation statement
references the surface to which it is applied.
Exterior and interior movable insulation have undergone some testing and appears to producing ex-
pected results. The underlying principle has been implemented in EnergyPlus for both interior and exterior
movable insulation with the possibility for exterior movable insulation to be transparent (transparent in-
sulation material or TIM).
TIM exterior layers can be used with the ConductionFiniteDifference (CondFD) solution algorithm.
With this addition, TIM layers can be used in conjunction with wall layers that have phase change materials
(PCM) included, or any other advanced capability of the CondFD algorithm such as variable conductivity.
The input requirements are exactly the same as when used with the CTF algorithm. The Solution Algo-
rithm needs to be changed to CondFD, and as with CTF, the “SurfaceControl:MovableInsulation” object
must be completed to specify the insulated surface and the “WindowMaterial:Glazing” object is needed to
provide the TIM layer properties.
Basically, the addition of movable insulation allows the user to schedule an extra amount of insulation
on either the inside or outside surface of a wall (or both). The insulation must be a simple, homogenous
material layer (linked to a material definition within the input data file). Note that EnergyPlus allows
the exterior movable insulation layer to be transparent to short wavelength radiation (solar). In this case,
incident solar is split between the plane between the movable insulation and the surface and the plane
between the movable insulation and the surrounding air. This calculation is fairly basic and based on
the solar transmittance of the insulation layer (material properties). Using transparent layers for exterior
movable insulation allows solar energy to penetrate deeper into a construction where it can be stored for
later use in the building (similar in concept to a Trombe Wall).
transmittance) can be correctly taken into account by EnergyPlus. Note that for non-glazing materials
the solar absorptivity of the layer will be used directly in the calculations. For glazing material layers, the
solar absorptivity will be calculated by subtracting both the transmissivity and the front side reflectivity
from unity for the material.
SurfaceControl:MoveableInsulation ,
Exterior , ! Insulation Type
Zone001:Wall001 , ! Surface Name
TransparentInsulationMaterial , ! Material Name
PresentInWinterSchedule ; ! Schedule Name
1.10.6 SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients
By referencing the Other Side Coefficients statement in the surface statements (i.e. Outside Boundary
Condition), the temperature of the outer plane of a surface (see Figure 1.43) can be directly controlled.
Other side coefficients can also be used to control the exterior convective heat transfer coefficient of a
surface and the corresponding exterior air temperature. It should be noted that solar effects are not
accounted for when other side coefficients are used. In addition, if other side coefficients are specified for
a surface, they also hold for subsurfaces of that surface (though subsurfaces can have their own coefficient
set).
other side coefficients have the same effect on all types of heat transfer surfaces. In other words, an
interior surface with other side coefficients specified and an exterior wall with identical other side coefficients
specified are simulated exactly the same. A surface that uses other side coefficients should be thought of
as a new or separate type of surface. All heat transfer surfaces are simulated in the same manner through
conduction transfer functions. The only difference between the various types of heat transfer surfaces is
the environment on the other side of the surface. For example, the other side environment of an exterior
surface is the outdoor environment. For an interior surface, the temperature of the outer plane of the
surface is set equal to the temperature of the inner plane of the surface. Similarly, a surface with other
side coefficients specified will allow the user to control the other side environment.
Heat transfer through a surface is an extremely important component in the calculation of zone loads.
The information to calculate this heat transfer is readily available if the surface is exposed to the outdoor
environment or to another zone that is being simulated. Occasionally, a user will want to model the heat
transfer through a surface that is adjacent to an area that is not included in the EnergyPlus model. For
example, an office area is attached to a warehouse and the user is only interested in simulating the office
area. An interior surface with other side coefficients specified could be used to control the environment on
the other side of the surface, thereby accounting for the heat transfer through the adjoining surface.
Other Side Coefficients affects the “other side” of a surface as described below. Each coefficient has a
special meaning. You may enter a 0 or blank if you are not using a particular coefficient. Note that there
are two potential ways to use other side coefficients. Either they are used to set the temperature of the
exterior side surface directly (if the combined convective/radiative coefficient below is less than or equal
1.10. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 369
to zero) or to set both the film coefficient (positive value for the combined convective/radiative coefficient
below) and the outside air temperature.
1.10.6.1 Inputs
1.10.6.1.1 Field: Name
This, of course, is the string referenced in the Surface statement that is using OtherSideCoefficients as
the Outside Boundary Condition.
where:
T = Outside Air Temperature when C1 (Combined convective/radiative film Coeff) > 0
T = Exterior Surface Temperature when C1 (Combined convective/radiative film Coeff) < = 0
Tzone = Temperature of the zone being simulated (°C)
Toadb = Dry-bulb temperature of the outdoor air (°C)
Tgrnd = Temperature of the ground (°C) from Site:GroundTemperature:BuildingSurface
1.10. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 371
! Example input for outside heat transfer coefficient of 1.23, using Toadb
SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients ,
OSCCoef:Zn005:Wall004 , !- Name
1.230000 , !- Combined Convective/Radiative Film Coefficient {W/m2 -K}
0.000000 , !- Constant Temperature {C}
0.000000 , !- Constant Temperature Coefficient
1.000000 , !- External Dry -Bulb Temperature Coefficient
0.000000 , !- Ground Temperature Coefficient
0.000000 , !- Wind Speed Coefficient
0.000000 , !- Zone Air Temperature Coefficient
, !- Constant Temperature Schedule Name
No , !- Sinusoidal Variation of Constant Temperature Coefficient
24, !- Period of Sinusoidal Variation {hr}
0., !- Previous Other Side Temperature Coefficient
, !- Minimum Other Side Temperature Limit {C}
; !- Maximum Other Side Temperature Limit {C}
1.10.6.2 Outputs
Zone ,Average ,Surface Other Side Coefficients Exterior Air Drybulb Temperature
372 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.10.6.2.1 Surface Other Side Coefficients Exterior Air Drybulb Temperature [C]
This is the air temperature applied to the other side of the surface.
1.10.7 SurfaceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel
By referencing the Other Side Conditions Model statement in the surface statements (i.e. Outside Bound-
ary Condition), the boundary conditions for the outer plane of the mass wall can be connected to the
appropriate model for various multi-skin components. The types of multi-skin components that use this
object include systems that are mounted to the outside surface using standoffs that create a small air gap –
see Figure 1.44. This type of modeling allows using the usual heat transfer calculations for the underlying
surface with other types of multi-skin component models that are available including: unglazed transpired
solar collectors, ventilated photovoltaic panels, and naturally ventilated facades.
The boundary condition values are determined dynamically by the program using internal compo-
nent models. If you want to define other side surface temperatures or convection conditions, then use
SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients instead of this object.
It should be noted that when other side conditions models are used, solar effects are removed from the
surface’s outside face heat balance, but are used in modeling the component adjacent to that surface.
The other side conditions model also includes underground piping system interaction. The PipingSys-
tem:Underground:Domain object represents a mass of ground which may include interaction with, for
example, basement surfaces. In this case, the ground model will internally use the other side condition
model hook to update boundary conditions for those surfaces which use that other side condition model
name reference.
The other side conditions model also includes an underwater boundary condition connection. By
specifying “ConvectiveUnderwater” as the boundary type, and including any number of “SurfaceProp-
erty:Underwater” objects in the input, the user can connect sufaces to water such as for a moving vessel.
1.10.7.1 Inputs
1.10.7.1.1 Field: Name
This is the string referenced in the Surface statement that is using OtherSideModel as the Exterior
Environment.
SurfaceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel ,
UTSC OSCM ZN11 , ! OtherSideConditionsModel Name
GapConvectionRadiation ; ! Type of Modeling used to determine Boundary Conditions
1.10.7.2 Outputs
• Zone,Average,Surface Other Side Conditions Modeled Convection Air Temperature [C]
• Zone,Average,Surface Other Side Conditions Modeled Convection Heat Transfer Coefficient [W/m2-
K]
• Zone,Average,Surface Other Side Conditions Modeled Radiation Heat Transfer Coefficient [W/m2-K]
1.10.7.2.1 Surface Other Side Conditions Modeled Convection Air Temperature [C]
This is the air temperature exposed to the other side of the surface by the model and used in convection
heat transfer calculations.
1.10.7.2.2 Surface Other Side Conditions Modeled Convection Heat Transfer Coeffi-
cient [W/m2-K]
This is the surface convection heat transfer coefficient applied to the other side of the surface by the
model.
1.10.7.2.4 Surface Other Side Conditions Modeled Radiation Heat Transfer Coeffi-
cient [W/m2-K]
This is the effective (Linearized) radiation heat transfer coefficient applied to the other side of the
surface by the model.
1.10.8 SurfaceProperty:Underwater
This object captures the inputs required to model a water-connected boundary condition for a surface. This
model is useful for either statically positioned buildings with natural convection to the water boundary
condition, or a moving building (vessel).
1.10.8.1 Inputs
1.10.8.1.1 Field: Name
This is the string referenced in the Surface statement that is using this OtherSideModel as the Exterior
Environment.
1.10.8.1.2 Field: Distance from Surface Centroid to Leading Edge of Boundary Layer
This distance represents the distance from the centroid of this particular surface to leading edge of the
boundary layer. For a surface with zero velocity, this field will be irrelevant, because there is no forced
boundary layer, and convection will be buoyantly driven. For a moving vessel, this distance should be the
nominal distance from the leading edge of the vessel, assuming a nearly flat surface along that path.
SurfaceProperty:Underwater ,
Underwater , !- Name
140, !- Distance from Surface Centroid to Leading Edge of Boundary Layer
WaterTempSchedule , !- Free Stream Water Temperature Schedule
VelocitySchedule; !- Free Stream Water Velocity Schedule
Schedule:Constant ,
WaterTempSchedule ,
Any Number ,
23;
Schedule:Constant ,
VelocitySchedule ,
Any Number ,
10.2;
1.10.9 Foundation:Kiva
Foundation:Kiva objects describe boundary conditions for ground-coupled foundation surfaces. Surfaces
with the “Outside Boundary Condition” defined as “Foundation”, may also refer to a Foundation:Kiva
object in the “Outside Boundary Condition Object” field (if unspecified, a default Foundation:Kiva object
will be created and applied).
Limitations when using Foundation:Kiva objects include:
• Only floors and walls may use Foundation:Kiva objects as Outside Boundary Conditions.
• Exactly one floor surface must reference each Foundation:Kiva object. However, multiple floors may
exist in the same thermal zone so long as they reference separate Foundation:Kiva objects.
• Foundation wall surfaces that are not triangular or quadrilateral may not translate well into the
two-dimensional finite difference context.
For each floor surface with “Foundation” set as the “Outside Boundary Condition” there must also be
a corresponding “SurfaceProperty:ExposedFoundationPerimeter” object to define how much of the floor
perimeter is below exterior walls.
The inputs from Foundation:Kiva objects are translated into Kiva’s foundation heat transfer model.
KivaTM generates a two-dimensional heat transfer calculation to represent heat flow between a zone and the
adjacent ground. Foundation:Kiva surfaces do not use the same HeatBalanceAlgorithm (e.g., Conduction
Transfer Functions) as the rest of the model.
Foundation:Kiva objects are used to describe the two-dimensional features that cannot be captured
by the typical one-dimensional constructions used in EnergyPlus. Figure 1.45 illustrates Kiva’s two-
dimensional context for a basement where the basement slab and wall both refer to “Foundation” as
the Outside Boundary Condition, the ceiling of the basement and the exterior wall of the zone above the
basement refer to “Surface” (or “Zone”) and “Outdoors”, respectively. Note: Not all of the foundation
wall surface needs to be below grade (see the “Wall Height Above Grade” field for this object). Any part
of the foundation wall above grade is modeled in Kiva’s two-dimensional heat transfer calculations. The
non-foundation surfaces are shown in Figure 1.45 for context, but are not part of the Kiva model.
This context allows for a finer description of the structural and insulation components of a foundation
that impact heat transfer (Figure 1.46).
Foundation:Kiva objects define only the aspects of the foundation that are not already defined by the
one-dimensional constructions of the respective surfaces. That is, the footing wall and slab constructions
and their relative dimensions are inferred from the respective Surface objects (see Figure 1.47).
The depth of the foundation is defined by the height of the wall surfaces that reference the Founda-
tion:Kiva boundary condition object. For slab-on-grade foundations, a depth of zero is implied by having no
associated wall surfaces. Figure 1.48 shows a slab-on-grade foundation with whole slab insulation. Notice
376 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Figure 1.45: Outside Boundary Conditions for surfaces within Kiva’s Two-dimensional context.
Only surfaces referencing “Foundation” are simulated in Kiva
1.10. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 377
there are no walls referencing the “Foundation” Outside Boundary Condition. In this case, the under-slab
insulation is modeled as part of the slab construction, while the edge/gap insulation is modeled using the
interior vertical insulation fields of a Foundation:Kiva object. Note: Since there are no wall surfaces for
slab foundations, the footing wall construction is defined within the Foundation:Kiva object (or defaulted
to a 0.3m wide cast concrete wall).
A walkout basement (with a variable grade along the sides; see Figure 1.49) is best modeled using
discrete quadrilateral surfaces of stepped height for the walls as shown in Figure 1.50.
The width of the floor surface in the two-dimensional context is defined by the area and the exposed
perimeter (see SurfaceProperty:ExposedFoundationPerimeter) of the floor surface object. Details on this
calculation can be found in the Engineering Reference document.
Other components of the two-dimensional context are defined by the Foundation:Kiva:Settings object
and applied uniformly for all instances of Foundation:Kiva objects. These components include:
• Far-Field width
• Deep Ground depth (and boundary type)
• Soil and ground surface thermal properties
Figure 1.50: Walkout basement wall and floor surfaces (in gray) all reference the same Founda-
tion:Kiva object
1.10. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 381
No , !- Sun Exposure
No , !- Wind Exposure
0.0, !- View Factor to Ground
4, !- Number of Vertices
0.0, 0.0, 0.0, !- Vertex 1
0.0, 20.0, 0.0, !- Vertex 2
20.0, 20.0, 0.0, !- Vertex 3
20.0, 0.0, 0.0; !- Vertex 4
Foundation:Kiva ,
Slab Details , !- Name
XPS , !- Interior Horizontal Insulation Material Name
0.2, !- Interior Horizontal Insulation Depth
0.6, !- Interior Horizontal Insulation Width
XPS , !- Interior Vertical Insulation Material Name
0.2, !- Interior Vertical Insulation Depth
, !- Exterior Horizontal Insulation Material Name
, !- Exterior Horizontal Insulation Depth
, !- Exterior Horizontal Insulation Width
, !- Exterior Vertical Insulation Material Name
, !- Exterior Vertical Insulation Depth
0.2, !- Wall Height Above Grade
0.3, !- Wall Depth Below Slab
Slab Footing Construction; !- Footing Wall Construction Name
Material ,
XPS , !- Name
Rough , !- Roughness
0.05, !- Thickness
0.029 , !- Conductivity
28, !- Density
1450, !- Specific Heat
0.9, !- Thermal Absorptance
0.7, !- Solar Absorptance
0.7; !- Visible Absorptance
Material ,
Concrete , !- Name
Rough , !- Roughness
0.3, !- Thickness
1.95, !- Conductivity
2400, !- Density
900, !- Specific Heat
0.9, !- Thermal Absorptance
0.7, !- Solar Absorptance
0.7; !- Visible Absorptance
Construction ,
Slab Footing Construction , !- Name
Concrete; !- Outside Layer Name
1.10.9.2 Inputs
1.10.9.2.1 Field: Name
The unique identifier of the Foundation:Kiva object. Referenced by a the “Outside Boundary Condition
Object” field in a surface object.
Distance from the wall top to the top of interior horizontal insulation, in m. Required if Interior
Horizontal Insulation Material Name is defined.
Figure 1.55: Definition of exterior grade and footing wall depth relative to the wall surface (for a
basement foundation context)
Figure 1.56: Definition of exterior grade and footing wall depth relative to the wall surface (for a
slab foundation context)
386 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
A reference to a material object associated with the foundation footing (typically some form of concrete).
The thickness of this material is used to determine the width of the footing. If left blank, no footing will
be used. Default: blank
The following field defines the placement of this material within Kiva’s two-dimensional context and
are illustrated in Figure 1.57.
Figure 1.58: Custom blocks representing interior batt insulation and dry wall
1.10.9.3 Outputs
Output for surfaces with a Foundation boundary condition type will include all opaque surface output
variables except:
1.10.10 Foundation:Kiva:Settings
This object defines settings applied across all Kiva foundation calculations. This object is not required. If
it is not defined, all defaults will be applied.
1.10.10.1 Inputs
1.10.10.1.1 Field: Soil Conductivity
The thermal conductivity of the soil, in W/m-K. Default: 1.73 W/m-K.
Concrete 0.002
Brick 0.003
Soil 0.005
Gravel 0.012
Grass 0.030
• ZeroFlux
• GroundWater
• Autoselect
ZeroFlux applies a zero vertical heat flux (i.e. adiabatic) boundary condition. GroundWater applies a
constant temperature boundary condition, with a temperature equal to the average outdoor air dry-bulb
temperature from the environment(s). Autoselect applies either boundary condition depending on the
elevation of the building site (Williams and Williamson, 1989):
If dwt ≤ 40 m., the GroundWater boundary is applied, otherwise a ZeroFlux boundary is applied at
40 m. If the calculated ground water depth is shallower than any element of the foundation construction,
then the GroundWater is applied at 1 m below the lowest element.
Default: Autoselect.
1.10.11 SurfaceProperty:ExposedFoundationPerimeter
This object (currently only used in conjunction with Foundation:Kiva boundary conditions) defines the
perimeter of a foundation floor that is exposed to the exterior environment through the floor. The user
may either define the total exposed perimeter, the fraction of the total perimeter that is exposed, or
individually define which segments of the floor surface perimeter are exposed. This object is required for
any floor surface with a Foundation:Kiva boundary condition.
Figure 1.61 illustrates how the exposed perimeter is determined from a floor plan of the foundation
level.
Some buildings may have neighboring zones with different foundation types. For example, a crawlspace
next to a garage with a slab (Figure 1.62). The foundation wall in this case is NOT considered part of
either floor’s exposed perimeter, and should not reference a Foundation boundary condition. Kiva does
not calculate heat flow between two zones through ground. In this case, it is best to approximate interior
foundation wall using an Adiabatic Outside Boundary Condition.
1.10.11.1 Inputs
1.10.11.1.1 Field: Surface Name
Name of foundation floor surface.
• BySegment: Each segment of the floor polygon (corresponding to distance between each set of
vertices) is defined as exposed (“Yes”) or not exposed (“No”) in an extensible list corresponding to
the number of vertices in the floor polygon. Exposed perimeter is defined as the sum of all exposed
segement lengths. (The Surface Segment <x> Exposed fields should be filled.)
1.10.12 SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Inside:AdaptiveModelSelections
This object provides options to change the individual convection model equations for dynamic selection
when using AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm. This object is only needed to make changes to the default
model selections for any or all of the surface categories. This object is for the inside face, the side of the
surface facing a thermal zone.
1.10.12.1 Inputs
1.10.12.1.1 Field: Name
A unique name for the object.
1.10.12.1.5 Field: Simple Buoyancy Stable Horizontal Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve
1.10.12.1.7 Field: Simple Buoyancy Unstable Horizontal Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 393
1.10.12.1.9 Field: Simple Buoyancy Stable Tilted Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.11 Field: Simple Buoyancy Unstable Tilted Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.14 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Vertical Wall Equation Source
Applies to zone with in-floor heating and/or in-ceiling cooling. This is for vertical walls. The key choice
options include: ASHRAEVerticalWall, AlamdariHammondVerticalWall, KhalifaEq3WallAwayFromHeat,
FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall, ISO15099Windows, or UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.15 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Vertical Wall Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.16 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Stable Horizontal Equation Source
Applies to zone with in-floor heating and/or in-ceiling cooling. This is for passive horizontal surfaces
with heat flow for stable thermal stratification. The key choice options include: WaltonStableHorizon-
talOrTilt, AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal, or UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.17 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Stable Horizontal Equation User Curve
Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
394 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.10.12.1.18 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Unstable Horizontal Equation Source
Applies to zone with in-floor heating and/or in-ceiling cooling. This is for passive horizontal surfaces
with heat flow for unstable thermal stratification. The key choice options include: WaltonUnstableHori-
zontalOrTilt, AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal, KhalifaEq4CeilingAwayFromHeat, or UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.19 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Unstable Horizontal Equation User Curve
Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.20 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Heated Floor Equation Source
Applies to zone with in-floor heating and/or in-ceiling cooling. This is for a floor with active heating
elements. The key choice options include: WaltonUnstableHorizontalOrTilt, AlamdariHammondUnstable-
Horizontal, AwbiHattonHeatedFloor, or UserCurve
1.10.12.1.21 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Heated Floor Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.22 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Chilled Ceiling Equation Source
Applies to zone with in-floor heating and/or in-ceiling cooling. This is for a ceiling with active cooling
elements. The key choice options include: WaltonUnstableHorizontalOrTilt, AlamdariHammondUnstable-
Horizontal, KaradagChilledCeiling, or UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.23 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Chilled Ceiling Equation User Curve
Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve
1.10.12.1.24 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Stable Tilted Equation Source
Applies to zone with in-floor heating and/or in-ceiling cooling. This is for tilted surfaces with heat
flow for stable thermal stratification. The key choice options include: WaltonStableHorizontalOrTilt,
AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal, ISO15099Windows, or UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.25 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Stable Tilted Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.26 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Unstable Tilted Equation Source
Applies to zone with in-floor heating and/or in-ceiling cooling. This is for tilted surfaces with heat
flow for unstable thermal stratification. The key choice options include: WaltonUnstableHorizontalOrTilt,
AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal, ISO15099Windows, or UserCurve.
1.10. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 395
1.10.12.1.27 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Unstable Tilted Equation User Curve
Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.29 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Window Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.31 Field: Wall Panel Heating Vertical Wall Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.33 Field: Wall Panel Heating Heated Wall Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.35 Field: Wall Panel Heating Stable Horizontal Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.37 Field: Wall Panel Heating Unstable Horizontal Equation User Curve
Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.39 Field: Wall Panel Heating Stable Tilted Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve
1.10.12.1.41 Field: Wall Panel Heating Unstable Tilted Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.43 Field: Wall Panel Heating Window Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.45 Field: Convective Zone Heater Vertical Wall Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 397
1.10.12.1.46 Field: Convective Zone Heater Vertical Walls Near Heater Equation
Source
Applies to zone with convective heater. This is for vertical walls that are directly affected by heater.
Walls are considered “near” when listed in field set for Fraction of Radiant Energy to Surface. The key
choice options include: ASHRAEVerticalWall, AlamdariHammondVerticalWall, KhalifaEq5WallNearHeat,
AwbiHattonHeatedWall, FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall, ISO15099Windows, or UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.47 Field: Convective Zone Heater Vertical Walls Near Heater Equation User
Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.49 Field: Convective Zone Heater Stable Horizontal Equation User Curve
Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve
1.10.12.1.51 Field: Convective Zone Heater Unstable Horizontal Equation User Curve
Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.53 Field: Convective Zone Heater Stable Tilted Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.55 Field: Convective Zone Heater Unstable Tilted Equation User Curve
Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.57 Field: Convective Zone Heater Windows Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.59 Field: Central Air Diffuser Wall Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.61 Field: Central Air Diffuser Ceiling Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.63 Field: Central Air Diffuser Floor Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.65 Field: Central Air Diffuser Window Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve
1.10.12.1.66 Field: Mechanical Zone Fan Circulation Vertical Wall Equation Source
1.10.12.1.67 Field: Mechanical Zone Fan Circulation Vertical Wall Equation User
Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve
1.10.12.1.69 Field: Mechanical Zone Fan Circulation Stable Horizontal Equation User
Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.72 Field: Mechanical Zone Fan Circulation Stable Tilted Equation Source
1.10.12.1.73 Field Mechanical Zone Fan Circulation Stable Tilted Equation User
Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
400 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.10.12.1.74 Field: Mechanical Zone Fan Circulation Unstable Tilted Equation Source
1.10.12.1.75 Field: Mechanical Zone Fan Circulation Unstable Tilted Equation User
Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.77 Field: Mechanical Zone Fan Circulation Unstable Tilted Equation User
Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve
1.10.12.1.78 Field: Mixed Regime Buoyancy Assisting Flow on Walls Equation Source
1.10.12.1.79 Field: Mixed Regime Buoyancy Assisting Flow on Walls Equation User
Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.80 Field: Mixed Regime Buoyancy Opposing Flow on Walls Equation Source
1.10.12.1.81 Field: Mixed Regime Buoyancy Opposing Flow on Walls Equation User
Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve
1.10.12.1.83 Field: Mixed Regime Stable Floor Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 401
1.10.12.1.85 Field: Mixed Regime Unstable Floor Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.87 Field: Mixed Regime Stable Ceiling Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.12.1.89 Field: Mixed Regime Unstable Ceiling Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.13 SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Outside:AdaptiveModelSelections
Options to change the individual convection model equations for dynamic selection when using Adaptive-
ConvectionAlgorithm. This object is only needed to make changes to the default model selections for any
or all of the surface categories. This object is for the outside face, the side of the surface facing away from
the thermal zone.
1.10.13.1 Inputs
1.10.13.1.1 Field: Name
A unique name for the object
1.10.13.1.3 Field: Wind Convection Windward Equation Vertical Wall User Curve
Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.13.1.5 Field: Wind Convection Leeward Vertical Wall Equation User Curve
Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.13.1.9 Field: Natural Convection Vertical Wall Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.13.1.11 Field: Natural Convection Stable Horizontal Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is set
to UserCurve.
1.10.14 SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Inside:UserCurve
This object is used to describe a custom model equation for surface convection heat transfer coefficients.
If more than one curve is referenced, or non-blank, then they are all used and the result is the simple
addition of all the curve results.
1.10.14.1 Inputs
1.10.14.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name of input object.
1.10.14.1.6 Field: Hc Function of Air System Volume Flow Rate Divided by Zone
Perimeter Length Curve Name
This field contains the name of separate performance curve or table object that describes hc , the
convection coefficient, as a function of air change rate divided perimeter scale. Curve’s “x” is mechanical
system air flow rate (m3 /s) divided by zone’s length along exterior walls (m).
404 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.10.15 SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Outside:UserCurve
This object is used to describe a custom model equation for surface convection heat transfer coefficients.
If more than one curve is referenced, or non-blank, then they are all used and the result is the simple
addition of all the curve results.
1.10.15.1 Inputs
1.10.15.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name of input object.
1.10.16 SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients
The convection coefficients of each surface, both exterior and interior, are automatically calculated during
EnergyPlus execution. These calculations are “governed” by other objects such as the SurfaceConvection-
Algorithm:Inside (overall default), the Zone object’s field called Zone Inside Convection Algorithm (Zone
Default), the and the SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Outside (overall default), and/or the Zone object’s field
called Zone Outside Convection Algorithm (Zone Default). Usually, that will be enough flexibility for most
users. However, if you need to match pre-existing convection coefficients (from another program) or are
trying to match a test suite of results, you may wish to use the “override” convection coefficients in the
following object. This object allows for a single surface to be given specific convection coefficients.
1.10. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 405
Note that using these in conjunction, in particular, the “Simple” option on either the Outside Con-
vection Algorithm or the Zone Outside Convection Algorithm field will result in a combined coefficient
regardless of choice chosen here.
Note that surfaces with “SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients” cannot use this object with
the “outside” coefficient – attempting to do so will cause a severe error; SurfaceProp-
erty:OtherSideCoefficients surfaces can apply an “inside” coefficient. And, surfaces with “Ground”
exposure do not use the “outside” coefficient that might be supplied here. Note, too, that some lower
boundaries are used regardless by certain surface types (i.e. Window) or certain algorithm types.
1.10.16.1 Inputs
1.10.16.1.1 Field: Surface Name
This field is the applicable surface name for the user supplied convection coefficient.
Value Both
Schedule Both
Simple Inside
SimpleCombined Outside
TARP Both
DOE-2 Outside
MoWitt Outside
AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm Both
406 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
ASHRAEVerticalWall Both
WaltonUnstableHorizontalOrTilt Both
WaltonStableHorizontalOrTilt Both
FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserWalls Inside
FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserCeiling Inside
FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserFloor Inside
AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal Both
AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal Both
AlamdariHammondVerticalWall Both
KhalifaEq3WallAwayFromHeat Inside
KhalifaEq4CeilingAwayFromHeat Inside
KhalifaEq5WallNearHeat Inside
KhalifaEq6NonHeatedWalls Inside
KhalifaEq7Ceiling Inside
AwbiHattonHeatedFloor Inside
AwbiHattonHeatedWall Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedAssistedWall Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedOpposingWall Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedStableFloor Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedUnstableFloor Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedStableCeiling Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedUnstableCeiling Inside
FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall Both
KaradagChilledCeiling Inside
ISO15099Windows Inside
GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWindow Inside
GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWalls Inside
GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserFloor Inside
SimpleCombined Outside
NusseltJurges Outside
McAdams Outside
Mitchell Outside
BlockenWindard Outside
Emmel Outside
ClearRoof Outside
UserCurve Both
SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients ,
Zn001:Wall001 , ! Surface Name
Outside , ! Convection Coefficient 1 Location
Value , ! Convection Coefficient 1 Type
9.8, ! Convection Coefficient 1
, ! Convection Coefficient 1 Schedule Name
, ! Convection Coefficient 1 User Curve Name
Inside , ! Convection Coefficient 2 Location
Schedule , ! Convection Coefficient 2 Type
, ! Convection Coefficient 2 {blank because using schedule}
MyInteriorCC , ! Convection Coefficient 2 Schedule Name
; ! Convection Coefficient 2 User Curve Name
SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients ,
Zn001:Wall002 , ! Surface Name
Inside , ! Convection Coefficient 1 Location
Value , ! Convection Coefficient 1 Type
.8, ! Convection Coefficient 1
, ! Convection Coefficient 1 Schedule Name
, ! Convection Coefficient 1 User Curve Name
Outside , ! Convection Coefficient 2 Location
Value , ! Convection Coefficient 2 Type
5.5, ! Convection Coefficient 2
; ! Convection Coefficient 2 User Curve Name
SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients ,
Zn001:Wall003 , ! Surface Name
Outside , ! Convection Coefficient 1 Location
Value , ! Convection Coefficient 1 Type
9.8; ! Convection Coefficient 1
1.10.17 SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients:MultipleSurface
The convection coefficients of each surface, both outside and inside, are automatically calculated during
EnergyPlus execution. These calculations are “governed” by other objects such as the Inside Convection
Algorithm (overall default) and the Zone Inside Convection Algorithm (Zone Default) and the Outside
Convection Algorithm (overall default) and/or the Zone Outside Convection Algorithm (Zone Default).
Usually, that will be enough flexibility for most users. However, if you need to match pre-existing convection
408 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
coefficients (from another program) or are trying to match a test suite of results, you may wish to use
the “override” convection coefficients in the following object. This object is similar to the preceding
“ConvectionCoefficients” object but allows multiple surfaces to be assigned a type with one object entry.
Note that using these in conjunction, in particular, the “Simple” option on either the Outside Con-
vection Algorithm or the Zone Outside Convection Algorithm field will result in a combined coefficient
regardless of choice chosen here.
Note that surfaces with “SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients” cannot use this object with the “out-
side” coefficient – attempting to do so will ignore OSC surfaces during a multiple surface “apply”; Surface-
Property:OtherSideCoefficients surfaces can apply an “inside” coefficient. And, surfaces with “Ground”
exposure do not use the “outside” coefficient that might be supplied here. Note, too, that some lower
boundaries are used regardless by certain surface types (i.e. Window) or certain algorithm types.
1.10.17.1 Inputs
1.10.17.1.1 Field: Surface Type
This field is the applicable surface name for the user supplied convection coefficient. The allowable
surface types are:
• AllExteriorWalls
• AllExteriorRoofs
• AllExteriorFloors
• AllInteriorWindows
• AllInteriorCeilings
• AllInteriorFloors
Value Both
Schedule Both
Simple Inside
SimpleCombined Outside
TARP Both
DOE-2 Outside
MoWitt Outside
AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm Both
ASHRAEVerticalWall Both
WaltonUnstableHorizontalOrTilt Both
WaltonStableHorizontalOrTilt Both
FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserWalls Inside
FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserCeiling Inside
FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserFloor Inside
AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal Both
AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal Both
AlamdariHammondVerticalWall Both
KhalifaEq3WallAwayFromHeat Inside
KhalifaEq4CeilingAwayFromHeat Inside
KhalifaEq5WallNearHeat Inside
KhalifaEq6NonHeatedWalls Inside
KhalifaEq7Ceiling Inside
AwbiHattonHeatedFloor Inside
AwbiHattonHeatedWall Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedAssistedWall Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedOpposingWall Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedStableFloor Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedUnstableFloor Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedStableCeiling Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedUnstableCeiling Inside
FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall Both
410 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
KaradagChilledCeiling Inside
ISO15099Windows Inside
GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWindow Inside
GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWalls Inside
GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserFloor Inside
SimpleCombined Outside
NusseltJurges Outside
McAdams Outside
Mitchell Outside
BlockenWindard Outside
Emmel Outside
ClearRoof Outside
UserCurve Both
SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients:MultipleSurface ,
AllExteriorWindows , ! Surface Types
Outside , ! Convection Coefficient 1 Location
MoWitt; ! Convection Coefficient 1 Type
• SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Inside
• SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Outside
• SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients
• SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients:MultipleSurface
Objects/Description Action
There are additional objects that provide fine control over the models that get assigned.
• SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Inside:AdaptiveModelSelections
• SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Outside:AdaptiveModelSelections
• SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Inside:UserCurve
• SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Outside:UserCurve
200 UserValue
201 UserSchedule
202 UserCurve
203 ASHRAEVerticalWall
204 WaltonUnstableHorizontalOrTilt
205 WaltonStableHorizontalOrTilt
206 FisherPedersenCeilDiffuserFloor
207 FisherPedersenCeilDiffuserCeiling
208 FisherPedersenCeilDiffuserWalls
209 AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal
210 AlamdariHammondVerticalWall
211 AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal
212 KhalifaEq3WallAwayFromHeat
213 KhalifaEq4CeilingAwayFromHeat
214 KhalifaEq5WallNearHeat
215 KhalifaEq6NonHeatedWalls
216 KhalifaEq7Ceiling
217 AwbiHattonHeatedFloor
218 AwbiHattonHeatedWall
219 BeausoleilMorrisonMixedAssistingWall
220 BeausoleilMorrisonMixedOppossingWall
221 BeausoleilMorrisonMixedStableCeiling
222 BeausoleilMorrisonMixedUnstableCeiling
223 BeausoleilMorrisonMixedStableFloor
224 BeausoleilMorrisonMixedUnstableFloor
225 FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall
226 KaradagChilledCeiling
227 ISO15099Windows
228 GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWindow
229 GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWalls
230 GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserFloor
1.10. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 415
300 None
301 UserValue
302 UserSchedule
303 UserCurve
304 ASHRAESimpleCombined
305 NaturalASHRAEVerticalWall
306 NaturalWaltonUnstableHorizontalOrTilt
307 NaturalWaltonStableHorizontalOrTilt
308 SparrowWindward
309 SparrowLeeward
416 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
310 MoWiTTWindward
311 MoWiTTLeeward
312 DOE2Windward
313 DOE2Leeward
314 NusseltJurges
315 McAdams
316 Mitchell
317 ClearRoof
318 BlockenWindward
319 EmmelVertical
320 EmmelRoof
321 AlamdariHammondVerticalWall
322 FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall
323 ISO15099Windows
324 AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal
325 AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal
1.10.20 SurfaceProperties:VaporCoefficients
Advanced/Research Usage: The internal and external vapor transfer coefficients that are used by the
CombinedHeatAndMoistureFiniteElement model are automatically calculated during EnergyPlus execu-
tion using information on the convection coefficients. However it is sometimes useful to be able to “override”
the calculation and set fixed values of vapor transfer coefficient for a single surface. These coefficients are
only used by the CombinedHeatAndMoistureFiniteElement model and will be ignored by other solution
algorithms.
1.10.20.1 Inputs
1.10.20.1.1 Field: Surface Name
This field is the applicable surface name for the user supplied vapor transfer coefficient.
SurfaceProperties:VaporCoefficients ,
South wall , !- Surface Name
Yes , !- Constant External Vapor Transfer Coefficient
0.0000000625 , !- External Vapor Coefficient Value
Yes , !- Constant Internal vapor Transfer Coefficient
0.00000002; !- Internal Vapor Coefficient Value
1.10.21 SurfaceProperty:ExteriorNaturalVentedCavity
This object is used to model a multi-skin exterior heat transfer surface. This is a special case where the
outside face is a slightly detached layer forming a naturally ventilated cavity. The actual outer surface
is referred to as the baffle. The modeling here assumes that the heat capacity in the outer baffle can be
neglected since it is much lower than the underlying mass surface. This object is used with the Building-
Surface:Detailed object where the Heat Transfer surfaces are referred to as the underlying surfaces. The
constructions and materials for the BuildingSurface:Detailed object should reflect the construction of just
the underlying surface. The SurfaceProperty:ExteriorNaturalVentedCavity object is used to describe the
decoupled layer, or baffle, and the characteristics of the cavity and openings for natural ventilation. This
object is also used in conjunction with the OtherSideConditionsModel.
The area and orientation are obtained from BuildingSurface:Detailed objects, which are referenced
by name. This object can be used to model certain types of photovoltaic mounting configurations such as
interlocking roof pavers. If the baffle covers only part of a surface, then that surface should be split into
separate BuildingSurface:Detailed objects where one matches the size of the baffle. A single baffle can
be associated with as many BuildingSurface:Detailed objects as desired (although if you need to use
more than 10 surfaces, then the IDD will need to be extended). The base heat transfer surfaces need not
be contiguous nor have the same orientation, but the program will issue warnings if surfaces have widely
ranging tilts and azimuths.
Note that the model involves predicting the rates that ambient air moves in and out of the cavity.
Accurate modeling of these air flows would be extremely challenging and so the models provided through
this object are simplistic engineering models based on discharge coefficients that are sensitive to wind and
buoyancy effects. The accuracy depends on the values for, and applicability of, the discharge coefficients
and unfortunately little research is available to help characterize these. The models should be considered
rudimentary and the user is encouraged to explore different values for the coefficients in attempts to bound
the importance of natural ventilation for the cavities. See the Engineering Reference for more details.
1.10.21.1 Inputs
1.10.21.1.1 Field: Name
This field contains a unique name for the ventilated cavity.
1.10.21.2 Outputs
In addition to related output that can be obtained for all surfaces, these outputs are available for exterior
naturally vented cavity configurations:
• HVAC,Average, Surface Exterior Cavity Total Natural Ventilation Air Change Rate [ACH]
• HVAC,Average, Surface Exterior Cavity Total Natural Ventilation Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• HVAC,Average, Surface Exterior Cavity Natural Ventilation from Wind Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• HVAC,Average, Surface Exterior Cavity Natural Ventilation from Buoyancy Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
1.10.21.2.3 Surface Exterior Cavity Total Natural Ventilation Air Change Rate [ACH]
The rate of natural ventilation air exchange between the plenum and ambient when the collector is
inactive in Air Changes per Hour.
1.10.21.2.4 Surface Exterior Cavity Total Natural Ventilation Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
The mass flow rate of natural ventilation air exchange between the plenum and ambient when the
collector is inactive.
1.10.21.2.5 Surface Exterior Cavity Natural Ventilation from Wind Mass Flow Rate
[kg/s]
The part of mass flow rate of natural ventilation air exchange between the plenum and ambient when
the collector is inactive due to wind-driven forces.
1.10.21.2.6 Surface Exterior Cavity Natural Ventilation from Buoyancy Mass Flow
Rate [kg/s]
The part of mass flow rate of natural ventilation air exchange between the plenum and ambient when
the collector is inactive due to buoyancy-driven forces.
1.10.22 SurfaceProperty:SolarIncidentInside
This object can be used as an alternative to the standard (automatic) EnergyPlus calculation of the
solar radiation incident on interior surfaces of the building. Using this method, the normal EnergyPlus
calculation is replaced with a schedule of solar incidence values that are calculated outside the program.
1.10.22.1 Inputs
1.10.22.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the SurfaceProperty:SolarIncidentInside object Must be unique between all SurfaceProp-
erty:SolarIncidentInside objects.
1.10.22.1.4 Field: Inside Surface Incident Sun Solar Radiation Schedule Name
This field specifies the name of a schedule that contains the values for incident solar radiation. Val-
ues from the schedule data will be used to replace the absorbed solar radiation that would normally be
calculated by EnergyPlus. Units in the external schedule file must be W/m2 .
Example for SurfaceProperty:SolarIncidentInside using a compact schedule:
Schedule:Compact ,
North Wall SSG , !- Name
Positive Number , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: AllDays , !- Field 2
Until: 07:00 ,10 , !- Field 3
Until: 17:00 ,20 , !- Field 5
Until: 24:00 ,15; !- Field 7
SurfaceProperty:SolarIncidentInside ,
North Wall Solar Incident , !- Name
Room102 North Wall , !- Surface Name
Room Wall - North , !- Construction Name
North Wall SSG; !- Schedule Name
1.10.23 ComplexFenestrationProperty:SolarAbsorbedLayers
This object can be used as an alternative to the standard (automatic) EnergyPlus calculation of the solar
radiation absorbed by fenestration systems in the building. Using this method, the normal EnergyPlus
calculation is replaced with a schedule of solar absorptance values that are calculated outside the program.
1.10.23.1 Inputs
1.10.23.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the ComplexFenestrationProperty:SolarAbsorbedLayers object Must be unique between
all ComplexFenestrationProperty:SolarAbsorbedLayers objects.
Schedule:Compact ,
Layer 1, !- Name
Positive Number , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: AllDays , !- Field 2
Until: 07:00 ,1, !- Field 3
Until: 17:00 ,2, !- Field 5
Until: 24:00 ,1.5; !- Field 7
Schedule:Compact ,
Layer 2, !- Name
Positive Number , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: AllDays , !- Field 2
Until: 07:00 ,0.8 , !- Field 3
Until: 17:00 ,1.2 , !- Field 5
Until: 24:00 ,1.0; !- Field 7
Schedule:Compact ,
Layer 3, !- Name
Positive Number , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: AllDays , !- Field 2
Until: 07:00 ,1, !- Field 3
Until: 17:00 ,2.1 , !- Field 5
Until: 24:00 ,1.7; !- Field 7
ComplexFenestrationProperty :SolarAbsorbedLayers ,
South Window Solar Absorbed Layers , !- Name
Room 102 South Window , !- Fenestration surface name
CFS_Glz_2 , !- Construction Surface name
Layer 1, !- Absorbed solar energy in layer 1
Layer 2, !- Absorbed solar energy in layer 2
Layer 3; !- Absorbed solar energy in layer 3
1.10.24 GeometryTransform
This object provides a simple method of altering the footprint geometry of a model. The intent is to
provide a single parameter that can be used to reshape the building description contained in the rest of the
input file. This object was implemented for use in parametric massing studies and with the optimization
program GenOpt. Although building footprint is often constrained in practice, analysts may find this
object useful for investigating how building form impacts daylighting and solar gains on the east and west
facades with out having to change all of the surface geometry input.
1.10. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 423
Aspect Ratio is defined as the overall length in the East-West direction divided by the overall length
in the North-South direction.
This object should be used with considerable care since it will completely alter the geometry modeled
by EnergyPlus and may have unintended side effects. The surface areas of all horizontal surfaces may
change radically with corresponding changes in Zone floor areas. The total floor area will not change but
individual horizontal surfaces will gain and loose area. Vertical surfaces will have the same height but will
gain and lose length. Lighting and electrical equipment design levels for individual zones will likely have a
different energy per unit area in the transformed geometry.
The surface geometry must be set to Relative, see GlobalGeometryRules. Of course, the coordi-
nates must be entered in relative coordinates as well.
Since windows in EnergyPlus need to be rectangular, it is possible to define a horizontal window
(skylight) that once transformed is no longer rectangular and will cause EnergyPlus to halt. To avoid this
problem, horizontal windows should be defined orthogonal to the Cardinal directions and building rotation
(see Building) used to orient the final form with respect to North.
The object doesn’t create any specific output, but the results of using it can be understood by viewing
DXF output files. Figure 1.63 shows an example of a building that has been morphed using the Aspect
Ratio Transform object. Using this object allowed the same geometry input to generate both of the models
represented in by their DXF output files.
1.10.24.1 Inputs
1.10.24.1.1 Field: Plane of Transform
This field specifies the plane that the geometry transform should act on. It is currently restricted to
altering the horizontal footprint of a building and must be set to “XY.”
1.10.25 SurfaceProperty:SurroundingSurfaces
The object is used to calculate long wave radiation to an external surface from its surrounding surfaces,
defining the properties of the surrounding surfaces. The property object declares a list of single surrounding
surfaces which has a name, a field of view factor, and another field Temperature Schedule Name referencing
a schedule containing the temperature of the surrounding surface, which can be overwritten at each time
step in EnergyPlus run time through co-simulation. View factors are assumed to be constant values. At
least one surrounding surface should be defined in this object.
The object also defines the sky and ground temperature and view factors to the external surface. The
sum of all defined view factors should not exceed 1.0. If only sky view is defined in this object, the ground
view factor to this surface will be 1.0 subtracted with the ground view factor and all other defined surface
view factors. If only ground view is defined in this object, the sky view factor to this surface will be 1.0
subtracted with the sky view factor and all other defined surface view factors. If neither of the sky and
ground view factors are explicitly declared here, the sum of the sky and ground view factor would be 1.0
424 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
subtracted with all other defined surface view factors and the proportion will be set as the same with the
global setting.
Schedule:Compact ,
Surrounding Temp Sch 1, !- Name
Any Number , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: AllDays , !- Field 2
Until: 24:00 , 15.0; !- Field 3
1.10.26 SurfaceProperty:LocalEnvironment
The object links to a surface object Surface:Detailed and is used when there is a need to calculate surface
level environmental data externally and import them into the simulation to override existing environmen-
tal data, including external solar shading fractions, local air velocity, temperature and humidity, and
surrounding surface temperatures and view factors. The object links to three optional objects including
a schedule object declared by Field: External Shading Fraction Schedule Name, a SurfaceProp-
erty:SurroundingSurfaces object declared by Field: Surrounding Surfaces Object Name, and an
OutdoorAir:Node object declared by Field: Outdoor Air Node Name. The object provides inputs
to calculate shading, solar radiation, zone air balance and surface exterior heat balance.
1.10.27 ZoneProperty:LocalEnvironment
The object links to a Zone object and is used when there is a need to calculate zone level environmental
data externally and import them into the simulation to override existing environmental data, including
local air temperature and humidity, wind velocity and direction. links to an OutdoorAir:Node object
declared by Field: Outdoor Air Node Name. The reference local outdoor air node provides ambient
conditions for the calculation of infiltration and ventilation at the zone level.
1.10.28 SurfaceProperty:HeatBalanceSourceTerm
The object allows additional heat source term of the surface boundary condition in the surface heat balance
calculation. The object specifies a surface with the additional heat source term described by a schedule of
heat rates (can be positive or negative values) in W/m2 . A heat source can be added to either or both the
inside and outside of the same surface. The heat rates are pre-calculated outside EnergyPlus.
SurfaceProperty:HeatBalanceSourceTerm ,
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Surface Name
, !- Inside Face Heat Source Term Schedule Name
HeatSourceSch :001; !- Outside Face Heat Source Term Schedule Name
7. All other surfaces whose tilt or facing angle differences are greater than 10 degrees see each other.
If geometry is correct, conditions 1, 3, and 7 should take care of all surfaces, but the other conditions
supply common sense when the geometry is incorrect. More information about the EnergyPlus view factor
calculation is contained in the Engineering Reference document.
1.11. GROUP – DETAILED GROUND HEAT TRANSFER 429
1.10.30 ZoneProperty:UserViewFactors:bySurfaceName
The method of entering user view factors is to entere each surface name and its view factor value to other
surfaces in the zone
1.10.30.1 Inputs
1.10.30.1.1 Field: Zone Name
This field is the zone name for the view factors.
• GroundHeatTransfer:Slab:Materials
• GroundHeatTransfer:Slab:MatlProps
• GroundHeatTransfer:Slab:BoundConds
• GroundHeatTransfer:Slab:BldgProps
• GroundHeatTransfer:Slab:Insulation
• GroundHeatTransfer:Slab:EquivalentSlab
• GroundHeatTransfer:Slab:AutoGrid
• GroundHeatTransfer:Slab:ManualGrid
• GroundHeatTransfer:Slab:XFACE
• GroundHeatTransfer:Slab:YFACE
• GroundHeatTransfer:Slab:ZFACE
430 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
The following objects may be included in an EnergyPlus input IDF file but are handled by the Basement
preprocessor:
• GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:SimParameters
• GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:MatlProps
• GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:Insulation
• GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:SurfaceProps
• GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:BldgData
• GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:Interior
• GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:ComBldg
• GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:EquivSlab
• GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:EquivAutoGrid
• GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:AutoGrid
• GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:ManualGrid
• GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:XFACE
• GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:YFACE
• GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:ZFACE
The documentation both the Slab and Basement objects appear in the AuxiliaryPrograms document
under the “Ground Heat Transfer in EnergyPlus” heading.
The only object described in this section is the control object which activates the use of the preprocessor.
1.11.2 GroundHeatTransfer:Control
The GroundHeatTransfer:Control object determines if the Slab and Basement preprocessors are going to be
executed. When a Slab or Basement run is performed the results are saved in files with extensions .SLAB or
.BSMT so that they do not need to be rerun if no input changes are made to the GroundHeatTransfer:Slab
or GroundHeatTransfer:Basement objects.
1.11.2.1 Inputs
Air Model Key Air model Algorithm Applicability Input Objects Required
1.12.2 RoomAirModelType
EnergyPlus uses the RoomAirModelType object to determine which air model is available for use in a
given zone during the simulation. If no RoomAirModelType object is specified (for each zone or the whole
building), then EnergyPlus will run with the conventional, completely mixing air model (for each zone or
the whole building). Include a RoomAirModelType for each zone that the user wants modeled using a more
detailed method. Currently only a single RoomAirModelType object can be specified for each zone; you
cannot switch between models during a simulation. However, the UCSD Displacement, Cross Ventilation
and UFAD models switch from displacement to mixing ventilation when the operating conditions do not
give rise to unmixed flow. The following parameters are fields required by the RoomAirModelType object.
1.12.2.1 Inputs
1.12.2.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field is the air model name selected by user. It is used as an identifier
1.12.3 RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:UserDefined
This object is used to explicitly define temperature patterns that are to be applied to the mean air
temperature within a thermal zone. This Room Air modeling option is made available for a number
of reasons. It allows modeling the consequences of air temperature variations during the design phase
when little information is available about the specifics of the air distribution system or positioning of
various loads. This option can be used to evaluate the energy implications of different design targets for
the temperature patterns. It also provides a method of modeling the annual energy use implications for air
temperature distributions determined using separate analyses or measurements. For example, this option
could be used to understand the annual energy implications of an air distribution system that has been
previously analyzed using Computational Fluid Dynamics.
This approach differs from the other Room Air modeling in that the static temperature pattern is not
really modeled so that it will respond to conditions that develop during the simulation. More sophisticated
dynamic Room Air models will adjust the temperature pattern based on various factors, such as air system
flow rate, floor temperature, or rates of internal heat gains. The user-defined temperature distribution
patterns are fixed at the beginning and EnergyPlus simply provides results that include the implications
of those patterns. This user-defined distribution option may also be useful for checking dynamic Room Air
models by using “bounding” analysis.
Note that using this object carries a certain degree of responsibility. It would be very easy to define a
pattern that is non-physical and will lead to erroneous results. The user-defined temperature distributions
should (probably) be balanced about the mean so that basic conservation of energy laws are not violated.
1.12.3.1 Inputs
1.12.3.1.1 Field: Name
This field provides a unique name for this object.
1.12.4 RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:ConstantGradient
This object is used to model room air with a fixed temperature gradient in the vertical direction. This
fixed-slope method is about the simplest distribution pattern.
In addition to the vertical temperature gradient, there are three other parameters included in the
pattern that are important. The first two might affect how the air system conditioning the room is
operated. The first describes the temperature difference between the mean air temperature and the point
where the sensor of a drybulb thermostat is situated. The second describes the temperature difference
between the mean and the point where system air is being extracted from the zone. This is considered
important because the changes in temperature difference between supply and return can affect how an air
system is controlled to meet the loads. The third parameter can affect the zone air heat balance by altering
the temperature of the air leaving the zone through exhaust fans.
One example of a source of input data for the vertical temperature gradient is ANSI/ASHRAE Standard
55-2004 Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy. Table 5.2.4.3 in this Standard specifies
an allowable vertical temperature difference between head level and ankle level of 3ºC (5ºF). If we assume
a head to ankle length scale of 1.5 m (5 ft), this leads to a temperature gradient of 3ºC/1.5m, or 2.0 ºC/m.
1.12.4.1 Inputs
1.12.4.1.1 Field: Name
This field provides a unique name for this object.
1.12.5 RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:TwoGradient
This object provides various controls over the value of the gradient used for determining the pattern of room
air temperatures. It is similar to previous object RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:ConstantGradient object
but simplifies the potentially arduous task of preparing and scheduling a large number of those objects.
With this object, two different gradients are entered and user is given several options for controlling how the
program will interpolate between the two bounds. The user inputs the height of the location of thermostat,
return air, and exhaust air in meters rather than the temperature offset.
1.12.5.1 Inputs
1.12.5.1.1 Field: Name
This field provides a unique name for this object.
This field is used to enter the lower bound on temperature values in Celsius. It is required for the
interpolation modes based on temperature.
1.12.6 RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:NondimensionalHeight
This object defines a distribution pattern for air temperatures relative to the current mean air temperature
as a function of height. The height, referred to as Zeta, is non-dimensional by normalizing with the zone
ceiling height. (The actual zone ceiling height can be explicitly entered in the ‘Zone’ object but if not it
is calculated by EnergyPlus from the surfaces attached to the zone.) The temperature differences are not
non-dimensional and remain in units of degrees Celsius.
An example of a vertical temperature pattern is shown in the figure below. The pattern itself is treated
as a piecewise, linear model of air temperature as a function of height. This Zeta-DeltaTai curve, or lookup
table, is then mapped to surfaces defined elsewhere in the file. The centroid of each surface and zone ceiling
height are used to automatically assign Zeta values within the program. The zone named in the referencing
RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:UserDefined object is used to determine which surfaces will be associated
with the pattern when it is applied. A single pattern object can be reused for multiple zones and times.
In addition to the vertical temperature pattern there are three other parameters included in the pattern
that are important. The first two might affect how the air system conditioning the room is operated. The
first describes the temperature difference between the mean air temperature and the point where the sensor
of a drybulb thermostat is situated. The second describes the temperature difference between the mean
and the point where system air is being extracted from the zone. This is considered important because the
changes in temperature difference between supply and return can affect how an air system is controlled to
meet the loads. The third parameter can affect the zone air heat balance by altering the temperature of
the air leaving the zone through exhaust fans.
438 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.12.6.1 Inputs
1.12.6.1.1 Field: Name
This field provides a unique name for this object.
1.12.7 RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:SurfaceMapping
This object defines a distribution pattern for the air temperatures adjacent to individual surfaces. This
object uses the specific names of individual surfaces defined elsewhere in the model. This pattern allows
controlling the adjacent air temperature on a surface-by-surface basis rather than by height. This allows
modeling different adjacent air temperatures on the opposite sides of the zone.
In addition to the surface mappings there are three other parameters included in the pattern that are
important. The first two might affect how the air system conditioning the room is operated. The first
describes the temperature difference between the mean air temperature and the point where the sensor of
a drybulb thermostat is situated. The second describes the temperature difference between the mean and
the point where system air is being extracted from the zone. This is considered important because the
changes in temperature difference between supply and return can affect how an air system is controlled to
meet the loads. The third parameter can affect the zone air heat balance by altering the temperature of
the air leaving the zone through exhaust fans.
1.12.7.1 Inputs
1.12.7.1.1 Field: Name
This field provides a unique name for this object.
1.12.7.1.7 Fields (6 and on): Pairs of Surface Names and Temperature Differences
The remaining fields contain pairs that define a lookup table for the temperature pattern on a surface-
by-surface basis. This object is extensible, by duplicating the last two fields and revising the IDD – note
that you will have to replace “inner” semi-colons with commas.
1.12.8 RoomAir:Node
The RoomAir:Node object is used to define air nodes for a nodal air model. The number of air node objects
that need to be specified depends on the nodal air model selected. (However, currently only the Mundt
model uses this object). In order to use the Mundt model, the user must specify six or more RoomAir:Node
objects of different types for each zone. The exact number of RoomAir:Node in the model will vary based
on the resolution of walls. If walls (heat transfer surfaces) are split into separate segments in the vertical
direction, then more air nodes of type ‘MundtRoom’ will be useful. At a minimum, for the Mundt model
RoomAir Nodes of the following type are required: ‘Inlet, ‘Floor, ‘Control, ‘Ceiling, ‘MundtRoom, and
‘Return.’
1.12.8.1 Inputs
1.12.8.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field is a name for the air node. It should be unique and is used as an identifier
RoomAir:Node ,
WESTZN:FLOORAIR , !- Node Name
Floor , !- Node Type
WEST ZONE , !- Name of Zone to Which the Air Node Belongs
0.1, !- Height of Nodal Control Volume Center {m}
WESTZN:FLOOR:LEFF , !- surface name
WESTZN:FLOOR:RIGHT; !- surface name
1.12.9 RoomAirSettings:OneNodeDisplacementVentilation
The RoomAirSettings:OneNodeDisplacementVentilation object is used to specify additional input param-
eters required by the Mundt model that are not available in other input objects in EnergyPlus. A single
object will be used for the zone.
1.12.9.1 Inputs
1.12.9.1.1 Field: Zone Name
This alpha field indicates the name of the zone (Ref: Zone) for the required input parameters as
specified in the following fields.
RoomAirSettings:OneNodeDisplacementVentilation ,
WEST ZONE , !- Zone Name
0.1, !- Fraction of internal loads from the convective Floor Air
0.1; !- Fraction of internal loads from the Infiltration Air
1.12.10 RoomAirSettings:ThreeNodeDisplacementVentilation
This model is applicable to spaces that are served by a low velocity floor-level displacement ventilation
air distribution system. Furthermore, the dominant sources of heat gain should be from people and other
localized sources located in the occupied part of the room. The model should be used with caution in
1.12. GROUP – ROOM AIR MODELS 443
zones which have large heat gains or losses through exterior walls or windows or which have considerable
direct solar gain. The model predicts three temperatures in the room:
• A foot level temperature (TFLOOR ). The floor region is 0.2 meters deep and TFLOOR represents the
temperature at the mid-point of the region.
• An occupied subzone temperature (TOC ), representing the temperature in the region between the
floor layer and the upper, mixed layer.
• An upper node representing the mixed-layer/outflow temperature (TMX ) essential for overall energy
budget calculations and for modeling comfort effects of the upper layer temperature.
Figure 1.65: Schematic representation of the three temperature points and temperature gradients
The following fields are used to define an instance of the ‘UCSD Displacement Ventilation Model
Controls’ object.
444 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.12.10.1 Inputs
1.12.10.1.1 Field: Zone Name
This field provides the unique name of a zone described elsewhere in the file. A single instance of the
‘UCSD Displacement Ventilation Model Controls’ object is needed for each zone that is to be modeled
using this method.
• people
• task lights
• electric equipment
• gas equipment
• steam equipment
• other equipment
• baseboard heat
Types of internal gains that are assumed to be in the upper subzone are:
• general lights
The schedule values should be between 0 and 1. A value of 1 means that all the convection gains from
equipment, task lights and people are dispersed in the lower occupied subzone. Conversely a value of 0
puts all the lower subzone convective gains into the plumes rising into the upper well-mixed subzone.
RoomAirSettings:ThreeNodeDisplacementVentilation ,
ZONE ONE , !- Zone Name
Constant - .2, !- Gain Distribution Schedule Name
1, !- Number of Plumes per Occupant
, !- Thermostat Height
, !- Comfort Height
.3; !- Temp. Difference Threshold for Displacement Ventilation
1.12.11 RoomAirSettings:CrossVentilation
The UCSD Cross Ventilation Room Air Model provides a simple model for heat transfer and temperature
prediction in cross ventilated rooms. Cross Ventilation (CV) is common in many naturally ventilated
buildings, with air flowing through windows, open doorways and large internal apertures across rooms and
corridors in the building.
The CV model is used in EnergyPlus in the context of natural ventilation simulations using the Air-
flowNetwork airflow prediction model. Typical CV room flows are characterized by two clearly distinguish-
able flow regions that have different airflow velocities and temperature:
• Recirculation regions in the portions of the room that are not directly in front of the windows.
Each inflow aperture has one jet region while the recirculation regions are treated as a whole, with a
single temperature and characteristic velocity. The default EnergyPlus perfectly mixed single temperature
node room air approach is not suitable for these partially mixed flows. The proposed CV model uses
multiple nodes with distinct air temperature and airflow velocity (one node for the recirculations plus one
additional node for each inflow aperture).
The following fields are used to define an instance of the ‘UCSD Cross Ventilation Model Controls’
object.
1.12.11.1 Inputs
1.12.11.1.1 Field: Zone Name
This field provides the name of the zone to which this object applies. A single instance of the ‘UCSD
Cross Ventilation Model Controls’ object is needed for each zone modeled using this method.
446 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Figure 1.66: Schematic representation of room air geometry a) schematic representation of a room
geometry that generates cross ventilation airflow. b) the proposed model distinguishes two regions
in the flow: jet and recirculation (shown here in a CFD simulation of one half of a symmetrical
room).
1.12. GROUP – ROOM AIR MODELS 447
1.12.11.2 Outputs
1.12.11.2.3 Room Air Zone Jet Region Average Air Velocity [m/s]
Average airflow velocity in the jet region of the flow in meters per second. If there is more than one
inflow window this output will be the inflow area weighted area of the jet inflow velocities.
1.12.11.2.4 Room Air Window Jet Region Average Air Velocity [m/s]
Average airflow velocity in the jet region in front of the window, in meters per second.
1.12.11.2.5 Room Air Zone Recirculation Region Average Air Velocity [m/s]
Average airflow velocity in the recirculation region of the flow in meters per second.
1.12.12 RoomAirSettings:UnderFloorAirDistributionInterior
This model is applicable to interior spaces that are served by an underfloor air distribution system. The
dominant sources of heat gain should be from people, equipment, and other localized sources located in
the occupied part of the room. The model should be used with caution in zones which have large heat
gains or losses through exterior walls or windows or which have considerable direct solar gain. The model
predicts two temperatures in the room:
• An occupied subzone temperature (TOC ), representing the temperature in the region between the
floor and the boundary of the upper subzone.
• An upper subzone temperature (TMX ) essential for overall energy budget calculations and for mod-
eling comfort effects of the upper layer temperature.
The following fields are used to define an instance of the ‘UCSD UFAD Interior Model Controls’ object.
1.12.12.1 Inputs
1.12.12.1.1 Field: Zone Name
This field provides the unique name of a zone described elsewhere in the file. A single instance of the
‘RoomAirSettings:UnderFloorAirDistributionInterior’ object is needed for each zone that is to be modeled
using this method.
model assumes an “equivalent” plume derived from the zone extraction rate normalized to the number of
workstations/occupants. This field should be allowed to default – the program will calculate a value based
upon the occupancy and the extraction rate. The default is Autocalculate.
the formula are defaulted based upon diffuser type. A user would normally allow this field to default. The
default is autocalculate.
RoomAirModelType ,
SPACE5 -1 RoomAir Model , !- Name
SPACE5 -1, !- Zone Name
UnderFloorAirDistributionInterior , !- Room -Air Modeling Type
DIRECT; !- Air Temperature Coupling Strategy
RoomAirSettings: UnderFloorAirDistributionInterior ,
SPACE5 -1, !- Zone Name
Autocalculate , !- Number of Diffusers
Autocalculate , !- Power per Plume
Autocalculate , !- Design Effective Area of Diffuser {m2}
Autocalculate , !- Diffuser Slot Angle from Vertical {deg}
, !- Thermostat Height {m}
, !- Comfort Height {m}
0.001 , !- Temperature Difference Threshold for Reporting {deltaC}
Swirl , !- Diffuser Type
1.7, !- Transition Height {m}
Autocalculate , !- Coefficient A
Autocalculate , !- Coefficient B
Autocalculate , !- Coefficient C
Autocalculate , !- Coefficient D
Autocalculate; !- Coefficient E
452 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.12.13 RoomAirSettings:UnderFloorAirDistributionExterior
This model is applicable to exterior spaces that are served by an underfloor air distribution system. The
dominant sources of heat gain should be from people, equipment, and other localized sources located in the
occupied part of the room, as well as convective gain coming from a warm window. The model predicts
two temperatures in the room:
• An occupied subzone temperature (TOC ), representing the temperature in the region between the
floor and the boundary of the upper subzone..
• An upper subzone temperature (TMX ) essential for overall energy budget calculations and for mod-
eling comfort effects of the upper layer temperature.
The following fields are used to define an instance of the ‘UCSD UFAD Exterior Model Controls’ object.
1.12.13.1 Inputs
1.12.13.1.1 Field: Zone Name
This field provides the unique name of a zone described elsewhere in the file. A single instance of the
‘RoomAirSettings:UnderFloorAirDistributionExterior’ object is needed for each zone that is to be modeled
using this method.
• RoomAirSettings:AirflowNetwork
• RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork
• RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:AdjacentSurfaceList
• RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:InternalGains
• RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:HVACEquipment
• AirflowNetwork:Intrazone:Node
• AirflowNetwork:Intrazone:Linkage
The first five objects are described below. The last two objects are described in the Airflow Network
Model section. This model also requires additional AirflowNetwork:* objects to form a complete network.
1.12. GROUP – ROOM AIR MODELS 455
1.12.15 RoomAirSettings:AirflowNetwork
This object provides inputs in a thermal zone needed for the RoomAirflowNetwork model. The inputs
specify a thermal zone and a list of RoomAir nodes. The object gives a summary of the model configuration
in a zone.
1.12.15.1 Inputs
1.12.15.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique character string associated with this instance of the RoomAirSettings:AirflowNetwork
object.
RoomAirSettings:AirflowNetwork ,
NORTH_ZONE , !- Name
NORTH_ZONE , !- Zone Name
RoomAir Schedule , !- Availability Schedule Name
NORTH_ZONE , !- Control Point RoomAir:Node Name
LeftUpper , !- RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork 1 Name
CentralUpper , !- RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork 2 Name
NORTH_ZONE , !- RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork 3 Name
LeftMiddle , !- RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork 4 Name
LeftLower , !- RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork 5 Name
CentralLower; !- RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork 6 Name
1.12.16 RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork
This object is used to define a node in a thermal zone. The input specifies the fraction of zone volume and
provides a list of names to define fraction of internal gains, surface connection and HVAC equipment.
1.12.16.1 Inputs
1.12.16.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique character string associated with this instance of the RoomAirSettings:AirflowNetwork
object.
1.12.17 RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:AdjacentSurfaceList
This object is used to provide a list of connected adjacent surfaces with convective heat transfer between
surfaces and this particular node. When a moisture mode is assigned to surfaces, convective moisture
transfer will be calculated. It should be pointed out that a fraction of a surface exposed to this particular
node is not allowed.
RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:AdjacentSurfaceList ,
Surface_18_T_List , !- Name
Surface_18_T; !- Surface 1 Name
1.12. GROUP – ROOM AIR MODELS 457
1.12.18 RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:InternalGains
This object is used to define a list of internal gains in the same zone and associated fraction assigned to
this particular node.
1.12.18.1 Inputs
1.12.18.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique character string associated with this instance of the RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:-
InternalGains object.
{Field set: 3 fields (Internal Gain Object x Type, Internal Gain Object x Name, and Fraction of Gains
to Node x). are extensible.}
1.12.19 RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:HVACEquipment
This object is used to define a list of HVAC equipment objects in the same zone and associated fractions
assigned to this particular node.
1.12.19.1 Inputs
1.12.19.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique character string associated with this instance of the RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:-
HVACEquipment object.
RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:HVACEquipment ,
CentralUpper_HVAC , !- Name
ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalAirConditioner , !- ZoneHVAC or Air Terminal Equipment Object Type 1
NORTH_ZONE PTAC , !- ZoneHVAC or Air Terminal Equipment Object Name 1
0.14, !- Fraction of Output or Supply Air from HVAC Equipment 1
0.14; !- Fraction of Input or Return Air to HVAC Equipment 1
{Field set: 4 fields (ZoneHVAC or Air Terminal Equipment Object Type x, ZoneHVAC or Air Terminal
Equipment Object Name x, Fraction of Output or Supply Air from HVAC Equipment x, and Fraction of
Input or Return Air from HVAC Equipment x) are extensible.}
1.12.19.2 Outputs
Each room air model sets up outputs specific to that model. The effect of room air modeling is usually to
adjust the adjacent air temperature along the inside surface of heat transfer surfaces. The output report
“Surface Int Adjacent Air Temperature [C]” is provided for this and described under Surface Outputs.
1.12.19.3 Outputs
The user-defined air temperature pattern that interpolates between two gradients produces the following
output variable.
HVAC ,Average ,Room Air Zone Vertical Temperature Gradient [K/m]
1.12.19.4 Outputs
The following output is available for the Mundt model.
Room Air Node Air Temperature {[}C{]}
1.12.19.5 Outputs
1.12.19.5.9 Room Air Zone Thermal Comfort Effective Air Temperature [C]
The temperature at the user specified comfort height in degrees C.
1.12.19.6 Outputs
• Zone,Average,Room Air Zone Jet Region Temperature [C]
1.12.19.6.3 Room Air Zone Jet Region Average Air Velocity [m/s]
Average airflow velocity in the jet region of the flow in meters per second.
1.12.19.6.4 Room Air Zone Recirculation Region Average Air Velocity [m/s]
Average airflow velocity in the recirculation region of the flow in meters per second.
1.12.19.7 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Mixed Subzone Temperature [C]
1.12.19.7.10 Room Air Zone Window Plume Heat Transfer Rate [W]
The convective heat gain from windows in an UnderFloorAirDistributionExterior zone.
Tocc − Tsup
(1.18)
Tret − Tsup
1.12.19.8 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,RoomAirflowNetwork Node Temperature [C]
A sum of system convective gains, collected via NonAirSystemResponse, and assigned to a Room Air
node in a zone.
1.13.1 People
The people statement is used to model the occupant’s effect on the space conditions. The following
definition addresses the basic affects as well as providing information that can be used to report the
thermal comfort of a group of occupants. The Fanger, Pierce Two-Node, and Kansas State University
Two-Node thermal comfort models are available in EnergyPlus. A user may select any of these models
for each People statement by simply adding the appropriate choice keyword after the air velocity schedule
name. Thermal comfort calculations will only be made for people statements that include specific requests
for these thermal comfort models. . This object also requires input of carbon dioxide generation rate based
on people activity level for zone carbon dioxide simulations.
1.13.1.1 Inputs
1.13.1.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the People object. Must be unique across all People objects.
• People
With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the number of occupants (people). (The
Number of People field should be filled.)
• People/Area
With this choice, the method used will be a factor per floor area of the zone. (The People per Zone
Floor Area field should be filled).
• Area/Person
With this choice, the method used will be a factor of floor area per person. (The Zone Floor Area per
Person field should be filled).
Resting
Sleeping 72 40 0.7
Reclining 81 45 0.8
466 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Reading, seated 99 55 1
Writing 108 60 1
Typing 117 65 1.1
Filing, seated 126 70 1.2
Filing, standing 144 80 1.4
Walking about 180 100 1.7
Lifting/packing 216 120 2.1
Miscellaneous Occupational
Activities
This field specifies the type of Mean Radiant Temperature (MRT) calculation the user wishes to use
for the thermal comfort model. At the present time, there are three options for MRT calculation type:
zone averaged, surface weighted, and a list of angle factors. The default calculation is “ZoneAveraged”
and is used if field is left blank. In the zone averaged MRT calculation, the MRT used for the thermal
comfort calculations is for an “average” point in the zone. MRT is calculated based on an area-emissivity
weighted average of all of the surfaces in the zone. In cases where the emissivity of all of the surfaces
are sufficiently small (near zero), the mean radiant temperature will be set to the mean air temperature
of the space to avoid divide by zero errors. The other MRT calculation type is “SurfaceWeighted”. The
goal of this calculation type is to estimate a person in the space close to a particular surface without
having to define exact view factors for all of the surfaces and the location of the person in the space. The
MRT used in the thermal comfort calculations when the “surface weighted” calculation type is selected is
actually the average of the temperature of the surface to which the person is closest (defined by the next
field “Surface Name”) and the zone averaged MRT (defined above). The surface temperature alone is not
used because in theory the maximum view factor from a person to any flat surface is roughly 0.5. In the
“surfaceweighted” calculation, the surface in question actually gets slightly more weighting than 50% since
the surface selected is still a part of the zone average MRT calculation. Again, this simplification was made
to avoid the specification of view factors and the exact location of the person.
A third option is to use “AngleFactor”. This option allows for more explicit positioning of the person
within the space by defining the angle factors from the person to the various surfaces in the zone. This
option requires the user to list the surfaces that the person can see from a radiation standpoint and also
define the angle (or view) factor for each surface. The ComfortViewFactorAngles object (see next object
description) is intended to give the user this opportunity.
This field is a key/choice field that tells which of the next two fields are filled and is descriptive of the
method for calculating the clothing insulation value of occupants (people) in the Zone. The key/choices
are:
• ClothingInsulationSchedule
With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the scheduled clothing insulation
values of occupants (people). (The Clothing Insulation Schedule Name field should be filled.)
• DynamicClothingModelASHRAE55
With this choice, the method used will be the dynamic predictive clothing insulation model developed
by Schiavon and Lee (2013) based on 6,333 selected observations taken from ASHRAE RP-884 and RP-921
databases. It varies the clothing insulation as a function of outdoor air temperature measured at 6am as
illustrated below.
• CalculationMethodSchedule
With this choice, the method used can be either the ClothingInsulationSchedule or the DynamicCloth-
ingModelASHRAE55, depending on a schedule (to be entered as the next field) that determines which
method to use in different time of a day. When this option is chosen, the next field “Clothing Insulation
Calculation Method Schedule Name” is a required input.
Figure 1.68: Graphical representation fo the dynamic predictive clothing insulation model
1.13. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 469
People ,
Kitchen_ZN_1_FLR_1 , !- Name
Kitchen_ZN_1_FLR_1 , !- Zone or ZoneList Name
BLDG_OCC_SCH , !- Number of People Schedule Name
People , !- Number of People Calculation Method
25.2000,,, !- Number of People , People per Zone Floor Area , Zone Floor Area per Person
0.3000 , !- Fraction Radiant
AUTOCALCULATE , !- Sensible Heat Fraction
ACTIVITY_SCH , !- Activity Level Schedule Name
3.82E-8, !- Carbon Dioxide Generation Rate {m3/s-W}
No , !- Enable ASHRAE 55 Comfort Warnings
ZoneAveraged , !- Mean Radiant Temperature Calculation Type
, !- Surface Name/Angle Factor List Name
WORK_EFF_SCH , !- Work Efficiency Schedule Name
470 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
People ,
AllZones with People , !- Name
AllOccupiedZones , !- Zone or ZoneList Name
OCCUPY -1, !- Number of People Schedule Name
People/Area , !- Number of People Calculation Method
, !- Number of People
.11, !- People per Zone Floor Area {person/m2}
, !- Zone Floor Area per Person {m2/person}
0.3, !- Fraction Radiant
, !- Sensible Heat Fraction
ActSchd; !- Activity Level Schedule Name
1.13.1.2 Outputs
People objects have output variables for individual objects and for zone totals.
People specific outputs include:
• Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Adaptive Model Running Average Outdoor Air
Temperature [C]
• Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort CEN 15251 Adaptive Model Category III Status
• Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort CEN 15251 Adaptive Model Running Average Outdoor Air
Temperature [C]
1.13.1.2.39 Zone Thermal Comfort CEN 15251 Adaptive Model Category I Status
This field is to report whether the operative temperature falls into the Category I (90% acceptability)
limits of the adaptive comfort in the European Standard EN15251-2007. A value of 1 means within
(inclusive) the limits, a value of 0 means outside the limits, and a value of -1 means not applicable (when
unoccupied or running average outdoor temp is outside the range of 10.0 to 30.0C).
1.13.1.2.40 Zone Thermal Comfort CEN 15251 Adaptive Model Category II Status
This field is to report whether the operative temperature falls into the Category II (80% acceptability)
limits of the adaptive comfort in the European Standard EN15251-2007. A value of 1 means within
(inclusive) the limits, a value of 0 means outside the limits, and a value of -1 means not applicable (when
unoccupied or running average outdoor temp is outside the range of 10.0 to 30.0C).
1.13.1.2.41 Zone Thermal Comfort CEN 15251 Adaptive Model Category III Status
This field is to report whether the operative temperature falls into the Category III (65% acceptability)
limits of the adaptive comfort in the European Standard EN15251-2007. A value of 1 means within
(inclusive) the limits, a value of 0 means outside the limits, and a value of -1 means not applicable (when
unoccupied or running average outdoor temp is outside the range of 10.0 to 30.0C).
1.13.1.2.42 Zone Thermal Comfort CEN 15251 Adaptive Model Running Average
Outdoor Air Temperature
This field reports the weighted average of the outdoor air temperature of the previous seven days, an
input parameter for the CEN-15251 adaptive comfort model.
1.13.1.3 Outputs
The following output variables are all based on whether the humidity ratio and the operative temperature
is within the region shown in ASHRAE Standard 55-2004 in Figure 5.2.1.1. For these outputs the operative
temperature is simplified to be the average of the air temperature and the mean radiant temperature. For
summer, the 0.5 Clo level is used and, for winter, the 1.0 Clo level is used. The graphs below are based on
the following tables which extend the ASHRAE values to zero humidity ratio.
1.13. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 477
19.6 0.012
23.9 0.012
26.3 0.000
21.7 0.000
23.6 0.012
26.8 0.012
28.3 0.000
25.1 0.000
478 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.13.1.3.1 Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Simple Model Summer Clothes Not
Comfortable Time[hr]
The time when the zone is occupied that the combination of humidity ratio and operative temperature
is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 summer clothes region (see above)
1.13.1.3.2 Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Simple Model Winter Clothes Not
Comfortable Time[hr]
The time when the zone is occupied that the combination of humidity ratio and operative temperature
is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 winter clothes region (see above)
1.13.1.3.4 Facility Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Simple Model Summer Clothes Not
Comfortable Time[hr]
The time when any zone is occupied that the combination of humidity ratio and operative temperature
is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 summer clothes region (see above)
1.13.1.3.5 Facility Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Simple Model Winter Clothes Not
Comfortable Time [hr]
1.13. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 479
The time when any zone is occupied that the combination of humidity ratio and operative temperature
is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 winter clothes region (see above)
You may decide if you need to change parameters to reduce these “uncomfortable” hours. The individual
output variables shown previously may help you get more details on when these are occurring.
Following are some suggestions that might be applicable:
• Note that the ASHRAE graph lower limit is (19.6C to 21.7C) – heating setpoints may need to be
nearer 22.2C (72F) than 21.1C (70F).
• Unoccupied heating setpoint should be nearer 16.7C (62F) rather than 12.8C (55F) to reduce the
start up recovery.
• Start the occupied setpoint schedule, fan availability schedule, cooling pump availability schedule,
reheat coil availability, one hour before occupancy. Seasonal turn on and off of equipment may cause
more warnings (but potentially more energy consumption).
• Unoccupied cooling setpoint should be nearer 29.4C (85F) rather than 40.0 (104F) to reduce the
start up recovery.
1.13.3 ComfortViewFactorAngles
When requesting EnergyPlus to do a thermal comfort calculation, the program user has three options for
defining how the mean radiant temperature will be calculated. The user may select “zoneaveraged” which
results in a mean radiant temperature that is characteristic of an “average” location near the center of the
zone. The user may also elect to place the person near a particular surface by selecting “surfaceweighted”
480 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
in the People statement. This takes the average of the zone mean radiant temperature and the temperature
of the surface that the person is near and uses this value as the mean radiant temperature when calculating
thermal comfort.
The third option is for the user to more explicitly position the person within the space by defining the
angle factors from the person to the various surfaces in the zone. This option requires the user to list the
surfaces that the person can see from a radiation standpoint and also define the angle (or view) factor for
each surface. The AngleFactorList input line is intended to give the user this opportunity.
1.13.3.1 Inputs
1.13.3.1.1 Field: Name
This field is an unique user assigned name for the list of surfaces that can be seen radiantly by the
person for whom thermal comfort is to be evaluated. Any reference to this list by a People statement will
use this name.
1.13.4 Lights
The Lights statement allows you to specify information about a zone’s electric lighting system, including
design power level and operation schedule, and how the heat from lights is distributed thermally.
A zone may have multiple Lights statements. For example, one statement may describe the general
lighting in the zone and another the task lighting. Or you can use multiple Lights statements for a zone
that has two or more general lighting systems that differ in design level, schedule, etc.
1.13.4.1 Inputs
1.13.4.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the Lights object.
1.13. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 481
• LightingLevel
With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the lighting level (Watts) for the
Zone. (The Lighting Level field should be filled.)
• Watts/Area
With this choice, the method used will be a factor per floor area of the zone. (The Watts per Zone
Floor Area field should be filled).
• Watts/Person
With this choice, the method used will be a factor of lighting level (watts) per person. (The Watts per
person field should be filled).
The value you enter for the Return Air Fraction field will be ignored and you can enter, for fluorescent
lighting, Fraction Radiant = 0.37 and Fraction Visible = 0.18, as indicated in Table 1.23.
This feature requires that the coefficients described below be determined from measurements or detailed
calculations since they are very sensitive to the luminaire type, lamp type, thermal resistance between
fixture and plenum, etc.
If “Return Air Fraction Is Calculated from Plenum Temperature” = Yes, the return air fraction is
calculated each timestep from the following empirical correlation:
Lights ,
AllZones with Lights , !- Name
AllOccupiedZones , !- Zone or ZoneList Name
LIGHTS -1, !- Schedule Name
Watts/Area , !- Design Level Calculation Method
, !- Lighting Level {W}
16, !- Watts per Zone Floor Area {W/m2}
, !- Watts per Person {W/person}
486 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Figure 1.71: Vertical section through a zone and its return air plenum showing recessed lighting (not
to scale). The heat from lights is divided into four fractions, three of which — ReturnAirFraction,
FractionRadiant and FractionConvected — depend on plenum air temperature.
1.13. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 487
1.13.4.2 Outputs
If daylighting controls are operating in the zone, all of the Lights objects with a Fraction Replaceable greater
than zero will be reduced by a multiplicative factor that accounts for how much the electric lighting is
lowered due to daylighting.
Lights objects have output variables for individual objects and for zone totals.
1.13.4.3 Outputs
As described in the Lights Outputs, values for lights will show up on the following meters:
490 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.13.5 ElectricEquipment
The object models equipment in the zone which consumes electricity, such as computers, televisions, and
cooking equipment, also known as “plug loads.” All of the energy consumed by the equipment becomes a
heat gain in the zone or is lost (exhausted) as specified below.
1.13.5.1 Inputs
1.13.5.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the ElectricEquipment object.
• EquipmentLevel
1.13. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 491
With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the electric equipment level (Watts)
for the Zone. (The Design Level field should be filled.)
• Watts/Area
With this choice, the method used will be a factor per floor area of the zone. (The Watts per Zone
Floor Area field should be filled).
• Watts/Person
With this choice, the method used will be a factor of equipment level (watts) per person. (The Watts
per Person field should be filled).
ElectricEquipment ,
AllZones with Electric Equipment , !- Name
AllOccupiedZones , !- Zone or ZoneList Name
EQUIP -1, !- Schedule Name
Watts/Person , !- Design Level Calculation Method
, !- Design Level {W}
, !- Watts per Zone Floor Area {W/m2}
96, !- Watts per Person {W/person}
0, !- Fraction Latent
0.3, !- Fraction Radiant
0; !- Fraction Lost
1.13.6 GasEquipment
The object models equipment in the zone which consumes natural gas, such as cooking equipment or a
gas fireplace. All of the energy consumed by the equipment becomes a heat gain in the zone or is lost
(exhausted) as specified below.
1.13.6.1 Inputs
1.13.6.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the GasEquipment object.
1.13. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 493
• EquipmentLevel
With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the gas equipment level (Watts) for
the Zone. (The Design Level field should be filled.)
• Watts/Area or Power/Area
With this choice, the method used will be a factor per floor area of the zone. (The Power per Zone
Floor Area field should be filled).
• Watts/Person or Power/Person
With this choice, the method used will be a factor of equipment level (watts) per person. (The Power
per Person field should be filled).
End Uses by Subcategory table and the LEED Summary table EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method
Compliance.
An IDF example:
GasEquipment ,
DORM ROOMS AND COMMON AREAS GasEq 1, !- Name
DORM ROOMS AND COMMON AREAS , !- Zone Name
Gas Eq Sch , !-Schedule Name
EquipmentLevel , !- Design Level Calculation Method
29287.51 , !- Design Level {W}
, !- Power per Zone Floor Area {W/m2}
, !- Power per Person {W/Person}
0, !- Fraction Latent
0.3, !- Fraction Radiant
0, !- Fraction Lost
0, !- Carbon Dioxide Generation Rate {m3/s-W}
Cooking; !- End -Use Subcategory
GasEquipment ,
Office Zones with Gas , !- Name
OfficeZones , !- Zone Name
Gas Eq Sch , !- Schedule Name
Watts/Area , !- Design Level Calculation Method
, !- Design Level {W}
197, !- Power per Zone Floor Area {W/m2}
, !- Power per Person {W/Person}
0.0000000E+00, !- Fraction Latent
0.3000000 , !- Fraction Radiant
0.0000000E+00; !- Fraction Lost
1.13.7 HotWaterEquipment
The object models hot water equipment in the zone which consumes district heating, such as cooking
equipment or process loads. All of the energy consumed by the equipment becomes a heat gain in the zone
or is lost (exhausted) as specified below. This object consumes district heating energy directly and does
not cause a load on a hot water plant loop or water heater. For domestic hot water uses, such as sinks and
showers, see WaterUse:Equipment.
1.13.7.1 Inputs
1.13.7.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the HotWaterEquipment object.
• EquipmentLevel
With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the hot water equipment level (Watts)
for the Zone. (The Design Level field should be filled.)
• Watts/Area or Power/Area
With this choice, the method used will be a factor per floor area of the zone. (The Power per Zone
Floor Area field should be filled).
• Watts/Person or Power/Person
With this choice, the method used will be a factor of equipment level (watts) per person. (The Power
per Person field should be filled).
HotWaterEquipment ,
Office Zones with HoWater Equipment ,!- Name
OfficeZones , !- Zone Name
HotWater Eq Sch , !- Schedule Name
Watts/Area , !- Design Level Calculation Method
, !- Design Level {W}
50, !- Power per Zone Floor Area {W/m2}
, !- Power per Person {W/Person}
0.0000000E+00, !- Fraction Latent
0.3000000 , !- Fraction Radiant
0.0000000E+00; !- Fraction Lost
498 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.13.8 SteamEquipment
The object models steam equipment in the zone which consumes district heating, such as cooking equipment
or process loads. All of the energy consumed by the equipment becomes a heat gain in the zone or is lost
(exhausted) as specified below. This object consumes district heating energy directly and does not cause
a load on a steam plant loop.
1.13.8.1 Inputs
1.13.8.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the SteamEquipment object.
• EquipmentLevel
With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the steam equipment level (Watts) for
the Zone. (The Design Level field should be filled.)
• Watts/Area or Power/Area
With this choice, the method used will be a factor per floor area of the zone. (The Power per Zone
Floor Area field should be filled).
• Watts/Person or Power/Person
With this choice, the method used will be a factor of equipment level (watts) per person. (The Power
per Person field should be filled).
You will get an error message if Fraction Latent + Fraction Radiant + Fraction Lost exceeds 1.0.
SteamEquipment ,
SPACE4 -1 ElecEq 1, !- Name
SPACE4 -1, !- Zone Name
EQUIP -1, !- SCHEDULE Name
EquipmentLevel , !- Design Level calculation method
1050, !- Design Level {W}
, !- Power per Zone Floor Area {watts/m2}
, !- Power per Person {watts/person}
0.5, !- Fraction Latent
0.3, !- Fraction Radiant
0, !- Fraction Lost
Laundry; !- End -Use Subcategory
1.13.9 SwimmingPool:Indoor
The Indoor Swimming Pool object is used to describe the indoor swimming pools that are exposed to the
internal environment. There are several rules that should be noted regarding the specification of an indoor
pool in EnergyPlus. First, the pool is linked to a surface that must be a floor. The pool is assumed to
cover the entire floor to which it is linked. If the pool only covers part of the floor in the actual building,
then the user must break the floor up into multiple sections.
As pools attempt to achieve a particular water temperature and have a variety of heat losses, heat-
ing equipment is necessary to maintain the proper setpoint temperature. In EnergyPlus, the pool itself
becomes part of the demand side of a plant loop with heating equipment on the supply side providing
whatever heating is needed to maintain the desired temperature. This heating equipment as well as the
loop connections must be entered separately and the input shown in this section only details what is needed
to specify the pool itself.
The following information is useful for defining and modeling an indoor pool in EnergyPlus. For
more information on the algorithm used for this model or details on some of the input parameters, please
reference the indoor pool section of the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference document.
1.13.9.1 Inputs
1.13.9.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique name associated with the indoor swimming pool.
in long-wavelength radiation from a fully uncovered pool is 25% or 0.25. Note that with radiation terms
that whatever portion of the long-wavelength radiation is blocked by the cover is transferred via convection
to the surrounding zone air.
SwimmingPool:Indoor ,
Test Pool , !- Name
F1 -1, !- Surface Name
1.5, !- Average Depth {m}
PoolActivitySched , !- Pool Activity Schedule
MakeUpWaterSched , !- MakeUp Water Temperature Schedule
PoolCoverSched , !- Pool Cover Schedule
0.0, !- Cover Evaporation Factor
0.2, !- Cover Convection Factor
0.9, !- Cover Short -Wavelength Radiation Factor
0.5, !- Cover Long -Wavelength Radiation Factor
Pool Water Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node (Plant/Heater)
Pool Water Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node (Plant/Heater)
0.1, !- Maximum flow rate from water heating system {m3/s}
0.6, !- Miscellaneous Equipment Power Factor {W/(m3/s)}
PoolSetpointTempSched , !- Pool Water Setpoint Temperature Schedule
15, !- Maximum Number of People in Pool
PoolOccupancySched , !- Pool People Schedule
PoolOccHeatGainSched; !- Pool People Heat Gain Schedule
1.13.9.2 Outputs
• HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Makeup Water Rate [m3/s]
• HVAC, Sum, Indoor Pool Makeup Water Volume [m3]
• HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Makeup Water Temperature [C]
• HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Water Temperature [C]
• HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Inlet Water Temperature [C]
• HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Inlet Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Miscellaneous Equipment Power [W]
• HVAC, Sum, Indoor Pool Miscellaneous Equipment Energy [J]
• HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Heating Rate [W]
• HVAC, Sum, Indoor Pool Heating Energy [J]
• HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Radiant to Convection by Cover [W]
• HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool People Heat Gain [W]
• HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Current Activity Factor []
• HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Current Cover Factor []
• HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Evaporative Heat Loss Rate [W]
• HVAC, Sum, Indoor Pool Evaporative Heat Loss Energy [J]
• HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Saturation Pressure at Pool Temperature [Pa]
• HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Partial Pressure of Water Vapor in Air [Pa]
• HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Current Cover Evaporation Factor []
• HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Current Cover Convective Factor []
• HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Current Cover SW Radiation Factor []
• HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Current Cover LW Radiation Factor []
The water consumption rate for the makeup water of indoor swimming pool.
1.13.10 OtherEquipment
Other Equipment object is provided as an additional source for heat gains or losses directly to the zone
with a fuel type that is configurable. If a fuel type is specified, the energy is attributed to the appropriate
end use. Otherwise, a loss can be entered by putting a negative value into the Design Level field and this
object will not have an end-use component – gains or losses do not show up in the bottom energy lines
(except as influencing overall zone gains or losses).
1.13.10.1 Inputs
1.13.10.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the OtherEquipment object.
506 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• EquipmentLevel
With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the other equipment level (Watts) for
the Zone. (The Design Level field should be filled.)
• Watts/Area or Power/Area
With this choice, the method used will be a factor per floor area of the zone. (The Power per Zone
Floor Area field should be filled).
• Watts/Person or Power/Person
With this choice, the method used will be a factor of equipment level (watts) per person. (The Power
per Person field should be filled).
You will get an error message if FractionLatent + FractionRadiant + FractionLost exceeds 1.0.
1.13.10.2 Outputs
Each type of equipment object has output variables for individual objects and for zone totals.
Electric Equipment
Gas Equipment
HotWater Equipment
Steam Equipment
1.13. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 511
Other Equipment
1.13.11 ElectricEquipment:ITE:AirCooled
This object describes air-cooled electric information technology equipment (ITE) which has variable power
consumption as a function of loading and temperature.
1.13.11.1 Inputs
1.13.11.1.1 Field: Name
The name of this object.
single duct VAV terminal unit. Other return air heat gains from window or lights are not allowed when
FlowControlWithApproachTemperatures is chosen.
The default method is FlowFromSystem.
1.13.11.1.10 Field: CPU Power Input Function of Loading and Air Temperature
Curve Name
The name of a two-variable curve or table lookup object which modifies the CPU power input as a
function of CPU loading (x) and air inlet node temperature (y). This curve (table) should equal 1.0 at
design conditions (CPU loading = 1.0 and Design Entering Air Temperature).
1.13. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 515
1.13.11.1.12 Field: Design Fan Air Flow Rate per Power Input
Specifies the cooling fan air flow rate in m3/s per Watt of total electric power input at design conditions
(CPU loading = 1.0 and Design Entering Air Temperature).
This is normalized by power input to allow the design power input to be changed without needing to
change this value.
1.13.11.1.13 Field: Air Flow Function of Loading and Air Temperature Curve Name
The name of a two-variable curve or table lookup object which modifies the cooling air flow rate as a
function of CPU loading (x) and air inlet node temperature (y). This curve (table) should equal 1.0 at
design conditions (CPU loading = 1.0 and Design Entering Air Temperature).
1.13.11.1.24 Field: Electric Power Supply Efficiency Function of Part Load Ratio
Curve Name
The name of a single-variable curve or table lookup object which modifies the electric power supply
efficiency as a function of part load ratio (x). This curve (table) should equal 1.0 at the design power
consumption (part load ratio = 1.0). If this curve is left blank, then the curve is assumed to always equal
1.0.
ElectricEquipment:ITE:AirCooled ,
Data Center Servers , !- Name
Main Zone , !- Zone Name
FlowFromSystem , !- Air Flow Calculation Method
Watts/Unit , !- Design Power Input Calculation Method
500, !- Watts per Unit {W}
200, !- Number of Units
, !- Watts per Zone Floor Area {W/m2}
Data Center Operation Schedule , !- Design Power Input Schedule Name
Data Center CPU Loading Schedule , !- CPU Loading Schedule Name
Model 5250 Power fLoadTemp , !- CPU Power Input Function of Loading and Air Temperature Curve Name
0.4, !- Design Fan Power Input Fraction
0.0001 , !- Design Fan Air Flow Rate per Power Input {m3/s-W}
518 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Model 5250 AifFlow fLoadTemp , !- Air Flow Function of Loading and Air Temperature Curve Name
ECM FanPower fFlow , !- Fan Power Input Function of Flow Curve Name
15, !- Design Entering Air Temperature {C}
A3 , !- Environmental Class
AdjustedSupply , !- Air Inlet Connection Type
, !- Air Inlet Room Air Model Node Name
, !- Air Outlet Room Air Model Node Name
Main Zone Inlet Node , !- Supply Air Node Name
0.1, !- Design Recirculation Fraction
Data Center Recirculation fLoadTemp , !- Recirculation Function of Loading and Supply Temperature Curve
Name
0.9, !- Design Electric Power Supply Efficiency
UPS Efficiency fPLR , !- Electric Power Supply Efficiency Function of Part Load Ratio Curve Name
1, !- Fraction of Electric Power Supply Losses to Zone
ITE -CPU , !- CPU End -Use Subcategory
ITE -Fans , !- Fan End -Use Subcategory
ITE -UPS; !- Electric Power Supply End -Use Subcategory
ElectricEquipment:ITE:AirCooled Outputs
• Zone,Sum,Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature Above Operating Range Time [hr]
• Zone,Sum,Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature Below Operating Range Time [hr]
• Zone,Sum,Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Relative Humidity Above Operating Range Time [hr]
• Zone,Sum,Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Relative Humidity Below Operating Range Time [hr]
1.13.11.1.36 Zone ITE CPU Electric Power at Design Inlet Conditions [W]
1.13.11.1.38 Zone ITE CPU Electric Energy at Design Inlet Conditions [J]
1.13.11.1.44 Zone ITE Fan Electric Power at Design Inlet Conditions [W]
1.13.11.1.46 Zone ITE Fan Electric Energy at Design Inlet Conditions [J]
1.13. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 521
1.13.11.1.60 Zone ITE Standard Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.13.11.1.62 Zone ITE Current Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
522 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.13.11.1.72 Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Operating Range Exceeded Time [hr]
1.13.11.1.74 Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Dry-Bulb Temperature Above Operating Range
Time [hr]
1.13.11.1.75 ITE Air Inlet Dry-Bulb Temperature Above Operating Range Time [hr]
Hours when the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the ITE is above the range specified by the
ITE Environmental Class.
1.13. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 523
1.13.11.1.76 ITE Air Inlet Dry-Bulb Temperature Difference Above Operating Range
[deltaC]
The temperature difference (in degrees DeltaC) between the air inlet dry-bulb temperature and the
maximum allowable dry-bulb temperature specified by the ITE Environmental Class. Only positive values
are reported. When the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the ITE is below the maximum specified
by the ITE Environmental Class, this output will be zero.
1.13.11.1.77 Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Dry-Bulb Temperature Below Operating Range
Time [hr]
1.13.11.1.78 ITE Air Inlet Dry-Bulb Temperature Below Operating Range Time [hr]
Hours when the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the ITE is above the range specified by the
ITE Environmental Class.
1.13.11.1.79 ITE Air Inlet Dry-Bulb Temperature Difference Below Operating Range
[deltaC]
The temperature difference (in degrees DeltaC) between the air inlet dry-bulb temperature and the
minimum allowable dry-bulb temperature specified by the ITE Environmental Class. Only negative values
are reported. When the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the ITE is above the minimum specified
by the ITE Environmental Class, this output will be zero.
1.13.11.1.80 Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature Above Operating Range
Time [hr]
1.13.11.1.81 ITE Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature Above Operating Range Time [hr]
Hours when the dewpoint temperature of the air entering the ITE is above the range specified by the
ITE Environmental Class.
1.13.11.1.82 ITE Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature Difference Above Operating Range
[deltaC]
The temperature difference (in degrees DeltaC) between the air inlet dewpoint temperature and the
maximum allowable dewpoint temperature specified by the ITE Environmental Class. Only positive values
are reported. When the dewpoint temperature of the air entering the ITE is below the maximum specified
by the ITE Environmental Class, this output will be zero.
1.13.11.1.83 Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature Below Operating Range
Time [hr]
1.13.11.1.84 ITE Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature Below Operating Range Time [hr]
Hours when the dewpoint temperature of the air entering the ITE is above the range specified by the
ITE Environmental Class.
524 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.13.11.1.85 ITE Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature Difference Below Operating Range
[deltaC]
The temperature difference (in degrees DeltaC) between the air inlet dewpoint temperature and the
minimum allowable dewpoint temperature specified by the ITE Environmental Class. Only negative values
are reported. When the dewpoint temperature of the air entering the ITE is above the minimum specified
by the ITE Environmental Class, this output will be zero.
1.13.11.1.86 Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Relative Humidity Above Operating Range Time
[hr]
1.13.11.1.87 ITE Air Inlet Relative Humidity Above Operating Range Time [hr]
Hours when the relative humidity of the air entering the ITE is above the range specified by the ITE
Environmental Class.
1.13.11.1.88 ITE Air Inlet Relative Humidity Difference Above Operating Range [%]
The temperature difference (in degrees DeltaC) between the air inlet relative humidity and the max-
imum allowable relative humidity specified by the ITE Environmental Class. Only positive values are
reported. When the relative humidity of the air entering the ITE is below the maximum specified by the
ITE Environmental Class, this output will be zero.
1.13.11.1.89 Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Relative Humidity Below Operating Range Time
[hr]
1.13.11.1.90 ITE Air Inlet Relative Humidity Below Operating Range Time [hr]
Hours when the relative humidity of the air entering the ITE is above the range specified by the ITE
Environmental Class.
1.13.11.1.91 ITE Air Inlet Relative Humidity Difference Below Operating Range [%]
The temperature difference (in degrees DeltaC) between the air inlet relative humidity and the minimum
allowable relative humidity specified by the ITE Environmental Class. Only negative values are reported.
When the relative humidity of the air entering the ITE is above the minimum specified by the ITE
Environmental Class, this output will be zero.
1.13.12 ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:CarbonDioxide
The ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:CarbonDioxide object allows users to input carbon dioxide sources
or sinks in a zone. Note that carbon dioxide generation within a zone can also be specified using People
and GasEquipment objects. Multiple ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:CarbonDioxide objects can be
specified for the same zone.
1.13. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 525
1.13.12.1 Inputs
1.13.12.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:CarbonDioxide object. The name for each ZoneCon-
taminantSourceAndSink:CarbonDioxide object must be unique.
ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink :CarbonDioxide ,
NORTH_ZONE CO2 , !- Name
NORTH_ZONE , !- Zone Name
1.e-6, !- Design Generation Rate {m3/s}
CO2 Source Schedule; !- Schedule Name
1.13.12.2 Outputs
HVAC,Average, Contaminant Source or Sink CO2 Gain Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
HVAC,Average, Zone Contaminant Source or Sink CO2 Gain Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.13.12.2.1 Contaminant Source or Sink CO2 Gain Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This output is the net carbon dioxide internal gain/loss in m3/s for an individual ZoneContami-
nantSourceAndSink:CarbonDioxide object.
1.13.12.2.2 Zone Contaminant Source or Sink CO2 Gain Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This output variable reports the total (net) carbon dioxide internal gains/losses in cubic meters per
second for a zone, including impacts from three objects: ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:CarbonDioxide,
People, and GasEquipment. Positive values denote carbon dioxide generation (gain or source), while
negative values denote carbon dioxide removal (loss or sink).
526 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.13.13 ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:Constant
The ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:Constant object specifies the generic contaminant genera-
tion rate and removal rate coefficient in a zone. The associated fraction schedules are required for allowing
users to change the magnitude of sources and sinks. The object is equivalent to the combination of the
constant coefficient model and the burst source model defined in the sources and sinks element types of
CONTAM 3.0. The basic equation used to calculate generic contaminant source and sink for the constant
model is given below:
where
Sf = Contaminant generic contaminant source strength [m3 /s]
Gf = Generic contaminant generation rate [m3 /s]
FG = Fraction value from the source fraction schedule at a given time [dimensionless]
Rf = Generic contaminant effective removal rate [m3 /s]
FR = Fraction value from the sink fraction schedule at a given time [dimensionless]
Cf = Generic contaminant concentration value at a given previous time step [ppm]
1.13.13.1 Inputs
1.13.13.1.1 Field: Name
This field represents a unique identifying name.
ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink :Generic:Constant ,
NORTH ZONE GC , !- Name
NORTH ZONE , !- Zone Name
1.0E-6, !- Design Generation Rate {m3/s}
GC Source Schedule , !- Generation Schedule Name
1.0E-7, !- Design Removal Coefficient {m3/s}
GC Removal Schedule; !- Removal Schedule Name
1.13.13.2 Outputs
When a ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:Constant object is specified, the following output vari-
ables are available:
ZONE,Average, Generic Air Contaminant Constant Source Generation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.13.13.2.1 Generic Air Contaminant Constant Source Generation Volume Flow Rate
[m3/s]
This output is the average generic contaminant generation rate from each ZoneContaminantSource-
AndSink:Generic:Constant object. The generation rate is a sum of generation and removal rates. The zone
air generic contaminant level at the previous zone time step is used in the removal rate calculation.
1.13.14 SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:PressureDriven
The SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:PressureDriven object specifies the generic contaminant
generation rate coefficient, which is used to calculate the generation rate due to the pressure difference
across the surface. The object is equivalent to the pressure driven model defined in the sources and
sinks element types of CONTAM 3.0. This object assumes to work with the AirflowNetwork model. The
surface has to be defined in the AirflowNetwork:Multizone:Surface. Although the model is designed to be
applied to radon and soil gas entry, it is expanded to be applied to all contaminant transport, including
generic contaminant. However, it should be used in caution. The basic equation used to calculate generic
contaminant source for the pressure driven constant model is provided below:
where
Sf = Generic contaminant source strength [m3 /s]
Hf = Generic contaminant generation rate coefficient [m3 /s]
FG = Fraction value from the source fraction schedule at a given time [dimensionless]
n = Flow power exponent
Pi = Zone pressure [Pa]
Pj = Pressure in an adjacent zone for a interior surface or outdoor for an exterior surface [Pa]
1.13.14.1 Inputs
1.13.14.1.1 Field: Name
The field signifies the unique identifying name.
1.13.14.2 Outputs
When a SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:PressureDriven object is specified, the following out-
put variables are available:
• ZONE,Average,Generic Air Contaminant Pressure Driven Generation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.13.14.2.1 Generic Air Contaminant Pressure Driven Generation Volume Flow Rate
[m3/s]
This output is the average generic contaminant generation rate from each SurfaceContaminantSource-
AndSink:Generic:PressureDriven object.
1.13.15 ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:CutoffModel
The ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic contaminant:CutoffModel object specifies the generic con-
taminant generation rate based on the cutoff concentration model. The basic equation used to calculate
generic contaminant source for the pressure driven constant model is given below:
{ ( ) }
Cf (t)
Gf (t) ∗ FG ∗ 1 − Ccutof f Cf < Ccutof f
Sf (t) = (1.28)
0 Cf ≥ Ccutof f
where
Sf = Generic contaminant source strength [m3 /s]
Gf = Generic contaminant generation rate [m3 /s]
FG = Fraction value from the source fraction schedule at a given time [dimensionless]
Ccutoff = Cutoff concentration at which emission ceases [ppm]
Cf = Generic contaminant concentration value at a given previous time step [ppm]
1.13.15.1 Inputs
1.13.15.1.1 Field: Name
The field signifies the unique identifying name.
1.13. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 529
1.13.15.2 Outputs
When a ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:CutoffModel object is specified, the following output
variables are available:
ZONE,Average, Generic Air Contaminant Cutoff Model Generation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.13.15.2.1 Generic Air Contaminant Cutoff Model Generation Volume Flow Rate
[m3/s]
This output is the average generic contaminant generation rate from each SurfaceContaminantSource-
AndSink:Generic:CutoffModel object.
1.13.16 ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:DecaySource
The ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:DecaySource object specifies the generic contaminant gen-
eration rate based on the decay source model. The basic equation used to calculate generic contaminant
source for the decay source model is given below:
1.13.16.1 Inputs
1.13.16.1.1 Field: Name
This field is the unique identifying name.
Note: The variable t, time since the start of emission, will be reset to zero, when a new run period
starts, or the generation schedule value is equal to zero.
1.13.16.2 Outputs
When a ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:DecaySource object is specified, the following output
variables are available:
• Zone,Average,Generic Air Contaminant Decay Model Generation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
• Zone,Average,Generic Air Contaminant Decay Model Generation Emission Start Elapsed Time [s]
1.13.16.2.1 Generic Air Contaminant Decay Model Generation Volume Flow Rate
[m3/s]
This output is the average generic contaminant decay rate from each SurfaceContaminantSourceAnd-
Sink:Generic:DecaySource object.
1.13. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 531
1.13.17 SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:BoundaryLayer-
Diffusion
The SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:BoundaryLayerDiffusion object specifies the generic con-
taminant generation rate from surface diffusion. The object is equivalent to the boundary layer diffusion
model driven model defined in the sources and sinks element types of CONTAM 3.0.
The boundary layer diffusion controlled reversible sink/source model with a linear sorption isotherm
follows the descriptions presented in [Axley 1991]. The boundary layer refers to the region above the
surface of a material through which a concentration gradient exists between the near-surface concentration
and the air-phase concentration. The rate at which a contaminant is transferred onto a surface (sink) is
defined as:
( )
Cs
Sf = h ∗ ρ ∗ A C f − ∗ 1.0E − 6 (1.30)
k
where
h = Average film mass transfer coefficient over the sink [m/s]
ρ = Film density of air [kg/m3 ]
A = Surface area of the adsorbent [m2 ]
Cf = Concentration in the air at the previous time step [ppm]
Cs = Concentration in the adsorbent [ppm]
k = Henry adsorption constant or partition coefficient [dimensionless]
1.13.17.1 Inputs
1.13.17.1.1 Field: Name
This field signifies a unique identifying name.
SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink :Generic:BoundaryLayerDiffusion ,
WEST ZONE GC BLD , !- Name
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Surface Name
1.0E-2, !- Mass Transfer Coefficient {m/s}
GC Source Schedule , !- Schedule Name
2.0; !- Henry adsorption constant or partition coefficient
1.13.17.2 Outputs
When a SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:BoundaryLayerDiffusion object is specified, the fol-
lowing output variables are available:
• ZONE,Average, Generic Air Contaminant Boundary Layer Diffusion Generation Volume Flow Rate
[m3/s]
• ZONE,Average, Generic Air Contaminant Boundary Layer Diffusion Inside Face Concentration [ppm]
1.13.17.2.2 Generic Air Contaminant Boundary Layer Diffusion Inside Face Concen-
tration [ppm]
This output is the average generic contaminant level at the interior surface.
1.13.18 SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:Deposition-
VelocitySink
The SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:DepositionVelocitySink object specifies the generic con-
taminant removal rate from a surface. The object is equivalent to the deposition velocity sink model
defined in CONTAM 3.0 sources and sinks element types.
The deposition velocity model provides for the input of a sink’s characteristic in the familiar term
of deposition velocity. The removal stops when the sink concentration level is higher than the zone air
concentration level. The deposition velocity model equation is:
where
Sf (t) = Removal rate at time t [m3 /s]
νd = Deposition velocity [m/s]
As = Deposition surface area [m2 ]
m = Element multiplier [dimensionless]
Cf (t) = Concentration of contaminant generic contaminant at the previous time step [ppm]
FR = Schedule or control signal value at time t [-]
1.13.18.1 Inputs
1.13.18.1.1 Field: Name
This field denotes a unique identifying name.
1.13. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 533
1.13.18.2 Outputs
The following output variables are available when the SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:-
DepositionVelocitySink object is specified.
• ZONE,Average, Generic Air Contaminant Deposition Velocity Removal Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.13.18.2.1 Generic Air Contaminant Deposition Velocity Removal Volume Flow Rate
[m3/s]
This output is the average generic contaminant generation rate from each SurfaceContaminantSource-
AndSink:Generic:DepositionVelocitySink object.
1.13.19 ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:DepositionRateSink
The ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:DepositionRateSink object specifies the generic contami-
nant removal rate from a zone. The object is equivalent to the deposition rate sink model defined in
CONTAM 3.0 sources and sinks element types.
The deposition rate model provides for the input of a sink’s characteristic in the familiar term of
deposition rate in a zone. The removal stops when the sink concentration level is higher than the zone air
concentration level. The deposition rate model equation is:
Where
Sf (t) = Removal rate at time t [m3 /s]
kd = Deposition rate [1/T]
Vz = Zone volume [m3 ]
m = Element multiplier [dimensionless]
C f (t) = Concentration of generic contaminant at the previous time step [ppm]
FR = Schedule or control signal value at time t [dimensionless]
534 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.13.19.1 Inputs
1.13.19.1.1 Field: Name
This field denotes a unique identifying name.
1.13.19.2 Outputs
When the ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:DepositionRateSink object is specified, the following
output variables are available:
• ZONE,Average, Generic Air Contaminant Deposition Rate Removal Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.13.19.2.1 Generic Air Contaminant Deposition Rate Removal Volume Flow Rate
[m3/s]
This output is the average generic contaminant generation rate from each ZoneContaminantSource-
AndSink:Generic:DepositionRateSink object.
1.13.20 ZoneBaseboard:OutdoorTemperatureControlled
This object specifies outside temperature-controlled (OTC) baseboard heating. The capacities (high and
low) are specified in W at the temperatures specified. The schedule allows both capacities to change hourly
on a proportional basis. This baseboard heater does not operate if the outdoor dry-bulb is above the high
temperature limit. Between the high temperature and the low temperature, the capacity is interpolated
(linear) between the high and the low capacity values. Below the low temperature, the capacity is set
at the low capacity value. This allows the user to add baseboard heat to a perimeter zone starting at a
prescribed temperature and then slowly increases this capacity to a max value.
Example:
> 10 0
10 100,000
8 180,000
6 260,000
4 340,000
2 420,000
0 500,000
<0 500,000
1.13.20.1 Inputs
1.13.20.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the ZoneBaseboard:OutdoorTemperatureControlled object.
1.13.20.2 Outputs
ZoneBaseboard:OutdoorTemperatureControlled objects have output variables for individual objects and
for zone totals. The following outputs are available:
1.13.20.3 Outputs
As described in each of the equipment sections, values for specific equipments will show up on the following
meters:
Note that two different methodologies are used in the Daylighting:Controls object (SplitFlux and
DElight) and may be intermixed in a single IDF but may not be used in the same zone.
1.14.1 Daylighting:Controls
When this object is used, daylighting illuminance levels are calculated and then used to determine how
much the electric lighting can be reduced. The daylight illuminance level in a zone depends on many
factors, including sky condition; sun position; calculation point; location, size, and glass transmittance
of windows; window shading devices; and reflectance of interior surfaces. Reduction of electric lighting
depends on daylight illuminance level, illuminance set point, fraction of zone controlled and type of lighting
control. Two different methods of computing the daylighitng illuminance and subsequent lighting reduction
called SplitFlux and DElight. After the object description below is are sections that describe the two
methodologies in more detail.
1.14.1.1 Inputs
1.14.1.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the Daylighting:Controls object.
For example, if Number of Steps = 3 and Illuminance Setpoint = 600, then the following table shows the
fraction of the lights that are on vs. daylight illuminance.
0-200 1.0
200-400 2/3
400-600 1/3
600 and above 0.0
Lighting Control Type set to ContinuousOff is the same similar to Lighting Control Type set to Con-
tinuous except that the lights switch off completely when the minimum dimming point is reached.
1.14.1.1.6 Field: Minimum Input Power Fraction for Continuous Dimming Control
For Lighting Control Type set to Continuous, the lowest power the lighting system can dim down to,
expressed as a fraction of maximum input power (see figure, below). For Lighting Control Type set to
ContinuousOff, this is the power fraction reached just before the lights switch off completely.
The figure shows the relationship between electric light output and electrical input.
1.14.1.1.7 Field: Minimum Light Output Fraction for Continuous Dimming Control
1.14. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 541
For Lighting Control Type set to Continuous, the lowest lighting output the lighting system can dim
down to, expressed as a fraction of maximum light output (see figure). This is the fractional light output
that the system produces at minimum input power. For Lighting Control Type set to ContinuousOff, this
is the light output fraction reached just before the lights switch off completely.
1.14.1.1.9 Field: Probability Lighting will be Reset When Needed in Manual Stepped
Control
May be specified if a stepped lighting control system (Lighting Control Type set to Stepped) is manually
operated, such as in a simple, one-step (on-off) system. Gives the probability the occupants of a daylit zone
will set the electric lights to the correct level to obtain the required illuminance. The rest of the time the
lights are assumed to be set one step too high. For example, consider an on-off lighting system (Number
of Steps = 1) with a set point of 600 lux and 0.7 reset probability. Then, when daylighting exceeds 600
lux, the electric lights will be off 70% of the time and on 30% of the time.
The Daylighting:ReferencePoint name should be specified that is used for determining the glare. Only
one reference point is used to calculate the glare. This input is only used in when the Daylighting Method
is set to SplitFlux. This input is ignored when Daylighting Method is set to DElight.
1.14.1.1.11 Field: Glare Calculation Azimuth Angle of View Direction Clockwise from
Zone y-Axis
Daylight glare from a window depends on occupant view direction. It is highest when you look directly
at a window and decreases as you look away from a window. This field specifies the view direction for
calculating glare. It is the angle, measured clockwise in the horizontal plane, between the zone y-axis and
the occupant view direction. This input is only used in when the Daylighting Method is set to SplitFlux.
This input is ignored when Daylighting Method is set to DElight.
Art Galleries 16
Factories: Rough work 28
Factories: Engine assembly 26
Factories: Fine assembly 24
Factories: Instrument assembly 22
Hospital wards 18
Laboratories 22
Museums 20
Offices 22
School classrooms 20
any Complex Fenestration System surfaces. It is advisable to perform at least one simulation of new input
using a small gridding resolution such as 0.1m2 to compare these results against simulation runs at lower
resolution (i.e., higher maximum area nodal grids) to get a sense of possible levels of error. This input
is only used in when the Daylighting Method is set to DElight. This input is ignored when Daylighting
Method is set to SplitFlux.
1.14.1.1.14 Field Set (reference point name, fraction controlled, illuminance setpoint)
This set of fields is used together and can be repeated an unlimited number of times to specify some
of the name of the reference point, the fraction of the zone lighting controlled by that reference point and
the illuminance setpoint that should be applied for daylighting control at that reference point.
1.14.2 Daylighting:ReferencePoint
This object is referenced by Daylighting:Controls to identify the reference point coordinates for each sensor.
The reference points in the zone are where horizontal daylighting illuminance will be calculated. It is
assumed that the photocells that control the overhead electric lighting respond to the light levels at the
specified coordinates. Reference points are given in coordinates specified in the GlobalGeometryRules
object Daylighting Reference Point CoordinateSystem field.
When the DElight Daylighting Method is used, there may be up to a maximum of 100 reference points
for each zone. Each Reference Point that is input does NOT need to be included in the control of the
electric lighting system within the zone. This is determined by the fraction of the zone controlled by each
Reference Point, which can be input as 0. Note when the DElight Daylighting Method is used, that the
sum of all Reference Point control fractions must equal 1 to obtain correct overall results.
1.14.2.1 Inputs
1.14.2.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the Daylighting:ReferencePoint object.
Figure 1.74: Example showing location of daylighting reference points in the zone coordinate system
(relative) of a rectangular zone with three windows. (a) Perspective view, (b) plan view, (c) elevation
view. All dimensions are in meters.
An IDF example:
Daylighting:Controls ,
West Zone_DaylCtrl , !- Name
West Zone , !- Zone Name
SplitFlux , !- Daylighting Method
, !- Availability Schedule Name
1.14. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 545
Daylighting:ReferencePoint ,
West Zone_DaylRefPt1 , !- Name
West Zone , !- Zone Name
3.048 , !- X-Coordinate of Reference Point {m}
3.048 , !- Y-Coordinate of Reference Point {m}
0.9; !- Z-Coordinate of Reference Point {m}
tively (ref: BuildingSurface:Detailed). Similarly, if the ceiling and floor of Room-1 are interior surfaces,
they should be treated as adiabatic.
Figure 1.75: For daylighting purposes the thermal zone enclosed by the dashed boundary line should
be modeled as a typical zone (Room-1) with a zone multiplier of 4.
Sometimes a representative room cannot be found. Figure 1.76 shows a section of a building with
four rooms having different daylighting characteristics because of different floor area, orientation and/or
window size. In this case lumping the rooms into a single thermal zone would give nonsensical daylighting
illuminance values because of the presence of the interior walls, which EnergyPlus ignores when calculating
illuminance reaching a reference point directly from a window (i.e., without reflection). The solution in
this case is to describe each room as a separate thermal zone with its own daylighting reference points,
and input the interior walls because these will participate in the calculation of inter-reflected illuminance.
• Fins, overhangs, trees, neighboring buildings, etc., entered with the objects Shading:Zone:Detailed,
Shading:Site:Detailed, or Shading:Building:Detailed.
• Building surfaces like walls and roofs (in an L-shaped building, for example).
Category (1) obstructions can have an associated solar transmittance schedule (see description of the
field Transmittance Schedule Name for these shading surfaces). If this schedule is not specified, the surface
is opaque (has zero transmittance).
1.14. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 547
Figure 1.76: Rooms A, B, C and D have different daylighting characteristics. If lumped into a
single thermal zone the daylighting calculation will be less accurate because the blockage of direct
light by the interior walls between these rooms is modeled with some simplifications (see Interior
Obstructions below). To get a good daylighting calculation each room should be input as a separate
thermal zone.
Figure 1.77: Two independently-controlled lighting zones, each with 50% of the area of the thermal
zone.
548 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
The daylighting calculation takes the transmittance into account in determining, for example, how much
light enters a window through a translucent awning. It is assumed that the solar and visible transmittance
is the same and that the surfaces are non-diffusing, i.e., they do not change the direction of transmitted
light. Ref:Daylighting:Controls.
Category (2) and (3) surfaces are assumed to be opaque.
Surfaces in all three categories are assumed to be black, i.e., they do not reflect light, unless you set
if “Reflections” option is chosen in the Building object. Then obstructions can reflect light, such as the
top of an overhang reflecting light onto the window above. Ref: Building, Field: Solar Distribution (with
reflections options).
Figure 1.78: Wall A (or Wall B) is an interior obstruction that prevents light from directly reaching
the daylighting reference point from the window.
1.14. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 549
• Daylight that passes through both an exterior window and an interior window in Z0 and reaches a
reference point without reflection. This is called “direct illuminance.”
• Daylight from Z0 that passes through an interior window and reaches a reference point by inter-
reflection in the daylit zone. Because the program calculates this source from the interior solar
distribution in Z0 it is recommended that the most accurate calculation of this distribution be made,
which occurs if Solar Distribution = FullInteriorAndExterior in the Building object.
A third possible source is neglected because it is generally small in double-façade cases. This is daylight
that is reflected from the surfaces of Z0, passes through an interior window and then reaches a reference
point without inter-reflection in the daylit zone.
PurchAirWithDoubleFacadeDaylighting.idf is an input example of daylighting through an interior win-
dow.
Figure 1.79: Vertical section through a double-façade building showing daylighting through interior
windows. The dashed lines show that (1) reference point RP1 receives direct light from exterior
window EW1 via interior window IW1; (2) RP2 receives direct light from EW1 and EW2 via IW2;
and (3) RP3 receives direct light from EW2 via IW3.
550 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Figure 1.80: General configuration of daylighting through interior windows that can be calculated
with EnergyPlus. IW = interior window, EW = exterior window.
Figure 1.81: Configuration in which daylighting of zone Z through its interior window cannot be
calculated with EnergyPlus. IW = interior window, EW = exterior window.
1.14.5 Daylighting:DELight:ComplexFenestration
Another input object that can only be used when the DElight Daylighting Method is used is the Day-
lighting:DElight:ComplexFenestration object. The DElight daylighting analysis method can be applied to
daylighting zones that contain only simple fenestration systems such as windows and skylights that are
standard EnergyPlus sub-surfaces. In this situation, no Daylighting:DElight:ComplexFenestration object
would be input.
In addition to analyzing simple fenestration systems, DElight includes the capability of analyzing
complex fenestration systems such as geometrically complicated static shading systems (e.g., roof monitors)
and/or optically complicated glazings (e.g., prismatic or holographic glass). This capability is based on
characterizing these complex fenestration systems (CFS) using bi-directional transmittance distribution
functions (BTDF). In general, BTDF data for a specific CFS must be either measured or simulated (e.g.,
using ray-tracing techniques) prior to employing DElight to analyze it within EnergyPlus. The current
implementation of DElight CFS calculations within EnergyPlus supports two approaches to the input of
BTDF, an analytical approach and a file-based approach. The details of inputting these two approaches
are described below under the User Complex Fenestration Type field.
Two analytical CFS BTDF types are currently supported, window and light shelf. The file-based
approach requires that a user has access to a data file containing raw BTDF data that DElight reads
as additional input during its analysis calculations. BTDF data files are described separately since it is
anticipated that individual EnergyPlus users will not create these data files themselves.
The methods related to characterizing and analyzing CFS using BTDF are still evolving. DElight is
an early implementation of CFS analysis methods. These methods, and the input associated with them
here, will likely change in the future.
1.14.5.1 Inputs
1.14.5.1.1 Field: User Name
User name of the DElight daylighting Complex Fenestration to which the following input applies.
BTDF^FILE^Filename
The first form above is for supported analytical CFS types which currently include WINDOW and
LIGHTSHELF. While these analytical types are relatively simple, they represent flexible ways to explore
diffusing CFS systems and the impact of light shelves in redirecting light through an aperture. Each of these
types also requires the visible transmittance of the CFS at normal incidence angle, and a dispersion angle
(in degrees) that represents the “spread” of transmitted light. A small dispersion angle of 10 corresponds
to clear glazing while a large angle of 90 corresponds to perfectly diffusing glazing. The “ˆ” symbol must
be used as a delimiter between sub-fields within this Complex Fenestration type name string as shown in
the IDF example for WINDOW below, and in the DElight sample input data files.
The second form above is for CFS types for which there is pre-measured or pre-simulated BTDF data.
In this case the Filename sub-field must be a valid data file name that is associated with an existing BTDF
dataset that DElight can use in its calculations.
The name of the heat transfer surface object instance hosting this Complex Fenestration, analogous
to the Building Surface Name field for subsurfaces such as Windows. This must be a valid name that has
been associated with a heat transfer surface contained in the same EnergyPlus input data file.
Daylighting:DELight:ComplexFenestration ,
Window CFS , !- DElight Complex Fenestration User Name
BTDF^GEN^WINDOW ^1.0^20.0 , !- Complex Fenestration Type
ZN003:WALL001 , !- Complex Fenestration Host Surface
Zn003:Wall001:Doppel001 , !- Doppelganger Surface Name
0.0; !- Fenestration Rotation {deg}
1.14.5.2 Outputs
In addition to the daylighting-specific outputs for DElight listed below, two ASCII text files are created
during an EnergyPlus run that includes DElight analysis. Following completion of an EnergyPlus run,
these files are given names that consist of the project name appended with DElight.in and DElight.out. The
format of these files is described in the Output Details and Examples document.
Zone,Average,Daylighting Reference Point Illuminance [lux]
Zone,Average,Daylighting Lighting Power Multiplier []
1.14.5.3 Outputs
The following daylighting-specific outputs are available for Daylighting:Controls:
• Zone,Sum,Daylighting Reference Point <x> Glare Index Setpoint Exceeded Time [hr]
• Zone,Sum,Daylighting Reference Point <x> Daylight Illuminance Setpoint Exceeded Time [hr]
1.14.5.3.12 Daylighting Reference Point <x> Glare Index Setpoint Exceeded Time
[hr]
The number of hours when the calculated daylight glare index at the first reference point exceeds the
glare index setpoint.
1.14.6 Output:IlluminanceMap
The Output:IlluminanceMap object expands on the reporting capabilities of the daylighting simulation.
For any zone simulated with Daylighting:Controls, the illuminance map can generate up to 2,500 points of
additional daylighting illuminance values. The resulting map is output as a comma delimited text file that
can be imported into a spreadsheet program for rapid visualization of the daylighting illuminance patterns
in a zone. The values are produced on an hourly basis. The Z height of the map is constant (parallel to a
556 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
flat floor). More than one illuminance map can be created for a zone. IlluminanceMap output is available
only when SplitFlux daylighting method is selected in Daylighting:Controls object.
1.14.6.1 Inputs
1.14.6.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the map object.
Output:IlluminanceMap ,
Daylit Map , ! Map Name
Daylit Zone , ! Zone Name
0, ! Z Height [m]
0.1, ! X Minimum Coordinate [m]
4.9, ! X Maximum Coordinate [m]
10, ! Number of X Grid Points
0.1, ! Y Minimum Coordinate [m]
9.9, ! Y Maximum Coordinate [m]
10; ! Number of Y grid Points
1.14. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 557
Since not all zones are rectangular, it is possible to have map points that are outside the zone. Any
illuminance registered at these points is inaccurate and, additionally, a “*” marks these values for easy
observance.
1.14.7 OutputControl:IlluminanceMap:Style
This object specifies the “style” for the illuminance map output (described in the Output Details and
Examples document). As described early in the document (see: EnergyPlus Output Processing), the user
may select the “style” for the daylighting illuminance map output file (eplusmap.<ext>).
1.14.7.1 Inputs
1.14.7.1.1 Field: Column Separator
For this field, the desired separator for columns is entered. “Comma” creates comma separated field-
s/columns in the outputs (eplusmap.csv file is created). “Tab” creates tab separated fields/columns in
the outputs (eplusmap.tab file is created). “Fixed” creates space separated fields/columns in the outputs
(eplusmap.txt file is created) but these are not necessarily lined up for easy printing.
Note that both tab and comma separated files easily import into Excel™ or other spreadsheet programs.
The tab delimited files can also be viewed by text editors, word processing programs and easily converted
to “tables” within those programs.
1.14.9 DaylightingDevice:Tubular
Tubular daylighting devices (TDDs), also known as tubular skylights or light pipes, are used to bring
natural exterior daylight into the hard-to-reach, interior spaces of a building.
TDDs consist of three components: a dome, a pipe, and a diffuser.
In EnergyPlus each of these components corresponds to an object in the input file.
The dome and diffuser are defined in the same way as windows using the FenestrationSurface:Detailed
object. The Surface Type field must be specified as TubularDaylightDome or TubularDaylightDiffuser
accordingly.
The location and orientation of the dome surface affect the total amount of daylight collected.
The Base Surface of the diffuser object determines to which zone the daylighting is delivered. The
location and orientation of the diffuser surface affect the amount of daylight received at the Daylight-
ing:Controls reference points.
Although the object definition is the same as for a window, there are several restrictions on Tubular-
DaylightDome and TubularDaylightDiffuser objects:
• Dome, diffuser, and pipe areas (as given by diameter) must be approximately equal.
Since commercial TDDs are assumed to be cylindrical in shape, it is recommended that the circular
areas of the actual dome and diffuser be approximated with a square of equivalent area for the Tubular-
DaylightDome and TubularDaylightDiffuser objects. Although it is possible to use a triangular surface
instead, a square is a much better geometric approximation of a circle.
Note that the TubularDaylightDome surface is allowed to have a different position and tilt from the roof
base surface. If the actual TDD projects some height above the roof surface, the TubularDaylightDome
coordinates should be located accordingly.
The TubularDaylightDome surface automatically casts a shadow on the roof base surface. However,
since the pipe is not represented by a surface, it will not cast a shadow. If this effect must be simulated,
one or more SURFACE:SHADING objects can be used.
The dome and diffuser objects are connected by the DAYLIGHTING DEVICE:TUBULAR object:
1.14.9.1 Inputs
1.14.9.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the TDD object.
1.14. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 559
FenestrationSurface:Detailed ,
Dome1 , !- Subsurface Name
TubularDaylightDome , !- Surface Type
Clear Acrylic Dome , !- Construction Name (only 1 layer allowed in construction)
Attic Roof , !- Base Surface Name
, !- Outside Face Environment (not allowed for TubularDaylightDome )
0.0, !- VF to Ground
, !- Window Shading Control (not allowed for TubularDaylightDome )
, !- Frame/Divider Name (not allowed for TubularDaylightDome )
1.0, !- Multiplier (must be 1.0 for TubularDaylightDome )
4, !- Number of Vertices
2.3425 , 3.1575 , 3.9,
2.3425 , 2.8425 , 3.9,
2.6575 , 2.8425 , 3.9,
2.6575 , 3.1575 , 3.9;
FenestrationSurface:Detailed ,
Diffuser1 , !- Subsurface Name
TubularDaylightDiffuser , !- Surface Type
Frosted Acrylic Diffuser , !- Construction Name (only 1 layer allowed in construction)
Daylit Zone Ceiling , !- Base Surface Name
, !- Outside Face Environment (not allowed for TubularDaylightDiffuser )
0.0, !- VF to Ground
, !- Window Shading Control (not allowed for TubularDaylightDiffuser )
, !- Frame/Divider Name (not allowed for TubularDaylightDiffuser )
1.0, !- Multiplier (must be 1.0 for TubularDaylightDiffuser )
4, !- Number of Vertices
2.3425 , 3.1575 , 2.5,
2.3425 , 2.8425 , 2.5,
2.6575 , 2.8425 , 2.5,
2.6575 , 3.1575 , 2.5;
1.14.9.2 Outputs
• Zone,Average,Tubular Daylighting Device Transmitted Solar Radiation Rate [W]
1.14.9.2.7 Tubular Daylighting Device Pipe Absorbed Solar Radiation Rate [W]
This is the rate at which solar radiation is absorbed by the pipe in the TDD, in Watts.
• Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
• Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
• Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Ground Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
• Zone,Average,Surface Window Total Glazing Layers Absorbed Solar Radiation Rate [W]
• Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2] (incident inside
of pipe)
• Zone,Average,Surface Window Transmitted Solar Radiation Rate [W] (same as Tubular Daylighting
Device Transmitted Solar Radiation Rate)
• Zone,Average,Surface Window Total Glazing Layers Absorbed Solar Radiation Rate [W]
1.14.10 DaylightingDevice:Shelf
Daylighting shelves, or simply light shelves, are another device for bringing more daylight into a building.
Installed as an accessory to a window, daylighting shelves work by reflecting exterior light onto the ceiling
of a room. Daylighting shelves can have an inside shelf, an outside shelf, or both.
The inside shelf redistributes light that would have entered the zone anyway. Instead of entering as a
beam, all light is reflected onto the zone ceiling and is converted to diffuse shortwave radiation.
The outside shelf changes the amount of light entering the zone. If the shelf surface is more reflective
than the ground, it can increase the amount of light incident on the upper part of the window. However,
the shading effect of the outside shelf on the lower part of the window must also be considered as it can
easily negate any gain achieved in the upper part of the window. All light reflected from the outside shelf
that enters the upper window is assumed to strike the ceiling.
In EnergyPlus a daylighting shelf is simulated using a DaylightingDevice:Shelf object in combination
with up to three other objects: a window, a heat transfer surface, and an attached shading surface.
The window must be divided into two window surfaces: an upper window and a lower window. The
upper window interacts directly with the daylighting shelf object and is not allowed to have any shading
control devices or frames or dividers. The lower window does not interact with the daylighting shelf object,
but does receive shading from the outside shelf. There are no restrictions on the lower window.
1.14. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 563
The inside shelf is defined as a regular heat transfer surface in the zone. However, the surface must
have the Outside Boundary Condition field set to Surface with itself as the other zone surface. Shading
and thermal mass effects are taken into account.
The outside shelf is defined as a Shading:Zone:Detailed object. The visible and solar absorptance of
the outside material layer determines the reflectivity of the shelf.
NOTE: Unlike a regular Shading:Zone:Detailed object, the vertices of the outside shelf surface
must be ordered so that the outward normal vector points upward, i.e. toward the upper window.
This is necessary in order for the outside shelf to properly receive sunlight and shading from other
surfaces. A mirror shading surface with the outward normal vector pointing in the opposite direction
is automatically created by the program to shade the lower window.
The inside shelf and outside shelf are both optional. However, if neither shelf is specified, the daylighting
shelf object has no effect on the simulation.
1.14.10.1 Inputs
1.14.10.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the daylighting shelf object.
NOTE: It is up to the user to adjust the view factor to ground of the upper window to account
for the part of the view blocked by the outside shelf. The calculated View Factor To Outside Shelf is
reported in the eio file for this purpose. For the typical case where the shelf is parallel to the ground
and the upper window is perpendicular to the ground, the view factor to ground is simply: 0.5 – View
Factor To Outside Shelf.
DaylightingDevice:Shelf ,
Shelf , !- Name
Daylit Upper Window , !- Window Name
Inside Shelf , !- Inside Shelf Name
Outside Shelf , !- Outside Shelf Name
Shelf Construction; !- Outside Shelf Construction Name (required if outside shelf specified)
! 0.29; !- View Factor To Outside Shelf (optional)
FenestrationSurface:Detailed ,
Daylit Upper Window , !- Subsurface Name
Window , !- Surface Type
Standard Window , !- Construction Name
Daylit South Wall , !- Base Surface Name
, !- Outside Face Environment
0.211 , !- VF to Ground (user must adjust to account for view factor to outside shelf)
, !- Window Shading Control (not allowed)
, !- Frame/Divider Name (not allowed)
1.0, !- Multiplier (must be 1.0)
4, !- Number of Vertices
1.0, 0.0, 2.8,
1.0, 0.0, 2.0,
4.0, 0.0, 2.0,
4.0, 0.0, 2.8;
BuildingSurface:Detailed ,
Inside Shelf , !- Surface Name
Wall , !- Surface Type
Shelf Construction , !- Construction Name
Daylit Zone , !- Zone Name
OtherZoneSurface , !- Exterior Conditions (must be OtherZoneSurface )
Inside Shelf , !- Target (must be itself)
NoSun , !- Solar Exposure
1.14. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 565
Shading:Zone:Detailed ,
Outside Shelf , !- Surface Name
Daylit South Wall , !- Base Surface Name
, !- Shading Transmittance Schedule (default is always opaque)
4, !- Number of Vertices
1.0, 0.0, 2.0, !- Outward normal vector must point up toward the upper window
1.0, -1.0, 2.0,
4.0, -1.0, 2.0,
4.0, 0.0, 2.0;
1.14.10.2 Outputs
The view factor to outside shelf calculation shows up in the .eio file along with the associated window and
window view factors to sky and ground:
! <Shelf Details>,Name,View Factor to Outside Shelf,Window Name,Window View Factor to
Sky,Window View Factor to Ground
SHELF,0.29,DAYLIT UPPER WINDOW,0.50,0.21
This variable reports the calculated View Factor To Outside Shelf so that the user can correctly adjust
the view factor to ground of the upper window.
The usual window and surface variables are relevant for the upper window:
• Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
• Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
• Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Ground Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
• Zone,Average,Surface Window Total Glazing Layers Absorbed Solar Radiation Rate [W]
The following surface variables are reported for the outside shelf surface, if specified:
• Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
• Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
• Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Ground Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
• Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Beam Solar Incident Angle Cosine Value[]
1.14.11 DaylightingDevice:LightWell
This object is used to model the impacts on daylighting of a “light well” that might be associated with
exterior windows such as skylights. The light well model attenuates the light transmitted by the skylight.
The attenuation is characterized by the well efficiency, which is the ratio of the amount of light leaving
the well to the amount of light entering the well. The well efficiency varies from close to 1.0 to close to
zero if there is high attenuation. The well efficiency is used only in the EnergyPlus detailed daylighting
calculation, where it multiplies the beam and diffuse light transmitted by the skylight. (The well efficiency
is not used in calculating the solar gain through the skylight.)
The input object describes the light well using basic characteristics of the geometry along with the visible
reflectance of the well’s side walls. The following figure diagrams how the geometry is characterized.
Figure 1.86: Skylight with light well: (a) perspective view, (b) vertical section. If the bottom of the
light well is a rectangle of side lengths c and d, as shown in (a), then the perimeter of the bottom
of the well = 2(c+d) and the area = cd (see description of field names for the Light Well object).
1.14.11.1 Inputs
1.14.11.1.1 Field: Exterior Window Name
The name of the exterior window that this Light Well is associated with. Generally this is a skylight in
a roof. However, light wells can be applied to an exterior window of any slope. Light wells can be assigned
to both rectangular and triangular exterior windows, but they should not be assigned to interior windows.
Note that the sides of the light well can be sloped and the bottom of the light well can be any shape,
not just rectangular.
[1] Formerly, only the exterior windows in a zone could provide daylight to that zone.
1.15.1 Exterior:Lights
1.15.1.1 Inputs
1.15.1.1.1 Field: Name
This descriptive name allows the values of exterior lights consumption to appear in the “normal” output
variable list as well as the meters. It cannot be blank nor can it be duplicated by other Exterior:Lights
statements.
Exterior:Lights ,
OutsideLights , !- Name
ON , !- SCHEDULE Name
1000, !- Design Level
AstronomicalClock , !- Control Option
Grounds Lights; !- End -Use Subcategory
1.15.1.2 Outputs
Output for exterior lights appears in three possible places. It will appear on two meters (Electricity:Facility
and ExteriorLights:Electricity) as well as in its own designated value in the standard output file.
Output for exterior lights appears in three possible places. It will appear on two meters (Electric-
ity:Facility and ExteriorLights:Electricity) as well as in its own designated value in the standard output
file.
• Zone,Average,Exterior Lights Electric Power [W]
• Zone,Sum,Exterior Lights Electric Energy [J]
1.15.2 Exterior:FuelEquipment
1.15.2.1 Inputs
1.15.2.1.1 Field: Name
This descriptive name allows the values of exterior equipment consumption to appear in the “nor-
mal” output variable list as well as the meters. It cannot be blank nor can it be duplicated by other
Exterior:FuelEquipment or Exterior:WaterEquipment statements.
570 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.15.3 Exterior:WaterEquipment
1.15.3.1 Inputs
1.15.3.1.1 Field: Name
This descriptive name allows the values of exterior equipment consumption to appear in the “nor-
mal” output variable list as well as the meters. It cannot be blank nor can it be duplicated by other
Exterior:FuelEquipment or Exterior:WaterEquipment statements.
Exterior:WaterEquipment ,
OutsideWaterEq , !- Name
Water , !- Fuel Use Type
ON , !- Schedule Name
1000.0 , !- Design Level
General; !- End -Use Subcategory
1.15.3.2 Outputs
Output for exterior equipment consumption appears in three possible places. It will appear on two meters
(Fuel Type:Facility and ExteriorEquipment:Fuel Type) as well as in its own designated value in the standard
output file, Exterior Equipment Fuel Type Energy. Consumption also appears on any user-defined end-use
subcategory meters, i.e., End-Use Subcategory:ExteriorEquipment:Fuel Type. All outputs are in [J] except
water consumption which is in [m3]. There are also rate versions
1.16.1 ZoneInfiltration:DesignFlowRate
Infiltration is the unintended flow of air from the outdoor environment directly into a thermal zone.
Infiltration is generally caused by the opening and closing of exterior doors, cracks around windows, and
even in very small amounts through building elements. The basic equation used to calculate infiltration
with this object is:
( ) [ ( )]
Infiltration = Idesign (Fschedule ) A + B |(Tzone − Todb )| + C (WindSpeed) + D Windspeed2 (1.33)
More advanced infiltration calculations are possible using the EnergyPlus AirflowNetwork model for
natural infiltration driven by wind and/or by forced air. Infiltration described by the equation shown
above is entered into EnergyPlus using the following syntax. Exfiltration (the leakage of zone air to the
outside) is generally handled better as zone exhaust air in the zone equipment description. The equation
must always yield a non-negative results; negative values are set to 0.0.
The question of typical values for these coefficients is subject to debate. Ideally, one should do a detailed
analysis of the infiltration situation and then determine a custom set of coefficients using methods such as
those laid out in Chapter 26 of the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. The EnergyPlus defaults are
1,0,0,0 which give a constant volume flow of infiltration under all conditions.
1.16. GROUP – AIRFLOW 573
BLAST (one of the EnergyPlus predecessors) used the following values as defaults: 0.606, 0.03636,
0.1177, 0. These coefficients produce a value of 1.0 at 0C deltaT and 3.35 m/s (7.5 mph) windspeed, which
corresponds to a typical summer condition. At a winter condition of 40C deltaT and 6 m/s (13.4 mph)
windspeed, these coefficients would increase the infiltration rate by a factor of 2.75.
In DOE-2 (the other EnergyPlus predecessor), the air change method defaults are (adjusted to SI units)
0, 0, 0.224 (windspeed), 0. With these coefficients, the summer conditions above would give a factor of
0.75, and the winter conditions would give 1.34. A windspeed of 4.47 m/s (10 mph) gives a factor of 1.0.
The source of the BLAST defaults is noted in the BLAST documentation as:
“Empirical equation and the coefficient default were determined from ASHRAE journal articles and
other data on the effects of outdoor weather conditions.”
The source of the DOE-2 defaults is based on examining the infiltration relationships described in the
ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.
The EnergyPlus example files use all of the above, the BLAST defaults in some (e.g., GeometryTest),
the DOE-2 defaults in some (e.g., 5ZoneAirCooled), and the EnergyPlus defaults in some (e.g., LgOff-
VAVDetCoil).
The local outdoor dry-bulb temperature used in the above basic equation (Todb ) is typically a function
of the height of the zone centroid above ground. The corresponding zone name is given in the second field.
The local outdoor dry-bulb temperature calculation procedure is given in the section of “Local Outdoor
Air Temperature Calculation” in the Engineering Reference.
The local outdoor wind speed used in the above basic equation (WindSpeed) is also a function of the
height of the zone centroid above ground. The corresponding zone name is given in the second filed. The
local outdoor wind speed calculation procedure is given in the section of “Local Wind Speed Calculation”
in the Engineering Reference.
Note: When the value of the Wind Speed Profile Exponent field in the Site:HeightVariation is equal
to 0.0. The local wind speed is always equal to the wind speed given in the weather data and will
not be dependent on zone centroid height. Similarly, if the value of the Air Temperature Gradient
Coefficient is set equal to 0 the local air dry-bulb temperature is also always equal to the air dry-bulb
temperature given in the weather data and will not be dependent on zone centroid height.
One or more infiltration objects can be defined for each zone, and the resulting infiltration rate for the
zone will simply be the summation of the flow rates specified by the infiltration objects.
1.16.1.1 Inputs
1.16.1.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the ZoneInfiltration:DesignFlowRate object. This needs to be unique across all different
ZoneInfiltration objects.
greater than this standard length, it may be difficult to specify in output reporting as it will be truncated.
A warning will be shown if the generated name is greater than 100 characters. If it duplicates another
such concatenated name, there will be a severe error and terminate the run.
• Flow/Zone
With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the design volume flow rate. (The
Design Flow Rate field should be filled.)
• Flow/Area
With this choice, the method used will be a factor per floor area of the zone. (The flow per Zone Area
field should be filled).
• Flow/ExteriorArea
With this choice, the method used will be a factor per exterior surface area of the zone. (The flow per
Exterior Surface Area field should be filled).
• Flow/ExteriorWallArea
With this choice, the method used will be a factor per exterior wall surface area of the zone. (The flow
per Exterior Surface Area field should be filled).
• AirChanges/Hour
With this choice, the method used will be the number of air changes per hour for the infiltration
amount. This factor, along with the Zone Volume, will be used to determine the Design Flow Rate. (The
Air Changes per Hour field should be filled).
ZoneInfiltration:DesignFlowRate ,
Infiltration 1, !- Name
DORM ROOMS AND COMMON AREAS , !- Zone Name
Infiltration Sch , !- Schedule Name
Flow/Zone , !- Design Flow Rate Calculation Method
2.831685 , !- Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Flow per Zone Floor Area {m3/s/m2}
, !- Flow per Exterior Surface Area {m3/s/m2}
, !- Air Changes per Hour
0.6060000 , !- Constant Term Coefficient
3.6359996E-02, !- Temperature Term Coefficient
0.1177165 , !- Velocity Term Coefficient
0.0000000E+00; !- Velocity Squared Term Coefficient
ZoneInfiltration:DesignFlowRate ,
OfficeZones Infiltration , !- Name
OfficeZones , !- Zone or ZoneList Name
Infiltration Sch , !- Schedule Name
AirChanges/Hour , !- Design Flow Rate Calculation Method
576 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.16.2 ZoneInfiltration:EffectiveLeakageArea
ZoneInfiltration:EffectiveLeakageArea model is similar to the other infiltration objects but uses a differ-
ent equation to model the unintended flow of air from the outdoor environment directly into a thermal
zone. Infiltration is generally caused by the opening and closing of exterior doors, cracks around windows,
and even in very small amounts through building elements. This model is based on work by Sherman and
Grimsrud (1980) and is appropriate for smaller, residential-type buildings. The equation used to calculate
infiltration in the effective leakage area model is:
√
AL
Inf iltration = (FSchedule ) Cs ∆T + Cw (W indSpeed)2 (1.34)
1000
where ∆T is the average difference between zone air temperature and the outdoor air temperature
and the other coefficients are described below.
Note that the coefficients for the “EffectiveLeakageArea” model are not interchangeable with the sim-
ilarly named coefficients in the “FlowCoefficient” model (see ZoneInfiltration:FlowCoefficient object).
One or more infiltration objects of different types can be defined for each zone, and the resulting
infiltration rate for the zone will simply be the summation of the flow rates specified by the infiltration
objects.
1.16.2.1 Inputs
1.16.2.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the ZoneInfiltration:EffectiveLeakageArea object. This needs to be unique across all
different ZoneInfiltration objects.
Shelter class One story house Two story house Three story house
ZoneInfiltration:EffectiveLeakageArea ,
LIVING ZONE Infil 1, !- Name
LIVING ZONE , !- Zone Name
INF -SCHED , !- Schedule Name
500.0 , !- Effective Air Leakage Area
0.000145 , !- Stack Coefficient
0.000174 ; !- Wind Coefficient
1.16.3 ZoneInfiltration:FlowCoefficient
ZoneInfiltration:FlowCoefficient model is similar to the other infiltration objects but uses a different equa-
tion to model the unintended flow of air from the outdoor environment directly into a thermal zone. Infil-
tration is generally caused by the opening and closing of exterior doors, cracks around windows, and even
in very small amounts through building elements. This reformulated model is based on the AIM-2 model
578 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
by Walker and Wilson (1998) and is appropriate for smaller, residential-type buildings. The equation used
to calculate infiltration in the flow coefficient model is:
√ ( ) 2
Inf iltration = (FSchedule ) (c Cs ∆T n )2 + c Cw (s ∗ W indSpeed)2n (1.35)
Where ∆T is the average difference between zone air temperature and the outdoor air temperature
and the other coefficients are described below.
Note that the coefficients for the “Flow Coefficient” model are not interchangeable with the simi-
larly named coefficients in the “Effective Leakage Area” model (see ZoneInfiltration:EffectiveLeakageArea
object).
One or more infiltration objects of different types can be defined for each zone, and the resulting
infiltration rate for the zone will simply be the summation of the flow rates specified by the infiltration
objects.
1.16.3.1 Inputs
1.16.3.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the ZoneInfiltration:FlowCoefficient object. This needs to be unique across all different
ZoneInfiltration objects.
This field is the value of the wind coefficient, Cw in the equation above. The coefficient has units of
(Pa·s2 /m2 )n . Values for the “Enhanced Model Wind Coefficient” listed in the ASHRAE Handbook of
Fundamentals (2005 and 2001) are:
Shelter class No Flue One story house with flue Two story house with flue Three story house with flue
ZoneInfiltration:FlowCoefficient ,
LIVING ZONE Infil 1, !- Name
LIVING ZONE , !- Zone Name
INF -SCHED , !- Schedule Name
0.05, !- Flow Coefficient
0.089 , !- Stack Coefficient
0.67 , !- Pressure Exponent
0.156 , !- Wind Coefficient
0.64; !- Shelter Factor
580 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.16.3.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Sum,Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]
1.16.4 ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate
Ventilation is the purposeful flow of air from the outdoor environment directly into a thermal zone in
order to provide some amount of non-mechanical cooling. Ventilation, as specified by the input syntax
for the ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate object, is intended to model “simple” ventilation as opposed to
the more detailed ventilation investigations that can be performed with the AirflowNetwork model or with
air systems that have outdoor air mixers. Zone ventilation, as specified via this input object, can be
controlled by a schedule and through the specification of minimum, maximum and delta temperatures
as described below. The temperatures can be either single constant values for the entire simulation or
schedules which can vary over time. As with infiltration, the actual flow rate of ventilation air can be
modified by the temperature difference between the inside and outside environment and the wind speed.
The basic equation used to calculate ventilation with this model is:
[ ( )]
V entilation = (Vdesign ) (Fschedule ) A + B |Tzone − Todb | + C (W indSpeed) + D W indSpeed2 (1.36)
Similar to infiltration, the question of typical values for these coefficients is subject to debate. Ideally,
one should do a detailed analysis of the ventilation situation and then determine a custom set of coefficients
using methods such as those laid out in Chapter 26 of the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. The
EnergyPlus defaults are 1,0,0,0 which give a constant volume flow of ventilation under all conditions. The
following discussion is duplicated from the infiltration design flow rate object. The equation must always
yield a non-negative results; negative values are set to 0.0.
582 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
BLAST (one of the EnergyPlus predecessors) used the following values as defaults: 0.606, 0.03636,
0.1177, 0. These coefficients produce a value of 1.0 at 0C deltaT and 3.35 m/s (7.5 mph) windspeed, which
corresponds to a typical summer condition. At a winter condition of 40C deltaT and 6 m/s (13.4 mph)
windspeed, these coefficients would increase the infiltration rate by a factor of 2.75.
In DOE-2 (the other EnergyPlus predecessor), the air change method defaults are (adjusted to SI units)
0, 0, 0.224 (windspeed), 0. With these coefficients, the summer conditions above would give a factor of
0.75, and the winter conditions would give 1.34. A windspeed of 4.47 m/s (10 mph) gives a factor of 1.0.
The source of the BLAST defaults is noted in the BLAST documentation as:
“Empirical equation and the coefficient default were determined from ASHRAE journal articles and
other data on the effects of outdoor weather conditions.”
The source of the DOE-2 defaults is based on examining the infiltration relationships described in the
ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.
The local outdoor dry-bulb temperature used in the above basic equation (Todb ) is typically a function
of the height of the zone centroid above ground. The corresponding zone name is given in the second
field. The local outdoor dry-bulb temperature calculation procedure is described in the “Local Outdoor
Air Temperature Calculation” section of the Engineering Reference.
The local outdoor wind speed used in the above basic equation (WindSpeed) is also a function of the
height of the zone centroid above ground. The corresponding zone name is given in the second field. The
local outdoor wind speed calculation procedure is described in the “Local Wind Speed Calculation” section
of the Engineering Reference.
Note: When the value of the Wind Speed Profile Exponent field in the Site:HeightVariation object is
equal to 0.0, the local wind speed is always equal to the wind speed given in the weather data and will not
be dependent on zone centroid height. Similarly, if the value of the Air Temperature Gradient Coefficient
is set equal to 0, the local air dry-bulb temperature is also always equal to the air dry-bulb temperature
given in the weather data and will not be dependent on zone centroid height.
One or more ventilation objects (i.e., ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate and/or ZoneVentila-
tion:WindandStackOpenArea) can be defined for each zone, and the resulting ventilation rate for
the zone will simply be the summation of the flow rates specified by the ventilation objects.
More advanced ventilation calculations are possible using the EnergyPlus AirflowNetwork model.
1.16.4.1 Inputs
1.16.4.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate object.
This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that modifies the maximum design volume flow
rate (Vdesign ) (see Design Flow Rate Calculation Method field and related subsequent fields). This fraction
between 0.0 and 1.0 is noted as Fschedule in the above equation.
• Flow/Zone
With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the design volume flow rate. (The
Design Flow Rate field should be filled.)
• Flow/Area
With this choice, the method used will be a factor per floor area of the zone. (The Flow per Zone Floor
Area field should be filled).
• Flow/Person
With this choice, the method used will be a factor per nominal number of people in the zone. (The
Flow per Person field should be filled).
• AirChanges/Hour
With this choice, the method used will be the number of air changes per hour for the infiltration
amount. This factor, along with the Zone Volume, will be used to determine the Design Flow Rate. (The
Air Changes per Hour field should be filled).
ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate ,
Ventilation 1, !- Name
ZONE 2, !- Zone Name
Simple Vent , !- Schedule Name
Flow/Zone , !- Design Volume Flow Rate calculation method
6.131944 , !- Design Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Volume Flow Rate per area {m3/s/m2}
, !- Volume Flow Rate per person {m3/s/person}
, !- Air Changes Per Hour
INTAKE , !- Ventilation Type
1.16. GROUP – AIRFLOW 587
ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate ,
SPACE1 -1 Ventl 1, !-Name
SPACE1 -1, !- Zone Name
NightVentSched , !- SCHEDULE Name
Flow/Zone , !- Design Volume Flow Rate calculation method
.05295 , !- Design Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Volume Flow Rate per area {m3/s/m2}
, !- Volume Flow Rate per person {m3/s/person}
, !- Air Changes Per Hour
Intake , !- Ventilation Type
67., !- Fan Pressure Rise
.7, !- Fan Total Efficiency
1, !- Constant Term Coefficient
0, !- Temperature Term Coefficient
0, !- Velocity Term Coefficient
0, !- Velocity Squared Term Coefficient
, !- Minimum Indoor Temperature {C}
MinIndoorTemp , !- Minimum Indoor Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Maximum Indoor Temperature {C}
MaxIndoorTemp , !- Maximum Indoor Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Delta Temperature {deltaC}
DeltaTemp , !- Delta Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Minimum Outdoor Temperature {C}
MinOutdoorTemp , !- Minimum Outdoor Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Maximum Outdoor Temperature {C}
MaxOutdoorTemp , !- Maximum Outdoor Temperature Schedule Name
40; !- Maximum WindSpeed {m/s}
ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate ,
West -East Zones Ventilation , !- Name
West -East Zones , !- Zone or ZoneList Name
VentSched , !- Schedule Name
AirChanges/Hour , !- Design Flow Rate Calculation Method
, !- Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Flow Rate per Zone Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
, !- Flow Rate per Person {m3/s-person}
1.7, !- Air Changes per Hour
Intake , !- Ventilation Type
67., !- Fan Pressure Rise {Pa}
0.7, !- Fan Total Efficiency
1, !- Constant Term Coefficient
0, !- Temperature Term Coefficient
0, !- Velocity Term Coefficient
0, !- Velocity Squared Term Coefficient
, !- Minimum Indoor Temperature {C}
MinIndoorTemp , !- Minimum Indoor Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Maximum Indoor Temperature {C}
MaxIndoorTemp , !- Maximum Indoor Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Delta Temperature {deltaC}
DeltaTemp , !- Delta Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Minimum Outdoor Temperature {C}
MinOutdoorTemp , !- Minimum Outdoor Temperature Schedule Name
588 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.16.5 ZoneVentilation:WindandStackOpenArea
For this model, the ventilation air flow rate is a function of wind speed and thermal stack effect, along with
the area of the opening being modeled. This object can be used alone or in combination with ZoneVenti-
lation:DesignFlowRate objects. This model is intended for simplified ventilation calculations as opposed
to the more detailed ventilation investigations that can be performed with the AirflowNetwork model.
Using the “Wind and Stack with Open Area” model, the natural ventilation flow rate can be controlled
by a multiplier fraction schedule applied to the user-defined opening area and through the specification of
minimum, maximum and delta temperatures. The temperatures can be either single constant values for
the entire simulation or schedules which can vary over time. The equation used to calculate the ventilation
rate driven by wind is:
Note: When the value of the Wind Speed Profile Exponent field in the Site:HeightVariation object is
equal to 0.0, the local wind speed is always equal to the wind speed given in the weather data and will not
be dependent on zone centroid height. Similarly, if the value of the Air Temperature Gradient Coefficient
is set equal to 0, the local air dry-bulb temperature is also always equal to the air dry-bulb temperature
given in the weather data and will not be dependent on zone centroid height.
One or more ventilation objects (i.e., ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate and/or ZoneVentila-
tion:WindandStackOpenArea) can be defined for each zone, and the resulting ventilation rate for
the zone will simply be the summation of the flow rates specified by the ventilation objects.
More advanced ventilation calculations are possible using the EnergyPlus AirflowNetwork model.
1.16.5.1 Inputs
1.16.5.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the ZoneVentilation:WindandStackOpenArea object.
Note: Estimation of the height difference is difficult for natural ventilated buildings. Chapter 16 of the
2009 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals may provide guidance for estimating the height difference.
temperature of 2°C, ventilation is assumed to be available if the outside air temperature is at least 2°C
cooler than the zone air temperature. If the outside air dry-bulb temperature is less than 2°C cooler than
the indoor dry-bulb temperature, then ventilation is automatically turned off.
The values for this field can include negative numbers. This allows ventilation to occur even if the
outdoor temperature is above the indoor temperature. The Delta Temperature is used in the code in the
following way:
IF ((IndoorTemp - OutdoorTemp) < DeltaTemperature) Then ventilation is not allowed.
Thus, if a large negative number is input for DeltaTemperature, the ventilation can be kept on even if
the outdoor temperature is greater than the indoor temperature. This is useful for uncontrolled natural
ventilation (open windows) or as a way to estimate the effect of required ventilation air for load calculations.
ZoneVentilation:WindandStackOpenArea ,
ZONE 3 Ventl 1, !- Name
ZONE 3, !- Zone Name
0.5, !- Opening Area {m2}
Constant , !- Opening Area Fraction Schedule Name
AutoCalculate , !- Opening Effectiveness
0.0, !- Effective Angle {deg}
1.0, !- Height Difference {m}
AutoCalculate , !- Discharge Coefficient for Opening
18.0, !- Minimum Indoor Temperature {C}
, !- Minimum Indoor Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Maximum Indoor Temperature {C}
, !- Maximum Indoor Temperature Schedule Name
1.0; !- Delta Temperature {deltaC}
1.16.5.2 Outputs
Current ventilation output variables:
1.16.6 ZoneAirBalance:OutdoorAir
This model calculates a combined zone outdoor airflow by including interactions between mechanical ven-
tilation, infiltration and duct leakage. It is mainly applied to a single zone (e.g., residential) building. The
model combines all outdoor airflows from ZoneInfiltration and ZoneVentilation objects in the same zone.
This object also includes the induced outdoor airflows due to unbalanced duct leakage, and unbalanced
outdoor airflows introduced by unbalanced airflows from ZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator objects
when the exhaust airflow is greater than the supply outdoor airflow. This model is intended for simplified
outdoor airflow calculations as opposed to the more detailed outdoor airflow investigations that can be
performed with the AirflowNetwork model. The equation used to calculate the combined zone outdoor
airflow is:
√
Q= Qn 2 + Qu,v 2 + Qu,l 2 + Qb,v (1.41)
where,
Q = Combined outdoor airflow with infiltration, balanced and unbalanced outdoor air flows, and
unbalanced duct leakage [m3 /s]
Qn = Natural infiltration airflow from ZoneInfiltration:* objects [m3 /s]
Qb,v = Balanced ventilation airflow, excluding infiltration [m3 /s]
Qu,v = Unbalanced ventilation airflow, excluding infiltration [m3 /s]
Qu,l = Unbalanced duct leakage: the difference between supply and return leaks [m3 /s]
This object cannot be used simultaneously with the EnergyPlus AirflowNetwork model. If the Air-
flowNetwork model is active for a simulation time step, the Air Balance Method is reset to “None” for that
time step. More advanced outdoor airflow calculations are possible using the EnergyPlus AirflowNetwork
model.
This object does not combine any airflows from Fan:ZoneExhaust objects and is independent of HVAC
equipment operation.
This object will not work with the AvailabilityManager:HybridVentilation object in the same zone,
when the Simple Airflow Control Type Schedule Name is provided in the HybridVentilation object. For
this case, the Air Balance Method is reset to “None”.
1.16. GROUP – AIRFLOW 595
1.16.6.1 Inputs
1.16.6.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the object.
ZoneAirBalance:OutdoorAir ,
ZONE 2 Balance 1, !- Name
ZONE 2, !- Zone Name
Quadrature , !- Air Balance Method
0.00, !- Induced Outdoor Air Due to Unbalanced Duct Leakage {m3/s}
Constant; !- Induced Outdoor Air Schedule Name
1.16.6.2 Outputs
ZoneAirBalance:OutdoorAir output variables will be provided when the Air Balance Method is Quadra-
ture. Output variables from the associated ZoneVentilation:* and ZoneInfiltration:* objects for the same
zone will not be produced when ZoneAirBalance:OutdoorAir output variables are available. If the Air
Balance Method = None, then no ZoneAirBalance:OutputAir outputs will be produced and the associated
ZoneVentilation:* and ZoneInfiltration:* objects will specify their output variables for the zone.
• HVAC,Average,Zone Combined Outdoor Air Current Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
• HVAC,Average,Zone Combined Outdoor Air Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.16.6.2.1 Zone Combined Outdoor Air Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]
The sensible (temperature) heat loss that occurs when the outdoor air temperature < zone air tem-
perature.
1.16.6.2.2 Zone Combined Outdoor Air Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]
The sensible (temperature) heat gain that occurs when the outdoor air temperature > = zone air
temperature.
1.16.6.2.3 Zone Combined Outdoor Air Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]
The latent heat loss that occurs when the outdoor air humidity ratio < zone air humidity ratio.
1.16.6.2.4 Zone Combined Outdoor Air Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]
The latent heat gain that occurs when the outdoor air humidity ratio > = zone air humidity ratio.
1.16.6.2.5 Zone Combined Outdoor Air Total Heat Loss Energy [J]
The total heat loss that occurs when the sum of Zone Combined Outdoor Air Sensible Heat Gain
Energy and Zone Combined Outdoor Air Latent Heat Gain Energy < the sum of Zone Combined Outdoor
Air Sensible Heat Loss Energy and Zone Combined Outdoor Air Latent Heat Loss Energy.
1.16.6.2.6 Zone Combined Outdoor Air Total Heat Gain Energy [J]
The total heat gain that occurs when the sum of Zone Combined Outdoor Air Sensible Heat Gain
Energy and Zone Combined Outdoor Air Latent Heat Gain Energy > = the sum of Zone Combined
Outdoor Air Sensible Heat Loss Energy and Zone Combined Outdoor Air Latent Heat Loss Energy.
1.16.6.2.8 Zone Combined Outdoor Air Current Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
These outputs are the total volume and volume flow rate of outdoor air based on the current density
of zone air.
1.16.6.2.10 Zone Combined Outdoor Air Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
These outputs are the total volume and volume flow rate of outdoor air based on the standard density
of air. Standard density in EnergyPlus corresponds to 20ºC drybulb, dry air, and nominally adjusted for
elevation.
1.16.7 ZoneMixing
ZoneMixing is intended to allow simplified treatment of air exchange between zones. Note that this
statement only affects the energy balance of the “receiving” zone and that this statement will not produce
any effect on the “source” zone. ZoneMixing statements can be complementary and include multiple
zones, but the balancing of flows between zones is left to the user’s discretion. Also see ZoneCrossMixing
and ZoneRefrigerationDoorMixing. More advanced mixing calculations are possible using the EnergyPlus
AirflowNetwork model for multi-zone airflow with or without HVAC system operation.
1.16.7.1 Inputs
1.16.7.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the ZoneMixing object.
• Flow/Zone
With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the design volume flow rate. (The
Design Flow Rate field should be filled.)
598 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• Flow/Area
With this choice, the method used will be a factor per floor area of the zone. (The Flow per Zone Floor
Area field should be filled).
• Flow/Person
With this choice, the method used will be a factor per nominal number of people in the zone. (The
Flow per Person field should be filled).
• AirChanges/Hour
With this choice, the method used will be the number of air changes per hour for the infiltration
amount. This factor, along with the Zone Volume, will be used to determine the Design Flow Rate. (The
Air Changes per Hour field should be filled).
temperature value in the schedule can be -100°C and the maximum value can be 100°C. This field is an
optional field. If this field is not entered, the maximum outdoor temperature control is not applied.
Note: The maximum outdoor temperature when mixing is shutoff must be greater than or equal to
the minimum outdoor temperature which mixing is shutoff at any given time. Otherwise, a warning will
be issued and the maximum outdoor shutoff temperature will be set to the minimum outdoor shutoff
temperature.
An IDF Example:
ZoneMixing ,
Kitchen_ZN_1_FLR_1 Exhaust Fanmixing_0 , !- Name
Kitchen_ZN_1_FLR_1 , !- Zone Name
Hours_of_operation , !- Schedule Name
Flow/Zone , !- Design Flow Rate Calculation Method
1.4540 , !- Design Level
, !- Volume Flow Rate per Area {m3/s/m2}
, !- Volume Flow Rate Per Person {m3/s/person}
, !- Air Changes per Hour {ACH}
CAFETERIA_ZN_1_FLR_1 , !- Source Zone Name
0.0; !- Delta Temperature
1.16.7.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Volume [m3]
1.16.8 ZoneCrossMixing
ZoneCrossMixing is ideally suited for two zones that exchange an equal amount of air between each other.
As with ZoneMixing, this is a simplified interzone airflow in EnergyPlus. The main difference between
ZoneMixing and ZoneCrossMixing is that cross mixing has an energy effect on both the source and the
receiving zone, thus maintaining both the air mass and energy balances in the two zones. For refriger-
ated zones, see ZoneRefrigerationDoorMixing. More advanced mixing calculations are possible using the
EnergyPlus AirflowNetwork model for multi-zone airflow with or without HVAC system operation.
ZoneCrossMixing can be entered once (in one of the mixing zones), twice (once for each zone), or
multiple times (exchanging with more than one zone). Each object will be modeled with its own control
conditions. The object may be entered once if Delta Temperature > 0.0 and it is desirable to have mixing
only when the source zone is warmer than the receiving zone. This might be the case when the warmer
zone is below the colder zone and the mixing is buoyancy driven. If the zones are next to each other,
separated by an open doorway, it would be more suitable to input a cross mixing object for each zone.
Then mixing would occur if the zone temperatures differed by Delta Temperature or greater regardless of
which is the warmer zone.
1.16.8.1 Inputs
1.16.8.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the ZoneCrossMixing object.
ZoneCrossMixing ,
1stFloor -Garage , !- Name
GARAGE , !- Zone Name
Always On , !- SCHEDULE Name
Flow/Zone , !- Design Flow Rate calculation method
0.1, !- Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.16. GROUP – AIRFLOW 605
ZoneCrossMixing ,
Garage -1stFloor , !- Name
1ST -FLOOR , ! Zone Name
Always On , !- SCHEDULE Name
flow/zone , !- Design Flow Rate calculation method
0.1, !- Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Flow Rate per area {m3/s/m2}
, !- Flow Rate per person {m3/s/person}
, !- Air Changes Per Hour
GARAGE , ! Source Zone Name
1.0; ! Delta temp
1.16.8.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Volume [m3]
1.16.9 ZoneRefrigerationDoorMixing
ZoneRefrigerationDoorMixing is ideally suited for two zones, at least one of which is refrigerated, that ex-
change an equal amount of dry air. As with ZoneMixing, this is a simplified interzone airflow in EnergyPlus.
The ZoneRefrigerationDoorMixing approach shares some features of both ZoneMixing and ZoneCrossMix-
ing. Like ZoneCrossMixing, ZoneRefrigerationDoorMixing has an energy effect on both the source and
1.16. GROUP – AIRFLOW 607
the receiving zone, thus maintaining both the air mass and energy balances in the two zones. Unlike the
other two mixing objects, ZoneRefrigerationDoorMixing always calculates the air exchange rate based on
the zone temperature and relative humidity. That is, the user does not specify the air flow rate. The user
can moderate the flow through a door-opening schedule.
ZoneRefrigerationDoorMixing can only be entered once for any unique pair of zones. It doesn’t matter
which zone is listed first and the zones will automatically switch back and forth between source and
receiving zones depending upon which zone is colder.
1.16.9.1 Inputs
1.16.9.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the ZoneRefrigerationDoorMixing object.
ZoneRefrigerationDoorMixing ,
Freezer1_Cooler1 , !- Name
Freezer1 , !- Zone 1 Name
Cooler1 , !- Zone 2 Name
Freezer1DoorSched , !- Schedule Name
1.8, !- Door height {m}
2.3, !- Door area {m2}
StripCurtain; !- Door protection type
608 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.16.9.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Volume [m3]
1.16.10 ZoneEarthtube
An earth tube is a long, underground metal or plastic pipe through which air is drawn. During cooling
season, as air travels through the pipe, it gives up some of its heat to the surrounding soil and enters
the room as cooler air. Similarly, during heating season, as air travels through the pipe, it receives some
of its heat from the soil and enters the room as warmer air. Simple earth tubes in EnergyPlus can be
controlled by a schedule and through the specification of minimum, maximum, and delta temperatures as
described below. As with infiltration and ventilation, the actual flow rate of air through the earth tube
can be modified by the temperature difference between the inside and outside environment and the wind
speed. The basic equation used to calculate air flow rate of earth tube in EnergyPlus is:
[ ( )]
EarthT ubeF lowRate = (Edesign ) (Fschedule ) A + B |Tzone − Todb | + C (W indSpeed) + D W indSpeed2
(1.42)
For the simulation of the earth tube, a weather data file is required and, therefore, the earth tube
cannot run without weather data file. The required input fields to simulate the earth tube include the
average soil surface temperature, the amplitude of soil surface temperature, and the phase constant of soil
surface temperature. These fields should be calculated in advance by using a separate stand-alone program
(CalcSoilSurfTemp) and should be input into earth tube.
610 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
outside is too warm and could potentially heat the space or if the temperature outside is too cold and
could potentially cool the space. For example, if the user specifies a delta temperature of 2°C, earth tube is
assumed to be available if the temperature difference between indoor and outdoor temperature is at least
2°C. If the outside air dry-bulb temperature is less than 2°C cooler or warmer than the indoor dry-bulb
temperature, then the earth tube is automatically turned off.
EARTHTUBE ,
Zone 2, !- Zone Name
Simple EarthTube , !- Schedule Name
3.425198 , !- Design Volume Flow Rate
10.0, !- Minimum Zone Temperature when Cooling
30.0, !- Maximum Zone Temperature when Heating
1.0, !- Delta Temperature
NATURAL , !- EarthTube Type
350.0 , !- Fan Pressure Rise
0.9, !- Fan Total Efficiency
0.25, !- Pipe Radius
0.2, !- Pipe Thickness
15.0, !- Pipe Length
200.0 , !- Pipe Thermal Conductivity
3.5, !- Pipe Depth Under Ground Surface
HeavyAndDamp , !- Soil Condition
15.0, !- Average Soil Surface Temperature
5.6, !- Amplitude of Soil Surface Temperature
0.0, !- Phase Constant of Soil Surface Temperature
0.6060000 , !- Constant Term Flow Coef
2.0199999E-02, !- Temp Term Flow Coef
5.9800001E-04, !- Velocity Term Flow Coef
0.0000000E+00; !- Velocity **2 Term Flow Coef
1.16.12 ZoneCoolTower:Shower
A cooltower (which is sometimes referred to as a wind tower or a shower cooling tower) is a component
that is intended to model a passive downdraught evaporative cooling (PDEC) that is designed to capture
the wind at the top of a tower and cool the outside air using water evaporation before delivering it to a
space. The air flow in these systems is natural as the evaporation process increases the density of the air
causing it to fall through the tower and into the space without the aid of a fan. A cooltower typically
consists of a water spray or an evaporative pad, a shaft, and a water tank or reservoir. Wind catchers
to improve the wind-driven performance at the top of the tower are optional. Water is pumped over an
evaporative device by water pump which is the only component consumed power for this system. This
water cools and humidifies incoming air and then the cool, dense air naturally falls down through shaft
and leaves through large openings at the bottom of cooltowers.
The shower cooling tower can be controlled by a schedule and the specification of maximum water flow
rate and volume flow rate as well as minimum indoor temperature. The actual flow rate of water and air
can be controlled as users specify the fractions of water loss and flow schedule. The required input fields
include effective tower height and exit area to obtain the temperature and flow rate of the air exiting the
tower. A schedule and rated power for the water pump are also required to determine the power consumed.
The component typically has a stand alone water system that is not added to the water consumption from
mains. However, users are required to specify the water source through an optional field, the name of
water supply storage tank, in case any water comes from a water main. The model is described more fully
in the Engineering Reference document.
This model requires weather information obtained from either design day or weather file specifications.
The control is accomplished by either specifying the water flow rate or obtaining the velocity at the outlet
with inputs and weather conditions when the water flow rate is unknown. As with infiltration, ventilation,
and earth tubes, the component is treated in a similar fashion to “natural ventilation” in EnergyPlus.
616 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.16.12.1 Inputs
1.16.12.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a unique user assigned name for each cooltower. Any reference to this unit by another
object will use this name.
ZoneCoolTower:Shower
Cool Tower 1, !- Name of cooltowers
Zone 1, !- Zone name
Simple Vent , !- Schedule
, !- Name of water supply storage tanks
WindDrivenFlow , !- Flow control type
0.0005 , !- Water flow rate from the spray in m3/s
, !- schedule for flow rate (optional , non -existent means constant)
5.0, !- Effective tower height in m
1.0, !- Exit area in m2
10.0, !- Maximum supply air volume flow rate in m3/s
18.0, !- Minimum indoor temperature to prevent overcooling in C
0.05, !- Fraction of Water loss
0.05, !- Fraction of flow that goes to outside
250.0; !- Rated power consumption in W
1.16.12.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Sum,Zone Cooltower Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]
1.16.12.2.5 Zone Cooltower Current Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
The volumetric flow rate of the air leaving the cooltower evaluating density at current zone conditions.
1.16.12.2.6 Zone Cooltower Standard Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
The volumetric flow rate of the air leaving the cooltower evaluating density at standard conditions.
1.16.13 ZoneThermalChimney
A thermal chimney is a vertical shaft utilizing solar radiation to enhance the natural ventilation in buildings.
It consists of a absorber wall, air gap and glass cover with high solar transmissivity. For the high solar
absorption, it is usually south facing.
The key output parameter in the thermal chimney model is the enhanced amount of natural ventilation
rate caused by the presence of a thermal chimney. In order to determine the enhanced ventilation, the
discharge air temperature from a thermal chimney should be calculated, which, in turn, should be computed
based on the information on the absorber wall temperature, glass cover temperature and the vertical air
temperature distribution within the thermal chimney. Among them, energy balances for the absorber wall
and the glass cover are carried out using the existing algorithm currently available in EnergyPlus, which has
the similar approach to the Trombe wall. As stated in the Trombe wall object as well, this approach allows
the flexibility for users to specify the various wall parameters and to explore unusual configurations. On
the other hand, the vertical air temperature distribution and the resultant discharge air temperature of the
thermal chimney are computed using the separate thermal chimney algorithm described in the Engineering
Reference document.
Similar to the Trombe wall model, a zone is coupled to the desired surface via an interzone partition.
To simulate the thermal chimney, the Solar Distribution field in the Building object should be set to
FullInteriorAndExterior so that the majority of the solar flux is directed on the absorber wall. For a
normal sized thermal chimney zone, the user can set the Zone Inside Convection Algorithm to “Detailed”,
which takes into account natural convection effects intended for a normal zone. For a narrow cavity zone
having high aspect ratios, there is no built-in algorithm for calculating the correct convection coefficients
on the inside of thermal chimney zone walls. One option is to use the “Detailed” convection algorithm
similar to the Trombe wall model. However, some error may be incurred when used with a narrow zone.
Another option is to use the SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients object to schedule coefficients that
have been determined beforehand by the user. In addition, the wall construction of the adjoining zone
must be the mirror image of the wall construction in the thermal chimney zone.
The full input description of a thermal chimney in EnergyPlus is given below.
discharge air temperature and the enhanced ventilation rate caused by the thermal chimney.
1.16.13.9 Field: Relative Ratios of Air Flow Rates Passing through Zone <#>
This dimensionless number is the relative ratio of air flow rates enhanced by the thermal chimney passing
through each zone. The total air flow rate enhanced by the thermal chimney is distributed to each zone
based on this number if multiple zones share the common thermal chimney. It is used in conjunction with
the zone name, the distance from the top of the thermal chimney to each inlet and cross sectional areas of
each air channel inlet. Note that the sum of all ratios must be equal to 1.0.
ZoneThermalChimney ,
ThermalChimney1 , !- Name of Thermal Chimney System
ThermalChimneyZone , !- Name of Thermal Chimney Zone
ThermalChimneyAvail , !- Availability Schedule Name
3.5, !- Width of the Absorber Wall
622 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• HVAC,Average,Zone Thermal Chimney Current Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
• HVAC,Average,Zone Thermal Chimney Standard Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.16.14.5 Zone Thermal Chimney Current Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
The total air volumetric flow rate caused by the thermal chimney evaluating density at the current zone
conditions.
1.16. GROUP – AIRFLOW 623
1.16.14.6 Zone Thermal Chimney Standard Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
The total air volumetric flow rate caused by the thermal chimney evaluating density at standard conditions.
1.16.15 ZoneAirMassFlowConservation
This global object allows users to trigger the zone air mass flow conservation calculation when desired.
This object has three input fields; the first choice input field allows the user whether to adjust mixing
flows to enforce the zone air mass flow conservation; and the other fields allows the user to specify how
infiltration object mass flow rate is calculated for zone air mass flow balance calculation. If adjustments
for either mixing or infiltration is specified then the zone air mass balance attempts to enforce conservation.
If both mixing and infiltration adjustments are off, then the zone air mass flow calculation uses the default
method which does not include zone mixing objects and assumes self-balanced simple infiltration. The
default method may not necessarily enforce zone air mass flow conservation unless the user has specified
a balanced flow to begin with. The zone air mass flow conservation primarily accounts for the zonemixing
objects air flow in the zone air flow mass balance calculation. In addition to the zonemixing object flow,
the procedure accounts for zone supply, exhaust, and return flows and adjusts infiltration air flows (up or
down) when required in order to balance the zone air mass flow. Mixing and infiltration adjustments will
only be made in zones which have zonemixing or infiltration objects defined in the input. For example, if
a zone does not have any infiltration objects, then no infiltration adjustment will be made for that zone.
First, the ZoneMixing object mass flow rate is adjusted or modified in order to balance zone air mass
flow while assuming any zone infiltration objects are self-balanced. This step will always results in balanced
zone air mass for receiving zones of ZoneMixing object but it may not necessarily result in a balanced air
mass flow for source zones.
Second, infiltration flow rates are adjusted accoring to the options set. Infiltration flow will be increased
or decreased to balance the net flow from supply, exhaust, mixing, and return air flows. If a negative
infiltration rate (exfiltration) is required to balance a zone’s airflow, then the infiltration rate will be set
to zero. This can happen, for example, if the total supply flow exceeds the total exahust plus return flow.
This object is optional. If it is not present in the input file, the default zone air mass flow calculastion
are used which do not account for zonemixing and infiltration flows.
1.16.15.1 Inputs
1.16.15.1.1 Field: Adjust Zone Mixing For Zone Air Mass Flow Balance
This field has two choices: Yes or No. When set to Yes, the zone air mass flow balance attempts
to enforce conservation by adjusting zone mixing flow rates. When set to No, mixing flow rates are not
adjusted; the mixing flows specified in ZoneMixing obects will be used. The default is No.
AddInfiltrationFlow: The base infiltration flow may be increased in order to balance the zone air mass
flow. This additional infiltration air mass flow is not self-balanced, i.e., it is always assumed to be incoming
flow which leaves by exahust, mixing, or return. If no infiltration air is required in order to balance the
zone air mass flow, then the additional infiltration air mass flow rate is set to zero. For this option, the base
infiltration flow is always assumed to be self-balanced (i.e., exfiltration = infiltration) and is not included
in the zone air mass flow balance.
AdjustInfiltrationFlow: The base infiltration flow may be increased or decreased in order to balance the
zone air mass flow. If no infiltration is required to balance the zone air flow, then the base infiltration flow
rate is retained and assumed to be self-balanced (i.e., exfiltration = infiltration). If the required infiltration
flow rate is negative (exfiltration), then the infiltration flow rate is set to zero and surplus flow in the zone
is assumed to leave as exfiltration.
None: The base infiltration flow is always assumed to be self-balanced (i.e., exfiltration = infiltration)
and is not included in the zone air mass flow balance. No changes are made to the base infiltration flow
rate.
ZoneAirMassFlowConservation ,
Yes , !- Adjust Zone Mixing For Zone Air Mass Flow Balance
AdjustInfiltrationFlow ; !- Infiltration Balancing Method
AllZones; !- Infiltration Balancing Zones
1.16.15.2 Outputs
Current ZoneAirMassFlowConservation output variables (only applicable variables will be generated):
• HVAC, Average, Zone Air Mass Balance Supply Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• HVAC, Average, Zone Air Mass Balance Exhaust Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• HVAC, Average, Zone Air Mass Balance Return Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• HVAC, Average, Zone Air Mass Balance Mixing Receiving Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• HVAC, Average, Zone Air Mass Balance Mixing Source Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• HVAC, Average, Zone Infiltration Air Mass Flow Balance Status, []
• HVAC, Average, Zone Mass Balance Infiltration Air Mass Flow Rate, [kg/s]
1.16.15.2.1 Zone Air Mass Balance Supply Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output variable represents the total supply air mass flow rate of a zone. The value is determined
by summing the supply air mass flow rates contributions from all supply air inlet nodes of a zone.
1.16.15.2.2 Zone Air Mass Balance Exhaust Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output variable represents the total exhaust air mass flow rate of a zone. The value is determined
by summing the exhaust air mass flow rates contributions from all exhaust air nodes of a zone.
1.17. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 625
1.16.15.2.3 Zone Air Mass Balance Return Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output variable represents the total return air mass flow rate of a zone. The value is determined
by summing the return air mass flow rates contributions from return air nodes of a zone.
1.16.15.2.4 Zone Air Mass Balance Mixing Receiving Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output variable represents the total zone mixing air mass flow rate of a receiving zone from one
or more mixing objects. The value is determined by summing the air mass flow contributions from all zone
mixing objects connected to a single receiving zone.
1.16.15.2.5 Zone Air Mass Balance Mixing Source Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output variable represents the total zone mixing source air mass flow rate of a source zone feeding
one or more mixing objects. The value is determined by summing the air mass flow contributions from all
zone mixing objects connected to a single source zone.
1.16.15.2.7 Zone Air Mass Balance Infiltration Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output variable represents the zone infiltration air mass flow rate in kg/s. This output variable is
reported only for source zones and when the zone air mass flow balance is active. Its value depends on the
Infiltration Balancing Method specified. When the infiltration method is AddInfiltrationFlow this output
represents the additional infiltration air mass flow rate added on top of the base infiltration air flow in
order to balance the zone air mass flow. In this case, the base infiltration air mass flow calculated using
the user specified input is assumed self-balanced. When the infiltration method is AdjustInfiltrationFlow
and the value of “Zone Air Mass Balance Infiltration Status” is 1, this output represents the infiltration
air mass flow rate required to balance the zone air mass flow. This value could be negative if the zone
supply exceeds all other outflows. If the value of “Zone Air Mass Balance Infiltration Status” is 0, then
this output is the self-balanced base infiltration flow rate for current timestep.
• The input file should contain a SimulationControl object. The 1st field Do Zone Sizing Calculation
should be entered as Yes. This will cause a zone sizing simulation to be done using all the sizing
periods in the input file as weather. If there are no air or water loops in the HVAC input fields 2 and
626 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
3 can be set to No. If there are one or more air loops (i.e., there is at least one AirLoopHVAC object
in the input file) then the 2nd field Do System Sizing Calculation should be entered as Yes. If there
are one or more water loops (Plant Loop objects) then the 3rd field Do Plant Sizing Calculation
should be set to Yes. Finally either the 4th field (Run Simulation for Sizing Periods) or the 5th
field (Run Simulation for Weather File Run Periods) should be set to Yes in order to autosize the
components and do a real simulation using the autosized components. The component autosizing
calculations are done on the first pass through the HVAC system in the real simulation.
• There must be at least 2 (up to any number) SizingPeriod objects present. Normally one will be
for summer conditions and one for winter. The summer day should normally have the field Day
Type set to SummerDesignDay. The winter design day should normally have Day Type set to
WinterDesignDay.
• For each controlled zone in the input file there should be a corresponding Sizing:Zone object. Simi-
larly for each AirLoopHVAC there should be a Sizing:System object. And for each Plant or Condenser
Loop there should be a Sizing:Plant object. Note however that if a controlled zone has no corre-
sponding Zone Sizing object the data from the first Zone Sizing object will be used. Thus if all the
zone sizing information is the same only one Zone Sizing object need be entered.
• Only controlled zones are included in the zone and system sizing calculations. Thus for a design air
flow rate to be calculated for a zone, it must contain a thermostat even though it might not need
or have a thermostat in the full simulation. An illustration would be a three zone building with a
packaged single zone system and a thermostat in one of the zones. In order for the two slave zones
to be included in the design air flow calculations they must be treated as if they have a thermostat:
there must be a ZoneControl:Thermostat for each of the slave zones.
• Some attention should be paid to schedules. In a weekly schedule object the 9th and 10th day
schedules are for summer and winter design days respectively. This means that if a SizingPeriod
object has field Day Type set to SummerDesignDay the day schedule for summer sizing periods will
be in effect. Similarly if a SizingPeriod object has field Day Type set to WinterDesignDay the day
schedule for winter sizing periods will be in effect. Some possible applications of this capability are:
1) setting internal loads (lights, equipment, occupancy) to maximum all day for cooling and to zero
all day for heating;
2) setting heating and cooling thermostat set points to constant values (no set up or set back);
3) setting heating and cooling equipment to be always on.
None of these applications are necessarily recommended but these and other uses of the special sum-
mer/winter design day schedules may prove useful for specific situations.
• Other than zone thermostat setpoints, the sizing calculations generally know nothing about the
system control inputs such as setpoints and availability schedules. The user must coordinate sizing
inputs with the actual simulation control inputs.
• The sizing calculations only recognize the presence of central heating and cooling coils, preheat and
precool coils and reheat coils. These are assumed to deliver the various supply temperatures specified
in the Sizing:System and Sizing:Zone objects. The impact of other components such as heat recovery,
dehumidifiers, and pumps are not accounted for in the sizing calculations. Central supply and return
fan temperature rise is taken into account in sizing the central cooling coils.
1.17. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 627
AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow
Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity
Gross Rated Heating Capacity
Resistive Defrost Heater Capacity
Water Condenser Volume Flow Rate
Evaporative Condenser Air Flow Rate
Evaporative Condenser Pump Rated Power Con-
sumption
AirLoopHVAC
Design Supply Air Flow Rate
AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatCool
Maximum Supply Air Temperature
Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
No Load Supply Air Flow Rate
AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatOnly
Maximum Supply Air Temperature
Supply Air Flow Rate
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool
Maximum Supply Air Temperature
Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
No Load Supply Air Flow Rate
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool:VAVChangeoverBypass
Cooling System Air Flow Rate
Heating System Air Flow Rate
No Load System Air Flow Rate
Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate
No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatOnly
Maximum Supply Air Temperature
628 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Number of Beams
Beam Length
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:FourPipeInduction
Maximum Total Air Flow Rate
Maximum Hot Water Flow Rate
Maximum Cold Water Flow Rate
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:Reheat
Maximum Air Flow Rate
Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ParallelPIU:Reheat
Maximum Primary Air Flow Rate
Maximum Secondary Air Flow Rate
Minimum Primary Air Flow Fraction
Fan On Flow Fraction
Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:SeriesPIU:Reheat
Maximum Air Flow Rate
Maximum Primary Air Flow Rate
Minimum Primary Air Flow Fraction
Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled
Maximum Air Flow Rate
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:NoReheat
Maximum Air Flow Rate
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:Reheat
Maximum Air Flow Rate
Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:NoReheat
Maximum Air Flow Rate
Constant Minimum Air Flow Fraction
Fixed Minimum Air Flow Rate
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat
Maximum Air Flow Rate
Constant Minimum Air Flow Fraction
Fixed Minimum Air Flow Rate
Maximum Flow per Zone Floor Area During Re-
heat
Maximum Flow Fraction During Reheat
630 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit
Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity At Selected
Nominal Speed Level
Rated Air Flow Rate At Selected Nominal Speed
Level
Rated Water Flow Rate At Selected Nominal
Speed Level
Coil:Heating:DX:MultiSpeed
Resistive Defrost Heater Capacity
Speed 1 Gross Rated Heating Capacity
Speed 1 Rated Air Flow Rate
Speed 2 Gross Rated Heating Capacity
Speed 2 Rated Air Flow Rate
Speed 3 Gross Rated Heating Capacity
Speed 3 Rated Air Flow Rate
Speed 4 Gross Rated Heating Capacity
Speed 4 Rated Air Flow Rate
Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed
Gross Rated Heating Capacity
Rated Air Flow Rate
Resistive Defrost Heater Capacity
Coil:Heating:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow
Gross Rated Heating Capacity
Rated Air Flow Rate
Coil:Heating:DX:VariableSpeed
Rated Heating Capacity At Selected Nominal
Speed Level
Rated Air Flow Rate At Selected Nominal Speed
Level
Resistive Defrost Heater Capacity
Coil:Heating:Electric
Nominal Capacity
Coil:Heating:Electric:MultiStage
Stage 1 Nominal Capacity
Stage 2 Nominal Capacity
Stage 3 Nominal Capacity
Stage 4 Nominal Capacity
Coil:Heating:Fuel
1.17. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 635
Nominal Capacity
Coil:Heating:Gas:MultiStage
Stage 1 Nominal Capacity
Stage 2 Nominal Capacity
Stage 3 Nominal Capacity
Stage 4 Nominal Capacity
Coil:Heating:Steam
Maximum Steam Flow Rate
Coil:Heating:Water
U-Factor Times Area Value
Maximum Water Flow Rate
Rated Capacity
Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
Rated Air Flow Rate
Rated Water Flow Rate
Gross Rated Heating Capacity
Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit
Rated Heating Capacity At Selected Nominal
Speed Level
Rated Air Flow Rate At Selected Nominal Speed
Level
Rated Water Flow Rate At Selected Nominal
Speed Level
CoilPerformance:DX:Cooling
Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity
Gross Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
Rated Air Flow Rate
Evaporative Condenser Air Flow Rate
Evaporative Condenser Pump Rated Power Con-
sumption
CondenserLoop
Maximum Loop Flow Rate
Controller:OutdoorAir
Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Controller:WaterCoil
Controller Convergence Tolerance
Maximum Actuated Flow
636 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
CoolingTower:SingleSpeed
Design Water Flow Rate
Design Air Flow Rate
Design Fan Power
Design U-Factor Times Area Value
CoolingTower:TwoSpeed
Design Water Flow Rate
High Fan Speed Air Flow Rate
High Fan Speed Fan Power
High Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Value
CoolingTower:VariableSpeed
Design Water Flow Rate
Design Air Flow Rate
Design Fan Power
CoolingTower:VariableSpeed:Merkel
Nominal Capacity
Design Water Flow Rate
Design Air Flow Rate U-Factor Times Area Value
EvaporativeCooler:Indirect:ResearchSpecial
Secondary Fan Flow Rate
EvaporativeFluidCooler:SingleSpeed
Design Air Flow Rate
Design Air Flow Rate Fan Power
Design Air Flow Rate U-factor Times Area Value
Design Water Flow Rate
EvaporativeFluidCooler:TwoSpeed
High Fan Speed Air Flow Rate
High Fan Speed Fan Power
High Fan Speed U-factor Times Area Value
Design Water Flow Rate
Fan:ComponentModel
Maximum Flow Rate
Minimum Flow Rate
Motor Fan Pulley Ratio
Belt Maximum Torque
Maximum Motor Output Power
Maximum VFD Output Power
1.17. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 637
Fan:ConstantVolume
Maximum Flow Rate
Fan:OnOff
Maximum Flow Rate
FanPerformance:NightVentilation
Maximum Flow Rate
Fan:VariableVolume
Maximum Flow Rate
FluidCooler:SingleSpeed
Design Air Flow Rate U-factor Times Area Value
Design Water Flow Rate
Design Air Flow Rate
Design Air Flow Rate Fan Power
FluidCooler:TwoSpeed
High Fan Speed U-factor Times Area Value
Design Water Flow Rate
High Fan Speed Air Flow Rate
High Fan Speed Fan Power
HeaderedPumps:ConstantSpeed
Total Rated Flow Rate
Rated Power Consumption
HeaderedPumps:VariableSpeed
Total Rated Flow Rate
Rated Power Consumption
HeatExchanger:AirToAir:SensibleAndLatent
Nominal Supply Air Flow Rate
HeatExchanger:FluidToFluid
Loop Demand Side Design Flow Rate
Loop Supply Side Design Flow Rate
Heat Exchanger U-Factor Times Area Value
Humidifier:Steam:Electric
Rated Power
HVACTemplate:Plant:Boiler
Capacity
HVACTemplate:Plant:Chiller
Capacity
HVACTemplate:Plant:Tower
638 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
There are 3 places in the input where the user can impose sizing factors.
1. In Sizing Parameters (object: Sizing:Parameters), the user can specify an over-all sizing factor. This
factor is applied to all the zone design loads and air flow rates resulting from the zone sizing calculations.
2. In Zone Sizing (object: Sizing:Zone), the user can specify a sizing factor for a specific zone.
The factor is applied to the calculated zone design loads and air flow rates for the zone named in the
Sizing:Zone object. This sizing factor overrides the global sizing factor. That is, a zone sizing factor, if
specified, replaces the global sizing factor for the named zone.
3. For some plant components (basically all central chillers, boilers and cooling towers) the user can
specify a sizing factor that modifies the autosized component capacity and flow rates. These factors are
applied after the application of global or zone sizing factors. They are primarily used to split the design
load between multiple components. These sizing factors can change the autosizing of the associated loops
and pumps. The following rules are followed the effect of plant component sizing factors on loops and
pumps.
a. For supply side branches, the sizing factors of all components in series on the branch are summed
and the result becomes the branch sizing factor. If there is a branch pump its autosized design flow rate
646 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow AirLoopHVAC
AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatCool AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatOnly
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool:VAVChangeoverBypass
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatOnly AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir:MultiSpeed
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:WaterToAir
AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem AirTerminal:DualDuct:ConstantVolume
AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV:OutdoorAir
1.17. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 647
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:CooledBeam
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:FourPipeInduction
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:ReheatAirTerminal:SingleDuct:ParallelPIU:Reheat
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:SeriesPIU:Reheat AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:NoReheat
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:Reheat
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:NoReheat AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat:VariableSpeedFan
Boiler:HotWater
Boiler:Steam Branch
Chiller:Absorption Chiller:Absorption:Indirect
Chiller:CombustionTurbine Chiller:ConstantCOP
Chiller:Electric Chiller:Electric:EIR
Chiller:Electric:ReformulatedEIR Chiller:EngineDriven
ChillerHeater:Absorption:DirectFired ChillerHeater:Absorption:DoubleEffect
ChillerHeaterPerformance:Electric:EIR Coil:Cooling:DX:MultiSpeed
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed:ThermalStorage
Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoSpeed Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow
Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed Coil:Cooling:Water
Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit
Coil:Heating:DX:MultiSpeed
Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed Coil:Heating:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow
Coil:Heating:DX:VariableSpeed Coil:Heating:Electric
Coil:Heating:Electric:MultiStage Coil:Heating:Fuel
Coil:Heating:Gas:MultiStage Coil:Heating:Steam
Coil:Heating:Water Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit
CoilPerformance:DX:Cooling
CondenserLoop Controller:OutdoorAir
Controller:WaterCoil CoolingTower:SingleSpeed
CoolingTower:TwoSpeed CoolingTower:VariableSpeed
CoolingTower:VariableSpeed:Merkel EvaporativeCooler:Indirect:ResearchSpecial
EvaporativeFluidCooler:SingleSpeed EvaporativeFluidCooler:TwoSpeed
Fan:ComponentModel Fan:ConstantVolume
Fan:OnOff FanPerformance:NightVentilation
Fan:VariableVolume FluidCooler:SingleSpeed
FluidCooler:TwoSpeed HeaderedPumps:ConstantSpeed
HeaderedPumps:VariableSpeed HeatExchanger:AirToAir:SensibleAndLatent
HeatExchanger:FluidToFluid Humidifier:Steam:Electric
HVACTemplate:Plant:Boiler HVACTemplate:Plant:Chiller
HVACTemplate:Plant:Tower HVACTemplate:System:ConstantVolume
648 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
HVACTemplate:System:DedicatedOutdoorAir HVACTemplate:System:DualDuct
HVACTemplate:System:PackagedVAV HVACTemplate:System:Unitary
HVACTemplate:System:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir HVACTemplate:System:UnitarySystem
HVACTemplate:System:VAV HVACTemplate:System:VRF
HVACTemplate:Zone:BaseboardHeat HVACTemplate:Zone:ConstantVolume
HVACTemplate:Zone:DualDuct HVACTemplate:Zone:FanCoil
HVACTemplate:Zone:IdealLoadsAirSystem HVACTemplate:Zone:PTAC
HVACTemplate:Zone:PTHP HVACTemplate:Zone:Unitary
HVACTemplate:Zone:VAV HVACTemplate:Zone:VAV:FanPowered
HVACTemplate:Zone:VAV:HeatAndCool HVACTemplate:Zone:VRF
HVACTemplate:Zone:WaterToAirHeatPump PlantComponent:TemperatureSource
PlantEquipmentOperation:ComponentSetpoint PlantLoop
Pump:ConstantSpeed Pump:VariableSpeed
Pump:VariableSpeed:Condensate Sizing:System
SolarCollector:FlatPlate:PhotovoltaicThermal ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Mixed
ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Stratified UnitarySystemPerformance:HeatPump:Multispeed
WaterHeater:Mixed WaterHeater:Stratified
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Electric ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Water
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:ElectricZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Steam
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:WaterZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator
ZoneHVAC:EvaporativeCoolerUnit ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil
ZoneHVAC:HighTemperatureRadiant ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem
ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:Electric ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:VariableFlow
ZoneHVAC:OutdoorAirUnit ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalAirConditioner
ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalHeatPump ZoneHVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow
ZoneHVAC:UnitHeater ZoneHVAC:UnitVentilator
ZoneHVAC:VentilatedSlab ZoneHVAC:WaterToAirHeatPump
ZoneHVAC:WindowAirConditioner
3) For each zone the user can input a Cooling Design Air Flow Rate and/or a Heating Design Air Flow
Rate (and specify Cooling Design Air Flow Method = Flow/Zone and Heating Design Air Flow Method
= Flow/Zone). These user inputs override the calculated values. The program divides the user input
cooling or heating design air flow rate by the calculated values and uses the result as a zone sizing factor
to multiply all the elements in the design heating and cooling air flow and load sequences. From this point
the design calculations proceed as usual.
1.17.2 DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir
This object allows for the outdoor air requirements to be defined in a common location for use by other
objects. This object may be referenced by name from other objects (e.g., VAV terminal units, AirTer-
minal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled, and AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer) as required to identify an outdoor air
quantity for use by that object. Note that a zone name Is not included as an input to this zone outdoor air
definition and the number of people in a zone, zone floor area, and zone volume can only be determined
after this object has been referenced by another. A single zone outdoor air definition may be referenced by
multiple objects to specify that the same outdoor air requirements are used by those objects or multiple
zone outdoor air objects may be defined and referenced by other objects as needed. If multiple zone outdoor
air definitions are used, each outdoor air definition must have a unique name.
1.17.2.1 Inputs
1.17.2.1.1 Field: Name
Unique identifying name. Any reference to this name by other objects will denote that the following
outdoor air requirements will be used.
• Flow/Person means the program will use the input from the field Outdoor Air Flow per Person and
the actual zone occupancy to calculate a zone outdoor air flow rate.
• Flow/Area means that the program will use the input from the field Outdoor Air Flow per Zone
Floor Area and the actual zone floor area as the zone outdoor air flow rate.
• Flow/Zone means that the program will use the input of the field Outdoor Air Flow per Zone as the
zone outdoor air flow rate.
• AirChanges/Hour means that the program will use the input from the field Air Changes per Hour
and the actual zone volume (divided by 3600 seconds per hour) as the zone outdoor air flow rate.
650 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• Sum means that the flows calculated from the fields Outdoor Air Flow per Person, Outdoor Air Flow
per Area, Outdoor Air Flow per Zone, and Air Changes per Hour (using the associated conversions
to m3 /s for each field) will be added to obtain the zone outdoor air flow rate.
• Maximum means that the maximum flow derived from Outdoor Air Flow per Person, Outdoor
Air Flow per Area, Outdoor Air Flow per Zone, and Air Changes per Hour (using the associated
conversions to m3 /s for each field) will be used as the zone outdoor air flow rate.
• IndoorAirQualityProcedure means that the program will use the other procedure defined in ASHRAE
Standard 62.1-2007 to calculate the amount of outdoor air necessary in order to maintain the levels of
indoor air carbon dioxide at or below the setpoint defined in the ZoneControl:ContaminantController
object. Appendix A of the ASHRAE 62.1-2010 user’s manual discusses another method for
implementing CO2-based DCV in a single zone system. The last two methods of Proportional
Control calculate the required outdoor air flow rate which varies in proportion to the percentage of
the CO2 signal range and has two choices to calculate occupancy-based outdoor air rate.
• ProportionalControlBasedonOccupancySchedule uses the real occupancy at the current time step to
calculate outdoor air rate.
• ProportionalControlBasedonDesignOccupancy uses the design occupancy level to calculate outdoor
air rate. The former choice is a good approach to estimate outdoor air rate. However, for practical
applications, the zone controller usually does not have the real time occupancy information, and the
design occupancy level is assumed. The latter choice is used in the design stage.
calculations for the corresponding zone, regardless of the System Outdoor Air Method selected. If the
schedule value is zero, then the zone will be completely removed from the system outdoor air calculations.
1.17.2.1.8 Field: Proportional Control Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Rate Schedule
Name
This field is the name of schedule that defines how minimum outdoor air requirements change over
time. The field is optional. If left blank, the schedule defaults to 1.0. If used when the field System
Outdoor Air Method = ProportionalControlBasedOnDesignOARate in Controller:MechanicalVentilation,
then the schedule values are multiplied by the outdoor air flow rate.
An IDF example:
DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir
ZoneOAData , !- Name
Sum , !- Outdoor Air Method
0.00944 , !- Outdoor Air Flow per Person {m3/s}
0.00305 , !- Outdoor Air Flow per Zone Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
, !- Outdoor Air Flow per Zone {m3/s}
, !- Outdoor Air Flow Air Changes per Hour
OARequirements Sched; !- Outdoor Air Schedule Name
Schedule:Compact ,
OARequirements Sched , !- Name
Any Number , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: Weekdays SummerDesignDay WinterDesignDay , !- Field 2
Until: 24:00 , 1.0, !- Field 4
For: AllOtherDays , !- Field 5
Until: 24:00 , 0.5; !- Field 7
1.17.3 DesignSpecification:ZoneAirDistribution
This object is used to describe the air distribution effectiveness and fraction of secondary recirculation
air (return air not directly mixed with outdoor air) of a zone. It is referenced by the Sizing:Zone and
Controller:MechanicalVentilation objects.
1.17.3.1 Inputs
1.17.3.1.1 Field: Name
The unique user assigned name for an instance of this object. Any other object referencing this object
will use this name.
Figure 1.87: Zone Air Distribution Effectiveness (Source: ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2010)
1.17. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 653
DesignSpecification:ZoneAirDistribution ,
CM DSZAD ZN_1_FLR_1_SEC_1 , !- Name
1, !- Zone Air Distribution Effectiveness in Cooling Mode {dimensionless}
1, !- Zone Air Distribution Effectiveness in Heating Mode {dimensionless}
; !- Zone Air Distribution Effectiveness Schedule Name
1.17.4 Sizing:Parameters
This object allows the user to specify global heating and cooling sizing ratios. These ratios will be applied
at the zone level to all of the zone heating and cooling loads and air flow rates. These new loads and air flow
rates are then used to calculate the system level flow rates and capacities and are used in all component
sizing calculations.
The user can also specify the width (in load timesteps) of a moving average window which can be used
to smooth the calculated zone design flow sequences. The use of this parameter is described below.
1.17.4.1 Inputs
1.17.4.1.1 Field: Heating Sizing Factor
The global heating sizing ratio applied to all of the zone design heating loads and air flow rates.
654 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.17.4.2 Outputs
The sizing factors and the averaging window size are reported out on the eplusout.eio file. An example is:
! <Load Timesteps in Zone Design Calculation Averaging Window >, Value
Timesteps in Averaging Window , 1
! <Heating Sizing Factor Information >, Sizing Factor ID , Value
Heating Sizing Factor , Global , 1.3000
Heating Sizing Factor , Zone SPACE1 -1, 1.3000
Heating Sizing Factor , Zone SPACE2 -1, 1.3000
Heating Sizing Factor , Zone SPACE3 -1, 1.3000
Heating Sizing Factor , Zone SPACE4 -1, 1.3000
Heating Sizing Factor , Zone SPACE5 -1, 1.3000
! <Cooling Sizing Factor Information >, Sizing Factor ID , Value
Cooling Sizing Factor , Global , 1.3000
Cooling Sizing Factor , Zone SPACE1 -1, 1.3000
Cooling Sizing Factor , Zone SPACE2 -1, 1.3000
Cooling Sizing Factor , Zone SPACE3 -1, 1.3000
Cooling Sizing Factor , Zone SPACE4 -1, 1.3000
Cooling Sizing Factor , Zone SPACE5 -1, 1.3000
1.17.5 OutputControl:Sizing:Style
As described early in the document (see: EnergyPlus Output Processing), the user may select the “style”
for the sizing result files (epluszsz.<ext>, eplusssz.<ext>). This object applies to all sizing output files.
OutputControl:Sizing:Style ,
\memo default style for the Sizing output files is comma -- this works well for
\memo importing into spreadsheet programs such as Excel(tm) but not so well for word
\memo processing progams -- there tab may be a better choice. fixed puts spaces between
\memo the "columns"
\unique -object
A1; \field Column Separator
\required -field
\type choice
\key Comma
\key Tab
\key Fixed
1.17. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 655
1.17.5.1 Inputs
1.17.5.1.1 Field: Column Separator
For this field, the desired separator for columns is entered. “Comma” creates comma separated field-
s/columns in the outputs (eplus<sizing type>.csv files are created). “Tab” creates tab separated field-
s/columns in the outputs (eplus<sizing type>.tab files are created). “Fixed” creates space separated
fields/columns in the outputs (eplus<sizing type>.txt files are created) but these are not necessarily lined
up for easy printing.
Note that both tab and comma separated files easily import into Excel™ or other spreadsheet programs.
The tab delimited files can also be viewed by text editors, word processing programs and easily converted
to “tables” within those programs.
1.17.6 Sizing:Zone
The Sizing:Zone object provides the data needed to perform a zone design air flow calculation for a single
zone. This calculation assumes a variable amount of supply air at a fixed temperature and humidity. The
information needed consists of the zone inlet supply air conditions: temperature and humidity ratio for
heating and cooling. The calculation is done for every design day included in the input. The maximum
cooling load and air flow and the maximum heating load and air flow are then saved for the system level
design calculations and for the component automatic sizing calculations.
The Sizing:Zone object is also the place where the user can specify the design outdoor air flow rate
by referencing the name of a design specification outdoor air object. This can be specified in a number of
ways (ref. DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir).This data is saved for use in the system sizing calculation or
for sizing zone components that use outdoor air.
The user can also place limits on the heating and design cooling air flow rates. See Heating Design
Air Flow Method and Cooling Design Air Flow Method below and the explanations of the various heating
and cooling flow input fields.
The user can ask the zone design calculation to take into account the effect of a Dedicated Outdoor Air
System on the zone design loads and airflow rates. The design calculation will calculate the heat addition
rate to the zone of an idealized SOA system and add or subtract the result from the total zone loads and
flow rates.
1.17.6.1 Inputs
1.17.6.1.1 Field: Zone Name
The name of the Zone corresponding to this Sizing:Zone object. This is the zone for which the design
air flow calculation will be made using the input data of this Sizing:Zone Object.
1.17.6.1.2 Field: Zone Cooling Design Supply Air Temperature Input Method
The input must be either SupplyAirTemperature or TemperatureDifference. SupplyAirTemperature
means that the user inputs from the fields of Zone Cooling Design Supply Air Temperature will be used to
determine the zone cooling design air flow rates. TemperatureDifference means that the user inputs from
the fields of Zone Cooling Design Supply Air Temperature Difference will be used to determine the zone
cooling design air flow rates.
flow rate. This field is only used when Zone Cooling Design Supply Air Temperature Input Method =
SupplyAirTemperature.
1.17.6.1.5 Field: Zone Heating Design Supply Air Temperature Input Method
The input must be either SupplyAirTemperature or TemperatureDifference. SupplyAirTemperature
means that the user inputs from the fields of Zone Heating Design Supply Air Temperature will be used to
determine the zone heating design air flow rates. TemperatureDifference means that the user inputs from
the fields of Zone Heating Design Supply Air Temperature Difference will be used to determine the zone
heating design air flow rates.
1.17.6.1.15 Field: Cooling Minimum Air Flow per Zone Floor Area
The minimum zone cooling volumetric flow rate per square meter (units are m3 /s-m2 ). This field is
used when Cooling Design Air Flow Method is specified as DesignDayWithLimit. In this case it sets a
lower bound on the zone design cooling air flow rate. In all cases the maximum flow derived from Cooling
Minimum Air Flow per Zone Floor Area, Cooling Minimum Air Flow, Cooling Minimum Air Flow Fraction
and the design outdoor air flow rate (including VRP adjustments) is used to set a minimum supply air flow
rate for the zone for VAV systems. The default is 0.000762, corresponding to 0.15 cfm/ft2 . The applicable
sizing factor is not applied to this value.
flow rate (including VRP adjustments) is used to set a minimum supply air flow rate for the zone for VAV
systems. The default is 0.2. This input is currently used in sizing the VAV air terminal unit and fan
minimum flow rate. It does not currently affect other component autosizing.
1.17.6.1.20 Field: Heating Maximum Air Flow per Zone Floor Area
The maximum zone heating volumetric flow rate per square meter (units are m3 /s-m2 ). This field is
used when Heating Design Air Flow Method is specified as DesignDayWithLimit. In this case it sets an
upper bound on the zone design heating air flow rate. For this and the next two input fields, the maximum
flow derived from Heating Maximum Air Flow per Zone Floor Area, Heating Maximum Air Flow, and
Heating Maximum Air Flow Fraction is used to set a maximum heating supply air flow rate for the zone
for VAV systems. The default is 0.002032, corresponding to 0.40 cfm/ft2 . If the maximum heating design
flow rate calculated using these input fields is greater than the design heating flow rate calculated during
sizing, these input fields have no impact on sizing. It may be more appropriate to select only one of these
three fields to calculate the maximum heating design flow rate (i.e., if one ore more of these three fields is
0, it will not be used in calculating the maximum heating design flow rate).
default is 0.3. If the maximum heating design flow rate calculated using these input fields is greater than
the design heating flow rate calculated during sizing, these input fields have no impact on sizing. It may
be more appropriate to select only one of these three fields to calculate the maximum heating design flow
rate (i.e., if one ore more of these three fields is 0, it will not be used in calculating the maximum heating
design flow rate).
1.17.6.1.26 Field: Dedicated Outdoor Air Low Temperatue Setpoint for Design
The lower setpoint temperature to be used with the DOAS design control strategy. The units are
degrees C. The default is autosized to the values given above for the three design control strategies.
1.17.6.1.27 Field: Dedicated Outdoor Air High Temperature Setpoint for Design
The higher setpoint temperature to be used with the DOAS design control strategy. The units are
degrees C. The default is autosized to the values given above for the three design control strategies.
An IDF example:
Sizing:Zone ,
SPACE5 -1, !- Name of a zone
14., !- Zone cooling design supply air temperature {C}
50., !- Zone heating design supply air temperature {C}
0.009 , !- Zone cooling design supply air humidity ratio {kg -H2O/kg -air}
0.004 , !- Zone heating design supply air humidity ratio {kg -H2O/kg -air}
DSOA1 , !- Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name
0.0, !- zone heating sizing factor
0.0, !- zone cooling sizing factor
660 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
DesignSpecification :OutdoorAir ,
DSOA1 , !- Name
SUM , !- Outdoor Air Method
0.00236 , !- Outdoor Air Flow per Person
0.000305 , !- Outdoor Air Flow per Zone Floor Area
0.0, !- Outdoor Air Flow per Zone
0.0, !- Outdoor Air Flow Air Changes per Hour
; !- Outdoor Air Flow Rate Fraction Schedule Name
DesignSpecification :ZoneAirDistribution ,
DSZADO1 , !- Name
1.0, !- Zone Air Distribution Effectiveness in Cooling Mode
1.0, !- Zone Air Distribution Effectiveness in Heating Mode
, !- Zone Air Distribution Effectiveness Schedule Name
0.3; !- Zone Secondary Recirculation Fraction
1.17.6.2 Outputs
The zone design air flow rates and loads are output onto the local file “epluszsz.<ext>” where <ext> is the
extension from the sizing style object (default is csv – a comma separated file epluszsz.csv). The columns
are clearly labeled. It will easily import into Excel or other spreadsheet program that accepts delimited
files. All of these values are design air flow rates and loads calculated by the program. No sizing factors
have been applied.
The calculated zone design air flow rates and the user input or altered zone design air flow rates are
also reported on the eplusout.eio file. The values are printed out for each zone as comma separated records
beginning with Zone Sizing. Items output on the eio file are: zone name, load type (heating or cooling),
design load, calculated design air flow rate, user design air flow rate, design day name, time of peak, outside
temperature at peak, outside humidity ratio at peak.
1.17.7 DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing
This object is used to describe general sizing and scalable sizing methods which are referenced by zone
HVAC equipment objects. It is optional input field in zone HVAC objects. If a name of this optional
input is not specified or is blank then the sizing method or input specified in the parent object is used. If
the name of this object is entered, then the values or method specified overrides the sizing method in the
parent zone HVAC objects. This object is meant to provide scalable sizing method to users. The name
of this object is an optional input field in the zoneHVAC objects. When this name in not specified in the
zone HVAC object the sizing method or the value specified in the zone HVAC object will be used.
List of zoneHVAC objects than can reference this object include:
• ZoneHVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow
1.17. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 661
• ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalAirConditioner
• ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalHeatPump
• ZoneHVAC:WaterToAirHeatPump
• ZoneHVAC:WindowAirConditioner
• ZoneHVAC:UnitHeater
• ZoneHVAC:UnitVentilator
• ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil
• ZoneHVAC:VentilatedSlab
• ZoneHVAC:EvaporativeCoolerUnit
• ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem
The sizing methods input fields available in this objects are for supply air flow and capacity for heating
and cooling operating modes. Some zone HVAC equipment has single supply air flow rate input field that
serves both cooling and heating operating modes. So entering either of the cooling or heating scalable
sizing input field is sufficient. When there are separate input fields for cooling, heating, no-cooling, and
no-heating operating modes, the corresponding input fields are specified. The child components supply air
flow rate are also sized using scalable sizing methods specified in the parent objects. The methods allow
users to enter a fixed or hard sized values, autosizable, or scalable sizing methods. Methods allowed for siz-
ing supply air flow rates include: SupplyAirFlowRate, FractionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow, FractionOfAu-
tosizedHeatingAirflow, FlowPerFloorArea, FlowPerCoolingCapacity, and FlowPerHeatingCapacity. The
different sizing options are defined as follows:
• SupplyAirFlowRate: entered when it is intended that the user specified either hard value or the
simulation engine autosize the supply air flow rates for cooling, heating, and no-cooling or no-heating
operating modes.
• FlowPerFloorArea: entered when it is intended that the simulation engine determine the supply
air flow rates from the user specified supply air flow rates per unit floor area and the zone floor area
of the zone served by the zone HVAC equipment.
• FlowPerHeatingCapacity: entered when it is intended that the simulation engine determines the
supply air flow rates from the user specified supply air flow per heating capacity value and autosized
heating design capacity.
662 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
The Design Specification ZoneHVAC Sizing object also has input fields for sizing or scalable sizing of
cooling and heating capacity. However, most of the parent zone HVAC objects do not have input fields
for sizing capacities. So, the capacity scalable sizing fields in the parent objects are used for sizing child
components capacity sizings. The scalable capacity sizing may be indirectly impacted by the scalable sup-
ply air flow rates sizing values. Moreover, the autosized cold water, hot water and steam flow rates in the
parent zone HVAC objects (e.g. FanCoils, UnitHeaters, UnitVentilators, and VentilatedSlabs) and capacity
in child components are determined using the scalable sizing methods. Sizing methods allowed for cool-
ing and heating capacity include: CoolingDesignCapacity, HeatingDesignCapacity, CapacityPerFloorArea,
FractionOfAutosizedCoolingCapacity, FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity.
• CoolingDesignCapacity: entered when it is intended that user specifies either a hard sized cool-
ing capacity value or the simulation engine autosizes cooling capacity value for the cooling design
capacity.
• HeatingDesignCapacity: entered when it is intended that user specifies either a hard sized heating
capacity value or the simulation engine autosized heating capacity value for the heating design
capacity.
• CapacityPerFloorArea: is entered when it is intended that the simulation engine determines the
cooling or heating capacity from user specified capacity per floor area value and the floor area of the
zone served by the zone HVAC equipment.
• FractionOfAutosizedCoolingCapacity: entered when it is intended that the simulation engine
sizes the cooling capacity from the user specified capacity fraction and autosized cooling design
capacity value.
• FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity: entered when it is intended that the simulation engine
sizes the heating capacity from the user specified capacity fraction and autosized heating design
capacity value.
Description of the input fields of the design specification zone HVAC sizing object “DesignSpecifica-
tion:ZoneHVAC:Sizing”:
1.17.7.1 Inputs
1.17.7.1.1 Field: Name
Unique identifier name of the DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. This sizing specification
object referenced by a zone HVAC equipment whose design calculation will be made using the input data
of this object.
1.17.7.1.4 Field: Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
Enter the cooling supply air volume flow rate per zone conditioned floor area in m3/s-m2. This field
is required field when the Cooling Design air Flow Method is FlowPerFloorArea. This field may be left
blank if a cooling coil is not included in the zone HVAC equipment or the Cooling Design Air Flow Method
is not FlowPerFloorArea. The program calculates the cooling supply air volume flow rate from the zone
conditioned floor area served by the zone HVAC equipment and the flow per unit area value specified by
the user. Zone sizing object (Sizing:Zone) is not required.
1.17.7.1.5 Field: Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate
Enter the cooling supply air volume flow rate as a fraction of the autosized cooling supply air flow rate.
This input field is required when the Cooling Design air Flow Method is FractionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow.
This input field may be left blank if a cooling coil is not included in the zone HVAC equipment or the
Cooling Design air Flow Method is not FractionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow. The program calculates the
cooling supply air volume flow rate from the design autosized cooling supply air flow rate and user specified
fraction. Zone sizing object (Sizing:Zone) is required.
1.17.7.1.6 Field: Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit Cooling Capacity
{m3/s-W}
Enter the cooling supply air volume flow rate per unit cooling capacity in m3/s-W. This input field
is required when the Cooling Design air Flow Method is FlowPerCoolingCapacity. This field may be left
blank if a cooling coil is not included in the zone HVAC equipment or the Cooling Design air Flow Method
is not FlowPerCoolingCapacity. The program calculates the cooling supply air volume flow rate from the
design autosized cooling capacity and user specified flow per cooling capacity value. Zone sizing object
(Sizing:Zone) is required.
1.17.7.1.7 Field: Supply Air Flow Rate Method When No Cooling or Heating is
Required
Enter the method used to determine the supply air volume flow rate when No Cooling or Heating
is required. Inputs allowed are None, SupplyAirFlowRate, FlowPerFloorArea, FractionOfAutosizedCoolin-
gAirflow, and FractionOfAutosizedHeatingAirflow. None is used when a cooling or heating coil is not
included in the zone HVAC equipment or this field may be left blank. SupplyAirFlowRate means user
specifies the magnitude of supply air flow rate or the program calculates the design supply air volume flow
rate if autosize is specified. FlowPerFloorArea means the program calculates the supply air volume flow
rate from the zone floor area served by the zone HVAC unit and Flow Per Floor Area value specified by
user. FractionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow means the program calculates the supply air volume flow rate
from user specified fraction and autosized design cooling supply air volume flow rate value determined
by the program. FractionOfAutosizedHeatingAirflow means the program calculates the supply air volume
flow rate from user specified fraction and autosized heating supply air flow rate value determined by the
program. The default method is SupplyAirFlowRate.
1.17.7.1.8 Field: Supply Air Flow Rate When No Cooling or Heating is Required
{m3/s}
664 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Enter the magnitude of the supply air volume flow rate when no cooling or heating is required in m3/s.
This input is an alternative to using the program auto-calculated value. This input is a required field when
the Supply Air Flow Rate Method When No Cooling or Heating is Required is SupplyAirFlowRate. This
field may be left blank if a cooling coil is not included in the zone HVAC equipment. This input field is
also autosizable.
1.17.7.1.9 Field: Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area When No Clg or Htg is
Required {m3/s-m2}
Enter the magnitude of supply air volume flow rate per zone floor area in m3/s-m2. This input
is a required field when Supply Air Flow Rate Method When No Cooling or Heating is Required is
FlowPerFloorArea. The program calculates the supply air flow rate when no cooling or heating is required
from user specified flow per floor area and the zone area served by current zoneHVAC equipment.
1.17.7.1.10 Field: Fraction of Design Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate When No Clg
or Htg Required
Enter the fraction of supply air volume flow rate as a fraction of the autosized cooling supply air flow
rate. This input field is required field when Supply Air Flow Rate Method When No Cooling or Heating
is Required is FractionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow. The program calculates the supply air flow rate when
no cooling or heating is required from user specified fraction and the design cooling autosized supply air
flow rate.
1.17.7.1.11 Field: Fraction of Design Heating Supply Air Flow Rate When No Clg or
Htg Required
Enter the fraction of supply air volume flow rate as a fraction of the autosized cooling supply air flow
rate. This input field is required field when Supply Air Flow Rate Method When No Cooling or Heating
is Required is FractionOfAutosizedHeatingAirflow. The program calculates the supply air flow rate when
no cooling or heating is required from user specified fraction and the design heating autosized supply air
flow rate.
1.17.7.1.14 Field: Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
Enter the heating supply air volume flow rate per zone conditioned floor area in m3/s-m2. This field is
required field when the Heating Design air Flow Method is FlowPerFloorArea. This field may be left blank
if a heating coil is not included in the zone HVAC equipment or the Heating Design Air Flow Method
is not FlowPerFloorArea. The program calculates the heating supply air volume flow rate from the zone
conditioned floor area served by the zone HVAC equipment and the flow per unit area value specified by
the user.
1.17.7.1.15 Field: Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate
Enter the heating supply air volume flow rate as a fraction of the autosized heating supply air flow
rate. This input field is required when the Heating Design air Flow Method is FractionOfAutosizedHeatin-
gAirflow. This input field may be left blank if a heating coil is not included in the zone HVAC equipment
or the Heating Design air Flow Method is not FractionOfAutosizedHeatingAirflow. The program calculates
the heating supply air volume flow rate from the design autosized heating supply air flow rate and user
specified fraction.
1.17.7.1.16 Field: Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit Heating Capacity
{m3/s-W}
Enter the heating supply air volume flow rate per unit heating capacity in m3/s-W. This input field
is required when the Heating Design air Flow Method is FlowPerHeatingCapacity. This field may be left
blank if a cooling coil is not included in the zone HVAC equipment or the Heating Design air Flow Method
is not FlowPerHeatingCapacity. The program calculates the heating supply air volume flow rate from the
design autosized heating capacity and user specified flow per unit heating capacity value.
not included in the zone HVAC equipment or the Cooling Design Capacity Method is not CapacityPer-
FloorArea. The program calculates the cooling capacity from floor area of the zone served by the zone
HVAC equipment and the cooling capacity per unit floor area value specified by the user.
DesignSpecification :ZoneHVAC:Sizing ,
VRFDesignSpec1 , !- Name
SupplyAirFlowRate , !- Cooling Design Air Flow Method
autosize , !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area
, !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity {m3/s-W}
SupplyAirFlowRate , !- Supply Air Flow Rate Method When No Cooling or Heating is Required
1.17. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 667
DesignSpecification :ZoneHVAC:Sizing ,
VRFDesignSpec2 , !- Name
FlowPerFloorArea , !- Cooling Design Air Flow Method
, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate
3.6311418E-03, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area
, !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity {m3/s-W}
FlowPerFloorArea , !- Supply Air Flow Rate Method When No Cooling or Heating is Required
, !- Supply Air Flow Rate When No Cooling or Heating is Required
3.6311418E-03, !- Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area When No Clg or Htg is Required
, !- Fraction of Autosized Design Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate When No Clg or
Htg
, !- Fraction of Autosized Design Heating Supply Air Flow Rate When No Clg or
Htg
FlowPerFloorArea , !- Heating Design Air Flow Method
, !- Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate
3.6311418E-03, !- Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area
, !- Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Heating Capacity
CoolingDesignCapacity , !- Cooling Design Capacity Method
autosize , !- Cooling Design Capacity {W}
, !- Cooling Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}
, !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Capacity {-}
HeatingDesignCapacity , !- Heating Design Capacity Method
autosize , !- Heating Design Capacity {W}
, !- Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}
; !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Capacity {-}
DesignSpecification :ZoneHVAC:Sizing ,
VRFDesignSpec3 , !- Name
FractionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow , !- Cooling Design Air Flow Method
, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area
0.5, !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity {m3/s-W}
FractionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow , !- Supply Air Flow Rate Method When No Cooling or Heating is
Required
, !- Supply Air Flow Rate When No Cooling or Heating is Required
, !- Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area When No Clg or Htg is Required
0.5, !- Fraction of Autosized Design Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate When No Clg or
Htg
, !- Fraction of Autosized Design Heating Supply Air Flow Rate When No Clg or
Htg
FractionOfAutosizedHeatingAirflow , !- Heating Design Air Flow Method
, !- Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area
0.5, !- Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Heating Capacity
CoolingDesignCapacity , !- Cooling Design Capacity Method
autosize , !- Cooling Design Capacity {W}
668 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
DesignSpecification :ZoneHVAC:Sizing ,
VRFDesignSpec4 , !- Name
FlowPerCoolingCapacity , !- Cooling Design Air Flow Method
, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area
, !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate
2.9541628E-05, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity {m3/s-W}
FractionOfAutosizedHeatingAirflow , !- Supply Air Flow Rate Method When No Cooling or Heating is
Required
, !- Supply Air Flow Rate When No Cooling or Heating is Required
, !- Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area When No Clg or Htg is Required
, !- Fraction of Autosized Design Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate When No Clg or
Htg
0.413231177 , !- Fraction of Autosized Design Heating Supply Air Flow Rate When No Clg or
Htg
FlowPerHeatingCapacity , !- Heating Design Air Flow Method
, !- Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area
, !- Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate
2.9541628E-05, !- Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Heating Capacity
CoolingDesignCapacity , !- Cooling Design Capacity Method
autosize , !- Cooling Design Capacity {W}
, !- Cooling Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}
, !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Capacity {-}
HeatingDesignCapacity , !- Heating Design Capacity Method
autosize , !- Heating Design Capacity {W}
, !- Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}
; !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Capacity {-}
1.17.8 DesignSpecification:AirTerminal:Sizing
This object modifies the sizing of an air loop terminal unit. It may be referenced by a Zone-
HVAC:AirDistributionUnit or AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled object. The values specified here are
applied to the base sizing results from the corresponding Sizing:Zone inputs. Any given DesignSpecifica-
tion:AirTerminal:Sizing object may be used by multiple terminal units with similar characteristics.
1.17.8.1 Inputs
1.17.8.1.1 Field: Name
Name of the design specification air terminal sizing object. This name may be referenced by a Zone-
HVAC:AirDistributionUnit or AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled object.
DesignSpecification :AirTerminal:Sizing ,
Recirculation System A Terminal Sizing , !- Name
0.6, !- Fraction of Design Cooling Load
0.8, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Temperature Difference Ratio
1.0, !- Fraction of Design Heating Load
1.0, !- Heating Design Supply Air Temperature Difference Ratio
0 .0; !- Fraction of Minimum Outdoor Air Flow
1.17.9 Sizing:System
The Sizing:System object contains the input needed to perform a central forced air system design air flow,
heating capacity, and cooling capacity calculation for a system serving one or more zones. The information
needed consists of the outside environmental conditions and the design supply air temperatures, outdoor
air flow rate, and minimum system air flow ratio.
The outside conditions come from the design days in the input. A system sizing calculation is performed
for every design day in the input file and the resulting maximum heating and cooling air flow rates and
capacities are saved for use in the component sizing calculations.
Supply air conditions are specified by inputting a supply air temperature for cooling, a supply air
temperature for heating, and a preheat temperature.
The system sizing calculation sums the zone design air flow rates to obtain a system supply air flow rate.
The design conditions and the outdoor air flow rate are used to calculate a design mixed air temperature.
The temperature plus the design supply air temperatures allows the calculation of system design heating
and cooling capacities.
1.17.9.1 Inputs
1.17.9.1.1 Field: AirLoop Name
The name of the AirLoopHVAC corresponding to this Sizing:System object. This is the air system for
which the design calculation will be made using the input data of this Sizing:System Object.
1.17.9.1.18 Field: Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
Enter the cooling supply air volume flow rate per zone conditioned floor area in m3/s-m2. This field
is required field when the Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FlowPerFloorArea. This field may be
left blank if a cooling coil is not included in the airloop or the Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method is
672 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
not FlowPerFloorArea. The program calculates the cooling supply air volume flow rate from the cooled
floor area served by the air loop and the Flow Per Unit Area value specified by the user.
1.17.9.1.19 Field: Cooling Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Supply Air Flow
Rate
Enter the cooling supply air volume flow rate as a fraction of the airloop autosized cooling supply air
flow rate. This input field is required when the Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FractionOfAuto-
sizedCoolingAirflow. This input field may be left blank if a cooling coil is not included in the airloop or the
Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method is not FractionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow. The program calculates
the cooling supply air volume flow rate from the design autosized cooling supply air flow rate and user
specified fraction.
1.17.9.1.20 Field: Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit Cooling Capacity {m3/s-
W}
Enter the cooling supply air volume flow rate per unit cooling capacity in m3/s-W. This input field is
required when the Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FlowPerCoolingCapacity. This field may be
left blank if a cooling coil is not included in the airloop or the Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method is
not FlowPerCoolingCapacity. The program calculates the airloop cooling supply air volume flow rate from
the design autosized cooling capacity and user specified Flow Per Cooling Capacity value.
1.17.9.1.23 Field: Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
Enter the heating supply air volume flow rate per zone conditioned floor area in m3/s-m2. This field
is required field when the Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FlowPerFloorArea. This field may be
left blank if a heating coil is not included in the airloop or the Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method is
1.17. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 673
not FlowPerFloorArea. The program calculates the heating supply air volume flow rate from the heated
or cooled floor area served by the air loop and the Flow Per Unit Area value specified by the user.
1.17.9.1.24 Field: Heating Fraction of Autosized Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
Enter the heating supply air volume flow rate as a fraction of the airloop autosized heating supply air
flow rate. This input field is required when the Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FractionOfAuto-
sizedHeatingAirflow. This input field may be left blank if heating coil is not included in the airloop or the
Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method is not FractionOfAutosizedHeatingAirflow. The program calculates
the heating supply air volume flow rate from the design autosized heating supply air flow rate and user
specified fraction.
1.17.9.1.25 Field: Heating Fraction of Autosized Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
Enter the heating supply air volume flow rate as a fraction of the airloop autosized cooling supply air
flow rate. This input field is required when the Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FractionOfAuto-
sizedCoolingAirflow. This input field may be left blank if heating coil is not included in the airloop or the
Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method is not FractionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow. The program calculates
the heating supply air volume flow rate from the design autosized cooling supply air flow rate and user
specified fraction.
1.17.9.1.26 Field: Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit Heating Capacity
{m3/s-W}
Enter the heating supply air volume flow rate per unit heating capacity in m3/s-W. This input field
is required when the Heating Design air Flow Method is FlowPerCoolingCapacity. This field may be
left blank if a heating coil is not included in the airloop or the Heating Design air Flow Method is not
FlowPerHeatingCapacity. The program calculates the airloop heating supply air volume flow rate from the
design autosized heating capacity and user specified Flow Per Heating Capacity value.
is specified, then the autosized design cooling capacity determined by the program is used. CoolingDe-
signCapacity means user specifies the magnitude of cooling capacity or the program calculates the design
cooling capacity if autosize is specified. CapacityPerFloorArea means the program calculates the design
cooling capacity from user specified cooling capacity per floor area and floor area of the zones served by
the airloop. FractionOfAutosizedCoolingCapacity means the program calculates the design cooling capac-
ity from user specified fraction and the auto-sized design cooling capacity. If the value this input field
is blank or specified as None, then the next three input fields are not required. The default method is
CoolingDesignCapacity.
Sizing:System ,
VAV Sys 1, !- AirLoop Name
sensible , !- Type of Load to Size On
autosize , !- Design Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.3, !- Minimum System Air Flow Ratio
4.5, !- Preheat Design Temperature {C}
.008, !- Preheat Design Humidity Ratio {kgWater/kgDryAir}
11.0, !- Precool Design Temperature {C}
.008, !- Precool Design Humidity Ratio {kgWater/kgDryAir}
12.8, !- Central Cooling Design Supply Air Temperature {C}
16.7, !- Central Heating Design Supply Air Temperature {C}
noncoincident , !- Sizing Option
no , !- 100% Outdoor Air in Cooling
no , !- 100% Outdoor Air in Heating
0.008 , !- Central Cooling Design Supply Air Humidity Ratio {kgWater/kgDryAir}
0.008 , !- Central Heating Design Supply Air Humidity Ratio {kgWater/kgDryAir}
designday , !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method
0, !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
, !- Cooling Fraction of Autosized Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {-}
, !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit Cooling Capacity {m3/s-W}
designday , !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method
0, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
, !- Heating Fraction of Autosized Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {-}
, !- Heating Fraction of Autosized Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {-}
, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit Heating Capacity {m3/s-W}
ZoneSum , !- System Outdoor Air Method
0.5, !- Zone Maximum Outdoor Air Fraction
CoolingDesignCapacity , !- Cooling Design Capacity Method
autosize , !- Cooling Design Capacity {W}
, !- Cooling Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}
, !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Capacity {-}
HeatingDesignCapacity , !- Heating Design Capacity Method
autosize , !- Heating Design Capacity {W}
, !- Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}
; !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Capacity {-}
676 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.17.9.2 Outputs
The system design air flow rates and heating and cooling capacities are output onto the local file
“eplusssz.<ext>” where <ext> is the extension from the sizing style object (default is csv – a comma
separated file eplusssz.csv). The columns are clearly labeled. It will easily import into Excel or other
spreadsheet program that accepts delimited files. The results are calculated values and do not include any
user input system flow rates.
The calculated system design air flow rates and the user input system design air flow rates are also
reported on the eplusout.eio file. The values are printed out for each system as comma separated records
beginning with System Sizing. An example is:
! <System Sizing Information >c++, System Name , Field Description , Value
System Sizing , VAV SYS 1, Calculated Cooling Design Air Flow Rate [m3/s], 1.3194
System Sizing , VAV SYS 1, User Cooling Design Air Flow Rate [m3/s], 1.5000
System Sizing , VAV SYS 1, Calculated Heating Design Air Flow Rate [m3/s], 0.90363
System Sizing , VAV SYS 1, User Heating Design Air Flow Rate [m3/s], 1.0000
1.17.10 Sizing:Plant
The Sizing:Plant object contains the input needed for the program to calculate plant loop flow rates and
equipment capacities when autosizing. This information is initially used by components that use water for
heating or cooling such as hot or chilled water coils to calculate their maximum water flow rates. These
flow rates are then summed for use in calculating the Plant Loop flow rates.
The program will size any number of chilled water, hot water, condenser water and other plant loops.
There should be one Sizing:Plant object for each plant loop that is to be autosized.
1.17.10.1 Inputs
1.17.10.1.1 Field: Plant or Condenser Loop Name
The name of a Plant Loop or Condenser Loop object corresponding to this Sizing:Plant object. This
is the plant loop for which this data will be used for calculating the loop flow rate.
Sizing:Plant ,
Chilled Water Loop , ! name of loop
Cooling , ! type of loop
7.22, ! chilled water supply temperature
6.67, ! chilled water delta T
NonCoincident , !- Sizing Option
1, !- Zone Timesteps in Averaging Window
GlobalCoolingSizingFactor ; !- Coincident Sizing Factor Mode
1.17.10.2 Outputs
The loop flow rates are reported on the eplusout.eio file along with the component sizing results.
When coincident plant sizing method is used, the eio file contains special summary report with var-
ious details and interim values from the calculations, under the following record header: ! , Plant Loop
Name, Sizing Pass {#}, Measured Mass Flow{kg/s}, Measured Demand {W}, Demand Calculated Mass
Flow{kg/s}, Sizes Changed {Yes/No}, Previous Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}, New Volume Flow Rate
{m3/s}, Demand Check Applied {Yes/No}, Sizing Factor {}, Normalized Change {}, Specific Heat{}.
Components are linked together to form various loops within the simulation. Thus, the output node
from one component also serves as the inlet node to the next component. Loops are constructed by defining
these loops and also defining the components on the loops. The figure below shows a generic example of
the loop-node concept.
Loop nodes are a key defining feature in EnergyPlus. As a result, it is recommended that one of the
first steps taken in defining an HVAC system in EnergyPlus be the definition of a node diagram or map.
This is helpful for visualization of the entire system. Such a map could be created electronically within an
interface or could be kept in the background out of the sight of the user.
So that these loops are manageable and more clearly defined both in the input and in the simulation,
four different loop sections can be defined in an EnergyPlus input file. In general, these four types are in
essence two pairs of loop sections that make up two distinct types of loops: a zone/air loop and a plant
loop. As of Version 7, plant loops and condenser loops have been consolidated to be largely the same. The
four loop section types are defined below.
Air Loop Supply Side: The air loop is defined by the section of the zone/air loop that starts after
the zone return streams are combined and continues on until just before any air stream(s) are branched off
to individual zones. The starting point of the air loop is fairly straightforward. The ending point is slightly
more complex but can be understood with some examples. For instance, in a terminal reheat system, the
1.19. GROUP – NODE-BRANCH MANAGEMENT 679
end of the air loop would typically be considered the node following the cooling coil. In a dual duct system,
the air loop would have two ending points that would correspond to the nodes after the cooling coil and
after the heating coil/humidifier. In most cases, the air loop has a single starting point and up to two
ending points (for a 2 deck system). An outdoor air subsystem can be included in the supply side for
ventilation and relief air.
Air Loop Zone Equipment: The zone equipment section of the input file is defined as more or less
the rest of the zone/air loop (outside air is handled separately as a subset of the air loop). This includes
everything from where the ducts are split to serve various zones up through where the return ducts from
various zones are mixed into a single return duct. Zone equipment can include dampers and reheat coils
as well as zone specific conditioning systems such as thermostatic baseboard or a window air conditioner.
Most control issues are typically dealt with in the zone equipment section of the simulation.
Plant Loop Demand Side: One side of the plant is where energy is “demanded” by various com-
ponents that make up the air loop or zone equipment. Typically, this is the water side of equipment such
as coils, baseboard, radiant heating and cooling, etc. In the case of a condenser loop, energy is typically
“demanded” by a chiller condenser or other water source heat pump. The demand side of this loop can
also include mixers, flow splitters, and a bypass.
Plant Loop Supply Side: The other side of the plant loop is where energy is “supplied” by various
components. The components typically found on the supply side include pumps, boilers, chillers, purchased
heating and cooling, ice storage, etc. In the case of a condenser, the components would be cooling tower,
fluid cooler, or ground source heat exchanger, etc. As with the demand side, this loop can also include
mixers, flow splitters, and a bypass.
The section of the input file for describing the HVAC system tends to follow this structure presented
above. Both plant and condenser loops are defined with a master description and then branch off into
supply and demand side details. Linkage between the two sides is done using node names in the master
statement. The air loop and zone equipment descriptions are slightly more complex due to the wide range
of potential systems that are anticipated. Note that in every section controls become a key element and
must be addressed. Each of the following sections details either a loop, a portion of a loop, or controls.
1.19.1 NodeList
For convenience, the NodeList object can be used to identify all the nodes for a particular use. A node list
is not always required. The advantage of listing all the nodes in this manner is that input fields in other
objects that ask for a node name can refer to either a single node or a list of nodes using this object. .
There are other lines of input syntax that require the use of a NodeList as part of the input. These
syntax items include: OutdoorAir:NodeList and the SetpointManager objects. In these two cases, the use
of a NodeList statement is mandatory if there is more than one node in this particular “list”. For example,
if the outside air only has a single inlet node, then the name of that node can replace the node list name
in the input syntax. As a result of this mandatory specification of node lists for certain types of input,
nodes can, obviously, and may be members of more than one list.
1.19.1.1 Inputs
1.19.1.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha designation must be unique among all the Node List Names. It is used as reference in
various objects (e.g. OutdoorAir:NodeList).
680 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.19.1.2 Outputs
A simple detail of Nodes and numbers assigned appears in the eplusout.bnd file:
! <Node >,<NodeNumber >,<Node Name >,<Node Fluid Type >,<\# Times Node Referenced After Definition >
Node ,1, OUTSIDE AIR INLET NODE 1,Air ,2
Node ,2,VAV SYS 1 INLET NODE ,Air ,3
Node ,3,MIXED AIR NODE 1,Air ,5
Node ,4,MAIN COOLING COIL 1 OUTLET NODE ,Air ,3
Node ,5,MAIN HEATING COIL 1 OUTLET NODE ,Air ,4
Node ,6,VAV SYS 1 OUTLET NODE ,Air ,7
The following node variable is also available for system nodes that are for “air”:
• HVAC, Average, System Node Current Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
The following node variables are “advanced” and normally used for debugging unusual
cases:
The following node variable reports node carbon dioxide concentration when carbon diox-
ide is simulated (ref. ZoneAirContaminantBalance):
The following node variable reports node generic contaminant concentration when generic
contaminant is simulated (ref. ZoneAirContaminantBalance):
1.19.1.2.13 System Node Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3 /s]
The current volume flow rate at a system node in m3 /s. This is report is calculated from the mass
flow using standardized values for density that do not vary over time (except for steam which varies with
quality). For water nodes this density is determined at a temperature of 5.05ºC. For air nodes this
density is determined for dry air at the standard barometric pressure for the location’s elevation, and a
temperature of 20.0ºC. For air nodes, also see the report “System Node Current Density Volume Flow
Rate.”
1.19.1.2.21 System Node Current Density Volume Flow Rate [m3 /s]
The current volume flow rate at a system node in m3 /s based on the current density. This report
differs from the one called “System Node Standard Density Volume Flow Rate” in that it uses an air
density calculated for the current moist air conditions rather than a standard density.
1.19.2 BranchList
A branch list is intended to define the branches or portions of a particular loop that are present on an
individual plant or condenser loop. Thus, the BranchList syntax simply provides a list of branch names
(see Branch syntax) that then refer to more detailed syntax in another part of the input file. The syntax
for describing a list of branches is given below.
Branches in BranchList objects should be listed in flow order: inlet branch, then parallel branches,
then outlet branch. Branches (within a splitter/mixer) are simulated in the order listed.
1.19.2.1 Inputs
1.19.2.1.1 Field: Name
A unique name to identify the branch list.
1.19.2.2 Outputs
No output directly related to Branch Lists current is presented.
1.19.3 Branch
Branches can be considered the mid-level grouping of items in the EnergyPlus HVAC loop scheme. Com-
ponents are the lowest level of information. A collection of components in series forms a branch. Every
branch must have at least one component, but it may have several components in series. The air loop
also has “unitary” objects that are compound objects that wrap components and when they are used it
is the unitary objects that appear on the Branch and not the child components. The Branch defines
the order that components appear on the branch. Moreover, a collection of branches and their connecting
information form a loop. Therefore, a branch is a collection of components while a loop is a collection of
branches. Thus, components are specified for particular HVAC loops by assigning them to branches and
then connecting those branches together to form a loop.
For hydronic plant systems, the Branch object is used on both the demand side and the supply side of
the plant loop. For HVAC air systems, the Branch object is only used to describe the components on the
supply side of an air loop. The demand side of the air loop does not use the Branch object. The outside air
system appears on a Branch object but it does not use a Branch object itself to describe the components
that included in the outside air system. So-called “ZoneHVAC:*” equipment, HVAC equipment directly
associated with a zone, do not use the Branch object.
It should be noted that each component also has at least two nodes associated with it—an inlet node
and an outlet node. These nodes, by default, are also part of the branch to which their components are
assigned. Although it may appear redundant to list the node names in both the Branch and in the
component object being referenced, this is needed because many components are connected to more than
one loop at a time and the node names are needed here to distinguish which portion of the component is
being attached to this particular branch and its loop. It should be noted that each branch must have at
least one component on it. A “null” branch such as one where the first component on the loop is in reality
a splitter or mixer should be defined as a single Pipe component for plant, or a single Duct component for
air systems.
1.19.3.1 Inputs
1.19.3.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field is the unique, user-defined name that allows the branch to be referenced by other
elements such as the PlantLoop and CondenserLoop statements.
component defined by these items will be the first component on this branch, etc. through the end of the
list. This object is extensible and can use as many field sets as needed.
Branch ,
Air Loop Main Branch , !- Branch Name
, !- Pressure Drop Curve Name
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool:VAVChangeoverBypass , !- Comp1 Type
GasHeat CBVAV System , !- Comp1 Name
Air Loop Inlet Node , !- Comp1 Inlet Node Name
Air Loop Outlet Node; !- Comp1 Outlet Node Name
BRANCH ,
Air Loop Main Branch , !- Branch Name
, !- Pressure Drop Curve Name
FAN:SIMPLE:ConstVolume , !- Comp1 Type
Supply Fan 1, !- Comp1 Name
Air Loop Inlet Node , !- Comp1 Inlet Node Name
Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Comp1 Outlet Node Name
COIL:Water:DetailedFlatCooling , !- Comp2 Type
Detailed Cooling Coil , !- Comp2 Name
Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Comp2 Inlet Node Name
Air Loop Outlet Node; !- Comp2 Outlet Node Name
1.19.3.2 Outputs
The components on a branch are in series and that list is in simulation and connection order. Each branch
must obey the rules: the outlet for component 1 has to have the same node name as the inlet for component
2, and so forth.
Eplusout.err contains the test for “individual branch integrity”:
1.19. GROUP – NODE-BRANCH MANAGEMENT 687
The addition of pressure simulation for branches in fluid loops brings a new output at the branch level:
1.19.4 ConnectorList
A connector list is a collection of either one or two connection devices (Connector:Mixer or Connec-
tor:Splitter). Due to the definition of a loop in EnergyPlus, there is a maximum of one mixer and one
splitter allowed for each loop segment. This limitation still allows a tremendous amount of flexibility to
the user and can also still be solved within a reasonable amount of time and without a complex solver
routine. The connection list simply allows the specification of the types and names of these devices. This
allows the main loop statements to have the flexibility to have multiple lists that can have one or more
item.
1.19.4.1 Inputs
1.19.4.1.1 Field: Name
This field is an identifying name that will be referenced to main loop statements using this connector
list. The name must be unique among connector list names.
1.19.4.1.2 Field-Set: Connection Object Type and Identifying Name (up to 2 allowed)
Depending on the loop, either one or two of the connectors will be specified. If this particular loop only
has a single connector (either Connector:Mixer or Connector:Splitter), then only the first two items (type
of connection and identifying name of connector) are included. If both a mixer and splitter are present,
the additional type of connection and identifying name must be included. Note that the order that the
items appear is inconsequential—either the Connector:Mixer or the Connector:Splitter may appear first.
This will not affect the simulation.
1.19.4.2 Outputs
No output directly related to Connector Lists is currently presented.
1.19.5 Pipe:Adiabatic
In reality, every component is connected to its closest neighbors via a pipe or a duct. At the current time,
such detail is not needed in EnergyPlus. Thus, the Pipe:Adiabatic component is currently used more as
a connection device (for branches that really do not have any components associated with them) or as
a bypass than anything else. As such, its input is very simple and its algorithm is equally simple. The
current algorithm for a pipe is simply to pass the inlet conditions to the outlet of the pipe component.
1.19.5.1 Inputs
1.19.5.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the pipe.
Pipe:Adiabatic ,
Demand Side Inlet Pipe ,
CW Demand Inlet Node ,
CW Demand Entrance Pipe Outlet Node;
1.19.5.2 Outputs
There are no outputs directly related to Pipes.
1.19.6 Pipe:Adiabatic:Steam
To connect the various components in a steam system regardless of it being the condensate or the steam
side of the loop steam pipe needs to be used. In reality, every component is connected to its closest
neighbors via a pipe or a duct. At the current time, such detail is not needed in EnergyPlus. Thus, the
Pipe:Adiabatic:Steam component is currently used more as a connection device (for branches that really
1.19. GROUP – NODE-BRANCH MANAGEMENT 689
do not have any components associated with them). As such, its input is very simple and its algorithm is
equally simple. The current algorithm for a pipe is simply to pass the inlet conditions to the outlet of the
pipe component.
1.19.6.1 Inputs
1.19.6.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the steam pipe.
Pipe:Adiabatic:Steam ,
Steam Demand 1 Steam Inlet Pipe , !- PipeName
Steam Demand 1 Steam Demand Inlet Node , !- Inlet Node Name
Steam Demand 1 Steam Demand Entrance Pipe Outlet Node; !- Outlet Node Name
1.19.6.2 Outputs
There are no outputs directly related to Steam Pipes.
1.19.7 Pipe:Indoor
This object specifies inputs which are used to simulate the heat transfer from a plant loop pipe placed in
a zone or when a user schedule is used to specify an environment.
The data definition for object is shown below.
1.19.7.1 Inputs
1.19.7.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the pipe.
Pipe:Indoor ,
Pipe Heat Transfer Towers , !- name of outside panel heat exchanger
Insulated Pipe , !- Construction name
Condenser Tower Outlet Node , !- Comp1 Inlet Node Name
HTPipe Outlet Node , !- Comp1 Outlet Node Name
Water , !- Fluid name
Zone , !- field Ambient Temperature Outside Air Node name
0.05, !- Pipe Inside Diameter (thickness in construction data)
100.0; !- pipe length
1.19.7.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average, Pipe Fluid Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC,Average, Pipe Ambient Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC,SUM, Pipe Fluid Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,SUM, Pipe Ambient Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Pipe Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• HVAC,Average, Pipe Inlet Temperature [C]
• HVAC,Average, Pipe Outlet Temperature [C]
• HVAC,Average, Pipe Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.19. GROUP – NODE-BRANCH MANAGEMENT 691
1.19.8 Pipe:Outdoor
This object specifies inputs which are used to simulate the heat transfer from a plant loop pipe placed in
an outdoor environment.
1.19.8.1 Inputs
1.19.8.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the pipe.
Pipe:Outdoor ,
Pipe Heat Transfer Towers , !- name of outside panel heat exchanger
Insulated Pipe , !- Construction name
Condenser Tower Outlet Node , !- Comp1 Inlet Node Name
HTPipe Outlet Node , !- Comp1 Outlet Node Name
Water , !- Fluid name
PipeHeatTransfer Inlet Node , !- field Ambient Temperature Outside Air Node name
0.05, !- Pipe Inside Diameter (thickness given in construction data)
100.0; !- pipe length
1.19.8.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average, Pipe Fluid Heat Transfer Rate [W]
1.19.9 Pipe:Underground
This object specifies inputs which are used to simulate the heat transfer from a plant loop pipe placed
underground.
1.19.9.1 Inputs
1.19.9.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the pipe.
Pipe:Underground ,
Pipe Heat Transfer Towers , !- Name of Pipe
Insulated Buried Pipe , !- Construction Name
Condenser Tower Outlet Node , !- Inlet Node Name
HTPipe Outlet Node , !- Outlet Node Name
Water , !- Fluid Name
SunExposed , !- Sun Exposure
0.05, !- Pipe Inside Diameter
20.0, !- Pipe Length
Buried Pipe Soil , !- Soil Material
Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach , !- Type of Undisturbed Ground Temperature
Object
KATemps; !- Name of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object
Construction ,
Insulated Buried Pipe , !- Name
Buried Pipe Insulation , !- Layer #1
Buried Pipe Steel; !- Layer #2
Material ,
Buried Pipe Soil , !- Name
Smooth , !- Roughness
1.5, !- Thickness {m}
0.36, !- Conductivity {W/m-K}
2000.0 , !- Density {kg/m3}
1200.0 , !- Specific Heat {J/kg -K}
0.9, !- Thermal Absorptance
0.5, !- Solar Absorptance
0.5; !- Visible Absorptance
1.19.9.2 Outputs
• HVAC, Average, Pipe Fluid Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• PipingSystem:Underground:Domain
• PipingSystem:Underground:PipeCircuit
• PipingSystem:Underground:PipeSegment
1.19.11 PipingSystem:Underground:Domain
This section documents the domain object, which is used to specify information for the overall ground
domain, including thermal properties, mesh parameters, and surface interaction.
1.19.11.1 Inputs
1.19.11.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the ground domain.
1.19.11.1.25 Field: Convergence Criterion for the Outer Cartesian Domain Iteration
Loop
The maximum temperature deviation within any cell between one iteration and another to decide that
the Cartesian domain has converged to within tolerance. A smaller value will improve accuracy and
computation time. A smaller value should be accompanied by a higher number of iterations if maximum
accuracy is desired.
698 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.19.12 PipingSystem:Underground:PipeCircuit
This section documents the pipe circuit object, which is used to specify information for the plant loop
topology, such as inlet and outlet connections. This object also groups together pipe segments to define
flow paths within a given pipe circuit.
1.19.12.1 Inputs
1.19.12.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the pipe circuit.
1.19.12.1.10 Field: Convergence Criterion for the Inner Radial Iteration Loop
The maximum temperature deviation within any cell between one iteration and another to decide
that the radial domain has converged to within tolerance. A smaller value will improve accuracy and
computation time. A smaller value should be accompanied by a higher number of iterations if maximum
accuracy is desired.
1.19.12.1.12 Field: Number of Soil Nodes in the Inner Radial Near Pipe Mesh Region
The number of soil nodes to discretize pipe cells. More information on mesh development is provided
in the engineering reference manual.
1.19.12.1.13 Field: Radial Thickness of Inner Radial Near Pipe Mesh Region
The radial distance used to discretize pipe cells. More information on mesh development is provided
in the engineering reference manual.
1.19.12.1.14 Field: Number of Pipe Segments Entered for this Pipe Circuit
The number of pipe segment objects which will be defined in the following fields.
1.19.13 PipingSystem:Underground:PipeSegment
This section documents the pipe segment object, which is used to specify information for a single pipe
segment placed at some x, y coordinate in the ground. The flow direction is also defined in this object to
allow for careful description of varying flow paths. This can be useful for accounting for short circuiting
effects if two pipes are placed in counterflow vs. parallel flow.
1.19.13.1 Inputs
1.19.13.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the pipe segment.
700 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
PipingSystem:Underground:Domain ,
My Piping System , !- Name
12, !- Xmax
4.5, !- Ymax
36.84 , !- Zmax
2, !- XMeshCount
Uniform , !- XMeshType
, !- XGeometricCoeff
2, !- YMeshCount
Uniform , !- YMeshType
, !- YGeometricCoeff
6, !- ZMeshCount
Uniform , !- ZMeshType
, !- ZGeometricCoeff
1.08, !- GroundThermalConductivity
962, !- GroundDensity
2576, !- GroundSpecificHeat
30, !- MoistureContent
50, !- MoistureContentAtSaturation
Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach , !- Type of Undisturbed Ground Temperature
Object
KATemps , !- Name of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object
Yes , !- DomainHasBasement
6, !- BasementWidthInDomain
2.5, !- BasementDepthInDomain
Yes , !- ShiftPipeXValuesByBasementWidth
BasementWallOSCM , !- BasementWallBoundaryConditionModel
BasementFloorOSCM , !- BasementFloorBoundaryConditionModel
0.005 , !- CartesianIterationConvergenceCriterion
100, !- CartesianMaxIterations
0.408 , !- EvapotranspirationGroundCoverParameter
1, !- NumPipeCircuits
My Pipe Circuit; !- PipeCircuit
PipingSystem:Underground:PipeCircuit ,
My Pipe Circuit , !- Name
0.3895 , !- PipeThermalConductivity
641, !- PipeDensity
2405, !- PipeSpecificHeat
0.016 , !- PipeInnerDiameter
0.02667 , !- PipeOuterDiameter
0.004 , !- DesignFlowRate
Piping System Inlet Node , !- InletNode
Piping System Outlet Node , !- OutletNode
0.001 , !- RadialIterationConvergenceCriterion
100, !- RadialMaxIterations
2, !- RadialMeshCount
0.03, !- RadialMeshThickness
1.19. GROUP – NODE-BRANCH MANAGEMENT 701
6, !- NumSegments
Segment 1, !- Segment1
Segment 2, !- Segment2
Segment 3, !- Segment3
Segment 4, !- Segment4
Segment 5, !- Segment5
Segment 6; !- Segment6
PipingSystem:Underground:PipeSegment ,
Segment 1, !- Name
0.67, !- X
2.20, !- Burial Depth
IncreasingZ; !- Flow Direction
PipingSystem:Underground:PipeSegment ,
Segment 2, !- Name
0.95, !- X
2.20, !- Burial Depth
IncreasingZ; !- Flow Direction
PipingSystem:Underground:PipeSegment ,
Segment 3, !- Name
1.23, !- X
2.20, !- Burial Depth
IncreasingZ; !- Flow Direction
PipingSystem:Underground:PipeSegment ,
Segment 4, !- Name
1.40, !- X
1.94, !- Burial Depth
DecreasingZ; !- Flow Direction
PipingSystem:Underground:PipeSegment ,
Segment 5, !- Name
1.40, !- X
1.66, !- Burial Depth
DecreasingZ; !- Flow Direction
PipingSystem:Underground:PipeSegment ,
Segment 6, !- Name
1.40, !- X
1.39, !- Burial Depth
DecreasingZ; !- Flow Direction
1.19.13.2 Outputs
• HVAC, Average, Pipe Circuit Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
1.19.14 Duct
The Duct object is a component for air systems that is a direct analogue for Pipe:Adiabatic in the fluid
loops. It is used when it is necessary (due to the HVAC system configuration) to have a branch that has no
functional components. This case most often arises for a bypass branch. Since every branch must have at
least one component, the Duct component is used for this situation. The duct is an adiabatic, pass-through
component; all of its inlet conditions are passed through unchanged to its outlet.
1.19.14.1 Inputs
1.19.14.1.1 Field: Name
This is the unique name for this component. Any reference to this component (in a BranchList, for
instance) will refer to it by this name.
DUCT ,
VAV Sys 1 Bypass Duct , !- Name
VAV Sys 1 Bypass Duct Inlet Node , !- Inlet Node Name
VAV Sys 1 Bypass Duct Outlet Node;!- Outlet Node Name
1.19.14.2 Outputs
There are no outputs for Duct.
1.20. GROUP – PLANT-CONDENSER LOOPS 703
1.20.1.1 Inputs
1.20.1.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the plant loop.
the fluid specified here is a mixture of water and ethylene or propylene glycol, then only FluidProper-
ties:GlycolConcentration objects need to be specified and the name of the appropriate one is used here.
For another water/glycol mixture, a complete set of fluid property data (FluidProperties:Name and Flu-
idProperties:Temperature objects plus multiple FluidProperties:Concentration objects for specific heat,
density, etc.) must be specified (Ref dataset: GlycolPropertiesRefData.idf).
• Optimal operates each piece of equipment at its optimal part load ratio. Any remaining loop
demand is distributed evenly to all of the components.
• SequentialLoad loads each piece of equipment sequentially in the order specified in the PlantE-
quipmentList to its maximum part load ratio and will operate the last required piece of equipment
between its minimum and maximum part load ratio in order to meet the loop demand.
• UniformLoad evenly distributes the loop demand among all available components on the equipment
list for a given load range. If some components do not have the capacity to meet the uniformly
distributed load, the remaining load is distributed sequentially to the other available components.
• UniformPLR will load all equipment on the PlantEquipmentList to a uniform part load ratio
(PLR). No equipment will be loaded below its minimum PLR. If the total load is less than the sum
of all equipment on the PlantEquipmentList operating at their respective minimum PLRs, then the
last item in the equipment list is dropped and the load is distributed based on a uniform PLR for
the remaining plant equipment.
706 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Note: For all schemes, if the load for any individual component is less than the component load at the
minimum PLR, the individual component model will false load or reduce duty cycle while operating at the
minimum part load ratio until the load is met.
1.20.1.1.21 Field: Plant Loop Demand Calculation Scheme There are two choices for
plant loop demand calculations schemes in EnergyPlus: SingleSetpoint and DualSetpointDeadband.
SingleSetpoint - For the SingleSetpoint scheme, the plant loop is controlled to a single temperature
setpoint. This requires a setpoint manager with Control Variable = Temperature to place a setpoint on
the Loop Temperature Setpoint Node. The setpoint will be stored in the Node%TempSetpoint variable
which may be reported using Output:Variable ”System Node Setpoint Temperature.” Examples of applica-
ble setpoint managers include: SetpointManager:Scheduled, SetpointManager:OutdoorAirReset, Setpoint-
Manager:FollowOutdoorAirTemperature, etc. SingleSetpoint is the default.
DualSetpoint - For the DualSetpoint scheme, the plant loop is controlled to stay between a pair of
high and low temperature setpoints. This requires one or two setpoint managers to place two setpoints
on the Loop Temperature Setpoint Node. The setpoints will be stored in the Node%TempSetPointHi and
Node%TempSetPointLo variables which may be reported using Output:Variable ”System Node Setpoint
High Temperature” and ”System Node Setpoint Low Temperature.” There is special setpoint manager, Set-
pointManager:Scheduled:DualSetpoint, which will place both the high and low setpoints with Control Vari-
able = Temperature. Otherwise, two setpoint managers are required, one with Control Variable = Maxi-
mumTemperature and another with Control Variable = MinimumTemperature. The two setpoint managers
may be the same kind or different, but care should be taken so that the MinimumTemperature is not set
higher than the MaximumTemperature. Examples of applicable setpoint managers include: SetpointMan-
ager:Scheduled, SetpointManager:OutdoorAirReset, SetpointManager:FollowOutdoorAirTemperature, etc.
Note that DualSetpoint is used only for plant loops with both heating and cooling supply equipment, such
as a water loop heat pump system. When the loop temperature rises above the MaximumTemperature
setpoint, then the loop will request cooling, and when the loop temperature is below the MinimumTem-
perature setpoint it will request heating. DualSetpoint cannot be used to control a single-mode loop, such
as a hot water heating loop between operating between high and low boiler setpoints.
The plant loop demand calculation scheme determines the amount of heating or cooling necessary
to bring the temperature of the Plant Loop to its setpoint(s). When this value is determined then the
load distribution scheme explained in the previous section takes this value and distributes the load to the
appropriate equipment. The demand calculation scheme determines how the load is calculated. See more
information in the Engineering Document.
currently limited to simulating loop pumps, i.e. each pump should be placed on the inlet branch of the
plant side or demand side of the loop.
PlantLoop ,
Hot Water Loop , !- Plant Loop Name
Water , !- Fluid Type
, !- User Defined Fluid Type
Hot Loop Operation , !- Plant Operation Scheme List Name
HW Loop Outlet Node , !- Loop Temperature Setpoint Schedule Name
100, !- Maximum Loop Temperature {C}
10, !- Minimum Loop Temperature {C}
autosize , !- Maximum Loop Volumetric Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0, !- Minimum Loop Volumetric Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- volume of the plant loop {m3}
HW Supply Inlet Node , !- Plant Side Inlet Node Name
HW Supply Outlet Node , !- Plant Side Outlet Node Name
Heating Supply Side Branches , !- Plant Side Branch List Name
Heating Supply Side Connectors , !- Plant Side Connector List Name
HW Demand Inlet Node , !- Demand Side Inlet Node Name
HW Demand Outlet Node , !- Demand Side Outlet Nodes Name
Heating Demand Side Branches , !- Demand Side Branch List Name
Heating Demand Side Connectors , !- Demand Side Connector List Name
Optimal; !- Load Distribution Scheme
In the above example input there is no system availability manager specified and the Demand Calcula-
tion Scheme will default to SingleSetpoint using a single setpoint manager. Common pipe simulation field
in the above example will default to “NONE” since it is not specified.
1.20.1.2 Outputs
In the following output variables, “Debug” denotes variables that are used primarily by the developers and
whose names and application may be cryptic to users. .
708 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
If the plant loop setpoint is not met, Plant Supply Side Cooling Demand Rate will equal the sum of the
total cooling demand from the demand side coils on the loop plus the additional cooling required to bring
the loop flow to setpoint. If the loop remains off setpoint for successive timesteps, the demand required
to return to setpoint will repeat in each timestep until the loop reaches setpoint. For this reason, Plant
Supply Side Cooling Demand Rate should not be summed over time, because it will overstate the demand
whenever the loop is off setpoint.
1.20.1.2.17 Plant Common Pipe Primary to Secondary Mass Flow Rate [Kg/s]
This output variable gives the mass flow from primary to secondary side in a Two-Way common pipe
simulation. Value is averaged over the reporting interval.
1.20.1.2.18 Plant Common Pipe Secondary to Primary Mass Flow Rate [Kg/s]
This output variable gives the mass flow from secondary to primary side in a Two-Way common pipe
simulation. Value is averaged over the reporting interval.
1.20.1.2.25 Plant Demand Side Lumped Capacitance Heat Transport Rate [C]
1.20.1.2.26 Plant Supply Side Lumped Capacitance Heat Transport Rate [C]
These two outputs are the heat transfer rate to the the plant (or condenser) loop’s working fluid
in the two half-loops. The program models heat capacitance in the volume of fluid inside the plant
loop itself using two simple models for well-stirred tanks located at each of the half-loop inlet and outlet
pairs. These tank models also receive the heat transferred to the fluid by the work done by pumping and
resulting friction heating. One output is for the point where the fluid leaves the supply side and enters
the demand side. The other output is for the point where the fluid leaves the demand side and enters the
supply side.
1.20.1.2.27 Plant Demand Side Lumped Capacitance Heat Storage Rate [C]
1.20.1.2.28 Plant Supply Side Lumped Capacitance Heat Storage Rate [C]
These two outputs are the heat storage rate of the plant (or condenser) loop’s working fluid in the two
half-loops. The program models heat capacitance in the volume of fluid inside the plant loop itself using
two simple models for well-stirred tanks located at each of the half-loop inlet and outlet pairs. These
tank models also receive the heat transferred to the fluid by the work done by pumping and resulting
friction heating. One output is for the point where the fluid leaves the supply side and enters the demand
side. The other output is for the point where the fluid leaves the demand side and enters the supply side.
1.20.1.2.29 Plant Demand Side Lumped Capacitance Excessive Storage Time [C]
1.20. GROUP – PLANT-CONDENSER LOOPS 713
1.20.1.2.30 Plant Supply Side Lumped Capacitance Excessive Storage Time [C]
These two outputs are the excess storage time of the plant (or condenser) loop’s working fluid in the two
half-loops. The excess storage time is determined by adding the time when the heat storage rate exceeds
the heat transfer rate into the two half-loops at each time step. The program models heat capacitance
in the volume of fluid inside the plant loop itself using two simple models for well-stirred tanks located at
each of the half-loop inlet and outlet pairs. These tank models also receive the heat transferred to the
fluid by the work done by pumping and resulting friction heating. One output is for the point where the
fluid leaves the supply side and enters the demand side. The other output is for the point where the fluid
leaves the demand side and enters the supply side.
1.20.2 CondenserLoop
The condenser loop input is very similar to that for the plant loop. As of version 7, the two loops are
modeled the same way and inside the program all condenser loops are just plant loops. (In future versions
of the program, this CondenserLoop object might be deprecated and these loops will be described using
the PlantLoop object.) The main differences are the applicable components and operation schemes. This
is depicted in the following diagram.
1.20.2.1 Inputs
1.20.2.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the condenser loop.
PlantEquipmentList to its maximum part load ratio and will operate the last required piece of equipment
between its minimum and maximum part load ratio in order to meet the loop demand. UniformLoad
evenly distributes the loop demand among all available components on the equipment list for a given load
range. SequentialUniformPLR loads all equipment on the PlantEquipmentList to a uniform part load
ratio (PLR). Components are loaded sequentially based on the order specified in the PlantEquipmentList
until each component is fully loaded, at which point the next subsequent component is added and the load
is distributed uniformly based on PLR between the components. UniformPLR will load all equipment
on the PlantEquipmentList to a uniform part load ratio (PLR). No equipment will be loaded below its
minimum PLR. If the total load is less than the sum of all equipment on the PlantEquipmentList operating
at their respective minimum PLRs, then the last item in the equipment list is dropped and the load is
distributed based on a uniform PLR for the remaining plant equipment.
Note: For all schemes, if the load for any individual component is less than the component load at the
minimum PLR, the individual component model will false load or reduce duty cycle while operating at the
minimum part load ratio until the load is met.
CondenserLoop ,
Condenser Water Loop , !- Name
Water , !- Fluid Type
, !- User Defined Fluid Type
Tower Loop Operation , !- Condenser Equipment Operation Scheme Name
Condenser Supply Outlet Node , !- Condenser Loop Temperature Setpoint Node Name
80, !- Maximum Loop Temperature {C}
10, !- Minimum Loop Temperature {C}
autosize , !- Maximum Loop Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0, !- Minimum Loop Flow Rate {m3/s}
autocalculate , !- Condenser Loop Volume {m3}
Condenser Supply Inlet Node , !- Condenser Side Inlet Node Name
Condenser Supply Outlet Node , !- Condenser Side Outlet Node Name
Condenser Supply Side Branches , !- Condenser Side Branch List Name
Condenser Supply Side Connectors , !- Condenser Side Connector List Name
1.20. GROUP – PLANT-CONDENSER LOOPS 717
SetpointManager:FollowOutdoorAirTemperature ,
MyCondenserControl , !- Name
Temperature , !- Control Variable
OutdoorAirWetBulb , !- Reference Temperature Type
0, !- Offset Temperature Difference {deltaC}
80, !- Maximum Setpoint Temperature {C}
10, !- Minimum Setpoint Temperature {C}
Condenser Supply Outlet Node; !- Setpoint Node or NodeList Name
CondenserLoop ,
Chilled Water Condenser Loop , !- Name
UserDefinedFluidType , !- Fluid Type
PropyleneGlycol15Percent ,!- User Defined Fluid Type
Tower Loop Operation , !- Condenser Equipment Operation Scheme Name
Condenser Supply Outlet Node , !- Condenser Loop Temperature Setpoint Node Name
80, !- Maximum Loop Temperature {C}
10, !- Minimum Loop Temperature {C}
0.00330000 , !- Maximum Loop Flow Rate {m3/s}
0, !- Minimum Loop Flow Rate {m3/s}
autocalculate , !- Condenser Loop Volume {m3}
Condenser Supply Inlet Node , !- Condenser Side Inlet Node Name
Condenser Supply Outlet Node , !- Condenser Side Outlet Node Name
Condenser Supply Side Branches , !- Condenser Side Branch List Name
Condenser Supply Side Connectors , !- Condenser Side Connector List Name
Condenser Demand Inlet Node , !- Demand Side Inlet Node Name
Condenser Demand Outlet Node , !- Demand Side Outlet Node Name
Condenser Demand Side Branches , !- Condenser Demand Side Branch List Name
Condenser Demand Side Connectors , !- Condenser Demand Side Connector List Name
SequentialLoad; !- Load Distribution Scheme
1.20.2.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Plant Supply Side Cooling Demand Rate [W]
chillers, etc.). It will also equal the cooling output of all condensing equipment such as cooling towers on
the loop less any pump heat added to the fluid. For example, for a condenser loop with one tower and one
pump serving one chiller, Plant Supply Side Cooling Demand Rate will equal the tower water-side heat
transfer less the pump heat to fluid, and it will also equal the chiller condenser heat transfer rate.
If the condenser loop setpoint is not met, Plant Supply Side Cooling Demand Rate will equal the sum
of the total cooling demand from the demand side components on the loop plus the additional cooling
required to bring the loop flow to setpoint. If the loop remains off setpoint for successive timesteps, the
demand required to return to setpoint will repeat in each timestep until the loop reaches setpoint. For
this reason, Plant Supply Side Cooling Demand Rate should not be summed over time, because it will
overstate the demand whenever the loop is off setpoint.
and the value is negative when the condenser equipment provides more than enough heating or cooling to
meet the setpoint. A negative value can happen when the amount of demand is smaller than the minimum
capacity of the equipment using the minimum part load ratio.
1.21.2 PlantEquipmentOperationSchemes
1.21.2.1 Inputs
1.21.2.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Plant Operation Scheme. This name is
placed in the Plant Loop object to select this scheme.
• PlantEquipmentOperation:Uncontrolled
• PlantEquipmentOperation:CoolingLoad
• PlantEquipmentOperation:HeatingLoad
• PlantEquipmentOperation:ComponentSetpoint
• PlantEquipmentOperation:ThermalEnergyStorage
• PlantEquipmentOperation:UserDefined
PlantEquipmentOperationSchemes ,
CW Loop Operation , !- Name
PlantEquipmentOperation :CoolingLoad , ! Control Scheme 1 Object Type
Peak Operation , !- Control Scheme 1 Name
On Peak , !- Control Scheme 1 Schedule
PlantEquipmentOperation :CoolingLoad , ! Control Scheme 2 Object Type
Off Peak Operation , !- Control Scheme 2 Name
Off Peak; !- Control Scheme 2 Schedule
PlantEquipmentOperationSchemes ,
CW Loop Operation , !- Name
PlantEquipmentOperation :CoolingLoad , ! Control Scheme 1 Object Type
Central Chiller Only , !- Control Scheme 1 Name
PlantOnSched; !- Control Scheme 1 Schedule
1.21. GROUP – PLANT-CONDENSER CONTROL 721
1.21.3 CondenserEquipmentOperationSchemes
1.21.3.1 Inputs
1.21.3.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Condenser Operation Scheme.
• PlantEquipmentOperation:Uncontrolled
• PlantEquipmentOperation:CoolingLoad
• PlantEquipmentOperation:HeatingLoad
• PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorDryBulb
• PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorWetBulb
• PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorDewpoint
• PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorRelativeHumidity
• PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorDryBulbDifference
• PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorWetBulbDifference
• PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorDewpointDifference
• PlantEquipmentOperation:UserDefined
The condenser operation schemes apply to the equipment on the ‘supply side’ of the condenser loop—
pumps, cooling towers, ground coupled heat exchangers, etc. The keywords select the algorithm that
will be used to determine which equipment is available for each timestep. The Load Schemes schemes
select a user specified set of equipment for each user specified range of a particular simulation variable.
722 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Load schemes compare the demand on the condenser supply side with specified load ranges and associated
equipment lists. Outdoor schemes compare the current value of an environmental parameter with user
specified ranges of that parameter.
CondenserEquipmentOperationSchemes ,
Tower Loop Operation , !- CondenserOperationSchemeName
PlantEquipmentOperation :CoolingLoad , Control Scheme 1 Object Type
Year Round Tower Operation , !- Control Scheme 1 Name
PlantOnSched; !- Control Scheme 1 Schedule
1.21.4 PlantEquipmentOperation:Uncontrolled
Uncontrolled loop operation simply specifies a group of equipment that runs ‘uncontrolled’. If the loop
runs, this equipment will run also, unless turned off by the loop flow resolver to maintain continuity in the
fluid loop.
1.21.4.1 Inputs
1.21.4.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the control scheme.
1.21.5 PlantEquipmentOperation:CoolingLoad
1.21.5.1 Inputs
1.21.6 PlantEquipmentOperation:HeatingLoad
The PlantEquipmentOperation:CoolingLoad and PlantEquipmentOperation:HeatingLoad objects define
the different ranges and which equipment list is valid for each range. After the keyword and the identifying
name, a series of data trios is expected. In each trio, there is a lower limit for the load range, an upper
limit for the load range, and a name that links to an equipment availability list (the PlantEquipmentList
or CondenserEquipmentList objects).
1.21.6.1 Inputs
1.21.6.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the control scheme.
1.21.6.1.2 Field Set: (Lower limit, Upper Limit, Equip List name) up to 10
This particular load based operation scheme (above) has three different ranges. “Chiller Plant”, “Chiller
Plant and Purchased”, and “Purchased Only” are names which link to various PlantEquipmentList or
CondenserEquipmentList objects as described below. Gaps may be left in the load ranges specified, but
to operate equipment over the entire range the upper limit of a given range must equal the lower limit of
the next range as shown in the example. If gaps are left in the load ranges specified, a warning message
will be issued when the load to be met falls within a load range “gap”. If the user wishes to leave a load
range “gap” for a specific reason (no equipment to operate on this plant [or condenser] loop within this
load range) and does not want the warning messages to be generated, then specify a lower limit, upper
limit and equipment list name for the gap and do not specify any equipment in the associated equipment
list, as shown below.
PlantEquipmentList ,
Chiller Plant , !- Name
Chiller:Electric , !- Equipment 1 Object Type
Big Chiller; !- Equipment 1 Name
PlantEquipmentList ,
NoEquipmentOperationOnThisPlantLoop ; !- Name
PlantEquipmentList ,
Chiller Plant and Purchased , !- Name
Chiller:Electric , !- Equipment 1 Object Type
Big Chiller , !- Equipment 1 Name
DistrictCooling , !- Equipment 2 Object Type
Purchased Cooling; !- Equipment 2 Name
PlantEquipmentList ,
Purchased Only , !- Name
DistrictCooling , !- Equipment 1 Object Type
Purchased Cooling; !- Equipment 1 Name
1.21.7 PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorDryBulb
1.21.8 PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorWetBulb
1.21.9 PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorRelativeHumidity
1.21.10 PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorDewpoint
The outdoor operation objects define the different ranges of the various environmental parameters and
which equipment list is valid for each range. After the keyword and the identifying name, a series of data
trios is expected. In each trio, there is a lower limit for the load range, an upper limit for the load range,
and a name that links to an equipment availability list (the CondenserEquipmentList).
The fields for each of these are:
1.21.10.1 Inputs
1.21.10.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the control scheme.
1.21.10.1.2 Field Set: (Lower limit, Upper Limit, Equip List name) up to 10
1.21.11 PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorDryBulbDifference
1.21.11.1 Inputs
1.21.12 PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorWetBulbDifference
1.21.12.1 Inputs
1.21.13 PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorDewpointDifference
The Delta Temperature based control strategies help to control any condenser equipment based on the
difference between a reference node temperature and any environmental temperature. For example a cooling
tower can be controlled by a strategy, which looks at the difference between the tower inlet temperature
and wet-bulb temperature. A difference range is specified for each equipment list. IDD excerpts are shown
below:
1.21.13.1 Inputs
1.21.13.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha value contains the identifying name of the control strategy. This name appears as ‘control
scheme name’ in Condenser Operation Scheme object.
1.21.14 PlantEquipmentOperation:ComponentSetpoint
In addition to load range based control on the plant loop, sequencing the plant components based on the
outlet temperature of individual equipment is allowed. This scheme is common to many present-day Energy
Management Systems sequencing. In this scheme, the sequencing is done based on the order specified in
the control object described below.
1.21.14.1 Inputs
1.21.14.1.1 Field: Name
This field specifies the name of the operation scheme.
726 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.21.14.1.2 Field Set: Equipment Object Type, Name, Demand Calculation Node,
Setpoint Node, Flow Rate, Operation Type)
PlantEquipmentOperationSchemes ,
CW Loop Operation , !- PlantOperationSchemeName
PlantEquipmentOperation :ComponentSetpoint , ! Control Scheme 1 Object Type
Test Scheme , !- Control Scheme 1 Name
On; !- Control Scheme 1 Schedule
PlantEquipmentOperation :ComponentSetpoint ,
Test Scheme ,
CHILLER:ELECTRIC , !- Equipment 1 Object Type
Little Chiller , !- Equipment 1 Name
Little Chiller Inlet Node , !- Demand Calculation 1 Node Name
Little Chiller Outlet Node , !- Setpoint 1 Node Name
0.0011 , !- Component 1 Flow Rate
COOLING , !- Operation 1 Type
CHILLER:ELECTRIC , !- Equipment 2 Object Type
Big Chiller , !- Equipment 2 Name
Big Chiller Inlet Node , !- Demand Calculation 2 Node Name
Big Chiller Outlet Node , !- Setpoint 2 Node Name
0.0011 , !- Component 2 Flow Rate
COOLING; !- Operation 2 Type
1.21. GROUP – PLANT-CONDENSER CONTROL 727
1.21.15 PlantEquipmentOperation:ThermalEnergyStorage
Users of thermal energy storage, particularly ice storage systems, are often faced with a challenge of
specifying input for these systems. Essentially, they have to define various setpoint managers, temperature
schedules, etc. in order to make the system functional. This plant/condenser control type simplifies the
input somewhat by eliminating both a setpoint manager and a schedule for each piece of equipment that
makes up the ice storage system. In fact, this operation scheme internally creates the setpoint managers
required by the equipment listed as operated by the scheme defined by this syntax. While the more
complex definition is possible and provides more flexibility like hourly variation of setpoint temperatures
at the outlet of each piece of equipment, this input provides the most convenient method for making
the system to work and assumes a single charging setpoint temperature and a single discharging setpoint
temperature. For most systems, this is all that is needed.
1.21.15.1 Inputs
1.21.15.1.1 Field: Name
This field defines the name of the thermal energy (ice) storage plant equipment operation scheme that
will be referenced by the PlantEquipmentOperationSchemes list in the plant input.
1.21.15.1.6 Field Set: (Component Object Type, Name, Demand Calculation Node,
Setpoint Node, Flow Rate, Operation Type)
PlantEquipmentOperationSchemes ,
CW Loop Operation , !- Name
PlantEquipmentOperation :ThermalEnergyStorage , !- Control Scheme 1 Object Type
Chiller and Partial Ice Storage , !- Control Scheme 1 Name
PlantOnSched; !- Control Scheme 1 Schedule Name
PlantEquipmentOperation :ThermalEnergyStorage ,
Chiller and Partial Ice Storage , !- Name
OnPeakEnergy , !- On -Peak Schedule Name
ChargingAvail , !- Charging Availability Schedule Name
7.22, !- Non -charging Chilled Water Temperature
-5.0, !- Charging Chilled Water Temperature
Chiller:Electric , !- Component 1 Object Type
Central Chiller , !- Component 1 Name
Central Chiller Inlet Node , !- Component 1 Demand Calculation Node Name
Central Chiller Outlet Node , !- Component 1 Setpoint Node Name
autosize , !- Component 1 Flow Rate {m3/s}
COOLING , !- Component 1 Operation Type
ThermalStorage:Ice:Detailed , !- Component 2 Object Type
Ice Tank , !- Component 2 Name
Ice Tank Inlet Node , !- Component 2 Demand Calculation Node Name
Ice Tank Outlet Node , !- Component 2 Setpoint Node Name
1.21. GROUP – PLANT-CONDENSER CONTROL 729
1.21.16 PlantEquipmentList
1.21.16.1 Inputs
1.21.17 CondenserEquipmentList
The PlantEquipmentList and CondenserEquipmentList specify available plant and condenser loop equip-
ment respectively for any loop operation scheme. Each statement contains the object name, an identifying
name (which links the definition back to one of the operation scheme statements) and a variable length of
data pairs. These pairs refer to a plant equipment type and an identifying name. The type in this list of
pairs must correspond to a valid plant object as described in the next subsection.
Note: If a PlantEquipmentList or CondenserEquipmentList object is specified with no equipment
object types or equipment names, then the corresponding PlantEquipmentOperation:* object will assume
all available equipment on this plant (or condenser) loop should be OFF (not operate) within the specified
lower/upper limit.
1.21.17.1 Inputs
1.21.17.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the Equipment List.
Note that this list is the middle range defined in the PlantEquipmentOperation:CoolingLoad statement
named “Peak Operation” above. This defines the equipment available when the load encountered by the
plant (chiller water demand, for example) is between 7000 W and 24500 W. EnergyPlus will run the “Big
Chiller” first up to its capacity and then attempt to meet the remaining load (while in that range) with
the next piece of equipment (in this case, “Purchased:Cooling”) in the list.
730 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• Zone,Meter,Electricity:Plant [J]
• Zone,Meter,Cooling:Electricity [J]
• Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Plant [J]
• Zone,Meter,Chillers:EnergyTransfer [J]
• Zone,Meter,HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer [J]
The following three outputs are only available for water-cooled chillers
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 731
• Zone,Meter,HeatRecovery:EnergyTransfer [J]
The following blocks of outputs are for steam and fuel-driven chillers
• Zone,Meter,Steam:Plant [J]
• Zone,Meter,Cooling:EnergyTransfer [J]
The following output is applicable only for indirect absorption chillersHVAC,Average,Chiller Part Load
Ratio
applicable: Lube (engine lubricant), Jacket (engine coolant), Exhaust (engine exhaust), and Total. Chiller
Lube Recovered Heat Energy, Chiller Jacket Recovered Heat Energy, and Chiller Exhaust Heat Recovery
Energy are metered on HeatRecovery:EnergyTransfer, EnergyTransfer:Plant, and EnergyTransfer:Facility.
1.22.3 Chiller:Absorption
1.22.3.1 Inputs
1.22.3.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the absorption chiller.
C1
SteamInputRatio = + C2 + C3 ∗ P LR (1.44)
P LR
The following three fields contain the coefficients for the equation.
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 737
1.22.3.1.15 Field: Coefficient 1 of the Steam Use Part Load Ratio Curve
C1 in the Generator Heat Input Part Load Ratio Curve. This value is obtained by fitting manufacturers’
performance data to the curve.
1.22.3.1.16 Field: Coefficient 2 of the Steam Use Part Load Ratio Curve
C2 in the Generator Heat Input Part Load Ratio Curve. This value is obtained by fitting manufacturers’
performance data to the curve.
1.22.3.1.17 Field: Coefficient 3 of the Steam Use Part Load Ratio Curve
C3 in the Generator Heat Input Part Load Ratio Curve. This value is obtained by fitting manufacturers’
performance data to the curve.
The following three fields contain the coefficients for the equation.
1.22.3.1.19 Field: Coefficient 1 of the Pump Electric Use Part Load Ratio Curve
C1 in the Pump Electric Use Part Load Ratio Curve. This value is obtained by fitting manufacturers’
performance data to the curve.
1.22.3.1.20 Field: Coefficient 2 of the Pump Electric Use Part Load Ratio Curve
C2 in the Pump Electric Use Part Load Ratio Curve. This value is obtained by fitting manufacturers’
performance data to the curve.
1.22.3.1.21 Field: Coefficient 3 of the Pump Electric Use Part Load Ratio Curve
C3 in the Pump Electric Use Part Load Ratio Curve. This value is obtained by fitting manufacturers’
performance data to the curve.
Chiller:Absorption ,
Big Chiller , !- Chiller Name
50000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
250, !- Nominal Pumping Power {W}
Big Chiller Inlet Node , !- Plant_Side_Inlet_Node
Big Chiller Outlet Node , !- Plant_Side_Outlet_Node
Big Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Condenser_Side_Inlet_Node
Big Chiller Condenser Outlet Node , !- Condenser_Side_Outlet_Node
0.15, !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
0.65, !- Opt Part Load Ratio
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 739
1.22.3.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Chiller Electric Power [W]
• Zone,Meter,Electricity:Plant [J]
• Zone,Meter,Cooling:Electricity [J]
• Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Plant [J]
• Zone,Meter,Chillers:EnergyTransfer [J]
• Zone,Meter,HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer [J]
These chiller output variables are defined above under “Generic Chiller Outputs.”
1.22.4 Chiller:Absorption:Indirect
The Chiller:Absorption:Indirect object is an enhanced version of the absorption chiller model found in the
Building Loads and System Thermodynamics (BLAST) program. This enhanced model is nearly identical
to the existing absorption chiller model (Ref. Chiller:Absorption) with the exceptions that: 1) the enhanced
indirect absorption chiller model provides more flexible performance curves and 2) chiller performance now
includes the impact of varying evaporator, condenser, and generator temperatures. Since these absorption
chiller models are nearly identical (i.e., the performance curves of the enhanced model can be manipulated
to produce similar results to the previous model), it is quite probable that the Chiller:Absorption model
will be deprecated in a future release of EnergyPlus.
1.22.4.1 Inputs
1.22.4.1.1 Field: Name
This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the indirect absorption chiller.
cannot be met. The default, if not specified, is NotModulated. This flow mode does not impact the
condenser loop connection.
1.22.4.1.17 Field: Generator Heat Input Function of Part Load Ratio Curve Name
This required alpha field specifies the name of the curve used to determine the heat input to the chiller.
The curve is a quadratic or cubic curve which characterizes the heat input as a function of chiller part-load
ratio. The curve output is multiplied by the chiller’s nominal capacity and operating part-load ratio or
minimum part-load ratio, whichever is greater, to determine the amount of heat input required for the
given operating conditons.
1.22.4.1.18 Field: Pump Electric Input Function of Part Load Ratio Curve Name
This alpha field specifies the name of the curve used to determine the pump electrical input to the
chiller. The curve is a quadratic or cubic curve which characterizes the pump electrical power as a function
of chiller part-load ratio. The curve output is multiplied by the chiller’s nominal pumping power and
operating part-load ratio or minimum part-load ratio, whichever is greater, to determine the amount of
pumping power required for the given operating conditons.
1.22.4.1.25 Field: Generator Heat Input Correction Function of Chilled Water Tem-
perature Curve Name
This alpha field specifies the name of a quadratic or cubic curve which correlates the chiller’s heat input
as a function of evaporator leaving water temperature. This curve is used to correct generator heat input
at off-design evaporator temperatures.
Chiller:Absorption:Indirect ,
Big Chiller , !- Chiller Name
100000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
250, !- Nominal Pumping Power {W}
Big Chiller Inlet Node , !- Evaporator Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Outlet Node , !- Evaporator Outlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Condenser Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Outlet Node , !- Condenser Outlet Node Name
0.15, !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
0.65, !- Opt Part Load Ratio
35.0, !- Temp Design Condenser Inlet {C}
10.0, !- Temp Lower Limit Condenser Inlet {C}
5.0, !- Chilled Water Outlet Temperature Lower Limit {C}
0.0011 , !- Design Chilled Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0011 , !- Design Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
VariableFlow , !- Chiller Flow Mode
SteamUseFPLR , !- Generator Heat Input function of part -load ratio curve name
PumpUseFPLR , !- Pump Electric Input function of part -load ratio curve name
AbsorberSteamInletNode , !- Generator Inlet Node Name
AbsorberSteamOutletNode , !- Generator Outlet Node Name
CAPfCOND , !- Capacity Correction function of condenser temperature curve name
CAPfEVAP , !- Capacity Correction function of evaporator temperature curve name
, !- Capacity Correction function of generator temperature curve name
SteamFCondTemp , !- Generator Heat Input Correction function of condenser temperature curve
name
SteamFEvapTemp , !- Generator Heat Input Correction function of evaporator temperature curve
name
Steam , !- Generator Heat Source Type
autosize , !- Design Generator Volumetric Fluid Flow Rate {m3/s}
30.0, !- Temp Lower Limit Generator Inlet {C}
2.0, !- Degree of Subcooling in Steam Generator {C}
12.0; !- Degree of Subcooling in Steam Condensate Loop {C}
1.22.4.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Chiller Electric Power [W]
• Zone,Meter,Electricity:Plant [J]
• Zone,Meter,Cooling:Electricity [J]
• Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Plant [J]
• Zone,Meter,Chillers:EnergyTransfer [J]
• Zone,Meter,HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer [J]
• Zone,Meter,Steam:Plant [J]
• Zone,Meter,Cooling:Steam [J]
• Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Plant [J]
• Zone,Meter,Cooling:EnergyTransfer [J]
These chiller output variables are defined above under “Generic Chiller Outputs.”
1.22.5 Chiller:ConstantCOP
This chiller model is based on a simple, constant COP simulation of the chiller. In this case, performance
does not vary with chilled water temperature or condenser conditions.
Such a model is useful when the user does not have access to detailed performance data.
1.22.5.1 Inputs
1.22.5.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the constant COP chiller.
sense that although it makes a nominal request for its design flow rate it can operate at varying flow
rates. ConstantFlow is useful for constant speed pumping arrangements where the chiller’s request for
flow is stricter and can increase the overall loop flow. LeavingSetpointModulated changes the chiller model
to internally vary the flow rate so that the temperature leaving the chiller matches a setpoint. In all cases
the operation of the external plant system can also impact the flow through the chiller – for example if the
relative sizes and operation are such that flow is restricted and the requests cannot be met. The default,
if not specified, is NotModulated.
Chiller:ConstantCOP ,
Little Chiller , !- Name
25000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
2.5, !- Nominal COP {W/W}
0.0011 , !- Design Chilled Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0011 , !- Design Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
Little Chiller Inlet Node , !- Chilled Water Inlet Node Name
Little Chiller Outlet Node , !- Chilled Water Outlet Node Name
Little Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Condenser Inlet Node Name
Little Chiller Condenser Outlet Node , !- Condenser Outlet Node Name
EvaporativelyCooled , !- Condenser Type
VariableFlow , !- Chiller Flow Mode
, !- Sizing Factor
450; !- Basin Heater Capacity {W/K}
1.22.5.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Chiller Electric Power [W]
• Zone,Meter,Electricity:Plant [J]
• Zone,Meter,Cooling:Electricity [J]
• Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Plant [J]
• Zone,Meter,Chillers:EnergyTransfer [J]
• Zone,Meter,HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer [J]
Air-cooled or Evap-cooled:
Evap-cooled:
Water-cooled:
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 749
These chiller output variables are defined above under “Generic Chiller Outputs.”
1.22.6 Chiller:Electric
This chiller model is the empirical model from the Building Loads and System Thermodynamics (BLAST)
program. Capacity, power, and full load are each defined by a set of performance curves (quadratics).
Chiller performance curves are generated by fitting catalog data to third order polynomial equations. The
nominal inputs and curves described below are combined as follows to calculate the chiller power:
NominalCapacity
Power = FracFullLoadPower · FullLoadPowerRat · AvailToNominalCapacityRatio ·
COP
(1.46)
where:
NominalCapacity = Nominal Capacity field
COP = COP field
AvailToNominalCapacityRatio = the result of the Capacity Ratio Curve
FullLoadPowerRat = the result of the Power Ratio Curve
FracFullLoadPower = the result of the Full Load Ratio Curve
1.22.6.1 Inputs
1.22.6.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the electric chiller.
T CEntrequired − T CEntrated
(1.47)
T ELvrequired − T ELvrated
where:
TCEntrequired = Required entering condenser air or water temperature to maintain rated capacity.
TCEntrated = Rated entering condenser air or water temperature at rated capacity.
TELvrequired = Required leaving evaporator water outlet temperature to maintain rated capacity.
TELvrated = Rated leaving evaporator water outlet temperature at rated capacity.
TempCondIn − TempCondInDesign
∆Temp = − (TempEvapOut − TempEvapOutDesign) (1.49)
TempRiseCoefficient
TempCondIn = Temperature entering the condenser (water or air temperature depending on condenser
type).
TempCondInDesign = Design Condenser Inlet Temperature from User input above.
TempEvapOut = Temperature leaving the evaporator.
TempEvapOutDesign = Design Chilled Water Outlet Temperature from User input above.
TempRiseCoefficient = User Input from above.
The following three fields contain the coefficients for the quadratic equation.
1.22.6.1.39 Field: Heat Recovery Inlet High Temperature Limit Schedule Name
This field is optional. It can be used to control heat recovery operation of the chiller. The schedule
named here should contain temperature values, in C, that describe an upper limit for the return fluid
temperatures entering the chiller at the heat recovery inlet node. If the fluid temperature is too high,
754 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
then the heat recovery will not operate. This is useful to restrict the chiller lift from becoming too high
and to avoid overheating the hot water loop. This limit can be used with or without the alternate control
using leaving setpoint that is set in the next field.
Chiller:Electric ,
Big Chiller , !- Chiller Name
WaterCooled , !- Condenser Type
100000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
2.75, !- COP
Big Chiller Inlet Node , !- Chilled Water Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Outlet Node , !- Chilled Water Outlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Condenser Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Outlet Node , !- Condenser Outlet Node Name
.15, !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
.65, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
29.44 , !- Design Condenser Inlet Temperature {C}
2.682759 , !- Temperature Rise Coefficient
6.667 , !- Design Chilled Water Outlet Temperature {C}
0.0011 , !- Design Chilled Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0005 , !- Design Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.94483600 , !- Coefficient 1 of Capacity Ratio Curve
-.05700880 , !- Coefficient 2 of Capacity Ratio Curve
-.00185486 , !- Coefficient 3 of Capacity Ratio Curve
1.907846 , !- Coefficient 1 of Power Ratio Curve
-1.20498700 , !- Coefficient 2 of Power Ratio Curve
0.26346230 , !- Coefficient 3 of Power Ratio Curve
0.03303 , !- Coefficient 1 of Full Load Ratio Curve
0.6852 , !- Coefficient 2 of Full Load Ratio Curve
0.2818 , !- Coefficient 3 of Full Load Ratio Curve
5, !- Chilled Water Outlet Temperature Lower Limit {C}
VariableFlow; !- Chiller Flow Mode
Chiller:Electric ,
Big Chiller , !- Chiller Name
AirCooled , !- Condenser Type
100000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
2.58, !- COP
Big Chiller Inlet Node , !- Chilled Water Inlet Node Name
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 755
OutdoorAir:Node ,
Big Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Node Name
-1.0; !- Height Above Ground {m}
Chiller:Electric ,
Big Chiller , !- Name
EvaporativelyCooled , !- Condenser Type
100000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
2.58, !- Nominal COP
Big Chiller Inlet Node , !- Chilled Water Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Outlet Node , !- Chilled Water Outlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Condenser Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Outlet Node , !- Condenser Outlet Node Name
0.05, !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
0.65, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
35.0, !- Design Condenser Inlet Temperature {C}
2.778 , !- Temperature Rise Coefficient
6.67, !- Design Chilled Water Outlet Temperature {C}
0.0011 , !- Design Chilled Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.002 , !- Design Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9949 , !- Coefficient 1 of Capacity Ratio Curve
-0.045954 , !- Coefficient 2 of Capacity Ratio Curve
-0.0013543 , !- Coefficient 3 of Capacity Ratio Curve
2.333 , !- Coefficient 1 of Power Ratio Curve
-1.975, !- Coefficient 2 of Power Ratio Curve
0.6121 , !- Coefficient 3 of Power Ratio Curve
0.03303 , !- Coefficient 1 of Full Load Ratio Curve
0.6852 , !- Coefficient 2 of Full Load Ratio Curve
0.2818 , !- Coefficient 3 of Full Load Ratio Curve
5, !- Chilled Water Outlet Temperature Lower Limit {C}
VariableFlow , !- Chiller Flow Mode
, !- Design Heat Recovery Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Heat Recovery Inlet Node Name
, !- Heat Recovery Outlet Node Name
, !- Sizing Factor
450, !- Basin Heater Capacity {W/K}
3, !- Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature {C}
Basin heater sch; !- Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name
OutdoorAir:Node ,
Big Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Name
-1.0; !- Height Above Ground {m}
756 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Chiller:Electric ,
Big Chiller , !- Chiller Name
WaterCooled , !- Condenser Type
25000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
2.75, !- COP
Big Chiller Inlet Node , !- Chilled Water Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Outlet Node , !- Chilled Water Outlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Condenser Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Outlet Node , !- Condenser Outlet Node Name
.15, !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
.65, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
29.44 , !- Design Condenser Inlet Temperature {C}
2.682759 , !- Temperature Rise Coefficient
6.667 , !- Design Chilled Water Outlet Temperature {C}
0.0011 , !- Design Chilled Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0005 , !- Design Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.94483600 , !- Coefficient 1 of Capacity Ratio Curve
-.05700880 , !- Coefficient 2 of Capacity Ratio Curve
-.00185486 , !- Coefficient 3 of Capacity Ratio Curve
1.907846 , !- Coefficient 1 of Power Ratio Curve
-1.20498700 , !- Coefficient 2 of Power Ratio Curve
0.26346230 , !- Coefficient 3 of Power Ratio Curve
0.03303 , !- Coefficient 1 of Full Load Ratio Curve
0.6852 , !- Coefficient 2 of Full Load Ratio Curve
0.2818 , !- Coefficient 3 of Full Load Ratio Curve
5, !- Chilled Water Outlet Temperature Lower Limit {C}
VariableFlow , !- Chiller Flow Mode
0.00055 , !- Design heat recovery water flow rate {m3/s}
Big Chiller Heat Rec Inlet Node , !- Heat Recovery Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Heat Rec Outlet Node; !- Heat Recovery Outlet Node Name
1.22.6.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Chiller Electric Power [W]
• Zone,Meter,Electricity:Plant [J]
• Zone,Meter,Cooling:Electricity [J]
• Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Plant [J]
• Zone,Meter,Chillers:EnergyTransfer [J]
• Zone,Meter,HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer [J]
Air-cooled or Evap-cooled:
Evap-cooled:
Water-cooled:
HeatRecovery:
These chiller output variables are defined above under “Generic Chiller Outputs.”
1.22.7 Chiller:Electric:EIR
This chiller model is the empirical model used in the DOE-2.1 building energy simulation program. The
model uses performance information at reference conditions along with three curve fits for cooling capacity
and efficiency to determine chiller operation at off-reference conditions. Chiller performance curves can
be generated by fitting manufacturer’s catalog data or measured data. Performance curves for more than
160 chillers, including the default DOE-2.1E reciprocating and centrifugal chillers, are provided in the
EnergyPlus Reference DataSets (Chillers.idf and AllDataSets.idf).
Note: Chiller:Electric:EIR objects and their associated performance curve objects are developed using
performance information for a specific chiller and should normally be used together for an EnergyPlus
simulation. Changing the object input values, or swapping performance curves between chillers, should be
done with caution.
1.22.7.1 Inputs
1.22.7.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the electric EIR chiller.
758 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.22.7.1.10 Field: Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load Ratio
Curve Name
The name of a quadratic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that parameterizes the variation
of the energy input ratio (EIR) as a function of the part-load ratio (EIRfTPLR). The EIR is the inverse
of the COP, and the part-load ratio is the actual cooling load divided by the chiller’s available cooling
capacity. This curve is generated by dividing the operating electric input power by the available full-load
capacity (do not divide by load) at the specific operating temperatures. The curve output should decrease
from 1 towards 0 as part-load ratio decreases from 1 to 0. The output of this curve is multiplied by the
reference full-load EIR (inverse of the reference COP) and the Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio
Function of Temperature Curve to give the EIR at the specific temperatures and part-load ratio at which
the chiller is operating. This curve should have a value of 1.0 when the part-load ratio equals 1.0. An ideal
chiller with the same efficiency at all part-load ratio’s would use a performance curve that has a value of
0 when the part-load ratio equals 0 (i.;e., a line connecting 0,0 and 1,1 when plotted as EIRfTPLR versus
PLR), however, actual systems can have part-load EIR’s slightly above or below this line (i.e., part-load
efficiency often differs from rated efficiency). The quadratic curve should be valid for the range of part-load
ratios anticipated for the simulation.
The minimum unloading ratio must be greater than or equal to the Minimum Part Load Ratio, and less
than or equal to the Maximum Part Load Ratio. The default value is 0.2.
basin heater schedule described below. The basin heater capacity must be greater than or equal to zero,
with a default value of zero if this field is left blank.
1.22.7.1.32 Field: Heat Recovery Inlet High Temperature Limit Schedule Name
This field is optional. It can be used to control heat recovery operation of the chiller. The schedule
named here should contain temperature values, in C, that describe an upper limit for the return fluid
temperatures entering the chiller at the heat recovery inlet node. If the fluid temperature is too high,
then the heat recovery will not operate. This is useful to restrict the chiller lift from becoming too high
and to avoid overheating the hot water loop. This limit can be used with or without the alternate control
using leaving setpoint that is set in the next field.
the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance table. If this field is omitted or
blank, the chiller will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:
!
! Curve set (3 Curves):
!
! Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve for open or hermetic water -cooled centrifugal
chillers
! x = Leaving Chilled Water Temperature and y = Entering Condenser Water Temperature
! Same as DOE -2.1E HERM -CENT -CAP -FT (CCAPT3) and OPEN -CENT -CAP -FT (CCAPT1)
Curve:Biquadratic ,
DOE -2 Centrifugal /5.50 COP CAPFT , !- Name
0.257896E+00, !- Coefficient1 Constant
0.389016E-01, !- Coefficient2 x
-0.217080E-03, !- Coefficient3 x**2
0.468684E-01, !- Coefficient4 y
-0.942840E-03, !- Coefficient5 y**2
-0.343440E-03, !- Coefficient6 x*y
5.0, !- Minimum Value of x
10.0, !- Maximum Value of x
24.0, !- Minimum Value of y
35.0; !- Maximum Value of y
!
! Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temperature Curve for open or hermetic water -
cooled centrifugal chillers
! x = Leaving Chilled Water Temperature and y = Entering Condenser Water Temperature
! Same as DOE -2.1E HERM -CENT -EIR -FT (EIRT3) and OPEN -CENT -EIR -FT (EIRT1)
Curve:Biquadratic ,
DOE -2 Centrifugal /5.50 COP EIRFT , !- Name
0.933884E+00, !- Coefficient1 Constant
-0.582120E-01, !- Coefficient2 x
0.450036E-02, !- Coefficient3 x**2
0.243000E-02, !- Coefficient4 y
0.486000E-03, !- Coefficient5 y**2
-0.121500E-02, !- Coefficient6x*y
5.0, !- Minimum Value of x
764 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.22.7.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Chiller Electric Power [W]
• Zone,Meter,Electricity:Plant [J]
• Zone,Meter,Cooling:Electricity [J]
• Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Plant [J]
• Zone,Meter,Chillers:EnergyTransfer [J]
• Zone,Meter,HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer [J]
Air-cooled or Evap-cooled:
Air-cooled or Evap-cooled reported only when the condenser fan power ratio input field is greater than
0:
Evap-cooled:
Water-cooled:
HeatRecovery:
• Zone,Meter,HeatRecovery:EnergyTransfer [J]
Most of these chiller output variables are defined above under “Generic Chiller Outputs.” Output
variables not described above are discussed here.
1.22.8 Chiller:Electric:ReformulatedEIR
This chiller model, developed through the CoolTools™ project sponsored by Pacific Gas and Electric
Company (PG&E), is an empirical model similar to EnergyPlus’ Chiller:Electric:EIR model. The model
uses performance information at reference conditions along with three curve fits for cooling capacity and
efficiency to determine chiller operation at off-reference conditions. The model has the same capabilities
as the Chiller:Electric:EIR model, but can potentially provide significant accuracy improvement over the
Chiller:Electric:EIR model for variable-speed compressor drive and variable condenser water flow applica-
tions. Chiller performance curves can be generated by fitting manufacturer’s catalog data or measured
data. Performance curves developed from manufacturer’s performance data are provided in the Energy-
Plus Reference DataSets (Chillers.idf and AllDataSets.idf). This chiller model can be used to predict the
performance of various chiller types (e.g., reciprocating, screw, scroll, and centrifugal) with water-cooled
condensers.
The main difference between this model and the Chiller:Electric:EIR model is the condenser fluid
temperature used in the associated performance curves: the Chiller:Electric:ReformulatedEIR model uses
the LEAVING condenser water temperature while the Chiller:Electric:EIR model uses the ENTERING
condenser water temperature.
Note: Chiller:Electric:Reformulated EIR objects and their associated performance curve objects are
developed using performance information for a specific chiller and should almost always be used together
for an EnergyPlus simulation. Changing the object input values, or swapping performance curves between
chillers, should be done with extreme caution. For example, if the user wishes to model a chiller size
that is different from the reference capacity, it is highly recommended that the reference flow rates be
scaled proportionately to the change in reference capacity. Although this model can provide more accurate
prediction than the Chiller:Electric:EIR model, it requires more performance data to develop the associated
performance curves (at least 12 points from full-load performance and 7 points from part-load performance).
1.22.8.1 Inputs
1.22.8.1.1 Field: Chiller Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for this chiller.
1.22.8.1.10 Field: Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load Ratio
Curve Type
This choice field determines which type of the Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part
Load Ratio Curve is used in the chiller modeling. Two curve types are available: (1) Type LeavingCon-
denserWaterTemperature is based on the leaving condenser water temperature. (2) Type Lift is based on
the normalized lift, which is the temperature difference between the leaving condenser water temperature
and the leaving evaporator water temperature.
1.22.8.1.11 Field: Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load Ratio
Curve Name
The name of performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that parameterizes the variation of the
energy input ratio (EIR) as a function of the leaving condenser water temperature and the part-load ratio
(EIRfTPLR). The form of this curve is based on the input for Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio
Function of Part Load Ratio Curve Type.
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 769
For the type of LeavingCondenserWaterTemperature, the curve object type should be Curve:Bicubic or
Table:TwoIndependentVariables that parameterizes the variation of the energy input to cooling output ratio
(EIR) as a function of the leaving chilled water temperature and the leaving condenser water temperature.
For the type of Lift, the curve object type should be Curve:ChillerPartLoadWithLift or Ta-
ble:TwoIndependentVariables that parameterizes the variation of EIR as a function of the normalized
fractional Lift, normalized Tdev and the PLR. Tdev is the difference between Leaving Chilled Water
Temperature and Reference Chilled Water Temperature. Lift is the difference between the Leaving
Condenser Water Temperature and Leaving Chilled Water Temperature. The EIR is the inverse of the
COP, and the part-load ratio is the actual cooling load divided by the chiller’s available cooling capacity.
This curve is generated by dividing the operating electric input power by the available full-load capacity
(do not divide by load) at the specific operating temperatures. The curve output should decrease from 1
towards 0 as part-load ratio decreases from 1 to 0. The output of this curve is multiplied by the reference
full-load EIR (inverse of the reference COP) and the Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of
Temperature Curve to give the EIR at the specific temperatures and part-load ratio at which the chiller
is operating. This curve should have a value of 1.0 at the reference leaving condenser water temperature
with the part-load ratio equal to 1.0. An ideal chiller with the same efficiency at all part-load ratio’s would
use a performance curve that has a value of 0 when the part-load ratio equals 0 (i.;e., a line connecting
0,0 and 1,1 when plotted as EIRfTPLR versus PLR), however, actual systems can have part-load EIR’s
slightly above or below this line (i.e., part-load efficiency often differs from rated efficiency). The bicubic
curve should be valid for the range of condenser water temperatures and part-load ratios anticipated for
the simulation (otherwise the program issues warning messages).
Note: Although a bicubic curve requires 10 coefficients (ref. Curve:Bicubic), coefficients 7, 9 and 10
are typically not used in the performance curve described here and should be entered as 0 unless sufficient
performance data and regression accuracy exist to justify the use of these coefficients. Additionally, coef-
ficients 2, 3, and 6 should not be used unless sufficient temperature data is available to accurately define
the performance curve (i.e., negative values may result from insufficient data).
1.22.8.1.28 Field: Heat Recovery Inlet High Temperature Limit Schedule Name
This field is optional. It can be used to control heat recovery operation of the chiller. The schedule
named here should contain temperature values, in C, that describe an upper limit for the return fluid
temperatures entering the chiller at the heat recovery inlet node. If the fluid temperature is too high,
then the heat recovery will not operate. This is useful to restrict the chiller lift from becoming too high
and to avoid overheating the hot water loop. This limit can be used with or without the alternate control
using leaving setpoint that is set in the next field.
the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance table. If this field is omitted or
blank, the chiller will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:
Chiller:Electric:ReformulatedEIR ,
Main Chiller , !- Chiller Name
50000 , !- Reference Capacity {W}
3.99, !- Reference COP
6.67, !- Reference Leaving Chilled Water Temperature {C}
35.0, !- Reference Leaving Condenser Water Temperature {C}
0.00898 , !- Reference Chilled Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.01122 , !- Reference Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
Main Chiller RecipCapFT , !- Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve
Main Chiller RecipEIRFT , !- Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of
Temperature Curve
LeavingCondenserWaterTemperature !- Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load
Ratio Curve Type
Main Chiller RecipEIRFPLR , !- Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load
Ratio Curve Name
0.01, !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
1, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
0.07, !- Minimum Unloading Ratio
Main Chiller ChW Inlet , !- Chilled Water Side Inlet Node
Main Chiller ChW Outlet , !- Chilled Water Side Outlet Node
Main Chiller Cnd Inlet , !- Condenser Side Inlet Node
Main Chiller Cnd Outlet , !- Condenser Side Outlet Node
1, !- Fraction of Compressor Electric Power Rejected by Condenser
2, !- Leaving Chilled Water Lower Temperature Limit {C}
ConstantFlow; !- Chiller Flow Mode
Curve:Biquadratic ,
Main Chiller RecipCapFT , !- Name
0.958546443 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
0.035168695 , !- Coefficient2 x
0.000124662 , !- Coefficient3 x\*\*2
-0.00274551 , !-Coefficient4y
-0.00005000 , !-Coefficient5y \*\*2
-0.00017234 , !-Coefficient6x \*y
5.00, !- Minimum Value of x
10.0, !- Maximum Value of x
20.00 , !- Minimum Value of y
40.94; !- Maximum Value of y
Curve:Biquadratic ,
Main Chiller RecipEIRFT , !- Name
0.732700123 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
-0.00834360 , !- Coefficient2 x
0.000638530 , !- Coefficient3 x\*\*2
-0.00303753 , !-Coefficient4y
0.000484952 , !-Coefficient5y \*\*2
-0.00083584 , !-Coefficient6x \*y
5.00, !- Minimum Value of x
10.0, !- Maximum Value of x
20.00 , !- Minimum Value of y
40.94; !- Maximum Value of y
! Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load Ratio Curve
! x = Leaving Condenser water Temperature and y = Part Load Ratio
Curve:Bicubic ,
Main Chiller RecipEIRFPLR , !- Name
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 773
1.22.8.2 Outputs
The output variables for Chiller:Electric:ReformulatedEIR are the same as the output variables for
Chiller:Electric:EIR (ref. Electric EIR Chiller Outputs). except for the Chiller Condenser Fan Electric
Power and Energy reports
1.22.9 Chiller:EngineDriven
1.22.9.1 Inputs
1.22.9.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the engine driven chiller.
the node name may be specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList object where the outdoor air temperature is
taken directly from the weather data. If the chiller is AirCooled or EvaporativelyCooled and this field is
left blank, the program automatically creates an outdoor air node and the air temperature information on
this node is taken directly from the weather file (no node height adjustment).
T CEntrequired − T CEntrated
(1.51)
T ELvrequired − T ELvrated
where:
TCEntrequired = Required entering condenser air or water temperature to maintain rated capacity.
TCEntrated = Rated entering condenser air or water temperature at rated capacity.
TELvrequired = Required leaving evaporator water outlet temperature to maintain rated capacity.
TELvrated = Rated leaving evaporator water outlet temperature at rated capacity.
TempCondIn = Temperature entering the condenser (water or air temperature depending on condenser
type).
TempCondInDesign = Design Condenser Inlet Temperature from User input above.
TempEvapOut = Temperature leaving the evaporator.
TempEvapOutDesign = Design Chilled Water Outlet Temperature from User input above.
TempRiseCoefficient = User Input from above.
The following three fields contain the coefficients for the quadratic equation.
The following three fields contain the coefficients for the quadratic equation.
where PLR is the Part Load Ratio from the Chiller. The Part Load Based Fuel Input Curve determines
the ratio of fuel energy per unit time (J/s) / cooling load (W). This is illustrated by the logic block in the
Engine Driven Chiller algorithm.
IF (PartLoadRat = = 0) THEN
EngineDrivenFuelEnergy = 0
ELSE
ClngLoadFuelRat = CurveValue(EngineDrivenChiller(ChillerNum)%ClngLoadtoFuelCurve , PartLoadRat )
EngineDrivenFuelEnergy = QEvaporator / ClngLoadFuelRat
END IF
T CEntrequired − T CEntrated
(1.60)
T ELvrequired − T ELvrated
The following two fields contain the coefficients for the equation.
1.22.9.1.46 Field: Maximum Temperature for Heat Recovery at Heat Recovery Outlet
Node
This field sets the maximum temperature that this piece of equipment can produce for heat recovery.
The idea behind this field is that the current models do not take temperatures into account for availability
and they just pass Q’s around the loop without a temperature limit. This temperature limit puts an upper
bound on the recovered heat and limits the max temperatures leaving the component.
As temperatures in the loop approach the maximum temperature, the temperature difference between
the entering water and the surfaces in the piece of equipment becomes smaller. For the given heat recovery
flow rate and that temperature difference the amount of heat recovered will be reduced, and eventually
there will be no heat recovered when the entering water temperature is equal to the maximum temperature
specified by the user in this field. The reduced amount of heat recovered will diminish if the temperature
of the loop approach is the maximum temperature, and this will show up in the reporting. This allows the
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 779
user to set the availability or the quality of the heat recovered for usage in other parts of the system or to
heat domestic hot water supply. The temperature is specified in degrees C.
Chiller:EngineDriven ,
Central Chiller , !- Chiller Name
WaterCooled , !- Condenser Type
autosize , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
2.75, !- COP
Central Chiller Inlet Node , !- Chilled Water Inlet Node Name
780 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.22.9.2 Outputs
Air-cooled or Evap-cooled:
• HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]
Evap-cooled:
Water-cooled:
• Zone,Meter,HeatRecovery:EnergyTransfer [J]
These chiller output variables are defined above under “Generic Chiller Outputs.”
1.22.10 Chiller:CombustionTurbine
This chiller model is the empirical model from the Building Loads and System Thermodynamics (BLAST)
program. Chiller performance curves are generated by fitting catalog data to third order polynomial
equations. Three sets of coefficients are required.
1.22.10.1 Inputs
1.22.10.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the combustion turbine chiller.
T CEntrequired − T CEntrated
(1.61)
T ELvrequired − T ELvrated
where:
TCEntrequired = Required entering condenser air or water temperature to maintain rated capacity.
TCEntrated = Rated entering condenser air or water temperature at rated capacity.
TELvrequired = Required leaving evaporator water outlet temperature to maintain rated capacity.
TELvrated = Rated leaving evaporator water outlet temperature at rated capacity.
TempCondIn = Temperature entering the condenser (water or air temperature depending on condenser
type).
TempCondInDesign = Design Condenser Inlet Temperature from User input above.
TempEvapOut = Temperature leaving the evaporator.
TempEvapOutDesign = Design Chilled Water Outlet Temperature from User input above.
TempRiseCoefficient = User Input from above.
The following three fields contain the coefficients for the quadratic equation.
F uelEnergyInput = P Load∗(F IC1 +F IC2 RLoad+F IC3 RLoad2 )∗(T BF IC1 +T BF IC2 ATair +T BF IC3 ATair
2
)
(1.64)
The following three fields contain the coefficients for the quadratic equation.
where FIC represents the Fuel Input Curve Coefficients, TBFIC represents the Temperature Based
Fuel Input Curve Coefficients, Rload is the Ratio of Load to Combustion Turbine Engine Capacity, and
ATair is the difference between the current ambient and design ambient temperatures.
The following three fields contain the coefficients for the fuel input curve.
where GTCapacity is the Combustion Turbine Engine Capacity, and ATair is the difference between
the current ambient and design ambient temperatures.
where C represents the Exhaust Gas Temperature Curve Coefficients, TBC are the Temperature Based
Exhaust Gas Temperature Curve Coefficients, RLoad is the Ratio of Load to Combustion Turbine Engine
Capacity, and ATair is the difference between the actual ambient and design ambient temperatures.
where Pload is the engine load and RL is the Ratio of Load to Combustion Turbine Engine Capacity
The following three fields contain the coefficients for the quadratic equation.
The following two fields contain the coefficients for the equation.
Chiller:CombustionTurbine ,
Big Chiller , !- Chiller Name
WaterCooled , !- Condenser Type
30000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
2.75, !- COP
Big Chiller Inlet Node , !- Chilled Water Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Outlet Node , !- Chilled Water Outlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Condenser Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Outlet Node , !- Condenser Outlet Node Name
.15, !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
.65, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
35.0, !- Design Condenser Inlet Temperature {C}
2.778 , !- Temperature Rise Coefficient
6.67, !- Design Chilled Water Outlet Temperature {C}
0.0011 , !- Design Chilled Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0011 , !- Design Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9949 , !- Coefficient 1 of Capacity Ratio Curve
-0.045954 , !- Coefficient 2 of Capacity Ratio Curve
-0.0013543 , !- Coefficient 3 of Capacity Ratio Curve
2.333 , !- Coefficient 1 of Power Ratio Curve
-1.975, !- Coefficient 2 of Power Ratio Curve
0.6121 , !- Coefficient 3 of Power Ratio Curve
0.03303 , !- Coefficient 1 of Full Load Ratio Curve
0.6852 , !- Coefficient 2 of Full Load Ratio Curve
0.2818 , !- Coefficient 3 of Full Load Ratio Curve
5, !- Chilled Water Outlet Temperature Lower Limit {C}
9.41, !- Coefficient 1 of Fuel Input curve
-9.48, !- Coefficient 2 of Fuel Input curve
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 791
1.22.10.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Chiller Electric Power [W]
• Zone,Meter,Electricity:Plant [J]
• Zone,Meter,Cooling:Electricity [J]
• Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Plant [J]
• Zone,Meter,Chillers:EnergyTransfer [J]
• Zone,Meter,HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer [J]
Air-cooled or Evap-cooled:
792 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Evap-cooled:
Water-cooled:
• Zone,Meter,HeatRecovery:EnergyTransfer [J]
These chiller output variables are defined above under “Generic Chiller Outputs.” The Fuel Type
input will determine which fuel type is displayed in the output. In this example with the user choice of
NaturalGas, you will have Gas Consumption.
1.22.11 ChillerHeater:Absorption:DirectFired
This chiller is a direct fired absorption chiller-heater which is modeled using performance curves similar
to the equivalent chiller in DOE-2.1E. This type of chiller is unusual for EnergyPlus, because it may be
used in the same plant on both a chilled water supply branch and a hot water supply branch. The chiller
has six node connections for chilled water, condenser water, and hot water, and can provide simultaneous
heating and cooling. During simultaneous operation, the heating capacity is reduced as the cooling load
increases (for more details see below). Some equations are provided below to help explain the function of
the various performance curves. For a detailed description of the algorithm and how the curves are used
in the calculations, please see the Engineering Reference.
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 793
1.22.11.1 Inputs
1.22.11.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller.
CoolFuelInput =
(1.68)
AvailCoolCap · RunFrac · CFIR · CFIRfT(Tcw,l , Tcond ) · CFIRfPLR(CPLR)
1.22.11.1.24 Field: Fuel Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load Ratio
Curve Name
The CFIRfPLR curve represents the fraction of the fuel input to the chiller as the load the chiller varies
but the operating temperatures remain at the design values. The curve is normalized so that at full load
the value of the curve should be 1.0. The curve is usually linear or quadratic. The cooling fuel input to
the chiller is computed as follows:
CoolElectricPower =
(1.69)
NomCoolCap · RunFrac · CEIR · CEIRfT(Tcw,l , Tcond ) · CEIRfPLR(CPLR)
1.22.11.1.26 Field: Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load
Ratio Curve Name
The ElecCoolFPLR curve represents the fraction of the electricity to the chiller as the load on the
chiller varies but This operating temperatures remain at the design values. The curve is normalized so
that at full load the value of the curve should be 1.0. The curve is usually linear or quadratic. The cooling
electric input to the chiller is computed as follows:
1.22.11.1.28 Field: Fuel Input to Heat Output Ratio During Heating Only Operation
Curve Name
When the chiller is operating as only a heater, the curve is used to represent the fraction of fuel used
as the heating load varies. It is normalized so that a value of 1.0 is the full available heating capacity. The
curve is usually linear or quadratic and will probably be similar to a boiler curve for most chillers.
ChillerHeater:Absorption:DirectFired ,
Big Chiller , !- Chiller Name
100000 , !- Nominal Cooling Capacity {W}
0.8, !- Heating to Cooling capacity ratio
0.97, !- Fuel Input to Cooling Output Ratio
1.25, !- Fuel Input to Heating Output Ratio
0.01, !- Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio
0.005 , !- Electric Input to Heating Output Ratio
Big Chiller Inlet Node , !- Chilled Water Side Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Outlet Node , !- Chilled Water Side Outlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Condenser Side Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Outlet Node , !- Condenser Side Outlet Node Name
Purchased Heat Inlet Node , !- Hot Water Side Inlet Node Name
Purchased Heat Outlet Node , !- Hot Water Side Outlet Node Name
0.000001 , !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
0.6, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
29, !- Design Entering Condenser Water Temperature {C}
7, !- Design Leaving Chilled Water Temperature {C}
0.0011 , !- Design Chilled Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0011 , !- Design Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0043 , !- Design Hot Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
GasAbsFlatBiQuad , !- Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve Name
GasAbsFlatBiQuad , !- Fuel Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temperature Curve Name
GasAbsLinearQuad , !- Fuel Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load Ratio Curve
Name
GasAbsFlatBiQuad , !- Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temperature Curve
Name
GasAbsFlatQuad , !- Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load Ratio
Curve Name
GasAbsInvLinearQuad , !- Heating Capacity Function of Cooling Capacity Curve Name
GasAbsLinearQuad , !- Fuel Input to Heat Output Ratio During Heating Only Operation Curve
Name
EnteringCondenser , !- Temperature Curve Input Variable
WaterCooled , !- Condenser Type
2, !- Chilled Water Temperature Lower Limit {C}
0, !- Fuel Higher Heating Value {kJ/kg}
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
1.0; !- Sizing Factor
1.22.11.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Electric Power [W]
• Zone,Meter,Electricity:Plant [J]
• Zone,Meter,Cooling:Electricity [J]
• Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Plant [J]
• Zone,Meter,Chillers:EnergyTransfer [J]
• Zone,Meter,HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer [J]
The following three outputs are only available for water-cooled chillers
The “Chiller” output variables are defined above under “Generic Chiller Outputs.” The specific “Direct
Fired Absorption Chiller” output variables and exceptions to the generic outputs are defined below.
1.22.12 ChillerHeater:Absorption:DoubleEffect
This chiller is an exhaust fired absorption chiller-heater which is modeled using performance curves similar
to the direct fired absorption chiller in DOE-2.1E. The model uses the exhaust gas output from MicroTur-
bine. This type of chiller is unusual for EnergyPlus, because it may be used in the same plant on both
a chilled water supply branch and a hot water supply branch. The chiller has six node connections for
chilled water, condenser water, and hot water, and can provide simultaneous heating and cooling. During
simultaneous operation, the heating capacity is reduced as the cooling load increases (for more details see
below). Some equations are provided below to help explain the function of the various performance curves.
For a detailed description of the algorithm and how the curves are used in the calculations, please see the
Engineering Reference.
1.22.12.1 Inputs
1.22.12.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller.
1.22.12.1.23 Field: Thermal Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Tem-
perature Curve Name
The TeFIRfT curve represents the fraction of the Thermal Energy Input to the chiller at full load as
it varies with temperature. The curve is normalized so that at design conditions the value of the curve
should be 1.0. The curve is usually a biquadratic or bilinear curve with the input variables being the
leaving chilled water temperature and the entering condenser water temperature (see Temperature Curve
Input Variable below). If the chiller is AirCooled, the temperature of the condenser inlet node (outdoor
air node) is used for the condenser temperature.
1.22.12.1.24 Field: Thermal Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part
Load Ratio Curve Name
The TeFIRfPLR curve represents the fraction of the Thermal Energy Input to the chiller as the load
on the chiller varies but the operating temperatures remain at the design values. The curve is normalized
so that at full load the value of the curve should be 1.0. The curve is usually linear or quadratic.
The cooling Thermal Energy Input to the chiller is computed as follows:
CoolElectricP ower = N omCoolCap · RunF rac · CEIR · CEIRf T (Tcw,l , Tcond ) · CEIRf P LR(CP LR)
(1.74)
Variable below). If the chiller is AirCooled, the temperature of the condenser inlet node (outdoor air node)
is used for the condenser temperature.
1.22.12.1.26 Field: Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load
Ratio Curve Name
The CEIRfPLR curve represents the fraction of the electricity to the chiller as the load on the chiller
varies but This operating temperatures remain at the design values. The curve is normalized so that at
full load the value of the curve should be 1.0. The curve is usually linear or quadratic.
The cooling electric input to the chiller is computed as follows:
1.22.12.1.28 Field: Thermal Energy Input to Heat Output Ratio During Heating Only
Operation Curve Name
When the chiller is operating as only a heater, the curve is used to represent the fraction of Thermal
Energy used as the heating load varies. It is normalized so that a value of 1.0 is the full available heating
capacity. The curve is usually linear or quadratic and will probably be similar to a boiler curve for most
chillers.
The heating Thermal Energy Input to the chiller is computed as follows:
BoilerLoad
T heoreticalF uelU se = (1.77)
N ominalT hermalEf f iciency
ChillerHeater:Absorption:DoubleEffect ,
Exh Chiller , !- Chiller Name
100000 , !- Nominal Cooling Capacity {W}
0.8, !- Heating to Cooling capacity ratio
0.97, !- Thermal Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio
1.25, !- Thermal Energy Input to Heating Output Ratio
0.01, !- Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio
0.005 , !- Electric Input to Heating Output Ratio
Exh Chiller Inlet Node , !- Chilled Water Side Inlet Node Name
Exh Chiller Outlet Node , !- Chilled Water Side Outlet Node Name
Exh Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Condenser Side Inlet Node Name
Exh Chiller Condenser Outlet Node , !- Condenser Side Outlet Node Name
Exh Chiller Heating Inlet Node , !- Hot Water Side Inlet Node Name
Exh Chiller Heating Outlet Node , !- Hot Water Side Outlet Node Name
0.000001 , !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
0.6, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
29, !- Design Entering Condenser Water Temperature {C}
7, !- Design Leaving Chilled Water Temperature {C}
0.0011 , !- Design Chilled Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0011 , !- Design Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0043 , !- Design Hot Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
ExhAbsorb_CapFt , !- Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve Name
ExhAbsorb_EIRFt , !- Thermal Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temperature
Curve Name
ExhAbsorb_PLR , !- Thermal Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load Ratio
Curve Name
ExhAbsFlatBiQuad , !- Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temperature Curve
Name
ExhAbsFlatQuad , !- Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load Ratio Curve
Name
ExhAbsInvLinearQuad , !- Heating Capacity Function of Cooling Capacity Curve Name
ExhAbsLinearQuad , !- Thermal Energy Input to Heat Output Ratio During Heating Only Operation
Curve Name
EnteringCondenser , !- Temperature Curve Input Variable
WaterCooled , !- Condenser Type
2, !- Chilled Water Temperature Lower Limit {C}
Generator:MicroTurbine ; ! Field Exhaust Source Object Type
Capston500 ; ! Field Exhaust Source name
1.0; !- Sizing Factor
1.22.12.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Electric Power [W]
806 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
The following three outputs are only available for water-cooled chillers
• HVAC,Average, Chiller Heater Source Exhaust Inlet Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• Zone,Meter,Heating:Electricity [J]
The “Chiller” output variables are defined above under “Generic Chiller Outputs.” The specific
“Exhaust Fired Absorption Chiller” output variables and exceptions to the generic outputs are defined
below.
1.22.12.2.32 Chiller Heater Source Exhaust Inlet Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
The exhaust flow rate from the Micro Turbine
810 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.22.13 Boiler:HotWater
The boiler model calculates the performance of fuel oil, gas and electric boilers. Boiler performance is
based on nominal thermal efficiency. A normailized efficiency performance curve may be used to more
accurately represent the performance of non-electric boilers but is not considered a required input. When
using the normalized efficiency performance curve, if all coefficients are not required simply set the unused
coefficients to 0. For example, an electric boiler could be modeled by setting the nominal thermal efficiency
to a value in the range of 0.96 to 1.0. Coefficient A0 in the normalized efficiency performance curve would
equal 1 and all other coefficients would be set to 0. Coefficients for other types of non-electric boilers would
set a combination of the available coefficents to non-zero values.
1.22.13.1 Inputs
1.22.13.1.1 Field: Name
This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the boiler.
T heoreticalF uelU se
F uelU sed = (1.78)
N ormalizedBoilerEf f iciencyCurveOutput
Linear → Ef f = A0 + A1 · P LR (1.79)
where
Eff = normalized boiler efficiency
PLR = boiler part-load ratio
Tw = boiler water temperature [ºC] ], this can be either entering or leaving temperature depending on
the setting in the previous field
altered by the sizing factor are: Nominal Capacity and Design Water Flow Rate. Sizing factor allows the
user to size a component to meet part of the design load while continuing to use the autosizing feature.
Boiler:HotWater ,
Condensing Boiler , !- Boiler Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
25000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
EnteringBoiler !- Efficiency Curve Temperature Evaluation Variable
0.89, !- Nominal Thermal Efficiency
CondensingBoilerEff , !- Boiler Efficiency Curve Name
75, !- Design Boiler Water Outlet Temp {C}
0.0021 , !- Max Design Boiler Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.10, !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.00, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
1.00, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
Boiler Inlet Node , !- Boiler Water Inlet Node
Boiler Outlet Node , !- Boiler Water Outlet Node
80, !- Temp Upper Limit Water Outlet {C}
ConstantFlow , !- Boiler Flow Mode
25.0; !- Parasitic Electric Load {W}
Curve:Biquadratic ,
CondensingBoilerEff , !- Name
1.124970374 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
0.014963852 , !- Coefficient2 x
-0.02599835 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
0.0, !-Coefficient4y
-1.40464E-6, !-Coefficient5y **2
-0.00153624 , !- Coefficient6x*y
0.1, !- Minimum Value of x
1.0, !- Maximum Value of x
30.0, !- Minimum Value of y
85.0; !- Maximum Value of y
1.22.13.2 Outputs
Outputs available from the boiler:
• Zone,Meter,Boilers:EnergyTransfer [J]
1.22.14 Boiler:Steam
The steam boiler model provides a first order approximation of performance for fuel oil, gas and electric
boilers. Boiler performance is based on a “theoretical” boiler efficiency (overall efficiency at design operating
conditions) and a single quadratic fuel use/ part load ratio curve. This single curve accounts for all
combustion inefficiencies and stack losses.
1.22.14.1 Inputs
1.22.14.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the Steam Boiler.
816 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.22.14.1.10 Field: Coefficient 1 of Fuel Use Function of Part Load Ratio Curve
This numeric field contains the fuel use / PLR coefficient1.
1.22.14.1.11 Field: Coefficient 2 of Fuel Use Function of Part Load Ratio Curve
This numeric field contains the fuel use / PLR coefficient2.
1.22.14.1.12 Field: Coefficient 3 of Fuel Use Function of Part Load Ratio Curve
This numeric field contains the fuel use / PLR coefficient3.
Boiler:Steam ,
Steam Boiler Plant Boiler , !- Boiler Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
160000 , !-Maximum Boiler Pressure Pascal
0.8, !- Theoretical Boiler Efficiency
115, !- Max Design Outlet Steam Temp
300000 , !- Nominal Capacity W
0.00001 , !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
0.2, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
0.8,!- Coefficient 1 of the fuel use/part load ratio curve
0.1,!- Coefficient 2 of the fuel use/part load ratio curve
0.1,!- Coefficient 3 of the fuel use/part load ratio curve
Steam Boiler Plant Boiler Inlet Node , !- Boiler Steam Inlet Node
Steam Boiler Plant Boiler Outlet Node; !- Plant Loop Outlet Node
Boiler:Steam ,
Steam Boiler Plant Boiler , !- Boiler Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
160000 , !-Maximum Boiler Pressure Pascal
0.8, !- Theoretical Boiler Efficiency
115, !- Max Design Outlet Steam Temp
autosize , !- Nominal Capacity W
0.00001 , !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
0.2, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
0.8,!- Coefficient 1 of the fuel use/part load ratio curve
0.1,!- Coefficient 2 of the fuel use/part load ratio curve
0.1,!- Coefficient 3 of the fuel use/part load ratio curve
Steam Boiler Plant Boiler Inlet Node , !- Boiler Steam Inlet Node
Steam Boiler Plant Boiler Outlet Node; !- Plant Loop Outlet Node
1.22.14.2 Outputs
Outputs available from the steam boiler:
• Zone,Meter,Boilers:EnergyTransfer [J]
818 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Tang,C. C. 2005. Modeling Packaged Heat Pumps in Quasi-Steady State Energy Simulation Pro-
gram. M.S. Thesis. Department of Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering, Oklahoma State University.
(downloadable from http://www.hvac.okstate.edu/)
HeatPump:WaterToWater:EIR:Cooling
HeatPump:WaterToWater:EIR:Heating
Beginning with version 9.1, an EIR-formulated water-to-water heat pump model was added. This
formulation allows the user to enter curves for specifying the capacity and energy usage in a more generic
way, allowing the curves to be applicable to a wide variety of components. With the original equation fit
model, the curve form was locked in to a specific set of linear coefficients. With the new form, the curve
can be a quadratic function of temperatures, or an even more generic lookup table.
Configuration
The Supply side of the heat pump is usually connected to a Ground Heat Exchanger. The figure below
shows the layout and piping diagram of the water-to-water heat pump.
First, the equation fit model objects are described. This model has two sets of coefficients, one for the
heating mode and other for the cooling mode.
1.22.16 HeatPump:WaterToWater:EquationFit:Cooling
1.22.16.1 Inputs
1.22.16.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the ground source heat pump.
HeatPump:WaterToWater:EquationFit:Cooling ,
GshpCLG , !- Name
GshpCLG SourceSide Inlet Node , !- Source Side Inlet Node Name
GshpCLG SourceSide Outlet Node , !- Source Side Outlet Node Name
GshpCLG LoadSide Inlet Node , !- Load Side Inlet Node Name
GshpCLG LoadSide Outlet Node , !- Load Side Outlet Node Name
1.89E-03, !- Reference Load Side Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.89E-03, !- Reference Source Side Flow Rate {m3/s}
39890.91 , !- Reference Cooling Capacity {W}
4790.00 , !- Reference Cooling Power Consumption {W}
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 823
1.22.16.2 Outputs
This section describes the outputs available for the water to water heat pump, equation fit model; both
cooling and heating.
1.22.16.2.2 Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This output variable represents the cumulative heat transfer across the load side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are summed across the
reporting period.
1.22.16.2.3 Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This output variable represents the cumulative heat transfer across the source side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are summed across the
reporting period.
824 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.22.16.2.5 Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This output variable represents the heat transfer across the load side coil. The values are calculated
for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step being
reported.
1.22.16.2.6 Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This output variable represents the heat transfer across the source side coil. The values are calculated
for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step being
reported.
1.22.16.2.7 Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Outlet Temperature [C]
This output variable represents the average fluid temperature leaving the load side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time
step being reported.
1.22.16.2.8 Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Inlet Temperature [C]
This output variable represents the average fluid temperature entering the load side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time
step being reported.
1.22.16.2.9 Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Outlet Temperature [C]
This output variable represents the average fluid temperature leaving the source side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time
step being reported.
1.22.16.2.10 Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Inlet Temperature [C]
This output variable represents the average fluid temperature entering the source side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time
step being reported.
1.22.16.2.11 Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output variable represents the average fluid flow rate through the load side coil. The values are
calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step
being reported.
1.22.16.2.12 Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output variable represents the average fluid flow rate through the source side coil. The values are
calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step
being reported.
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 825
1.22.17 HeatPump:WaterToWater:EquationFit:Heating
1.22.17.1 Inputs
1.22.17.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the ground source heat pump.
HeatPump:WaterToWater:EquationFit:Heating ,
GshpHeating , !- Name
GshpHeating SourceSide Inlet Node , !- Source Side Inlet Node Name
GshpHeating SourceSide Outlet Node , !- Source Side Outlet Node Name
GshpHeating LoadSide Inlet Node , !- Load Side Inlet Node Name
GshpHeating LoadSide Outlet Node , !- Load Side Outlet Node Name
1.89E-03, !- Reference Load Side Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.89E-03, !- Reference Source Side Flow Rate {m3/s}
39040.92 , !- Reference Heating Capacity {W}
5130.00 , !- Reference Heating Power Consumption {W}
-3.33491153 , !- Heating Capacity Coefficient 1
-0.51451946 , !- Heating Capacity Coefficient 2
4.51592706 , !- Heating Capacity Coefficient 3
0.01797107 , !- Heating Capacity Coefficient 4
0.155797661 , !- Heating Capacity Coefficient 5
-8.93121751 , !- Heating Compressor Power Coefficient 1
8.57035762 , !- Heating Compressor Power Coefficient 2
1.29660976 , !- Heating Compressor Power Coefficient 3
-0.21629222 , !- Heating Compressor Power Coefficient 4
0.033862378 , !- Heating Compressor Power Coefficient 5
7.61, !- Reference Coefficient of Performance
1.0, !- Sizing Factor
GshpCLG; !- Companion Cooling Heat Pump Name
Next, the parameter estimation model objects are described. This model has two sets of parameters,
one for the heating mode and other for the cooling mode.
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 827
1.22.18 HeatPump:WaterToWater:ParameterEstimation:Cooling
1.22.18.1 Inputs
1.22.18.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the ground source heat pump.
HeatPump:WaterToWater:ParameterEstimation:Cooling ,
GshpCLG , !- Water to Water Heat Pump Name
GshpCLG SourceSide Inlet Node , !- Source Side Inlet Node
GshpCLG SourceSide Outlet Node , !- Source Side Outlet Node
GshpCLG LoadSide Inlet Node , !- Load Side Inlet Node
GshpCLG LoadSide Outlet Node , !- Load Side Outlet Node
3.5, !- Nominal COP
45000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
0.0, !- Min PLR
1, !- Max PLR
1, !- optimum PLR
.003, !- Load side Flow Rate {m3/s}
.003, !- Source Side Flow Rate {m3/s}
7761, !- Load side Heat Transfer Coefficient {W/K}
3998, !- Source Side Heat Transfer Coefficient {W/K}
.012544 , !- Piston Displacement {m3/s}
.05469 , !- Compressor Clearance Factor %
92156.2 , !- Compressor Suction And Discharge Pressure Drop {Pa}
4.8907 , !- Superheating {C}
2803.9 , !- Constant Part of Electro Mechanical Power Losses {W}
.699, !- Loss Factor
0.0, !- High Pressure Cut off {Pa}
0.0; !- LowPressure Cut off {Pa}
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 829
1.22.19 HeatPump:WaterToWater:ParameterEstimation:Heating
1.22.19.1 Inputs
1.22.19.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the ground source heat pump.
HeatPump:WaterToWater:ParameterEstimation:Heating ,
GshpHeating , !- Water to Water Heat Pump Name
GshpHeating SourceSide Inlet Node , !- Source Side Inlet Node
GshpHeating SourceSide Outlet Node , !- Source Side Outlet Node
GshpHeating LoadSide Inlet Node , !- Load Side Inlet Node
GshpHeating LoadSide Outlet Node , !- Load Side Outlet Node
3.5, !- Nominal COP
50000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
0.0, !- Min PLR
1, !- Max PLR
1, !- optimum PLR
.003, !- Load side Flow Rate {m3/s}
.003, !- Source Side Flow Rate {m3/s}
7761, !- Load side Heat Transfer Coefficient {W/K}
3998, !- Source Side Heat Transfer Coefficient {W/K}
.012544 , !- Piston Displacement {m3/s}
.05469 , !- Compressor Clearance Factor %
92156.2 , !- Compressor Suction And Dischrage Pressure Drop {Pa}
4.8907 , !- Superheating {C}
2803.9 , !- Constant Part Of Electro Mechanical Power Losses {W}
.699, !- Loss Factor
0.0, !- High Pressure Cut off {Pa}
0.0; !- LowPressure Cut off {Pa}
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 831
1.22.19.2 Outputs
This section describes the outputs available for the water to water heat pump, parameter estimation model;
both cooling and heating.
• HVAC,Average,Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• HVAC,Average,Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
1.22.19.2.3 Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This output variable represents the heat transfer across the load side coil. The values are calculated
for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step being
reported.
1.22.19.2.4 Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This output variable represents the cumulative heat transfer across the load side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are summed across the
reporting period.
1.22.19.2.5 Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This output variable represents the heat transfer across the source side coil. The values are calculated
for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step being
reported.
832 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.22.19.2.6 Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This output variable represents the cumulative heat transfer across the source side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are summed across the
reporting period.
1.22.19.2.7 Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Outlet Temperature [C]
This output variable represents the average fluid temperature leaving the load side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time
step being reported.
1.22.19.2.8 Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Inlet Temperature [C]
This output variable represents the average fluid temperature entering the load side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time
step being reported.
1.22.19.2.9 Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Outlet Temperature [C]
This output variable represents the average fluid temperature leaving the source side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time
step being reported.
1.22.19.2.10 Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Inlet Temperature [C]
This output variable represents the average fluid temperature entering the source side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time
step being reported.
1.22.19.2.11 Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output variable represents the average fluid flow rate through the load side coil. The values are
calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step
being reported.
1.22.19.2.12 Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output variable represents the average fluid flow rate through the source side coil. The values are
calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step
being reported.
1.22.20.1 Inputs
1.22.20.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the ground source heat pump.
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 833
1.22.20.1.14 Field: Electric Input to Output Ratio Modifier Function of Part Load
Ratio Curve Name
This field is the name of a univariate curve or table that defines an EIR modifier as a function of
the current part load ratio. The output of this function and the output of the EIR Modifier Function of
Temperature are multiplied by the reference EIR to get a current EIR .
An idf example:
HeatPump:WaterToWater:EIR:Heating ,
Heating Coil , !- Name
Heating Coil Load Loop Intermediate Node , !- Load Side Inlet Node Name
Heating Coil Load Loop Supply Outlet Node , !- Load Side Outlet Node Name
Condenser Loop Demand Inlet Node , !- Source Side Inlet Node Name
Condenser Loop Demand Intermediate Node , !- Source Side Outlet Node Name
Cooling Coil , !- Companion Heat Pump Name
0.005 , !- Load Side Design Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.002 , !- Source Side Design Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
80000 , !- Reference Capacity
3.5, !- Reference COP
, !- Sizing Factor
CapCurveFuncTemp , !- Heating Capacity Modifier Function of Temperature Curve Name
EIRCurveFuncTemp , !- Electric Input to Heating Output Ratio Modifier Function of Temperature
Curve Name
EIRCurveFuncPLR; !- Electric Input to Heating Output Ratio Modifier Function of Part Load
Ratio Curve Name
HeatPump:WaterToWater:EIR:Cooling ,
Cooling Coil , !- Name
Cooling Coil Load Loop Intermediate Node , !- Load Side Inlet Node Name
Cooling Coil Load Loop Supply Outlet Node , !- Load Side Outlet Node Name
Condenser Loop Demand Intermediate Node , !- Source Side Inlet Node Name
Condenser Loop Demand Outlet Node , !- Source Side Outlet Node Name
Heating Coil , !- Companion Heat Pump Name
0.005 , !- Load Side Design Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.003 , !- Source Side Design Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
75000 , !- Reference Capacity
4.0, !- Reference COP
, !- Sizing Factor
CapCurveFuncTemp2 , !- Heating Capacity Modifier Function of Temperature Curve Name
EIRCurveFuncTemp2 , !- Electric Input to Heating Output Ratio Modifier Function of Temperature
Curve Name
EIRCurveFuncPLR2; !- Electric Input to Heating Output Ratio Modifier Function of Part Load
Ratio Curve Name
1.22.20.2 Outputs
This section describes the outputs available for the water to water heat pump, equation fit model; both
cooling and heating.
• HVAC,Average,Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 835
• HVAC,Average,Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Inlet Temperature [°C]
• HVAC,Average,Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Outlet Temperature [°C]
• HVAC,Average,Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Inlet Temperature [°C]
• HVAC,Average,Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Outlet Temperature [°C]
• HVAC,Average,Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• HVAC,Average,Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
1.22.20.2.3 Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This output variable represents the average load side heat transfer during the specified output reporting
window.
1.22.20.2.4 Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This output variable represents the summed load side heat transfer during the specified output reporting
window.
1.22.20.2.5 Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This output variable represents the average source side heat transfer occurring for this coil during the
specified output reporting window.
1.22.20.2.6 Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This output variable represents the summed source side heat transfer during the specified output
reporting window.
1.22.20.2.7 Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Inlet Temperature [°C]
This output variable represents the inlet temperature on the load side connection of this coil.
1.22.20.2.8 Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Outlet Temperature [°C]
This output variable represents the outlet temperature on the load side connection of this coil.
1.22.20.2.9 Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Inlet Temperature [°C]
This output variable represents the inlet temperature on the source side connection of this coil.
1.22.20.2.10 Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Outlet Temperature [°C]
This output variable represents the outlet temperature on the source side connection of this coil.
836 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.22.20.2.11 Water to Water Heat Pump Load Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output variable represents the average load side mass flow rate during the specified reporting
window.
1.22.20.2.12 Water to Water Heat Pump Source Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output variable represents the average source side mass flow rate during the specified reporting
window.
3. Add a branch in condenser loop and include its name in the respective splitter and mixer.
BRANCH ,
Heating GshpHeating Branch ,
,
HeatPump:WatertoWater:ParameterEstimatinon :Heating ,
GshpHeating ,
GshpHeating LoadSide Inlet Node ,
GshpHeating LoadSide Outlet Node;
BRANCH ,
GshpHeating SourceSide Branch ,
,
HeatPump:WatertoWater:ParameterEstimatinon :Heating ,
GshpHeating ,
GshpHeating SourceSide Inlet Node ,
GshpHeating SourceSide Outlet Node;
3. Add a branch in condenser loop and include its name in the respective splitter and mixer.
! in chilled water loop
1.22.22 DistrictCooling
When the user is not interested in a plant simulation or there is some centralized source of chilled water,
the following object can be used in the input.
1.22.22.1 Inputs
1.22.22.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the district cooling (i.e., purchased chilled water).
1.22.22.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average, District Cooling Chilled Water Rate [W]
1.22.23 DistrictHeating
When the user is not interested in a plant simulation or there is some centralized source of hot water
(district heating), the following object can be used in the input.
1.22.23.1 Inputs
1.22.23.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the district heating (i.e., purchased hot water).
1.22.23.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,District Heating Hot Water Rate [W]
• Zone,Meter,DistrictHeating:Plant [J]
• Zone,Meter,Heating:DistrictHeating [J]
1.22.24 PlantComponent:TemperatureSource
This object allows the simulation of a water (or other fluid) source at a user-specified temperature. This
could include a river, well, or seawater source, or any other configuration where the fluid temperature being
supplied by the component to the plant is known. The temperature may be a constant or scheduled. Of
course, the scheduled value may also be overwritten via EMS in cases where the specified temperature
should be calculated at run-time.
1.22.24.1 Inputs
1.22.24.1.1 Field: Name
This field is the string identifier for this component.
PlantComponent:TemperatureSource ,
FluidSource , !- Name
FluidSource Inlet Node , !- Inlet Node
FluidSource Outlet Node , !- Outlet Node
Autosize , !- Design Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
Constant , !- Temperature Specification Type
62, !- Source Temperature {C}
; !- Source Temperature Schedule Name
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 841
1.22.24.2 Outputs
The following output variables are available for the temperature source plant components:
1.22.25 CentralHeatPumpSystem
This is a central geothermal application that contains one or more chiller-heaters centrally located in the
building; the available chilled and/or hot water is then piped to the individual zones. Chiller-heaters
used for this particular system can be of two types: 1) standard vapor-compression, non-reversible cycle
chillers designed for heat recovery or 2) reversible-cycle, water-to-water heat pump chillers. Unlike a
distributed ground source heat pump configuration where individual heat pumps are located in each zone,
a centralized geothermal configuration has one or more chiller-heaters. Its function is to encapsulate the
extra controls needed to turn individual chiller-heater modules on/off and whether they are to operate in
cooling-only, heating-only or simultaneous cooling-heating mode and whether to connect the source water
to the evaporator or condenser side. A variety of control schemes can be designed by setting schedules for
both zone control types and individual chiller-heaters schedules.
The fluid used in this central system is usually water, and there is no sharing of condenser or evaporator
water between multiple machines. However, the control logic is such that the source water can be delivered
to individual chiller-heaters depending on their operating mode, e.g., modules in simultaneous cooling-
heating mode receive no source water, modules in heating-only mode can have source water directed to
842 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
their evaporator, or modules in cooling-only mode can have source water directed to their condenser; the
decision on which module(s) receives the source water dictated by the ‘smart’ controls. The following figures
illustrate node interconnections between this central geothermal application and plant and condenser loops
in various situations.
The order of the multiple chiller-heaters’ operation is assumed to be sequential. In other words, the
very first chiller-heater will be called at first to see if it meets all loads that the central heat pump system
should meet. If the chiller-heater meets all loads, the rest chiller-heaters are assumed to be turned off.
If not, the following chiller-heater will be called to meet the remaining loads until all loads are met in
the order as defined in the set of individual chiller-heater objects below. The order of individual chiller-
heater modules needs to be carefully arranged in case users are intended to see the performance of various
combinations of different sizes of chiller-heaters in a central heat pump system.
Figure 1.92: Diagram of a central heat pump system with three chiller-heaters in cooling-only mode
(Condensers reject heat to the ground source loop)
In the above example, the cooling load needs 3 chiller-heaters and the heating load needs 1 chiller
heater. Chiller 1 is in heat recovery mode and isolated from the ground source loop while chillers 2 and 3
are in cooling-only mode, their condensers rejecting heat to the ground source loop.
In the above example, the heating load needs 3 chiller-heaters and the cooling load needs two chiller-
heaters. Chillers 1 and 2 are in heat recovery mode and isolated from the ground source loop while chiller
3 is in heating-only mode, its evaporator extracting heat from the ground source loop.
Users are required to define three different nodes such as chilled water, hot water, and source water
nodes. Only this central heat pump system will be metered, and individual chiller-heaters’ energy will be
available for reporting only, but not metered.
1.22.25.1 Inputs
1.22.25.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name of the central heat pump system.
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 843
Figure 1.93: Diagram of a central heat pump system with three chiller-heaters in heat recovery
mode (No heat is exchanged with the ground source loop)
Figure 1.94: Diagram of a central heat pump system with one chiller-heater in heat recovery mode
and two chiller-heaters in cooling-only mode
844 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Figure 1.95: Diagram of a central heat pump system with two chiller-heaters in heat recovery mode
and one chiller-heater in heating-only mode
1.22.25.1.3 This field must contain a keyword defines how the central heat pump sys-
tem controls the interaction between the chiller-heater modules and the water loops
to meet the cooling and heating demands. Currently, the only available option isS-
martMixing.
CentralHeatPumpSystem ,
ChillerBank , !- Name
SmartMixing , !- Control Method
Chiller Inlet Node , !- Cooling Loop Inlet Node Name
Chiller Outlet Node , !- Cooling Loop Outlet Node Name
Condenser Inlet Node , !- Source Loop Inlet Node Name
Condenser Outlet Node , !- Source Loop Outlet Node Name
HWInlet , !- Heating Loop Inlet Node Name
HWOutlet , !- Heating Loop Outlet Node Name
460, !- Ancillary Power {W}
, !- Ancillary Operation Schedule Name
ChillerHeaterPerformance :Electric:EIR , !- Chiller Heater Modules Object Type 1
ChillerHeaterModule 1, !- Chiller Heater Modules Performance Component Name 1
ON , !- Chiller Heater Modules Control Schedule Name 1
2, !- Number of Chiller Heater Modules 1
ChillerHeaterPerformance :Electric:EIR , !- Chiller Heater Modules Object Type 2
ChillerHeaterModule 2, !- Chiller Heater Modules Performance Component Name 2
846 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.22.25.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater System Cooling Electric Power [W]
1.22.26 ChillerHeaterPerformance:Electric:EIR
The performance of the chiller-heater will be defined by two sets of curves meant to describe unloading
for: 1) cooling-only mode, and 2) heating-only mode or simultaneous cooling-heating mode. Reference
conditions must be defined for both because each has its own set of three unloading curves based on their
associated reference conditions. The cooling-mode curves are typically (but not always) based on condenser
entering water temperature while the heating-only mode curves are typically based on condenser leaving
water temperature. This chiller-heater object allows the user to specify whether to use condenser leaving
or condenser entering as a dependent variable to differentiate, if necessary, the condenser temperature basis
used to generate the cooling- and heating-only mode curves.
where Tchw,l is the leaving chilled water temperature and Tcond,l is the leaving condenser water
temperature representing the heating-mode and cooling-mode reference temperatures defined elsewhere in
this object.
The default is 0.75. This field is used to determine evaporator capacity in heating-only mode or
simultaneous cooling-heating mode, multiplying it by the value entered in the field of the Reference Cooling
Mode Evaporator Capacity. Note that even when there is no cooling load, i.e., the machine is in heating-
only mode, the evaporator must still run and extract heat from the source water. In heating-only mode,
the leaving chilled water temperature (Tchw,l) may float depending on the evaporator water flow rate
and the source water temperature. In simultaneous cooling and heating mode, the leaving chilled water
temperature (Tchw,l) does not float but is determined by the chilled water setpoint controls. For both
heating-only and simultaneous cooling and heating mode, the leaving condenser temperature (Tcond,l) is
determined by the hot water supply setpoint controls. This value of Tchw,l, combined with Tcond,l is
plugged into the CAPFT and EIRFT curves to determine the off-rated heating-mode evaporator capacity
and associated compressor power.
The default value is 1.5. This field is used to determine full load compressor power at the simultaneous
cooling-heating mode’s reference chilled water leaving and condenser water leaving temperatures. Note:
In heating-only mode, the chilled water leaving temperature floats so the EIRFT curve is used to modify
the simultaneouos cooling-heating full load compressor power value.
1.22.26.12 Field: Heating Mode Entering Chilled Water Temperature Low Limit
This numeric field contains the low limit of the entering chilled water temperature in heating-only mode or
simultaneous cooling-heating mode in Celsius. This field typically represents the lower limit of the source
water temperature. If necessary, auxiliary heat will be activated to prevent source water temperature
falling below the chilled water entering minimum. The default value is 12.2°C.
This alpha field contains the name of a biquadratic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that
parameterizes the variation of the evaporator capacity as a function of the leaving chilled water temperature
and either the entering condenser water temperature or the leaving condenser water temperature as defined
in the previous field. It is then multiplied by the reference evaporator capacity to give the cooling capacity at
specific temperature operating conditions (i.e., at temperatures different from the reference temperatures).
The curve should have a value of 1.0 at the reference temperatures and flow rates specified above. The
biquadratic curve should be valid for the range of water temperatures anticipated for the simulation.
1.22.26.21 Field: Cooling Mode Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of
Temperature Curve Name
This alpha field contains the name of a biquadratic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that
parameterizes the variation of the energy input to cooling output ratio (EIR) as a function of the leaving
chilled water temperature and either the entering condenser water temperature or the leaving condenser
water temperature as defined by the user. The EIR is the inverse of the COP. It is then multiplied by the
reference EIR (inverse of the reference COP) to give the EIR at specific temperature operating conditions
(i.e., at temperatures different from the reference temperatures). The curve should have a value of 1.0 at
the reference temperatures and flow rates specified above. The biquadratic curve should be valid for the
range of water temperatures anticipated for the simulation.
1.22.26.22 Field: Cooling Mode Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of
Part Load Ratio Curve Name
This alpha field contains the name of a performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that parameterizes the
variation of the energy input to cooling output ratio (EIR) as a function of the part-load ratio (EIRFPLR).
The EIR is the inverse of the COP, and the part-load ratio is the actual cooling load divided by the available
cooling capacity of the chiller-heater. This curve is generated by dividing the operating electric input
power by the available full-load capacity at the specific operating temperatures. The curve output should
decrease from 1 towards 0 as part-load ratio decreases from 1 to 0. Note that the bi-cubic formulation is
generally only valid when LeavingCondenser variable is chosen for the field of Cooling Mode Condenser
Water Temperature Curve Input Variable whereas the quadratic curve can be used both choices, i.e.,
LeavingCondenser and EnteringCondenser. The output of this curve is then multiplied by the reference
full-load EIR and the EIRFT to give the EIR at the specific temperatures and part-load ratio at which
the chiller-heater is operating. This curve should have a value of 1.0 when the part-load ratio equals 1.0.
The curve should be valid for the range of part-load ratios anticipated for the simulation.
1.22.26.23 Field: Cooling Mode Cooling Capacity Optimum Part Load Ratio
This numeric field contains the chiller-heater’s optimum part-load ratio. This is the part-load ratio at
which the chiller-heater performs at its maximum COP. The optimum part-load ratio must be greater
than or equal to the minimum part-load ratio, and less than or equal to the maximum part-load ratio.
(Note: Both the minimum part-load ratio and maximum part-load ratio are taken from the Cooling Mode
EIRFPLR curve definition.) The default value is 1.0.
852 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.22.26.26 Field: Heating Mode Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of
Temperature Curve Name
This alpha field contains the name of a biquadratic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that
parameterizes the variation of the energy input to cooling output ratio (EIR) as a function of the leaving
chilled water temperature and either the entering condenser water temperature or the leaving condenser
water temperature as defined by the user. The EIR is the inverse of the COP. It is then multiplied by the
reference EIR (inverse of the reference COP) to give the EIR at specific temperature operating conditions
(i.e., at temperatures different from the reference temperatures). The curve should have a value of 1.0 at
the reference temperatures and flow rates specified above. The biquadratic curve should be valid for the
range of water temperatures anticipated for the simulation.
1.22.26.27 Field: Heating Mode Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of
Part Load Ratio Curve Name
This alpha field contains the name of a performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that parameterizes the
variation of the energy input to cooling output ratio (EIR) as a function of the part-load ratio (EIRFPLR).
The EIR is the inverse of the COP, and the part-load ratio is the actual evaporator load divided by the
available evaporator capacity of the chiller-heater at the reference heating and simultaneous cooling-heating
mode temperatures. This curve is generated by dividing the operating electric input power by the available
full-load capacity (do not divide by load) at the specific operating temperatures. The curve output should
decrease from 1 towards 0 as part-load ratio decreases from 1 to 0. Note that the bicubic formulation
below can only be used when the chiller-heater uses a variable speed compressor motor drive. It is also
generally valid only when LeavingCondenser variable is chosen for the field of Cooling Mode Condenser
Water Temperature Curve Input Variable whereas the quadratic curve can be used both choices, i.e.,
LeavingCondenser and EnteringCondenser. The output of this curve is then multiplied by the reference
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 853
full-load EIR (inverse of the reference COP) and the EIRFT to give the EIR at the specific temperatures
and part-load ratio at which the chiller-heater is operating. This curve should have a value of 1.0 when
the part-load ratio equals 1.0. The curve should be valid for the range of part-load ratios anticipated for
the simulation.
1.22.26.28 Field: Heating Mode Cooling Capacity Optimum Part Load Ratio
This numeric field contains the chiller-heater’s optimum part-load ratio during heating-only mode or si-
multaneous cooling-heating mode. This is the part-load ratio at which the chiller-heater performs at its
maximum COP. The optimum part-load ratio must be greater than or equal to the minimum part-load
ratio, and less than or equal to the maximum part-load ratio. (Note: Both the minimum part-load ratio
and maximum part-load ratio are taken from the Heating Mode EIRFPLR curve definition.) The default
value is 1.0.
ChillerHeaterPerformance :Electric:EIR ,
ChillerHeaterModule 1, !- Name
12500 , !- Reference Cooling Mode Evaporator Capacity {W}
1.5, !- Reference Cooling Mode COP {W/W}
6.67, !- Reference Cooling Mode Leaving Chilled Water Temperature {C}
29.4, !- Reference Cooling Mode Entering Condenser Fluid Temperature {C}
35.0, !- Reference Cooling Mode Leaving Condenser Water Temperature {C}
0.74, !- Reference Heating Mode Cooling Capacity Ratio
1.38, !- Reference Heating Mode Cooling Power Input Ratio
6.67, !- Reference Heating Mode Leaving Chilled Water Temperature {C}
60, !- Reference Heating Mode Leaving Condenser Water Temperature {C}
29.44 , !- Reference Heating Mode Entering Condenser Fluid Temperature {C}
5, !- Heating Mode Entering Chilled Water Temperature Low Limit {C}
VariableFlow , !- Chilled Water Flow Mode Type
0.0003525 , !- Design Chilled Water Flow Rate {m$ ^{3}$/s}
0.0005525 , !- Design Condenser Water Flow Rate {m$ ^{3}$/s}
0.0003525 , !- Design Hot Water Flow Rate {m$ ^{3}$/s}
1, !- Compressor Motor Efficiency
WaterCooled , !- Condenser Type
EnteringCondenser , !- Cooling Mode Temperature Curve Condenser Water Independent Variable
ChillerHeaterClgCapFT , !- Cooling Mode Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve Name
ChillerHeaterClgEIRFT , !- Cooling Mode Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of
!- Temperature Curve Name
ChillerHeaterClgEIRFPLR , !- Cooling Mode Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load
!- Ratio Curve Name
1, !- Cooling Mode Cooling Capacity Optimum Part Load Ratio
LeavingCondenser , !- Heating Mode Temperature Curve Condenser Water Independent Variable
ChillerHeaterHtgCapFT , !- Heating Mode Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve Name
ChillerHeaterHtgEIRFT , !- Heating Mode Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of
!- Temperature Curve Name
ChillerHeaterHtgEIRFPLR , !- Heating Mode Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load
!- Ratio Curve Name
1, !- Heating Mode Cooling Capacity Optimum Part Load Ratio
1; !- Sizing Factor
854 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater False Load Heat Transfer Rate Unit <x> [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater False Load Heat Transfer Energy Unit <x> [J]
Note that much of these output variables are adapted from the definitions above under “Generic Chiller
Outputs” and “Electric EIR Chiller Outputs.” The following outputs are repeated up to the maximum
of individual chiller-heater module objects. The maximum number may be different from the number of
object defined in this object when users define two or more identical chiller-heater modules for a single
chiller heater object in the central heat pump system.
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 855
0. off
1. cooling-only mode
2. heating-only mode
The first mode 0 is reported when the chiller-heater is turned off. The next two modes 2 and 3 are
reported when the chiller-heater provides only either cooling or heating, respectively. The last three modes
3 to 5 indicate when the chiller-heater is in a simultaneous cooling-heating mode. Mode 3 indicates the
chiller-heaters provides simultaneous cooling and heating without heat exchange with the ground source.
Mode 4 denotes that at least one of the chiller-heater modules in the central heat pump system provides
both cooling and heating, and the chiller-heater is meeting remaining cooling demand (see Figure 1.94.
Diagram of a central heat pump system with one chiller-heater in heat recovery mode and two chiller-
heaters in cooling-only mode) Similarly, mode 5 indicates that at least one of the chiller-heater modules
in the central heat pump system is in the heat recovery mode, and the chiller-heater is meeting remaining
heating demand (see Figure 1.95).
Note that the decision to operate individual chiller-heater modules is solely dependent on the chiller-
heater schedule and loads. A fraction may appear in case the chiller-heater mode varies within a zone time
step. In this particular case, users may define a detailed reporting frequency for this output variable.
1.22.27.10 Chiller Heater False Load Heat Transfer Rate Unit <x> [W]
1.22.27.11 Chiller Heater False Load Heat Transfer Energy Unit <x> [J]
These outputs are the heat transfer rate and total heat transfer due to false loading of the chiller-heater.
When the chiller-heater part-load ratio is below the minimum unloading ratio, the chiller-heater false loads
(e.g. hot-gas bypass) to further reduce capacity.
1.22.27.12 Chiller Heater Condenser Heat Transfer Rate Unit <x> [C]
1.22.27.13 Chiller Heater Condenser Heat Transfer Energy Unit <x> [C]
These outputs are the heat transfer which is the heating delivered by the chiller-heater module in heating
mode.
1.22.27.21 Chiller Heater Capacity Temperature Modifier Multiplier Unit <x> [C]
This is the output of the curve object Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve.
1.22.27.22 Chiller Heater EIR Temperature Modifier Multiplier Unit <x> [C]
This is the output of the curve object Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temperature
Curve.
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 857
1.22.27.23 Chiller Heater EIR Part Load Modifier Multiplier Unit <x> [C]
This is the output of the curve object Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load Ratio
Curve.
• ThermalStorage:Ice:Simple
• ThermalStorage:Ice:Detailed
• ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Mixed
• ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Stratified
These objects are typically placed on the supply side of a primary chilled water loop in series or
in parallel with one or more chillers. Using the the component set point (PlantEquipmentOpera-
tion:ComponentSetpoint) plant operation scheme type, the chiller and storage tank setpoints are used
to control operation. Using a SetpointManager:Scheduled object (or other appropriate type of set point
manager), the setpoints on the chiller outlet node and the ice storage outlet node can be used to control
how the cooling load is shared and when charging of storage occurs. Example setpoints to use for various
modes of operation are shown in the table below:
Example files have been developed for three common storage configurations:
1. Series – Chiller Upstream: In this configuration, a chiller is placed first on the same branch as the
storage unit.
2. Series – Chiller Downstream: In this configuration, a chiller is placed second on the same branch
as the storage unit.
3. Parallel: In this configuration, the chiller is on a branch parallel to the storage unit branch when it is
not charging. During charging mode, valves will be changed so that the chiller is in series upstream
of the storage. To accomplish this in EnergyPlus, the chiller must be modeled using two different
chiller objects to represent the same chiller. One chiller object on a parallel branch operates only
when storage is not being charged. The other chiller object, in series upstream of the storage unit
operates only during charging mode.
• In the PlantLoop object, the “Minimum Loop Temperature” must be set equal to or less than the
lowest setpoint to be used anywhere in the loop.
• To end the storage charging cycle, use a AvailabilityManager:LowTemperatureTurnOff to shut off the
primary chilled water loop when the temperature leaving the storage tank nears the charging mode
chiller setpoint indicating that the tank is fully charged. For example, if the chiller is set to provide
–5C chilled water during charging, then charging can be shut down when the water temperature
leaving the storage unit reaches –4C. When using a primary-secondary loop arrangement, it may
be necessary to schedule this availability manager to be active only when the HVAC systems are off
to avoid fighting between the demand controls and the availability manager.
1.22.29 ThermalStorage:Ice:Simple
This thermal storage model is based on a simple simulation of an ice storage tank with a fixed capac-
ity. The tank is charged, or frozen, in an ice-on-coil configuration where ice builds up on the outside of
the tubes carrying the brine or glycol solution from the chiller. There are two discharge (melt) options,
internal or external. Internal melt uses the same fluid tubes for charging and discharging. External melt
uses a separate fluid path for discharge such that the outer layers of ice melt first. The ice storage model
includes an implied 3-way valve to control the amount if charge/discharge based on the incoming water
temperature and the outlet node setpoint temperature. The storage tank is assumed to be fully charged
(full of ice) at the beginning of each environment. The tank is then allowed to charge and discharge
during the warmup days of the environment. The tank is best controlled using the PlantEquipmentOp-
eration:ComponentSetpoint plant operation scheme, and requires that a setpoint be placed by a set point
manager on the ice storage Plant Outlet Node.
The input fields for the object are described in detail below:
1.22.29.1 Inputs
1.22.29.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the ice storage tank.
ThermalStorage:Ice:Simple ,
ITS , !- Ice Storage Name
IceOnCoilInternal , !- Ice Storage Type
1.5, !- Ice Storage Capacity {GJ}
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 859
1.22.29.2 Outputs
The following outputs are available for simple Ice Storage model:
1.22.30 ThermalStorage:Ice:Detailed
The detailed ice storage model allows the users of EnergyPlus to model more closely specific manufacturers’
ice storage units. This is possible due to the use of curve fits to simulate the performance of the ice storage
unit during charging and discharging. In this implementation, both charging and discharging are a function
of the fraction charged/discharged as well as the log mean temperature difference across the storage unit.
More information on the model is provided in the Engineering Reference for EnergyPlus. The remainder
of this section describes the input required for the detailed ice storage model and the output that it can
produce.
1.22.30.1 Inputs
1.22.30.1.1 Field: Name
This field is the name of the detailed ice storage system given to it by the user.
ThermalStorage:Ice:Detailed ,
Ice Tank , !- Ice Storage Name
ON , !- Ice Storage availability schedule
0.5, !- Ice Storage Capacity {GJ}
Ice Tank Inlet Node , !- Plant Loop Inlet Node
Ice Tank Outlet Node , !- Plant Loop Outlet Node
QuadraticLinear , !- Discharging Curve Fit Type
DischargeCurve , !- Discharging Curve Name
QuadraticLinear , !- Charging Curve Fit Type
ChargeCurve , !- Charging Curve Name
1.0, !- Timestep of Curve Fit Data
0.0001 , !- Parasitic electric load during discharging
0.0002 , !- Parasitic electric load during charging
0.0003 , !- Tank loss coefficient
0.0; !- Freezing temperature [C]
1.22.30.2 Outputs
Current detailed ice storage output variables are:
• System, Average, Ice Thermal Storage Bypass Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• System, Average, Ice Thermal Storage Tank Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
1.22.31 ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Mixed
The ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Mixed object analytically solves the differential equation governing the
energy balance of the water tank. The chilled water is “used” by drawing from the “Use Side” of the water
tank. The tank is indirectly charged by circulating cold water through the “Source Side” of the water
tank.
Control is based on cycling flow through the source side. When the tank temperature rises above a
“cut-in” temperature, source side flow is requested. Source side flow will continue until the tank is cooled
to below the tank set point or “cut-out” temperature.
For heat gains from the ambient environment, the ambient air temperature can be taken from a schedule,
a zone, or the exterior. When used with a zone, the skin gains are removed from the zone heat balance as
negative internal heat gains.
1.22.31.1 Inputs
1.22.31.1.1 Field: Name
The unique name of the ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Mixed object.
ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Mixed ,
Chilled Water Storage Tank 1 , !- Name
4.0 , !- Tank Volume
CW -Tank -Temp -Schedule , !- Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name
3.5, !- Deadband Temperature Difference
1.0 , !- Minimum Temperature Limit
25000 , !- Nominal Cooling Capacity
Zone , !- Ambient Temperature Indicator
, !- Ambient Temperature Schedule Name
ZN_1_FLR_1_SEC_5 , !- Ambient Temperature Zone Name
, !- Ambient Temperature Outdoor Air Node Name
5.0 , !- Heat Gain Coefficient from Ambient Temperature
CW Tank Discharge Inlet node , !- Use Side Inlet Node Name
CW Tank Discharge Outlet node , !- Use Side Outlet Node Name
1.0 , !- Use Side Effectiveness
TES Use Schedule , !- Use Side Availability Schedule Name
Autosize , !- Use Side Design Flow Rate
CW Tank Charge Inlet Node , !- Source Side Inlet Node Name
CW Tank Charge Outlet Node , !- Source Side Outlet Node Name
1.0, !- Source Side Effectiveness
TES Charge Schedule , !- Source Side Availability Schedule Name
Autosize , !- Source Side Design Flow Rate
4.0; !- Tank Recovery Time
1.22.31.2 Outputs
The following output variables are reported for chilled water thermal storage tanks.
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Final Tank Temperature !- HVAC Average [C]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Tank Heat Gain Rate !- HVAC Average [W]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Tank Heat Gain Energy !- HVAC Sum [J]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Mass Flow Rate !- HVAC Average [kg/s]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Inlet Temperature !- HVAC Average [C]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Outlet Temperature !- HVAC Average [C]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Heat Transfer Rate !- HVAC Average [W]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Heat Transfer Energy !- HVAC Sum [J]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Mass Flow Rate !- HVAC Average [kg/s]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Inlet Temperature !- HVAC Average [C]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Outlet Temperature !- HVAC Average [C]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Heat Transfer Rate !- HVAC Average [W]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Heat Transfer Energy !- HVAC Sum [J]
1.22.31.2.3 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Tank Heat Gain Rate [W]
The average heat exchange rate to the storage tank from the surrounding ambient. This is usually
positive with surrounding ambient heating the storage tank.
1.22.31.2.4 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Tank Heat Gain Energy [J]
The energy exchange to the storage tank from the surrounding ambient. This is usually positive with
surrounding ambient heating the storage tank.
1.22.31.2.5 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
The use side mass flow rate.
1.22.31.2.6 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Inlet Temperature [C]
The inlet temperature on the use side.
1.22.31.2.7 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Outlet Temperature [C]
The outlet temperature on the use side.
1.22.31.2.8 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
The average heat transfer rate between the use side water and the tank water.
1.22.31.2.9 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
The heat transfer energy between the use side water and the tank water.
1.22.31.2.10 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
The source side mass flow rate.
1.22.31.2.11 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Inlet Temperature [C]
The inlet temperature on the source side.
1.22.31.2.12 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Outlet Temperature [C]
The outlet temperature on the source side.
1.22.31.2.13 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
The average heat transfer rate between the source side water and the tank water.
1.22.31.2.14 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
The heat transfer energy between the source side water and the tank water.
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 869
1.22.32 ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Stratified
The ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Stratified object divides the water tank into multiple nodes of equal
volume. The nodes are coupled by vertical conduction effects, internode fluid flow, and temperature
inversion mixing. The object simultaneously solves the differential equations governing the energy balances
on the nodes using a numerical method. The system timestep is divided into many small substeps that
allow the simulation to capture events that occur on a very short time scale. The chilled water is “used”
by drawing from the “Use Side” of the water tank. The tank is indirectly charged by circulating cold
water through the “Source Side” of the water tank.
Control is based on cycling flow through the source side. When the tank temperature rises above a
“cut-in” temperature, source side flow is requested. Source side flow will continue until the tank is cooled
to below the tank set point or “cut-out” temperature.
For heat gains from the ambient environment, the ambient air temperature can be taken from a schedule,
a zone, or the exterior. When used with a zone, the skin gains are removed from the zone heat balance as
negative internal heat gains.
1.22.32.1 Inputs
1.22.32.1.1 Field: Name
The unique name of the ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Stratified object.
1.22.32.1.15 Field: Uniform Skin Loss Coefficient per Unit Area to Ambient Temper-
ature
The uniform skin loss coefficient [W/m2 -K] or U-Value of the tank to the ambient air temperature.
The uniform skin loss accounts for the tank insulation. The overall losses at any particular tank node can
be further modified using the Additional Loss Coefficient fields to account for thermal shorting due to pipe
penetrations, tank feet, and any other loss effects.
1.22. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 871
ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Stratified ,
Chilled Water Storage Tank 1 , !- Name
4.0 , !- Tank Volume
2.0 , !- Tank Height
VerticalCylinder , !- Tank Shape
, !- Tank Perimeter
CW -Tank -Temp -Schedule , !- Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name
3.5 , !- Deadband Temperature Difference
1.4 , !- Temperature Sensor Height
1.0 , !- Minimum Temperature Limit
2500, !- Nominal Cooling Capacity
Zone , !- Ambient Temperature Indicator
, !- Ambient Temperature Schedule Name
ZN_1_FLR_1_SEC_5 , !- Ambient Temperature Zone Name
, !- Ambient Temperature OutdoorAir:Node Name
4.2, !- Uniform Skin Loss Coefficient Per Unit Area To Ambient
Temperature
CW Tank Discharge Inlet node , !- Use Side Inlet Node Name
CW Tank Discharge Outlet node , !- Use Side Outlet Node Name
1.0, !- Use Side Effectiveness
ALWAYS_ON , !- Use Side Availability Schedule Name
1.85 , !- Use Side Inlet Height
0.15 , !- Use Side Outlet Height
autosize , !- Use Side Design Flow Rate
CW Tank Charge Inlet Node , !- Source Side Inlet Node Name
CW Tank Charge Outlet Node , !- Source Side Outlet Node Name
1.0, !- Source Side Effectiveness
TES Charge Schedule , !- Source Side Availability Schedule Name
0.15, !- Source Side Inlet Height
1.85, !- Source Side Outlet Height
autosize , !- Source Side Design Flow Rate
2.0, !- Tank Recovery Time
Seeking , !- Inlet Mode
6, !- Number Of Nodes
0.0; !- Additional Destratification Conductivity
1.22.32.2 Outputs
The following output variables are reported for stratified chilled water thermal storage tanks.
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Final Tank Temperature !- HVAC Average [C]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Tank Heat Gain Rate !- HVAC Average [W]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Tank Heat Gain Energy !- HVAC Sum [J]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Mass Flow Rate !- HVAC Average [kg/s]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Inlet Temperature !- HVAC Average [C]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Outlet Temperature !- HVAC Average [C]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Heat Transfer Rate !- HVAC Average [W]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Heat Transfer Energy !- HVAC Sum [J]
874 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Mass Flow Rate !- HVAC Average [kg/s]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Inlet Temperature !- HVAC Average [C]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Outlet Temperature !- HVAC Average [C]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Heat Transfer Rate !- HVAC Average [W]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Heat Transfer Energy !- HVAC Sum [J]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Temperature Node <1 - 10> !- HVAC Average [C]
• Chilled Water Thermal Storage Final Temperature Node <1 – 10> !- HVAC Average [C]
1.22.32.2.3 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Tank Heat Gain Rate [W]
The average heat exchange rate to the storage tank from the surrounding ambient. This is usually
positive with surrounding ambient heating the storage tank.
1.22.32.2.4 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Tank Heat Gain Energy [J]
The energy exchange to the storage tank from the surrounding ambient. This is usually positive with
surrounding ambient heating the storage tank.
1.22.32.2.5 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
The use side mass flow rate.
1.22.32.2.6 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Inlet Temperature [C]
The inlet temperature on the use side.
1.22.32.2.7 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Outlet Temperature [C]
The outlet temperature on the use side.
1.22.32.2.8 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
The average heat transfer rate between the use side water and the tank water.
1.22.32.2.9 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
The heat transfer energy between the use side water and the tank water.
1.22.32.2.10 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
The source side mass flow rate.
1.22.32.2.11 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Inlet Temperature [C]
The inlet temperature on the source side.
1.23. GROUP – WATER HEATERS 875
1.22.32.2.12 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Outlet Temperature [C]
The outlet temperature on the source side.
1.22.32.2.13 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
The average heat transfer rate between the source side water and the tank water.
1.22.32.2.14 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
The heat transfer energy between the source side water and the tank water.
1.22.32.2.16 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Final Temperature Node 1-10 [C]
The final node temperature at the end of the system timestep.
• WaterHeater:Mixed
• WaterHeater:Stratified
There are also compound objects that uses the WaterHeater:Mixed and/or WaterHeater:Stratified as
part of their strategy:
The WaterHeater:Mixed object simulates a well-mixed, single-node water tank. The Water-
Heater:Stratified object simulates a stratified, multi-node water tank. Both water heater objects can be
appropriate for simulating many types of water heaters and storage tanks, including gas and electric
residential water heaters, and a variety of large commercial water heaters. Both objects share similar
features, such as stand-alone operation, on- and off-cycle parasitic loads, and thermal losses to the zone.
However, each object has its advantages which may make one water heater object more appropriate than
the other depending on the application.
Advantages of WaterHeater:Mixed:
Advantages of WaterHeater:Stratified:
• better modeling of thermal storage applications which rely on stratification to improve heat transfer
peformance.
1.23.2 WaterHeater:Mixed
The WaterHeater:Mixed object analytically solves the differential equation governing the energy balance of
the water tank. Within a timestep, conditions are solved separately for when the heater element or burner
is “on” (on-cycle) and when it is “off” (off-cycle). This approach allows ambient losses and parasitic loads
to be divided into on-cycle and off-cycle effects and accounted for in detail.
For losses to the ambient environment, the ambient air temperature can be taken from a schedule, a
zone, or the exterior. When used with a zone, a fraction of the skin losses can be added to the zone heat
balance as internal heat gains.
Control options allow the heater to cycle or modulate to meet the load. When cycling, the heater
element or burner is either on or off. The heater remains fully on while heating the tank up to the
setpoint temperature. When the setpoint is reached, the heater turns off. The heater remains off until the
tank temperature falls below the “cut-in” temperature, i.e., the setpoint temperature minus the deadband
temperature difference. The heater continuously cycles on and off to maintain the tank temperature within
the deadband. Most storage-tank water heaters cycle.
878 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
When modulating, the heater power varies between the maximum and minimum heater capacities. The
heater stays on as long as the required total demand is above the minimum capacity. Below the minimum
capacity, the heater will begin to cycle on and off based on the deadband temperature difference. Equipment
is usually designed and rated to avoid this condition. Most tankless/instantaneous water heaters modulate.
1.23.2.1 Inputs
1.23.2.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the WaterHeater:Mixed object.
WaterHeater:Mixed ,
Indirect Water Heater , !- Name
1.00, !- Tank Volume {m3}
Hot Water Setpoint Temperature Schedule , !- Setpoint Temperature Schedule
5.0, !- Deadband Temperature Difference {deltaC}
82.2222 , !- Maximum Temperature Limit {C}
Cycle , !- Heater Control Type
0.0, !- Heater Maximum Capacity {W}
, !- Heater Minimum Capacity {W}
, !- Heater Ignition Minimum Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Heater Ignition Delay {s}
ELECTRICITY , !- Heater Fuel Type
0.8, !- Heater Thermal Efficiency
, !- Part Load Factor Curve
, !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate {W}
, !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type
, !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction To Tank
, !- On -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate {W}
, !- On -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type
, !- On -Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction To Tank
Zone , !- Ambient Temperature Indicator
, !- Ambient Temperature Schedule
SPACE5 -1, !- Ambient Temperature Zone
, !- Ambient Temperature Outside Air Node
5.0, !- Off -Cycle Loss Coefficient To Ambient Temperature {W/K}
, !- Off -Cycle Loss Fraction To Zone
5.0, !- On -Cycle Loss Coefficient To Ambient Temperature {W/K}
, !- On -Cycle Loss Fraction To Zone
, !- Peak Volumetric Use Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Use Flow Rate Fraction Schedule
, !- Cold Water Supply Temperature Schedule
SHWSys1 Pump -SHWSys1 Water HeaterNode , !- Use Side Inlet Node
SHWSys1 Supply Equipment Outlet Node , !- Use Side Outlet Node
1.0, !- Use Side Effectiveness
Indirect Water Heater SrcSideInletNode , !- Source Side Inlet Node
Indirect Water Heater SrcSideOutletNode , !- Source Side Outlet Node
0.9, !- Source Side Effectiveness
autosize , !- Use Side Design Flow Rate
autosize , !- Source Side Design Flow Rate
1.0; !- Indirect Water Heating Recovery Time
1.23.2.2 Outputs
The following output variables are reported for the WaterHeater:Mixed object:
• HVAC,Average,Water Heater Tank Temperature [C]
1.23. GROUP – WATER HEATERS 885
• HVAC,Average,Water Heater Off Cycle Parasitic Tank Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Off Cycle Parasitic Tank Heat Transfer Energy [J]
1.23.2.2.15 Water Heater Off Cycle Parasitic Tank Heat Transfer Rate [W]
The average heat gain rate to the tank water due to off-cycle parasitics.
1.23.2.2.16 Water Heater Off Cycle Parasitic Tank Heat Transfer Energy [J]
The heat gain energy to the tank water due to off-cycle parasitics.
1.23.2.2.17 Water Heater On Cycle Parasitic Tank Heat Transfer Rate [W]
The average heat gain rate to the tank water due to on-cycle parasitics.
1.23.2.2.18 Water Heater On Cycle Parasitic Tank Heat Transfer Energy [J]
The heat gain energy to the tank water due to on-cycle parasitics.
1.23.2.2.35 Water Heater Off Cycle Parasitic <Fuel Type> Rate [W]
1.23.2.2.37 Water Heater Off Cycle Parasitic <Fuel Type> Energy [J]
The fuel consumption energy for the off-cycle parasitics.
1.23.3 WaterHeater:Stratified
The WaterHeater:Stratified object divides the water tank into multiple nodes of equal volume. The nodes
are coupled by vertical conduction effects, internode fluid flow, and temperature inversion mixing. The
object simultaneously solves the differential equations governing the energy balances on the nodes using a
numerical method. The system timestep is divided into many small substeps that allow the simulation to
capture events that occur on a very short time scale. This approach allows ambient losses and parasitic
loads to be divided into on-cycle and off-cycle effects and accounted for in detail.
For losses to the ambient environment, the ambient air temperature can be taken from a schedule, a
zone, or the exterior. When used with a zone, a fraction of the skin losses can be added to the zone heat
balance as internal heat gains.
The WaterHeater:Stratified object allows two heating elements to be simulated. The two elements can
cycle on and off to maintain the node temperature within the deadband. The Heater Priority Control field
determines how the heaters work together. There are two options: MasterSlave or Simultaneous. In the
MasterSlave option, Heater 1 is the master and Heater 2 is the slave. That is, both heaters are not allowed
to turn on at the same time. If the thermostats ask for heat at both Heater 1 and 2, only Heater 1 will
turn on. Once Heater 1 has met the set point, it turns off and Heater 2 can turn on, if necessary. In the
Simultaneousoption, Heater 1 and Heater 2 can turn on and off independently. Autosizing is available for
only Heater 1.
1.23.3.1 Inputs
1.23.3.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the WaterHeater:Stratified object.
1.23.3.1.31 Field: Uniform Skin Loss Coefficient Per Unit Area to Ambient Temper-
ature
The uniform skin loss coefficient [W/m2-K] or U-Value of the tank to the ambient air temperature. The
uniform skin loss accounts for the tank insulation and applies during both off- and on-cycle operation. The
overall losses at any particular node can be further modified using the Additional Loss Coefficient fields to
account for thermal shorting due to pipe penetrations, water heater feet, and any other loss effects.
WaterHeater:Stratified ,
Electric Water Heater , !- Name
Water Heater , !- End -Use Subcategory
0.1893 , !- Tank Volume {m3}
1.4, !- Tank Height {m}
VerticalCylinder , !- Tank Shape
, !- Tank Perimeter {m}
82.2222 , !- Maximum Temperature Limit {C}
MasterSlave , !- Heater Priority
Hot Water Set Point Temp Schedule , !- Heater 1 Set Point Temperature Schedule
2.0, !- Heater 1 Deadband Temperature Difference {deltaC}
4500, !- Heater 1 Capacity {W} (Master)
1.0, !- Heater 1 Height {m}
Hot Water Set Point Temp Schedule , !- Heater 2 Set Point Temperature Schedule
5.0, !- Heater 2 Deadband Temperature Difference {deltaC}
4500, !- Heater 2 Capacity {W} (Slave)
0.0, !- Heater 2 Height {m}
ELECTRICITY , !- Heater Fuel Type
0.98, !- Heater Thermal Efficiency
10, !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate {W}
ELECTRICITY , !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type
0, !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction To Tank
, !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Height {m}
896 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.23.3.2 Outputs
All of the output variables reported for the WaterHeater:Mixed object also apply to the Water-
Heater:Stratified object, with several qualifications noted below:
1.23.4 WaterHeater:Sizing
The WaterHeater:Sizing object is used to provide additional input data needed for designing tank volume
and/or heater capacity for either the Mixed or Stratified water heaters. This object is only needed if
volume or capacity is being automatically sized. There are no output variable associated with this object
– sizing results are reported to the EIO output file and some predefined summary reports.
A source of design input data for use with this object can be found in the current ASHRAE Handbook
HVAC Applications chapter on Service Water Heating.
The idd entry for this object follows.
1.23.4.1 Inputs
1.23.4.1.1 Field: WaterHeater Name
This field contains the unique name of the water heater being sized. This name should match the
name of a Water Heater:Mixed or a Water Heater:Stratified input object defined elsewhere in the input
file.
• PeakDraw. This design method uses the design flow rates of all the different demands placed on
the water heater. The tank size is based on how long it can meet the demand and how quickly it
can recover. The user enters the time in hours that the water heater can meet the demands. Only
the hot water uses connected to an individual water heater, or scheduled in the water heater object
for stand-alone units, are included in that water heater’s peak draw.
• ResidentialHUD-FHAMinimum This design method is based on minimum permissible water
heater sizes (established by HUD-FHA in its Minimum Property Standards for One- and Two-
Family Living Units, No. 4900.1-1982). The user enters the number of bathrooms and bedrooms in
this input object. The smallest allowable water heater sizes are used.
• PerPerson This design method scales sizes based on the total number of people in all zones in
the building. Each water heater in the model will be sized using the total (peak, design) number
of people for the entire model. The number of people is determined from People objects defined
elsewhere in the input file
• PerFloorArea This design method scales sizes based on the total floor area in all the zones in the
building. Each water heater in the model will be sized using all the floor area in the model. The
floor areas are determined from the geometry input elsewhere in the input file.
• PerUnit This design method scales sizes based on an arbitrary number of units. This can be used,
for example, to size based on the number of rooms in a lodging building. The user provides the
number of units in an input field in this object.
• PerSolarCollectorArea This design method scales tank volume based on the collector area for a
solar hot water collector. The collector area is summed for all the collectors in the model and each
tank is sized for the total. The collector area is determined from input for Solar Collectors defined
elsewhere in the input file.
1.23. GROUP – WATER HEATERS 899
1.23.5 WaterHeater:HeatPump:PumpedCondenser
The heat pump water heater with pumped condenser (HPWH) is a compound object consisting of a water
heater tank (e.g., WaterHeater:Mixed or WaterHeater:Stratified), a direct expansion (DX) “coil” (i.e., an air-to-
water DX compression system which includes a water heating coil, air coil, compressor, and water pump),
and a fan to provide air flow across the air coil associated with the DX compression system. These objects
work together to model a system which heats water using zone air, outdoor air, or a combination of zone
and outdoor air as the primary heat source. Numerous configurations of tank location, inlet air source,
and DX coil compressor location can be modeled, with one common configuration shown below.
In this model, the heat pump water heater’s DX coil is considered the primary heat source and the
water tank’s heater (element or burner) provides supplemental heat as necessary. The model also assumes
that the heat pump’s fan and water pump cycle on and off with the compressor.
To model a heat pump water heater, the input data file must include some combination of the following
objects depending on the configuration to be modeled:
• WaterHeater:HeatPump:PumpedCondenser (required)
Figure 1.97: Schematic diagram for a heat pump water heater located in a zone
• (when the HPWH draws some or all of its air from the zone, the heat pump
ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList
water heater type and name must be in this list)
• (when the HPWH draws some or all of its air from the zone, the HPWH
ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections
air inlet and outlet node names must be provided in this object)
• (for HPWHs that use outdoor air as all or part of the heat source, the HPWH
OutdoorAir:NodeList
outdoor air node name must be provided in this list)
The input fields for the compound object are described in detail below:
1.23.5.1 Inputs
1.23.5.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a heat pump water heater.
Any reference to this heat pump water heater by another object will use this name.
this node name should be a unique name that allows the user to receive output on conditions at this node
for verification purposes.
• MutuallyExclusive means that once the tank heating element(s) are active, the heat pump is shut
down until the heating element setpoint is reached.
• Simultaneous (default) means that both the tank heating element and heat pump are used at the
same time to recover the tank temperature.
WaterHeater:HeatPump:PumpedCondenser ,
PlantHeatPumpWaterHeater ,!- Name
PlantHPWHSch , !- Availability Schedule Name
PlantHPWHTempSch , !- Compressor Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name
2.0, !- Dead Band Temperature Difference {deltaC}
HPPlantWaterInletNode , !- Condenser Water Inlet Node Name
HPPlantWaterOutletNode , !- Condenser Water Outlet Node Name
0.00115525 , !- Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.00695 , !- Evaporator Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
OutdoorAirOnly , !- Inlet Air Configuration
, !- Air Inlet Node Name
, !- Air Outlet Node Name
HPPlantAirInletNode , !- Outdoor Air Node Name
HPPlantAirOutletNode , !- Exhaust Air Node Name
, !- Inlet Air Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Inlet Air Humidity Schedule Name
, !- Inlet Air Zone Name
WaterHeater:Mixed , !- Tank Object Type
HPWHPlantTank , !- Tank Name
HPWH Use Inlet Node , !- Tank Use Side Inlet Node Name
HPWH Use Outlet Node , !- Tank Use Side Outlet Node Name
Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump:Pumped , !- DX Coil Object Type
HPWHPlantDXCoil , !- DX Coil Name
11.0, !- Minimum Inlet Air Temperature for Compressor Operation {C}
Outdoors , !- Compressor Location
, !- Compressor Ambient Temperature Schedule Name
Fan:SystemModel , !- Fan Object Type
HPWHPlantFan , !- Fan Name
908 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
NOTE: branch object required only when tank use inlet nodes are used.
Branch ,
Central HPWH Branch , !- Name
, !- Pressure Drop Curve Name
WaterHeater:HeatPump:PumpedCondenser , !- Component 1 Object Type
PlantHeatPumpWaterHeater ,!- Component 1 Name
HPWH Use Inlet Node , !- Component 1 Inlet Node Name
HPWH Use Outlet Node; !- Component 1 Outlet Node Name
WaterHeater:Mixed ,
HPWHPlantTank , !- Name
0.757 , !- Tank Volume {m3}
Plant Hot Water Setpoint Temp Schedule , !- Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name
2.0, !- Deadband Temperature Difference {deltaC}
82.2222 , !- Maximum Temperature Limit {C}
CYCLE , !- Heater Control Type
25000 , !- Heater Maximum Capacity {W}
0, !- Heater Minimum Capacity {W}
, !- Heater Ignition Minimum Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Heater Ignition Delay {s}
ELECTRICITY , !- Heater Fuel Type
0.98, !- Heater Thermal Efficiency
, !- Part Load Factor Curve Name
10, !- Off Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate {W}
ELECTRICITY , !- Off Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type
0, !- Off Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction to Tank
30, !- On Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate {W}
ELECTRICITY , !- On Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type
0, !- On Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction to Tank
Outdoors , !- Ambient Temperature Indicator
, !- Ambient Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Ambient Temperature Zone Name
HPWHPlantTank OA Node , !- Ambient Temperature Outdoor Air Node Name
0.0, !- Off Cycle Loss Coefficient to Ambient Temperature {W/K}
0.0, !- Off Cycle Loss Fraction to Zone
0.0, !- On Cycle Loss Coefficient to Ambient Temperature {W/K}
0.0, !- On Cycle Loss Fraction to Zone
, !- Peak Use Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Use Flow Rate Fraction Schedule Name
, !- Cold Water Supply Temperature Schedule Name
HPWH Use Inlet Node , !- Use Side Inlet Node Name
HPWH Use Outlet Node , !- Use Side Outlet Node Name
0.98, !- Use Side Effectiveness
HPPlantWaterOutletNode , !- Source Side Inlet Node Name
HPPlantWaterInletNode , !- Source Side Outlet Node Name
0.98, !- Source Side Effectiveness
autosize; !- Use Side Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
OutdoorAir:Node ,
HPWHPlantTank OA Node; !- Name
Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump:Pumped ,
HPWHPlantDXCoil , !- Name
25000.0 , !- Rated Heating Capacity {W}
3.2, !- Rated COP {W/W}
0.736 , !- Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
29.44 , !- Rated Evaporator Inlet Air Dry -Bulb Temperature {C}
22.22 , !- Rated Evaporator Inlet Air Wet -Bulb Temperature {C}
55.72 , !- Rated Condenser Inlet Water Temperature {C}
1.00695 , !- Rated Evaporator Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.00115525 , !- Rated Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
No , !- Evaporator Fan Power Included in Rated COP
No , !- Condenser Pump Power Included in Rated COP
1.23. GROUP – WATER HEATERS 909
No , !- Condenser Pump Heat Included in Rated Heating Capacity and Rated COP
150.0 , !- Condenser Water Pump Power {W}
0.1, !- Fraction of Condenser Pump Heat to Water
HPPlantFanAirOutletNode , !- Evaporator Air Inlet Node Name
HPPlantAirOutletNode , !- Evaporator Air Outlet Node Name
HPPlantWaterInletNode , !- Condenser Water Inlet Node Name
HPPlantWaterOutletNode , !- Condenser Water Outlet Node Name
100.0 , !- Crankcase Heater Capacity {W}
5.0, !- Maximum Ambient Temperature for Crankcase Heater Operation {C}
WetBulbTemperature , !- Evaporator Air Temperature Type for Curve Objects
HPWHHeatingCapFTemp , !- Heating Capacity Function of Temperature Curve Name
, !- Heating Capacity Function of Air Flow Fraction Curve Name
, !- Heating Capacity Function of Water Flow Fraction Curve Name
HPWHHeatingCOPFTemp , !- Heating COP Function of Temperature Curve Name
, !- Heating COP Function of Air Flow Fraction Curve Name
, !- Heating COP Function of Water Flow Fraction Curve Name
HPWHPLFFPLR; !- Part Load Fraction Correlation Curve Name
Fan:SystemModel ,
HPWHPlantFan , !- Name
PlantHPWHSch , !- Availability Schedule Name
HPPlantAirInletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
HPPlantFanAirOutletNode , !- Air Outlet Node Name
2.2685 , !- Design Maximum Air Flow Rate
Discrete , !- Speed Control Method
0.0, !- Electric Power Minimum Flow Rate Fraction
100.0 , !- Design Pressure Rise
0.9 , !- Motor Efficiency
1.0 , !- Motor In Air Stream Fraction
AUTOSIZE , !- Design Electric Power Consumption
TotalEfficiencyAndPressure , !- Design Power Sizing Method
, !- Electric Power Per Unit Flow Rate
, !- Electric Power Per Unit Flow Rate Per Unit Pressure
0.70; !- Fan Total Efficiency
1.23.5.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Water Heater Compressor Part Load Ratio
1.23.6 WaterHeater:HeatPump:WrappedCondenser
The heat pump water heater with wrapped condenser is a compound object very similar to the WaterHeater
:HeatPump:PumpedCondenser object. It likewise combines a water heater tank, a direct expansion (DX) “coil”,
and a fan to provide air flow across the air coil associated with the DX compression system. The primary
difference is that instead of pumping water through an external condenser, the heating coils are wrapped
around or submerged in the tank. This type of HPWH is most common in packaged units meant for
residential applications.
To model a wrapped condenser heat pump water, the input data file must include some combination
of the following objects depending on the configuration to be modeled:
• WaterHeater:HeatPump:WrappedCondenser (required)
• WaterHeater:Stratified (required)
• Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump:Wrapped (required)
• (when the HPWH draws some or all of its air from the zone, the heat pump
ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList
water heater type and name must be in this list)
• (when the HPWH draws some or all of its air from the zone, the HPWH
ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections
air inlet and outlet node names must be provided in this object)
• (for HPWHs that use outdoor air as all or part of the heat source, the HPWH
OutdoorAir:NodeList
outdoor air node name must be provided in this list)
The input fields for the compound object are described in detail below:
1.23.6.1 Inputs
1.23.6.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a heat pump water heater.
Any reference to this heat pump water heater by another object will use this name.
is scheduled off, the heater (element or burner) in the water tank object operates based on its tank set
point temperature schedule and the heat pump’s parasitic electric power is also off for that time period.
If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.
Curve Name (function of air flow fraction) in the associated DX coil object to account for differences in
capacity and power consumption at the off-rated air flow rate.
• MutuallyExclusive means that once the tank heating element(s) are active, the heat pump is shut
down until the heating element setpoint is reached.
• Simultaneous (default) means that both the tank heating element and heat pump are used at the
same time to recover the tank temperature.
916 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
WaterHeater:HeatPump:WrappedCondenser ,
PlantHeatPumpWaterHeater ,!- Name
PlantHPWHSch , !- Availability Schedule Name
PlantHPWHTempSch , !- Compressor Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name
3.89, !- Dead Band Temperature Difference {deltaC}
0.0664166667 , !- Condenser Bottom Location
0.8634166667 , !- Condenser Top Location
0.2279 , !- Evaporator Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
OutdoorAirOnly , !- Inlet Air Configuration
, !- Air Inlet Node Name
, !- Air Outlet Node Name
HPPlantAirInletNode , !- Outdoor Air Node Name
HPPlantAirOutletNode , !- Exhaust Air Node Name
, !- Inlet Air Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Inlet Air Humidity Schedule Name
, !- Inlet Air Zone Name
WaterHeater:Stratified , !- Tank Object Type
HPWHPlantTank , !- Tank Name
HPWH Use Inlet Node , !- Tank Use Side Inlet Node Name
HPWH Use Outlet Node , !- Tank Use Side Outlet Node Name
Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump:Wrapped , !- DX Coil Object Type
HPWHPlantDXCoil , !- DX Coil Name
7.2, !- Minimum Inlet Air Temperature for Compressor Operation {C}
Outdoors , !- Compressor Location
, !- Compressor Ambient Temperature Schedule Name
Fan:SystemModel , !- Fan Object Type
HPWHPlantFan , !- Fan Name
DrawThrough , !- Fan Placement
0, !- On Cycle Parasitic Electric Load {W}
0, !- Off Cycle Parasitic Electric Load {W}
, !- Parasitic Heat Rejection Location
, !- Inlet Air Mixer Node Name
, !- Outlet Air Splitter Node Name
, !- Inlet Air Mixer Schedule Name
MutuallyExclusive , !- Tank Element Control Logic
1.262 , !- Control Sensor 1 Height In Stratified Tank
0.75, !- Control Sensor 1 Weight
0.464; !- Control Sensor 2 Height In Stratified Tank
NOTE: branch object required only when tank use inlet nodes are used.
1.23. GROUP – WATER HEATERS 917
Branch ,
Central HPWH Branch , !- Name
, !- Pressure Drop Curve Name
WaterHeater:HeatPump:WrappedCondenser , !- Component 1 Object Type
PlantHeatPumpWaterHeater ,!- Component 1 Name
HPWH Use Inlet Node , !- Component 1 Inlet Node Name
HPWH Use Outlet Node; !- Component 1 Outlet Node Name
WaterHeater:Stratified ,
HPWHPlantTank , !- Name
Water Heater , !- End -Use Subcategory
0.287691 , !- Tank Volume {m3}
1.594 , !- Tank Height {m}
VerticalCylinder , !- Tank Shape
, !- Tank Perimeter {m}
100, !- Maximum Temperature Limit {C}
MasterSlave , !- Heater Priority Control
Plant Hot Water Setpoint Temp Schedule , !- Heater 1 Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name
18.5, !- Heater 1 Deadband Temperature Difference {deltaC}
4500, !- Heater 1 Capacity {W}
1.129 , !- Heater 1 Height {m}
Plant Hot Water Setpoint Temp Schedule , !- Heater 2 Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name
18.5, !- Heater 2 Deadband Temperature Difference {deltaC}
0, !- Heater 2 Capacity {W}
0.266 , !- Heater 2 Height {m}
Electricity , !- Heater Fuel Type
1, !- Heater Thermal Efficiency
8.3, !- Off Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate {W}
Electricity , !- Off Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type
0, !- Off Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction to Tank
1, !- Off Cycle Parasitic Height {m}
8.3, !- On Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate {W}
Electricity , !- On Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type
0, !- On Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction to Tank
1, !- On Cycle Parasitic Height {m}
Outdoors , !- Ambient Temperature Indicator
, !- Ambient Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Ambient Temperature Zone Name
, !- Ambient Temperature Outdoor Air Node Name
0.7878 , !- Uniform Skin Loss Coefficient per Unit Area to Ambient Temperature {W/m2 -
K}
1, !- Skin Loss Fraction to Zone
, !- Off Cycle Flue Loss Coefficient to Ambient Temperature {W/K}
1, !- Off Cycle Flue Loss Fraction to Zone
0.001 , !- Peak Use Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Use Flow Rate Fraction Schedule Name
, !- Cold Water Supply Temperature Schedule Name
HPWH Use Inlet Node , !- Use Side Inlet Node Name
HPWH Use Outlet Node , !- Use Side Outlet Node Name
1, !- Use Side Effectiveness
0, !- Use Side Inlet Height {m}
autocalculate , !- Use Side Outlet Height {m}
HPPlantWaterOutletNode , !- Source Side Inlet Node Name
HPPlantWaterInletNode , !- Source Side Outlet Node Name
1, !- Source Side Effectiveness
0.7, !- Source Side Inlet Height {m}
0, !- Source Side Outlet Height {m}
Fixed , !- Inlet Mode
autosize , !- Use Side Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- Source Side Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.5, !- Indirect Water Heating Recovery Time {hr}
12; !- Number of Nodes
OutdoorAir:Node ,
HPWHPlantTank OA Node; !- Name
Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump:Wrapped ,
HPWHPlantDXCoil , !- Name
2349.6 , !- Rated Heating Capacity {W}
918 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Fan:OnOff ,
HPWHPlantFan , !- Name
PlantHPWHSch , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.1722 , !- Fan Total Efficiency
65, !- Pressure Rise {Pa}
0.2279 , !- Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s}
1, !- Motor Efficiency
0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
HPPlantAirInletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
HPPlantFanAirOutletNode ; !- Air Outlet Node Name
1.23.6.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Water Heater Compressor Part Load Ratio
1.24.2 CoolingTower:SingleSpeed
Cooling towers are components that may be assigned to condenser loops. The cooling tower is modeled as a
counterflow heat exchanger with a single-speed fan (induced draft configuration) based on Merkel’s theory.
The user must define tower performance via one of two methods: design heat transfer coefficient-area
product (UA) and design water flow rate, or nominal tower capacity at a specific rating point. Regardless
of which method is chosen, the design airflow rate and corresponding fan power must be specified. The
model will also account for tower performance in the “free convection” regime, when the tower fan is off
but the water pump remains on and heat transfer still occurs (albeit at a low level). If the user wants the
model to account for “free convection”, they must specify the corresponding airflow rate and heat transfer
coefficient-area product (UA), or the nominal tower capacity during this mode of operation.
The cooling tower seeks to maintain the temperature of the water exiting the cooling tower at (or
below) a set point. The set point schedule value is defined by the field “Condenser Loop Temperature
Setpoint Node Name or Reference” for the CondenserLoop object. The model first checks to determine
the impact of “free convection”, if specified by the user, on the tower exiting water temperature. If the
exiting water temperature based on “free convection” is at or below the set point, then the tower fan is
not turned on. If the exiting water temperature based on “free convection” is below the set point, the
tower will operate in FluidBypass mode – portion of the water goes through the tower media and gets
cooled while the remaining water flow gets bypassed, two water flows then mix together trying to meet
the water setpoint temperature. If the exiting water temperature remains above the set point after “free
convection” is modeled, then the tower fan is turned on to reduce the exiting water temperature to the set
point. If the capacity control is FanCycling, the model assumes that part-load operation is represented by
a simple linear interpolation between two steady-state regimes (i.e., tower fan on for the entire simulation
timestep and tower fan off for the entire simulation timestep). Cyclic losses are not taken into account. If
the capacity control is FluidBypass, the model determines the fraction of water flow to be bypassed while
the remaining water goes through the tower cooling media and gets cooled, then the two water flows mix
to meet the setpoint temperature. In this case, the fan runs at full speed for the entire timestep.
Cooling towers here are “wet” and consume water through evaporation, drift, and blowdown. The model
can be used to predict water consumed by the towers. The last six input fields are optional and provide
methods of controlling details of the water consumption calculations. The user can specify connections to
the rest of the buildings water system by providing the name of a water storage tanks (i.e. WaterUse:Storage
920 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
objects).
For the operation of multi-cell towers, the first step is to determine the number of cells to operate based
on the cell control method – between the minimum number of cells subject to the maximum water flow
rate fraction per cell, and maximum number of cells subject to the minimum water flow rate fraction per
cell. If the calculated cells do not meet the loads, additional cells will be operating to help meet the loads.
Inside each cell, the existing capacity controls still apply.
For multi-cell towers, the following inputs are assumed to be for the entire tower including all cells:
• Design Water Flow Rate; Design Air Flow Rate; Fan Power at Design Air Flow Rate;
• Air Flow Rate in Free Convection Regime; Nominal Capacity; Free Convection Capacity
1.24.2.1 Inputs
1.24.2.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the cooling tower.
F an power = 0.0105 · ρwater · Cp,water · Design W ater F low Rate · Design Loop∆T (1.89)
is used.
If“Performance Input Method” is specified as “NominalCapacity”, then
is used.
1.24.2.1.8 Field: Free Convection Regime Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the free convection regime air flow
rate. The default is 0.1.
1.24.2.1.10 Field: Free Convection U-Factor Times Area Value Sizing Factor
This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the free convection regime U-Factor
times area value. The default is 0.1.
1.24.2.1.12 Field: Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio
This numeric field contains the value for the ratio of actual tower heat rejection to nominal capac-
ity. This ratio is defined at entering water at 35C (95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F), entering air at
25.6C (78F) wetbulb and 35C (95F) drybulb temperatures. Historically this ratio has been set at 1.25
based on the assumption that the tower must dissipate 0.25 W of compressor power for every what of heat
removed at the chiller evaporator. The default is 1.25.
CoolingTower:SingleSpeed ,
My Tower , !- Name
Condenser Tower Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser Tower Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
.0011 , !- Design Water Flow Rate (m3/s)
926 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
CoolingTower:SingleSpeed ,
My Tower , !- Name
Condenser Tower Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser Tower Outlet Node ,!- Water Outlet Node Name
, !- Design Water Flow Rate (m3/s)
autosize , !- Design Air Flow Rate (m3/s)
1000. , !- Fan Power at Design Air Flow Rate (W)
, !- U-Factor Times Area Value at Design Air Flow Fate (W/C)
autosize , !- Air Flow Rate in Free Convection Regime (m3/s)
, !- U-Factor Times Area Value at Free Convection Air Flow Rate (W/C)
NominalCapacity , !- Performance Input Method
95250. , !- Nominal Capacity (W)
9525.; !- Free Convection Capacity (W)
CoolingTower:SingleSpeed ,
TowerWaterSys CoolTower , !- Name
TowerWaterSys Pump -TowerWaterSys CoolTowerNode , !- Water Inlet Node Name
TowerWaterSys Supply Equipment Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
AUTOSIZE , !- Design Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
AUTOSIZE , !- Design Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
AUTOSIZE , !- Fan Power at Design Air Flow Rate {W}
AUTOSIZE , !- U-Factor Times Area Value at Design Air Flow Rate {W/K}
AUTOSIZE , !- Air Flow Rate in Free Convection Regime {m3/s}
AUTOSIZE , !- U-Factor Times Area at Free Convection Air Flow Rate {W/K}
UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate , !- Performance Input Method
, !- Nominal Capacity {W}
, !- Free Convection Capacity {W}
, !- Basin Heater Capacity {W/K}
, !- Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature {C}
, !- Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name
SaturatedExit , !- Evaporation Loss Mode
, !- Evaporation Loss Factor {percent/K}
0.0080 , !- Drift Loss Percent {percent}
ConcentrationRatio , !- Blowdown Calculation Mode
3.0000 , !- Blowdown Concentration Ratio
, !- Blowdown Makeup Water Usage Schedule Name
, !- Supply Water Storage Tank Name
TowerWaterSys CoolTowerOA ref Node , !- Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name
FanCycling , !- Capacity Control
4, !- Number of Cells
MinimalCell , !- Cell Control
0.25, !- Cell Minimum Water Flow Rate Fraction
1.50, !- Cell Maximum Water Flow Rate Fraction
1.24. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 927
1.24.2.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Fan Electric Power [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Fan Electric Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Inlet Temperature [C]
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Outlet Temperature [C]
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Bypass Fraction []
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Fan Cycling Ratio []
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Operating Cells Count []
A tower uses either mains water or storage tank for make-up water.
When mains water is used:
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
• HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume [m3]
• HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Mains Water Volume [m3]
When storage tank water is used:
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
• HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume [m3]
• HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
• HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]
• HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
• HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]
• HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Mains Water Volume [m3]
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
• HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume [m3]
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
• HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume [m3]
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
• HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume [m3]
IF specified:
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Basin Heater Electric Power [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Basin Heater Electric Energy [J]
928 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.24.2.2.18 Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.24.2.2.20 Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.24.3 CoolingTower:TwoSpeed
The two-speed cooling tower is modeled in a similar fashion to the single-speed tower. The cooling tower
is modeled as a counterflow heat exchanger with a two-speed fan (induced draft configuration) based
on Merkel’s theory. The user must define tower performance via one of two methods: heat transfer
coefficient-area product (UA) and design water flow rate, or nominal tower capacity at a specific rating
point. Regardless of which method is chosen, the airflow rate and corresponding fan power at both high
and low fan speed must be specified. The model will also account for tower performance in the “free
convection” regime, when the tower fan is off but the water pump remains on and heat transfer still occurs
(albeit at a low level). If the user wants the model to account for “free convection”, they must specify the
corresponding air flow rate and heat transfer coefficient-area product (UA), or the nominal tower capacity
during this mode of operation.
The cooling tower seeks to maintain the temperature of the water exiting the cooling tower at (or
below) a set point. The set point schedule value is defined by the field “Condenser Loop Temperature
Setpoint Node Name or Reference” for the CondenserLoop object. The model first checks to determine the
impact of “free convection”, if specified by the user, on the tower exiting water temperature. If the exiting
water temperature based on “free convection” is at or below the set point, then the tower fan is not turned
on. If the exiting water temperature remains above the set point after “free convection” is modeled, then
the tower fan is turned on at low speed to reduce the exiting water temperature. If operating the tower
fan at low speed does not reduce the exiting water temperature to the set point, then the tower fan is
increased to its high speed.
The model assumes that part-load operation is represented by a simple linear interpolation between
two steady-state regimes (i.e., tower fan at high speed for the entire simulation timestep and tower fan at
low speed for the entire simulation timestep, or tower fan at low speed for the entire simulation timestep
and tower fan off for the entire simulation timestep). Cyclic losses are not taken into account.
930 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Cooling towers here are “wet” and consume water through evaporation, drift, and blowdown. The model
can be used to predict water consumed by the towers. The last six input fields are optional and provide
methods of controlling details of the water consumption calculations. The user can specifiy connections to
the rest of the buildings water system by providing the name of a WaterUse:Storage object.
For the operation of multi-cell towers, the first step is to determine the number of cells to operate based
on the cell control method – between the minimum number of cells subject to the maximum water flow
rate fraction per cell, and maximum number of cells subject to the minimum water flow rate fraction per
cell. If the calculated cells do not meet the loads, additional cells will be operating to help meet the loads.
Inside each cell, the existing capacity controls still apply.
For multi-cell towers, the following inputs are assumed to be for the entire tower including all cells:
• Design Water Flow Rate; Design Air Flow Rate; Fan Power at Design Air Flow Rate;
• Air Flow Rate in Free Convection Regime; Nominal Capacity; Free Convection Capacity
Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the cooling tower.
1.24.3.1 Inputs
1.24.3.1.1 Field: Water Inlet Node Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the cooling tower’s water inlet node.
This numeric field contains the fan power (in Watts) at the high-speed air flow rate specified in the
previous field. A value greater than zero must be specified regardless of the tower performance input
method, or this field can be autosized. If autosized, the fan power is calculated as follows:
If“Performance Input Method” is specified as “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”, then
F an powerHigh F an Speed = 0.0105 · ρwater · Cp,water · Design W ater F low Rate · Design Loop∆T (1.92)
is used.
If“Performance Input Method” is specified as “NominalCapacity”, then
is used.
1.24.3.1.7 Field: Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the low fan speed air flow rate. The
default is 0.5.
1.24.3.1.11 Field: Low Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Sizing Factor
This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the low speed heat transfer
coefficient-area product (UA). The default is 0.6.
1.24.3.1.15 Field: Free Convection U-Factor Times Area Value Sizing Factor
This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the free convection regime U-Factor
times area value. The default is 0.1.
1.24.3.1.17 Field: Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio
This numeric field contains the value for the ratio of actual tower heat rejection to nominal capac-
ity. This ratio is defined at entering water at 35C (95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F), entering air at
25.6C (78F) wetbulb and 35C (95F) drybulb temperatures. Historically this ratio has been set at 1.25
based on the assumption that the tower must dissipate 0.25 W of compressor power for every what of heat
removed at the chiller evaporator. The default is 1.25.
Free Convection Regime” field must contain a value greater than zero. This field may be autocalculated,
in which case it is set to a fraction of the High Speed Nominal Capacity determined in the following field.
Four examples of an IDF specification for this object are shown below:
CoolingTower:TwoSpeed ,
My Tower , !- Name
Condenser Tower Inlet Node , !- Water inlet node name
Condenser Tower Outlet Node , !- Water outlet node name
.0011 , !- Design water flow rate , m3/s
16.0, !- Air flow rate at high fan speed , m3/s
10000 , !- Fan power at high fan speed , W
3500. , !- Tower UA at high fan speed , W/C
8.0, !- Air flow rate at low fan speed , m3/s
1600, !- Fan power at low fan speed , W
2100. , !- Tower UA at low fan speed , W/C
1.6, !- Air flow rate for free convection , m3/s
350, !- Tower UA at free convection air flow , W/C
UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate ; !- Tower performance input method
CoolingTower:TwoSpeed ,
My Tower , !- Name
Condenser Tower Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser Tower Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
, !- Design Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
8.0, !- Air Flow Rate at High Fan Speed {m3/s}
500, !- Fan Power at High Fan Speed {W}
, !- U-Factor Times Area Value at High Fan Speed {W/K}
4.0, !- Air Flow Rate at Low Fan Speed {m3/s}
125, !- Fan Power at Low Fan Speed {W}
, !- U-Factor Times Area Value at Low Fan Speed {W/K}
0.8, !- Air Flow Rate in Free Convection Regime {m3/s}
, !- U-Factor Times Area Value at Free Convection Air Flow Rate {W/K}
NominalCapacity , !- Performance Input Method
20000.0 , !- High Speed Nominal Capacity {W}
10000.0 , !- Low Speed Nominal Capacity {W}
2000.0; !- Free Convection Capacity {W}
CoolingTower:TwoSpeed ,
Big Tower1 , !- Tower Name
Condenser Tower 1 Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser Tower 1 Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
, !- Design Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
8.0, !- Design High Speed Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
500, !- Fan Power at Design High Speed Air Flow Rate {W}
, !- Tower UA Value at Design High Speed Air Flow Rate {W/K}
4.0, !- Design Low Speed Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
125, !- Fan Power at Design Low Speed Air Flow Rate {W}
, !- Tower UA Value at Design Low Speed Air Flow Rate {W/K}
0.8, !- Air Flow Rate in Free Convection Regime {m3/s}
, !- Tower UA Value at Free Convection Air Flow Rate {W/K}
NominalCapacity , !- Tower Performance Input Method
20000.0 , !- Tower High Speed Nominal Capacity
10000.0 , !- Tower Low Speed Nominal Capacity
2000.0 , !- Tower Free Convection Nominal Capacity
, !- Basin Heater Capacity {W/K}
, !- Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature {C}
, !- Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name
SaturatedExit , !- Evaporation Loss Mode
, !- Evaporation Loss Factor [%/C]
0.008 , !- Drift Loss Percent
ConcentrationRatio , !- Blowdown Calculation Mode
3.0, !- Blowdown Concentration Ratio
, !- Schedule Name for Makeup Water Usage due to Blowdown
Recovery Tank; !- Name of Water Storage Tank for Supply
CoolingTower:TwoSpeed ,
TowerWaterSys CoolTower , !- Name
TowerWaterSys Pump -TowerWaterSys CoolTowerNode , !- Water Inlet Node Name
938 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.24.3.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Fan Electric Power [W]
A tower uses either mains water or storage tank for make-up water.
When mains water is used:
• HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
IF specified:
1.24.3.2.18 Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.24.3.2.20 Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.24.4 CoolingTower:VariableSpeed:Merkel
This variable speed tower model is based on Merkel’s theory and is similar to the single-speed and two-
speed tower models. The open wet cooling tower is modeled as a counter flow heat exchanger with a
variable-speed fan drawing air through the tower (induced-draft configuration). The model also includes a
“free convection” regime where cooling tower performance modeled with the fan off.
For this model, Merkel’s theory is modified to include adjustments developed by Scheier to alter the
heat transfer effectiveness based on current wetbulb, air flow rates, and water flow rates. The input requires
performance curves or lookup tables to describe these three adjustment factors.
For a multi-cell tower, the capacity and air/water flow rate inputs are for the entire tower.
1.24.4.1 Inputs
1.24.4.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the cooling tower.
1.24.4.1.5 Field: Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio
This numeric field contains the value for the ratio of actual tower heat rejection to nominal capac-
ity. This ratio is defined at entering water at 35C (95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F), entering air at
25.6C (78F) wetbulb and 35C (95F) drybulb temperatures. Historically this ratio has been set at 1.25
based on the assumption that the tower must dissipate 0.25 W of compressor power for every what of heat
removed at the chiller evaporator. The default is 1.25.
tower heat rejection at these operating conditions. This field can be autosized, in which case a Sizing:Plant
object is needed for the condenser loop.
1.24.4.1.10 Field: Design Water Flow Rate per Unit of Nominal Capacity
This numeric field contains a scalable sizing factor for design water flow rate that scales with nominal
capacity, in units of m3 /s/W. The default value is 5.382*10−8 . This field is only used if the previous field
is set to autocalculate and performance input method is NominalCapacity. (If the performance input
method is set to UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate then the design water flow rate is obtained
from the plant sizing result.)
1.24.4.1.12 Field: Design Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Nominal Capacity
This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the design air flow rate from the
nominal capacity, in units of m3 /s/W. The default is 2.76316*10−5 . When this field is left blank, then
the default value is used but the flow rate is also scaled to account for elevation (with larger volume flow
rates at higher altitudes). When a hard value is entered, even if it is the same as the default, then the
design air flow rate is not also adjusted for elevation and the scaling factor is used directly.
1.24. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 943
1.24.4.1.16 Field: Fan Power Modifier Function of Air Flow Rate Ratio Curve Name
This alpha field contains the name of a curve or table object that describes fan power ratio (fan
power/design fan power) as a function of air flow rate ratio (air flow rate/design air flow rate). The curve
or table object must be for one independent variable, typically a cubic, and should be normalized to 1.0
at an air flow rate ratio of 1.0. This field is required.
1.24.4.1.18 Field: Free Convection Regime Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the free convection regime air flow
rate. The default is 0.1.
1.24.4.1.19 Field: Design Air Flow Rate U-Factor Times Area Value
This numeric field contains the heat transfer coefficient-area product (UA) in watts per Kelvin cor-
responding to the design air and water flow rates specified above. If the input field “Performance Input
Method” is specified as “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”, then a UA value greater than
zero but less than or equal to 300,000 must be defined, or the field can be autosized. If autosized, a Plant
Sizing object must be defined and the design tower UA value is derived from the design load to be rejected
by the condenser loop and the design loop delta T (Ref. Sizing and Input for Design Calculations and
Component Autosizing sections), assuming a tower water inlet temperature of 35C and tower inlet air at
35C drybulb/25.6C wetbulb. If “Performance Input Method” is specified as “NominalCapacity”, then this
944 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
field must be left blank since the model automatically calculates the tower UA based on the tower capacity
specified in the field “Nominal Capacity”.
1.24.4.1.21 Field: Free Convection U-Factor Times Area Value Sizing Factor
This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the free convection regime U-Factor
times area value. The default is 0.1. This field is only used if the previous field is set to autocalculate and
the performance input method is UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate.
1.24.4.1.22 Field: U-Factor Times Area Modifier Function of Air Flow Ratio Curve
Name
This alpha field contains the name of a curve or table object that describes how the UA value varies as
a function of air flow rate ratio (air flow rate/design air flow rate). The result of this curve is multiplied by
the design UA value to adjust for air flow rate, along with the two other modifiers discussed below. The
curve or table object must be for one independent variable and should be normalized to 1.0 at an air flow
rate ratio of 1.0. This field is required.
1.24.4.1.24 Field: U-Factor Times Area Modifier Function of Water Flow Ratio Curve
Name
This alpha field contains the name of a curve or table object that describes how the UA value varies
as a function of the current water flow rate ratio (water flow rate/design water flow rate). The result of
this curve is multiplied by the design UA value to adjust for water flow rates that differ from design level,
along with the other two modifiers discussed above. The curve or table object must be for one independent
variable and should be normalized to 1.0 at a water flow ratio of 1.0. This field is required
field. The basin heater electric power is equal to this field multiplied by the difference between the basin
heater set point temperature and the outdoor dry-bulb temperature. The basin heater only operates when
the tower fan is off and water is not flowing through the tower, regardless of the basin heater schedule
described below. The basin heater capacity must be greater than or equal to zero, with a default value of
zero if this field is left blank.
CoolingTower:VariableSpeed:Merkel ,
Big Tower1 , !- Name
Condenser Tower 1 Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser Tower 1 Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
NominalCapacity , !- Performance Input Method
1.25, !- Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio
20000.0 , !- Nominal Capacity
autocalculate , !- Free Convection Nominal Capacity
0.1, !- Free Convection Nominal Capacity Sizing Factor
autocalculate , !- Design Water Flow Rate
5.382E-8, !- Design Water Flow Rate per Unit of Nominal Capacity
autocalculate , !- Design Air Flow Rate
2.76316E-5, !- Design Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Nominal Capacity
0.2, !- Minimum Air Flow Rate Ratio
autocalculate , !- Design Fan Power
0.0105 , !- Design Fan Power Per Unit of Nominal Capacity
VS tower fan power mod func air flow ratio , !- Fan Power Modifier Function of Air Flow Rate Ratio
Curve Name
autocalculate , !- Free Convection Regime Air Flow Rate
0.1, !- Free Convection Regime Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
, !- Design Air Flow Rate U-Factor Times Area Value
, !- Free Convection Regime U-Factor Times Area Value
, !- Free Convection U-Factor Times Area Value Sizing Factor
VS tower UA mod func air flow ratio , !- U-Factor Times Area Modifier Function of Air Flow Ratio
Curve Name
VS tower UA mod func wetbulb difference , !- U-Factor Times Area Modifier Function of Wetbulb
Temperature Difference Curve Name
VS tower UA mod func water flow ratio; !- U-Factor Times Area Modifier Function of Water Flow Ratio
Curve Name
Curve:Cubic ,
VS tower fan power mod func air flow ratio , !- Name
0.02 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
0.0 , !- Coefficient2 x
948 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Curve:Quadratic ,
VS tower UA mod func air flow ratio , !- Name
0.0 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
1.3 , !- Coefficient2 x
-0.3 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
0.2 , !- Minimum Value of x
1.0 , !- Maximum Value of x
0.0 , !- Minimum Curve Output
1.0 , !- Maximum Curve Output
Dimensionless , !- Input Unit Type for X
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type
Curve:Linear ,
VS tower UA mod func wetbulb difference , !- Name
1.0 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
0.0081 , !- Coefficient2 x
-10 , !- Minimum Value of x
25.0 , !- Maximum Value of x
0.85 , !- Minimum Curve Output
1.3 , !- Maximum Curve Output
Dimensionless , !- Input Unit Type for X
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type
Curve:Quadratic ,
VS tower UA mod func water flow ratio , !- Name
0.1082 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
1.667 , !- Coefficient2 x
-0.7713 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
0.3 , !- Minimum Value of x
1.0 , !- Maximum Value of x
0.5 , !- Minimum Curve Output
1.1 , !- Maximum Curve Output
Dimensionless , !- Input Unit Type for X
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type
1.24.4.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Inlet Temperature [C]
A tower uses either mains water or storage tank for make-up water.
When mains water is used:
• HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
IF specified:
1.24.4.2.20 Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.24.4.2.22 Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.24. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 951
1.24.5 CoolingTower:VariableSpeed
The variable speed tower model is based on empirical curve fits of manufacturer’s performance data or field
measurements. The user specifies tower performance at design conditions, and empirical curves are used
to determine the approach temperature and fan power at off-design conditions. The user defines tower
performance by entering the inlet air wet-bulb temperature, tower range, and tower approach temperature
at the design conditions. The corresponding water flow rate (within ±25% of the tower’s rated water
mass flow rate), air flow rate, and fan power must also be specified. The model will account for tower
performance in the “free convection” regime, when the tower fan is off but the water pump remains on and
heat transfer still occurs (albeit at a low level). Basin heater operation and makeup water usage (due to
evaporation, drift, and blowdown) are also modeled.
The cooling tower seeks to maintain the temperature of the water exiting the cooling tower at (or
below) a set point. The set point schedule is defined by the field “Condenser Loop Temperature Setpoint
Node Name or Reference” for the CondenserLoop object. The model first checks to determine the impact
of “free convection” on the tower exiting water temperature. If the exiting water temperature based on
“free convection” is at or below the set point, then the variable-speed tower fan is not turned on. If the
exiting water temperature is above the set point after “free convection” is modeled, then the variable-speed
tower fan is turned on to reduce the exiting water temperature. Tower fan power is calculated based on
the tower air flow rate required to achieve the exiting water set point temperature.
Cooling towers here are “wet” and consume water through evaporation, drift, and blowdown. The model
can be used to predict water consumed by the towers. The last six input fields are optional and provide
methods of controlling details of the water consumption calculations. The user can specifiy connections to
the rest of the buildings water system by providing the name of a WaterUse:Storage object.
For the operation of multi-cell towers, the first step is to determine the number of cells to operate based
on the cell control method – between the minimum number of cells subject to the maximum water flow
rate fraction per cell, and maximum number of cells subject to the minimum water flow rate fraction per
cell. If the calculated cells do not meet the loads, additional cells will be operating to help meet the loads.
Inside each cell, the existing capacity controls still apply.
For multi-cell towers, the following inputs are assumed to be for the entire tower including all cells:
• Design Water Flow Rate; Design Air Flow Rate; Fan Power at Design Air Flow Rate;
• Air Flow Rate in Free Convection Regime; Nominal Capacity; Free Convection Capacity
1.24.5.1 Inputs
1.24.5.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the variable speed cooling tower.
field is autosized and the design water flow rate is then derived from the design load to be rejected by the
condenser loop and the design loop delta T (Ref. Sizing and Input for Design Calculations and Component
Autosizing sections). The design water flow rate should correspond with the design values specified for the
inlet air wet-bulb temperature, approach temperature, range temperature, and air flow rate. When this
field is not autosized, the condenser loop flow rate specified in other objects should be within ±25% of the
tower’s rated water flow rate (different range is permissible if Model Type is “User Defined”).
Design f an power = 0.0105 · ρwater · Cp,water · Design W ater F low Rate · Design Loop∆T (1.95)
1.24.5.1.12 Field: Fan Power Ratio Function of Air Flow Rate Ratio Curve Name
This alpha field contains the curve object name for fan power ratio (fan power/design fan power) as
a function of air flow rate ratio (air flow rate/design air flow rate) [ref. Performance Curves]. The curve
object must be a cubic curve and should be normalized to 1.0 at an air flow rate ratio of 1.0. If this field
is left blank, a theoretical fan curve is assumed where fan power ratio is directly proportional to the air
flow rate ratio cubed.
will the flow per cell be allowed to exceed its maximum value defined by the Maximum Water Flow Rate
Fraction.
MaximalCel : As many cells as possible will be turned on. In no case, however, will the flow per cell
be allowed to drop below its minimum value specified by the Minimum Water Flow Rate Fraction.
CoolingTower:VariableSpeed ,
Big Tower1 , !- Tower Name
Condenser 1 Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser 1 Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
YorkCalc , !- Tower Model Type
, !- Tower Model Coefficient Name
25.5556 , !- Design Inlet Air Wet -Bulb Temperature {C}
3.8889 , !- Design Approach Temperature {C}
5.5556 , !- Design Range Temperature {C}
0.0015 , !- Design Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.6435 , !- Design Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
275, !- Design Fan Power {W}
FanRatioCurve , !- Fan Power Ratio - function of Air Flow Rate Curve Name
0.2, !- Minimum Air Flow Rate Ratio
0.125 , !- Fraction of Tower Capacity in Free Convection Regime
450.0 , !- Basin Heater Capacity {W/K}
4.5, !- Basin Heater Set Point Temperature {C}
BasinSchedule , !- Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name
SaturatedExit , !- Evaporation Loss Mode
, !- Evaporation Loss Factor
0.05, !- Makeup Water Usage due to Drift {percent}
ScheduledRate , !- Blowdown Calculation Mode
1.24. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 957
1.24.5.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Fan Electric Power [W]
A tower uses either mains water or storage tank for make-up water.
When mains water is used:
• HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
IF specified:
1.24.5.2.20 Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.24.5.2.22 Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.24.6 CoolingTowerPerformance:CoolTools
Variable speed cooling towers can be modeled by EnergyPlus with user-selectable performance based on
the CoolTools correlation, YorkCalc correlation, or user-defined coefficients for either the CoolTools or
YorkCalc correlations.The empirical CoolTools tower correlation uses a set of 35 coefficients to model the
thermal performance (approach temperature) of a cooling tower based on four independent variables. If the
user specifies Model Type = CoolToolsCrossFlow in the CoolingTower:VariableSpeed object, then the 35
coefficients derived for the CoolTools simulation model are used and these coefficients are already defined
within EnergyPlus. If the user specifies Model Type = CoolToolsUserDefined, then the user must enter a
CoolingTowerPerformance:CoolTools object to define the 35 coefficients that will be used by the CoolTools
correlation.
The user must specify a name for the model coefficient object, and this name must be used in the
CoolingTower:VariableSpeed object (field Model Coefficient Name) to tell the program to use these coeffi-
cients. Next, the user enters the minimum and maximum values for inlet air wet-bulb temperature, range
temperature, approach temperature, and water mass flow rate ratio to specify the valid range for which the
model coefficients were derived. For all of these variables, the program issues warnings if the actual values
are beyond the minimum/maximum values specified. For inlet air wet-bulb temperature and water mass
flow rate ratio, the values of these variables used in the calculation of approach temperature are limited to
be within the valid minimum/maximum range specified. For approach and range, the warnings are issued
if the values are beyond the specified minimum/maximum range but the actual values are still used.
The CoolTools correlation has four independent variables: inlet air wet-bulb temperature (Twb), tower
range temperature (Tr), water flow rate ratio (FRwater), and air flow rate ratio (FRair). Temperatures
are in units of ˚C and flow rate ratios are dimensionless (actual flow rate divided by design flow rate).
Using these independent variables, tower approach temperature (˚C) is calculated as follows:
Approach = Coeff(1) + Coeff(2)•FRair + Coeff(3)•(FRair)2 +
Coeff(4)•(FRair)3 + Coeff(5)•FRwater +
Coeff(6)•FRair•FRwater + Coeff(7)•(FRair)2 •FRwater +
Coeff(8)•(FRwater)2 + Coeff(9)•FRair•(FRwater)2 +
Coeff(10)•(FRwater)3 + Coeff(11)•Twb + Coeff(12)•FRair•Twb +
Coeff(13)•(FRair)2 •Twb + Coeff(14)•FRwater•Twb +
Coeff(15)•FRair•FRwater•Twb + Coeff(16)•(FRwater)2 •Twb +
Coeff(17)•(Twb)2 + Coeff(18)•FRair•(Twb)2 +
Coeff(19)•FRwater•(Twb)2 + Coeff(20)•(Twb)3 + Coeff(21)•Tr +
Coeff(22)•FRair•Tr + Coeff(23)•FRair•FRair•Tr +
Coeff(24)•FRwater•Tr + Coeff(25)•FRair•FRwater•Tr +
Coeff(26)•(FRwater)2 •Tr + Coeff(27)•Twb•Tr +
Coeff(28)•FRair•Twb•Tr + Coeff(29)•FRwater•Twb•Tr +
Coeff(30)•(Twb)2 •Tr + Coeff(31)•(Tr)2 + Coeff(32)•FRair•(Tr)2 +
Coeff(33)•FRwater•(Tr)2 + Coeff(34)•Twb•(Tr)2 + Coeff(35)•(Tr)3
This object allows the user to specify model coefficients for use with the CoolTools correlation shown
above. It is recommended that a broad set of cooling tower performance data be used to generate these
model coefficients. The data set used to create the model coefficients should cover the entire range of
water and air flow rate ratios and inlet air wet-bulb, range, and approach temperatures expected during
the simulation.
1.24.6.1 Inputs
1.24.6.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the variable speed cooling tower model coefficients.
1.24. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 961
CoolingTowerPerformance :CoolTools ,
CoolTools CrossFlow Default Model , !- Tower Model Coefficient Name
-1.0, !- Minimum Inlet Air Wet -Bulb Temperature {C}
26.6667 , !- Maximum Inlet Air Wet -Bulb Temperature {C}
1.1111 , !- Minimum Range Temperature {C}
11.1111 , !- Maximum Range Temperature {C}
1.1111 , !- Minimum Approach Temperature {C}
11.1111 , !- Maximum Approach Temperature {C}
0.75, !- Minimum Water Flow Rate Ratio
1.25, !- Maximum Water Flow Rate Ratio
0.52049709836241 , !- Coefficient 1
-10.617046395344 , !- Coefficient 2
10.7292974722538 , !- Coefficient 3
-2.74988377158227 , !- Coefficient 4
4.73629943913743 , !- Coefficient 5
-8.25759700874711 , !- Coefficient 6
1.57640938114136 , !- Coefficient 7
6.51119643791324 , !- Coefficient 8
1.50433525206692 , !- Coefficient 9
-3.2888529287801 , !- Coefficient 10
0.0257786145353773 , !- Coefficient 11
0.182464289315254 , !- Coefficient 12
-0.0818947291400898 , !- Coefficient 13
-0.215010003996285 , !- Coefficient 14
0.0186741309635284 , !- Coefficient 15
0.0536824177590012 , !- Coefficient 16
-0.00270968955115031 , !- Coefficient 17
0.00112277498589279 , !- Coefficient 18
-0.00127758497497718 , !- Coefficient 19
0.0000760420796601607 , !- Coefficient 20
1.43600088336017 , !- Coefficient 21
-0.5198695909109 , !- Coefficient 22
0.117339576910507 , !- Coefficient 23
1.50492810819924 , !- Coefficient 24
-0.135898905926974 , !- Coefficient 25
-0.152577581866506 , !- Coefficient 26
-0.0533843828114562 , !- Coefficient 27
0.00493294869565511 , !- Coefficient 28
-0.00796260394174197 , !- Coefficient 29
0.000222619828621544 , !- Coefficient 30
-0.0543952001568055 , !- Coefficient 31
0.00474266879161693 , !- Coefficient 32
-0.0185854671815598 , !- Coefficient 33
0.00115667701293848 , !- Coefficient 34
0.000807370664460284; !- Coefficient 35
1.24.6.2 Outputs
No additional cooling tower output variables are output when this object is used.
1.24.7 CoolingTowerPerformance:YorkCalc
Variable speed cooling towers can be modeled by EnergyPlus with user-selectable performance based on
the CoolTools correlation, YorkCalc correlation, or user-defined coefficients for either the CoolTools or
YorkCalc correlations.The empirical YorkCalc tower correlation uses a set of 27 coefficients to model the
thermal performance (approach temperature) of a variable speed cooling tower based on three independent
variables. If the user specifies Tower Model Type = YorkCalc in the CoolingTower:VariableSpeed object,
then the 27 coefficients derived for the YorkCalc simulation model are used and these coefficients are
already defined within EnergyPlus. If the user specifies Tower Model Type = YorkCalcUserDefined, then
the user must enter a CoolingTowerPerformance:YorkCalc object to define the 27 coefficients that will be
used by the YorkCalc correlation.
1.24. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 963
The user must specify a name for the model coefficient object, and this name must be used in the
CoolingTower:VariableSpeed object (field Model Coefficient Name) to tell the program to use these coeffi-
cients. Next, the user enters the minimum and maximum values for inlet air wet-bulb temperature, range
temperature, approach temperature, and water mass flow rate ratio to specify the valid range for which the
model coefficients were derived. The user also specifies the maximum valid liquid-to-gas ratio. For all of
these variables, the program issues warnings if the actual values are beyond the minimum/maximum values
specified. For inlet air wet-bulb temperature and water mass flow rate ratio, the values of these variables
used in the calculation of approach temperature are limited to be within the valid minimum/maximum
range specified. For approach, range, and liquid-to-gas ratio the warnings are issued if the values are
beyond the specified minimum/maximum range but the actual values are still used.
The YorkCalc correlation has three independent variables: inlet air wet-bulb temperature (Twb), tower
range temperature (Tr), and the liquid-to-gas ratio (ratio of water flow rate ratio to air flow rate ratio
= LGRatio). Temperatures are in units of ˚C and liquid-to-gas ratio is dimensionless. Using these
independent variables, an approach temperature (˚C) is calculated as follows:
Approach = Coeff(1) + Coeff(2)•Twb + Coeff(3)•Twb2 + Coeff(4)•Tr +
Coeff(5)•Twb•Tr + Coeff(6)•Twb2 •Tr + Coeff(7)•Tr2 +
Coeff(8)•Twb•Tr2 + Coeff(9)•Twb2 •Tr2 + Coeff(10)•LGRatio +
Coeff(11)•Twb•LGRatio + Coeff(12)•Twb2 •LGRatio +
Coeff(13)•Tr•LGRatio + Coeff(14)•Twb•Tr•LGRatio +
Coeff(15)•Twb2 •Tr•LGRatio + Coeff(16)•Tr2 •LGRatio +
Coeff(17)•Twb•Tr2 •LGRatio + Coeff(18)•Twb2 •Tr2 •LGRatio +
Coeff(19)•LGRatio2 + Coeff(20)•Twb•LGRatio2 +
Coeff(21)• Twb2 •LGRatio2 + Coeff(22)•Tr•LGRatio2 +
Coeff(23)•Twb•Tr•LGRatio2 + Coeff(24)•Twb2 •Tr•LGRatio2 +
Coeff(25)•Tr2 •LGRatio2 + Coeff(26)•Twb•Tr2 •LGRatio2 +
Coeff(27)•Twb2 •Tr2 •LGRatio2
This object allows the user to specify model coefficients for use with the YorkCalc correlation shown
above. It is recommended that a broad set of cooling tower performance data be used to generate these
model coefficients. The data set used to create the model coefficients should cover the entire range of
water and air flow rate ratios and inlet air wet-bulb, range, and approach temperatures expected during
the simulation.
1.24.7.1 Inputs
1.24.7.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the variable speed cooling tower model coefficients.
CoolingTowerPerformance :YorkCalc
YorkCalc Default Tower Model , !- Tower Model Coefficient Name
-34.4, !- Minimum Inlet Air Wet -Bulb Temperature {C}
26.6667 , !- Maximum Inlet Air Wet -Bulb Temperature {C}
1.1111 , !- Minimum Range Temperature {C}
22.2222 , !- Maximum Range Temperature {C}
1.1111 , !- Minimum Approach Temperature {C}
1.24. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 965
1.24.7.2 Outputs
No additional cooling tower output variables are output when this object is used.
1.24.8 EvaporativeFluidCooler:SingleSpeed
Evaporative fluid coolers are components that may be assigned to condenser loops. The Evaporative fluid
cooler is modeled as a counter flow heat exchanger with single-speed fans (induced draft configuration).
The user must define fluid cooler performance via one of three methods: design heat transfer coefficient-
area product (UA) and design water flow rate, or standard fluid cooler design capacity at a specific rating
point or design capacity at non standard conditions. Regardless of which method is chosen, the design
airflow rate and corresponding fan power must be specified.
The evaporative fluid cooler seeks to maintain the temperature of the water exiting the evaporative
fluid cooler at (or below) a set point. The set point schedule value is defined by the field “Condenser Loop
Temperature Setpoint Node Name or Reference” for the CondenserLoop object. The model first checks to
see whether inlet water temperature is at or below the set point. If so, then the fluid cooler fan is not turned
on and all the flow goes through bypass. If the inlet water temperature is above the set point then the fluid
cooler fan is turned on to reduce the exiting water temperature to the set point. If the capacity control
is FanCycling, the model assumes that part-load operation is represented by a simple linear interpolation
between two steady-state regimes (i.e., fluid cooler fan on for the entire simulation timestep and fluid cooler
fan off for the entire simulation timestep). Cyclic losses are not taken into account. If the capacity control
is FluidBypass, the model determines the fraction of water flow to be bypassed while the remaining water
goes through the fluid cooler cooling media and gets cooled, then the two water flows mix to meet the
setpoint temperature. In this case, the fan runs at full speed for the entire timestep.
Evaporative fluid coolers consume water through evaporation, drift, and blowdown. The model can
be used to predict water consumed by the fluid coolers. For this purpose, the last seven input fields can
966 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
either be provided in the input or if nothing is specified then the default values for these fields will be
used. These fields provide the methods of controlling details of the water consumption calculations. The
user can specify connections to the rest of the building’s water system by providing the name of a water
storage tanks (i.e. WaterUse:Storage objects). The schematic of the system is shown below:
Where,
• h = Enthalpy (j/kg-K)
• Subscripts
1.24. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 967
• a = air
• w = water
• wb = wet-bulb
• in = inlet
• out = outlet
1.24.8.1 Inputs
1.24.8.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the fluid cooler.
1.24.8.1.9 Field: Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio
This numeric field contains the value for the ratio of actual tower heat rejection to nominal capac-
ity. This ratio is defined at entering water at 35C (95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F), entering air at
25.6C (78F) wetbulb and 35C (95F) drybulb temperatures. Historically this ratio has been set at 1.25
based on the assumption that the tower must dissipate 0.25 W of compressor power for every what of heat
removed at the chiller evaporator. The default is 1.25.
1.24.8.1.11 Field: Design Air Flow Rate U-factor Times Area Value
This numeric field contains the heat transfer coefficient-area product (UA) in watts per Kelvin cor-
responding to the design air and water flow rates specified above. If the input field “Performance Input
Method” is specified as “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”, then a UA value greater than zero
but less than or equal to 300,000 must be defined, or the field can be autosized. If autosized, a Plant Sizing
object must be defined and the design fluid cooler UA value is derived from the design load to be rejected
by the condenser loop and the design loop delta T (Ref. Sizing and Input for Design Calculations and
Component Autosizing sections), the fluid cooler inlet air dry-bulb and wetbulb temperature are taken
from the input. This field is only used for performance input method = ” UFactorTimesAreaAndDesign-
WaterFlowRate”. For other performance input methods, this field is ignored.
for Performance Input Method = UserSpecifiedDesignCapacity; for other performance input methods this
field is ignored.
The evaporation loss is then calculated as a fraction of the circulating condenser water flow and varies with
the temperature change in the condenser water. The value entered here is in units of percent-per-kelvin.
The evaporation rate will equal this value times each degree Kelvin of temperature drop in the condenser
water. Empirical correlation is used to calculate default loss factor if it not explicitly specified in the input
file.
EvaporativeFluidCooler :SingleSpeed ,
Big EvaporativeFluidCooler , !- Name
Condenser EvaporativeFluidcooler Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser EvaporativeFluidcooler Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
3.02, !- Design Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.24. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 971
1.24.8.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Fan Electric Power [W]
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.24.8.2.17 Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.24.8.2.19 Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.24.9 EvaporativeFluidCooler:TwoSpeed
The two-speed evaporative fluid cooler is modeled in a similar fashion to the single-speed evaporative
fluid cooler. The evaporative fluid cooler is modeled as a counter flow heat exchanger with two-speed fan
(induced draft configuration. See schematic diagram in EvaporativeFluidCooler:SingleSpeed section). The
user must define fluid cooler performance via one of the three methods: design heat transfer coefficient-area
product (UA) and design water flow rate, or standard fluid cooler design capacity at a specific rating point
or design capacity at non standard conditions. Regardless of which method is chosen, the design airflow
rate and corresponding fan power must be specified.
The evaporative fluid cooler seeks to maintain the temperature of the water exiting the evaporative
fluid cooler at (or below) a set point. The set point schedule value is defined by the field “Condenser Loop
Temperature Setpoint Node Name or Reference” for the CondenserLoop object. The model first checks
to see whether inlet water temperature is at or below the set point. If so, then the fluid cooler fan is not
turned on and all the flow goes through bypass. If the inlet water temperature is above the set point then
the fluid cooler fan is turned on at low speed to reduce the exiting water temperature to the set point. If
operating the fluid cooler fan at low speed does not reduce the exiting water temperature to the set point,
then the fluid cooler fan is increased to its high speed.
The model assumes that part-load operation is represented by a simple linear interpolation between
two steady-state regimes (i.e., fluid cooler fan at high speed for the entire simulation timestep and fluid
cooler fan at low speed for the entire simulation timestep, or fluid cooler fan at low speed for the entire
simulation timestep and fluid cooler fan off for the entire simulation timestep). Cyclic losses are not taken
into account.
Evaporative fluid coolers consume water through evaporation, drift, and blowdown. The model can be
used to predict water consumed by the evaporative fluid coolers. For this purpose, the last seven input
fields can either be provided in the input or if nothing is specified then the default values for these fields
will be used. These fields provide methods of controlling details of the water consumption calculations.
The user can specify connections to the rest of the buildings water system by providing the name of a
water storage tanks (i.e. WaterUse:Storage objects).
1.24.9.1 Inputs
1.24.9.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the fluid cooler.
1.24.9.1.7 Field: Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
This numeric field contains the sizing factor for calculating the low fan speed air flow rate as a fraction
of the high fan speed air flow rate. The default is 0.5.
1.24.9.1.13 Field: Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio
This numeric field contains the value for the ratio of actual tower heat rejection to nominal capac-
ity. This ratio is defined at entering water at 35C (95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F), entering air at
25.6C (78F) wetbulb and 35C (95F) drybulb temperatures. Historically this ratio has been set at 1.25
based on the assumption that the tower must dissipate 0.25 W of compressor power for every what of heat
removed at the chiller evaporator. The default is 1.25.
be rejected by the condenser loop and the design loop delta T (Ref. Sizing and Input for Design Calcula-
tions and Component Autosizing sections), the fluid cooler inlet air dry-bulb and wetbulb temperature are
taken from the input. This field is only used for performance input method = ” UFactorTimesAreaAnd-
DesignWaterFlowRate”. For other input methods this field is ignored.
1.24.9.1.19 Field: Low Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Sizing Factor
This field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the Low Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area
Value. The default is 0.6.
1.24.9.1.23 Field: Low Speed User Specified Design Capacity Sizing Factor
This field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the Low-Speed User Specified Design
Capacity. The default is 0.5.
for Performance Input Method = UserSpecifiedDesignCapacity; for other performance input methods this
field is ignored.
EvaporativeFluidCooler :TwoSpeed ,
Big EvaporativeFluidCooler , !- Name
Condenser EvaporativeFluidcooler Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser EvaporativeFluidcooler Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
9.911 , !- High Fan Speed Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- High Fan Speed Fan Power {W}
4.911 , !- Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.5, !- Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
autosize , !- Low Fan Speed Fan Power {W}
0.16, !- Low Fan Speed Fan Power Sizing Factor
0.002208 , !- Design Spray Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
UserSpecifiedDesignCapacity , !- Performance Input Method
, !- Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name
1.24. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 979
1.24.9.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Fan Electric Power [W]
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.24.9.2.16 Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.24. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 981
1.24.9.2.18 Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.24.10 FluidCooler:SingleSpeed
Fluid coolers are components that may be assigned to condenser loops. The Fluid cooler is modeled as
a cross flow heat exchanger (both streams unmixed) with single-speed fans (induced draft configuration).
The user must define fluid cooler performance via one of the two methods: design heat transfer coefficient-
area product (UA) and design water flow rate, or nominal fluid cooler capacity at a specific rating point.
Regardless of which method is chosen, the design airflow rate and corresponding fan power must be
specified.
The fluid cooler seeks to maintain the temperature of the water exiting the fluid cooler at (or below)
a set point. The set point schedule value is defined by the field “Condenser Loop Temperature Setpoint
Node Name or Reference” for the CondenserLoop object. The model assumes that part-load operation is
represented by a simple linear interpolation between two steady-state regimes (i.e., fluid cooler fan on for
the entire simulation timestep and fluid cooler fan off for the entire simulation timestep). Cyclic losses are
not taken into account.
1.24.10.1 Inputs
1.24.10.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the Fluid Cooler.
1.24.10.1.5 Field: Design Air Flow Rate U-factor Times Area Value
This numeric field contains the heat transfer coefficient-area product (UA) in watts per Kelvin cor-
responding to the design air and water flow rates specified above. If the input field “Performance Input
Method” is specified as “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”, then a UA value greater than zero
but less than or equal to 300,000 must be defined, or the field can be autosized. If autosized, a Plant Sizing
object must be defined and the design fluid cooler UA value is derived from the design load to be rejected
by the condenser loop and the design loop delta T (Ref. Sizing and Input for Design Calculations and
Component Autosizing sections), the fluid cooler inlet air dry-bulb and wetbulb temperature are taken
982 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
from the input. If “Performance Input Method” is specified as “NominalCapacity”, then this field must be
left blank since the model automatically calculates the fluid cooler UA based on the fluid cooler capacity
and nominal conditions specified in input file.
FluidCooler:SingleSpeed ,
Big FLUIDCOOLER1 , !- Name
Condenser FLUIDCOOLER 1 Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser FLUIDCOOLER 1 Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
NominalCapacity , !- Performance Input Method
, !- Design Air Flow Rate U-factor Times Area Value {W/K}
58601. , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
51.67 , !- Design Entering Water Temperature {C}
35, !- Design Entering Air Temperature {C}
25.6, !- Design Entering Air Wetbulb Temperature {C}
0.001388 , !- Design Water Flow Rate{m3/s}
9.911 , !- Design Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Autosize; !- Design Air Flow Rate Fan Power {W}
1.24.10.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Fan Electric Power [W]
• Zone,Meter,HeatRejection:Electricity [J]
1.24.11 FluidCooler:TwoSpeed
The two-speed fluid cooler is modeled in a similar fashion to the single-speed fluid cooler. The fluid
cooler is modeled as a cross flow heat exchanger (both stream unmixed) with two-speed fans (induced
draft configuration). The user must define fluid cooler performance via one of two methods: heat transfer
coefficient-area product (UA) and design water flow rate, or nominal fluid cooler capacity at a specific
rating point. Regardless of which method is chosen, the airflow rate and corresponding fan power at both
high and low fan speed must be specified. The Fluid Cooler seeks to maintain the temperature of the water
exiting the Fluid Cooler at (or below) a set point. The set point schedule is defined by the field “Condenser
Loop Temperature Setpoint Node Name or Reference” for the CondenserLoop object. The model first runs
at low speed and calculates the fluid cooler exiting water temperature. If the exiting water temperature
based on “low speed” is at or below the set point, then the fluid cooler fan runs at this speed or below this
speed. If the exiting water temperature remains above the set point after “low speed” is modeled, then
the fluid cooler fan runs at high speed to reduce the exiting water temperature.
The model assumes that part-load operation is represented by a simple linear interpolation between
two steady-state regimes (i.e., fluid cooler fan at high speed for the entire simulation timestep and fluid
cooler fan at low speed for the entire simulation timestep,). Cyclic losses are not taken into account.
1.24.11.1 Inputs
1.24.11.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the fluid cooler.
1.24.11.1.7 Field: Low Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Sizing Factor
This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the Low Fan Speed U-factor Times
Area Value. The default is 0.6.
1.24.11.1.18 Field: Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate.
The default is 0.5.
FluidCooler:TwoSpeed ,
Big FLUIDCOOLER1 , !- Name
Condenser FLUIDCOOLER 1 inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser FLUIDCOOLER 1 Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
1.24. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 987
1.24.11.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Fan Electric Power [W]
1.24.12 GroundHeatExchanger:System
The EnergyPlus ground loop heat exchanger is a condenser component which serves the condenser supply
side in addition to the cooling towers and other condensing components. Figure 1.99 shows the Ground
Heat Exchanger in the simulation environment.
The heat exchanger response is defined by a g-function which is a non-dimensional function that is
used to calculate the response to square heat pulses of different duration. (This function is not the same
as ‘G-factors’ referred to in the ASHRAE Applications Handbook). This continuous function is specified
by a series of data pairs (LNTTSi, GFNCi) where,
The g-function is different for each borehole field configuration (i.e. a 4 × 4 field has a different
response than a 80 × 80 field). It is also dependent on the ratio of borehole spacing to depth. g-
function values, for accurate simulation, have to be computed for each specific heat exchanger design.
The GroundHeatExchanger:System object will accept three different types of input in order to define the
g-functions necessary for the ground heat exchanger calculations.
2. Use one or more GroundHeatExchanger:Vertical:Single objects to define a vertical borehole field with
the boreholes located arbitrarily. EnergyPlus will compute and cache the g-functions for reuse again
in future simulations.
3. Use a third-party tool, such as GLHEPro, to compute the g-functions and pass them to EnergyPlus
using the GroundHeatExchanger:ResponseFactors object.
A small number of reference datasets containing example input data for 1 × 2, 4 × 4 and 8 × 8
configurations and for both standard and thermally enhanced grout are provided as well.
Definitions for the input fields are provided below.
1.24.12.1 Inputs
1.24.12.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the ground heat exchanger (GHE).
GroundHeatExchanger :Vertical:Properties ,
GHE -1 Props , !- Name
1, !- Depth of Top of Borehole {m}
100, !- Borehole Length {m}
0.114 , !- Borehole Diameter {m}
0.7443 , !- Grout Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
3.90E+06, !- Grout Thermal Heat Capacity {J/m3 -K}
0.3895 , !- Pipe Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
1.77E+06, !- Pipe Thermal Heat Capacity {J/m3 -K}
0.03341 , !- Pipe Outer Diameter {m}
0.002984 , !- Pipe Thickness {m}
0.04913; !- U-Tube Distance {m}
GroundHeatExchanger :Vertical:Array ,
GHE -Array , !- Name
1.24. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 991
The second example uses the GroundHeatExchanger:Vertical:Single object. The g-functions will be
generated automatically by EnergyPlus and cached for later use.
GroundHeatExchanger :System ,
Vertical GHE 1x4 Std , !- Name
GLHE Inlet , !- Inlet Node Name
GLHE Outlet , !- Outlet Node Name
0.00100944 , !- Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
Site:GroundTemperature :Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach , !- Undisturbed Ground Temperature Model Type
KATemps , !- Undisturbed Ground Temperature Model Name
2.5, !- Ground Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
2.5E+06, !- Ground Thermal Heat Capacity {J/m3 -K}
, !- Response Factors Object Name
, !- GHE Array Object Name
GHE -1, !- GHE Borehole Definition 1
GHE -2, !- GHE Borehole Definition 2
GHE -3, !- GHE Borehole Definition 3
GHE -4; !- GHE Borehole Definition 4
GroundHeatExchanger :Vertical:Properties ,
GHE -1 Props , !- Name
1, !- Depth of Top of Borehole {m}
100, !- Borehole Length {m}
0.114 , !- Borehole Diameter {m}
0.7443 , !- Grout Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
3.90E+06, !- Grout Thermal Heat Capacity {J/m3 -K}
0.3895 , !- Pipe Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
1.77E+06, !- Pipe Thermal Heat Capacity {J/m3 -K}
0.03341 , !- Pipe Outer Diameter {m}
0.002984 , !- Pipe Thickness {m}
0.04913; !- U-Tube Distance {m}
GroundHeatExchanger :Vertical:Single ,
GHE -1, !- Name
GHE -1 Props , !- GHE Properties
0, !- X Location {m}
0; !- Y Location {m}
GroundHeatExchanger :Vertical:Single ,
GHE -2, !- Name
GHE -1 Props , !- GHE Properties
5, !- X Location {m}
0; !- Y Location {m}
GroundHeatExchanger :Vertical:Single ,
GHE -3, !- Name
GHE -1 Props , !- GHE Properties
0, !- X Location {m}
5; !- Y Location {m}
GroundHeatExchanger :Vertical:Single ,
GHE -4, !- Name
GHE -1 Props , !- GHE Properties
5, !- X Location {m}
5; !- Y Location {m}
The final example uses the ResponseFactors object to provide third-party g-functions.
GroundHeatExchanger :System ,
Vertical GHE 1x4 Std , !- Name
GLHE Inlet , !- Inlet Node Name
GLHE Outlet , !- Outlet Node Name
0.00100944 , !- Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
Site:GroundTemperature :Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach , !- Undisturbed Ground Temperature Model Type
KATemps , !- Undisturbed Ground Temperature Model Name
992 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
GroundHeatExchanger :Vertical:Properties ,
GHE -1 Props , !- Name
1, !- Depth of Top of Borehole {m}
100, !- Borehole Length {m}
0.114 , !- Borehole Diameter {m}
0.7443 , !- Grout Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
3.90E+06, !- Grout Thermal Heat Capacity {J/m3 -K}
0.3895 , !- Pipe Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
1.77E+06, !- Pipe Thermal Heat Capacity {J/m3 -K}
0.03341 , !- Pipe Outer Diameter {m}
0.002984 , !- Pipe Thickness {m}
0.04913; !- U-Tube Distance {m}
GroundHeatExchanger :ResponseFactors ,
GHE -1 g-functions , !- Name
GHE -1 Props , !- GHE Properties
4, !- Number of Boreholes
0.00043 , !- G-Function Reference Ratio {dimensionless}
-15.585075 , !- G-Function Ln(T/Ts) Value 1
-2.672011 , !- G-Function G Value 1
-15.440481 , !- G-Function Ln(T/Ts) Value 2
-2.575897 , !- G-Function G Value 2
-15.295888 , !- G-Function Ln(T/Ts) Value 3
-2.476279 , !- G-Function G Value 3
-15.151295 , !- G-Function Ln(T/Ts) Value 4
-2.372609 , !- G-Function G Value 4
...,
12.365217 , !- G-Function G Value 70
1.112000 , !- G-Function Ln(T/Ts) Value 71
12.469007 , !- G-Function G Value 71
1.335000 , !- G-Function Ln(T/Ts) Value 72
12.547123 , !- G-Function G Value 72
1.679000; !- G-Function Ln(T/Ts) Value 73
1.24.12.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Average Borehole Temperature [C]
• HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Inlet Temperature [C]
• HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Outlet Temperature [C]
• HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Average Fluid Temperature [C]
• HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Farfield Ground Temperature [C]
1.24.13 GroundHeatExchanger:Vertical:Properties
This object defines several borehole parameters.
1.24.13.1 Inputs
1.24.13.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field indicates the unique name of the object.
1.24.14 GroundHeatExchanger:Vertical:Array
This object defines the borehole locations for a rectangular array of boreholes.
1.24.15 GroundHeatExchanger:Vertical:Single
This object defines a single borehole heat exchanger.
1.24.15.1 Inputs
1.24.15.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field indicates the unique name of the object.
1.24. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 995
1.24.16 GroundHeatExchanger:ResponseFactors
This object is used to provide third-party g-functions which are generated by other tools.
1.24.16.1 Inputs
1.24.16.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field indicates the unique name of the object.
• If the g-functions have not had a correction applied, then the g-functions are still based on a reference
of 0.0005, so use a value of 0.0005 in this field. EnergyPlus will adjust the g-functions internally to
create the properly referenced g-function.
• If the correction has already been applied, then the input g-functions are based on a reference to the
actual (physical) radius/length ratio, so enter the physical radius/length in this field. Entering the
actual value will nullify any internal corrections, which will avoid re-basing the g-function set.
The software GLHEPro has been making this “pre-correction” to the data sets since version 3.1 of that
software, so this input field should match the actual (physical) radius/length ratio.
1.24.17 GroundHeatExchanger:Slinky
The GroundHeatExchanger:Slinky use the g-functions to calculate the GHX temperature response, sim-
ilar to the GroundHeatExchanger:Vertical model, however for this model g-functions are automatically
calculated by EnergyPlus without the need of external software or data.
Horizontal slinky-loop ground heat exchangers (GHXs) consist of coiled tubing, with the individual
rings spread out along the direction of the trench either horizontally or vertically, as shown in Figure.
A schematic of a slinky GHX can be seen in Figure. Compared to conventional straight tube horizontal
GHXs, slinky loops have a higher tube density; hence, with the same cooling/heating loads, slinky-loop
GHXs require less land area and excavation work than straight tube HGHXs.
Figure: Slinky Ground Heat Exchanger Configurations.
Figure: Schematic of Slinky HX.
An example GroundHeatExchanger:Slinky object is shown below.
GroundHeatExchanger:Slinky ,
Slinky GHX , !- Name
GHE Inlet Node , !- Inlet Node
GHE Outlet Node , !- Outlet Node
0.0033 , !- Design Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.2, !- Soil Thermal Conductivity [W/m-K]
3200, !- Soil Density [kg/m3]
850, !- Soil Specific Heat [J/kg -K]
1.8, !- Pipe Thermal Conductivity [W/m-K]
920, !- Pipe Density [kg/m3]
2200, !- Pipe Specific Heat [J/kg -K]
0.02667 , !- Pipe Outside Diameter [m]
0.002413 , !- Pipe Wall Thickness [m]
Vertical , !- Heat Exchanger Configuration (Vertical , Horizontal)
1, !- Coil Diameter [m]
0.2, !- Coil Pitch [m]
2.5, !- Trench Depth [m]
40, !- Trench Length [m]
15, !- Number of Parallel Trenches
2, !- Trench Spacing [m]
Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach , !- Type of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object
KATemps , !- Name of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object
10; !- Maximum length of simulation [years]
1.24. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 997
1.24.17.1 Inputs
1.24.17.1.1 Field: Name
Alpha field used as identifying field for heat exchanger
1.24.17.2 Outputs
The following output variables are available.
1.24.18 GroundHeatExchanger:Pond
The pond heat exchanger model represents a shallow pond with submerged hydronic tubes through which
the heat transfer fluid is circulated. The model represents a ‘shallow’ pond in that no attempt is made to
model any stratification effects that may be present in deeper ponds.
This type of heat exchanger is intended to be connected to the supply side of a condenser loop, and
can be used with any type of plant loop. The pond may be specified as the only heat exchanger on the
condenser loop (as shown in Figure 1.102) or it may be connected in parallel with other condenser loop
heat exchangers (such as cooling towers, ground surface heat exchangers) as shown in the second figure
below.
Figure 1.102: Example of Pond Ground Heat Exchanger as only heat exchanger on condenser loop
1.24.18.1 Inputs
1.24.18.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the outside pond heat exchanger.
Figure 1.103: Pond Ground Heat Exchanger with other heat exchangers on condenser loop
GroundHeatExchanger :Pond ,
Pond 1, !- Name
Condenser Tower 1 Inlet Node , !- Fluid Inlet Node Name
Condenser Tower 1 Outlet Node , !- Fluid Outlet Node Name
2.0, !- Pond Depth {m}
1000.0 , !- Pond Area {m2}
0.02, !- Hydronic Tubing Inside Diameter {m}
0.025 , !- Hydronic Tubing Outside Diameter {m}
0.4, !- Hydronic Tubing Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
1.0, !- Ground Thermal Conductivity {W/m2 -K}
10, !- Number of Tubing Circuits
50.0; !- Length of Each Tubing Circuit {m}
1.24.18.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Pond Heat Exchanger Heat Transfer Rate [W]
1.24.19 GroundHeatExchanger:Surface
The surface heat exchanger model is to simulate hydronic surface ground heat exchangers. This includes
pavement surfaces with embedded pipes for snow-melting or heat rejection from hybrid ground source heat
pump systems.
The heat exchanger may be ground coupled or not. In the latter case the bottom surface is exposed
to the wind but not solar gains. This type of heat exchanger is intended to be connected to the supply
side of a condenser loop, and can be used with any type of plant loop. The surface heat exchanger may be
specified as the only heat exchanger on the condenser loop (as shown in the first figure below) or it may
be connected in parallel with other condenser loop heat exchangers (such as cooling towers, ground surface
heat exchangers) as shown in the second figure below.
Figure 1.104: Example of Surface Ground Heat Exchanger as only heat exchanger on condenser
loop
1.24.19.1 Inputs
1.24.19.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the outside panel heat exchanger.
Figure 1.105: Surface Ground Heat Exchanger with other heat exchangers on condenser loop
GroundHeatExchanger :Surface ,
SURFACE 1, !- Name
Outside Surface Construction , !- Construction Name
Condenser Tower 1 Inlet Node , !- Fluid Inlet Node Name
Condenser Tower 1 Outlet Node , !- Fluid Outlet Node Name
0.02, !- Hydronic Tubing Inside Diameter {m}
10.0, !- Number of Tubing Circuits
0.3, !- Hydronic Tube Spacing {m}
100.0 , !- Surface Length {m}
100.0 , !- Surface Width {m}
GROUND; !- Lower Surface Environment
1.24.19.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Top Surface Heat Transfer Energy per Area [J/m2]
• HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Bottom Surface Heat Transfer Energy per Area[J/m2]
1.24.19.2.9 Ground Heat Exchanger Top Surface Heat Transfer Energy per
Area [J/m2 ]
1.24.19.2.10 Ground Heat Exchanger Bottom Surface Heat Transfer Energy per Area
[J/m2 ]
These outputs are the surface heat exchanger top and bottom surface flux.
1.24.20 GroundHeatExchanger:HorizontalTrench
The horizontal trench ground heat exchanger object provides an alternate interface to the detailed Pip-
ingSystem:Underground:* objects. The same underlying simulation algorithm is utilized, providing a tran-
sient numerical simulation of soil with buried pipes and a detailed surface heat balance. The input syntax
is much smaller and useful for simple applications. For full flexibility, use the PipingSystem:Underground:*
objects to build a detailed simulation domain and piping circuit. For information regarding the simulation
algorithms, see the engineering reference document section covering the buried piping system objects.
Field: Name
This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the ground heat exchanger.
Field: Inlet Node Name
This alpha field is the name of the inlet node of this component on a plant loop, and must match other
topology definitions such as branch objects.
Field: Outlet Node Name
This alpha field is the name of the outlet node of this component on a plant loop, and must match
other topology definitions such as branch objects.
Field: Design Flow Rate [m3/s]
This numeric field is the designed flow rate for this heat exchanger; the plant loop solver will attempt
to meet this request based on flow and loop conditions.
Field: Trench Length in Pipe Axial Direction [m]
This numeric field represents the axial length of each pipe trench. Each pipe defined for this ground
heat exchanger will have the same length. If different pipes have different lengths, they must use separate
GroundHeatExchanger:HorizontalTrench objects with different lengths.
Field: Number of Trenches
This integer field is the number of trenches for this heat exchanger. Since each trench has a single
pipe, this defines the number of “pipe segments” for this overall heat exchanger. The total piping length
is then calculated as the trench length times the number of trenches.
Field: Horizontal Spacing Between Pipes [m]
This numeric field represents the horizontal spacing (pipe centroid to pipe centroid) between
pipes/trenches.
Field: Pipe Inner Diameter [m]
This numeric field is the inner diameter of the pipe. The same pipe properties are used for all pipes
in this heat exchanger.
Field: Pipe Outer Diameter [m]
This numeric field is the outer diameter of the pipe. The same pipe properties are used for all pipes
in this heat exchanger.
Field: Burial Depth [m]
This numeric field is the burial depth of each pipe, from ground surface to pipe cross section centroid.
The same pipe depth is used for all pipes in this heat exchanger.
Field: Soil Thermal Conductivity [W/mK]
This numeric field is the soil thermal conductivity.
Field: Soil Density [kg/m3]
This numeric field is the soil density.
Field: Soil Specific Heat [J/kgK]
This numeric field is the nominal soil specific heat, but is corrected for moisture content and in freezing
conditions.
1.24. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1007
1.24.20.1 Inputs
1.24.20.1.1 Field: Type of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object
The type of undisturbed ground temperature object used to determine ground temperature for the
farfield boundary conditions.
GroundHeatExchanger:HorizontalTrench ,
My Pipe Circuit , !- Name
Plant Supply Intermediate Node , !- Inlet Node Name
Plant Supply Outlet Node , !- Outlet Node Name
0.004 , !- Design Flow Rate
75, !- Trench Length in Pipe Axial Direction
2, !- Number of Trenches
2.0, !- Horizontal Spacing Between Pipes
0.016 , !- Pipe Inner Diameter
0.02667 , !- Pipe Outer Diameter
1.25, !- Burial Depth
1.08, !- Soil Thermal Conductivity
962, !- Soil Density
2576, !- Soil Specific Heat
0.3895 , !- Pipe Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
641, !- Pipe Density {kg/m3}
2405, !- Pipe Specific Heat {J/kg -K}
30, !- Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction {percent}
50, !- Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction at Saturation {percent}
Site: GroundTemperature :Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach , !- Type of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object
KATemps , !- Name of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object
0.408; !- Evapotranspiration Ground Cover Parameter
1.24.20.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
1.24.21 HeatExchanger:FluidToFluid
A fluid-to-fluid heat exchanger designed to couple the supply side of one plant or condenser loop to the
demand side of another plant or condenser loop. This heat exchanger is fairly general and can be configured
for use in any application where any two loops need to be connected together. The only constraints are
that that one side must be connected to the supply side of one loop and the other side connected to the
demand side of a different loop.
Because the heat exchanger is intended to be generic, its two sides are distinguished by the nature of
loop side being connected. One side is called Loop Supply Side to indicate the heat exchanger is situated
on the supply side of a loop. The other side is called Loop Demand Side to indicate it is on the demand
side of a loop. The heat exchanger is intended to act as a supply component for the loop connected to it
as the “Loop Supply Side” and as a demand component for the loop connected to it as the “Loop Demand
Side.” From the point of view of the heat exchanger model itself, the Loop Demand Side fluid serves as
the source/sink to supply heating/cooling to the fluid in the Loop Supply Side.
This heat exchanger can be used for a wide variety of applications including chilled water, hot water,
condenser, ground source, primary-secondary systems, etc. Heat transfer is calculated and reported using
a sign convention from chilled water applications where positive heat transfer indicates energy was
extracted from the Loop Supply Side and added to the Loop Demand Side.
Note: Only hydronic “plant” fluids are allowed (excepting Fluid Type ”Steam”), no air-side connections
are possible with this heat exchanger.
Various options are available for the heat exchanger model.
• The heat transfer between the two sides can be modeled using one of seven different models for
different types of heat exchangers.
• There are also eleven options for different ways to control the heat exchanger.
– One general type of control is OnOff where the flow through the heat exchanger is either fully
on or fully off.
– Another type of control is Modulated where the flow through the Loop Demand Side is
controlled to try and meet a target setpoint or load on the Loop Supply Side.
As of Version 8.0, this object replaces three separate objects that were available prior to
version 8.0 of EnergyPlus.
1.24. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1009
• The former HeatExchanger:Hydronic object corresponds to a situation where the Loop Demand
Side is the demand side of condenser loop, the Loop Supply Side is a the supply side of a chilled
water loop, the control type is “CoolingSetpointOnOffWithComponentOverride”, and the remote
override component is a chiller.
• The former HeatExchanger:Plate object corresponds to a situation where the Loop Demand Side
is the demand side of a condenser loop, the Loop Supply Side is the supply side of a second condenser
loop, and the control type is “UncontrolledOn.”
1.24.21.1 Inputs
1.24.21.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field provides the unique identifying name for this heat exchanger.
• UncontrolledOn. This control mode is applicable to situations where the heat exchanger is
passively running all the time and always transfers as much heat as possible between the fluid
streams. However there is one aspect of control in that it will only request flow on the Loop De-
mand Side when there is non-zero flow into the heat exchanger on the Loop Supply Side. This
control mode corresponds to that available in the HeatExchanger:Plate object prior to version 8.0.
1012 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• OperationSchemeModulated. This control mode is applicable to situations where the heat ex-
changer is controlled by an operation scheme (see objects called PlantEquipmentOperationScheme or
CondenserEquipmentOperationSchemes). When using this control mode the heat exchanger must
be listed in PlantEquipmentList or a CondenserEquipmentList and it serves as a supply compo-
nent. The operation scheme will dispatch a load request to the heat exchanger which it will try
meet by conditioning the fluid stream connected as the Loop Supply Side. If the heat exchanger
could exceed the load request, then the flow through the fluid stream connected as the Loop Demand
Side will be modulated to just meet the load request.
• OperationSchemeOnOff. This control mode is applicable to situations where the heat exchanger
is controlled by an operation scheme (see objects called PlantEquipmentOperationScheme or Con-
denserEquipmentOperationSchemes). When using this control mode the heat exchanger must
be listed in PlantEquipmentList or a CondenserEquipmentList and it serves as a supply compo-
nent. The operation scheme will dispatch a load request to the heat exchanger which it will use
as an on/off signal to decide if the heat exchange should run or not. If it runs, it will run at full
capacity and may exceed the load request.
• HeatingSetpointOnOff. This control mode is applicable to situations where the Loop Demand
Side can provide useful heating to the Loop Supply Side. A heating setpoint is obtained from
a node named in the following field. If the setpoints and inlet temperatures are such that heat
exchanger could transfer heat from the Loop Demand Side to the Loop Supply Side to meet the
heating setpoint, then the heat exchanger will run. The inlet temperatures must differ by more than
the value set in the field called Minimum Temperature Difference to Activate Heat Exchanger for
the heat exchanger to operate. If it runs, it will run at full capacity and may overshoot the setpoint.
• CoolingSetpointModulated. This control mode is applicable to situations where the Loop De-
mand Side can provide useful cooling to the Loop Supply Side. A cooling setpoint is obtained from
a node named in the following field. If the setpoints and inlet temperatures are such that heat
exchanger could transfer heat from the Loop Supply Side to the Loop Demand Side to meet the
cooling setpoint, then the heat exchanger will run. The inlet temperatures must differ by more than
the value set in the field called Minimum Temperature Difference to Activate Heat Exchanger for
the heat exchanger to operate. If the heat exchanger could undershoot the setpoint, then the flow
through the fluid stream connected as the Loop Demand Side will be modulated to just meet the
setpoint.
• CoolingSetpointOnOff. This control mode is applicable to situations where the Loop Demand
Side can provide useful cooling to the Loop Supply Side. A cooling setpoint is obtained from a node
named in the following field. If the setpoints and inlet temperatures are such that heat exchanger
could transfer heat from the Loop Supply Side to the Loop Demand Side to meet the cooling setpoint,
then the heat exchanger will run. The inlet temperatures must differ by more than the value set in
the field called Minimum Temperature Difference to Activate Heat Exchanger for the heat exchanger
1.24. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1013
to operate. If it runs, it will run at full capacity and may undershoot the setpoint. This control mode
corresponds to that available in the HeatExchanger:WatersideEconomizer object prior to version 8.0.
• CoolingDifferentialOnOff. This control mode is applicable to situations where the Loop De-
mand Side can provide useful cooling to the Loop Supply Side. This mode is similar to Cool-
ingSetpointOnOff except that it ignores any cooling setpoint and its control is based only on the
temperature difference between Loop Demand Side and the Loop Supply Side. The inlet temper-
atures must differ by more than the value set in the field called Minimum Temperature Difference
to Activate Heat Exchanger for the heat exchanger to operate. This control mode corresponds to
that available in the HeatExchanger:WatersideEconomizer object prior to version 8.0.
This field specifies the name of a plant system node located on loop attached to the Loop Supply
Side. This field is used and required when the previous field is set to one of the “Setpoint” control
types. The node must have a temperature setpoint placed on it by a setpoint manager (or EMS actuator).
If the previous field is set to DualDeadbandSetpointModulated or DeadbandSetpointOnOff then there
must be a setpoint manager that places both a high and low setpoint on the node named in this field. (see
SetpointManager:Scheduled:DualSetpoint).
1.24.21.1.15 Field: Component Override Loop Supply Side Inlet Node Name
This field specifies the name of an inlet node for the remote component that will be integrated with
this heat exchanger. This inlet should be on the supply side of a loop – typically chilled water inlet or
return for a chiller. This field and the next two are only used for the control type called CoolingSet-
pointOnOffWithComponentOverride.
1.24.21.1.16 Field: Component Override Loop Demand Side Inlet Node Name
This field specifies the name of an inlet node for the remote component that will be integrated with
this heat exchanger. This inlet should be on the demand side of a loop – typically condenser water inlet or
return for a water-cooled chiller. This field is only used for the control type called CoolingSetpointOnOf-
fWithComponentOverride.
HeatExchanger:FluidToFluid ,
CondenserLoop HX ,!- Name
ALWAYS_ON , !- Availability Schedule Name
CondenserLoop HX HX Inlet Node , !- Loop Demand Side Inlet Node Name
CondenserLoop HX HX Outlet Node , !- Loop Demand Side Outlet Node Name
autosize , !- Loop Demand Side Design Flow Rate
CondenserLoop Pump - HXNode , !- Loop Supply Side Inlet Node Name
CondenserLoop HX - ChillerNode ,!- Loop Supply Side Outlet Node Name
autosize , !- Loop Supply Side Design Flow Rate
CounterFlow , !- Heat Exchange Model Type
autosize , !- Heat Exchanger U-Factor Times Area Value
CoolingDifferentialOnOff , !- Control Type
, !- Heat Exchanger Setpoint Node Name
2.0, !- Minimum Temperature Difference to Activate Heat Exchanger
FreeCooling; !- Heat Transfer Metering End Use Type
HeatExchanger:FluidToFluid ,
SOURCE to TRANSFER HX , !- Name
AlwaysOnSchedule , !- Availability Schedule Name
SOURCE Demand HX Inlet Node , !- Loop Demand Side Inlet Node Name
SOURCE Demand HX Outlet Node , !- Loop Demand Side Outlet Node Name
0.003 , !- Loop Demand Side Design Flow Rate
TRANSFER HX Supply Inlet Node , !- Loop Supply Side Inlet Node Name
TRANSFER HX Supply Outlet Node , !- Loop Supply Side Outlet Node Name
0.003 , !- Loop Supply Side Design Flow Rate
CrossFlow , !- Heat Exchange Model Type
15000 , !- Heat Exchanger U-Factor Times Area Value
DualDeadbandSetpointModulated , !- Control Type
TRANSFER Supply Outlet Node , !- Heat Exchanger Setpoint Node Name
0.2 , !- Minimum Temperature Difference to Activate Heat Exchanger
LoopToLoop; !- Heat Transfer Metering End Use Type
1.24.21.2 Outputs
1.24.21.2.1 Fluid Heat Exchanger Heat Transfer Rate [W]
1.24.21.2.3 Fluid Heat Exchanger Loop Supply Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This is the system mass flow of fluid through the heat exchanger side connected as the Loop Supply
Side, in kg/s.
1.24.21.2.4 Fluid Heat Exchanger Loop Supply Side Inlet Temperature [C]
This is the temperature, in degrees Celsius, of the fluid entering the heat exchanger on the side connected
as the Loop Supply Side.
1016 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.24.21.2.5 Fluid Heat Exchanger Loop Supply Side Outlet Temperature [C]
This is the temperature, in degrees Celsius, of the fluid leaving the heat exchanger on the side connected
as the Loop Supply Side.
1.24.21.2.6 Fluid Heat Exchanger Loop Demand Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This is the system mass flow of fluid through the heat exchanger side connected as the Loop Demand
Side, in kg/s.
1.24.21.2.7 Fluid Heat Exchanger Loop Demand Side Inlet Temperature [C]
This is the temperature, in degrees Celsius, of the fluid entering the heat exchanger on the side connected
as the Loop Demand Side.
1.24.21.2.8 Fluid Heat Exchanger Loop Demand Side Outlet Temperature [C]
This is the temperature, in degrees Celsius, of the fluid leaving the heat exchanger on the side connected
as the Loop Demand Side.
1.25.2 Connector:Splitter
1.25.2.1 Inputs
1.25.2.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the Splitter.
1.25.3 Connector:Mixer
1.25.3.1 Inputs
1.25.3.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the Mixer.
Connector:Splitter ,
CW Loop Splitter ,
CW Pump Branch ,
Little Chiller Branch ,
Big Chiller Branch ,
Purchased Cooling Branch ,
Supply Bypass Branch;
Connector:Mixer ,
CW Loop Mixer ,
Cooling Supply Outlet ,
Little Chiller Branch ,
Big Chiller Branch ,
Purchased Cooling Branch ,
Supply Bypass Branch;
1.25.4 TemperingValve
This object is used for special cases where plant flow control is needed to make efficient use of thermal
storage. In certain solar hot water and heat recovery situations, a thermal storage tank may become warmer
than is necessary or allowable for safe use of the hot water. Although real installations of a tempering, or
anti-scald valve, would more commonly mix a new stream of mains water with the hot water to achieve a
desired outlet temperature, this is difficult to model directly within EnergyPlus because plant loops need
to be closed circuits. For many installations where the water entering the splitter is directly from the
1018 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
mains, such as make up water entering a water heater tank, the modeling provided with this object should
be thermodynamically equivalent.
The TemperingValve object models a temperature-controlled diversion valve. It models a valve on a
bypass pipe that can open to divert flow around one or more plant components. It can only be used on one
of two branches between a Splitter and a Mixer. The figure below shows the use of the tempering valve
with a Water Heater:Mixed component on “Stream 2.” The tempering valve acts to divert flow through
the branch it is on in order to adjust the temperature at the outlet of the mixer. If the temperature at
Stream 2 Source Node is warmer than the setpoint and the inlet flow is cooler than the setpoint, then a
controller determines how much flow should bypass the storagew tank to achieve the desired setpoint.
The TemperingValve is an Active component and the other path should have only Passive compo-
nents. Only two paths in the splitter/mixer can be used; bypasses are not allowed. No other Connec-
tor:Splitter and Connector:Mixer pair can be used on the supply side of the plant loop.
1.25.4.1 Inputs
1.25.4.1.1 Field: Name
This field should contain an unique name for each TemperingValve object
1.26. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION 1019
TemperingValve ,
DHW Anti -Scald Diverter ,
DHW Anti -Scald Inlet Node , ! Inlet Node Name
DHW Anti -Scald Outlet Node , ! Outlet Node Name
SHW Storage Tank Use Outlet Node , ! Stream 2 Source Node Name
DHW Instantaneous Boost Outlet Node , ! Temperature Setpoint Node Name
DHW Use Side Pump Outlet; ! pump outlet node
1.25.4.2 Outputs
Use output variables for System Nodes for flow and temperature results.
of the zone return air streams have been collected (if the loop has a return path). While in reality, there is
really only one point, for clarity within the simulation components and consistency with the other HVAC
loop sections, this point in the systems is defined as two points: one that resides with the zone equipment
simulation and one that is acted upon by the air loop simulation. Both node names must be entered into
the input file (if the loop has a return path), and both nodes must have unique names. Similarly, the end
points of the air loop that also correspond to the beginning points of the zone equipment loop must also
be defined. These consist of names referencing lists of up to three pairs of node names as shown below.
Up to three air loop outlets are allowed to accommodate the simulation of three deck systems.
1.26.1.0.1 Schedules And Availability Manager Regarding component schedules, the general
rule is don’t schedule any components except the supply fan and the corresponding availability manager(s).
Beyond that, every component should always be available and let the controls determine what runs or
doesn’t run. If a component other than the supply fan is scheduled off, then it will remain off even if the
night cycle manager turns on the system.
1.26.1.1 Inputs
1.26.1.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a unique, user assigned name for a single instance of an AirLoopHVAC object. Any other
object referencing this AirLoopHVAC will use this name.
1.26.1.1.11 Field: Design Return Air Flow Fraction of Supply Air Flow
This field specifies the design air loop return air flow rate as a fraction of the supply flow rate when
there is no exhaust flow. It may be used to set zero return air flow for a DOAS system or to model a
pressurized system where the return flow is a fraction of the supply flow. The return air flow rate will
never be greater than the current supply air flow rate multiplied by this fraction. It may be less if there is
unbalanced exhaust from any zones served by this airloop. The default is 1.0. If the air loop has no return
path, then this field is ignored.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:
AirLoopHVAC ,
Main Dual Duct Air Loop , !- Name
Dual Duct System 1 Controllers , !- Controller List Name
Dual Duct System 1 Schedule List , !- Availability Manager List Name
1.3 , !- Design Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Dual Duct Air Loop Branches , !- Branch List Name
Dual Duct Connectors , !- Connector List Name
Supply Fan Inlet Node , !- Supply Side Inlet Node Name
Return Air Mixer Outlet , !- Demand Side Outlet Node Name
Zone Equipment Inlet Node List , !- Demand Side Inlet Node Names
Air Loop Outlet Node List , !- Supply Side Outlet Node Names
1.0; !- Design Return Air Flow Fraction of Supply Air Flow
1.26.1.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Air System Simulation Cycle On Off Status
1022 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.26.1.3 Outputs
This section provides more detailed information on the reporting available for outdoor air ventilation. Six-
teen cooling and heating load variables and eight energy summary variables are available that report the
impact of system outdoor air on zone loads, system demand and total energy use. The representative air
system shown in the diagram below shows outdoor air (OA), return air (RA), supply air (SA) and mixed
air (MA).
The overall effect of outdoor air on the system shown above can be summarized by considering the
mixing box. In this system, part or all of the return air is replaced by outdoor air. The presence of any
heat recovery will already be taken into account and thus will automatically be accounted for by using
the outdoor air inlet conditions to the mixing box (point OA in the diagram) rather than actual outdoor
air conditions. Thus, the overall energy impact of outdoor air (ventilation) on a particular system can be
evaluated by multiplying the outdoor air mass flow rate by the enthalpy difference between the outdoor air
1.26. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION 1023
entering the mixing box (OA) and the return air entering the mixing box (RA’) as shown in the following
equation.
1.26.1.3.4 Zone Mechanical Ventilation Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
Reports the average outdoor air volume flow rate to any zone over the reporting interval, calculated
using a standard density for air. Standard density in EnergyPlus corresponds to 20ºC drybulb, dry air,
and nominally adjusted for elevation.
1.26.1.3.6 Zone Mechanical Ventilation Current Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
Reports the average outdoor air volume flow rate to any zone over the reporting interval, calculated
using the current density for zone air.
Four output variables each for cooling and heating report the impact of the ventilation air on the zone
load in the absence of ventilation air system interactions. The ventilation load output variables are:
Heating that would be provided directly to zone by ventilation air. Ventilation occurred with no zone
load.
2. Zone Mechanical Ventilation Heating Load Increase Energy [J]
The increase in zone heating load that would occur as a result of ventilation air introduced directly
into the zone. No system effects are accounted for.
3. Zone Mechanical Ventilation Heating Load Increase Due to Overcooling Energy [J]
The heating load that would occur once ventilation air met the zone cooling load and continued to
overcool the zone. No system effects are accounted for.
4. Zone Mechanical Ventilation Heating Load Decrease Energy [J]
The decrease in zone heating load that would occur as a result of ventilation air introduced directly
into the zone. No system effects are accounted for.
The output variables are calculated by comparing the zone ventilation load with the zone cooling
or heating load. ‘Ventilation cooling’ decreases the zone cooling load until the cooling load has been
eliminated. The remaining ‘ventilation cooling’ is reported as ‘overcooling’. ‘Overheating’ is calculated
in the same manner. The actual system operation, which determines whether or not an ‘overcooling’ or
‘overheating’ load actually results in increased energy consumption, is not considered in the calculation of
these output variables.
The ventilation zone load output variables are shown in Table 1.40. The variables report the maximum
potential “cost” or “benefit” of ventilation air introduced directly into the zone.
Ventilation Cooling Zone Mechanical Ven- Zone Mechanical Ven- Zone Mechanical Ven-
tilation No Load Heat tilation Cooling Load tilation Heating Load
Removal Energy Decrease Energy Increase Energy
Zone Mechanical Ven-
tilation Heating Load
Increase Due to Over-
cooling Energy
Ventilation Heating Zone Mechanical Ven- Zone Mechanical Ven- Zone Mechanical Ven-
tilation No Load Heat tilation Cooling Load tilation Heating Load
Addition Energy Increase Energy Decrease Energy
Zone Mechanical Ven-
tilation Cooling Load
Increase Due to Over-
heating Energy
The example syntax below shows the basic ventilation load variables reported on a monthly basis.
Reporting on a timestep or hourly level would produce a detailed report with variables intermingled
with the other output variables that might be requested in the input file.
Another method will more easily encapsulate the report:
Output:Table:Monthly ,
Ventilation Loads , !- Name
, !- DigitsAfterDecimal
Zone Mechanical Ventilation No Load Heat Removal Energy ,
SumOrAverage ,
Zone Mechanical Ventilation Cooling Load Increase Due to Overheating Energy ,
SumOrAverage ,
Zone Mechanical Ventilation Cooling Load Decrease Energy ,
SumOrAverage ,
Zone Mechanical Ventilation Cooling Load Increase Energy ,
SumOrAverage ,
Zone Mechanical Ventilation No Load Heat Addition Energy ,
SumOrAverage ,
Zone Mechanical Ventilation Heating Load Increase Due to Overcooling Energy ,
SumOrAverage ,
Zone Mechanical Ventilation Heating Load Decrease Energy ,
SumOrAverage ,
Zone Mechanical Ventilation Heating Load Increase Energy ,
SumOrAverage;
This combination will report the ventilation loads on a monthly basis in a HTML style report that can
be easily read in a web browser. Review the Output:Table:Monthly object for other methods of display or
further options on this report item.
OutputControl:Table:Style ,HTML;
Output:Table:Monthly ,
System Loads , !- Name
, !- DigitsAfterDecimal
Air System Total Heating Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Total Cooling Energy , SumOrAverage;
OutputControl:Table:Style ,HTML;
Output:Table:Monthly ,
Air Loop System Energy and Water Use , !- Name
, !- DigitsAfterDecimal
Air System Hot Water Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Steam Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Chilled Water Energy , SumOrAverage ,
1030 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
OutputControl:Table:Style ,HTML;
Output:Table:Monthly ,
Air Loop System Component Loads , !- Name
, !- DigitsAfterDecimal
Air System Fan Air Heating Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Cooling Coil Total Cooling Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Heating Coil Total Heating Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Heat Exchanger Total Heating Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Heat Exchanger Total Cooling Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Humidifier Total Heating Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Evaporative Cooler Total Cooling Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Desiccant Dehumidifier Total Cooling Energy , SumOrAverage;
1.26.5.11 Air System User Defined Air Terminal Total Heating Energy
Energy added to air loop by user defined air terminal units (Joules)
1.26.5.12 Air System User Defined Air Terminal Total Cooling Energy
Energy removed from air loop by user defined air terminal units (Joules)
OutputControl:Table:Style ,HTML;
Output:Table:Monthly ,
Air Loop System Component Energy Use , !- Name
, !- DigitsAfterDecimal
Air System Fan Electric Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Heating Coil Hot Water Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Cooling Coil Chilled Water Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System DX Heating Coil Electric Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System DX Cooling Coil Electric Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Heating Coil Electric Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Heating Coil Gas Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Heating Coil Steam Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Humidifier Electric Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Evaporative Cooler Electric Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Desiccant Dehumidifier Electric Energy , SumOrAverage;
1.26.8 AirLoopHVAC:ControllerList
The syntax for the AirLoopHVAC:ControllerList definition is shown below. As with other lists in Energy-
Plus input, the object title and identifying name are followed by type-name pairs. In this case, the types
are controller types. The order in which controllers appear on this list also define the priority as described
below. The identifying name refers back to the name recorded in the AirLoopHVAC statement.
1.26. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION 1033
1.26.8.1 Inputs
1.26.8.1.1 Field: Name
The user designated unique name of an instance of a Controller List. Any object referencing this
Controller List will do so using this name.
AirLoopHVAC:ControllerList ,
Dual Duct System 1 Controllers ,
Controller:WaterCoil , Main Cooling Coil Controller ,
Controller:WaterCoil , Main Heating Coil Controller;
1.26.9 AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList
The AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList defines the applicable managers used for an AirLoopHVAC or
PlantLoop. The priority of availability managers is based on a set of rules and are specific to the type of
loop. The output from each Availability Manager is an availability status flag. This flag can have the values
NoAction, ForceOff, CycleOn, or CycleOnZoneFansOnly (used only for air loops). The availability status
flags for the Availability Managers referenced by an air or plant loop are used to set the availability status
flag for each loop. For the air loops, ForceOff takes precedence: if any of the loop’s availability managers
are showing status ForceOff, the loop status will be ForceOff. Next in precedence is CycleOnZoneFansOnly,
followed by CycleOn, and NoAction. For the plant loops, there is no precedence among the Availability
Manager status flag values. Instead, the first availability manager giving a status flag value other than
NoAction sets the status for the loop. The Availability Managers are executed in Availability Manager List
order.
Special rules also apply for which managers may be listed in a Availability Manager list. The Hybrid
Ventilation Control Manager (object: AvailabilityManager:HybridVentilation) is a special type of manager
and is never specified in a Availability Manager List (it is used stand-alone for a specific air loop). All other
types of availability managers may be listed in the Availability Manager List used for AirLoopHVACs. For
Plant Loops, the Night Cycle and Night Ventilation managers (objects: AvailabilityManager:NightCycle
and AvailabilityManager:NightVentilation) are not allowed in the Availability Manager List.
1.26.9.1 Inputs
1.26.9.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object. This is referenced by AirLoopHVAC and
PlantLoop objects.
1.26. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION 1035
AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList ,
Collector Loop Availability Manager List , !- Name
AvailabilityManager :HighTemperatureTurnOff , !- System Availability Manager Type 1
High Temperature Turn Off Availability Manager , !- System Availability Manager Name 1
AvailabilityManager :LowTemperatureTurnOn , !- System Availability Manager Type 2
Low Temperature Turn On Availability Manager , !- System Availability Manager Name 2
AvailabilityManager :DifferentialThermostat , !- System Availability Manager Type 3
Differential Thermostat Availability Manager; !- System Availability Manager Name 3
1.26.10 AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem
The Outside Air System (object AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem) is a subsystem of an AirLoopHVAC.
It handles the mixed air portion of the primary air system: the system relief air, the outside air inlet,
and any components and controllers associated with the system relief air and outside air streams. From
the perspective of the primary air loop the Outside Air System is treated as a single component. As a
subsystem, it can contain one or more components and controllers.
The input for the Outside Air System consists of a system name, a controller list name, an equipment
list name, and an availability manager list name. The controller list simply lists, by type and unique name,
all the controllers in the subsystem. The controllers will be simulated in list order. The equipment list lists
all the components in the subsystem, by type and name. The equipment is simulated in list order. Finally,
the availability manager list gives the type and name of the availability managers used by the subsystem.
The equipment inlet/outlet must be sequential with no loops - the simulation can only handle a straight-
through air path, both on the primary air side and on the secondary air side, if any. Heat exchanger
secondary air inlets need to be independent of the primary air stream – usually relief air is used.
1.26.10.1 Inputs
1.26.10.1.1 Field: Name
The unique, user assigned name for a single instance of an Outside Air System. Any other object
referencing this Outside Air System will use this name.
1036 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
AirLoopHVAC:ControllerList ,
Reheat System 1 Controllers ,
Controller:WaterCoil , Main Cooling Coil Controller;
AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem ,
OA Sys 1,
OA Sys 1 Controllers ,
OA Sys 1 Equipment;
AirLoopHVAC:ControllerList ,
OA Sys 1 Controllers ,
1.26. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION 1037
Controller:OutdoorAir , OA Controller 1;
AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem:EquipmentList ,
OA Sys 1 Equipment ,
HeatExchanger:AirToAir:FlatPlate ,OA Heat Recovery 1,
OutdoorAir:Mixer , OA Mixing Box 1;
1.26.10.2 Outputs
The impact of using outside air/mechanical ventilation is described in the section: Outdoor Air Ventilation
Outputs.
1.26.11 AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem:EquipmentList
Used to specify the components in the outdoor air system. The components will be simulated in the order
in which they occur in the list.
The following HVAC equipment types are allowed as outdoor air system equipment. The component
matrix shows which coils and fans are allowed with which equipment models.
Figure 1.111:
1.26.11.1 Inputs
1.26.11.1.1 Field: Name
The user designated unique name of an instance of an Air Loop Equipment List. Any object referencing
this Air Loop Equipment List will do so using this name.
1.26.12 OutdoorAir:Node
The OutdoorAir:Node object declares an HVAC system node for outdoor air conditions. The program
automatically sets the air conditions at these nodes to correspond to the ambient environmental conditions
at the beginning of every timestep. The outdoor air node is typically used as the inlet air node to an
HVAC component such as the OutdoorAir:Mixer object. Multiple OutdoorAir:Node objects can be used
in an input file, however, duplicate node names are not allowed.
The Height Above Ground field is used to adjust the weather file air conditions, e.g., outdoor dry-
bulb and wet-bulb air temperatures, for atmospheric variation with height. This variation can become
a significant factor when modeling tall buildings. See the Engineering Reference section on Atmospheric
Variation for a description of the algorithm for variation of atmospheric properties with height. A blank
entry or a value less than zero for this field indicates that the height will be ignored and the weather file
conditions will be used.
OutdoorAir:Node and OutdoorAir:NodeList both set a node to outdoor air conditions. Out-
doorAir:Node modifies the weather file conditions if a height has been specified. OutdoorAir:NodeList
does not have a height input and always uses the weather file conditions without modification. The same
node name may not be used with both of these objects.
When declared in surface property objects SurfaceProperty:LocalEnvironment, in zone property
objects ZoneProperty:LocalEnvironment, or as an external node in the airflow network calculation
linking to a surface node AirflowNetwork:Multizone:Surface, the object can also be used to define
local outdoor air conditions for surfaces, zones or air loop components. The local outdoor air conditions
would be used in the EnergyPlus calculations for:
When used in the airflow network for wind pressure calculation, global environmental variables used
in the subroutines for wind pressure calculation, including outdoor air temperature, humidity ratio,
air density, wind speed and direction, would be overwritten accordingly with local data.
When used in these cases, optional schedule inputs of local ambient air conditions, including dry-bulb
temperature, wet-bulb temperature, wind velocity, and wind direction, can be defined in the optional fields.
When used in the airflow network for wind pressure calculation, the wind pressure coefficient curve name
and calculation details should also be defined.
1.26.12.1 Inputs
1.26.12.1.1 Field: Name
The unique name for this outdoor air node.
OutdoorAir:Node ,
OA Node 1; !- Name
OutdoorAir:Node ,
Floor 10 Outdoor air Inlet Node , !- Name
30.0; !- Height Above Ground {m}
OutdoorAir:Node ,
LocalOutdoorAirNode :0001 , !- Name
, !- Height Above Ground
OutdoorAirNodeDryBulb :0001 , !- Drybulb Temperature Schedule Name
OutdoorAirNodeWetBulb :0001 , !- Wetbulb Temperature Schedule Name
OutdoorAirNodeWindSpeed :0001 , !- Wind Speed Schedule Name
OutdoorAirNodeWindDir :0001; !- Wind Direction Schedule Name
NFacade_WPCValue , !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Curve Name
No , !- Symmetric Wind Pressure Coefficient Curve
Absolute; !- Wind Angle Type
Output:Variable ,
Floor 10 Outdoor air Inlet Node ,
System Node Temperature ,
Hourly;
1.26.14 OutdoorAir:NodeList
The program needs to know which HVAC system nodes are inlets for outdoor air. Knowing this, the
program can set the conditions at these nodes to the outdoor conditions at the start of each major timestep.
The OutdoorAir:NodeList provides the means for specifying which nodes are outdoor air nodes.
The input is flexible: there may be one or more OutdoorAir:NodeList in each input file. Each list
contains up to 25 names. The names can be the name of a unique HVAC system node, or the name of a
Node List which will contain the actual node names. Duplicate node names are ignored.
OutdoorAir:Node and OutdoorAir:NodeList both set a node to outdoor air conditions. Out-
doorAir:Node modifies the weather file conditions if a height has been specified. OutdoorAir:NodeList
does not have a height input and always uses the weather file conditions without modification. The same
node name may not be used with both of these objects.
1.26. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION 1041
1.26.14.1 Inputs
1.26.14.1.1 Field: Node or NodeList name
The name of an HVAC system node or of a NodeList object. There can be up to 25 names.
An example IDF:
OutdoorAir:NodeList ,
OutsideAirInletNodes ;
NodeList ,OutsideAirInletNodes ,
Outdoor air Inlet Node;
1.26.15 OutdoorAir:Mixer
The OutdoorAir:Mixer is the most common component used in an outdoor air system. The outdoor air
mixer has 2 inlet air streams: the system return air and the outdoor air. It has 2 outlet air streams:
the system relief air and the mixed air. This is a passive component. It takes the inlet mass flows and
conditions plus the relief air mass flow and calculates the mixed air flow rate and conditions (as well as the
relief air conditions). The inlet and relief mass flow must be set outside the component – most commonly
by an outdoor air controller. The OutdoorAir:Mixer can also be used in compound components such as a
fan coil unit.
Input for this object is very simple: a unique name plus the node names of the 2 inlet nodes and the 2
outlet nodes.
1.26.15.1 Inputs
1.26.15.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user assigned name for a particular outdoor air mixer component. Any reference to this
component by another object will use this name.
OutdoorAir:Mixer ,
Zone1WindACOAMixer , ! name
Zone1WindACOAMixerOutletNode , ! mixer outlet node
Zone1WindACOAInNode , ! mixer OA node
Zone1WindACExhNode , ! mixer relief node
Zone1WindACAirInletNode ; ! mixer inlet node
1042 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• Simulate zone pressures due to envelope leakage and forced air distribution during HVAC system
fan operation
• Simulate node pressures in a forced air distribution system during HVAC system fan operation
• Calculate multizone airflows due to forced air, wind, and surface leakage, including adjacent zones
and outdoors, during HVAC system fan operation
• Simulate distribution system airflows, including supply and return air leaks, during HVAC system
fan operation
• Simulate air distribution system node temperatures and humidity ratios during HVAC system fan
operation
• Calculate vapor diffusion losses of ducts during HVAC system fan operation
• Calculate sensible and latent loads on the surrounding zones due to supply and return air leaks in
the air distribution system during HVAC system fan operation
• Simulate zone pressures due to envelope leakage driven by wind when the HVAC system fan is off
or if no air distribution system is specified
• Calculate multizone airflows due to wind and surface leakage, including adjacent zones and outdoors
when the HVAC system fan is off or if no air distribution system is specified
• For airflow networks with a forced air distribution system, calculate zone sensible and latent loads
for two different supply air fan operation modes as required: cycling fan, cycling compressor (Cy-
clingFanAndCompressor) and continuous fan, cycling compressor (ContinuousFanWithCyclingCom-
pressor)
• When multiple forced air systems (AirloopHVAC) are present in the idf, all systems must be used
in the Airflow Network model.
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:ZoneExhaustFan
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientArray
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues
AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Node
AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Linkage
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Leak
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:LeakageRatio
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Duct
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ConstantPressureDrop
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Fan
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Coil
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:HeatExchanger
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:TerminalUnit
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:OutdoorAirFlow
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ReliefAirFlow
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage
• AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl defines basic run parameters for the air flow calculations
and specifies whether wind pressure coefficients are input by the user or, for rectangular buildings,
calculated by the program.
• The AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone object specifies the ventilation control that applies to all
of the openable exterior and interior windows and doors in the corresponding thermal zone. Surface-
level ventilation control can be used to override the zone-level ventilation control if required (see
AirflowNetwork: MultiZone:Surface object below).
Figure 1.112: Relationships among AirflowNetwork objects (right-hand side) and between Air-
flowNetwork objects and regular EnergyPlus objects. An arrow from object A to object B means
that A references B.
1046 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
One possible air flow pattern is shown in this figure. The actual air flow pattern in a particular timestep,
and the size of the flows, depends on many factors, such as (1) What is the wind pressure distribution seen
by the exterior windows? (2) Are the exterior windows open or closed, and if open, how far are they open?
(3) Are the interior doors open or closed? (4) What are the air temperature differences between zones and
between zones and the outdoor air (which affect buoyancy flows)?
Figure 1.113: Plan view of a simple air flow network showing a possible air flow pattern in which
all of the windows and doors are open.
Figure 1.113 shows a possible air flow pattern in which all of the windows and doors are open. Associated
with the external nodes are wind pressure coefficient distributions as a function of wind direction that are
input using two AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Wind Pressure Coefficient objects. The nature of the air flows
through the windows and doors is specified using AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening
and AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening objects. The Airflow Network model calculates
the flows each system timestep depending on various factors, including wind direction and speed, size and
vertical position of openings, outdoor air temperature, and zone air temperatures.
• AirflowNetwork_MultiAirLoops.idf
• AirflowNetwork_MultiZone_House.idf
• AirflowNetwork_MultiZone_House_OvercoolDehumid.idf
• AirflowNetwork_MultiZone_House_TwoSpeed.idf
• AirflowNetwork_MultiZone_LocalNode.idf
• AirflowNetwork_MultiZone_SmallOffice.idf
• AirflowNetwork_MultiZone_SmallOffice_CoilHXAssistedDX.idf
• AirflowNetwork_MultiZone_SmallOffice_GenericContam.idf
• AirflowNetwork_MultiZone_SmallOffice_HeatRecoveryHXSL.idf
• AirflowNetwork_MultiZone_SmallOffice_VAV.idf
• AirflowNetwork_MultiZone_HorizontalOpening.idf
• AirflowNetwor_PressureControl.idf
• CrossVent_1Zone_AirflowNetwork.idf
• CrossVent_1Zone_AirflowNetwork_with2CrossflowJets.idf
• DisplacementVent_Nat_AirflowNetwork.idf
• DisplacementVent_Nat_AirflowNetwork_AdaptiveComfort.idf
• EMSAirflowNetworkOpeningControlByHumidity.idf
• HybridVentilationControl.idf
• RoomAirflowNetwork.idf
1.27.4.1 Can Do
1. Air flow through cracks in exterior or interzone surfaces.
2. Air flow through cracks around windows and doors when closed.
3. Natural ventilation (i.e., air flow through open or partially open exterior windows and doors).
4. Zone level control of natural ventilation (all windows/doors in a zone that are defined with a com-
ponent opening object have identical controls).
5. Individual surface control of natural ventilation for a subsurface (window, door, or glassdoor).
7. Interzone air flow (i.e., air flow through open interzone windows and doors, and through cracks in
interzone surfaces).
9. Dependence of wind pressure on wind speed, wind direction and surface orientation.
11. Account for the effect of supply-air and/or return-air leakage on zone pressure when a forced air
distribution system is present and is operating.
12. When duct leakage is modeled and the HVAC system is on, interzone airflow or infiltration/exfiltra-
tion can occur due to changes in zone pressure.
13. Bi-directional flow through large openings. See discussion below under AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:De
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening, and AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleO
14. Calculate air flows and pressures in ducts or other components of a forced air distribution system.
15. Calculate zone loads when the supply air fan cycles on and off during a system timestep using the
CyclingFanAndCompressor fan operation mode (Fan:OnOff).
16. Determine the impact of zone exhaust fans on air flows, pressures, air temperatures/humidity levels
and energy consumption.
2. Air circulation and/or air temperature stratification within a thermal zone. For example, you should
not try to divide a high space, such as an atrium, into subzones separated by artificial horizontal
surfaces that have cracks or openings with the expectation that AirflowNetwork will give you a
realistic temperature in each subzone and/or a realistic air flow between subzones.
3. The model is restricted to eleven types of coils that can be in the air distribution system
(Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed, Coil:Heating:Fuel, Coil:Heating:Electric, Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed,
Coil:Cooling:Water, Coil:Heating:Water, Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry, Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWith
Coil:Cooling:DX:MultiSpeed, Coil:Heating:DX:MultiSpeed, and Coil:Heating:Desuperheater).
4. The model is restricted to two types of air distribution equipment terminal units (AirTermi-
nal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:Reheat and AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat).
5. Supply and return leaks are not allowed in an AirLoopHVAC. They can only be modeled in the Zone
Equipment portion of the air loop (i.e., return leaks may be modeled between the zone return node
and the zone mixer inlet or the zone mixer outlet and the zone equipment loop outlet; and supply
leaks may be modeled between the zone equipment loop inlet and the AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter
inlet node or the AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter outlet node and the zone supply node).
6. An air distribution system must be located inside the building (i.e., the ducts must pass through
zones within the building).
1.27.5 AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl
The basic run parameters for this model are defined in this unique object which has the following input
specifications:
1.27.5.1 Inputs
1.27.5.1.1 Field: Name
This is a unique character string associated with this instance of the AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl
object. At this time, only one AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl object can be specified in an input data
file (idf).
1.27.5.1.12 Field: Ratio of Building Width Along Short Axis to Width Along Long
Axis
This is the aspect ratio of a rectangular footprint. It is given by the width of the footprint along its
short axis divided by the width along the long axis (see Figure 1.114). If the footprint is square, the value
of this field is 1.0. Used only if Wind Pressure Coefficient Type = SurfaceAverageCalculation. The range
for this input is > 0 to 1, with the default value being 1.
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone data objects are used to calculate multizone airflows. This section describes
the input requirements for the following objects:
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone
1052 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Figure 1.114: Footprint of a rectangular building showing variables used by the program to calculate
surface-average wind pressure coefficients. The angle a is the “Azimuth Angle of Long Axis of
Building.” wshort /wlong is the “Ratio of Building Width Along Short Axis to Width Along Long
Axis.”
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1053
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone data objects are used to calculate multizone airflows. This section describes
the input requirements for the following objects:
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:ZoneExhaustFan
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientArray
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues
1.27.6 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone
This object allows control of natural ventilation through exterior and interior openings in a zone, where
“opening” is defined as an openable window or door. (Note that only window, door or glass door subsurfaces
in a zone that are specified using AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening, AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening or AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening
and have an associated AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object are considered to be openings). The
control will be applied in the same way to all of the openings in the zone.
This object is required to perform Airflow Network calculations. Note that ventilation control for all
openings is provided at the zone level as default and individual ventilation control of a surface opening can
be used to override the zone-level control (see the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object description
below).
NoVent: All of the zone’s openable windows and doors are closed at all times independent of indoor
or outdoor conditions. The Venting Availability Schedule is ignored in this case. This is the default value
for this field.
Temperature: All of the zone’s openable windows and doors are opened if Tzone > Tout and Tzone
> Tset and Venting Availability Schedule (see below) allows venting.
Enthalpy: All of the zone’s openable windows and doors are opened if Hzone > Hout and Tzone >
Tset and Venting Availability Schedule allows venting.
Constant: Whenever this object’s Venting Availability Schedule allows venting, all of the zone’s open-
able windows and doors are open, independent of indoor or outdoor conditions. Note that “Constant”
here means that the size of each opening is fixed while venting; the air flow through each opening can, of
course, vary from timestep to timestep.
ASHRAE55Adaptive: All of the zone’s operable windows and doors are opened if the operative
temperature is greater than the comfort temperature (central line) calculated from the ASHRAE Standard
55-2010 adaptive comfort model and Venting Availability Schedule allows venting.
CEN15251Adaptive: All of the zone’s operable windows and doors are opened if the operative
temperature is greater than the comfort temperature (central line) calculated from the CEN15251 adaptive
comfort model and Venting Availability Schedule allows venting.
One way of “tuning” the following modulation control parameters is to perform a sensitivity analysis for
winter and/or summer design days to determine what combination of values causes the biggest reduction
in zone air temperature fluctuations due to venting.
Note that the default values for the following fields are such that, if none of the fields are specified, the
default values are assigned.
1.27.6.5 Field: Indoor and Outdoor Temperature Difference Lower Limit For Maxi-
mum Venting Open Factor
See Figure 1.116. This field applies only if Ventilation Control Mode = Temperature. This value may be
from zero to less than 100 ◦C, with the default being 0 ◦C. The value for this field must be less than the
value specified for the following field.
1.27.6.6 Field: Indoor and Outdoor Temperature Difference Upper Limit for Minimun
Venting Open Factor
See Figure 1.116. This field applies only if Ventilation Control Mode = Temperature. This value must be
greater than 0 ◦C, with the default being 100 ◦C. The value for this field must be greater than the value
specified for the previous field..
1.27.6.7 Field: Indoor and Outdoor Enthalpy Difference Lower Limit For Maximum
Venting Open Factor
See Figure 1.117. This field applies only if Ventilation Control Mode = Enthalpy. This value may be from
zero to less than 300,000 J/kg, with the default being 0 J/kg. The value for this field must be less than
the value specified for the following field.
1.27.6.8 Field: Indoor and Outdoor Enthalpy Difference Upper Limit for Minimun
Venting Open Factor
See Figure 1.117. This field applies only if Ventilation Control Mode = Enthalpy. This value must be
greater than zero, with the default being 300,000 J/kg. The value for this field must be greater than the
value specified for the previous field.
Figure 1.115: Footprint of a rectangular building showing WF , the “Façade Width”, used by the
Single Sided Wind Pressure Coefficient Algorithm.
window opening control is performed and, the ventilation control defined in the Ventilation Control Mode
field will be overridden.
Note: The Occupant Ventilation Control object can be assigned to a zone (AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Zone) or a surface (AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface). When the object is assigned to
a zone, the Occupant Ventilation Control is assigned to the surfaces belonging to the zone automatically.
The surface objects must have an associated AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening, Air-
flowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening, or AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening
component specified in the field of Leakage Component Name. All output variables will be shown under
surface names only, and not under zone names.
Note: In order to establish an airflow network, each AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone object must have
at least two surfaces defined with AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface objects, so that air can flow from one
zone into other zones (or to outdoors) through the network (air mass flow conserved). In addition, for all
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface objects facing the same Zone (ref. BuildingSurface:Detailed), at least
two different environments must be defined for the other side of these surfaces (e.g., an external node and
an adjacent zone, two adjacent zones, or two external nodes).
An IDF example is shown below:
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone ,
RESISTIVE ZONE , !- Name of Associated Thermal Zone
Temperature , !- Ventilation Control Mode
WindowVentSched , !- Vent Temperature Schedule Name
0.3, !- Limit Value on Multiplier for Modulating Venting Open Factor
!- {dimensionless}
5.0, !- Lower Value on Inside/Outside Temperature Difference for
!- Modulating the Venting Open Factor {deltaC}
10.0, !- Upper Value on Inside/Outside Temperature Difference for
!- Modulating the Venting Open Factor {deltaC}
1058 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.27.7 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface
The AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object specifies the properties of a surface “linkage” through which
air flows. This linkage is always associated with a heat transfer surface (wall, roof, floor, or a ceil-
ing) or subsurface (door, glass door, or window) with both faces exposed to air. The linkage speci-
fies two connected nodes: two zone nodes defined in AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone objects based on
inside and outside face environment for an interior surface, or a zone node defined in an AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Zone object based on inside face environment and an external node defined in an Air-
flowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode object for an exterior surface. The associated leakage component
for this surface can be a crack (or surface effective leakage area) in an exterior or interior heat transfer
surface or subsurface, or an exterior or interior window, door or glass door (heat transfer subsurface) that
can be opened to allow air flow. The allowed surface air leakage components are:
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:ZoneExhaustFan
The two “opening” components are used to modulate openness based on required conditions.
The AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object allows a heat transfer surface or subsurface to have one
crack (or one surface effective leakage area object), or a subsurface (i.e., window, door or glass door) to
have one opening (detailed or simple).
An interior heat transfer surface (BuildingSurface:Detailed) whose surface name is used as the input
for the Outside Boundary Condition Object field represents a floor without ground contact and is not
allowed as an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface. A heat transfer surface defined in the BuildingSur-
face:Detailed:ExteriorNaturalVentedCavity is also not allowed.
When a non-rectangular subsurface is used, the model will automatically convert it into a rectangular
subsurface using equivalent width and height based on an entered choice from the Equivalent Rectangle
Method field or a default choice.
(3) This heat transfer surface determines the height of the linkage, which is used in calculating
buoyancy-related flow through the linkage.
Note: It is possible to define an interzone surface twice in EnergyPlus, once in each of the zones that
the surface separates. Previously this was a requirement of EnergyPlus (prior to version 2.0), but now
it is optional and the user also has the option of only defining the surface once (EnergyPlus defines the
second surface automatically within the program). For each interzone surface, use only one (of possible
two) interzone surface names in the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object for “Surface Name.” Do not
enter two AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface objects corresponding to the two possible interzone names.
This would cause the air flow through the surface to be counted twice.
The AirflowNetwork model uses a combination of factors to determine the actual opening area for a
window or door when it is venting. For example, consider a window that is 1.5m high and 2.0m wide (ex-
cluding frame). Assume that the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening for this window
has Type of Large Vertical Opening = 1 (non-pivoting window), Height Factor = 0.5 and Width Factor
= 0.8. Then when the window is fully open, the opening area = height of opening (0.5x1.5) times width
of opening (0.8x2.0) = 0.75x1.6 = 1.2 m2 . If the Window/Door Opening Factor is 0.75, then the opening
area = 0.75x1.2 = 0.9 m2 .
If, in addition, the window is in a thermal zone for which opening modulation has been specified (ref:
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone) and the multiplication factor due to modulation is 0.3 in a particular
timestep, then the actual opening factor that timestep = 0.3x0.75 = 0.225 and the actual opening area
that timestep = 0.3x0.9 = 0.27 m2 .
If this linkage is associated with an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack object, the following crack
air flow equation is used.
Where
Q is the air mass flow (kg/s)
CQ is the air mass flow coefficient (kg/s @ 1 Pa)
CT is the reference condition temperature correction factor (dimensionless). See AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface:Crack object.
∆P is the pressure difference across crack (Pa)
n is the air flow exponent (dimensionless)
The following fields control venting. They are used only when Name of Associated Heat Transfer Surface
is that of an openable exterior or interior window, door or glass door. They only apply to openings, and do
not apply to surface cracks, effective leakage area or zone exhaust fans. If none of these fields is specified,
or if Ventilation Control Mode = ZoneLevel, venting is controlled by the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone
object for the thermal zone containing the window or door (ref: AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone Data).
CEN15251Adaptive: The openable window or door associated with this surface is opened if the
operative temperature is greater than the comfort temperature (central line) calculated from the CEN15251
adaptive comfort model and Venting Availability Schedule allows venting.
ZoneLevel: Venting of the window or door is not controlled individually, but is controlled instead at
the zone level. This means that the venting is determined by the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone object
for the thermal zone containing the window or door (ref: AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone object). This is
the default value for this field.
AdjacentTemperature: This choice is used for an interior surface only. The openable interior window
or door associated with this surface is opened if Tzone > Tadjacent zone and Tzone > Tset and Venting
Availability Schedule (see below) allows venting, where Tadjacent zone is the adjacent zone temperature.
AdjacentEnthalpy: This choice is also used for an interior surface only. The interior openable
window or door associated with this surface is opened if Hzone > Hadjacent zone and Tzone > Tset and
Venting Availability Schedule allows venting, where Hadjacent zone is the adjacent zone specific enthalpy.
1.27.7.8 Field: Indoor and Outdoor Temperature Difference Lower Limit For Maxi-
mum Venting Open Factor
See Figure 1.116. This field applies only if Ventilation Control Mode = Temperature. This value may be
from zero to less than 100°C, with the default being 0°C. The value for this field must be less than the
value specified for the following field.
1.27.7.9 Field: Indoor and Outdoor Temperature Difference Upper Limit for Minimun
Venting Open Factor
See Figure 1.116. This field applies only if Ventilation Control Mode = Temperature. This value must be
greater than 0°C, with the default being 100°C. The value for this field must be greater than the value
specified for the previous field.
1.27.7.10 Field: Indoor and Outdoor Enthalpy Difference Lower Limit For Maximum
Venting Open Factor
See Figure 1.117. This field applies only if Ventilation Control Mode = Enthalpy. This value may be from
zero to less than 300,000 J/kg, with the default being 0 J/kg. The value for this field must be less than
the value specified for the following field.
1.27.7.11 Field: Indoor and Outdoor Enthalpy Difference Upper Limit for Minimun
Venting Open Factor
See Figure 1.117. This field applies only if Ventilation Control Mode = Enthalpy. This value must be
greater than zero, with the default being 300,000 J/kg. The value for this field must be greater than the
value specified for the previous field.
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface ,
Zn001:Wall001:Win001 , !- Name of Associated Heat Transfer Surface
WiOpen1 , !- Leakage Component Name
SFacade , !- External Node Name
0.5; !- Window/Door Opening Factor , or Crack Factor {dimensionless}
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface ,
Zn003:Wall003 , !- Name of Associated Heat Transfer Surface
Zone3 Exhaust Fan , !- Leakage Component Name
EFacade , !- External Node Name
1.0; !- Window/Door Opening Factor , or Crack Factor {dimensionless}
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface ,
Zn001:Wall001:Win002 , !- Name of Associated Heat Transfer Surface
WiOpen2 , !- Leakage Component Name
WFacade , !- External Node Name
0.5; !- Window/Door Opening Factor , or Crack Factor {dimensionless}
Temperature , !- Ventilation Control Mode
WindowVentSched , !- Vent Temperature Schedule Name
0.3, !- Limit Value on Multiplier for Modulating Venting Open Factor
!- {dimensionless}
5.0, !- Lower Value on Inside/Outside Temperature Difference for
!- Modulating the Venting Open Factor {deltaC}
10.0, !- Upper Value on Inside/Outside Temperature Difference for
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1065
1.27.8 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions
This object specifies the reference conditions for temperature, humidity, and pressure which correspond to
the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack object.
1.27.8.1 Inputs
1.27.8.1.1 Field: Name
The name of this Reference Crack Conditons object. This name is referenced by an AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface:Crack object.
1.27.9 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack
This object specifies the properties of air flow through a crack and the associated measurement conditions.
The following power law form is used that gives air flow through the crack as a function of the pressure
difference across the crack:
[ ]n−1 [
ρo νo ]2n−1
CT = (1.100)
ρ ν
where
ρ = Air density at the specific air temperature and humidity ratio conditions [kg/m3 ]
ν = Air kinetic viscosity at the specific air temperature condition [m2 /s]
ρo = Air density at the reference air conditions provided by the object AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:-
ReferenceCrackConditions specified in the field Reference Crack Conditions [kg/m3 ]
νo = Air kinetic viscosity at the reference air temperature provided by the object AirflowNetwork:-
MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions specified in the field Reference Crack Conditions [m2 /s]
Note: The correction factor shown above is use for this particular component as specified.
1.27.9.1 Inputs
1.27.9.1.1 Field: Name
This is a name for this AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack object. It is referenced by an Air-
flowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object.
1.27.10 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea
The effective leakage area (ELA) object is used to define surface air leakage. It has
five fields. The relationship between pressure and airflow may be expressed as:
√
ṁ = ELA ∗ Cd 2ρ ∗ (∆Pr )0.5−n (∆P )n (1.101)
where
ṁ = Air mass flow rate [kg/s]
ELA = Effective leakage area [m2 ]
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1067
1.27.10.1 Inputs
1.27.10.1.1 Field: Name
This is a name for this AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea object. It is referenced
by an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object.
Note: There are two common sets of reference conditions: Cd = 1.0 and ∆P = 4 Pa, or Cd = 0.6
and ∆P = 10 Pa
1.27.11 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening
This object specifies the properties of air flow through windows and doors (window, door and glass door
heat transfer subsurfaces) when they are closed or open. The fields are similar to those for AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:SurfaceCrack object when the window or door is closed, but additional fields are required
to describe the air flow characteristics when the window or door is open. These additional fields include
opening type, opening dimensions, degree of opening, and opening schedule.
The AirflowNetwork model assumes that open windows or doors are vertical or close to vertical; for this
reason they are called “Large Vertical Openings.” Such openings can have air flow moving simultaneously
1068 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
in two different directions depending on stack effects and wind conditions (for example, flow from inside
to outside at the top of a window and from outside to inside at the bottom). AirflowNetwork models such
two-directional flow, but only for vertical openings.
It is assumed that the air flow through a window opening is unaffected by the presence of a shading
device such as a shade or blind on the window. Also, the calculation of conductive heat transfer and solar
gain through a window or door assumes that the window or door is closed.
The AirflowNetwork model does not have a model for bi-directional flow through large horizontal
openings in exterior surfaces. For this reason, AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:Detailed-
Opening should not be used for exterior horizontal openings. The best modeling technique in
this case is to put an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack object in a horizontal surface and use a
large air mass flow coefficient. Crack flow is assumed to be uni-directional in any given timestep (but can
reverse flow direction from timestep to timestep).
For large horizontal openings in interior surfaces, see AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:-
HorizontalOpening.
A subsurface multiplier may be used to represent multiple subsurfaces and calculates total air flow
when the subsurface (window, glassdoor, or door) is either closed or open. The total airflow across the
surface is equal to the airflow based on the surface geometry multiplied by the subsurface multiplier.
1.27.11.1 Inputs
1.27.11.1.1 Field: Name
The name of this AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening object. It is referenced by
an AirflowNetwork:Multizone:Surface object.
For LVO Type 1 (rectangular non-pivoted windows and doors) this field is the extra crack length in
meters due to multiple openable parts, if present. “Extra” here means in addition to the length, calculated
by the program, of the cracks on the top, bottom and sides of the window/door.
For LVO Type 2 (rectangular horizontally-pivoted windows) this field gives the height of the pivoting
axis measured from the bottom of the glazed part of the window (m).
default value is 0.0. Note that the height factor applies to rectangular windows or doors where the height
is assumed constant along the entire width of the opening.
Figure 1.118: Window (or door) showing geometrical factors associated with an opening through
which air flows.
1.27.12 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening
This object specifies the properties of air flow through windows, doors and glass doors (heat transfer subsur-
faces defined as a subset of FenestrationSurface:Detailed objects) when they are closed or open. This Air-
flowNetwork model assumes that these openings are horizontal or close to horizontal and are interzone sur-
faces. The second and third input fields are similar to those for AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack,
when the window or door is closed, but additional information is required to describe the air flow character-
istics when the window or door is open. This additional information is specified in the last two input fields.
The airflow across the opening consists of two types of flows: forced and buoyancy. The forced flow is caused
by the pressure difference between two zones, while the buoyancy flow only occurs when the air density in
the upper zone is greater than the air density in the lower zone. This opening also allows for the possibility
of two-way flow when forced and buoyancy flows co-exist. This object’s openness can also be modulated
based on the same opening factor control as an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening
object. However, the opening factor is only applied to the subsurface width. The opening width is equal
to opening factor multiplied by the subsurface width.
A subsurface multiplier may be used to represent multiple subsurfaces and calculates total air flow
when the subsurface (window, glassdoor, or door) is either closed or open. The total airflow across the
surface is equal to the airflow based on the surface geometry multiplied by the subsurface multiplier.
1.27.12.1 Inputs
1.27.12.1.1 Field: Name
This is a name for this AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening object. It is refer-
enced by an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object.
1.27.13 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening
This object specifies the properties of air flow through windows, doors and glass doors (heat transfer
subsurfaces) when they are closed or open. The AirflowNetwork model assumes that open windows or
doors are vertical or close to vertical. The second and third fields are similar to those for AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface:Crack, when the window or door is closed, but additional information is required to
describe the air flow characteristics when the window or door is open. This additional information is speci-
fied in the last two fields. Compared to the object AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening,
which requires more inputs at different opening factors, this object needs comparatively less inputs. For
this reason it is called a simple opening. This opening also allows for the possibility of two-way flow
due to temperature and resulting density differences. Therefore, it is possible to have a positive pres-
sure difference at the top of the opening, and a negative pressure difference at the bottom (or vice
versa) when the neutral height is between the bottom and top heights of the associated surface. This
object’s openness can also be modulated based on the same opening factor control as an AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening object. However, the opening factor is only applied to the
subsurface width. The opening width is equal to opening factor multiplied by the subsurface width.
A subsurface multiplier may be used to represent multiple subsurfaces and calculates total air flow
when the subsurface (window, glassdoor, or door) is either closed or open. The total airflow across the
surface is equal to the airflow based on the surface geometry multiplied by the subsurface multiplier.
1.27.13.1 Inputs
1.27.13.1.1 Field: Name
This is a name for this AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening object. It is referenced
by an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object.
1.27.14 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:ZoneExhaustFan
This object specifies the properties of air flow through an exterior heat transfer surface with a zone exhaust
fan. The zone exhaust fan turns on or off based on the availability schedule defined in the corresponding
Fan:ZoneExhaust object. When the exhaust fan mass flow rate is greater than zero, the airflow network
model treats this object as a constant volume fan. When the fan is off based on the availability schedule,
the model treats this object as a crack.
When the fan is on, the air mass flow rate modeled for the airflow network is based on the value
defined in the MaximumFlow Rate field of the Fan:ZoneExhaust object. The airflow direction is from the
corresponding zone to outdoors.
When the fan is off, the following power law form is used that gives air flow through the crack as a
function of the pressure difference across the crack:
νo = Air kinetic viscosity at the reference air temperature provided by the object AirflowNetwork:-
MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions specified in the field Reference Crack Conditions [m2 /s]
Note: The correction factor shown above is used when the exhaust fan is off. The airflow direction is
based on the pressure difference between the zone and outdoors.
1.27.14.1 Inputs
1.27.14.1.1 Field: Name
This is the name for this instance of the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:ZoneExhaustFan ob-
ject. This name must be the same name defined in the Fan:ZoneExhaust object. It is referenced by an
AirflowNetwork:Multizone:Surface object.
1.27.14.1.2 Field: Air Mass Flow Coefficient When the Zone Exhaust Fan is Off at
Reference Conditions
The value of the air mass flow coefficient,CQ , in the crack air flow equation. It has units of kg/s at
1Pa. This value must be greater than zero. The value is used when the fan is off.
1.27.14.1.3 Field: Air Mass Flow Exponent When the Zone Exhaust Fan is Off
The value of the exponent, n, in the crack air flow equation. The valid range is 0.5 to 1.0, with the
default value being 0.65. The value is used when the fan is off.
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:ZoneExhaustFan ,
Zone3 Exhaust Fan , !- Name
0.01, !- Air Mass Flow Coefficient When the Zone Exhaust Fan is Off at Reference Conditions {kg
/s}
0.667; !- Air Mass Flow Exponent When the Zone Exhaust Fan is Off{dimensionless}
ReferenceCrackConditions ; !- Reference Crack Conditions
1.27.15 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode
External nodes in the AirflowNetwork model define environmental conditions outside of the building. These
conditions include wind pressure coefficients that vary from façade to façade and can be highly dependent
on the building geometry.
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode objects do not have to be entered if Wind Pressure Coefficient
Type = SurfaceAverageCalculation in the AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl object.
1.27.15.1 Inputs
1.27.15.1.1 Field: Name
The external node name is associated with a particular building façade. This name is referenced by
the External Node Name field of an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1075
1.27.15.1.4 Field: Symmetric Wind Pressure Coefficient Curve Specifies the symmetry
of the above named curve. The default is No, meaning that the curve will be evaluated from 0 to 360
degrees. Specify Yes for a curve that is symmetric about zero and is evaluated only up to 180 degrees. For
this type of curve, an angle of 270 degrees is passed to the curve as 90 degrees.
1.27.15.1.5 Field: Wind Angle Type Specifies which wind angle should be used to calculate
the wind pressure coefficient. The default is Absolute, meaning that the absolute wind direction angle will
be used. Specifying Relative means that the angle will be relative to the surface normal. For a surface
facing due east, the angle 0 corresponds to wind blowing perpendicular to and at the surface with absolute
direction 90 degrees, while 90 degrees corresponds to wind blowing parallel to the surface from the right
(facing outward) with an absolute direction of 180 degrees.
IDF examples are provided below:
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode ,
NFacade , !- Name
1.524 , !- External Node Height {m}
NFacade_WPCValue; !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Curve Name
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode ,
EFacade , !- Name
1.524 , !- External Node Height {m}
EFacade_WPCValue; !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Curve Name
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode ,
SFacade , !- Name
1.524 , !- External Node Height {m}
SFacade_WPCValue; !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Curve Name
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode ,
WFacade , !- Name
1.524 , !- External Node Height {m}
WFacade_WPCValue; !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Curve Name
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode ,
Horizontal , !- Name
3.028 , !- External Node Height {m}
Horizontal_WPCValue; !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Curve Name
1.27.16 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientArray
The reference height and wind directions are first specified under the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficien
object. The user may specify up to 36 different wind directions in ascending order. These are then
referenced by AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues objects defined for each
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode.
1076 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.27.16.1 Inputs
1.27.16.1.1 Field: Name
The name of this AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientArray object. This name
is referenced by each AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues object which, for
each AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode, gives the wind pressure coefficients at each of the
wind directions listed in the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientArray. This name
is also referenced by the AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl object, indicating that this AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientArray and the pressure coefficients in the associated AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues objects will be used in the air flow simulation.
1.27.17 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues
This object specifies up to 36 wind pressure coefficients (WPCs) for an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode.
These coefficients are defined for each of the wind directions defined in the unique AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientArray object. In the air flow calculation, interpolation of the
specified WPC values is done for time-step values of wind direction.
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues objects need to be entered only if the Wind
Pressure Coefficient Type = INPUT in the AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl object. If Wind Pressure
Coefficient Type = SurfaceAverageCalculation, this object is not required and is not used.
1.27.17.1 Inputs
1.27.17.1.1 Field: Name
The name of this WindPressureCoefficientValues object. This name can be referenced by multiple
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode objects.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1077
1.27.18 AirflowNetwork:OccupantVentilationControl
The AirflowNetwork:OccupantVentilationControl object provides control options with minimum opening
and closing time checks and opening and closing probability values. In general, the probability values
1078 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
could be a constant or a specific function. Due to lack of real data, two schedules are selected to represent
probability values. If real data are available, this object may be modified to adopt new data.
1.27.18.1 Inputs
1.27.18.1.1 Field: Name
This is the name of the object.
1.27.19 AirflowNetwork:ZoneControl:PressureController
The AirflowNetwork:ZoneControl:PressureController object is used to control a zone to a specified indoor
level of pressure using the AirflowNetwork model. The specified pressure setpoint is used to calculate the
required zone exhaust fan flow rate in a controlled zone or relief air flow rate in an AirLoop.
The object has a similar function as ZoneControl:Thermostat. When an AirLoop serves multiple zones,
the controlled zone will reach the specified setpoint, while other zones will not be controlled precisely.
1.27.19.1 Inputs
1.27.19.1.1 Field: Name
Unique identifying name for the AirflowNetwork:ZoneControl:PressureController.
1.27.21 AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Node
This object allows users to input multiple nodes in a zone. A single object represent a node. If there is
only one node per zone, then use the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone input object. The zone node is not
defined in this object.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1081
1.27.22 AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Linkage
The input object specifies a connection between two AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Node objects and an Ai-
flowNetwork component defined elsewhere. The object also allow users to specify a connection between
an AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Node and an adjacent zone defined in an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone
object. This object provides flexibility to define a linkage either in the same zone or in two different zones.
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening,
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening,
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack,
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea,
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack,
• AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea,
AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Linkage ,
IntraZoneLeftUpperLink ,
LeftUpper , !- Node 1 Name
EAST_ZONE_T , !- Node 2 Name
CR -1, !- Component Name
Surface_11_T; !- Surface Name
The previous sections of this AirflowNetwork model discussion describe input objects used for multi-
zone airflow calculations. The following sections describe input objects used for air distribution system
simulations. These objects work when control option “MultiZone with Distribution” or “MultiZone with
Distribution Only During Fan Operation” is defined in the AirflowNetwork Control field in the AirflowNet-
work:SimulationControl object.
The first section presents the input object for distribution system nodes. Although thermal zones
are required to perform air distribution system simulations, the thermal zones are already defined in the
multizone input section (described previously), so that there is no need to repeat the inputs for thermal
zones when modeling an air distribution system. The same is also true for surface air leakage. This section
has only one object: AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1083
1.27.23 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:DuctViewFactors
The AirflowNetwork:Distribution:DuctViewFactors object is used to represent the information needed for
simplified surface-to-duct radiation heat transfer. View factors from each duct object to each referenced
surface are provided by the user. EnergyPlus calculates the heat gain to the duct from the referenced
surfaces. If the object is included, radiation is calculated for the referenced duct; radiation is neglected of
the object is omitted.
1.27.24 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node
The AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node object is used to represent air distribution system nodes for the
AirflowNetwork model. The EnergyPlus nodes defined in an AirLoopHVAC are a subset of the nodes
used to simulate the distribution system using the AirflowNetwork model. For example, the inlet node
of a fan and the outlet node of a coil defined in an AirLoopHVAC must be defined as nodes using
the AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node object. A set of EnergyPlus Zone Equipment nodes is also a
subset of the AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Nodes. For example, zone inlet and outlet nodes must be
defined as nodes using the AirflowNetwork:Distribution: Node object. In addition, although mixers
1084 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
and splitters are defined as objects with inlet and outlet nodes within EnergyPlus, the AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Node object treats mixers and splitters as single nodes. The node objects are referenced
by AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage objects.
In summary, all nodes used to define an AirLoopHVAC (except splitters, mixers, and outdoor air
systems which are treated as single nodes) and its connections to a thermal zone must be specified as Air-
flowNetwork:Distribution:Nodes. If distribution system air leaks are to be modeled, additional AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Nodes may be defined along with AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Components (e.g., leak
or leak ratio) to define the air leakage characteristics.
Note: Supply and return leaks are not allowed in an AirLoopHVAC. They can only be modeled in
the Zone Equipment Loop (i.e., return leaks may be modeled between the zone return node and the
zone mixer inlet or the zone mixer outlet and the zone equipment loop outlet; and supply leaks may be
modeled between the zone equipment loop inlet and the AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter inlet node or the
AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter outlet node and the zone supply node).
1.27.24.1 Inputs
1.27.24.1.1 Field: Name
The name of an air distribution system node. This node name is referenced by an AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Linkage and in the output listing. Each node should have a unique name within the
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node objects (however, the node name may be used elsewhere as regular
EnergyPlus node names such as the fan inlet node or coil outlet node).
• OutdoorAir: Represents an external node name defined in the OutdoorAir:Node object when the
AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem and an exhaust energy recovery system (air-to-air heat exchanger)
are used.
Note: Both the OutdoorAir:NodeList and OutdoorAir:Node node types represent a node to outdoor
air conditions. Either one of these node types can be used to represent an external node when an air-
to-air heat exchanger is used to recover energy from the exhaust air stream as part of an AirLoopH-
VAC:OutdoorAirSystem object. Node type OAMixerOutdoorAirStreamNode does not represent an ex-
ternal node when an OutdoorAir:NodeList or OutdoorAir:Node object is specified. If no exhaust heat
recovery system (i.e., air-to-air heat exchanger) is specified in the AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem, the
node type OAMixerOutdoorAirStreamNode represents an external node.
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node ,
SupplyMainNode , !- Name
, !- Component Name or Node Name
Other , !- Component Object Type or Node Type
3.0; !- Node Height {m}
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node ,
MainSplitterNode , !- Name
, !- Component Name or Node Name
AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter , !- Component Object Type or Node Type
3.0; !- Node Height {m}
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node ,
MainSplitterNode , !- Name of Node
, !- Name of Associated EnergyPlus Node or Object
AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter , !- EnergyPlus Object or Node Type
3.0; !- Node Height {m}
The next section describes AirflowNetwork Distribution Components, with 7 available types listed
below. All required fields for each component represent a relationship between pressure difference and
airflow. The components are referenced in AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage objects.
• AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Leak
• AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:LeakageRatio
• AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Duct
• AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Fan
• AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Coil
1086 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:HeatExchanger
• AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:TerminalUnit
• AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ConstantPressureDrop
1.27.25 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Leak
This component may be also called a power law component and is used to represent a supply or return
air leak in an air distribution system. Its relationship between pressure difference and airflow may be
expressed as:
ṁ = CT C(∆P )n (1.105)
where
ṁ = Air mass flow rate through the component [kg/s]
C = Air mass flow coefficient (kg/s at 1 Pa pressure difference)
∆P = Total pressure loss across the element [Pa]
n = Air mass flow exponent
CT = Temperature correction factor
[ ]n−1 [
ρo νo ]2n−1
CT = (1.106)
ρ ν
where
ρ = Air density at the specific air temperature and humidity ratio conditions [kg/m3 ]
ν = Air kinetic viscosity at the specific air temperature condition [m2 /s]
ρo = Air density at air conditions of 20°C, 0 kg/kg and 101325 Pa [kg/m3 ]
νo = Air kinetic viscosity at an air temperature of 20°C [m2 /s]
Note: The correction factor shown above is use for this particular component as specified.
1.27.25.1 Inputs
1.27.25.1.1 Field: Name
A unique name identifying a supply or return air leak in an air distribution system. This unique name
will be referenced by an AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage object to represent a component leak.
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Leak ,
ZoneSupplyLeak , !- Name of Supply or Return Leak
0.01, !- Air Mass Flow Coefficient {kg/s}
0.65; !- Air Mass Flow Exponent {dimensionless}
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1087
1.27.26 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:LeakageRatio
The leakage ratio component is generally used to define supply and return leaks with respect to a constant
fan flow. This object requires 5 inputs. The relationship between pressure and airflow may be expressed
as a power law element:
where
ρ = Air density [kg/m3 ]
∆P = Total pressure loss across the element [Pa]
n = Air mass flow exponent
Cequ = Equivalent air mass flow coefficient
where
ρ = Effective leakage ratio [dimensionless]
Qr = Maximum airflow rate [m3 /s]
∆Pr = Reference pressure difference [Pa]
n = Air mass flow exponent [dimensionless]
The above calculation is valid only for a HVAC system using a constant volume supply fan:
Fan:ConstantVolume or Fan:OnOff.
1.27.26.1 Inputs
1.27.26.1.1 Field: Name
A unique name identifying a supply or return air leak (ratio with respect to the constant volume
fan flow rate) in an air distribution system. This unique name will be referenced in an AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Linkage object to represent a component.
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:LeakageRatio ,
Zone1SupplyLeakELA , !- Name of Effective Leakage Ratio
0.043527 , !- Effective Leakage Ratio {dimensionless}
1.0, !- Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s}
20.0, !- Reference Pressure Difference {Pa}
0.65; !- Air Mass Flow Exponent {dimensionless}
1.27.27 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Duct
This object represents a duct component and requires 9 input fields, one alpha field and 8 numeric fields.
An additional two fields can be used to define the convection coefficients on the inner and outer surfaces of
the duct. The relationship between pressure and airflow across the component may be expressed as (2001
ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, Chapter 34):
√
2ρA2 ∆P
ṁ = ∑ (1.109)
f L/D + Cd
where
ṁ = Mass flow rate of air through the component [kg/s]
r = Air density [kg/m3 ]
A = Cross sectional area [m2 ]
∆P = Total pressure loss across the component [Pa]
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1089
1.27.27.1 Inputs
1.27.27.1.1 Field: Name
A unique name for an AirflowNetwork duct component in an air distribution system. This unique name
will be referenced by an AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage object to represent a component.
4A
Dh = (1.111)
P
where
Dh = Hydraulic diameter [m]
A = Duct cross sectional area [m2 ]
P = Perimeter of cross section [m]
1.27.27.1.7 Field: Heat Transmittance Coefficient (U-Factor) for Duct Wall Construc-
tion
This numeric field is defines the heat transmittance coefficient (U value, W/m2 -K) for the duct wall
construction. Film coefficents are calculated automatically, unless directly specified below.
1090 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Duct ,
MainTruck1 , !- Name of Duct Component
3.0, !- Duct Length {m}
0.6, !- Hydraulic Diameter {m}
0.2827 , !- Cross Section Area {m2}
0.0009 , !- Surface Roughness {m}
0.01, !- Coefficient for local dynamic loss due to fitting {dimensionless}
0.772 , !- Heat Transmittance Coefficient (U-Factor) for Duct Wall Construction {W
/m2 -K}
0.0001; !- Overall moisture transmittance coefficient from air to air {kg/m2}
1.27.28 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Fan
This component represents a constant volume fan in the air distribution system (AirLoopHVAC).
The air flow rate and air conditions (temperature and humidity) are obtained from the associated
Fan:ConstantVolume, Fan:OnOff, or Fan:VariableVolume object.
1.27.28.1 Inputs
1.27.28.1.1 Field: Fan Name
The name identifying an AirflowNetwork constant volume fan in an air distribution system. This name
must be the same as the name of the associated Fan:ConstantVolume, Fan:OnOff or Fan:VariableVolume
object. This name will be referenced by an AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage object to represent a
component.
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Fan ,
Supply Fan 1, !- Name of Constant Volume Fan
Fan:ConstantVolume; !- Supply fan type
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1091
1.27.29 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Coil
This component represents a cooling or heating coil. The main purpose for this object is to get calculated
values (air flow and temperature/humidity conditions) from the associated coil models.
1.27.29.1 Inputs
1.27.29.1.1 Field: Coil Name
The name identifying an AirflowNetwork cooling coil or heating coil defined in an air loop. This
name must be the same name as the associated coil object. This unique name will be referenced by an
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage object to represent a component.
• Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed
• Coil:Cooling:Water
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry
• Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWithHumidityControlMode
• Coil:Cooling:DX:MultiSpeed
• Coil:Heating:DX:MultiSpeed
• Coil:Heating:Desuperheater
4A
Dh = (1.112)
P
where
Dh = Hydraulic diameter [m]
A = Duct cross section area [m2 ]
P = Perimeter of cross section [m]
For this component, the relationship between airflow and pressure is similar to the component Air-
flowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Duct. However, the model assumes very small surface roughness
1092 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
(10−4 ) and no local dynamic loss due to fittings for this component. Therefore, this component only
requires two numerical fields. Heat and moisture exchange from surroundings is ignored.
Note: Make sure that the volumetric air flow rates for the fan, coils, and parent components (e.g.,
unitary system or furnace) are the same so that fan energy and air distribution system losses/gains are
properly calculated.
An IDF example is provided below:
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Coil ,
ACDXCoil 1, !- Name of Associated EnergyPlus Coil
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed , !- EnergyPlus Coil Type
0.1, !- Air Path Length {m}
1.00; !- Air Path Hydraulic Diameter {m}
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Coil ,
HP Heating Coil 1, !- Name of Associated EnergyPlus Coil
Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed , !- EnergyPlus Coil Type
0.1, !- Air Path Length {m}
1.00; !- Air Path Hydraulic Diameter {m}
1.27.30 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:HeatExchanger
This component represents an air-to-air heat exchanger typically used in combination with a cooling coil to
enhance dehumidification or in an outside air system to recover energy from exhaust air to pretreat incom-
ing outdoor ventilation air. The cooling coils with enhanced dehumidification are defined in the two objects
CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted and CoilSystem:Cooling:Water:HeatExchangerAssisted
using one of three heat exchanger objects specified below. The exhaust air energy recovery system also
has the same restriction using the one of three heat exchanger objects. The main purpose for this object
is to obtain calculated values (air flow and temperature/humidity conditions) from the associated heat
exchanger models for the airflow network calculations.
1.27.30.1 Inputs
1.27.30.1.1 Field: Heat Exchanger Name
The name identifying an AirflowNetwork heat exchanger defined in an air loop. This name must be
the same name that is used in the associated heat exchanger object. This unique name will be referenced
by an AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage object to represent a component.
• HeatExchanger:AirToAir:FlatPlate
• HeatExchanger:AirToAir:SensibleAndLatent
• HeatExchanger:Desiccant:BalancedFlow
4A
Dh = (1.113)
P
where
Dh = Hydraulic diameter [m]
A = Duct cross section area [m2 ]
P = Perimeter of cross section [m]
For this component, the relationship between airflow and pressure is similar to the component Air-
flowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Duct. However, the model assumes very small surface roughness
(10−4 ) and no local dynamic loss due to fittings for this component. Therefore, this component only
requires two numerical fields. Heat and moisture exchange from surroundings are ignored.
Note: When a heat exchanger is used as a component of either CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted
or CoilSystem:Cooling:Water:HeatExchangerAssisted, the heat exchanger acts as two components in an
air primary loop. For example, an air-to-air heat exchanger has a component connected to the supply air
side (equivalent to a supply coil) and a component connected to exhaust air side (equivalent to an exhaust
coil). The desiccant heat exchanger has a component connected to regeneration air side (equivalent to
a regeneration air coil) and a component connected to process air side (equivalent to a process air coil).
Therefore, each air-to-air heat exchanger used in this configuration requires two linkage objects (instead
of only one linkage object as required for other AirflowNetwork components).
When a heat exchanger is used in an exhaust air energy recovery system (i.e., in an AirLoopH-
VAC:OutdoorAirSystem object to recover waste heat from exhaust air to pretreat incoming outdoor venti-
lation air), the heat exchanger is treated as a single component. The AirflowNetwork model only connects
the two nodes associated with the incoming outdoor ventilation air, while the two exhaust nodes are not de-
fined as part of the AirflowNetwork model. Therefore, each heat exchanger component used in an exhaust
air energy recovery system has only one linkage object, similar to AirflowNetwork coil components.
An IDF example is provided below:
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:HeatExchanger ,
OA Heat Recovery 1, !- HeatExchanger Name
HeatExchanger:AirToAir:SensibleAndLatent , !- HeatExchanger Object Type
0.1, !- Air Path Length {m}
1.00; !- Air Path Hydraulic Diameter {m}
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:HeatExchanger ,
Desiccant Heat Exchanger 1, !- HeatExchanger Name
HeatExchanger:Desiccant:BalancedFlow , !- HeatExchanger Object Type
0.1, !- Air Path Length {m}
1.00; !- Air Path Hydraulic Diameter {m}
1.27.31 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:TerminalUnit
This component represents a terminal unit for reheating the incoming supply air. The main purpose is to
get calculated values from the terminal unit models.
1.27.31.1 Inputs
1.27.31.1.1 Field: Terminal Unit Name
1094 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
A name identifying an AirflowNetwork terminal unit defined in a zone equipment list. This name
must be the same as the associated terminal unit object. This unique name will be referenced by an
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage object to represent a component.
4A
Dh = (1.114)
P
where
Dh = Hydraulic diameter [m]
A = Duct cross section area [m2 ]
P = Perimeter of cross section [m]
It should be noted that the relationship for this component between airflow and pressure is similar
to the component AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Duct. However, the model assumes very small
surface roughness (10−4 ) and no local dynamic loss due to fittings for this component. Therefore, this
component only requires two numerical fields. Heat and moisture exchange from surroundings is ignored.
Note: The AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:TerminalUnit object is used to represent an
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:Reheat or an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat object in an
AirflowNetwork simulation. The AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:TerminalUnit should not be
used to represent any other air terminal unit types. When the ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList object specifies
an Air:Terminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled object, the AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Duct object
should be used instead.
The AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat object has two components: a damper and a reheat
coil. When the AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat type is used, two objects of AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Linkage have to be used to make two links, one of which is a link to connect
two nodes for a damper, and the other is a link to connect two nodes for a reheat coil.
When a VAV system is used with Supply Fan Object Type = Fan:VariableVolume in the Air-
flowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Fan object, the type of all terminals has to be AirTermi-
nal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat. The object of Air:Terminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled is not allowed.
An IDF example is provided below:
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:TerminalUnit ,
Reheat Zone 1, !- Name of Associated Energyplus Terminal Unit
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:Reheat , !- EnergyPlus Terminal Unit Type
0.1, !- Air Path Length {m}
0.44; !- Air Path Hydraulic Diameter {m}
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1095
1.27.32 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ConstantPressureDrop
This component represents a constant pressure drop component. It is generally used to simulate a constant
pressure drop filter. The mathematical equation may be written as:
∆P = const (1.115)
1.27.32.1 Inputs
1.27.32.1.1 Field: Name
A unique name identifying an AirflowNetwork constant pressure drop component in an air distribu-
tion system. This unique name will be referenced by an AirflowNetwork: Distribution:Linkage object to
represent a component.
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ConstantPressureDrop ,
SupplyCPDComp , ! Name of Constant Pressure Drop Component
1.0; ! Pressure Difference Across the Component [Pa]
1.27.33 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:OutdoorAirFlow
The AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:OutdoorAirFlow object is used to allow the AirflowNetwork
model to include the outdoor air flow rate in the airflow network. When the outdoor air mass flow rate is
greater than zero, the airflow network model treats this object as a constant volume fan and the flow rate
is provided by the Controller:OutdoorAir object. When there is no outdoor air flow rate, the model treats
this object as a crack and a power law is assumed.
1.27.33.1 Inputs
1.27.33.1.1 Field: Name
This is the name for this instance of the AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:OutdoorAirFlow
object.
1.27.33.1.3 Field: Air Mass Flow Coefficient When No Outdoor Air Flow at Reference
Conditions
The value of the air mass flow coefficient, CQ , in the crack air flow equation. It has units of kg/s at
1Pa. This value must be greater than zero. The value is used when when the outdoor mass flow rate is
zero from the Controller:OutdoorAir object.
1096 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.27.33.1.4 Field: Air Mass Flow Exponent When No Outdoor Air Flow
The value of the exponent, n, in the crack air flow equation. The valid range is 0.5 to 1.0, with the default
value being 0.65. The value is used when the outdoor mass flow rate is zero from the Controller:OutdoorAir
object.
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:OutdoorAirFlow ,
OAFlow , !- Name
OA Mixer 1, !- Outdoor Air Mixer Name
0.01, !- Air Mass Flow Coefficient When No Outdoor Air Flow at Reference Conditions
{kg/s}
0.667; !- Air Mass Flow Exponent When No Outdoor Air Flow {dimensionless}
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node ,
OA System Node , !- Name
, !- Component Name or Node Name
AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem , !- Component Object Type or Node Type
3.0; !- Node Height {m}
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node ,
OA Inlet Node , !- Name
Outside Air Inlet Node , !- Component Name or Node Name
OAMixerOutdoorAirStreamNode , !- Component Object Type or Node Type
1.5; !- Node Height {m}
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage ,
OASystemFanLink , !- Name
OA Inlet Node , !- Node 1 Name
OA System Node , !- Node 2 Name
OAFlow; !- Component Name
1.27.34 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ReliefAirFlow
The AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ReliefAirFlow object is used to allow the AirflowNetwork
model to perform pressure control by varying the amount of relief air flow rate between 0 and the flow
rate specified by the Controller:OutdoorAir object. When the outdoor air mass flow rate is greater than
zero, the airflow network model treats this object as a constant volume fan and the flow rate is varied to
reach pressure control. When there is no outdoor air flow rate, the model treats this object as a crack and
a power law is assumed.
1.27.34.1 Inputs
1.27.34.1.1 Field: Name
This is the name for this instance of the AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ReliefAirFlow object.
1.27.34.1.3 Field: Air Mass Flow Coefficient When No Outdoor Air Flow at Reference
Conditions
The value of the air mass flow coefficient, CQ , in the crack air flow equation. It has units of kg/s at
1Pa. This value must be greater than zero. The value is used when the outdoor mass flow rate is zero
from the Controller:OutdoorAir object.
1.27.34.1.4 Field: Air Mass Flow Exponent When No Outdoor Air Flow
The value of the exponent, n, in the crack air flow equation. The valid range is 0.5 to 1.0, with the default
value being 0.65. The value is used when the outdoor mass flow rate is zero from the Controller:OutdoorAir
object.
AirflowNetwork:ZoneControl:PressureController ,
Pressure Controller1 , !- Name
EAST ZONE , !- Controlled Zone Name
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ReliefAirFlow , !- Control Object type
ReliefFlow , !- Control Name
PressureAvailSchedule , !- Pressure Control Availability Schedule Name
PressureSetpointSchedule ; !- Pressure Setpoint Schedule Name
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:ReliefAirFlow ,
ReliefFlow , !- Name
OA Mixer 1, !- Outdoor Air Mixer Name
0.01, !- Air Mass Flow Coefficient When No Outdoor Air Flow at Reference
Conditions {kg/s}
0.667; !- Air Mass Flow Exponent When No Outdoor Air Flow {dimensionless}
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node ,
OA System Node , !- Name
, !- Component Name or Node Name
AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem , !- Component Object Type or Node Type
3.0; !- Node Height {m}
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node ,
OA Inlet Node , !- Name
Outside Air Inlet Node , !- Component Name or Node Name
OAMixerOutdoorAirStreamNode , !- Component Object Type or Node Type
1.5; !- Node Height {m}
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage ,
OASystemFanLink , !- Name
OA System Node , !- Node 1 Name
OA Inlet Node , !- Node 2 Name
ReliefFlow; !- Component Name
1.27.35 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage
The AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage represents a connection between two AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node
objects and an AirflowNetwork component defined above. In addition, the relative height from node
height to linkage height for each node is required.
1098 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.27.35.1 Inputs
1.27.35.1.1 Field: Name
The name identifies the linkage for later reference and in the output listing. Each linkage should have
a unique name.
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage ,
Main Link 1, !- Name of Linkage
EquipmentInletNode , !- Node 1 Name
SupplyMainNode , !- Node 2 Name
MainTruck1 , !- Component Name
Attic Zone; !- Thermal Zone Name
1.27.35.2 Outputs
The AirflowNetwork nodes in the following output variables includes zones defined in AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Zone objects, external nodes defined in AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode objects,
and nodes defined in AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node objects.
The AirflowNetwork linkage used in following output variables includes surfaces defined in AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface objects, and linkages defined in AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage objects. The
surface linkages represent airflows through surface cracks or openings between two zones or between a zone
and outdoors. The distribution linkages represent airflows in an air distribution system.
• HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Sensible Heat Gain Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Sensible Heat Loss Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Latent Heat Gain Rate [W]
1100 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Latent Heat Loss Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]
The following output variables are reported only when a Fan:OnOff object is used:
• HVAC,Average,AFN Surface Venting Window or Door Opening Factor at Previous Time Step []
The following are reported only when an integrated model of RoomAir and AirflowNet-
work is used:
In this case, the output represents the wind pressures for the five external nodes defined above.
Average surface mass flow rate = (Surface mass flow rate during on cycle * Part-load ratio) + Surface
mass flow rate during off cycle * (1.0 – Part-load ratio)
1.27.35.2.14 AFN Linkage Node 1 to Node 2 Volume Flow Rate [m3 /s]
This is the AirflowNetwork linkage volume flow rate output in m3 /s in the direction from the Node 1
to Node 2. It is defined in the same manner as AFN Linkage Node 1 to Node 2 Mass Flow Rate.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the air volume flow rates reported for the AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Linkage objects are the values when the fan is operating (ON). It is assumed
that the air volume flow rates when the fan is off are zero for the distribution system air linkage objects.
The air volume flow rates for the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object are reported in different
output variables (below).
1.27.35.2.15 AFN Linkage Node 2 to Node 1 Volume Flow Rate [m3 /s]
This is the AirflowNetwork linkage volume flow rate output in m3 /s in the direction from Node 2 to
Node 1. It is defined in the same manner as AFN Linkage Node 2 to Node 1 Mass Flow Rate.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the air volume flow rates reported for the AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Linkage objects are the values when the fan is operating (ON). It is assumed
that the air volume flow rates when the fan is off are zero for the distribution system air linkage objects.
The air volume flow rates for the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object are reported in different
output variables (below).
1.27.35.2.16 AFN Linkage Node 1 to 2 Average Volume Flow Rate [m3 /s]
This is the AirflowNetwork linkage average volume flow rate in m3 /s in the direction from Node 1 to
Node 2 defined in the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface objects. This output is only available when a
Fan:OnOff object is used. The average volume flow rate is weighted by the system fan part-load ratio using
the calculated air volume flow rates during the fan on and off periods for the system timestep.
Average surface volume flow rate = (Surface volume flow rate during on cycle * Part-load ratio) +
Surface volume flow rate during off cycle * (1.0 – Part-load ratio)
1.27.35.2.17 AFN Linkage Node 2 to 1 Average Volume Flow Rate [m3 /s]
This is the AirflowNetwork linkage average volume flow rate in m3 /s in the direction from Node 2 to
Node 1 defined in the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface objects. This output is only available when a
Fan:OnOff object is used. The average volume flow rate is weighted by the system fan part-load ratio using
the calculated air volume flow rates during the fan on and off periods for the system timestep.
assumed that the pressure differences when the fan is off are zero for the distribution system air linkage
objects. The pressure differences defined in the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface are reported in
different output variables (below).
This is the multiplier on a window or door opening factor when venting modulation is in effect. See
“Modulation of Openings” under AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone for a description of how the multiplier
is determined.
When modulation is in effect the value of the multiplier is between 0.0 and 1.0. When modulation does
not apply the value of the multiplier may be –1.0. When modulation applies but the surface is not venting,
the value is –1.0. This is summarized in the following table. In this table, “Zone” means a thermal zone
for which AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone has been specified. See object AirflowNetwork: MultiZone:Zone
for definition of “Ventilation Control Mode.”
1106 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
NoVent No -1.0
1.27.35.2.43 AFN Zone Mixing Generic Air Contaminant Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This is a sum of mass flow rates from adjacent zones multiplied by the corresponding zone generic
contaminant concentration level to the receiving zone. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported
value is weighted by the system fan part-load ratio using the mixing mass flow rate calculated during the
fan on and off periods for the simulation timestep.
1.27.35.2.44 AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Sensible Heat Gain Rate [W]
This is the average sensible heat gain rate, in Watts, to a specific zone due to supply air leaks from
the forced air distribution system. This value is averaged over the reporting period. A sensible heat gain
occurs when duct air is warmer than zone air. It should be pointed out that when multiple supply air leaks
are present in a single zone, the output value is the summation of all the supply air leak gains in this zone.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on cycle.
1.27.35.2.45 AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]
This is the total sensible heat gain, in Joules, to a specific zone due to supply air leaks summed over
the reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on cycle.
1110 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.27.35.2.46 AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Sensible Heat Loss Rate [W]
This is the average sensible heat loss rate, in Watts, to a specific zone due to supply air leaks from
the forced air distribution system. This value is averaged over the reporting period. A sensible heat loss
occurs when duct air is cooler than zone air. It should be pointed out that when multiple supply air leaks
are present in this zone, the output value is the summation of all the supply air leak losses in this zone.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on cycle.
1.27.35.2.47 AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]
This is the total sensible heat loss, in Joules, to a specific zone due to supply air leaks summed over
the reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on cycle.
1.27.35.2.48 AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Latent Heat Gain Rate [W]
This is the average latent heat gain rate, in Watts, to a specific zone due to supply air leaks from the
forced air distribution system for the reported time period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported
value is for the system on cycle.
1.27.35.2.49 AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]
This is the total latent heat gain, in Joules, to a specific zone due to supply air leaks summed over the
reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on cycle.
1.27.35.2.50 AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Latent Heat Loss Rate [W]
This is the average latent heat loss rate, in Watts, to a specific zone due to supply air leaks from the
forced air distribution system for the reported time period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported
value is for the system on cycle.
1.27.35.2.51 AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]
This is the total latent heat loss, in Joules, to a specific zone due to supply air leaks summed over the
reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on cycle.
1.27.35.2.52 AFN Zone Duct Conduction Sensible Heat Gain Rate [W]
This is the average sensible heat gain rate, in Watts, of duct conduction to a specific zone where the
ducts are located. This value is averaged over the reporting period. A sensible heat gain occurs when duct
air is warmer than the zone air. It should be pointed out that when ducts are located in different zones,
the total duct conduction loss should be the summation of the duct conduction losses in these zones. When
a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on cycle.
1.27.35.2.53 AFN Zone Duct Conduction Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]
This is the total sensible heat gain, in Joules, to a specific zone due to duct conduction summed over
the reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on cycle.
1.27.35.2.54 AFN Zone Duct Conduction Sensible Heat Loss Rate [W]
This is the average sensible heat loss rate, in Watts, of duct conduction to a specific zone where the
ducts are located. This value is averaged over the reporting period. A sensible heat loss occurs when duct
air is cooler than the zone air. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on
cycle.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1111
1.27.35.2.55 AFN Zone Duct Conduction Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]
This is the total sensible heat loss, in Joules, to a specific zone due to duct conduction summed over
the reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on cycle.
1.27.35.2.56 AFN Zone Duct Diffusion Latent Heat Gain Rate [W]
This is the average latent heat gain rate, in Watts, of vapor diffusion through the walls of the air
distribution system to a specific zone where the ducts are located. This value is averaged over the reporting
period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on cycle.
1.27.35.2.57 AFN Zone Duct Diffusion Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]
This is the total latent heat gain, in Joules, to a specific zone due to duct vapor diffusion summed over
the reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on cycle.
1.27.35.2.58 AFN Zone Duct Diffusion Latent Heat Loss Rate [W]
This is the average latent heat loss rate, in Watts, of duct vapor diffusion to a specific zone where the
ducts are located. This value is averaged over the reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the
reported value is for the system on cycle.
1.27.35.2.59 AFN Zone Duct Diffusion Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]
This is the total latent heat loss, in Joules, to a specific zone due to duct vapor diffusion summed over
the reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on cycle.
The total convective sensible heat gain, in Joules, to the zone air corresponding to the Zone Infiltration
Volume summed over the reporting period. This value is calculated for each timestep when the outdoor
dry-bulb temperature is higher than the zone temperature, otherwise the sensible gain is set to 0. When
a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on cycle.
1.27.35.2.76 AFN Zone Outdoor Air CO2 Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This is a sum of mass flow rates from outdoors multiplied by the outdoor carbon dioxide concentration
level to the receiving zone. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system
fan part-load ratio using the outdoor mass flow rate calculated during the fan on and off periods for the
simulation timestep.
1.27.35.2.77 AFN Zone Outdoor Air Generic Air Contaminant Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This is a sum of mass flow rates from outdoors multiplied by the outdoor generic air contaminant
concentration level to the receiving zone. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted
by the system fan part-load ratio using the outdoor mass flow rate calculated during the fan on and off
periods for the simulation timestep
1.27.35.2.80 AFN Zone Total Generic Air Contaminant Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This is a sum of mass flow rates from adjacent zones or outdoors multiplied by the generic contaminant
concentration differences between the corresponding zone and the receiving zone.
The following output variables are reported only when an AirflowNetwork:OccupantVentilationControl
object is used:
1.27.35.2.81 AFN Surface Venting Window or Door Opening Factor at Previous Time
Step []
The value of the venting opening factor for a particular window or door at the previous time step.
When the window or door is venting, this is the input value of the opening factor (see AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface, Window/Door Opening Factor) times the multiplier for venting modulation (see
description of next output variable, “Opening Factor Multiplier for AirflowNetwork Venting Modulation”).
For example, if the input Window/Door opening factor is 0.5 and the modulation multiplier is 0.7, then
the value of this output variable will be 0.5*0.7 = 0.35.
lation, outdoor air mixing, zone-to-zone mixing, and all of the zone inlet, exhaust, and return nodes. The
latent parts are determined by taking the difference between the total and the sensible rate. Positive values
indicate the zone injects heat to the environment, while negative values indicate the building extracts heat
from the environment.
![ZoneEquipmentSyntax (media/image261.png)
Figure 99. Zone Equipment Input Syntax Map
The following figure (Air Loop/Zone Equipment Node Diagram) illustrates the connection between the
zone equipment and the air loop systems.
Each zone served by an HVAC system must have three additional statements to complete the zone
equipment specification. An ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit allows equipment typically found within the
zone inlet ductwork (such as dampers, reheat coils, etc.) to be attached to the supply air stream for a
particular zone. A ZoneControl statement will allow the conditions in the zone to be managed. Finally,
a ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections statement describes all of the pertinent information about the zone
from an HVAC perspective. Each of these statements is described in more detail below.
1.28.1 ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit
The ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit object gives further information on what air loop equipment (air
terminal units) will be serving a particular zone. The ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit is the part of the
system that is supplied from a common main air handler simulated in the Air Loop Simulation and
includes the equipment that controls or tempers the air going to each individual zone according to the
desired thermostatic control. The current options for ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit terminal unit types
are:
1.28. GROUP - ZONE EQUIPMENT 1117
• AirTerminal:DualDuct:ConstantVolume
• AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV
• AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV:OutdoorAir
• AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:Reheat
• AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat
• AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:NoReheat
• AirTerminal:SingleDuct:SeriesPIU:Reheat
• AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ParallelPIU:Reheat
• AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:FourPipeInduction
• AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat:VariableSpeedFan
• AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:Reheat
• AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:NoReheat
• AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:CooledBeam
• AirTerminal:SingleDuct:UserDefined
• AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer
Connections between the air distribution unit, the supply air duct, and the zone are specified in the
input syntax for the air distribution unit and the AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter. The input syntax also
explicitly defines an outlet identifier. This implies a connection to a zone through a NodeList for zone
inlets (see the ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections statement). The air distribution unit is limited to one
combined component-controller unit; because controls are normally based on the zone thermostat and can
work in parallel or series in complex fashion. Since the control and the flow resolution can be complex,
each air distribution unit is unique in addressing these combinations and therefore only one is allowed per
zone.
The Air Distribution unit also allows the user to specify leaks in the supply air duct system. These
inputs are used in the EnergyPlus Simplified Duct Leakage Model (SDLM). This model simulates a specific
configuration: supply leaks to a return plenum in a commercial VAV or CV system. The system must have
a constant static pressure setpoint. Within these limitations SDLM allows the user to easily evaluate the
energy penalty due to duct leakage.
1.28.1.1 Inputs
1.28.1.1.1 Field: Name
Unique identifying name of the air distribution unit.
ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit ,
SPACE1 -1 ATU , !- Air Distribution Unit Name
SPACE1 -1 In Node , !- Air Dist Unit Outlet Node Name
AIRTERMINAL:SINGLEDUCT:VAV:REHEAT , !- KEY --System Component Type 1
SPACE1 -1 VAV Reheat; !- Component Name 1
ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit ,
SPACE4 -1 ATU , !- Air Distribution Unit Name
SPACE4 -1 In Node , !- Air Dist Unit Outlet Node Name
AIRTERMINAL:SINGLEDUCT:VAV:REHEAT , !- KEY --System Component Type 1
SPACE4 -1 VAV Reheat , !- Component Name 1
0.05, !- upstream nominal leakage fraction
0.07; !- downstream constant leakage fraction
1.28.2 ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections
Finally, the ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections statement defines the remaining details about each thermal
zone from an HVAC perspective (besides the controls which were defined above). As with other statements,
the first two items in this object are the keyword and an identifying name which links the zone back to its
geometrical input, internal gains, etc. and other statements in the HVAC section of the input. The next
three items are names of lists (equipment, air inlet nodes, and air exhaust nodes) that are described in
more detail below. Note that if there are no air exhaust nodes from the zone that field is left blank. And if
there are no air inlet nodes, that field is left blank. Finally, two node names are necessary to complete the
zone-HVAC description. The first node is the main air node for the zone upon which the air heat balance
is performed. The other node(s) begins the return air path(s) from the zone.
Note that all nodes mentioned in the ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections input must be unique. That
is, all nodes in all the ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections statements referenced by the “Zone Air Inlet
Nodes”, “Zone Air Exhaust Nodes”, “Zone Air Node Name” and “Zone Return Air Node Name” cannot
have any node name appearing more than once.
1.28. GROUP - ZONE EQUIPMENT 1121
1.28.2.1 Inputs
1.28.2.1.1 Field: Zone Name
Name links this equipment list back to the heat balance for the zone.
1.28.2.1.7 Field: Zone Return Air Node 1 Flow Rate Fraction Schedule Name
The name of a schedule to specify the return air flow rate for the first return air node as a fraction of
the base return air. If the next field is blank, then the return air flow rate is the total supply inlet flow
rate to the zone less the total exhaust node flow rate from the zone multiplied by this schedule name. If
this field is left blank, the schedule defaults to 1.0 at all times.
1.28.2.1.8 Field: Zone Return Air Node 1 Flow Rate Basis Node or NodeList Name
The name of a node or list of nodes (NodeList) that is used to calculate the return air flow rate for the
first return air node in this zone. The sum of the current flow rates for this node(s) multiplied by the Zone
Return Air Node 1 Flow Rate Fraction Schedule determines the return air flow rate. If this field is blank,
1122 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
then the base return air flow rate is the total supply inlet flow rate to the zone less the total exhaust node
flow rate from the zone in the case of a single air loop serving this zone. If there are multiple air loops
serving this zone, the base return air flow rate is governed by the corresponding supply inlet flow rate and
the AirloopHVAC Design Return Air Flow Fraction of Supply Air Flow.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:
ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections ,
SPACE3 -1, !- Zone Name
SPACE3 -1 Eq , !- List Name: Zone Equipment
SPACE3 -1 In Nodes , !- List Name: Zone Air Inlet Nodes
, !- List Name: Zone Air Exhaust Nodes
SPACE3 -1 Node , !- Zone Air Node Name
SPACE3 -1 Out Node; !- Zone Return Air Node or NodeList Name
The following HVAC equipment types are allowed as zone equipment. The component matrix shows
which coils and fans are allowed with which equipment models.
Figure 1.121:
1.28.3 ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList
The first list encountered in the ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections statement is the ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList.
This object lists all HVAC equipment serving the zone. Each item in the list has four fields associated
with it: Object Type, Name, Cooling Sequence and Heating or No-Load Sequence The Object Type and
1.28. GROUP - ZONE EQUIPMENT 1123
Name identify the specific equipment object. Cooling Sequence and Heating or No-Load Sequence specify
the order of simulation for zones with more than one type of HVAC equipment.
Note that a ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit or AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled must be listed in
this statement if there is a forced air system serving the zone from an air loop.
1.28.3.1 Inputs
1.28.3.1.1 Field: Name
Unique identifying name.
• SequentialLoad loads each piece of available equipment sequentially with the full remaining load.
• UniformLoad evenly distributes the total load equally among all available components on the equip-
ment list for the current load type.
• UniformPLR evenly distributes the total load among all available components on the equipment list
for the current load type at a uniform part load ratio (PLR).
• SequentialUniformPLR determines how many of the available components are required to meet the
current load, then distributes the load at a uniform part load ratio (PLR).
1.28.3.1.3 Field Set (Zone Equipment: Object Type, Name, Cooling Sequence, Heat-
ing or No-Load Sequence, Sequential Cooling Fraction, Sequential Heating Fraction)
This set is used together in order to sequence the equipment for heating and cooling. The #1 sequence
equipment will try to meet the entire demand with its capacity and then pass the results on to the #2 and
so on for both heating and cooling. This field set is extensible by duplicating the last four fields.
Equipment is simulated in the order specified by Zone Equipment Cooling Sequence and Zone Equip-
ment Heating or No-Load Sequence, depending on the current thermostat request. For equipment of similar
type, assign sequence 1 to the first system intended to serve that type of load, assign sequence 2 to the
next system, and so on. For situations where one or more equipment types has limited capacity or limited
control capability, order the sequence so that the most controllable piece of equipment runs last. For
example, with a dedicated outdoor air system (DOAS), the air terminal for the DOAS should be assigned
Heating Sequence = 1 and Cooling Sequence = 1. Any other equipment should be assigned sequence 2 or
higher so that it will see the net load after the DOAS air is added to the zone.
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled
Fan:ZoneExhaust
WaterHeater:HeatPump:PumpedCondenser
WaterHeater:HeatPump:WrappedCondenser
ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Electric
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Water
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Electric
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Water
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Steam
ZoneHVAC:Dehumidifier:DX
ZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator
ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil
ZoneHVAC:HighTemperatureRadiant
ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem
ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:ConstantFlow
ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:Electric
ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:VariableFlow
ZoneHVAC:OutdoorAirUnit
ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalAirConditioner
ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalHeatPump
ZoneHVAC:RefrigerationChillerSet
ZoneHVAC:UnitHeater
ZoneHVAC:UnitVentilator
ZoneHVAC:WindowAirConditioner
ZoneHVAC:WaterToAirHeatPump
ZoneHVAC:VentilatedSlab
Specifies the fraction of the remaining cooling load this equipment will attempt to serve. Only applies
if the load distribution scheme is SequentialLoad.
ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList ,
Zone1Equipment , !- Name
ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit , !- Zone Equipment 1 Object Type
Zone1TermReheat , !- Zone Equipment 1 Name
1, !- Zone Equipment 1 Cooling Sequence
1; !- Zone Equipment 1 Heating or No -Load Sequence
ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList ,
Zone1Equipment , !- Name
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled , !- Zone Equipment 1 Object Type
Zone1DirectAir , !- Zone Equipment 1 Name
1, !- Zone Equipment 1 Cooling Sequence
1, !- Zone Equipment 1 Heating or No -Load Sequence
ZoneHVAC:WaterToAirHeatPump , !- Zone Equipment 2 Object Type
Zone1WTAHP , !- Zone Equipment 2 Name
2, !- Zone Equipment 2 Cooling Sequence
2; !- Zone Equipment 2 Heating or No -Load Sequence
1.29.1 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled
Central system air is usually supplied to a zone through a terminal unit such as a single duct VAV reheat
box. Sometimes, however, it is desirable to supply central system air directly to a zone without any zone
level control or tempering. An example would be a single zone reheat system.
The control zone receives supply air directly from the central system since the supply air temperature
has been adjusted to control the temperature in the control zone. The slave zones then have baseboards
or reheat coils to allow some temperature adjustment. The AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled object
creates the capability of supplying central system air directly to a zone. Its input consists of the object
name, an availability (on/off) schedule, and a node name. This node is both a zone inlet node and an
outlet node of the AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter.
For the objects to work correctly, it is important in any systems including Direct Air objects for the
sum of the maximum zone air flow rates to be equal to the maximum central system flow rate. The zone
maximum flow rates are specified in the zone terminal unit or direct air inputs. The central air system
flow rate is specified in the AirLoopHVAC input and also in the air loop branch and central fan inputs.
1126 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.29.1.1 Inputs
1.29.1.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user assigned name for each AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled component. Any other
component that needs to use this direct air component will refer to it by this name.
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone1DirectAir ,
FanAndCoilAvailSched ,
Zone 1 Inlet Node ,
0.47;
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone2DirectAir ,
FanAndCoilAvailSched ,
Zone 2 Inlet Node ,
0.36;
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone3DirectAir ,
FanAndCoilAvailSched ,
Zone 3 Inlet Node ,
0.47,
OA Design Rate ,
CurrentOccupancy;
1.29.1.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Sum,Zone Air Terminal Sensible Heating Energy [J]
1.29.2 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:Reheat
The AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:Reheat or terminal reheat system is a constant volume reheat
system. The systems cooling capabilities are provided by way of cooling coil that supplies cooling to the
entire supply air volume. The cooling coil is controlled by a controller setpoint specified for the cooling
coil. Zone control is accomplished by heating (reheating) the airflow into each zone as determined by the
zone thermostat. Currently the reheat can be supplied by a electric, gas, or hot water coil that tries to
meet the zone demand.
1.29.2.1 Inputs
1.29.2.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name for the terminal reheat Air Distribution Unit (ADU).
1128 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:Steam
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:Reheat ,
Reheat Zone 1, !- Name of System
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability schedule for VAV System
Zone 1 Reheat Air Outlet Node , !- Unit Air Outlet Node
Zone 1 Reheat Air Inlet Node , !- Unit Air Inlet Node
0.59, !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
COIL:Gas:Heating , !- Reheat Component Object
Reheat Coil Zone 1, !- Name of Reheat Component
0.0, !- Max Reheat Water Flow {m3/s}
0.0, !- Min Reheat Water Flow {m3/s}
0.001; !- Convergence Tolerance
1.29.2.2 Outputs
There are no outputs for the constant volume reheat air terminal.
1.29.3 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat
The AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat object creates the capability of supplying central
system air directly to a zone without any zone level thermostat control. The supply air temperature is
controlled by the central system controller. It is typically used with a unitary system and furnaces which
controls the system supply temperature and flow rate with continuous or cycling fan. When used without
the Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name, the terminal unit is passive and accepts any flow rate
supplied by the central system, but will never exceed the maximum air flow rate.
This object allows the program to know what zone this branch of the air system is attached to, and
input fields for availability schedule, air inlet and outlet nodes, the maximum air flow rate, and other two
optional input fields. The air inlet node should be the same as one of the AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter
or AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPlenum component outlet nodes. The air outlet node name should be same as
zone air inlet node name and the air distribution unit air outlet node name. The last two optional input
fields: Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name, and Per Person Ventilation Rate Mode are used for
modulating the outdoor air requirement of an air terminal unit depending on the method.
1.29.3.1 Inputs
1.29.3.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user assigned name for the single duct constant volume no reheat air terminal unit.
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
NoReheat Zone 1, !- Name of System
AlwaysOnFanAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 1 Unit Air Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 1 Unit Air Outlet Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.60, !- Maximum Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name
; !- Per Person Ventilation Rate Mode
1.29.3.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Sum,Zone Air Terminal Sensible Heating Energy [J]
1.29.3.2.5 Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This output is the amount of outdoor air entering the zone. This is the average value over the frequency
being reported. The amount of outdoor air is defined as the terminal unit air volume flow rate multiplied
by the fraction of outdoor air entering the air loop’s outside air system.
1.29.4 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat - Variable air volume (VAV) systems control the dry-bulb tempera-
ture inside a zone by varying the supply air volume instead of the air temperature. At full cooling the
VAV damper is fully open supplying the specified maximum air flow rate. As the cooling load decreases,
the damper closes until it reaches the minimum stop specified by the zone minimum air flow fraction.
VAV systems can be used for interior or perimeter zones with a common fan system, air temperature
control, and reheating devices. The VAV concept may vary according to the VAV box locations, air
temperature controls and types of heating elements. Heating can usually be provided by use of reheat coils
or thermostatic baseboard.
1.29.4.1 Inputs
1.29.4.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name for the AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat Air Distribution Unit (ADU).
normal-action reheat coils is the average of the minimum and maximum values in this schedule. The air
flow rate used for reheat coil sizing is reported with other component sizing information as “Reheat Coil
Sizing Air Volume Flow Rate.”
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:Steam
With Reverse and ReverseWithLimits (the default) action, as the heating load increases, the unit
starts at minimum air flow and minimum hot water flow. The hot water flow is increased until it reaches
maximum flow or the user-specified maximum reheat air temperature is reached, then the air damper starts
to open to meet the load. For Reverse the damper can open all the way. For ReverseWithLimitss the
damper can only partially open to a maximum flow rate given by the following two fields. These options
are used if the minimum air flow rate is not adequate to serve the peak heating load. This is sometimes
called the dual maximum control logic as illustrated in following figure. For heating coil types other than
the hot-water coil, e.g. electric, steam, and gas, the reverse action works the same as the normal action –
always keeping the air flow at the minimum during heating.
The dual-max control currently applies to the AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat objects with reverse
acting dampers and hot-water coils.
Flow Fraction During Reheat are two optional methods to calculate the maximum allowable air flow rate
during reheat operation. If both are entered, the greater resulting flow rate is used. If Design Specification
Outdoor Air Object Name is also specified, it may increase this limit to meet the outdoor air flow rate
requirement. At no time will the maximum flow rate calculated here exceed the value for Maximum Air
Flow Rate.
This limit is active only when the zone thermostat requests heating and the VAV box damper is reverse
acting (i.e., ReverseWithLimits).
1.29.4.1.18 Field: Maximum Flow per Zone Floor Area During Reheat
This factor (m3 /s-m2 ) is multiplied by the zone area, to determine the maximum volume flow rate
(m3 /s) allowed during reheat operation (see detailed explanation above). This field is autosizable and its
default is autosize. If autosize is selected or the field is blank, the value is filled from the similar inputs
in Sizing:Zone. If there is no sizing calculation the value is set to 0.002032 m3 /s-m2 (0.4 cfm/ft2 ). If this
field and the following field are entered, the greater of the two inputs is used. This field and the following
field are only used if Damper Heating Action = ReverseWithLimits.
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat ,
SPACE2 -1 VAV Reheat , !- Name of System
ReheatCoilAvailSched , !- Availability schedule for VAV System
SPACE2 -1 Zone Coil Air In Node , !- Damper Air Outlet Node
SPACE2 -1 ATU In Node , !- Unit Air Inlet Node
autosize , !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
Constant , !- Zone Minimum Air Flow Input Method
0.3, !- Constant Minimum Air Flow Fraction
, !- Fixed Minimum Air Flow Rate
, !- Minimum Air Flow Fraction Schedule Name
COIL:Gas:Heating , !- Reheat Component Object
SPACE2 -1 Zone Coil , !- Name of Reheat Component
0.0, !- Max Reheat Water Flow {m3/s}
0.0, !- Min Reheat Water Flow {m3/s}
SPACE2 -1 In Node , !- Unit Air Outlet Node
0.001 , !- Convergence Tolerance
ReverseWithLimits , !- Damper Heating Action
, !- Maximum Flow per Zone Floor Area During Reheat
, !- Maximum Flow Fraction During Reheat
35.0, !- Maximum Reheat Air Temperature {C}
; !- Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name
DesignSpecification :OutdoorAir ,
ZoneMinOARequirements , !- Name
Sum , !- Outdoor Air Method
0.00472 , !- Outdoor Air Flow per Person {m3/s}
0.000508 , !- Outdoor Air Flow per Zone Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
, !- Outdoor Air Flow per Zone
, !- Outdoor Air Flow Air Changes per Hour
Min OARequirements Sched; !- Outdoor Air Flow Rate Fraction Schedule Name
Schedule:Compact ,
Min OARequirements Sched , !- Name
Any Number , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: Weekdays SummerDesignDay WinterDesignDay , !- Field 2
Until: 24:00 ,1.0 , !- Field 7
For: AllOtherDays , !- Field 9
Until: 24:00 ,0.25; !- Field 10
COIL:Heating:Fuel ,
SPACE1 -1 Zone Coil , !- Coil Name
ReheatCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
0.8, !- Gas Burner Efficiency of the Coil
autosize , !- Nominal Capacity of the Coil {W}
SPACE1 -1 Zone Coil Air In Node , !- Coil_Air_Inlet_Node
SPACE1 -1 In Node; !- Coil_Air_Outlet_Node
1.29. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 1137
1.29.4.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal VAV Damper Position []
1.29.4.2.3 Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This output is the amount of outdoor air entering the zone. This is the average value over the frequency
being reported. The amount of outdoor air is defined as the terminal unit air volume flow rate multiplied
by the fraction of outdoor air entering the air loop’s outside air system.
1.29.5 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat:VariableSpeedFan
The VAV terminal unit with variable-speed fan and reheat coil is an air system terminal unit consisting
of a variable speed fan in series with a heating coil. These units are usually employed in underfloor air
distribution (UFAD) systems where the air is supplied at low static pressure through an underfloor plenum.
The fan is used to control the flow of conditioned air that enters the space. When the fan is off the plenum
pressure drives the minimum air flow through the terminal unit. At maximum cooling the fan runs at
its maximum speed. At full heating the fan runs at its heating maximum – usually less than the cooling
maximum flow rate. Thus this unit has two separate maximum flow rates – one for heating and one for
cooling.
For cooling, control is maintained simply by varying the fan speed. For heating, the unit first tries to
meet the heating load by varying the heating coil output while keeping the air flow at minimum (fan off).
If this is not adequate the fan turns on and operates in variable flow mode up to the heating maximum
flow rate.
This unit is modeled in EnergyPlus as a compound component – a variable speed fan and a heating
coil in series in the air stream. The unit is blow through – the fan is upstream of the heating coil.
1.29.5.1 Inputs
1.29.5.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user assigned name for a particular VS fan VAV reheat terminal unit. Any reference to this
unit by another object will use this name.
time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for the
time period. If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:Steam
|Qunit,out − Qzoneload |
≤ ConvergenceTolerance (1.116)
Qzoneload
Coil:Heating:Water ,
SPACE2 -1 Zone Coil , !- Coil Name
ReheatCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
autosize , !- UA of the Coil {W/K}
autosize , !- Max Water Flow Rate of Coil {m3/s}
SPACE2 -1 Zone Coil Water In Node , !- Coil_Water_Inlet_Node
SPACE2 -1 Zone Coil Water Out Node , !- Coil_Water_Outlet_Node
SPACE2 -1 Zone Coil Air In Node , !- Coil_Air_Inlet_Node
SPACE2 -1 In Node; !- Coil_Air_Outlet_Node
Fan:VariableVolume ,
SPACE2 -1 Zone Fan , !- Fan Name
FanAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.7, !- Fan Total Efficiency
125.0 , !- Delta Pressure {Pa}
autosize , !- Max Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0, !- Min Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
0.00153028 , !- FanCoefficient 1
0.00520806 , !- FanCoefficient 2
1.1086242 , !- FanCoefficient 3
-.11635563 , !- FanCoefficient 4
0.000 , !- FanCoefficient 5
SPACE2 -1 ATU In Node , !- Fan_Inlet_Node
SPACE2 -1 Zone Coil AirIn Node; !- Fan_Outlet_Node
1.29.5.2 Outputs
HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal VAV Damper Position []
1140 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.29.6 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:Reheat
Variable air volume (VAV) systems typically control the dry-bulb temperature inside a zone by varying
the supply air volume instead of the supply air temperature (ref: AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:NoReheat).
Reheat coils may be required to avoid overcooling (ref: AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat).
This terminal unit is slightly different from the AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat terminal unit.
Both operate the same in cooling mode: the damper opens as needed to provide additional sensible cooling
to the zone. The difference between the two is in heating mode. For the Single Duct VAV Reheat terminal
unit, the air flow rate is reduced to the minimum value (max air flow rate x zone minimum air flow fraction)
when zone heating is required and the reheat coil output is modulated to meet the zone heating load. For
the AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:Reheat terminal unit, the air flow rate in heating mode is
increased to meet higher zone heating loads (similar to what is done in cooling mode). If additional heat
is required (beyond what the terminal unit can provide with its damper fully open), then the reheat coil
is modulated as needed to meet the additional heating load.
This terminal unit model was originally developed and tested for use with the changeover-bypass VAV
unitary system.
Figure 1.124: Single Duct VAV Heat and Cool Reheat Schematic
1.29.6.1 Inputs
1.29.6.1.1 Field: Name
Unique user-defined name for this Air Distribution Unit (ADU).
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:Steam
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:Reheat ,
Zone 1 VAV System , !- Name of System
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- System Availability schedule
Zone 1 Reheat Air Inlet Node , !- DAMPER Air Outlet Node
Zone 1 VAV Inlet Node , !- UNIT Air Inlet Node
0.583 , !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
0.25, !- Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction
Coil:Heating:Electric , !- Reheat Component Object
Reheat Coil Zone 1, !- Name of Reheat Component
0.0, !- Max Reheat Water Flow {m3/s}
0.0, !- Min Reheat Water Flow {m3/s}
Zone 1 Reheat Air Outlet Node , !- UNIT Air Outlet Node
0.001; !- Convergence Tolerance
Coil:Heating:Electric ,
Reheat Coil Zone 1, !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
1.0, !- Efficiency of the Coil
3000.0 , !- Nominal Capacity of the Coil {W}
Zone 1 Reheat Air Inlet Node , !- Coil_Air_Inlet_Node
Zone 1 Reheat Air Outlet Node; !- Coil_Air_Outlet_Node
1.29.6.2 Outputs
HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal VAV Damper Position []
1.29.7 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:NoReheat
Variable air volume (VAV) systems control the dry-bulb temperature inside a zone by varying the supply
air volume instead of the air temperature. At full cooling the VAV damper is fully open supplying the
1.29. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 1143
specified maximum air flow rate. As the cooling load decreases, the damper closes until it reaches the
minimum stop specified by the zone minimum air flow fraction.
VAV systems can be used for interior or perimeter zones with a common fan system and air temperature
control. The VAV concept may vary according to the VAV box locations and air temperature controls.
Heating can be provided if necessary by use of baseboard.
1.29.7.1 Inputs
1.29.7.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name for the VAV Air Distribution Unit (ADU).
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:NoReheat ,
Zone 1 VAV System , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 1 Reheat Air Outlet Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
Zone 1 Damper Inlet Node ,!- Air Inlet Node Name
0.47, !- Maximum Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Constant , !- Zone Minimum Air Flow Input Method
0.3, !- Constant Minimum Air Flow Fraction
, !- Fixed Minimum Air Flow Rate
, !- Minimum Air Flow Fraction Schedule Name
ZoneOAData; !- Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name
DesignSpecification :OutdoorAir ,
ZoneOAData , !- Name
Sum , !- Outdoor Air Method
0.00236 , !- Outdoor Air Flow per Person {m3/s}
0.00305 , !- Outdoor Air Flow per Zone Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
, !- Outdoor Air Flow per Zone {m3/s}
, !- Outdoor Air Flow Air Changes per Hour
OARequirements Sched; !- Outdoor Air Flow Rate Fraction Schedule Name
Schedule:Compact ,
OARequirements Sched , !- Name
Any Number , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: Weekdays SummerDesignDay WinterDesignDay , !- Field 2
Until: 24:00 , 1.0, !- Field 4
For: AllOtherDays , !- Field 5
Until: 24:00 , 0.5; !- Field 7
1.29. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 1145
1.29.7.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal VAV Damper Position []
1.29.7.2.2 Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This output is the amount of outdoor air entering the zone. This is the average value over the frequency
being reported. The amount of outdoor air is defined as the terminal unit air volume flow rate multiplied
by the fraction of outdoor air entering the air loop’s outside air system.
1.29.8 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:NoReheat
Variable air volume (VAV) systems typically control the dry-bulb temperature inside a zone by varying
the supply air volume instead of the supply air temperature (ref: AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:NoReheat).
Reheat coils may be required to avoid overcooling (ref: AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat).
This terminal unit is slightly different from the AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:NoReheat terminal unit.
Both operate the same in cooling mode: the damper opens as needed to provide additional sensible cooling
to the zone. The difference between the two is in heating mode. For the Single Duct VAV NoReheat
terminal unit, the air flow rate is reduced to the minimum value (max air flow rate x zone minimum air
flow fraction) when zone heating is required. For the AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:NoReheat
terminal unit, the air flow rate in heating mode is increased to meet higher zone heating loads (similar to
what is done in cooling mode).
This terminal unit model was originally developed and tested for use with the changeover-bypass
VAV unitary system..This object may be used when the central heating coil is sufficient to maintain the
heating set point temperature. Additional heating may be provided, if necessary, by use of AirTermi-
nal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:Reheat or ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:* objects.
Figure 1.125: Single Duct VAV Heat and Cool NoReheat Schematic
1146 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.29.8.1 Inputs
1.29.8.1.1 Field: Name
Unique user-defined name for this Air Distribution Unit (ADU).
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:NoReheat ,
Zone 3 VAV System , !- Name of System
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- System Availability schedule
Zone 3 Reheat Air Outlet Node , !- UNIT Air Outlet Node
Zone 3 VAV Inlet Node , !- UNIT Air Inlet Node
0.584 , !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
0.25; !- Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction
1.29.8.2 Outputs
HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal VAV Damper Position []
1.29.9 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:SeriesPIU:Reheat
The series powered induction unit is an air system terminal unit that mixes varying amounts of secondary
(recirculated) air and primary (conditioned supply) air to produce a fixed flow of air to a zone. The
unit contains a small fan that acts to induce the secondary air and a heating coil for heating the mixed
1.29. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 1147
secondary and primary air. The fan runs at a constant volume flow rate whenever the unit is on (and the
fan’s availability schedule is on or it is activated by an availability manager). The fan is downstream of the
primary and secondary air inlets. The variable mixing is accomplished by a damper in the unit’s primary
air supply inlet duct. This damper can move from fully open (100% primary air. 0% secondary air) to a
minimum stop that is specified in the input description. At full cooling the damper will be fully open. At
minimum cooling and for heating the damper will be at the minimum stop and the secondary air flow will be
at its maximum. During night cycle operation, if the availability manager status is CycleOnZoneFansOnly,
then the fan will run only if there is a heating load. If the status is CycleOn, then the fan will run according
to the normal controls.
The EnergyPlus model of the series PIU terminal unit is composed of three components: a zone mixer,
a constant volume fan, and a heating coil (hot water, electric, or gas).
1.29.9.1 Inputs
1.29.9.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user assigned name for a particular series powered induction terminal unit. Any reference to
this unit by another object will use this name.
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:Steam
In other words the PIU may have a hot water, gas, electric or steam reheat coil.
1.29. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 1149
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:SeriesPIU:Reheat ,
Zone 1 SPIU ATU , ! Name of air terminal unit
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! Availability schedule for series PIU ATU
0.47, ! Total volume flow rate through ATU
0.47, ! Maximum primary air flow rate through terminal unit
0.3, ! Minimum primary air flow rate (fraction of max)
Zone 1 PIU Pri Air Inlet Node , ! Air Terminal unit supply air inlet node
Zone 1 PIU Sec Air Inlet Node , ! Air Terminal unit secondary air inlet node
Zone 1 PIU Air Outlet Node , ! Air Terminal unit outlet node
Zone 1 Reheat Air Inlet Node , ! Reheat coil air inlet node (fan outlet node)
Zone 1 PIU Mixer , ! Air terminal unit mixer name
Zone 1 PIU Fan , ! Air terminal unit fan name
COIL:Heating:Water , ! type of air terminal unit reheat coil
Reheat Coil Zone 1, ! name of air terminal unit reheat coil
0.0013 , ! Max Reheat Water Flow {Flow: m3/sec}
0.0, ! Min Reheat Water Flow {Flow: m3/sec}
0.001; ! Convergence tolerance
1.29.9.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Heating Rate [W]
1.29.10 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ParallelPIU:Reheat
The parallel powered induction unit is an air system terminal unit that mixes varying amounts of secondary
(recirculated) air and primary (conditioned supply) air to produce a variable total flow of air to a zone.
The unit contains a small fan that acts to induce the secondary air and a heating coil for heating the mixed
secondary and primary air. The secondary and primary air streams enter the unit in parallel. The fan sits
in the secondary air stream and runs only when the primary air flow is below the Fan On Flow Fraction
and the fan’s availability schedule is on or it is activated by an availability manager. The primary air inlet
contains a damper that can move from fully open (maximum primary air) to a minimum stop (minimum
primary air).
At full cooling load the primary air damper is fully open and the fan is off. The primary air flow is
at maximum and there is little or no secondary air flow. As the cooling load decreases, the primary air
damper gradually closes and the secondary air flow remains close to zero. At some point, usually when the
primary air flow has reached the minimum, the fan switches on and secondary air is induced. The heating
coil will switch on as needed to meet any heating demand. The Fan On Flow Fraction field controls the
fan operation; see this field description for more details.
The EnergyPlus model of the parallel PIU terminal unit is composed of three components: a constant
volume fan, a zone mixer, and a heating coil (hot water, electric, or gas).
1.29.10.1 Inputs
1.29.10.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user assigned name for a particular parallel powered induction terminal unit. Any reference
to this unit by another object will use this name.
time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for the
time period. If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ParallelPIU:Reheat ,
Zone 3 PPIU ATU , ! Name of air terminal unit
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! Availability schedule for series PIU ATU
0.47, ! Maximum primary air flow rate through terminal unit
0.375 , ! Maximum secondary air flow rate through the terminal unit
0.1, ! Minimum primary air flow rate (fraction of max)
0.1, ! fan on flow fraction
Zone 3 PIU Pri Air Inlet Node , ! Air Terminal unit supply air inlet node
Zone 3 PIU Sec Air Inlet Node , ! Air Terminal unit secondary air inlet node
Zone 3 PIU Air Outlet Node , ! Air Terminal unit outlet node
Zone 3 Reheat Air Inlet Node , ! Reheat coil air inlet node (fan outlet node)
Zone 3 PIU Mixer , ! Air terminal unit mixer name
Zone 3 PIU Fan , ! Air terminal unit fan name
Coil:Heating:Water , ! type of air terminal unit reheat coil
Reheat Coil Zone 3, ! name of air terminal unit reheat coil
0.0013 , ! Max Reheat Water Flow {Flow: m3/sec}
0.0, ! Min Reheat Water Flow {Flow: m3/sec}
0.001; ! Convergence tolerance
1.29.10.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Heating Rate [W]
1.29.11 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:FourPipeInduction
The four pipe induction terminal unit provides local hot water heating or chilled water cooling of induced
zone air which then mixes with centrally conditioned supply air. An air conditioning system consisting of
these terminal units is effectively a mixed cental air / local hydronic system. The centrally conditioned
air supplied to the induction terminal units is constant volume at quite high pressure. The central air is
discharged through a nozzle in the terminal unit, inducing a flow of room air over a hydronic heating/cooling
coil. The coil is connected either to a single inlet and outlet pipe (2 pipe unit) or to 2 inlets and 2 outlets
(4 pipe unit). The heated or cooled induced air mixes with the centrally conditioned air before being
discharged into the zone. The terminal units are usually expected to do only sensible cooling – any
dehumidification is done by the central air conditioning system.
The EnergyPlus model of the four pipe induction terminal unit is a compound component consisting
of a hot water heating coil, a chilled water cooling coil, and an air mixer. The unit has two inlet air
streams: the centrally conditioned supply air and the induced air from the zone. The induced air passes
first through the heating coil, then through the cooling coil and finally through the mixer. The central
supply air goes directly into the mixer. The water flow through the hot or cold water coil is varied to meet
the zone air conditioning requirement. Note that EnergyPlus models the four pipe induction terminal unit
as having separate heating and cooling coils whereas real units have only a single coil used for both heating
and cooling. Note also that the four pipe induction unit model can be used to model a two pipe unit by
simply adjusting the heating and cooling coil schedules so that the heating coil is off when the cooling coil
is on and vice versa.
1.29.11.1 Inputs
1.29.11.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user assigned name for a particular four pipe induction terminal unit. Any reference to this
unit by another object will use this name.
• Coil:Heating:Water
In other words the unit may have a hot water coil only.
• Coil:Cooling:Water
• Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry
In other words the unit must use only the water cooling coils.
1156 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:FourPipeInduction ,
SPACE2 -1 FPIU , !- Name of System
ReheatCoilAvailSched , !- System Availability schedule
autosize , !- Maximum total air volume flow rate
1.0, !- Induction ratio
SPACE2 -1 ATU Supply Node , !- Terminal unit supply air inlet node
SPACE2 -1 ATU Induc Node , !- Terminal unit induced air inlet node
SPACE2 -1 In Node , !- Terminal unit air outlet node
COIL:Heating:Water , !- Heating coil object
SPACE2 -1 HW Coil , !- Heating coil name
autosize , !- Max hot water flow
0.0, !- Min hot water flow
0.001 , !- Heating Convergence Tolerance
COIL:Cooling:Water , !- Cooling coil object
SPACE2 -1 CW Coil , !- Cooling coil name
autosize , !- Max cold water flow
0.0, !- Min cold water flow
0.001 , !- Cooling Convergence Tolerance
SPACE2 -1 ATU Mixer; !- Zone mixer component name
COIL:Heating:Water ,
SPACE2 -1 HW Coil , !- Coil Name
ReheatCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
autosize , !- UA of the Coil {W/K}
autosize , !- Max Water Flow Rate of Coil {m3/s}
SPACE2 -1 HW Coil Water In Node , !- Coil_Water_Inlet_Node
SPACE2 -1 HW Coil Water Out Node , !- Coil_Water_Outlet_Node
SPACE2 -1 ATU Induc Node , !- Coil_Air_Inlet_Node
1.29. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 1157
COIL:Cooling:Water ,
SPACE2 -1 CW Coil , !- Coil Name
CWCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule
autosize , !- UA of the Coil
autosize , !- Max Water Flow Rate of Coil
, !- Leaving Relative Humidity of Coil
SPACE2 -1 CW Coil Water In Node , !- Coil_Water_Inlet_Node
SPACE2 -1 CW Coil Water Out Node , !- Coil_Water_Outlet_Node
SPACE2 -1 HW Coil Air Out Node , !- Coil_Air_Inlet_Node
SPACE2 -1 CW Coil Air Out Node; !- Coil_Air_Outlet_Node
AirLoopHVAC:ZoneMixer ,
SPACE2 -1 ATU Mixer , !- Mixer Name
SPACE2 -1 In Node , !- Outlet_Node
SPACE2 -1 ATU Supply Node , !- Inlet_Node_1
SPACE2 -1 CW Coil Air Out Node; !- Inlet_Node_2
1.29.11.2 Outputs
There are no specific outputs for the four pipe induction terminal units.
1.29.12 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:FourPipeBeam
The four-pipe beam air terminal system is a mixed air-hydronic system. A central, single-duct
forced-air system that supplies conditioned air to the zones. Chilled water circulates through
ceiling-mounted fin-tube convector units to provide sensible cooling. Hot water circulates through
the same convectors to provide heating. Water flow rate through the beam unit is varied to meet
the zone sensible cooling or heating load. Any dehumidification is done by the central forced-
air system. Thermodynamically, the cooled beam system resembles the four-pipe induction unit
(AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:FourPipeInduction).
To model a typical four-pipe beam system the user will need to define a conventional central constant
volume forced air system in order to deliver primary air to the beam. This central system (usually) provides
outside air for ventilation. Primary air is normally delivered at a fixed temperature but could be reset
by a schedule or using an outdoor air reset setpoint manager. On the supply side of this air loop there
will be the usual central conditioning equipment: outside air mixer, fan, heating and cooling coil. On the
zone equipment (demand) side of the loop, the four-pipe beams will be represented as air terminal units.
Because the four-pipe beam can provide heating the system can avoid over-cooling zones during times of
low load with cool primary air temperatures, similar to the action of a reheat coil in a VAV terminal.
Therefore it is not necessary to have additional zone equipment (such as baseboard heaters) to handle
heating (or reheating) loads.
Although the four-pipe beam equipment in a zone is treated by the program as a single terminal unit,
the actual installation will often have multiple beam units in each zone. In this model, it is only the
total length of all the beams and the total air flow of all the units that are described, not the number of
individual beam units.
If needed, the program (in its sizing calculation for the system) determines the total length of beams and
primary supply air flow that is needed to meet the zone design loads. The four pipe beam air terminal sizing
differs from other air terminals in that the primary supply air flow rate is sized using the entire performance
model and the flow rate is not the direct result from the Sizing:Zone and Sizing:System calculations. The
flow rates will be somewhere between what an air terminal would size out using VentilationRequirement
or Sensible in the Sizing:System object (either setting can be used).
The model includes two different types of inputs for flow rates, “design” and “rated … per-meter.” The
design values are the actual sizes of the flow rates as viewed from the zone and central air handler (but
1158 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
before zone multipliers). The design values include all the individual beam units and their lengths. The
rated per-meter values are used to characterize product performance at nominal rating conditions in such
a way that it can be scaled to match the size of a zone. The performance characteristics at the rating point
are not fixed in the program and can be entered by the user when they differ from default values. The rated
per meter values are normalized by the linear dimensions of the beam and are generally obtained from
product catalog data by dividing by the length of the beam. The rated primary air flow rate is assumed
to be for sea level conditions while the design primary air flow rate is modeled for the location elevation
above sea level.
1.29.12.1 Inputs
1.29.12.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user-assigned name for a particular beam unit. Any reference to this unit by another object
will use this name.
1.29.12.1.13 Field: Rated Primary Air Flow Rate per Beam Length (m3/s-m)
This is the primary air volume flow rate at rating conditions divided by the length of the beam, in
m3/s-m. This “catalog” value for volume flow rate input is converted to a mass flow rate using standard
air density at sea level. This value will be used for sizing the design primary air volume flow rate if the
total beam length is not also autosized. The default is 0.035 m3/s-m.
1.29.12.1.14 Field: Beam Rated Cooling Capacity per Beam Length (W/m)
This is the beam cooling capacity at rating conditions divided by the length of the beam, in W/m.
This is only the cooling contributed by the chilled water circulating through the convector and is separate
from any cooling (or heating) that may also be provided by the primary air. The default is 600 W/m.
1.29.12.1.15 Field: Beam Rated Cooling Room Air Chilled Water Temperature Dif-
ference (Delta C)
This input defines the value of the temperature difference between the room air and entering chilled
water at the rating point, in delta Celsius. This “catalog” input helps to define the operating conditions
that correspond with Rated Beam Cooling Capacity per Meter. It is used to normalize the independent
variable in the input field called Beam Cooling Capacity Temperature Difference Modification Factor Curve
or Table Name. The default is 10.0 delta C.
1.29.12.1.16 Field: Beam Rated Chilled Water Volume Flow Rate per Beam Length
(m3/s-m)
This input defines the value of the chilled water flow rate per meter length of beam at the rating point,
in m3/s-m. This input helps to define the operating conditions that correspond with Rated Beam Cooling
Capacity per Meter. It is used to normalize the independent variable in the input field called Beam Cooling
Capacity Chilled Water Flow Modification Factor Curve or Table Name. The default is 0.00005 m3/s-m.
1160 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.29.12.1.18 Field: Beam Cooling Capacity Air Flow Modification Factor Curve Name
This field is the name of a curve or table object that describes how the beam convector’s cooling
capacity varies as a function of the primary air flow rate. The single independent variable is the ratio
of the current primary air flow rate and the primary air flow rate at the rating point. The result of the
curve or table is multiplied by the rated capacity to adjust the cooling capacity. The factor is useful to
adjust for a range of primary air flow rates that a given product can accommodate. However since this
is a constant volume air terminal, the modification does not typically vary during the simulation and the
range of independent variable does not need to be all that broad in practice.
1.29.12.1.19 Field: Beam Cooling Capacity Chilled Water Flow Modification Factor
Curve Name
This field is the name of a curve or table object that describes how the beam convector’s cooling
capacity varies as a function of the water flow rate. The single independent variable is the ratio of the
current fluid flow rate to the fluid flow rate at the rating point. The result of the curve or table is multiplied
by the rated capacity to adjust the cooling capacity. The model will adjust the chilled water flow rate to
vary cooling power to meet the zone load, so for control purposes, the range of the independent variable
must include all the way down to zero flow, with zero capacity at zero flow.
1.29.12.1.20 Field: Beam Rated Heating Capacity per Beam Length (W/m)
This is the beam heating capacity at rating conditions divided by the length of the beam, in W/m.
This is only the heating contributed by the hot water circulating through the convector and is separate
from any heating (or cooling) that may also be provided by the primary air. The default is 1.200 W/m.
1.29.12.1.21 Field: Beam Rated Heating Room Air Hot Water Temperature Differ-
ence (Delta C)
This input defines the value of the temperature difference between the entering hot water and the room
air at the rating point, in delta Celsius. This input helps to define the operating conditions that correspond
with Rated Beam Heating Capacity per Meter. It is used to normalize the independent variable in the
input field called Beam Heating Capacity Temperature Difference Modification Factor Curve or Table
Name. The default is 27.8 delta C.
1.29.12.1.22 Field: Beam Rated Hot Water Volume Flow Rate per Beam Length
(m3/s-m)
This input defines the value of the hot water flow rate per meter length of beam at the rating point,
in m3/s/m, or more strictly m3/s-m. This input helps to define the operating conditions that correspond
with Rated Beam Heating Capacity per Meter. It is used to normalize the independent variable in the
input field called Beam Heating Capacity Hot Water Flow Modification Factor Curve or Table Name. The
default is 0.00005 m3/s-m.
1.29. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 1161
1.29.12.1.24 Field: Beam Heating Capacity Air Flow Modification Factor Curve
Name
This field is the name of a curve or table object that describes how the beam convectors heating capacity
varies as a function of the primary air flow rate. The single independent variable is the ratio of the current
primary air flow rate and the primary air flow rate at the rating point. The result of the curve or table
is multiplied by the rated capacity to adjust the heating capacity. The factor is useful to adjust for a
range of primary air rates that a given product can accommodate. However since this is a constant volume
air terminal, the modification does not typically vary during the simulation and the range of independent
variable does not need to be all that broad in practice.
1.29.12.1.25 Field: Beam Heating Capacity Hot Water Flow Modification Factor
Curve Name
This field is the name of a curve or table object that describes how the beam convector’s heating
capacity varies as a function of the water flow rate. The single independent variable is the ratio of the
current fluid flow rate to the fluid flow rate at the rating point. The result of the curve or table is multiplied
by the rated capacity to adjust the heating capacity. The model will adjust the hot water flow rate to vary
heating power to meet the zone load, so for control purposes, the range of the independent variable must
include all the way down to zero flow, with zero capacity at zero flow.
An example input follows:
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:FourPipeBeam ,
Zone One 4pipe Beam , !- Name
ALWAYS_ON , !- Primary Air Availability Schedule Name
ALWAYS_ON , !- Cooling Availability Schedule Name
ALWAYS_ON , !- Heating Availability Schedule Name
Zone One 4pipe Beam Inlet Node Name , !- Primary Air Inlet Node Name
Zone One 4pipe Beam Outlet Node Name , !- Primary Air Outlet Node Name
Zone One 4pipe Beam CW Inlet Node , !- Chilled Water Inlet Node Name
Zone One 4pipe Beam CW Outlet Node , !- Chilled Water Outlet Node Name
AUTOSIZE , !- Design Primary Air Volume Flow Rate
AUTOSIZE , !- Design Chilled Water Volume Flow Rate
AUTOSIZE , !- Design Hot Water Volume Flow Rate
AUTOSIZE , !- Zone Total Beam Length
0.036 , !- Rated Primary Air Flow Rate per Beam Length
597 , !- Rated Beam Cooling Capacity per Beam Length
10.0 , !- Rated Cooling Room Air Chilled Water Temperature Difference
5.2E-5 , !- Rated Chilled Water Volume Flow Rate per Beam Length
CapModFuncOfTempDiff , !- Beam Cooling Capacity Temperature Difference Modification Factor Curve or
Table Name
CoolCapModFuncOfSAFlow , !- Beam Cooling Capacity Air Flow Modification Factor Curve or Table Name
CapModFuncOfWaterFlow , !- Beam Cooling Capacity Chilled Water Flow Modification Factor Curve or Table
Name
1548 , !- Rated Beam Heating Capacity per Beam Length
27.8, !- Rated Heating Room Air Hot Water Temperature Difference
5.2E-5, !- Rated Hot Water Volume Flow Rate per Beam Length
CapModFuncOfTempDiff , !- Beam Heating Capacity Temperature Difference Modification Factor Curve or
Table Name
HeatCapModFuncOfSAFlow , !- Beam Heating Capacity Air Flow Modification Factor Curve or Table Name
CapModFuncOfWaterFlow ; !- Beam Heating Capacity Hot Water Flow Modification Factor Curve or Table
Name
1162 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Curve:Linear , ! y = x
CapModFuncOfTempDiff , !-Name
0, !_ Coef Const
1, !- Coef x
0, !- min x
1.5, !- max x
0.0 , !- min y
1.5; ! max y
Table:OneIndependentVariable ,
CoolCapModFuncOfSAFlow , !- Name
quadratic ,!- Curve Type
EvaluateCurveToLimits ,!- Interpolation Method
0.714 ,! - min x
1.2857 ,! - max x
0.8234 ,! - min y
1.1256 ,! - max y
dimensionless , !-
dimensionless , !-
, !- normalization ref
0.714286 , 0.823403 ,
1.0, 1.0,
1.2857 , 1.1256;
Table:OneIndependentVariable ,
CapModFuncOfWaterFlow , !- Name
quadratic ,!- Curve Type
EvaluateCurveToLimits ,!- Interpolation Method
0.0,!- min x
1.333333 ,! - max x
0.0,!- min y
1.04,!- max y
dimensionless , !-
dimensionless , !-
, !- normalization ref
0.0, 0.0,
0.05, 0.001 ,
0.33333 , 0.71,
0.5, 0.85,
0.666667 , 0.92,
0.833333 , 0.97,
1.0, 1.0,
1.333333 , 1.04;
Table:OneIndependentVariable ,
HeatCapModFuncOfSAFlow , !- Name
quadratic ,!- Curve Type
EvaluateCurveToLimits ,!- Interpolation Method
0.714 ,! - min x
1.2857 ,! - max x
0.8554 ,! - min y
1.0778 ,! - max y
dimensionless , !-
dimensionless , !-
, !- normalization ref
0.714286 , 0.8554 ,
1.0, 1.0,
1.2857 , 1.0778;
1.29.12.2 Outputs
1.29.12.2.1 Zone Air Terminal Beam Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
These are the sensible cooling power and energy delivered by the beams to the zone, exclusive of any
cooling or heating done by the primary air.
1.29.12.2.5 Zone Air Terminal Primary Air Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
Sensible cooling by the primary air to the zone, exclusive of any cooling or heating done by the beams.
1.29.12.2.6 Zone Air Terminal Primary Air Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
Sensible cooling by the primary air to the zone, exclusive of any cooling or heating done by the beams.
1.29.12.2.7 Zone Air Terminal Primary Air Sensible Heating Rate [W]
Heating by the primary air to the zone, exclusive of any cooling or heating done by the beams.
1.29.12.2.8 Zone Air Terminal Primary Air Sensible Heating Energy [J]
Heating by the primary air to the zone, exclusive of any cooling or heating done by the beams.
1.29.13 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:CooledBeam
The Cooled Beam system is a mixed air-hydronic system. A central, single-duct forced-air system supplies
conditioned ventilation air to the zones. Sensible cooling is done by chilled water circulating through ceiling
mounted cooled beam units. Chilled water flow rate through the cooled beam units is varied to meet the
zone sensible cooling load. Any dehumidification is done by the central ventilation air system. Heating
is usually accomplished with hot water radiators. Thermodynamically, the cooled beam system resembles
the four-pipe induction unit.
To model a typical cooled beam system the user will need to define a conventional central constant
volume forced air system. This system will normally be 100% outside air delivered at a fixed supply
temperature (which could be reset by schedule or by outside air temperature). On the supply side of this
air loop there will be the usual central AC equipment: outside air mixer, fan, heating and cooling coil.
On the zone equipment (demand) side of the loop, the chilled beams will be represented as terminal units.
Additional zone equipment (such as baseboard heaters) will be needed to handle heating loads.
Although the cooled beam equipment in a zone is treated by the program as a single terminal unit, the
actual installation will have multiple beams in each zone. The program (in its sizing calculation for the
system) figures out how many beams of what length are needed to meet the zone design load.
1.29.13.1 Inputs
1.29.13.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user assigned name for a particular chilled beam unit. Any reference to this unit by another
object will use this name.
1164 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:CooledBeam ,
SPACE2 -1 CB , !- Name
CWCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Active , !- Cooled Beam Type
SPACE2 -1 ATU Supply Node ,!- Supply Air Inlet Node Name
SPACE2 -1 In Node , !- Supply Air Outlet Node Name
SPACE2 -1 CW Coil Water In Node , !- Chilled Water Inlet Node Name
SPACE2 -1 CW Coil Water Out Node , !- Chilled Water Outlet Node Name
, !- Supply Air Volumetric Flow Rate
, !- Maximum Total Chilled Water Volumetric Flow Rate
, !- Number of Beams
, !- Beam Length
, !- Design Inlet Water Temperature
, !- Design Outlet Water temperature
, !- Coil Surface Area per Coil Length
, !- Model Parameter a
, !- Model Parameter n1
, !- Model Parameter n2
, !- Model Parameter n3
, !- Model Parameter a0
, !- Model Parameter K1
, !- Model Parameter n
, !- Coefficient of Induction Kin
; !- Leaving Pipe Inside Diameter
1.29.13.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Sum,Zone Air Terminal Beam Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
• HVAC,Sum, Zone Air Terminal Supply Air Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
1.29.13.2.3 Zone Air Terminal Supply Air Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
Sensible cooling by the supply air to the zone, exclusive of any cooling done by the beams.
1.29.13.2.4 Zone Air Terminal Supply Air Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
Sensible cooling by the supply air to the zone, exclusive of any cooling done by the beams.
1.29. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 1167
1.29.13.2.5 Zone Air Terminal Supply Air Sensible Heating Rate [W]
Heating by the supply air to the zone, exclusive of any cooling done by the beams.
1.29.13.2.6 Zone Air Terminal Supply Air Sensible Heating Energy [J]
Heating by the supply air to the zone, exclusive of any cooling done by the beams.
1.29.14 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer
The air terminal mixer provides a means of supplying central system air either to air inlet or supply side
of a ZoneHVAC equipment such as a four pipe fan coil. Normally the central air would be ventilation air
from a dedicated outside air system (DOAS).
This terminal mixer object mixes conditioned outdoor air (primary air) from DOAS air loop and recir-
culating (secondary air) and deliver it either to inlet or supply side of a local ZoneHVAC equipment. The
terminal mixer can be connected either to the inlet or supply side of the local ZoneHVAC equipment and the
connection type is specified in the input field Mixer Connection Type. If the AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer
object is connected to the supply side, a mix of conditioned outdoor air from a central dedicated outdoor
air system (DOAS) with conditioned recirculation air from the local ZoneHVAC equipment is supplied
as a single stream to the conditioned zone at its inlet node. If the AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer ob-
ject is connected to the inlet side, a mix of outdoor air from the a central dedicated outdoor air system
(DOAS) with un-conditioned recirculation air from a zone exhaust node is supplied to the ZoneHVAC
equipment inlet node. The mixer model will sum the two air streams and average the air properties. The
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer is used with:
• ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil
• ZoneHVAC:WaterToAirHeatPump
• ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalAirConditioner
• ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalHeatPump
• ZoneHVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow
• ZoneHVAC:UnitVentilator
• AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem
1.29.14.1 Inputs
1.29.14.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user assigned name for a particular terminal mixer unit. Any reference to this unit by another
object will use this name.
• ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil
1168 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Figure 1.128: Inlet Side Mixer Air Terminal Unit with ZoneHVAC Equipment
1.29. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 1169
Figure 1.129: Supply Side Mixer Air Terminal Unit with ZoneHVAC equipment
1170 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• ZoneHVAC:WaterToAirHeatPump
• ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalAirConditioner
• ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalHeatPump
• ZoneHVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow
• ZoneHVAC:UnitVentilator
• AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer ,
SPACE2 -1 DOAS Air Terminal , !- Name
ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil , !- ZoneHVAC Unit Object Type
SPACE2 -1 Fan Coil , !- ZoneHVAC Unit Object Name
SPACE2 -1 Fan Coil Inlet , !- Mixer Outlet Node Name
SPACE2 -1 ATM Primary Inlet , !- Mixer Primary Air Inlet Node Name
SPACE2 -1 ATM Secondary Inlet ,!- Mixer Secondary Air Inlet Node Name
InletSide; !- Mixer Connection Type
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer ,
SPACE1 -1 DOAS Air Terminal , !- Name
ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil , !- ZoneHVAC Unit Object Type
SPACE1 -1 Fan Coil , !- ZoneHVAC Unit Object Name
SPACE1 -1 Supply Inlet , !- Mixer Outlet Node Name
SPACE1 -1 ATM Primary Inlet , !- Mixer Primary Air Inlet Node Name
SPACE1 -1 Fan Coil Outlet , !- Mixer Secondary Air Inlet Node Name
SupplySide; !- Mixer Connection Type
1.29.15 AirTerminal:DualDuct:ConstantVolume
The AirTerminal:DualDuct:ConstantVolume simulation or the typical Multizone is described by this Air
Distribution Unit (ADU). Multizone systems condition all the air in a central apparatus and distribute it
to the conditioned zones through two parallel ducts. One duct carries cold air and the other warm air,
providing air sources for both heating and cooling at all times. In each conditioned zone, a mixing valve
responsive to a room thermostat mixes the warm and cold air in proper proportions to satisfy the prevailing
heating or cooling load of the space. The Multizone ADU is the specific component that leads to the zone
containing the mixer and the mixing damper and then connecting to the zone. The total airflow to each
room is kept constant while the proportion of hot air to cold air is adjusted to maintain the temperature
in each zone at the desired level.
1.29.15.1 Inputs
1.29.15.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name for the Multizone ADU.
AirTerminal:DualDuct:ConstantVolume ,
Zone2MixDamp , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule
Zone 2 Dual Duct Outlet , !- Unit Air Outlet Node
Zone 2 Dual Duct Hot Inlet , !- Unit Hot Air Inlet Node
Zone 2 Dual Duct Cold Inlet , !- Unit Cold Air Inlet Node
0.36; !- Max Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.29.15.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Cold Supply Duct Damper Position []
1.29.16 AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV
AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV (i.e., Dual duct variable air volume (DDVAV)) systems are used to obtain
zone temperature control by mixing the cold and warm air in various volume combinations. The fan is
sized for the anticipated maximum coincident hot or cold volume, not the sum of the instantaneous peaks.
This system has an advantage of a true single path VAV system, except for warm port leakage. When cold
air is modulated for control before mixing, it operates similar to the VAV induction when mixing occurs
without hot deck reheat. It is similar to a reheat system when mixing occurs while the hot deck is using
the reheat coil. It uses more energy than a true VAV system, but less than a constant volume dual duct
system.
1.29.16.1 Inputs
1.29.16.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name for the AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV Air Distribution Unit (ADU).
1.29. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 1173
AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV ,
Zone1MixDamp , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 1 Dual Duct Outlet , !- Air Outlet Node Name
Zone 1 Dual Duct Hot Inlet , !- Hot Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 1 Dual Duct Cold Inlet , !- Cold Air Inlet Node Name
autosize , !- Maximum Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.1, !- Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction
ZoneMinOARequirements; !- Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name
Schedule:Compact ,
Min OARequirements Sched , !- Name
Any Number , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
1174 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.29.16.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Cold Supply Duct Damper Position []
1.29.16.2.3 Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This output is the amount of outdoor air entering the zone. This is the average value over the frequency
being reported. The amount of outdoor air is defined as the terminal unit air volume flow rate multiplied
by the fraction of outdoor air entering the air loop’s outdoor air system.
1.29.17 AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV:OutdoorAir
AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV:OutdoorAir provides a model for a type of dual duct air system in which one
duct provides outdoor air ventilation and the other provides VAV cooling. The Outdoor Air stream and the
Recirculated Air stream are conditioned and supplied through separate air streams as part of a centralized
dedicated outdoor air (DOAS) distribution system. The dual duct arrangement allows the ventilation air
to be controlled separately using schedules or occupancy demand while the recirculated air is controlled
to meet the dry-bulb zone temperature setpoint. The two airstreams remain decoupled until the terminal
box where they are mixed. The terminal unit is meant for systems regulating outdoor air based only on
demand control or code minimum settings and not on economizer operation.
This air terminal does not have heating coils and is not configured for conditions zones that need heat.
Additional ZoneHVAC equipment, such as baseboards or fan coil units, are needed to provide heating to
the zone when using this air terminal.
Although this air terminal is primarily for dual duct system, it is allowed to use just the outdoor air
side in a single duct system. This can be useful for modeling single duct DOAS when the required volume
of outdoor air varies over time.
1.29.17.1 Inputs
1.29.17.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name for the AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV:OutdoorAir Air Distribution Unit (ADU).
1.29. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 1175
AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV:OutdoorAir ,
Media_Center Dual Duct Box Component , !- Name
ALWAYS_ON , !- Availability Schedule Name
Media_Center Dual Duct Box Outlet Node Name , !- Air Outlet Node Name
Media_Center Dual Duct Box Inlet Node Name , !- Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name
RC Media_Center Dual Duct Box Inlet Node Name , !- Recirculated Air Inlet Node Name
AUTOSIZE , !- Maximum Terminal Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Media_Center Dual Duct Box OA Design Spec , !- Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name
CurrentOccupancy; !- Per Person Ventilation Rate Mode
DesignSpecification :OutdoorAir ,
Media_Center Dual Duct Box OA Design Spec , !- Name
1176 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.29.17.2 Outputs
• Output:Variable,*,Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Duct Damper Position,hourly; !- HVAC Average
[]
• Output:Variable,*,Zone Air Terminal Recirculated Air Duct Damper Position,hourly; !- HVAC Av-
erage []
1.30.1 ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem
The simplest piece of zone equipment is the ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem component. Zone-
HVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem is used in situations where the user wishes to study the performance of a
building without modeling a full HVAC system. In such a case, the Ideal Loads Air System is usually the
sole conditioning component: the user does not need to specify air loops, water loops, etc. All that is
needed for the ideal system are zone controls, zone equipment configurations, and the ideal loads system
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1177
component. The use of a return plenum is optional and will require use of the AirloopHVAC:ReturnPlenum
object.
This component can be operated with infinite or finite heating and cooling capacity. For either mode –
infinite or limited capacity – the user can also specify on/off schedules for heating and cooling and outdoor
air controls. There are also optional controls for dehumidification, humidification, economizer, and heat
recovery. This component may be used in combination with other HVAC equipment serving the same zone.
This component can be thought of as an ideal unit that mixes air at the zone exhaust condition (or
plenum outlet condition when a plenum is attached) with the specified amount of outdoor air and then adds
or removes heat and moisture at 100% efficiency in order to produce a supply air stream at the specified
conditions. The energy required to condition the supply air is metered and reported as DistrictHeating
and DistrictCooling.
Notes: The ideal loads system uses the zone return node or an optional zone exhaust node to extract
air from the zone. When the AirloopHVAC:ReturnPlenum is used the inlet of the ideal loads system is
connected to the plenum outlet air node while the outlet of the ideal loads system is connected to a zone inlet
node. The node name connected between the zone exhaust air node and plenum inlet air node must match in
the ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections and AirloopHVAC:ReturnPlenum objects. Every zone served by an
HVAC component must have a return air node, even though this node may not be connected to anything. If
more than one ideals loads air systems are connected to the same AirloopHVAC:ReturnPlenum then one of
the ideal loads air systems will connect to the ZoneHVAC:ReturnPlenum outlet air node and the remaining
ideal loads air systems connected to the same return plenum will connect to the ZoneHVAC:ReturnPlenum
induced air outlet nodes.
The ideal loads system was significantly expanded in version 7.0 (October 2011). As part of this
upgrade, any change in the moisture content of the supply air stream results in a latent cooling (dehumid-
ification) or latent heating (humidification) load which is metered as DistrictCooling and DistrictHeating
energy consumption. Prior to version 7.0, when the ideal loads system was in heating mode, only the en-
ergy for sensible heating was metered. This results in significant changes in reported energy use compared
to earlier versions, especially when using the ConstantSupplyHumidityRatio option for Humidification
Control Type.
Older idf files which are transitioned to version 7.0 will automatically be set to use the ConstantSup-
plyHumidityRatio option for both dehumidification and humidification controls, because this is equiv-
alent to the controls used in the older version of this system. However, the user should review all of the
humidity control options and select the one which best reflects the goal of the simulation.
1.30.1.1 Inputs
1.30.1.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user assigned name for each ideal loads air system component. This name is referenced in a
ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList object.
humidity ratio will be used. For all options, the supply air humidity ratio will never be allowed to exceed
saturation at the supply dry bulb temperature.
The selected dehumidification control type is always applied when the unit is in cooling mode. If the
unit is in deadband mode (not actively heating the supply air) control type Humidistat will be active. If
the unit is in heating mode, control type Humidistat will be active if the Humidification Control Type
field below is set to Humidistat or None.
This allows the ideal loads system to heat and dehumidify at the same time.
• None means that the design occupancy level will be used when computing the minimum outdoor
air flow rate based on the inputs in the Design Specification Outdoor Air Object (see previous field).
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1181
• OccupancySchedule means that the current occupancy level will be used when computing the
minimum outdoor air flow rate based on the inputs in the Design Specification Outdoor Air Object
(see previous field).
• CO2Setpoint means that the design occupancy level will be used when computing the minimum
outdoor air flow rate based on the inputs in the Design Specification Outdoor Air Object (see
previous field). In addition, the minimum outdoor air flow rate may be increased if necessary to
maintain the level of indoor air carbon dioxide at or below the setpoint defined in a ZoneCon-
trol:ContaminantController object.
ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem ,
Zone1 Ideal Loads System , !- Name
AlwaysOn , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone1 Ideal Loads Supply Node , !- Zone Supply Air Node Name
Zone1 Ideal Loads Return Node , ! Zone Exhaust Air Node Name
50, !- Maximum Heating Supply Air Temperature {C}
13, !- Minimum Cooling Supply Air Temperature {C}
0.0156 , !- Maximum Heating Supply Air Humidity Ratio {kgWater/kgDryAir}
0.0077 , !- Minimum Cooling Supply Air Humidity Ratio {kgWater/kgDryAir}
NoLimit , !- Heating Limit
1182 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.30.1.2 Outputs
The Ideal Loads air system outdoor air load variables are only calculated when there is active heating or
cooling (or humidification/dehumidification).
• HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
• HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.30.1.2.2 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Sensible Heating Energy [J]
1.30.1.2.3 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Sensible Heating Rate [W]
The sensible heating energy (or rate) added to raise the temperature of the mixed air stream to the
temperature of the supply air stream. This is the ideal “heating coil” load.
1.30.1.2.4 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Latent Heating Energy [J]
1.30.1.2.5 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Latent Heating Rate [W]
The latent heating energy (or rate) added to raise the humidity ratio of the mixed air stream to the
temperature of the supply air stream. This is the ideal “humidifier” load.
1.30.1.2.6 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Total Heating Energy [J]
1.30.1.2.7 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Total Heating Rate [W]
The total (sensible and latent) heating energy (or rate) added to raise the mixed air stream to the
temperature and humidity ratio of the supply air stream. Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Total Heating
Energy is metered as DistrictHeating energy.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1185
1.30.1.2.8 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
1.30.1.2.9 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
The sensible cooling energy (or rate) removed to lower the temperature of the mixed air stream to the
temperature of the supply air stream. This is the ideal “cooling coil” sensible load.
1.30.1.2.10 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Latent Cooling Energy [J]
1.30.1.2.11 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Latent Cooling Rate [W]
The latent cooling energy (or rate) removed to lower the humidity ratio of the mixed air stream to the
temperature of the supply air stream. This is the ideal “cooling coil” latent load.
1.30.1.2.12 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Total Cooling Energy [J]
1.30.1.2.13 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Total Cooling Rate [W]
The total (sensible and latent) cooling energy (or rate) removed to lower the mixed air stream to the
temperature and humidity ratio of the supply air stream. Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Total Cooling
Energy is metered as DistrictCooling energy. This is the ideal “cooling coil” total load.
1.30.1.2.26 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Sensible Heating Energy [J]
1.30.1.2.27 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Sensible Heating Rate [W]
The sensible heating energy (or rate) required to raise the temperature of the outdoor air to the zone
exhaust air temperature. This value will be calculated only when heating is active.
1.30.1.2.28 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Latent Heating Energy [J]
1.30.1.2.29 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Latent Heating Rate [W]
The latent heating energy (or rate) required to raise the humidity ratio of the outdoor air to the zone
exhaust air humidity ratio. This value will be calculated only when humidification is active.
1.30.1.2.30 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Total Heating Energy [J]
1.30.1.2.31 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Total Heating Rate [W]
The total (sensible and latent) heating energy (or rate) required to raise the temperature and humidity
ratio of the outdoor air to the zone exhaust air humidity ratio. This value will be calculated only when
heating or humidification is active.
1.30.1.2.32 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
1.30.1.2.33 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
The sensible cooling energy (or rate) required to lower (or raise) the temperature of the outdoor air to
the zone exhaust air temperature. This value will be calculated only when cooling is active.
1.30.1.2.34 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Latent Cooling Energy [J]
1.30.1.2.35 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Latent Cooling Rate [W]
The latent cooling energy (or rate) required to lower (or raise) the humidity ratio of the outdoor air to
the zone exhaust air humidity ratio. This will be calculated only when dehumidification is active.
1.30.1.2.36 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Total Cooling Energy [J]
1.30.1.2.37 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Total Cooling Rate [W]
The total (sensible and latent) cooling energy (or rate) required to lower the temperature and humidity
ratio of the outdoor air to the zone exhaust air temperature and humidity ratio. This value will be
calculated only when cooling or dehumidification is active.
1.30.1.2.38 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Sensible Heating Energy [J]
1.30.1.2.39 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Sensible Heating Rate [W]
The sensible heating energy (or rate) added to the outdoor air stream from heat recovery.
1.30.1.2.40 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Latent Heating Energy [J]
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1187
1.30.1.2.41 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Latent Heating Rate [W]
The latent heating energy (or rate) added to the outdoor air stream from heat recovery.
1.30.1.2.42 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Total Heating Energy [J]
1.30.1.2.43 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Total Heating Rate [W]
The total (sensible and latent) heating energy (or rate) added to the outdoor air stream from heat
recovery.
1.30.1.2.44 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
1.30.1.2.45 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
The sensible cooling energy (or rate) removed from the outdoor air stream from heat recovery.
1.30.1.2.46 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Latent Cooling Energy [J]
1.30.1.2.47 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Latent Cooling Rate [W]
The latent cooling energy (or rate) removed from the outdoor air stream from heat recovery.
1.30.1.2.48 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Total Cooling Energy [J]
1.30.1.2.49 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Total Cooling Rate [W]
The total (sensible and latent) cooling energy (or rate) removed from the outdoor air stream from heat
recovery.
1.30.1.2.53 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
The mass flow rate of the outdoor air stream in kg/s.
1188 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.30.1.2.54 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
The volume flow rate of the outdoor air stream in m3/s using the standard density. The standard
density is determined for dry air at the standard barometric pressure for the location’s elevation and a
temperature of 20.0ºC. The standard density does not vary over time.
1.30.1.2.55 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
The mass flow rate of the supply air stream in kg/s.
1.30.1.2.56 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
The volume flow rate of the supply air stream in m3/s using the standard density. The standard density
is determined for dry air at the standard barometric pressure for the location’s elevation and a temperature
of 20.0ºC. The standard density does not vary over time.
1.30.2 ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil
What is a fan coil unit? Like many HVAC terms, “fan coil unit” is used rather loosely. Sometimes it is used
for terminal units that would be better described as powered induction units. Carrier and others use the
term for the room side of refrigerant-based split systems. Here we are modeling in-room forced-convection
hydronic units. The hydronic heating coil may be replaced with an electric heating coil. Typically these
units are small (200 – 1200 cfm) and self-contained. They are mostly used in exterior zones, usually in
hotels, apartments, or offices. They may be connected to ducted outside air, or have a direct outside air
vent, but they do not have outside air economizers. Units with outside air economizers are marketed (in
the United States) as unit ventilators. Unit ventilators are typically bigger than fan coils and are widely
used in classrooms or other applications where ventilation is a priority. If a zonal unit with an outside
economizer is desired, ZoneHVAC:UnitVentilator should be used.
The heating or cooling output of the fan coil unit is controlled by varying the air flow rate, the water
flow rate, or both. Air flow rate can be controlled by cycling the fan on/off or with a variable speed fan
drive. The most common setup is a two or three speed fan with the speed selected by hand. The fan
then cycles on/off to control heating / cooling output. The controls are often a wall mounted thermostat
with hand selection of heating/cooling and fan speed (off/low/medium/high). These controls may also be
mounted on the unit.
Carrier offers a retrofit VSD motor for fan coil units. It claims up to 45% energy savings from such a
retrofit, as well as increased comfort and less noise compared to a cycling fan (fan coil fans are typically
noisy and inefficient). Some other manufacturers are also offering units with VSD fans. Variable speed
fans appear to offer an easy way to significantly increase the efficiency of what have typically been very
inefficient units.
EnergyPlus provides 6 capacity control methods for this unit:
5. multi-speed fan with cycling between speeds and constant water flow.
In EnergyPlus the fan coil units are modeled as compound components. That is, they are assembled
from other components. Fan coils contain an outdoor air mixer, a fan, a heating coil and a cooling coil.
These components are described elsewhere in this document. The fan coil input simply requires the names
of these four components, which have to be described elsewhere in the input. The input also requires the
name of an availability schedule, maximum airflow rate, outdoor airflow rate, and maximum and minimum
hot (for hydronic heating coil only) and cold water volumetric flow rates. The unit is connected to the
zone inlet and exhaust nodes and the outdoor air by specifying unit inlet, and outlet air node names and
the outdoor air mixer object name. The outdoor air mixer child object provides the outdoor air and relief
air nodes names. Note that the unit air inlet node should be the same as a zone exhaust node and the
unit outlet node should be the same as a zone inlet node. The fan coil unit is connected to a hot water
loop through its hot water coil or with no hot water loop when using an electric coil (demand side) and to
a chilled water loop (demand side) through its cooling coil.
Note that the type of fan component associated with the fan coil unit depends on the type of
capacity control method chosen. For ConstantFanVariableFlow a Fan:OnOff or Fan:ConstantVolume
should be used. For CyclingFan, a Fan:OnOff should be used, for VariableFanVariableFlow or Vari-
ableFanConstantFlow a Fan:VariableVolume, for MultiSpeedFan a Fan:OnOff should be used, and for
ASHRAE90VariableFan, a Fan:OnOff or Fan:VariableVolume should be chosen.
Fan coil units can be 4-pipe or 2-pipe. For 4-pipe units there are 2 supply pipes and 2 return pipes. For
2-pipe units there is a single supply pipe and a single return pipe and the supply is switched between hot
and chilled water depending on the season. EnergyPlus models 4-pipe units, but the 4-pipe model can be
used to model 2-pipe units by using the coil availability schedules to make sure that either hot or chilled
water is exclusively available. Fan coil units with hydronic heat can instead be modeled using an electric
heating coil if desired (i.e., replace the hydronic heating coil with an electric heating coil).
1.30.2.1 Inputs
1.30.2.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user assigned name for an instance of a Fan Coil unit. Any reference to this Fan Coil unit
by another object will use this name.
the zone sensible load multiplied by the low speed supply air flow ratio. The water coil water flow rate,
or the electric heating coil part-load ratio, is modulated to meet the zone load. If the zone sensible load
is greater than the zone sensible load multiplied by the low speed supply air flow ratio, then the air and
water flow rate is increased to meet the load. If the zone load is greater than the design sensible load, the
fan air flow rate is maintained at the maximum value while the water flow rate is further increased to the
maximum available while electric heating coils are maintained at the maximum output.
Note: when ASHRAE90VariableFan is selected, if the the Minimum Supply Air Temper-
ature in Cooling/Heating Mode inputs are not specified, the simulation must include zone
sizing to calculate the zone design sensible cooling and heating load used to modulate the
fan speed and, for water coils, the water flow rate or for electric heating coils, the part load
ratio.
MultiSpeedFan: for a given load, the fan cycles between speeds when fan speed selected is higher
than the minimum speed or the fan cycles on-off when the fan speed selected is the minimum and the fan
operating schedule is cycling fan. When the fan is operating as a continuous fan, then the fan runs at
minimum speed even when there is no load to meet. When the speed selected is higher than the minimum
speed, then the fan cycles between consecutive speed regardless of the fan operating schedule type. The
model selects at what fan speed to run depending on cooling or heating load.
• OutdoorAir:Mixer
This input field should be left blank when the FanCoil is connected to an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer
object. If this field is left blank, an outdoor air mixer object is not simulated.
• Fan:SystemModel
• Fan:OnOff
• Fan:ConstantVolume
• Fan:VariableVolume
Note that Fan:SystemModel was added as of version 8.6 and is recommended for use in new models.
Fan:OnOff, Fan:ConstantVolume, and Fan:VariableVolume may be deprecated in a future version.
• Coil:Cooling:Water
• Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry
• CoilSystem:Cooling:Water:HeatExchangerAssisted
The input requirements for these chilled water coil objects are described elsewhere in this document.
• Coil:Cooling:Water
• Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry
• CoilSystem:Cooling:Water:HeatExchangerAssisted
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Electric
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1193
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Electric
ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil ,
Zone1FanCoil , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
ConstantFanVariableFlow , !- Capacity Control Method
autosize , !- Maximum Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Low Speed Supply Air Flow Ratio
, !- Medium Speed Supply Air Flow Ratio
autosize , !- Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
OUTAIRFANCOILSCHEDULE , !- Outdoor Air Schedule Name
Zone1FanCoilAirInletNode ,!- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone1FanCoilAirOutletNode , !- Air Outlet Node Name
OutdoorAir:Mixer , !- Outdoor Air Mixer Object Type
Zone1FanCoilOAMixer , !- Outdoor Air Mixer Name
Fan:ConstantVolume , !- Supply Air Fan Object Type
Zone1FanCoilFan , !- Supply Air Fan Name
Coil:Cooling:Water , !- Cooling Coil Object Type
Zone1FanCoilCoolingCoil , !- Cooling Coil Name
autosize , !- Maximum Cold Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0, !- Minimum Cold Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.001 , !- Cooling Convergence Tolerance
Coil:Heating:Water , !- Heating Coil Object Type
Zone1FanCoilHeatingCoil , !- Heating Coil Name
autosize , !- Maximum Hot Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0, !- Minimum Hot Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.001; !- Heating Convergence Tolerance
OutdoorAir:Mixer ,
Zone1FanCoilOAMixer , ! name
Zone1FanCoilOAMixerOutletNode , !Mixed Air Node Name
Zone1FanCoilOAInNode , !Outdoor Air Stream Node Name
Zone1FanCoilExhNode , !Relief Air Stream Node Name
Zone1FanCoilAirInletNode ; !Return Air Stream Node Name
Fan:OnOff ,
Zone1FanCoilFan , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.5, !- Fan Total Efficiency
75.0, !- Pressure Rise {Pa}
autosize , !- Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1195
Coil:Cooling:Water ,
Zone1FanCoilCoolingCoil , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
autosize , !- Design Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- Design Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- Design Inlet Water Temperature {C}
autosize , !- Design Inlet Air Temperature {C}
autosize , !- Design Outlet Air Temperature {C}
autosize , !- Design Inlet Air Humidity Ratio {kgWater/kgDryAir}
autosize , !- Design Outlet Air Humidity Ratio {kgWater/kgDryAir}
Zone1FanCoilChWInletNode ,!- Water Inlet Node Name
Zone1FanCoilChWOutletNode , !- Water Outlet Node Name
Zone1FanCoilFanOutletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone1FanCoilCCOutletNode ,!-Air Outlet Node Name
SimpleAnalysis , !- Type of Analysis
CrossFlow; !- Heat Exchanger Configuration
Coil:Heating:Water ,
Zone1FanCoilHeatingCoil , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
autosize , !- U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
autosize , !- Maximum Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
Zone1FanCoilHWInletNode , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Zone1FanCoilHWOutletNode ,!- Water Outlet Node Name
Zone1FanCoilCCOutletNode ,!- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone1FanCoilAirOutletNode , !-Air Outlet Node Name
UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate , !- Performance Input Method
autosize , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
82.2, !- Design Inlet Water Temperature {C}
16.6, !- Design Inlet Air Temperature {C}
71.1, !- Design Outlet Water Temperature {C}
32.2; !- Design Outlet Air Temperature {C}
Curve:Exponent ,
FanPowerRatioCurve , !- Name
0.0, !- Coefficient1 Constant
1.0, !- Coefficient2 Constant
3.0, !- Coefficient3 Constant
0.0, !- Minimum Value of x
1.5, !- Maximum Value of x
0.01, !- Minimum Curve Output
1.5; !- Maximum Curve Output
Curve:Cubic ,
FanEffRatioCurve , !- Name
0.33856828 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
1.72644131 , !- Coefficient2 x
-1.49280132 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
0.42776208 , !- Coefficient4 x**3
0.5, !- Minimum Value of x
1.5, !- Maximum Value of x
0.3, !- Minimum Curve Output
1.0; !- Maximum Curve Output
1.30.2.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Fan Coil Heating Rate [W]
1.30.3 ZoneHVAC:UnitVentilator
Unit ventilators are zone equipment units which are assembled from other components. They contain
a built-in outdoor air mixer, a fan, a heating coil, and a cooling coil. These components are described
elsewhere in this document, except the built-in outdoor air mixer which is contained within the unit
1198 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
ventilator statement. The unit ventilator input simply requires the names of these other three components,
which have to be described elsewhere in the input. The input also requires the name of an availability
schedule, maximum airflow rate, outdoor air control information (control type and schedules), an outdoor
airflow rate, and maximum and minimum hot and cold water mass flow rates. The unit is connected to the
zone inlet and exhaust nodes and the outdoor air by specifying unit inlet, outlet, outdoor air and exhaust
(relief) air node names. Note that if the Unit Ventilator is not connected to central dedicated outdoor
air (DOA), then the unit air inlet node should be the same as a zone exhaust air node and the unit air
outlet node should be the same as a zone air inlet node. The three node name input fields: Outdoor Air
Node Name, Exhaust Air Node Name, and Mixed Air Node Name are required fields only when the built-in
outdoor air mixer is used to provide outdoor air. If the Unit Ventilator is connected to a central dedicated
outdoor air (DOA) via AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer, then the above three node name input fields are
not required and must be left blank. In the later case the Unit Ventilator node connection to the zone
air exhaust node and the zone air inlet node are described in AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer object. In
general, the unit ventilator input is very similar to the fan coil unit input, and the unit is connected to a
hot water loop (demand side) through its hot water coil and to a chilled water loop (demand side) through
its cooling coil.
The main difference between the fan coil and unit ventilator input is that the unit ventilator has a built-
in outdoor air mixer with its own specialized controls. The outdoor air control type can be selected from one
of the following options: “variable percent”, “fixed temperature” or “fixed amount”. In fixed temperature
control, the amount of outdoor air is varied between the minimum outdoor air fraction (specified by a
schedule) and 100% outdoor air to obtain a mixed air temperature as close as possible to the temperature
schedule defined in the input. Variable percent control will also vary the amount of outdoor air between
the minimum and maximum fractions (both specified in input by the user) to meet the load without the
use of a coil if possible. In fixed amount control, the outdoor air flow rate is fixed to the specified value
by the user. In this control strategy, the maximum outdoor air flow rate and schedule are automatically
set to be equal to the minimum outdoor air flow rate and schedule. These control types are based on the
2004 ASHRAE Systems and Equipment Handbook (pp. 31.1-31.3) description of unit ventilator systems.
The three outdoor air control strategies are also valid and available when the Unit Ventilator is connected
to central DOA.
The unit is controlled to meet the zone (remaining) heating or cooling demand. If there is a heating
demand, the cooling coil is off and the hot water flow through the heating coil is throttled to meet the
demand. The hot water control node must be specified (same as the hot water coil inlet node). If there is a
cooling demand from the zone, the hot water coil is off and the chilled water flow through the cooling coil
is throttled to meet the load. The cooling coil control node must be specified (same as the cooling coil inlet
node). Finally both heating and cooling require a convergence tolerance, which is the tolerance denoting
how closely the fan coil unit will meet the heating or cooling load. The tolerance is always relative to the
zone load.
Overall, control of the unit must consider the outdoor air. Here is a more detailed description of the
overall unit control:
Off: Unit is schedule off or there is no load on it. All flow rates are set to zero and the temperatures
are set to zone conditions (except for the outdoor air inlet). Outdoor air requirements will not override
this condition.
Heating/No Coil/VariablePercent: The unit is on, there is a heating load, no heating coil is
present or it has been scheduled off, and variable percent outdoor air control type has been specified. In
this case, the variable percent outdoor air controls what happens with the outdoor air. If the outside
temperature is greater than the return temperature, then the outdoor air is set to the maximum as defined
by the user input. If the outdoor air temperature is less than the return temperature from the zone, then
the outdoor air is set to the minimum outdoor air flow rate as defined by the user. Since a coil is not
present to further condition the supply air, the zone simply receives whatever temperature air results from
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1199
temperature goal is not between the zone return temperature and the outdoor air temperature, then the
unit ventilator will either use the maximum or minimum outdoor air flow rate in the same fashion as the
fixed temperature outdoor air control for the “no coil” conditions. The cooling coil then attempts to meet
any remaining zone load.
Cooling/With Coil/FixedAmount: The unit is on, there is a cooling load, a cooling coil is present
and is scheduled on, and fixed amount control has been specified. The unit ventilator fixes the outdoor
air flow rate as defined by the user and sets the maximum and minimum outdoor air flow rate to be equal
in order to avoid the variation of outdoor air flow rate between the maximum and minimum values. The
cooling coil then attempts to meet any remaining zone cooling load.
Note: the unit ventilator controls are strictly temperature based and do not factor humidity into the
equation (not an enthalpy economy cycle but rather a simple return air economy cycle). In addition,
temperature predictions are not strict energy balances here in the control routine though in the mixing
routine an energy balance is preserved.
1.30.3.1 Inputs
1.30.3.1.1 Field: Name
This field is simply the identifying name that distinguishes one particular unit ventilator from another
in the input data file. Like all other names in EnergyPlus, it is assumed that this is a unique character
string and that no other unit ventilators use this same name.
This field is a node name used to identify the node that serves as the outlet (air side) to the unit
ventilator. In a unit ventilator, the air outlet node name must be zone inlet node name if there is no DOA
Mixer, or if the unit ventilator is connected to DOA, then the air outlet node name must be the DOA
mixer secondary air inlet node name for SupplySide mixer connection. In EnergyPlus, nodes represent
points between components or at various points in the loops. While a node name may be referenced more
than once in an input data file, each node must have a unique name.
• Fan:SystemModel
• Fan:OnOff
• Fan:ConstantVolume
• Fan:VariableVolume
Note that Fan:SystemModel was added as of version 8.7 and is recommended for use in new models.
Fan:OnOff, Fan:ConstantVolume, and Fan:VariableVolume may be deprecated in a future version.
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:Steam
• Coil:Cooling:Water
• Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry
• CoilSystem:Cooling:Water:HeatExchangerAssisted
ZoneHVAC:UnitVentilator ,
Zone1UnitVent , !- Name
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1205
OutdoorAir:Node ,
Zone1UnitVentOAInNode , !- Name
-1.0; !- Height Above Ground {m}
Fan:ConstantVolume ,
Zone1UnitVentFan , !- Name
UnitVentAvailability , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.5, !- Fan Total Efficiency
75.0, !- Pressure Rise {Pa}
0.84, !- Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Zone1UnitVentOAMixerOutletNode , !- Fan Inlet Node Name
Zone1UnitVentFanOutletNode ; !- Fan Outlet Node Name
Coil:Cooling:Water ,
Zone1UnitVentCoolingCoil ,!- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.0010 , !- Design Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.84, !- Design Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
6.67, !- Design Inlet Water Temperature {C}
30, !- Design Inlet Air Temperature {C}
12, !- Design Outlet Air Temperature {C}
0.013 , !- Design Inlet Air Humidity Ratio {kgWater/kgDryAir}
0.008 , !- Design Outlet Air Humidity Ratio {kgWater/kgDryAir}
Zone1UnitVentChWInletNode , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Zone1UnitVentChWOutletNode , !- Water Outlet Node Name
Zone1UnitVentFanOutletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone1UnitVentCCOutletNode , !- Air Outlet Node Name
SimpleAnalysis , !- Type of Analysis
CrossFlow; !- Heat Exchanger Configuration
Coil:Heating:Water ,
Zone1UnitVentHeatingCoil ,!- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
400., !- U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
0.0005 , !- Maximum Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
Zone1UnitVentHWInletNode ,!- Water Inlet Node Name
Zone1UnitVentHWOutletNode , !- Water Outlet Node Name
Zone1UnitVentCCOutletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone1UnitVentAirOutletNode , !- Air Outlet Node Name
UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate , !- Performance Input Method
autosize , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
82.2, !- Design Inlet Water Temperature {C}
16.6, !- Design Inlet Air Temperature {C}
71.1, !- Design Outlet Water Temperature {C}
32.2; !- Design Outlet Air Temperature {C}
1206 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.30.3.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Zone Unit Ventilator Heating Rate [W]
1.30.4 ZoneHVAC:UnitHeater
Unit heaters are zone equipment units which are assembled from other components and are a simplification
of unit ventilators. They contain only a fan and a heating coil. These components are described elsewhere
in this document. The unit heater input simply requires the names of these components, which have to be
described elsewhere in the input. The input also requires the name of an availability schedule, maximum
airflow rate, and maximum and minimum hot water volumetric flow rates. The unit is connected to the
zone inlet and exhaust nodes by specifying unit inlet and outlet node names. Note that the unit air inlet
node should be the same as a zone exhaust node and the unit outlet node should be the same as a zone
inlet node.
While the control of the heating coil is similar to the fan coil units and the unit ventilator, the overall
control of the unit heater is much different. There are four different modes in which a unit heat can operate
based on the user input:
Off: Unit is schedule off. All flow rates are set to zero and the temperatures are set to zone conditions.
NoLoad OR Cooling/”No” is specified in input field “Supply Air Fan Operation During No Heat-
ing”: Unit is available, but there is no heating load. With “No” specified for “Supply Air Fan Operation
During No Heating” and the supply fan operating mode set to 0, the fan will be off since there is no heating
load. All flow rates are set to zero and the temperatures are set to zone conditions.
NoLoad OR Cooling/”Yes” is specified in input field “Supply Air Fan Operation During No Heat-
ing”: Unit is available, the supply fan operating mode schedule value is greater than 0 (for OnOff Fan)
and the fan is running (if it is scheduled to be available also). No heating is provided, only air circulation
via the fan running. However, any heat added by the fan is introduced into the space with the circulation
of the air.
1208 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Heating: The unit is on/available and there is a heating load. The heating coil is modulated (constant
fan speed) to meet the heating load. When the fan type is not an OnOff fan then the control of the heating
coil and its flow rate is identical to the fan coil unit. In the case of OnOff fan, the fan cycles with heating
coil if the current timestep supply fan operating mode is schedule value is 0, or else if the current timestep
supply fan operating mode schedule value is greater than 0, then the supply fan runs continuously for the
entire timestep.
1.30.4.1 Inputs
1.30.4.1.1 Field: Name
This field is simply the identifying name that distinguishes one particular unit heater from another in
the input data file. Like all other names in EnergyPlus, it is assumed that this is a unique character string
and that no other unit heaters use this same name.
• Fan:SystemModel
• Fan:OnOff
• Fan:ConstantVolume
• Fan:VariableVolume
Note that Fan:SystemModel was added as of version 8.7 and is recommended for use in new models.
Fan:OnOff, Fan:ConstantVolume, and Fan:VariableVolume may be deprecated in a future version.
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:Steam
ZoneHVAC:UnitHeater ,
Zone1UnitHeat , !- Name
UnitHeatAvailability , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone1UnitHeatAirInletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone1UnitHeatAirOutletNode , !- Air Outlet Node Name
Fan:ConstantVolume , !- Supply Air Fan Object Type
Zone1UnitHeatFan , !- Fan Name
0.84, !- Maximum Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Continuous , !- Fan Control Type
Coil:Heating:Water , !- Heating Coil Object Type
Zone1UnitHeatHeatingCoil ,!- Heating Coil Name
0.0005 , !- Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0, !- Minimum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.001; !- Heating Convergence Tolerance
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1211
Fan:ConstantVolume ,
Zone1UnitHeatFan , !- Name
UnitHeatAvailability , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.5, !- Fan Total Efficiency
75.0, !- Pressure Rise {Pa}
0.84, !- Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Zone1UnitHeatAirInletNode , !- Fan Inlet Node Name
Zone1UnitHeatFanOutletNode ; !- Fan Outlet Node Name
Coil:Heating:Water ,
Zone1UnitHeatHeatingCoil ,!- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
400., !- U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
0.0005 , !- Maximum Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
Zone1UnitHeatHWInletNode ,!- Water Inlet Node Name
Zone1UnitHeatHWOutletNode , !- Water Outlet Node Name
Zone1UnitHeatFanOutletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone1UnitHeatAirOutletNode , !- Air Outlet Node Name
UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate , !- Performance Input Method
autosize , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
82.2, !- Design Inlet Water Temperature {C}
16.6, !- Design Inlet Air Temperature {C}
71.1, !- Design Outlet Water Temperature {C}
32.2; !- Design Outlet Air Temperature {C}
1.30.4.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Zone Unit Heater Heating Rate [W]
1.30.5 ZoneHVAC:EvaporativeCoolerUnit
The zone evaporative cooler unit is a compound object made up of a fan and one or two evaporative
cooler components. This unit serves a single thermal zone as a forced-convection, cooling-only unit with
supply fan. It always draws 100% of its supply air from the outside, passes the air through a supply fan
and evaporative cooler(s) and then into the zone. The fan can be positioned upstream of the cooler(s)
for a blow through placement. Or it can be positioned downstream of the cooler(s) for a draw through
placement. If there is more than one evaporative cooler, then should be in series with the first cooler
immediately upstream of the second cooler. There is an option to include a relief zone exhaust node to
balance the air in the zone.
The unit can have either constant or variable speed fans. This zone unit differs from other constant
speed forced-air zone units in that its controls are not based on a part-load formulation with averaged
air flow rates. Instead the unit is completely on or off during the entire timestep. This means that it is
beneficial to use relatively short timesteps. However for variable speed fans, the unit can modulate fan
speed to just meet cooling loads and therefore operates similar to other zone HVAC units.
1.30.5.1 Inputs
1.30.5.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a zone evaporative cooler
unit. References to this unit by other objects will use this name.
1.30.5.1.13 Field: Cooling Load Control Threshold Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This numeric input field defines the magnitude, in Watts, of a significant zone cooling load to use with
zone-load-to-setpoint based control. This value is used when the unit’s control method is ZoneCoolin-
gLoadOnOffCycling or ZoneCoolingLoadVariableSpeedFan. This is a sensible cooling load that is used as
a threshold to determine when the cooling load is significant. When the predicted zone load to cooling
setpoint is less than this threshold, the cooler unit’s control will consider the load to be too small to trigger
operation. The default is 100W.
ZoneHVAC:EvaporativeCoolerUnit ,
Zone Evap Unit , !- Name
System Availability Schedule , !- Availability Schedule Name
, !- Availability Manager List Name
Cooler Unit OA inlet , !- Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name
Main Zone Inlet Node , !- Cooler Outlet Node Name
Main Zone Relief Node , !- Zone Relief Air Node Name
Fan:SystemModel , !- Supply Air Fan Object Type
Supply Fan , !- Supply Air Fan Name
2.0, !- Design Supply Air Flow Rate
DrawThrough , !- Fan Placement
ZoneCoolingLoadOnOffCycling , !- Cooler Unit Control Method
1.1, !- Throttling Range Temperature Difference
100.0 , !- Cooling Load Control Threshold Heat Transfer Rate
EvaporativeCooler:Direct:CelDekPad , !- First Evaporative Cooler Object Type
Evaporative Cooler , !- First Evaporative Cooler Object Name
, !- Second Evaporative Cooler Object Type
; !- Second Evaporative Cooler Name
1216 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.30.5.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Zone Evaporative Cooler Unit Total Cooling Rate [W]
1.30.6 ZoneHVAC:OutdoorAirUnit
The zone outdoor air unit (ZoneHVAC:OutdoorAirUnit) in EnergyPlus is intended to model dedicated
outdoor air systems (DOAS) and other similar systems which aim to provide either additional outside air
or some limited amount of sensible and/or latent conditioning. The zone outdoor air unit is a piece of
zone equipment that can consist of a supply fan, an exhaust fan (optional), heating and cooling coils, and
heat recovery. The outdoor air unit input simply requires information about flow rates, schedules, node
names, and a list of component that are part of the unit. These components require additional input as
per the requirements for these components. In addition, the input includes information about controls for
the unit. It should be noted that the components that make up the zone outdoor air unit do not require
additional controls or setpoints. The unit input defines how the unit outlet temperature is controlled as
described below.
When an AirloopHVAC serves the same zone, it is strongly recommended that the outdoor and exhaust
air flow rates are balanced. In addition, the exhaust airflow rate and air schedule should be the same as
outdoor air flow rate and outdoor air schedule, respectively. Otherwise, possible unbalanced flows will
cause improper return airflow unless ZoneAirMassFlowConservation is active.
The full input for zone outdoor air units is described below using a variety of fields.
1218 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.30.6.1 Inputs
1.30.6.1.1 Field: Name
This field is simply the identifying name that distinguishes one particular outdoor air unit from another
in the input data file. Like all other names in EnergyPlus, it is assumed that this is a unique character
string and that no other zone outdoor air units use this same name.
• BlowThrough
• DrawThrough
If the user does not select a fan placement type, DrawThrough is assumed as default by EnergyPlus.
the zone air heat balance and thus provides outside air without impacting any other system providing
conditioning to this zone. The temperature control option will supply air to the zone based on the high
and low air control temperature schedules (see next two fields). For temperature control, when the outside
air temperature is less than the low air control temperature, the zone outdoor air unit will provide whatever
heating is available from its components to achieve the low air temperature value. When the outside air
temperature is above the high air control temperature, the zone outdoor air unit will provide whatever
cooling is available from its components to achieve the high air temperature value. When the outdoor
air temperature is between the high and low air control temperatures, the unit will simply provide air at
whatever the outdoor air conditions are, modified by any fan heat added by the supply fan. In summary,
the user must select from the following two options:
• NeutralControl
• TemperatureControl
If the user does not select a unit control type, NeutralControl is assumed as the default by Energy-
Plus.
ZoneHVAC:OutdoorAirUnit ,
Zone5DXOutAir , !- Name
OAUnitOASched , !- Availability Schedule Name
SPACE5 -1, !- Zone Name
0.42, !- Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
OAUnitOASched , !- Outdoor Air Schedule Name
Zone5OAUFan1 , !- Supply Fan Name
BlowThrough , !- Supply Fan Placement
, !- Exhaust Fan Name
, !- Exhaust Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Exhaust Air Schedule Name
TemperatureControl , !- Unit Control Type
OAUHitemp2 , !- High Air Control Temperature Schedule Name
OAULotemp2 , !- Low Air Control Temperature Schedule Name
Zone5OAUOANode , !- Outdoor Air Node Name
Zone5OAUZoneInletNode , !- AirOutlet Node Name
Zone5OAUZoneOutletNode , !- AirInlet Node Name
Zone5OAUFanOutletNode , !- Supply FanOutlet Node Name
Zone5OAUEquip1; !- Outdoor Air Unit List Name
1.30.6.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average, Zone Outdoor Air Unit Total Heating Rate [W]
1.30.6.2.15 Zone Outdoor Air Unit Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This field reports the air mass flow rate of the zone outdoor air unit Outdoor Air Unit in kilograms
per second.
1.30.7 ZoneHVAC:OutdoorAirUnit:EquipmentList
This input syntax is used to specify the components in a zone outdoor air unit. The components will be
simulated in the order in which they occur in this list.
1.30.7.1 Inputs
1.30.7.1.1 Field: Name
The user designated unique name of an instance of a zone outdoor air unit equipment list.
1.30.7.1.2 Field Set (Component Object Type, Component Name, Control Node
Name) up to 8
After the identifying name, the list consists of up to 8 pairs of data items.
ZoneHVAC:OutdoorAirUnit:EquipmentList ,
Zone5OAUEquip1 , !- Name
Dehumidifier:Desiccant:NoFans , !- Component 1 Object Type
Z5Dessicant , !- Component 1 Name
HeatExchanger:AirToAir:FlatPlate , !- Component 2 Object Type
Zone5A2AHeat Recovery , !- Component 2 Name
CoilSystem:Cooling:DX , !- Component 3 Object Type
DX Cooling Coil System 5,!- Component 3 Name
Coil:Heating:Electric , !- Component 4 Object Type
Zone5DESHCoil; !- Component 4 Name
1.30.8 ZoneHVAC:WindowAirConditioner
The Window Air Conditioner is a unit of zone equipment made up of other components. Each window
air conditioner consists of an outdoor air mixer, a fan, and a direct expansion (DX) cooling coil. These
components are described elsewhere in this document. The input for a window air conditioner requires
the names of these three pieces of equipment, which are then specified individually elsewhere in the input.
The input for a window air conditioner also requires the name of an availability schedule, the maximum
unit airflow rate, and the maximum outdoor airflow rate for the unit. The unit is connected to a zone by
specifying an air inlet node, which must be the same as a zone exhaust node; and an air outlet node, which
must be the same as a zone inlet node (ref. ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections).
A supply air fan operating mode schedule must also be specified. The supply air fan operating mode
schedule value determines if the supply air fan can run continuously with the DX coil cycling on/off to
match the zone cooling demand or the fan and DX coil can cycle on/off together to meet the cooling
demand. The placement of the supply air fan, in relation to the DX coil, must also be specified (blow
through or draw through). The cooling convergence tolerance is required, which is the tolerance denoting
how closely the window air conditioner will meet the cooling load. The tolerance is always relative to the
zone load (i.e., the unit will operate to meet the zone load to within the tolerance value times the zone
load for each simulation timestep). Finally, the DX cooling coil type must be specified.
1.30.8.1 Inputs
1.30.8.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user assigned name for an instance of a window air conditioner unit. Any reference to this
window air conditioner by another object will use this name.
• Fan:SystemModel
• Fan:OnOff
• Fan:ConstantVolume
Note that Fan:SystemModel was added as of version 8.7 and is recommended for use in new models.
Fan:OnOff and Fan:ConstantVolumemay be deprecated in a future version.
1226 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
• Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed
• CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted
size of this parameter relates directly to the closeness of the control. A very small value in this field will
result in tight control and will probably result in larger numbers of iterations. A large value in this field
will result in looser controls and could result in unsatisfactory fluctuations in zone air temperature. Initial
experience with this parameter lends to the recommendation of using 0.001 as the starting point.
The window air conditioner is controlled by matching its sensible (temperature) cooling output to the
zone sensible load (demand). Because the performance of the DX coil is frequently non-linear, the air
conditioner model must call the DX coil model several times (iterate) to determine the proper run time
fraction to meet the zone load. The cooling convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate
the iteration procedure when the following equation is satisfied:
|QZoneLoad − QW indowAirConditioner,out )|
≤ Cooling ConvergenceT olerance (1.126)
QZoneLoad
The maximum number of iterations is limited, with a warning message generated if the above equation
is not satisfied within the maximum number of iterations.
ZoneHVAC:WindowAirConditioner ,
Zone3WindAC , ! name of window AC unit
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! Availability Schedule Name
0.6, ! Maximum Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.05, ! Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Zone3WindACAirInletNode , ! Air Inlet Node Name
Zone3WindACAirOutletNode , ! Air Outlet Node Name
OutdoorAir:Mixer , ! Outdoor Air Mixer Object Type
Zone3WindACOAMixer , ! Outdoor Air Mixer Name
Fan:SystemModel , ! Supply Air Fan Object Type
Zone3WindACFan , ! Fan Name
Zone3WindACDXCoil , ! DX Cooling Coil Name
CyclingFanSch , ! Supply Air Fan Operation Mode Schedule Name
DrawThrough , ! Fan Placement
0.001 , ! Cooling Convergence Tolerance
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed; ! Cooling Coil Object Type
Schedule:Compact ,
CyclingFanSch , !- Name
Fraction , !- ScheduleType
Through: 12/31 , !- Complex Field \#1
For: AllDays , !- Complex Field \#2
Until: 24:00 , !- Complex Field \#7
0.0; !- Complex Field \#8
1228 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
OutdoorAir:Mixer ,
Zone3WindACOAMixer , ! Name
Zone3WindACOAMixerOutletNode , ! Mixed Air Node Name
Zone3WindACOAInNode , ! Outdoor Air Stream Node Name
Zone3WindACExhNode , ! Relief Air Stream Node Name
Zone3WindACAirInletNode ; ! Return Air Stream Node Name
Fan:SystemModel ,
Zone3WindACFan , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone3WindACDXOutletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone3WindACAirOutletNode , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.6 , !- Design Maximum Air Flow Rate
Discrete , !- Speed Control Method
0.0, !- Electric Power Minimum Flow Rate Fraction
75.0, !- Design Pressure Rise
0.9 , !- Motor Efficiency
1.0 , !- Motor In Air Stream Fraction
AUTOSIZE , !- Design Electric Power Consumption
TotalEfficiencyAndPressure , !- Design Power Sizing Method
, !- Electric Power Per Unit Flow Rate
, !- Electric Power Per Unit Flow Rate Per Unit Pressure
0.5; !- Fan Total Efficiency
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed ,
Zone3WindACDXCoil , !- Name
CoolingCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
autosize , !- Rated Total Cooling Capacity {W}
autosize , !- Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
3.0, !- Rated COP
autosize , !- Rated Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Zone3WindACOAMixerOutletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone3WindACDXOutletNode , !- Air Outlet Node Name
WindACCoolCapFT , !- Total Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve Name
WindACCoolCapFFF , !- Total Cooling Capacity Function of Flow Fraction Curve Name
WindACEIRFT , !- Energy Input Ratio Function of Temperature Curve Name
WindACEIRFFF , !- Energy Input Ratio Function of Flow Fraction Curve Name
WindACPLFFPLR; !- Part Load Fraction Correlation Curve Name
1.30.8.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Zone Window Air Conditioner Total Cooling Rate [W]
1.30.9 ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalAirConditioner
The packaged terminal air conditioner (PTAC) is a compound object made up of other components. Each
PTAC consists of an outdoor air mixer, direct expansion (DX) cooling coil, heating coil (gas, electric, hot
water, or steam) and a supply air fan. While the figure below shows the PTAC with draw through fan
placement, blow through fan placement can also be modeled by positioning the supply air fan between the
outdoor air mixer and the DX cooling coil. The packaged terminal air conditioner coordinates the operation
of these components and is modeled as a type of zone equipment (Ref. ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList and
ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections).
Figure 1.131: Schematic of a packaged terminal air conditioner with draw through fan placement
Links to the PTAC’s supply air fan, DX cooling coil, heating coil, and outdoor air mixer specifications
are provided in the air conditioner’s input syntax. Additional inputs include supply and outdoor air flow
rates during cooling operation, heating operation, and when neither cooling or heating is required. A
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1231
description of each input field for the packaged terminal air conditioner compound object is provided
below.
1.30.9.1 Inputs
1.30.9.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a packaged terminal air condi-
tioner. Any reference to this air conditioner by another object will use this name.
• OutdoorAir:Mixer
This input field should be left blank when the PTAC is connected to an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer
object. If this field is left blank, an outdoor air mixer object is not simulated.
This alpha field defines the type of fan used by this PTAC. The only valid choices are
Fan:SystemModel, Fan:OnOff, and Fan:ConstantVolume. A fan of type Fan:SystemModel
or Fan:OnOff is used with cycling fan operating mode, and a fan of type Fan:SystemModel or
Fan:ConstantVolume is used with continuous fan operating mode (see Supply Air Fan Operating Mode
Schedule field below). The input requirements for these fan objects are described elsewhere in this
document. Note that Fan:SystemModel was added as of version 8.7 and is recommended for use in new
models. Fan:OnOff and Fan:ConstantVolume may be deprecated in a future version.
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:Steam
• Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
• CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted
• Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed
Supply Air Temperature in Cooling Mode and Maximum Supply Air Temperature in Heating Mode. Ad-
ditionally, specific coil types are required for the SingleZoneVAV capacity control method. The cooling coil
type is Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed while the heating coil types are Coil:Heating:Water, Coil:Heating:Fuel
and Coil:Heating:Electric. If alternate coil types are used they are modeled using the load based control
method.
4) OutdoorAir:Mixer
ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalAirConditioner ,
Zone2PTAC , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone2PTACAirInletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone2PTACAirOutletNode , !- Air Outlet Node Name
OutdoorAir:Mixer , !- Outdoor Air Mixer Object Type
Zone2PTACOAMixer , !- Outdoor Air Mixer Name
autosize , !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate operation {m3/s}
autosize , !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Fan:OnOff , !- Supply Air Fan Object Type
Zone2PTACFan , !- Supply Air Fan Name
Coil:Heating:Electric , !- Heating Coil Object Type
Zone2PTACHeatCoil , !- Heating Coil Name
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed , !- Cooling Coil Object Type
Zone2PTACDXCoolCoil , !- Cooling Coil Name
BlowThrough , !- Fan Placement
SupplyFanSch; !- Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name
Schedule:Compact ,
SupplyFanSch , !- Name
Fraction , !- ScheduleType
Through: 12/31 , !- Complex Field \#1
For: AllDays , !- Complex Field \#2
Until: 7:00, !- Complex Field \#3
0.0, !- Complex Field \#4
Until: 18:00 , !- Complex Field \#5
1.0, !- Complex Field \#6
Until: 24:00 , !- Complex Field \#7
1236 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
OutdoorAir:Mixer ,
Zone2PTACOAMixer , !- Name
Zone2PTACOAMixerOutletNode , !-Mixed Air Node Name
Zone2PTACOAInNode , !-Outdoor Air Stream Node Name
Zone2PTACExhNode , !- Relief Air Stream Node Name
Zone2PTACAirInletNode; !- Return Air Stream Node Name
Fan:OnOff ,
Zone2PTACFan , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.5, !- Fan Total Efficiency
75.0, !- Pressure Rise {Pa}
autosize , !- Maximum Flow Rate{m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Zone2PTACOAMixerOutletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone2PTACFanOutletNode ; !- Air Outlet Node Name
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed ,
Zone2PTACDXCoolCoil , !- Coil Name
CoolingCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
autosize , !- Rated Total Cooling Capacity (gross) {W}
autosize , !- Rated SHR
3.0, !- Rated COP
autosize , !- Rated Air Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
Zone2PTACFanOutletNode , !- Coil Air Inlet Node
Zone2PTACCoolCoilOutletNode , !-Coil Air Outlet Node
HPACCoolCapFT , !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of temperature)
HPACCoolCapFFF , !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of flow fraction)
HPACEIRFT , !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature)
HPACEIRFFF , !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of flow fraction)
HPACPLFFPLR; !- Part Load Fraction Correlation (function of part load ratio)
Coil:Heating:Electric ,
Zone2PTACHeatCoil , !- Coil Name
HeatingCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
1.0, !- Efficiency
autosize , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
Zone2PTACCoolCoilOutletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone2PTACAirOutletNode ; !- Air Outlet Node Name
1.30.9.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Total Heating Rate [W]
1.30.9.2.1 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Total Heating Rate [W]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition rate of the packaged terminal air conditioner to
the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the air conditioner
outlet air and inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the air conditioner. This value is
calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy addition only) are
averaged for the timestep being reported.
1.30.9.2.2 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Total Heating Energy [J]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition of the packaged terminal air conditioner to the
zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy
difference of the air conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams, the air mass flow rate through the air
conditioner, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep
being simulated, and the results (enthalpy addition only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
1.30.9.2.3 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Total Cooling Rate [W]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction rate of the packaged terminal air conditioner
from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the air
conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the air conditioner. This
value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy extraction
only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.
1.30.9.2.4 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Total Cooling Energy [J]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction of the packaged terminal air conditioner from
the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the
enthalpy difference of the air conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams, the air mass flow rate through
the air conditioner, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system
timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy extraction only) are summed for the timestep being
reported.
1.30.9.2.5 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Sensible Heating Rate [W]
This output field is the sensible heat addition rate of the packaged terminal air conditioner to the zone
it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the air conditioner outlet air
and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass flow rate through the air conditioner.
This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (heating only)
are averaged for the timestep being reported.
1238 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.30.9.2.6 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Sensible Heating Energy [J]
This output field is the sensible heat addition of the packaged terminal air conditioner to the zone it is
serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference
of the air conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, the air mass flow
rate through the air conditioner, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each
HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (heating only) are summed for the timestep being
reported.
1.30.9.2.7 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction rate of the packaged terminal air
conditioner from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of
the air conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass flow rate
through the air conditioner. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and
the results (cooling only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.
1.30.9.2.8 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction of the packaged terminal air conditioner
from the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the
enthalpy difference of the air conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio,
the air mass flow rate through the air conditioner, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is
calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (cooling only) are summed for
the timestep being reported.
1.30.9.2.9 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Latent Heating Rate [W]
This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) rate of the packaged terminal air con-
ditioner to the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the total
energy rate and the sensible energy rate provided by the packaged terminal air conditioner. This value is
calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat addition only) are
averaged for the timestep being reported.
1.30.9.2.10 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Latent Heating Energy [J]
This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) of the packaged terminal air conditioner to
the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated as the difference
between the total energy delivered to the zone and the sensible energy delivered to the zone by the packaged
terminal air conditioner. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and
the results (latent heat addition only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
1.30.9.2.11 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Latent Cooling Rate [W]
This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) rate of the packaged terminal air
conditioner from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the
total energy rate and the sensible energy rate provided by the packaged terminal air conditioner. This
value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat extraction
only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.
1.30.9.2.12 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Latent Cooling Energy [J]
This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) of the packaged terminal air condi-
tioner from the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated as
the difference between the total energy delivered to the zone and the sensible energy delivered to the zone
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1239
by the packaged terminal air conditioner. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being
simulated, and the results (latent heat extraction only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
1.30.9.2.15 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Fan Part Load Ratio []
This output field is the part-load ratio of the fan. The fan part-load ratio is defined as the average
supply air mass flow rate divided by the maximum supply air mass flow rate. The maximum supply
air mass flow rate depends on whether heating, cooling, or no heating or cooling is required during the
timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are
averaged for the timestep being reported.
1.30.9.2.16 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Compressor Part Load Ratio []
This output field is the part-load ratio used by the coils (cooling and heating). Part-load ratio is defined
as the total coil load divided by the coil steady-state capacity. This value is calculated for each HVAC
system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep being reported.
1.30.10 ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalHeatPump
The packaged terminal heat pump (PTHP) is a compound object made up of other components. Each
PTHP consists of an outdoor air mixer, direct expansion (DX) cooling coil, DX heating coil, supply air
fan, and a supplemental heating coil as shown in the figure below. These individual components are
described elsewhere in this document. The packaged terminal heat pump coordinates the operation of
these components and is modeled as a type of zone equipment (Ref. ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList and
ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections).
Figure 1.132: Schematic of a packaged terminal heat pump (draw through fan placement)
Links to the PTHP’s supply air fan, DX coils, supplemental heating coil, and outdoor air mixer speci-
fications are provided in the heat pump’s input syntax. Additional inputs include supply and outdoor air
flow rates during cooling operation, heating operation, and when neither cooling or heating is required. A
description of each input field for the packaged terminal heat pump compound object is provided below.
1.30.10.1 Inputs
1.30.10.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a packaged terminal heat pump.
Any reference to this heat pump by another object will use this name.
• OutdoorAir:Mixer
This input field should be left blank when the PTHP is connected to an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer
object. If this field is left blank, an outdoor air mixer object is not simulated.
addition, the Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate cannot be greater than the heat pump’s supply air volumet-
ric flow rate during cooling operation. This field is set to zero flow when the PTHP is connected to an
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer object.
• Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
• CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted
• Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Steam
As shown in the example below, correct specification of the packaged terminal heat pump requires the
following objects in addition to the compound object itself:
5) OutdoorAir:Mixer
ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalHeatPump ,
Zone2PTHP , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone2PTHPAirInletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone2PTHPAirOutletNode , !- Air Outlet Node Name
OutdoorAir:Mixer , !- Outdoor Air Mixer Object Type
Zone2PTHPOAMixer , !- Outdoor Air Mixer Name
autosize , !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Fan:OnOff , !- Supply Air Fan Object Type
Zone2PTHPFan , !- Supply Air Fan Name
Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed , !- Heating Coil Object Type
Zone2PTHPDXHeatCoil , !- Heating Coil Name
0.001 , !- Heating Convergence Tolerance {dimensionless}
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed , !- Cooling Coil Object Type
Zone2PTHPDXCoolCoil , !- Cooling Coil Name
0.001 , !- Cooling Convergence Tolerance {dimensionless}
Coil:Heating:Electric , !- Supplemental Heating Coil Object Type
Zone2PTHPSupHeater , !- Supplemental Heating Coil Name
autosize , !- Maximum Supply Air Temperature from Supplemental Heater {C}
10.0, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -Bulb Temperature for Supplemental Heater Operation {C}
BlowThrough , !- Fan Placement
CyclingFanSch; !- Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name
Schedule:Compact ,
CyclingFanSch , !- Name
Fraction , !- ScheduleType
Through: 12/31 , !- Complex Field \#1
For: AllDays , !- Complex Field \#2
Until: 24:00 , !- Complex Field \#7
0.0; !- Complex Field \#8
OutdoorAir:Mixer ,
Zone2PTHPOAMixer , !- Name
Zone2PTHPOAMixerOutletNode , !-Mixed Air Node Name
Zone2PTHPOAInNode , !-Outdoor Air Stream Node Name
Zone2PTHPExhNode , !- Relief Air Stream Node Name
Zone2PTHPAirInletNode; !- Return Air Stream Node Name
Fan:OnOff ,
Zone2PTHPFan , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.5, !- Fan Total Efficiency
75.0, !- Pressure Rise {Pa}
autosize , !- Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Zone2PTHPOAMixerOutletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1247
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed ,
Zone2PTHPDXCoolCoil , !- Coil Name
CoolingCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule
autosize , !- Rated Total Cooling Capacity (gross) {W}
autosize , !- Rated SHR
3.0, !- Rated COP
autosize , !- Rated Air Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
Zone2PTHPFanOutletNode , !- Coil Air Inlet Node
Zone2PTHPCoolCoilOutletNode , !- Coil Air Outlet Node
HPACCoolCapFT , !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of temperature)
HPACCoolCapFFF , !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of flow fraction)
HPACEIRFT , !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature)
HPACEIRFFF , !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of flow fraction)
HPACPLFFPLR; !- Part Load Fraction Correlation (function of part load ratio)
COIL:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed ,
Zone2PTHPDXHeatCoil , !- Coil Name
HeatingCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule
autosize , !- Rated Total Heating Capacity {W}
2.75, !- Rated COP
autosize , !- Rated Air Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
Zone2PTHPCoolCoilOutletNode , !- Coil Air Inlet Node
Zone2PTHPDXHeatCoilOutletNode , !- Coil Air Outlet Node
HPACHeatCapFT , !- Total heating capacity modifier curve (function of temperature)
HPACHeatCapFFF , !- Total heating capacity modifier curve (function of flow fraction)
HPACHeatEIRFT , !- Energy input ratio modifier curve (function of temperature)
HPACHeatEIRFFF , !- Energy input ratio modifier curve (function of flow fraction)
HPACCOOLPLFFPLR , !- Part load fraction correlation (function of part load ratio)
, !- Defrost energy input ratio modifier curve (function of temperature)
2.0, !- Minimum Outdoor Dry -bulb Temperature for Compressor Operation {C}
5.0, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -bulb Temperature for Defrost Operation {C}
200.0 , !- Crankcase Heater Capacity {W}
10.0, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -bulb Temperature for Crankcase Heater Operation
{C}
Resistive , !- Defrost Strategy
TIMED , !- Defrost Control
0.166667 , !- Defrost Time Period Fraction
20000; !- Resistive Defrost Heater Capacity {W}
Coil:Heating:Electric ,
Zone2PTHPSupHeater , !- Name
HeatingCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
1.0, !- Efficiency
autosize , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
Zone2PTHPDXHeatCoilOutletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone2PTHPAirOutletNode ; !- Air Outlet Node Name
1.30.10.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Heating Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Heating Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Cooling Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Cooling Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Heating Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Heating Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
1248 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.30.10.2.1 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Heating Rate [W]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition rate of the packaged terminal heat pump to the
zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet
air and inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the heat pump. This value is calculated for
each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy addition only) are averaged for the
timestep being reported.
1.30.10.2.2 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Heating Energy [J]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition of the packaged terminal heat pump to the zone it
is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference
of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams, the air mass flow rate through the heat pump, and the
HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and
the results (enthalpy addition only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
1.30.10.2.3 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Cooling Rate [W]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction rate of the packaged terminal heat pump from
the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump
outlet air and inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the heat pump. This value is calculated
for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy extraction only) are averaged
for the timestep being reported.
1.30.10.2.4 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Cooling Energy [J]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction of the packaged terminal heat pump from the
zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy
difference of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams, the air mass flow rate through the heat
pump, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being
simulated, and the results (enthalpy extraction only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
1.30.10.2.5 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Heating Rate [W]
This output field is the sensible heat addition rate of the packaged terminal heat pump to the zone it
is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet air and
inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass flow rate through the heat pump. This
value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (heating only) are
averaged for the timestep being reported.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1249
1.30.10.2.6 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Heating Energy [J]
This output field is the sensible heat addition of the packaged terminal heat pump to the zone it is
serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of
the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, the air mass flow rate through
the heat pump, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system
timestep being simulated, and the results (heating only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
1.30.10.2.7 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction rate of the packaged terminal heat
pump from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the
heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass flow rate through
the heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results
(cooling only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.
1.30.10.2.8 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction of the packaged terminal heat pump
from the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the
enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, the air
mass flow rate through the heat pump, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for
each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (cooling only) are summed for the timestep
being reported.
1.30.10.2.9 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Heating Rate [W]
This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) rate of the packaged terminal heat pump
to the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy rate
and the sensible energy rate provided by the packaged terminal heat pump. This value is calculated for
each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat addition only) are averaged for
the timestep being reported.
1.30.10.2.10 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Heating Energy [J]
This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) of the packaged terminal heat pump to
the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated as the difference
between the total energy delivered to the zone and the sensible energy delivered to the zone by the packaged
terminal heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the
results (latent heat addition only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
1.30.10.2.11 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Cooling Rate [W]
This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) rate of the packaged terminal heat
pump from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the total
energy rate and the sensible energy rate provided by the packaged terminal heat pump. This value is
calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat extraction only)
are averaged for the timestep being reported.
1.30.10.2.12 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Cooling Energy [J]
This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) of the packaged terminal heat pump
from the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated as the
difference between the total energy delivered to the zone and the sensible energy delivered to the zone
1250 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
by the packaged terminal heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being
simulated, and the results (latent heat extraction only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
1.30.10.2.15 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Fan Part Load Ratio []
This output field is the part-load ratio of the fan. The fan part-load ratio is defined as the average
supply air mass flow rate divided by the maximum supply air mass flow rate. The maximum supply
air mass flow rate depends on whether heating, cooling, or no heating or cooling is required during the
timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are
averaged for the timestep being reported.
1.30.10.2.16 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Compressor Part Load Ratio []
This output field is the part-load ratio of the compressor used by the DX coils (cooling and heating).
Compressor part-load ratio is defined as the total coil load divided by the coil steady-state capacity. This
value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the
timestep being reported.
1.30.11 ZoneHVAC:RefrigerationChillerSet
The ZoneHVAC:RefrigerationChillerSet object works in conjunction with one or multiple air chillers, com-
pressor racks, refrigeration systems, or refrigeration secondary system objects (Ref. Refrigeration:AirChiller
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1251
1.30.11.1 Inputs
1.30.11.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a refrigeration chiller. Any reference to this refrigera-
tion chiller by another object (may be listed in a Refrigeration:CaseAndWalkInList, Refrigeration:System,
Refrigeration:SecondarySystem, or Refrigeration:CompressorRack) will use this name.
1.30.11.1.9 Field: Air Chiller #n Name (Extensible list, 20 provided in the IDD)
The name of the nth air chiller that will be used to meet the zone cooling load.
The following is an example input for a refrigeration chiller set.
ZoneHVAC:RefrigerationChillerSet ,
SubFreezerChillerSet , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
SubFreezer , !- Zone Name
NODE_142 , !- Air Inlet Node Name
NODE_141 , !- Air Outlet Node Name
SubFreezerAirChiller_1 , !- Air Chiller \#1 Name
SubFreezerAirChiller_2 , !- Air Chiller \#2 Name
SubFreezerAirChiller_3 ; !- Air Chiller \#3 Name
There are no outputs variables for a ZoneHVAC:RefrigerationChillerSet. Outputs for the refrigeration
impact on any zone are listed in the Group:Refrigeration.
1.30.12 ZoneHVAC:WaterToAirHeatPump
The zone water-to-air heat pump is a compound component consisting of a fan, water-to-air cooling and
heating coils, and a supplemental heating coil. Links to the fan, WaterToAirHeatPump cooling coil,
WaterToAirHeatPump heating coil, and supplementary heating coil specifications are provided in the heat
pump’s input data syntax. The heat pump switches between cooling and heating depending on the zone’s
demand. The load side (air) of the zone water-to-air heat pump consists of an On/Off fan component,
a WaterToAirHeatPump cooling coil component, a WaterToAirHeatPump heating coil component, and
a Gas or Electric supplemental heating coil component. The source side (water) of the heat pump is
connected to a condenser loop with a heat exchanger (ground heat exchanger or other type) or a plant
loop with a heating source such as a boiler and a cooling source such as a chiller or cooling tower. The
diagram below shows the setup and connection of the heat pump for the source side and load side for a
ground heat exchanger configuration. Note that on the load side, the WaterToAirHeatPump cooling coil
must always be placed before the WaterToAirHeatPump heating coil.
For this zone heat pump,there are two types of WaterToAirHeatPump coil model allowed:
• Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
• Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
• Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit
• Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit
1.30.12.1 Inputs
1.30.12.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the zone system heat pump.
Figure 1.133: Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Schematic for a DrawThrough Configuration with
Ground Heat Exchanger
1254 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• OutdoorAir:Mixer
This input field should be left blank when the WaterToAirHeatPump is connected to an AirTermi-
nal:SingleDuct:Mixer object. If this field is left blank, an outdoor air mixer object is not simulated.
1.30.12.1.12 Field: No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate When No Cooling or Heating is
Needed
This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the heat pump in cubic meters per second
when neither cooling or heating is required (i.e., DX coils and supplemental heater are off but the supply
air fan operates). Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable. Note that the no
load outdoor air flow rate cannot change during the simulation. In addition, the no load outdoor air flow
rate cannot be greater than the heat pump’s no load supply air flow rate. This field is only used when the
heat pump’s supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous fan operation. If the heat pump’s
supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous fan operation and the field “No Load Supply
Air Flow Rate” is set to zero or is left blank, then the model assumes that the no load outdoor air flow
rate is equal to the outdoor air flow rate when the cooling or heating coil was last operating (for cooling
operation [i.e., Cooling outdoor air flow rate] or heating operation [i.e., Heating outdoor air flow rate]) and
this field is not used. This input field is set to zero flow when the WaterToAirHeatPump is connected to
an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer object.
Figure 1.134:
Figure 1.135:
Figure 1.136:
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Steam
• On/Off fan
• Cycling
• Constant
• CyclingOnDemand
Cycling varies water flow through the coil based on the heat pump Part Load Ratio. This control
method is appropriate for modeling heat pumps that are outfitted with a soleniod valve which allows water
to flow through the coil only when the compressor is active. This is the default for EnergyPlus V8 and
later.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1259
Constant provides a constant water flow regardless of heat pump operation. Remember that Ener-
gyPlus has two coils (a heating coil and a cooling coil) to approximate the operation of one coil that can
operate in either heating mode or cooling mode. Therefore, when the water flow mode is constant, there
will be full flow through either the heating coil or the cooling coil, but not both at the same time.
ConstantOnDemand provides full flow through the coil whenever there is a load. When there is no
load, there is zero flow through the coil. This control strategy represents the way EnergyPlus modeled
heat pump water flow prior to Version 8.
ZoneHVAC:WaterToAirHeatPump ,
Zone1WTAHP , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 1 Outlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 1 Inlet Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
OutdoorAir:Mixer , !- Outdoor air mixer object type
Zone 1 Mixer , !- Outdoor Air Mixer Name
Autosize , !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Autosize , !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0, !- Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0, !- Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Fan:OnOff , !- Supply Air Fan Object Type
Zone 1 Fan , !- Supply Air Fan Name
Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit , !- Heating Coil Object Type
Sys 1 Heat Pump Heating Mode , !- Heating Coil Name
Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit , !- Cooling Coil Object Type
Sys 1 Heat Pump Cooling Mode , !- Cooling Coil Name
2.5, !- Maximum Cycling Rate
60.0, !- Heat Pump Time Constant
0.01, !- Fraction of On -Cycle Power Use
60, !- Heat Pump Fan Delay Time
Coil:Heating:Fuel , !- Supplemental Heating Coil Object Type
Heat Pump DX Supp Heating Coil 1, !- Supplemental Heating Coil Name
60.0, !- Maximum Supply Air Temperature from Supplemental Heater {C}
20.0, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -Bulb Temperature for Supplemental Heater Operation {C}
Sys 1 Outside Air Inlet Node , !- Outdoor Dry -Bulb Temperature Sensor Node Name
BlowThrough , !- Fan Placement
CyclingFanSch; !- Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name
Schedule:Compact ,
CyclingFanSch , !- Name
Fraction , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: AllDays , !- Field 2
Until: 24:00 , !- Field 3
0.0; !- Field 4
Coil:Heating: WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit ,
Sys 1 Heat Pump Heating Mode , !- Name
Sys 1 Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side2 Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Sys 1 Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side2 Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
Sys 1 Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Sys 1 SuppHeating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
Autosize , !- Rated Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Autosize , !- Rated Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
1260 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
OutdoorAir:Mixer ,
Zone 1 Mixer , !- Name
Sys 1 Mixed Air Node , !- Mixed Air Node Name
Sys 1 Outside Air Inlet Node , !- Outdoor Air Stream Node Name
Sys 1 Relief Air Outlet Node , !- Relief Air Stream Node Name
Zone 1 Outlet Node; !- Return Air Stream Node Name
Fan:OnOff ,
Zone 1 Fan , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.7, !- Fan Total Efficiency
300.0 , !- Pressure Rise {Pa}
Autosize , !- Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Sys 1 Mixed Air Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Sys 1 Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node; !- Air Outlet Node Name
Coil:Heating:Fuel ,
Heat Pump DX Supp Heating Coil 1, !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
0.8, !- Gas Burner Efficiency
32000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
Sys 1 SuppHeating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 1 Inlet Node; !-Air Outlet Node Name
BRANCH ,
Gshp Cooling Condenser Branch , !- Name
, !- Pressure Drop Curve Name
Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation , !- Component 1 Object Type
Heat Pump Cooling Mode , !- Component 1 Name
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side1 Inlet Node , !- Component 1 Inlet Node Name
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side1 Outlet Node; !- Component 1 Outlet Node Name
BRANCH ,
Gshp Heating Condenser Branch , !- Name
, !- Pressure Drop Curve Name
Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation , !- Component 1 Object Type
Heat Pump Heating Mode , !- Component 1 Name
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side2 Inlet Node , !- Component 1 Inlet Node Name
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side2 Outlet Node; !- Component 1 Outlet Node Name
1.30.12.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Total Heating Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Total Heating Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Total Cooling Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Total Cooling Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Sensible Heating Rate [W]
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1261
1.30.12.2.1 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Total Heating Rate [W]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition rate of the Water to Air Heat Pump to the zone
it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet air
and inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the heat pump. This value is calculated for each
HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results (enthalpy addition only) are averaged for the
time step being reported.
1.30.12.2.2 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Total Heating Energy [J]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition of the Water to Air Heat Pump to the zone it is
serving in Joules over the time step being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference
of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams, the air mass flow rate through the heat pump, and the
HVAC simulation time step. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated,
and the results (enthalpy addition only) are summed for the time step being reported.
1.30.12.2.3 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Total Cooling Rate [W]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction rate of the Water to Air Heat Pump from the
zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet
air and inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the heat pump. This value is calculated for
each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results (enthalpy extraction only) are averaged for
the time step being reported.
1.30.12.2.4 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Total Cooling Energy [J]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction of the Water to Air Heat Pump from the zone it
is serving in Joules over the time step being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference
of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams, the air mass flow rate through the heat pump, and the
HVAC simulation time step. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated,
and the results (enthalpy extraction only) are summed for the time step being reported.
1262 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.30.12.2.5 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Sensible Heating Rate [W]
This output field is the sensible heat addition rate of the Water to Air Heat Pump to the zone it is
serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet air and
inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass flow rate through the heat pump. This
value is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results (heating only) are
averaged for the time step being reported.
1.30.12.2.6 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Sensible Heating Energy [J]
This output field is the sensible heat addition of the Water to Air Heat Pump to the zone it is serving
in Joules over the time step being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the
heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, the air mass flow rate through
the heat pump, and the HVAC simulation time step. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time
step being simulated, and the results (heating only) are summed for the time step being reported.
1.30.12.2.7 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction rate of the Water to Air Heat Pump
from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat
pump outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass flow rate through
the heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results
(cooling only) are averaged for the time step being reported.
1.30.12.2.8 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction of the Water to Air Heat Pump from the
zone it is serving in Joules over the time step being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy
difference of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, the air mass
flow rate through the heat pump, and the HVAC simulation time step. This value is calculated for each
HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results (cooling only) are summed for the time step being
reported.
1.30.12.2.9 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Latent Heating Rate [W]
This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) rate of the Water to Air Heat Pump to
the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy rate
and the sensible energy rate provided by the WaterToAirHP heat pump. This value is calculated for each
HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results (latent heat addition only) are averaged for the
time step being reported.
1.30.12.2.10 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Latent Heating Energy [J]
This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) of the Water to Air Heat Pump to the zone
it is serving in Joules over the time step being reported. This value is calculated as the difference between
the total energy delivered to the zone and the sensible energy delivered to the zone by the WaterToAirHP
heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results
(latent heat addition only) are summed for the time step being reported.
1.30.12.2.11 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Latent Cooling Rate [W]
This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) rate of the Water to Air Heat Pump
from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy
rate and the sensible energy rate provided by the WaterToAirHP heat pump. This value is calculated for
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1263
each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results (latent heat extraction only) are averaged
for the time step being reported.
1.30.12.2.12 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Latent Cooling Energy [J]
This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) of the Water to Air Heat Pump
from the zone it is serving in Joules over the time step being reported. This value is calculated as the
difference between the total energy delivered to the zone and the sensible energy delivered to the zone by
the WaterToAirHP heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated,
and the results (latent heat extraction only) are summed for the time step being reported.
1.30.12.2.15 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Fan Part Load Ratio []
This output field is the part-load ratio of the fan. The fan part-load ratio is defined as the average
supply air mass flow rate divided by the maximum supply air mass flow rate. The maximum supply air
mass flow rate depends on whether heating, cooling, or no heating or cooling is required during the time
step. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged
for the time step being reported.
1.30.12.2.16 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Compressor Part Load Ratio []
This output field is the part-load ratio of the compressor used by the DX coils (cooling and heating).
Compressor part-load ratio is defined as the total coil load divided by the coil steady-state capacity. This
value is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the
time step being reported.
may not correspond to the values described here when output variable frequencies other than detailed are
used. Use the “detailed” reporting frequency (Ref. Output:Variable object) to view the availability status
at each simulation timestep.
1.30.13 ZoneHVAC:Dehumidifier:DX
This object can be used for modeling conventional mechanical dehumidifiers. These systems use a direct
expansion (DX) cooling coil to cool and dehumidify an airstream. Heat from the DX system’s condenser
section is rejected into the cool/dehumidified airstream, resulting in warm dry air being supplied from the
unit. In EnergyPlus, this object is modeled as a type of zone equipment (ref. ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList
and ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections).
The model has inputs for water removal, energy factor and air flow rate at rated conditions (26.7°C,
60% RH). Curve objects must be specified to describe performance at off-rated conditions. A part-load
cycling curve input must also be specified to account for inefficiencies due to cycling. Other inputs including
minimum and maximum operating temperatures for dehumidifier operation, off-cycle parasitic load, and
an input to direct the removed water to a storage tank.
The model assumes that this equipment dehumidifies and heats the air. If used in tandem with
another system that cools and dehumidifies the zone air, then the zone dehumidifier should be specified as
the lowest cooling priority in the ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList object for best control of zone temperature
and humidity levels (e.g., if there are 3 pieces of equipment in ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList, then the zone
dehumidifier should have Cooling Priority = 3). With this zone equipment prioritization, the other cooling
and dehumidification system would operate first to meet the temperature setpoint (and possibly meet the
high humidity setpoint as well). If additional dehumidification is needed, then the zone dehumidifier would
operate. The sensible heat generated by the dehumidifier is carried over to the zone air heat balance for
the next HVAC time step.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1265
1.30.13.1 Inputs
1.30.13.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a zone DX dehumidifier unit. Any reference to this
dehumidifier by another object will use this name.
ZoneHVAC:Dehumidifier:DX ,
North Zone Dehumidifier , !- Name
ON , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone3DehumidifierInlet , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Dehumidifier Outlet Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
50.16 , !- Rated Water Removal {L/day} (106 pints/day)
3.412 , !- Rated Energy Factor {L/kWh} (7.21 pints/kWh)
0.12036 , !- Rated Air Flow Rate {m3/s} (255 cfm)
ZoneDehumidWaterRemoval , !- Water Removal Curve Name
ZoneDehumidEnergyFactor , !- Energy Factor Curve Name
ZoneDehumidPLFFPLR , !- Part Load Fraction Correlation Curve Name
10.0, !- Minimum Dry -Bulb Temperature for Compressor Operation {C}
32.0, !- Maximum Dry -Bulb Temperature for Compressor Operation {C}
0.0; !- Off Cycle Parasitic Electric Load {W}
ZoneControl:Humidistat ,
Zone 3 Humidistat , !- Name
NORTH ZONE , !- Zone Name
Seasonal Relative Humidity Sch; !- Relative Humidity Setpoint Schedule Name
1.30.13.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Zone Dehumidifier Sensible Heating Rate [W]
1.30.14 ZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator
The ZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator - stand alone energy recovery ventilator (ERV) is a single-zone
HVAC component used for exhaust air heat recovery (Figure 1.138). This compound object consists of 3
required components: a generic air-to-air heat exchanger (see object Heat Exchanger:Air to Air:Generic),
a supply air fan, and an exhaust air fan (see object Fan:OnOff).
An optional controller (see object ZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator:Controller) may be used to
simulate economizer (free cooling) operation, modify air flow rates based on high indoor humidity, or
simulate a “push-button” type economizer controller.
This compound object models the basic operation of supply and exhaust air fans and an air-to-air heat
exchanger. The stand alone ERV operates whenever the unit is scheduled to be available (Availability
schedule). The stand alone ERV object can be used in conjunction with an economizer feature whereby
heat exchange is suspended whenever free cooling is available (i.e., air flow is fully bypassed around a
fixed-plate heat exchanger or the rotation of a rotary heat exchanger is stopped). The economizer feature
may also be activated based on a time-of-day schedule. Heat exchange is also suspended when air flow
rates through the heat exchanger are modified in response to a zone humidistat. When an economizer is
used in conjunction with high humidity control, high humidity control has the priority.
To model a stand alone ERV connected to a single zone, the input data file should include the following
objects:
• ZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator
• HeatExchanger:AirToAir:SensibleAndLatent
• SetpointManager:Scheduled (if supply air outlet temperature control is used, Ref. Heat Ex-
changer:Air to Air:Generic for additional guidance)
• ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections
• ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList
• OutdoorAir:NodeList
A description of each input field for this compound object is provided below.
1.30.14.1 Inputs
1.30.14.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user-assigned name for the stand alone ERV unit. Any reference to this unit by another
object will use this name.
ZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator ,
Stand Alone ERV 1, !- Stand alone ERV name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability schedule name
OA Heat Recovery 1, !- Heat exchanger name
0.05, !- Supply air flow rate {m3/s}
0.05, !- Exhaust air flow rate {m3/s}
Stand Alone ERV Supply Fan , !- Supply air fan name
Stand Alone ERV Exhaust Fan , !- Exhaust air fan name
ERV OA Controller 1; !- ERV controller name
OutdoorAir:NodeLine ,
OutsideAirInletNodes ; !- 1st Node name or node list name
NodeList ,
OutsideAirInletNodes , !- Node List Name
ERV Outdoor air Inlet Node; !- Node_ID_1
ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections ,
RESISTIVE ZONE , !- Zone Name
Zone1Equipment , !- List Name: Zone Equipment
Zone1Inlets , !- List Name: Zone Inlet Nodes
Zone1Exhausts , !- List Name: Zone Exhaust Nodes
Zone 1 Node , !- Zone Air Node Name
Zone 1 Outlet Node; !- Zone Return Air Node Name
ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList ,
Zone1Equipment , !-Name
ZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator , !- KEY --Zone Equipment Type 1
Stand Alone ERV 1, !- Type Name 1
1, !- Cooling Priority
1; !- Heating Priority
NodeList ,
Zone1Inlets , !- Node List Name
Stand Alone ERV Supply Fan Outlet Node; !- Node_ID_1
NodeList ,
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1273
ZoneHVAC: EnergyRecoveryVentilator:Controller ,
ERV OA Controller 1, !- ERV controller name
0.05, !- Outdoor air flow rate {m3/s}
19., !- Temperature high limit {C}
14., !- Temperature low limit {C}
0.0, !- Enthalpy high limit {J/kg}
NoExhaustAirTemperatureLimit , !- Exhaust air temperature limit
NoExhaustAirEnthalpyLimit ; !- Exhaust air enthalpy limit
HeatExchanger:AirToAir:SensibleAndLatent ,
OA Heat Recovery 1, !- Heat exchanger name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability schedule name
0.05, !- Nominal supply air flow rate {m3/s}
.76, !- Sensible effectiveness at 100% airflow heating condition
.68, !- Latent effectiveness at 100% airflow heating condition
.81, !- Sensible effectiveness at 75% airflow heating condition
.73, !- Latent effectiveness at 75% airflow heating condition
.76, !- Sensible effectiveness at 100% airflow cooling condition
.68, !- Latent effectiveness at 100% airflow cooling condition
.81, !- Sensible effectiveness at 75% airflow cooling condition
.73, !- Latent effectiveness at 75% airflow cooling condition
ERV Outdoor air Inlet Node , !- Supply air inlet node name
Heat Recovery Outlet Node , !- Supply air outlet node name
Zone 1 Exhaust Node , !- Exhaust air inlet node name
Heat Recovery Secondary Outlet Node , !- Exhaust air outlet node name
50.0, !- Nominal electric power {W}
Yes , !- Supply air outlet temperature control
Rotary , !- Heat exchanger type
MinimumExhaustTemperature , !- Frost control type
1.7; !- Threshold temperature
Fan:OnOff ,
Stand Alone ERV Supply Fan , !- Fan Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.5, !- Fan Total Efficiency
75.0, !- Delta Pressure {Pa}
0.05, !- Max Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Heat Recovery Outlet Node , !- Fan_Inlet_Node
Stand Alone ERV Supply Fan Outlet Node; !- Fan_Outlet_Node
Fan:OnOff ,
Stand Alone ERV Exhaust Fan , !- Fan Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.5, !- Fan Total Efficiency
75.0, !- Delta Pressure {Pa}
0.05, !- Max Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Heat Recovery Secondary Outlet Node , !- Fan_Inlet_Node
Stand Alone ERV Exhaust Fan Outlet Node; !- Fan_Outlet_Node
SetpointManager:Scheduled ,
Heat Exhchanger Supply Air Temp Manager , !- Name
Temperature , !- Control variable
Heat Exchanger Supply Air Temp Sch , !- Schedule Name
Heat Exchanger Supply Air Nodes; !- Name of the set point Node List
1274 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
NodeList ,
Heat Exchanger Supply Air Nodes , !- Node List Name
Heat Recovery Outlet Node; !- Node_ID_1
1.30.14.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilator Electric Power[W]
1.30.15 ZoneHVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow
Zone terminal units with variable refrigerant flow DX coils are used exclusively with variable refriger-
ant flow (VRF) air conditioning systems (Ref. AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow objects). The
zone terminal units are connected to a zone using the inlet and exhaust node names specified in a Zone-
HVAC:EquipmentConnections object. The zone exhaust node has the same name as the terminal unit
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1277
air inlet node. The zone inlet node has the same name as the terminal unit air outlet node. The zone
terminal unit is also listed in a zone’s equipment list and will typically be the first equipment operating
for both cooling and heating (i.e., Sequence = 1 in the ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList). Other ZoneHVAC
equipment may be used in the same zone and should be sequenced to operate after the zone terminal units
(i.e., sequence = 2 or higher)
The terminal units operate to satisfy a heating or cooling load in a zone based on a zone thermostat
temperature set point. A direct-expansion (DX) cooling and/or DX heating coil is specified depending on
the operating mode required. Both a DX cooling and DX heating coil will typically be installed in the
terminal unit, however only one may be used if desired. Outdoor ventilation air is modeled with the use
of an optional outside air mixer object. Outside air may be provided to the zone only when the coil is
operating or can be supplied continuously even when the coil is not operating.
A supply air fan is also required and can be modeled as either draw through or blow through. The
Supply Air Fan Object Type must be Fan:SystemModel, Fan:OnOff, or Fan:ConstantVolume if AirCon-
ditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow is used to model the VRF outdoor unit. The Supply Air Fan Object
Type must be Fan:SystemModel or Fan:VariableVolume if AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:-
FluidTemperatureControl or AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl:HR is
used to model the VRF outdoor unit.
1.30.15.1 Inputs
1.30.15.1.1 Field: Zone Terminal Unit Name
This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a variable refrigerant flow
zone terminal unit. Any reference to this terminal unit by another object will use this name. The zone
terminal unit name must be specified in a ZoneTerminalUnitList object to connect this terminal unit to
an AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow object.
1.30.15.1.23 Field: Zone Terminal Unit Off Parasitic Electric Energy Use
This numeric field defines the parasitic electrical energy use of the zone terminal unit when the terminal
unit coil(s) is not operating. When the previous mode was cooling, this electric energy use is reported in
a zone terminal unit cooling electric consumption output variable. When the previous mode was heating,
this electric energy use is reported in a zone terminal unit heating electric consumption output variable.
ZoneHVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow ,
Zone 1 TU , !- Zone Terminal Unit Name
TU Availability Schedule ,!- Terminal Unit Availability schedule
TU1 Inlet Node , !- Terminal Unit Air Inlet Node Name
TU1 Outlet Node , !- Terminal Unit Air Outlet Node Name
0.005 , !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0, !- No Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.005 , !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0, !- No Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.001 , !- Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate
0.001 , !- Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate
0, !- No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate
TU1 Fan Op Schedule , !- Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name
drawthrough , !- Supply Air Fan placement
Fan:ConstantVolume , !- Supply Air Fan Object Type
TU1 SA Fan , !- Supply Air Fan Object Name
OutdoorAir:Mixer , !- Outside Air Mixer Object Type
TU1 OA Mixer , !- Outside Air Mixer Object Name
COIL:Cooling:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow , !- Cooling Coil Object Type
TU1 VRF DX Cooling Coil , !- Cooling Coil Object Name
COIL:Heating:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow , !- Heating Coil Object Type
TU1 VRF DX Heating Coil , !- Heating Coil Object Name
30, !- Zone Terminal Unit On Parasitic Electric Energy Use {W}
20, !- Zone Terminal Unit Off Parasitic Electric Energy Use {W}
, !- Rated Total Heating Capacity Sizing Ratio {W/W}
; !- Availability Manager List Name
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1281
1.30.15.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Zone VRF Air Terminal Total Cooling Rate [W]
1.30.16 ZoneHVAC:HybridUnitaryHVAC
ZoneHVAC:Hybrid UnitaryHVAC is a black-box model for packaged forced air equipment with multiple
discrete operating modes. Generally, a ”hybrid“ is any system that exhibits both continuous and discrete
dynamic behavior – a system that can both flow (as could be described by a differential equation) and
jump (as must be described by distinct modes). Equipment in this category may utilize a wide variety
technologies including, but not limited to: indirect evaporative cooling, desiccant dehumidification, heat
recovery, vapor compression, adsorption, or ventilation cooling. Each hybrid system packages multiple
technologies into a single integrated system. There are a multitude of unique hybrid system architectures,
and each unique system may have numerous unique operating modes.
The model can accommodate up to 26 discrete operating modes, including a standby mode. Each mode is
limited to operate within independently specified ranges of indoor and outdoor psychrometric conditions.
The standby mode is not limited by either indoor or outdoor psychrometric conditions.
1.30.16.1 Inputs
1.30.16.1.1 Field: Name
1286 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
This alpha input field specifies a unique user-assigned name for one ZoneHVAC:HybridUnitaryHVAC
unit. Any reference to this unit by another object will use this name. The name must be specified in a
ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList object to connect this unit to a zone.
1.30.16.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name This alpha input field specifies the name of
the schedule (ref: Group – Schedules) that specifies when the ZoneHVAC:HybridUnitaryHVAC unit can
operate. A schedule value greater than 0 means the unit can be available. A schedule value equal to zero
means the unit cannot operate. Availability of the unit is governed by the availability schedule and by
availability managers. The availability schedule may be used to completely disable the unit. If this field
is blank, the unit can always be available. If the unit is available but there is no sensible load, no latent
load, and no need for ventilation, the unit will operate in a standby mode (mode 0).
1.30.16.1.3 Field: Availability Manager List Name This optional alpha input field is the
name of an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object. (ref: Group - Air Distribution, AvailabilityMan-
agerAssignmentList, and Group - System Availability Managers). Availability of the unit is governed by the
availability schedule and by availability managers specified in the list named here. If the unit is available
but there is no sensible load, no latent load, and no need for ventilation, the unit will operate in a standby
mode (mode 0).
1.30.16.1.4 Field: Minimum Supply Air Temperature Schedule Name This optional
alpha input field specifies the name of the schedule (ref: Group – Schedules) that specifies the minimum
supply air temperature allowed in each time step. Values in this schedule are used as a constraint in
choosing the feasible settings for supply air flow rate and outdoor air fraction in each operating mode. If
this field is blank, no minimum is imposed.
1.30.16.1.5 Field: Maximum Supply Air Temperature Schedule Name This optional
alpha input field specifies the name of the schedule (ref: Group – Schedules) that specifies the maximum
supply air temperature allowed in each time step. Values in this schedule are used as a constraint in
choosing the feasible settings for supply air flow rate and outdoor air fraction in each operating mode. If
this field is blank, no maximum is imposed.
1.30.16.1.6 Field: Minimum Supply Air Humidity Ratio Schedule Name This optional
alpha input field specifies the name of the schedule (ref: Group – Schedules) that specifies the minimum
supply air humidity ratio allowed in each time step. Values in this schedule are used as a constraint in
choosing the feasible settings for supply air flow rate and outdoor air fraction in each operating mode. If
this field is blank, no minimum is imposed.
1.30.16.1.7 Field: Maximum Supply Air Humidity Ratio Schedule Name This optional
alpha input field specifies the name of the schedule (ref: Group – Schedules) that specifies the maximum
supply air humidity raio allowed in each time step. Values in this schedule are used as a constraint in
choosing the feasible settings for supply air flow rate and outdoor air fraction in each operating mode. If
this field is blank, no maximum is imposed.
1.30.16.1.8 Field: Method to Choose Controlled Inputs and Part Runtime Fraction
This alpha input field specifies the method that will be used to choose operating mode(s), supply air flow
rate(s), outdoor air fraction(s) and part runtime fraction(s) in each time step. The only valid choices are
”Automatic“ and ”User Defined“, ”Automatic“ chooses the controlled independent variables to minimize
resource use within each time step, subject to constraints, while best satisfying zone sensible loads, latent
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1287
loads, and the scheduled ventilation rate. ”User Defined“ indicates that the user will provide a custom
control sequence, using Energy Management System objects or other means, to choose the controlled
independent variables and determine system outputs in each time step.
1.30.16.1.9 Field: Return Air Node Name This alpha input field specifies the name of the
HVAC system node from which the hybrid unit draws return air. This node name must also be specified
as a zone return air node in a ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections object. It may also be included in
NodeList object that is specified as a zone return air node in a ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections object.
(Ref. Group - Zone Equipment ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections and Group - Node-Branch Management
NodeList).
1.30.16.1.10 Field: Outdoor Air Node Name This alpha input field specifies the name of the
HVAC system node from which the hybrid unit draws outdoor air. This node name must also be specified
in an OutdoorAir:Node or OutdoorAir:NodeList object. If this field is blank, a node name will be created
internally. (Ref. Group - Node-Branch Management OutdoorAir:Node and OutdoorAir:NodeList).
1.30.16.1.11 Field: Supply Air Node Name This alpha input field specifies the name of the
HVAC system node to which the hybrid unit sends supply air. This node name must also be specified as
zone inlet node in a ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections object. It may also be included in NodeList object
that is specified as a zone inlet node in a ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections object. (Ref. Group - Zone
Equipment ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections and Group - Node-Branch Management NodeList).
1.30.16.1.12 Field: Relief Node Name This optional alpha input field specifies the name of an
HVAC system node which can extract air from the zone to balance the air supplied to the zone by the
unit. This node name would match the name of a zone exhaust air node.
1.30.16.1.13 Field: System Maximum Supply Air Volume Flow Rate This numeric input
field specifies the maximum standard density supply air volume flow rate among all operating modes. The
field allows custom resizing of the hybrid unit. The values specified in each Table:MultiVariableLookup
object associated with a hybrid unit represent performance data for a specific product of a particular
size, but the value output from each Table:MultiVariableLookup object is augmented by a normalization
reference (Ref: Group - Performance Tables Table:MultiVariableLookup). The normalization reference
specified for all Table:MultiVariableLookup objects associated with a hybrid unit should be the maximum
supply air mass flow rate for the real hybrid unit that was used to create the performance data included
in each table object. The value in this field is used to rescale the normalized values output from tables
for extensive dependent variables. If the standard density supply air volume flow rate input to this field is
equivalent to the system maximum supply air mass flow rate used as the normalization reference – given
appropriate unit conversions – then the resulting output from the model will exactly match the original
performance data specified in each table. If the value in this field is larger or smaller, the values for extensive
dependent variables will be scaled proportionally. The values of intensive dependent variables are rescaled
by the normalization reference value, so will always match the original performance data specified in each
table object. The value in this field should be specified as standard density volume flow rate. Standard
density in EnergyPlus corresponds to dry air at 20ºC drybulb, and 101,325 Pa.
1.30.16.1.14 Field: External Static Pressure at System Maximum Supply Air Flow
Rate This optional numeric input field specifies the external static pressure at the system maximum
supply air flow rate specified in the previous field. Fan affinity laws are used to scale supply fan power
from the scenario used to create the performance data included in each Table:MultiVariableLookup object,
1288 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
to a scenario that corresponds to the value specified in this field. The result is also used to adjust the
system electric power accordingly. If this field is blank, the supply fan power is not scaled from the values
specified in lookup tables.
1.30.16.1.15 Field: Scaling Factor This optional numeric field scales all extensive dependent
variables including: supply air mass flow rate, electricity use, fuel uses, and water use. The value in this
field acts together with the value in field System Maximum Standard Density Supply Air Volume Flow
Rate to allow custom resizing of the hybrid unit.
1.30.16.1.16 Field: Number of Operating Modes This numeric field specifies the number
of discrete operating modes for the hybrid unit. Supply air mass flow rate ratio and outdoor air fraction
are treated as continuous controlled independent variables within each discrete operating mode. All other
independent parameters, such as compressor speed, must be described by discrete operating modes. Mode
0 always describes standby operation. Mode 1 - Mode 25 describe active operating modes that provide
ventilation, heating, cooling, humidification or dehumidification. 26 modes are allowed (including Mode
0). If the value input to this field is 1, only Mode 0 will be considered when the model choses setting
to satisfy sensible loads, latent loads, or scheduled ventilation volume. If this field is blank, the default
number of operating modes is 1.
1.30.16.1.17 Field: Minimum Time Between Mode Change This numeric field specifies
the minimum time that must pass before the hybrid unit can change mode. If the value in this field is
larger than each timestep, the mode selected in one time step will persist in later time steps until the
minimum time between mode change is satisfied. If the value in this field is smaller than each timestep, it
will determine the minimum part runtime fraction allowed for any mode. Supply air mass flow rate and
outdoor air fraction within a mode are not subject to minimum runtime and may change in every time
step, or with any part runtime fraction. Mode 0 does not have a minimum time. If this field is blank, the
default minimum time between mode change is 10 minutes.
1.30.16.1.18 Field: First Fuel Type This alpha field specifies the fuel type associated with the
Table:MultiVariableLookup object specified in field ”System Electric Power Power Lookup Table“. Valid
choices include: None, Electricity, NaturalGas, PropaneGas, FuelOil#1, FuelOil#2, Diesel, Gasoline, Coal,
OtherFuel1, OtherFuel2, Steam, DistrictHeating and DistrictCooling. If this field is blank, the default first
fuel type is Electricity.
1.30.16.1.19 Field: Second Fuel Type This alpha field specifies the fuel type associated with
the Table:MultiVariableLookup object specified in field ”System Second Fuel Consumption Lookup Table“.
Valid choices include: None, Electricity, NaturalGas, PropaneGas, FuelOil#1, FuelOil#2, Diesel, Gasoline,
Coal, OtherFuel1, OtherFuel2, Steam, DistrictHeating and DistrictCooling. If this field is blank, the default
second fuel type is None.
1.30.16.1.20 Field: Third Fuel Type This alpha field specifies the fuel type associated with
the Table:MultiVariableLookup object specified in field ”System Third Fuel Consumption Lookup Table“.
Valid choices include: None, Electricity, NaturalGas, PropaneGas, FuelOil#1, FuelOil#2, Diesel, Gasoline,
Coal, OtherFuel1, OtherFuel2, Steam, DistrictHeating and DistrictCooling. If this field is blank, the default
second fuel type is None.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1289
1.30.16.1.22 Field: Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name This alpha field
specifies the name of a DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir object which specifies the a schedule for the required
standard density volume of outdoor air. If this field is blank, the system may still supply outdoor air, if it
is capable, when doing so is the most efficient way to satisfy other constraints.
1.30.16.1.23 Field: Mode 0 Name This alpha input field specifies a unique user-assigned de-
scriptive name for Mode 0. Mode 0 describes performance when the hybrid unit is in standby. Mode 0
is usually characterized by electricity use for controls and crankcase heaters, or other standby resource
consumption. Mode 0 will be chosen for any timestep, or portion of timestep, when the unit is available,
but there is no sensible load, latent load, or scheduled ventilation. Mode 0 is not constrained by limits on
indoor or outdoor conditions.
1.30.16.1.24 Field: Mode 0 Supply Air Temperature Lookup Table Name This op-
tional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:MultiVariableLookup object that describes supply air
temperature for Mode 0 as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature, outdoor air
humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow rate, and outdoor
air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode 0 will not be considered for any period that requires ventilation,
heating, cooling, humidification, or dehumidification. If this field is blank, when Mode 0 is chosen (during
standby periods) the supply air temperature will equal the return air temperature.
1.30.16.1.25 Field: Mode 0 Supply Air Humidity Ratio Lookup Table Name This
optional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:MultiVariableLookup object that describes supply
air humidity ratio for Mode 0 as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature, outdoor
air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow rate, and outdoor
air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode 0 will not be considered for any period that requires ventilation,
heating, cooling, humidification, or dehumidification. If this field is blank, when Mode 0 is chosen (during
standby periods) the supply air humidity ratio will equal the return air humidity ratio.
1.30.16.1.26 Field: Mode 0 System Electric Power Lookup Table Name This optional
alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:MultiVariableLookup object that describes electric power
consumption for Mode 0 as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature, outdoor air
humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow rate, and outdoor
air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode 0 does not consume electricity.
1.30.16.1.27 Field: Mode 0 Supply Fan Electric Power Lookup Table Name This op-
tional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:MultiVariableLookup object that describes supply fan
electric power consumption for Mode 0 as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature,
outdoor air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow rate,
and outdoor air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode 0 does not consume electricity for supply fan.
1290 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.30.16.1.28 Field: Mode 0 External Static Pressure Lookup Table Name This optional
alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:MultiVariableLookup object that describes external static
pressure for Mode 0 as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature, outdoor air
humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow rate, and outdoor
air fraction. If this field is blank, external static pressure will not be reported.
1.30.16.1.29 Field: Mode 0 System Second Fuel Consumption Lookup Table Name
This optional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:MultiVariableLookup object that describes
second fuel consumption for Mode 0 as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature,
outdoor air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow rate,
and outdoor air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode 0 does not consume a second fuel.
1.30.16.1.30 Field: Mode 0 System Third Fuel Consumption Lookup Table Name
This optional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:MultiVariableLookup object that describes
third fuel consumption for Mode 0 as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature,
outdoor air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow rate,
and outdoor air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode 0 does not consume a third fuel.
1.30.16.1.31 Field: Mode 0 System Water Use Lookup Table Name This optional alpha
input field specifies the name of a Table:MultiVariableLookup object that describes water consumption for
Mode 0 as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature, outdoor air humidity ratio,
return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow rate, and outdoor air fraction. If
this field is blank, Mode 0 does not consume water.
1.30.16.1.32 Field: Mode 0 Outdoor Air Fraction This optional numeric input field specifies
the outdoor air fraction for Mode 0. Outdoor air fraction is not a controlled independent variable in Mode
0, it must be set to a particular value for all times that Mode 0 operates. Typically Mode 0 would have
zero supply air, in which case this value would be irrelevant. If this field is blank, the outdoor air fraction
for Mode 0 will be 0.00.
1.30.16.1.33 Field: Mode 0 Supply Air Mass Flow Rate Ratio This optional numeric field
specifies the supply air mass flow rate ratio for Mode 0. Mass flow rate is not a controlled independent
variable in Mode 0, it must be set to a particular value for all times that Mode 0 operates. Supply air mass
flow rate ratio describes supply air mass flow rate as a fraction of the mass flow rate associated with the
value in field: ”System Maximum Standard Density Supply Air Volume Flow Rate“. If this field is blank,
the supply air mass flow rate ratio for Mode 0 will be 0.00.
1.30.16.1.34 Field-Set: Mode Definition (extensible object) The definition of each operat-
ing mode is given as inputs to 25 fields. The first field specifies a unique name for the mode. The following
eight fields specify the names of Table:MultiVariableLookup objects that describe hybrid unit performance
parameters. The remaining sixteen fields specify constraints on controlled independent variables, and con-
straints to describe the indoor and outdoor psychrometric conditions at which the mode is allowed. The
definition of operating modes is extensible. To define multiple modes, repeat the following 25 fields with
appropriate input values for each mode. The object does not require that modes be defined in a particular
order. Up to 25 modes can be defined in this way.
1.30.16.1.35 Field: Mode # Name This alpha input field specifies a unique user-assigned de-
scriptive name for Mode #.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1291
1.30.16.1.36 Field: Mode # Supply Air Temperature Lookup Table Name This op-
tional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:MultiVariableLookup object that describes supply air
temperature for Mode # as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature, outdoor air
humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow rate, and outdoor
air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode # will not be considered for any time step that requires ventilation,
heating, cooling, humidification, or dehumidification.
1.30.16.1.37 Field: Mode # Supply Air Humidity Ratio Lookup Table Name This
optional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:MultiVariableLookup object that describes supply
air humidity ratio for Mode # as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature, outdoor
air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow rate, and outdoor
air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode # will not be considered for any period that requires ventilation,
heating, cooling, humidification, or dehumidification.
1.30.16.1.38 Field: Mode # System Electric Power Lookup Table Name This optional
alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:MultiVariableLookup object that describes system electric
power consumption for Mode # as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature,
outdoor air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow rate,
and outdoor air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode # does not consume electricity.
1.30.16.1.39 Field: Mode # Supply Fan Electric Power Lookup Table Name This
optional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:MultiVariableLookup object that describes supply
fan electric power consumption for Mode # as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air tem-
perature, outdoor air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass
flow rate, and outdoor air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode # does not consume electricity for supply
fan.
1.30.16.1.40 Field: Mode # External Static Pressure Lookup Table Name This op-
tional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:MultiVariableLookup object that describes external
static pressure for Mode # as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature, outdoor air
humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow rate, and outdoor
air fraction. If this field is blank, external static pressure will not be reported for Mode #.
1.30.16.1.41 Field: Mode # System Second Fuel Consumption Lookup Table Name
This optional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:MultiVariableLookup object that describes
second fuel consumption for Mode # as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature,
outdoor air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow rate,
and outdoor air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode # does not consume a second fuel.
1.30.16.1.42 Field: Mode # System Third Fuel Consumption Lookup Table Name
This optional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:MultiVariableLookup object that describes
third fuel consumption for Mode # as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature,
outdoor air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow rate,
and outdoor air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode # does not consume a third fuel.
1.30.16.1.43 Field: Mode # System Water Use Lookup Table Name This optional alpha
input field specifies the name of a Table:MultiVariableLookup object that describes water consumption for
Mode # as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature, outdoor air humidity ratio,
1292 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow rate, and outdoor air fraction. If
this field is blank, Mode # does not consume water.
1.30.16.1.44 Field: Mode # Minimum Outdoor Air Temperature This optional numeric
input field specifies the minimum outdoor air temperature at which Mode # is allowed. When outdoor air
temperature is below this value all settings in Mode # will be excluded from the feasible set. This value
may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:MultiVariableLookup objects associated with Mode1, in
which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this field is blank, there will
be no lower constraint on outdoor air temperature for Mode #.
1.30.16.1.45 Field: Mode # Maximum Outdoor Air Temperature This optional numeric
input field specifies the maximum outdoor air temperature at which Mode # is allowed. When outdoor air
temperature is above this value all settings in Mode # will be excluded from the feasible set. This value
may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:MultiVariableLookup objects associated with Mode1, in
which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this field is blank, there will
be no upper constraint on outdoor air temperature for Mode #.
1.30.16.1.46 Field: Mode # Minimum Outdoor Air Humidity Ratio This optional
numeric input field specifies the minimum outdoor air humidity ratio at which Mode # is allowed. When
outdoor air humidity ratio is below this value all settings in Mode # will be excluded from the feasible set.
This value may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:MultiVariableLookup objects associated with
Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this field is blank,
there will be no lower constraint on outdoor air humidity ratio for Mode #.
1.30.16.1.47 Field: Mode # Maximum Outdoor Air Humidity Ratio This optional
numeric input field specifies the maximum outdoor air humidity ratio at which Mode # is allowed. When
outdoor air humidity ratio is above this value all settings in Mode # will be excluded from the feasible set.
This value may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:MultiVariableLookup objects associated with
Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this field is blank,
there will be no upper constraint on outdoor air humidity ratio for Mode #.
1.30.16.1.48 Field: Mode # Minimum Outdoor Air Relative Humidity This optional
numeric input field specifies the minimum outdoor air relative humidity at which Mode # is allowed. When
outdoor air relative humidity is below this value all settings in Mode # will be excluded from the feasible
set. This value may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:MultiVariableLookup objects associated
with Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this field is
blank, the lower constraint on outdoor air relative humidity will be 0.00
1.30.16.1.49 Field: Mode # Maximum Outdoor Air Relative Humidity This optional
numeric input field specifies the maximum outdoor air relative humidity at which Mode # is allowed. When
outdoor air relative humidity is above this value all settings in Mode # will be excluded from the feasible
set. This value may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:MultiVariableLookup objects associated
with Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this field is
blank, the upper constraint on outdoor air relative humidity will be 100
1.30.16.1.50 Field: Mode # Minimum Return Air Temperature This optional numeric
input field specifies the minimum return air temperature at which Mode # is allowed. When return air
temperature is below this value all settings in Mode # will be excluded from the feasible set. This value
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1293
may be beyond than the extents of the data in Table:MultiVariableLookup objects associated with Mode1,
in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this field is blank, there
will be no lower constraint on outdoor air temperature for Mode #.
1.30.16.1.51 Field: Mode # Maximum Return Air Temperature This optional numeric
input field specifies the maximum return air temperature at which Mode # is allowed. When return air
temperature is above this value all settings in Mode # will be excluded from the feasible set. This value
may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:MultiVariableLookup objects associated with Mode1, in
which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this field is blank, there will
be no upper constraint on outdoor air temperature for Mode #.
1.30.16.1.52 Field: Mode # Minimum Return Air Humidity Ratio This optional nu-
meric input field specifies the minimum return air humidity ratio at which Mode # mode one is allowed.
When return air humidity ratio is below this value all settings in Mode # will be excluded from the feasible
set. This value may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:MultiVariableLookup objects associated
with Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this field is
blank, there will be no lower constraint on return air humidity ratio for Mode #.
1.30.16.1.53 Field: Mode # Maximum Return Air Humidity Ratio This optional nu-
meric input field specifies the maximum return air humidity ratio at which Mode # is allowed. When
return air humidity ratio is above this value all settings in Mode # will be excluded from the feasible set.
This value may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:MultiVariableLookup objects associated with
Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this field is blank,
there will be no upper constraint on return air humidity ratio for Mode #.
1.30.16.1.54 Field: Mode # Minimum Return Air Relative Humidity This optional
numeric input field specifies the minimum return air relative humidity at which Mode # is allowed. When
return air relative humidity is below this value all settings in Mode # will be excluded from the feasible
set. This value may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:MultiVariableLookup objects associated
with Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this field is
blank, the lower constraint on return air relative humidity will be 0.00
1.30.16.1.55 Field: Mode # Maximum Return Air Relative Humidity This optional
numeric input field specifies the maximum return air relative humidity at which Mode # is allowed. When
return air relative humidity is above this value all settings in Mode # will be excluded from the feasible set.
This value may be beyond than the extents of the data in Table:MultiVariableLookup objects associated
with Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this field is
blank, the upper constraint on return air relative humidity will be 100
1.30.16.1.56 Field: Mode # Minimum Outdoor Air Fraction This optional numeric input
field specifies the minimum outdoor air fraction allowed in Mode #. Outdoor air fractions below this value
will be excluded from the feasible set within Mode #. This value may be beyond than the extents of the
data in Table:MultiVariableLookup objects associated with Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit
for extrapolation from the data table. If this field is blank, the lower constraint on outdoor air fraction
will be 0.00 for Mode #.
1294 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.30.16.1.57 Field: Mode # Maximum Outdoor Air Fraction This optional numeric input
field specifies the maximum outdoor air fraction allowed in Mode #. Outdoor air fractions above this value
will be excluded from the feasible set within Mode #. This value may be beyond than the extents of the
data in Table:MultiVariableLookup objects associated with Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit
for extrapolation from the data table. If this field is blank, the upper constraint on outdoor air fraction
will be 1.00 for Mode #.
1.30.16.1.58 Field: Mode # Minimum Supply Air Mass Flow Rate Ratio This optional
numeric input field specifies the minimum supply air mass flow rate ratio allowed in Mode #. Supply air
mass flow rate ratios below this value will be excluded from the feasible set within Mode #. This value
may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:MultiVariableLookup objects associated with Mode1, in
which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this field is blank, the lower
constraint on supply air mass flow rate ratio will be 0.00 for Mode #.
1.30.16.1.59 Field: Mode # Maximum Supply Air Mass Flow Rate Ratio This optional
numeric input field specifies the maximum supply air mass flow rate ratio allowed in Mode #. Supply air
mass flow rate ratios above this value will be excluded from the feasible set within Mode #. This value
may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:MultiVariableLookup objects associated with Mode1, in
which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this field is blank, the upper
constraint on supply air mass flow rate ratio will be 1.00 for Mode #.
1.30.16.2 Outputs
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Total Cooling Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Total Cooling Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Latent Cooling Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Latent Cooling Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Total Cooling Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Total Cooling Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Latent Cooling Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Latent Cooling Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Total Heating Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Total Heating Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Sensible Heating Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Sensible Heating Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Latent Heating Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Latent Heating Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Total Heating Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Total Heating Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Sensible Heating Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Sensible Heating Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Latent Heating Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Latent Heating Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Predicted Sensible Load to Setpoint Heat Transfer Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Predicted Latent Load to Humidistat Setpoint Heat Transfer Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Predicted Moisture Load to Humidistat Setpoint Moisture Transfer
Rate [kgWater/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Temperature [C]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Return Air Temperature [C]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Temperature [C]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Return Air Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Relative Humidity [%]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Return Air Relative Humidity [%]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Relative Humidity [%]
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1295
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Ventilation Air Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Electric Power [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Electric Energy [J]
Water use
Second Fuel Use
Third Fuel Use
Supply Fan Electric Power
External Static Pressure
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Requested Outdoor Air Ventilation Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Ventilation Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Availability Status []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Fraction []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Dehumidification Load to Humidistat Setpoint Moisture Transfer Rate
[kg/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Runtime Fraction in Setting 0 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Runtime Fraction in Setting 1 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Runtime Fraction in Setting 2 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Runtime Fraction in Setting 3 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Runtime Fraction in Setting 4 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Mode in Setting 0 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Mode in Setting 1 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Mode in Setting 2 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Mode in Setting 3 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Mode in Setting 4 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Fraction in Setting 0 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Fraction in Setting 1 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Fraction in Setting 2 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Fraction in Setting 3 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Fraction in Setting 4 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate in Setting 0 [kg/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate in Setting 1 [kg/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate in Setting 2 [kg/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate in Setting 3 [kg/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate in Setting 4 [kg/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate Ratio in Setting 0 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate Ratio in Setting 1 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate Ratio in Setting 2 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate Ratio in Setting 3 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate Ratio in Setting 4 []
1.30.16.2.1 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Total Cooling Rate [W] This output
reports the rate at which enthalpy is removed by the system. It is calculated as the difference between the
enthalpy of the mixture of return air and outdoor air and the enthalpy of the supply air. This output is
positive when enthalpy is removed by the system, otherwise it is zero. This output is an average rate over
the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.2 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Total Cooling Energy [J] This output
reports the amount of enthalpy removed by the system. It is calculated as the difference between the
enthalpy of the mixture of return air and outdoor air, and the enthalpy of the supply air. This output is
positive when enthalpy is removed by the system, otherwise the output is zero. This output is a sum over
the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.3 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Sensible Cooling Rate [W] This
output reports the rate at which sensible heat is removed by the system. It is calculated as the difference
between the enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the mixture of return air and outdoor air, and the
enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the supply air. This output is positive when sensible heat is
removed by the system, otherwise it is zero. This output is an average rate over the reporting period.
1296 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.30.16.2.4 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Sensible Cooling Energy [J] This
output reports the amount of sensible heat removed by the system. It is calculated as the difference
between the enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the mixture of return air and outdoor air, and the
enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the supply air. This output is positive when sensible heat is
removed by the system, otherwise it is zero. This output is a sum over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.5 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Latent Cooling Rate [W] This output
reports the rate at which latent heat is removed by the system. It is calculated as the enthalpy difference
associated with the difference between absolute humidity of the mixture of return air and outdoor air, and
the absolute humidity of the supply air. This is the phase change energy associated with moisture removed
by the system. This output is positive when latent heat is removed by the system, otherwise it is zero.
This output is an average rate over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.6 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Latent Cooling Energy [J] This out-
put reports the amount of latent heat removed by the system. It is calculated as the enthalpy difference
associated with the difference between absolute humidity of the mixture of return air and outdoor air, and
the absolute humidity of the supply air. This is the phase change energy associated with moisture removed
by the system. This output is positive when latent heat is removed by the system, otherwise it is zero.
This output is a sum over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.7 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Total Cooling Rate [W] This output
reports the rate at which enthalpy is removed from the zone. It is calculated as the difference between the
enthalpy of the return air and the enthalpy of the supply air. This output is positive when enthalpy is
removed from the zone, otherwise it is zero. This output is an average rate over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.8 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Total Cooling Energy [J] This output
reports the amount of enthalpy removed from the zone. It is calculated as the difference between the
enthalpy of the return air and the enthalpy of the supply air. This output is positive when enthalpy is
removed from the zone, otherwise it is zero. This output is a sum over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.9 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Sensible Cooling Rate [W] This output
reports the rate at which sensible heat is removed from the zone. It is calculated as the difference between
the enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the return air and the enthalpy of dry air at the temperature
of the supply air. This output is positive when sensible heat is removed from the zone, otherwise it is zero.
This output is an average rate over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.10 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Sensible Cooling Energy [J] This
output reports the amount of sensible heat removed from the zone. It is calculated as the difference
between the enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the return air and the enthalpy of dry air at the
temperature of the supply air. This output is positive when sensible heat is removed from the zone,
otherwise it is zero. This output is a sum over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.11 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Latent Cooling Rate [W] This output
reports the rate at which latent heat is removed from the zone. It is calculated as the enthalpy difference
associated with the difference between the absolute humidity of the return air, and the absolute humidity
of the supply air. This is the phase change energy associated with moisture removed from the zone. This
output is positive when latent heat is removed from the zone, otherwise it is zero. This output is an average
rate over the reporting period.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1297
1.30.16.2.12 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Latent Cooling Energy [J] This output
reports the amount of latent heat removed from the zone. It is calculated as the enthalpy difference
associated with the difference between the absolute humidity of the return air, and the absolute humidity
of the supply air. This is the phase change energy associated with moisture removed from the zone. This
output is positive when latent heat is removed from the zone, otherwise it is zero. This output is a sum
over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.13 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Total Heating Rate [W] This output
reports the rate at which enthalpy is added by the system. It is calculated as the difference between the
enthalpy of the mixture of return air and outdoor air and the enthalpy of the supply air. This output is
positive when enthalpy is added by the system, otherwise it is zero. This output is an average rate over
the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.14 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Total Heating Energy [J] This out-
put reports the amount of enthalpy added by the system. It is calculated as the difference between the
enthalpy of the mixture of return air and outdoor air, and the enthalpy of the supply air. This output is
positive when enthalpy is added by the system, otherwise the output is zero. This output is a sum over
the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.15 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Sensible Heating Rate [W] This
output reports the rate at which sensible heat is added by the system. It is calculated as the difference
between the enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the mixture of return air and outdoor air, and the
enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the supply air. This output is positive when sensible heat is
added by the system, otherwise it is zero. This output is an average rate over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.16 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Sensible Heating Energy [J] This
output reports the amount of sensible heat added by the system. It is calculated as the difference between
the enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the mixture of return air and outdoor air, and the enthalpy
of dry air at the temperature of the supply air. This output is positive when sensible heat is added by the
system, otherwise it is zero. This output is a sum over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.17 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Latent Heating Rate [W] This out-
put reports the rate at which latent heat is added by the system. It is calculated as the enthalpy difference
associated with the difference between absolute humidity of the mixture of return air and outdoor air, and
the absolute humidity of the supply air. This is the phase change energy associated with moisture added
by the system. This output is positive when latent heat is added by the system, otherwise it is zero. This
output is an average rate over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.18 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Latent Heating Energy [J] This
output reports the amount of latent heat added by the system. It is calculated as the enthalpy difference
associated with the difference between absolute humidity of the mixture of return air and outdoor air, and
the absolute humidity of the supply air. This is the phase change energy associated with moisture added
by the system. This output is positive when latent heat is added by the system, otherwise it is zero. This
output is a sum over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.19 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Total Heating Rate [W] This output
reports the rate at which enthalpy is added to the zone. It is calculated as the difference between the
1298 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
enthalpy of the return air and the enthalpy of the supply air. This output is positive when enthalpy is
added to the zone, otherwise it is zero. This output is an average rate over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.20 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Total Heating Energy [J] This output
reports the amount of enthalpy added to the zone. It is calculated as the difference between the enthalpy
of the return air and the enthalpy of the supply air. This output is positive when enthalpy is added to the
zone, otherwise it is zero. This output is a sum over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.21 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Sensible Heating Rate [W] This output
reports the rate at which sensible heat is added to the zone. It is calculated as the difference between the
enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the return air and the enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of
the supply air. This output is positive when sensible heat is added to the zone, otherwise it is zero. This
output is an average rate over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.22 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Sensible Heating Energy [J] This
output reports the amount of sensible heat added to the zone. It is calculated as the difference between
the enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the return air and the enthalpy of dry air at the temperature
of the supply air. This output is positive when sensible heat is added to the zone, otherwise it is zero. This
output is a sum over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.23 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Latent Heating Rate [W] This output
reports the rate at which latent heat is added to the zone. It is calculated as the enthalpy difference
associated with the difference between the absolute humidity of the return air, and the absolute humidity
of the supply air. This is the phase change energy associated with moisture added to the zone. This output
is positive when latent heat is added to the zone, otherwise it is zero. This output is an average rate over
the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.24 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Latent Heating Energy [J] This output
reports the amount of latent heat added to the zone. It is calculated as the enthalpy difference associated
with the difference between the absolute humidity of the return air, and the absolute humidity of the
supply air. This is the phase change energy associated with moisture added to the zone. This output is
positive when latent heat is added to the zone, otherwise it is zero. This output is a sum over the reporting
period.
1.30.16.2.25 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Predicted Sensible Load to Setpoint Heat
Transfer Rate [W] This output reports the predicted sensible heat transfer rate required to meet the
current zone thermostat setpoint. A positive value indicates a heating load, a negative value indicates a
cooling load. For a dual setpoint thermostat, the value is zero when the controlled zone’s temperature is
between the defined heating and cooling setpoints. See ZoneControl:Thermostat for further information.
This value is used as a soft inequality constraint in the constrained optimization problem that determines
system settings in each time step. The output is the average over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.26 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Predicted Latent Load to Humidistat Set-
point Heat Transfer Rate [W] This output reports the predicted latent heat transfer rate required
to meet the current zone humidistat setpoint. A positive value indicates a humidification load, a nega-
tive value indicates a dehumidification load. For a dual setpoint humidistat, the value is zero when the
controlled zone’s relative humidity is between the defined humidifying and dehumidifying setpoint. See
ZoneControl:Humidistat for further information. This value is used as a soft inequality constraint in the
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1299
constrained optimization problem that determines system settings in each time step. The output is the
average over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.28 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Temperature [C] This output
reports the supply air temperature. For each timestep the value is calculated as a supply air mass weighted
average of the supply air temperature for each of the settings selected for the time step. For example, if the
system operates for half of the timestep with supply air mass flow rate of 1 kg/s and supply air temperature
of 16 °C, and for half of the timestep at 2 kg/s and 10 °C, the supply air temperature calculated for the
time step would be 12 °C. The output is the average over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.29 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Return Air Temperature [C] This output
reports the return air temperature. The return air temperature is inherited from the associated zone
outlet node in each timestep. The output is the average over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.30 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Temperature [C] This output
reports the outdoor air temperature. The outdoor air temperature is inherited from the associated outdoor
air node in each timestep. The output is the average over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.31 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Humidity Ratio [kgWa-
ter/kgDryAir] This output reports the supply air humidity ratio. For each timestep the value is
calculated as a supply air mass weighted average of the supply air humidity ratio for each of the settings
selected for the time step. For example, if the system operates for half of the timestep with supply air
mass flow rate of 1 kg/s and supply air humidity ratio of 0.016 kg/kg, and for half of the timestep at 2
kg/s and 0.010 kg/kg, the supply air humidity ratio calculated for the time step would be 0.012 °C. The
output is the average over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.32 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Return Air Humidity Ratio [kgWa-
ter/kgDryAir] This output reports the return air humidity ratio. The return air humidity ratio
is inherited from the associated zone outlet node in each timestep. The output is the average over the
reporting period.
1.30.16.2.33 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Humidity Ratio [kgWa-
ter/kgDryAir] This output reports the outdoor air humidity ratio. The outdoor air humidity ratio
is inherited from the associated outdoor air node in each timestep. The output is the average over the
reporting period.
1.30.16.2.34 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Relative Humidity [%] This
output reports the supply air relative humidity. For each timestep the value is calculated from the supply
1300 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
air temperature and supply air humidity ratio according to standard psychrometric relationships. The
output is the time weighted average over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.35 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Return Air Relative Humidity [%] This
output reports the return air relative humidity. The return air relative humidity is inherited from the
associated zone outlet node in each timestep. The output is the average over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.36 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Relative Humidity [%] This
output reports the outdoor air relative humidity. The outdoor air relative humidity is inherited from the
associated outdoor air node in each timestep. The output is the average over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.37 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s] This
output reports the supply air mass flow rate. For each timestep the value is calculated as a time weighted
average of the supply air mass flow rate for each of the settings selected for the time step. The output is
the average over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.38 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Standard Density Volume Flow
Rate [m3/s] This output reports the supply air flow as a standard density volume flow rate. Standard
density in EnergyPlus corresponds to dry air at 20ºC drybulb, and 101,325 Pa. The output is the average
over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.39 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Ventilation Air Standard Density Volume
Flow Rate [m3/s] This output reports the outdoor air (ventilation) flow as a standard density volume
flow rate. Standard density in EnergyPlus corresponds to dry air at 20ºC drybulb, and 101,325 Pa. The
output is the average over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.40 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Electric Power [W] This output reports the
electric power input to the system. For each timestep the value is calculated as a time weighted average
of the electric power for each of the settings selected for the time step. The output is the average over the
reporting period.
1.30.16.2.41 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Electric Energy [J] This output reports the
electric energy consumed by the system. For each timestep the value is calculated from the average electric
power. The output is the sum over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.42 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Requested Outdoor Air Ventilation Mass
Flow Rate [kg/s] This output reports the mass flow rate of outdoor air (ventilation) that would
be required to meet the standard density volume flow rate of ventilation air scheduled by DesignSpecifi-
cation:OutdoorAir. This value is used as a soft constraint in the constrained optimization problem that
determines system settings in each time step. The output is the average over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.43 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Ventilation Mass Flow Rate [kg/s] This
output reports the mass flow rate of outdoor air (ventilation) supplied by the system. The output is the
average over the reporting period.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1301
1.30.16.2.44 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Availability Status [] This output reports
whether or not the system is available. A value of 1.0 means the system will operate in an attempt
to satisfy the predicted sensible load, latent load, and requested ventilation rate. For standby periods –
when the system is available, but there are no loads, and no request for ventilation – the system operates
in Mode 0. A value of 0.0 means the system will not operate under any circumstance.
1.30.16.2.45 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Fraction [] This output reports
the outdoor air fraction – the portion of the supply air mass flow rate that is composed of ventilation air.
For each timestep the value is calculated as a time weighted average of the outdoor air fraction for each of
the settings selected for the time step. The output is the average over the reporting period.
1.30.16.2.46 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Runtime Fraction in Setting X [] Thy hybrid
system may operate in multiple settings within each time step. Each setting represents a combination of
operating mode, supply air mass flow rate, and outdoor air fraction. The combination associated with
each setting number may be unique in each time step. These outputs report the fraction of the time step
that the system operates in each setting in each time step.
1.30.16.2.47 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Mode in Setting X [] Thy hybrid system may
operate in multiple settings within each time step. Each setting represents a combination of operating
mode, supply air mass flow rate, and outdoor air fraction. The combination associated with each setting
number may be unique in each time step. These outputs report the mode number associated with each
setting in each time step.
1.30.16.2.48 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Fraction in Setting X [] Thy
hybrid system may operate in multiple settings within each time step. Each setting represents a combina-
tion of operating mode, supply air mass flow rate, and outdoor air fraction. The combination associated
with each setting number may be unique in each time step. These outputs report the outdoor air fraction
associated with each setting in each time step.
1.30.16.2.49 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate in Setting X
[kg/s] Thy hybrid system may operate in multiple settings within each time step. Each setting represents
a combination of operating mode, supply air mass flow rate, and outdoor air fraction. The combination
associated with each setting number may be unique in each time step. These outputs report the supply
air mass flow rate associated with each setting in each time step.
1.30.16.2.50 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate Ratio in Setting
X [] Thy hybrid system may operate in multiple settings within each time step. Each setting represents
a combination of operating mode, supply air mass flow rate, and outdoor air fraction. The combination
associated with each setting number may be unique in each time step. These output reports the supply
air mass flow rate ratio associated with each setting in each time step. The supply air mass flow rate ratio
is the ratio of the current supply air mass flow rate to the system maximum supply air flow rate.
• AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem
• AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatOnly
• AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatCool
• AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatOnly
• AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool
• AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir
• AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir:MultiSpeed
are compound components usually placed in the primary air loop as the sole component. On the zone
equipment side they are usually connected to one or more zones through uncontrolled terminal units (i.e.,
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled objects). The maximum or design air flow rate through the furnace
or unitary system should usually be set equal to the sum of the maximum air flow rates through the
terminal unit objects. However, the simulation program can usually account for unequal air flows if the
user wishes to model this scenario.
The following HVAC equipment types are allowed in the air loop. The component matrix shows which
coils and fans are allowed with which equipment models.
Figure 1.141:
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1303
1.31.2 AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem
The AirloopHVAC:UnitarySystem object is intended to replace all other air loop equipment, although other
system types are still available. This system is unique in that it can accommodate all fan and coil types
whereas other system types are specific to the type of fan and coil available for simulation. Additionally,
although the AirloopHVAC:UnitarySystem is intended for use in the primary airloop, this object can
be modeled as zone equipment (i.e., listed in a ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList) or as an outside air system
component (i.e., listed in a AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem:EquipmentList). Water coil controllers are
not required when these coil types are used with the AirloopHVAC:UnitarySystem object (i.e., leave the
controller list name blank in the AirLoopHVAC object if water coils are used exclusively within the Unitary
System).
The AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem object is a “virtual” component that consists of a fan component
(OnOff, ConstantVolume, VariableVolume, or ComponentModel), a cooling coil component, a heating coil
component, and a reheat coil as shown in Figure 1.142. When a draw through configuration is desired, the
fan is placed directly after the heating coil. If dehumidification control is selected, a reheat coil component
is also required. If the reheat coil is present and the dehumidification control type input is not specified
as CoolReheat, the reheat coil will not be active. All of the fan and coil components are optional which
allows the AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem object to be configured for fan-only, heating-only, cooling-only,
or both heating and cooling. It may also be applied without a fan, controlling one or more coils, similar
to the function of CoilSystem:Cooling:DX.
Links to the fan, cooling coil, heating coil and reheat coil specifications are provided in the unitary
system input data syntax. In addition, the control zone name and the system design operating conditions
are specified by the unitary system inputs.
1.31.2.1 Inputs
1.31.2.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the unitary system.
This alpha field contains the schedule name which contains information on the availability of the unitary
system to operate. A schedule value equal to 0 denotes that the unitary system must be off for that time
period. A value greater than 0 denotes that the unitary system is available to operate during that time
period. This schedule may be used to completely disable the unitary system as required. If this field is left
blank, the schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.
• Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1307
• Coil:Heating:DX:TwoSpeed
• Coil:Heating:DX:MultiSpeed
• Coil:Heating:DX:VariableSpeed
• Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation
• Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
• Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:Gas:MultiStage
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:Electric:MultiStage
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Steam
• Coil:Heating:Desuperheater
• Coil:UserDefined
• Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
• Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed:ThermalStorage
• Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoSpeed
• Coil:Cooling:DX:MultiSpeed
• Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed
• Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWithHumidityControlMode
• CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted
• Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation
• Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
1308 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit
• Coil:Cooling:Water
• Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry
• CoilSystem:Cooling:Water:HeatExchangerAssisted
• Coil:UserDefined
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:Desuperheater
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1309
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Steam
• Coil:UserDefined
1.31.2.1.24 Field: Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area
This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate per floor area leaving the unitary system in meters per
second when the cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 if the cooling coil is present or this
field is autosizable. Required field when Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FlowPerFloorArea.
1.31.2.1.25 Field: Cooling Fraction of Autosized Design Cooling Supply Air Flow
Rate
This numeric field defines the fraction of autosized supply air flow rate leaving the unitary system when
the cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 if the cooling coil is present or this field is
autosizable. Required field when Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FractionOfAutosizedCool-
ingValue.
1.31.2.1.26 Field: Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity
This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate per unit of capacity leaving the unitary system when
the cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 if the cooling coil is present or this field is
autosizable. Required field when Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FlowPerCoolingCapacity.
1.31.2.1.29 Field: Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area
This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate per floor area leaving the unitary system in meters per
second when the heating coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 if the heating coil is present or this
field is autosizable. Required field when Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FlowPerFloorArea.
1.31.2.1.30 Field: Heating Fraction of Autosized Design Heating Supply Air Flow
Rate
This numeric field defines the fraction of autosized supply air flow rate leaving the unitary system when
the heating coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 if the heating coil is present or this field is
autosizable. Required field when Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FractionOfAutosizedHeat-
ingValue.
1.31.2.1.31 Field: Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity
This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate per unit of capacity leaving the unitary system when
the heating coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 if the heating coil is present or this field is
autosizable. Required field when Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FlowPerHeatingCapacity.
1.31.2.1.34 Field: No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area
This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate per floor area leaving the unitary system in meters
per second when neither cooling or heating coil is operating. Values must be greater than or equal to
0 or this field is autosizable. Required field when No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Method During is
FlowPerFloorArea.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1311
1.31.2.1.35 Field: No Load Fraction of Autosized Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
This numeric field defines the fraction of autosized supply air flow rate leaving the unitary system
when neither cooling or heating coil is operating. Values must be greater than or equal to 0 or this field is
autosizable. Required field when No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FractionOfAutosizedCool-
ingValue.
1.31.2.1.36 Field: No Load Fraction of Autosized Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
This numeric field defines the fraction of autosized supply air flow rate leaving the unitary system when
the neither cooling or heating coil is operating. Values must be greater than or equal to 0 or this field is
autosizable. Required field when No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FractionOfAutosizedHeat-
ingValue.
1.31.2.1.37 Field: No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity During Cool-
ing Operation
This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate per unit of capacity leaving the unitary system when
neither cooling or heating is operating. Values must be greater than or equal to 0 or this field is autosizable.
Required field when No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FlowPerCoolingCapacity.
1.31.2.1.38 Field: No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity During Heat-
ing Operation
This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate per unit of capacity leaving the unitary system when
neither cooling or heating is operating. Values must be greater than or equal to 0 or this field is autosizable.
Required field when No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FlowPerHeatingCapacity.
This numeric field contains the time delay for the heat pump supply air fan to shut off after the
compressor cycles off in seconds. This value can be obtained from the manufacturer or the heat pump
catalog. Enter a value of zero when the heat pump’s fan operating mode is continuous. Suggested value is
60 seconds.
2) Cooling coil
3) Heating coil
4) Reheat coil
5) Direct air unit (AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled) for each zone served by the unitary system
when used in an air loop
AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem ,
DXAC Heat Pump 1, !- Name
Load , !- Control Type
East Zone , !- Controlling Zone or Thermostat Location
, !- Dehumidification Control Type
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Mixed Air Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Air Loop Outlet Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
Fan:OnOff , !- Supply Fan Object Type
Supply Fan 1, !- Supply Fan Name
BlowThrough , !- Fan Placement
FanModeSchedule , !- Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name
Coil:Heating:DX:MultiSpeed , !- Heating Coil Object Type
Heat Pump DX Heating Coil 1, !- Heating Coil Name
, !- DX Heating Coil Sizing Ratio
Coil:Cooling:DX:MultiSpeed , !- Cooling Coil Object Type
Heat Pump ACDXCoil 1, !- Cooling Coil Name
, !- Use DOAS DX Cooling Coil
, !- Minimum Supply Air Temperature {C}
, !- Latent Load Control
Coil:Heating:Fuel , !- Supplemental Heating Coil Object Type
Supp Gas Heating Coil 1, !- Supplemental Heating Coil Name
SupplyAirFlowRate , !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method
1.7, !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
, !- Cooling Fraction of Autosized Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity {m3/s-W}
SupplyAirFlowRate , !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method
1.7, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
, !- Heating Fraction of Autosized Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity {m3/s-W}
SupplyAirFlowRate , !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Method
0.2, !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
, !- No Load Fraction of Autosized Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- No Load Fraction of Autosized Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity during Cooling
Operation {m3/s-W}
, !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity during Heating
Operation {m3/s-W}
50, !- Maximum Supply Air Temperature {C}
21, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -Bulb Temperature for Supplemental Heater Operation
{C}
, !- Outdoor Dry -Bulb Temperature Sensor Node Name
, !- Maximum Cycling Rate {cycles/hr}
, !- Heat Pump Time Constant {s}
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1315
UnitarySystemPerformance :Multispeed ,
MyMultispeedHPSpec , !- Name
4, !- Number of Speeds for Heating
4, !- Number of Speeds for Cooling
No , !- Single Mode Operation
, !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Ratio
0.235294118 , !- Heating Speed 1 Supply Air Flow Ratio
0.235294118 , !- Cooling Speed 1 Supply Air Flow Ratio
0.470588235 , !- Heating Speed 2 Supply Air Flow Ratio
0.470588235 , !- Cooling Speed 2 Supply Air Flow Ratio
0.705882353 , !- Heating Speed 3 Supply Air Flow Ratio
0.705882353 , !- Cooling Speed 3 Supply Air Flow Ratio
1.0, !- Heating Speed 4 Supply Air Flow Ratio
1.0; !- Cooling Speed 4 Supply Air Flow Ratio
1.31.2.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average, Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio []
• HVAC,Average, Unitary System Heat Recovery Fluid Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
if the fuel type is electricity), fans (indoor supply air fan and the condenser fans associated with the DX
coil[s]), auxiliary power during on and off period, and the supplemental heating coil (if electric). This value
is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are summed for the timestep
being reported. Any non-electric energy use is not reported by the unitary system object but is reported
in the associated coil objects as appropriate.
1.31.2.2.17 Unitary System Predicted Sensible Load to Setpoint Heat Transfer Rate
[W]
This output variable is available only for load based and single zone VAV control and is the adjusted
sensible load requested from the zone thermostat in watts. This value is calculated by adjusting the zone
predicted sensible load to setpoint heat transfer rate based on the controlling zone air flow fraction and
the impact of fan heat and outdoor air so that the thermostat setpoints are met. This value is used for
control purposes within the Unitary System model. Positive values denote a heating load while negative
valued denote a cooling load. Positive and negative values do not necessarily represent which coil type is
active (e.g., a positive heating load does not necessarily mean the heating coil will turn on). This value is
calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep
being reported.
1.31.2.2.18 Unitary System Predicted Moisture Load to Setpoint Heat Transfer Rate
[W]
This output variable is available only for load based control and is the adjusted moisture load requested
from the zone humidistat in watts. This value is calculated by adjusting the zone predicted moisture load
to setpoint heat transfer rate based on the heat of vaporization of water, controlling zone air flow fraction
and the dehumidification control type (i.e., the moisture load is set to 0 for non-dehumidification systems).
When this value is non-zero and dehumidification is requested, the Unitary System Predicted Moisture
Load to Setpoint Heat Transfer Rate is compared to the result of sensible only control and if the coil does
not provide sufficient dehumidification the coil capacity is increased to meet this moisture load. This value
is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep
being reported.
1.31.2.2.21 Unitary System Heat Recovery Fluid Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
These outputs are the heat recovery inlet and outlet temperatures and water mass flow rate for unitary
systems with heat recovery.
1.31.3 UnitarySystemPerformance:Multispeed
1.31.3.1 Inputs
1.31.3.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the multispeed performance specification.
inputs for Number of Speeds for Cooling and Number of Speeds for Heating specified above determines
how many groups of heating and cooling supply air flow ratio inputs are required. Both inputs for Speed 1
are required and specify the air flow ratio for the lowest speed, followed by the inputs for Speed 2, Speed
3, etc. up to a maximum of 10 speeds. These inputs are applicable only to multispeed or variable speed
coils.
1.31.4 AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatCool
The heat/cool furnace is a “virtual” component that consists of a fan component (OnOff or ConstantVol-
ume), a DX cooling coil component, and a Gas or Electric heating coil component. The blow through
furnace configuration is shown in Figure 1.146 below. When a draw through furnace configuration is de-
sired, the fan is placed directly after the heating coil. If the dehumidification control type is specified as
CoolReheat, a reheat coil component is also required. If the reheat coil is present and the dehumidification
control type input is not specified as CoolReheat, the reheat coil will not be active,
Note: the coil order shown here has been revised from previous versions (prior to V4.0) of Energyplus
to configure the cooling coil upstream of the heating coil. This configuration provides uniformity with
all unitary equipment. However, for unitary HeatCool systems that do not use a reheat coil, the heating
coil can also be placed upstream of the cooling coil. This optional coil placement is retained to allow
compatibility with previous versions of Energyplus. For input files developed using previous versions of
Energyplus, it is recommended that the coil order be revised according to the figure above.
Links to the fan, heating coil, DX cooling coil and optional reheat coil specifications are provided in the
furnace input data syntax. In addition, the control zone name and the furnace design operating conditions
are specified by the furnace inputs.
1.31.4.1 Inputs
1.31.4.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the unit.
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Steam
• Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
• CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted
• Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed
• Multimode - activate enhanced dehumidification mode as needed and meet sensible load. This
option is used to model DX equipment with a controllable heat exchanger assisting the DX
cooling coil for improved dehumidification. It is valid only with cooling coil type = CoilSys-
tem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted.
1326 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• CoolReheat - cool beyond the dry-bulb temperature set point as required to meet the high humid-
ity setpoint. If cooling coil type = CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted, then the heat
exchanger is assumed to always transfer energy between the cooling coil’s inlet and outlet airstreams
when the cooling coil is operating.
The default is None. For the other dehumidification control modes, the maximum humidity setpoint
is used. This must be set using a ZoneControl:Humidistat object. When extra dehumidification is
required, the system may not be able to meet the humidity setpoint if its full capacity is not adequate. If
the dehumidification control type is specified as CoolReheat, then two additional inputs (reheat coil type
and name) are also required as shown below. Although the reheat coil is required only when CoolRheat
is selected, the optional reheat coil may be present for any of the allowed Dehumidification Control Types.
If the reheat coil is present and the dehumidification control type is not specified as CoolReheat, the
reheat coil will not be active,
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:Desuperheater
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Steam
Note: the furnace’s fan, cooling coil, heating coil and optional reheat coil must be connected in the
air loop according to the configuration shown above (Figure 1.146) when CoolReheat is selected as the
dehujmidificaiton control type. In addition, the volumetric air flow rate specified in the terminal air unit for
the controlling zone should properly reflect the fractional volumetric air flow rate specified in the furnace
object.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1327
AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatCool ,
GasHeat DXAC Furnace 1, !- Name of furnace
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability schedule
Air Loop Inlet Node , !- Furnace inlet node name
Air Loop Outlet Node , !- Furnace outlet node name
CycFanSchedule , !- Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name
80, !- Maximum supply air temperature from furnace heater {C}
1.3, !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.3, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0, !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
East Zone , !- Controlling zone or thermostat location
Fan:OnOff , !- Supply fan type
Supply Fan 1, !- Supply fan name
BlowThrough , !- Fan Placement
Coil:Heating:Fuel , !- Heating coil type
Furnace Heating Coil 1, !- Heating coil name
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed , !- Cooling coil type
Furnace ACDXCoil 1, !- Cooling coil name
None; !- Dehumidificatioin Control Type
Coil:Heating:Fuel ,
Furnace Heating Coil 1, !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
0.8, !- Gas Burner Efficiency of the Coil
25000 , !- Nominal Capacity of the Coil {W}
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil\_Air\_Inlet\_Node
Air Loop Outlet Node; !- Coil\_Air\_Outlet\_Node
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed ,
Furnace ACDXCoil 1, !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule
25000 , !- Rated Total Cooling Capacity (gross) {W}
0.75, !- Rated SHR
3.0, !- Rated COP
1.3, !- Rated Air Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
DX Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil Air Inlet Node
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil Air Outlet Node
WindACCoolCapFT , !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of temperature)
WindACCoolCapFFF , !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of flow fraction)
WindACEIRFT , !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature)
WindACEIRFFF , !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of flow fraction)
WindACPLFFPLR , !- Part Load Fraction Correlation (function of part load ratio)
CyclingFanAndCompressor ; !- Supply Air Fan Operation Mode
Fan:OnOff ,
Supply Fan 1, !- Fan Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.7, !- Fan Total Efficiency
600.0 , !- Delta Pressure {Pa}
1.3, !- Max Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Air Loop Inlet Node , !- Fan\_Inlet\_Node
DX Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node; !- Fan\_Outlet\_Node
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone1DirectAir , !- Direct Air Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Schedule name for on/off schedule
Zone 1 Inlet Node , !- Zone Supply Air Node Name
0.47; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone2DirectAir , !- Direct Air Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Schedule name for on/off schedule
Zone 2 Inlet Node , !- Zone Supply Air Node Name
0.36; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
1328 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone3DirectAir , !- Direct Air Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Schedule name for on/off schedule
Zone 3 Inlet Node , !- Zone Supply Air Node Name
0.47; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
1.31.4.2 Outputs
HVAC,Average,Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio []
HVAC,Average,Unitary System Compressor Part Load Ratio []
1.31.5 AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool
The AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool object is the identical model to the AirLoopHAVC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatCool
object. The heat/cool unitary system is a “virtual” component that consists of a fan component (OnOff
or ConstantVolume), a DX cooling coil component and a Gas or Electric heating coil component as shown
in Figure 1.147. When a draw through configuration is desired, the fan is placed directly after the heating
coil. If dehumidification control is selected, a reheat coil component is also required. If the reheat coil is
present and the dehumidification control type input is not specified as CoolReheat, the reheat coil will
not be active,
Note: the coil order shown here has been revised from previous versions (prior to V4.0) of Energyplus
to configure the cooling coil upstream of the heating coil. This configuration provides uniformity with
all unitary equipment. However, for unitary HeatCool systems that do not use a reheat coil, the heating
coil can also be placed upstream of the cooling coil. This optional coil placement is retained to allow
compatibility with previous versions of Energyplus. For input files developed using previous versions of
Energyplus, it is recommended that the coil order be revised according to the figure above.
Links to the fan, DX cooling coil, heating coil and optional reheat coil specifications are provided in
the unitary system input data syntax. In addition, the control zone name and the system design operating
conditions are specified by the unitary system inputs.
period. A value greater than 0 denotes that the unitary system is available to operate during that time
period. This schedule may be used to completely disable the unitary system as required. If this field is left
blank, the schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Steam
• Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
• CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted
• Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed
1332 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• Multimode - activate enhanced dehumidification mode as needed and meet sensible load. This
option is used to model DX equipment with a controllable heat exchanger assisting the DX
cooling coil for improved dehumidification. It is valid only with cooling coil type = CoilSys-
tem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted.
• CoolReheat - cool beyond the dry-bulb temperature set point as required to meet the high humid-
ity setpoint. If cooling coil type = CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted, then the heat
exchanger is assumed to always transfer energy between the cooling coil’s inlet and outlet airstreams
when the cooling coil is operating.
The default is None. For the other dehumidification control modes, the maximum humidity setpoint
is used. This must be set using a ZoneControl:Humidistat object. When extra dehumidification is
required, the system may not be able to meet the humidity setpoint if its full capacity is not adequate. If
the dehumidification control type is specified as CoolReheat, then two additional inputs (reheat coil type
and name) are also required as shown below. Although the reheat coil is required only when CoolReheat
is selected, the optional reheat coil may be present for any of the allowed Dehumidification Control Types.
If the reheat coil is present and the dehumidification control type is not specified as CoolReheat, the
reheat coil will not be active,
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:Desuperheater
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Steam
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1333
AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatCool ,
GasHeat DXAC Unitary System 1, !- Name of unitary system
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability schedule
Air Loop Inlet Node , !- Unitary system inlet node name
Air Loop Outlet Node , !- Unitary system outlet node name
CycFanSchedule , !- Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name
80, !- Maximum supply air temperature from unitary system heater {C}
1.3, !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.3, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0, !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
East Zone , !- Controlling zone or thermostat location
Fan:OnOff , !- Supply fan type
Supply Fan 1, !- Supply fan name
BlowThrough , !- Fan Placement
Coil:Heating:Fuel , !- Heating coil type
Unitary System Heating Coil 1, !- Heating coil name
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed , !- Cooling coil type
Unitary System ACDXCoil 1, !- Cooling coil name
None; !- High humidity control
Coil:Heating:Fuel ,
Unitary System Heating Coil 1, !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
0.8, !- Gas Burner Efficiency of the Coil
25000 , !- Nominal Capacity of the Coil {W}
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil\_Air\_Inlet\_Node
Air Loop Outlet Node; !- Coil\_Air\_Outlet\_Node
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed ,
Unitary System ACDXCoil 1, !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule
25000 , !- Rated Total Cooling Capacity (gross) {W}
0.75, !- Rated SHR
3.0, !- Rated COP
1.3, !- Rated Air Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
DX Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil Air Inlet Node
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil Air Outlet Node
WindACCoolCapFT , !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of temperature)
WindACCoolCapFFF , !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of flow fraction)
WindACEIRFT , !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature)
WindACEIRFFF , !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of flow fraction)
WindACPLFFPLR , !- Part Load Fraction Correlation (function of part load ratio)
CyclingFanAndCompressor ; !- Supply Air Fan Operation Mode
Fan:OnOff ,
Supply Fan 1, !- Fan Name
1334 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone1DirectAir , !- Direct Air Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Schedule name for on/off schedule
Zone 1 Inlet Node , !- Zone Supply Air Node Name
0.47; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone2DirectAir , !- Direct Air Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Schedule name for on/off schedule
Zone 2 Inlet Node , !- Zone Supply Air Node Name
0.36; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone3DirectAir , !- Direct Air Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Schedule name for on/off schedule
Zone 3 Inlet Node , !- Zone Supply Air Node Name
0.47; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
This output variable is the ratio of actual air mass flow rate through the unitary system to the system’s
design air mass flow rate (i.e., design volumetric flow rate converted to dry air mass flow rate). For
continuous fan operation mode, this variable is always 1.0 when the unitary system is available (based on
the availability schedule). For cycling fan/cycling coil operation mode, the actual air mass flow rate is
calculated based on the ratio of the sensible heating (or cooling) load to the steady-state unitary system
heating (or cooling) capacity. For the cycling fan mode, the runtime fraction for the unitary system fan
may be different from the fan part-load ratio reported here due the part-load performance of the system’s
heating (or cooling) coil (delay at start-up to reach steady-state output). In general, runtime fractions are
reported by individual components where appropriate (e.g., Fan:OnOff).
This output variable is the ratio of the sensible cooling load to the steady-state cooling capacity of the
unitary system’s DX cooling coil. The runtime fraction for the DX cooling coil compressor may be different
from the compressor part-load ratio reported here due the part-load performance of the cooling coil (delay at
start-up to reach steady-state output). In general, runtime fractions are reported by individual components
where appropriate.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1335
1.31.7 AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir
The unitary air-to-air heat pump is a “virtual” component that consists of a fan component (OnOff or
ConstantVolume), a DX cooling coil component, a DX heating coil component, and a Gas or Electric
supplementary heating coil component as shown in the Figure below.
Figure 1.148: Schematic of EnergyPlus Unitary Air-to-Air Heat Pump (Blow Through Configura-
tion)
Links to the fan, DX cooling coil, DX heating coil, and supplementary heating coil specifications are
provided in the heat pump’s input data syntax. In addition the control zone name and the system design
operating conditions are specified by the heat pump inputs.
1.31.7.1 Inputs
1.31.7.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the unitary system heat pump.
This alpha field contains the schedule name (ref. Schedule objects) that contains information on the
availability of the heat pump to operate. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that
the unit can be on during the hour. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the
unit must be off for the hour. If this field is left blank, the schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.
• Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
• CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted
• Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Steam
• Multimode - activate enhanced dehumidification mode as needed and meet sensible cooling load.
This option is used to model DX equipment with a controllable heat exchanger assisting the DX
cooling coil for improved dehumidification. It is valid only with cooling coil type = CoilSys-
tem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted.
• CoolReheat - cool beyond the dry-bulb temperature set point as required to meet the high humidity
setpoint. The excess cooling beyond the cooling set point temperature is offset by the supplemental
heating coil. If cooling coil type = CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted, then the heat
exchanger is assumed to always transfer energy between the cooling coil’s inlet and outlet airstreams
when the cooling coil is operating.
The default is None. For the other dehumidification control modes, the maximum humidity setpoint
is required. This must be set using a ZoneControl:Humidistat object. When extra dehumidification is
required, the system may not be able to meet the humidity setpoint if its full capacity is not adequate.
Supplemental heating coil (supplemental heating coil type and name) is a required input in AirToAir
HeatPumps. The supplemental heating coil capacity must be adequate enough to meet the heating coil
load and offset the excess cooling load due to extra dehumidification required to meet the high relative
humidity setpoint.
Note: the air-to-air heat pump’s fan, cooling coil, heating coil and supplementary heating coil must be
connected in the air loop according to the configuration shown above (Figure 118) for the blow-through
fan configuration. The only other valid configuration is with a draw-through fan placement, where the fan
is located between the DX heating coil and the supplementary heating coil.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1339
AirLoopHVAC: UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir ,
DXAC Heat Pump 1, ! Heat Pump name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! Heat Pump availability schedule
Mixed Air Node , ! Heat Pump air inlet node
Air Loop Outlet Node , ! Heat Pump air outlet node
1.3, !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.3, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0, !- No Load Suuply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
East Zone , ! Controlling zone or thermostat location
Fan:OnOff , ! Supply air fan type
Supply Fan 1, ! Supply air fan name –- same name used in fan object
Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed , ! Heating coil type
Heat Pump DX Heating Coil 1, ! Heating coil name –- same name used in DX heating coil object
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed , ! Cooling coil type
Heat Pump ACDXCoil 1, ! Cooling coil name –- same name used in DX cooling coil object
Coil:Heating:Fuel , ! Supplemental heating coil type
Heat Pump DX Supp Heating Coil 1, ! Supplemental heating coil –name - same as in heating coil
object
50, ! Maximum supply air temperature from supplemental heater [C]
21, ! Maximum outdoor dry -bulb temp for supplemental heating coil operation
[C]
BlowThrough , ! Fan placement
CycFanSchedule , ! Supply air fan operating mode schedule name
CoolReheat; !- Dehumidification Control Type
Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed ,
Heat Pump DX Heating Coil 1, ! Name of heating coil
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! Heating coil schedule
35000 , ! Rated total heating capacity [W] (at 21.11C/8.33C)
2.75, ! Rated heating COP
1.7, ! Rated air flow rate [m3/s]
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , ! Coil air inlet node
SuppHeating Coil Air Inlet Node , ! Coil air outlet node
HPACHeatCapFT , ! Heating capacity modifier curve (temperature ,C)
HPACHeatCapFFF , ! Heating capacity modifier curve (flow fraction)
HPACHeatEIRFT , ! Energy input ratio modifier curve (temperature ,C)
HPACHeatEIRFFF , ! Energy input ratio modifier curve (flow fraction)
HPACCoolPLFFPLR , ! Part load fraction modifier curve (function of part -load ratio
)
, ! defrost EIR modifier curve (temp , C) not required for resistive
defrost
CyclingFanAndCompressor , ! Operation mode (cycling fan , cycling compressor)
-5.0, ! Minimum OAT for heat pump compressor operation [C]
5.0, ! Maximum outdoor dry -bulb temp for defrost operation [C]
200.0 , ! Crankcase heater capacity[W]
10.0, ! Maximum OAT for crankcase heater operation [C]
resistive , ! Defrost strategy (resistive or reverse -cycle)
timed , ! Defrost control (timed or on -demand)
0.166667 , !Defrost time period fraction (used for timed defrost control
only)
20000; ! Resistive defrost heater capacity [W]
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed ,
Heat Pump ACDXCoil 1, ! Name of cooling coil
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! Availability schedule
32000 , ! Rated total cooling capacity [W]
0.75, ! Rated sensible heat ratio
3.0, ! Rated COP
1.7, ! Rated air flow rate [m3/s]
DX Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node , ! Coil air inlet node
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , ! Coil air outlet node
HPACCoolCapFT , ! Cooling capacity modifier curve (temperature ,C)
HPACCoolCapFFF , ! Cooling capacity modifier curve (flow fraction)
HPACCoolEIRFT , ! Energy input ratio modifier curve (temperature ,C)
HPACCoolEIRFFF , ! Energy input ratio modifier curve (flow fraction)
HPACCoolPLFFPLR , ! Part load factor modifier curve (function of part -load ratio)
CyclingFanAndCompressor ; ! Operation mode (cycling fan , cycling compressor)
1340 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Coil:Heating:Fuel ,
Heat Pump DX Supp Heating Coil 1, ! Name of heating coil
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! Availability schedule
NaturalGas , ! Fuel Type
0.8 , ! Gas Burner Efficiency of the Coil
32000 , ! Nominal Capacity of the Coil [W]
SuppHeating Coil Air Inlet Node , ! Supplementary heating coil air side inlet node
Air Loop Outlet Node; ! Supplementary heating coil air side outlet node
Fan:OnOff ,
Supply Fan 1, ! Fan Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! Fan Schedule
0.7, ! Fan Total Efficiency
300.0 , ! Delta Pressure [N/M^2]
1.7, ! Max Vol Flow Rate [m^3/ Sec]
0.9, ! motor efficiency
1.0, ! motor in air stream fraction
Mixed Air Node , ! fan inlet node
DX Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node; ! fan outlet node
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone1DirectAir , ! direct air unit name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! schedule name for on/off schedule
Zone 1 Inlet Node , ! zone supply air node name
0.612; ! maximum air flow rate , m3/s
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone2DirectAir , ! direct air unit name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! schedule name for on/off schedule
Zone 2 Inlet Node , ! zone supply air node name
0.476; ! maximum air flow rate , m3/s
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone3DirectAir , ! direct air unit name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! schedule name for on/off schedule
Zone 3 Inlet Node , ! zone supply air node name
0.612; ! maximum air flow rate , m3/s
1.31.7.2 Outputs
• HVAC, Average, Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio []
• HVAC, Average, Unitary System Dehumidification Induced Heating Demand Rate [W]
This output variable is the ratio of the sensible load (heating or cooling) to the steady-state capacity
of the heat pump’s DX heating or cooling coil. The runtime fraction for the heat pump compressor
may be different from the compressor part-load ratio reported here due the part-load performance of the
heating/cooling coil (delay at start-up to reach steady-state output). In general, runtime fractions are
reported by individual components where appropriate.
1.31.8 AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir:MultiSpeed
The multispeed air-to-air heat pump is a “virtual” component that consists of a fan component (On/Off or
ConstVolume), a DX multispeed cooling coil component, a DX multispeed heating coil component, and a
Gas or Electric supplemental heating coil component. This system also includes the option to use available
waste energy to heat water. A schematic diagram of the air-to-air multispeed heat pump is shown below.
The component connection sequence for the blow through option (shown below) from inlet to outlet is fan,
cooling coil, heating coil, and supplemental heater. The connection sequence for the draw through option
is cooling coil, heating coil, fan, and supplemental heater.
The main difference between this heat pump object and other EnergyPlus heat pump objects is that
this object allows from two to four discrete compressor speeds for heating and cooling operation (instead of
a single speed for each mode). The lowest speed is called Speed 1, and the highest speed is called Speed n
(2, 3 or 4 as specified in the input syntax). This object allows a different number of speeds for cooling and
heating, and each speed has an associated airflow rate. The airflow rates for the various heating speeds
can be different from the airflow rates for the cooling speeds. In addition, the airflow rate when no cooling
or heating is needed can also be defined. The number of cooling and heating speeds defined by the user in
this heat pump object must equal the number of speeds defined in the associated coils (child objects). For
example, the number of speeds for cooling defined in this heat pump object must be equal to the number
of speeds defined in the associated cooling coil object.
Links to the fan, DX multispeed cooling coil, DX multispeed heating coil, and supplementary heating
coil specifications are provided in the heat pump’s input data syntax. In addition, the control zone name
and airflow rates at the corresponding compressor speeds are specified by the heat pump syntax.
If the ZoneControl:Thermostat:StagedDualSetpoint object and other zone control thermostat and hu-
midistat are assigned to the same controlled zone in the Controlling Zone or Thermostat Location field,
the ZoneControl:Thermostat:StagedDualSetpoint object takes precedence and the stage number provided
by the the ZoneControl:Thermostat:StagedDualSetpoint object is used to set the speed number.
1.31.8.1 Inputs
1.31.8.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the multispeed heat pump.
Figure 1.149: Schematic of EnergyPlus Unitary Air-to-Air Multi Speed Heat Pump
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1343
the unit must be off for the time period. If this field is left blank, the schedule has a value of 1 for all time
periods.
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Steam
operates). This field is only used when the heat pump supply air fan is scheduled to operate continuously
regardless of DX coil operation (ref. field “Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule). Values must be
greater than or equal to zero, or this field is autosizable. If the heat pump supply air fan is scheduled to
operate continuously and the input value for this field is set to zero or this field is left blank, then the
model assumes that the supply air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed is equal to the supply air
flow rate when the compressor was last operating (for cooling operation or heating operation).
AirLoopHVAC: UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir:MultiSpeed ,
DXAC Heat Pump 1, !- Name of multispeed heat pump
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability schedule
Mixed Air Node , !- Heat pump air inlet node name
Air Loop Outlet Node , !- Heat pump air outlet node name
East Zone , !- Controlling zone or thermostat location
Fan:OnOff , !- Supply air fan type
Supply Fan 1, !- Supply air fan name
BlowThrough , !- Supply air fan placement
FanModeSchedule , !- Supply air fan operating mode schedule name
Coil:Heating:DX:MultiSpeed , Heat Pump DX Heating Coil 1, !- Heating coil type & name
-8.0, !- Minimum outdoor dry -bulb temperature for compressor operation
Coil:Cooling:DX:MultiSpeed , Heat Pump ACDXCoil 1, !- Cooling coil type & name
Coil:Heating:Fuel , !- Supplemental heating coil type
Supp Gas Heating Coil 1, !- Supplemental heating coil name
50.0, !- Maximum supply air temperature from supplemental heater
21, !- Maximum outdoor dry -bulb temperature for supplemental heater operation
0, !- Auxiliary On -Cycle Electric Power {W}
0, !- Auxiliary Off -Cycle Electric Power {W}
0.00, !- Design Heat Recovery Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
80.0,,, !- Maximum Temp for Heat Recovery {C} & Node names (none)
0.2, !- Supply air volumetric flow rate when no cooling or heating is needed
4, !- Number of speeds for heating
4, !- Number of speeds for cooling
0.4, !- Heating Speed 1 Supply Air Flow Rate
0.8, !- Heating Speed 2 Supply Air Flow Rate
1.2, !- Heating Speed 3 Supply Air Flow Rate
1.7, !- Heating Speed 4 Supply Air Flow Rate
0.4, !- Cooling Speed 1 Supply Air Flow Rate
0.8, !- Cooling Speed 2 Supply Air Flow Rate
1.2, !- Cooling Speed 3 Supply Air Flow Rate
1.7; !- Cooling Speed 4 Supply Air Flow Rate
Coil:Heating:DX:MultiSpeed ,
Heat Pump DX Heating Coil 1, !- Name of heat pump heating coil
1348 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
COIL:Cooling:DX:MultiSpeed ,
Heat Pump ACDXCoil 1, !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule
DX Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil Air Inlet Node
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil Air Outlet Node
CyclingFanAndCompressor , !- Supply Air Fan Operation Mode
Outdoor Condenser Air Node , !- Condenser Air Inlet Node Name
AirCooled , !- Condenser Type
, !- Name of Water Storage Tank for Supply
, !- Name of Water Storage Tank for Condensate Collection
No , !- Apply Part Load Fraction to Speeds greater than 1
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1349
HPACCOOLPLFFPLR Speed 1, !- Part Load Fraction Correlation , Speed 4 (part load ratio)
1000.0 , !- Nominal Time for Condensate Removal to Begin , Speed 4 {s}
1.5, !- Ratio of Initial Moisture Evaporation Rate and Steady -state Latent
Capacity , Speed 4 {dimensionless}
3.0, !- Maximum ON/OFF Cycling Rate , Speed 4 {cycles/hr}
45.0, !- Latent Capacity Time Constant , Speed 4 {s}
0.2, !- Rated waste heat fraction of power input , Speed 4 {dimensionless}
HAPCCoolWHFT Speed 4, !- Waste heat modifier curve , Speed 4 (temperature)
0.9, !- Evaporative Condenser Effectiveness , Speed 4 {dimensionless}
0.3, !- Evaporative Condenser Air Volume Flow Rate , Speed 4 {m3/s}
100; !- Evaporative Condenser Pump Rated Power Consumption , Speed 4 {W}
Coil:Heating:Fuel ,
Supp Gas Heating Coil 1, !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
0.8, !- Gas Burner Efficiency of the Coil
45000 , !- Nominal Capacity of the Coil {W}
SuppHeating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil\_Air\_Inlet\_Node
Air Loop Outlet Node; !- Coil\_Air\_Outlet\_Node
Fan:OnOff ,
Supply Fan 1, !- Fan Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.7, !- Fan Total Efficiency
300.0 , !- Delta Pressure {Pa}
1.7, !- Max Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Mixed Air Node , !- Fan\_Inlet\_Node
DX Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node; !- Fan\_Outlet\_Node
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone1DirectAir , ! direct air unit name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! schedule name for on/off schedule
Zone 1 Inlet Node , ! zone supply air node name
0.612; ! maximum air flow rate , m3/s
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone2DirectAir , ! direct air unit name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! schedule name for on/off schedule
Zone 2 Inlet Node , ! zone supply air node name
0.476; ! maximum air flow rate , m3/s
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone3DirectAir , ! direct air unit name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! schedule name for on/off schedule
Zone 3 Inlet Node , ! zone supply air node name
0.612; ! maximum air flow rate , m3/s
1.31.8.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio []
• HVAC,Average, Unitary System Heat Recovery Fluid Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
1.31.8.2.19 Unitary System Heat Recovery Fluid Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
These outputs are the heat recovery inlet and outlet temperatures and water mass flow rate for multi-
speed heat pumps with heat recovery.
1.31.9 AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatOnly
The EnergyPlus furnace is a “virtual” component that consists of a fan component (OnOff or ConstantVol-
ume) and a Gas or Electric heating coil component. The blow through furnace configuration is shown in
the Figure below.
Links to the fan and heating coil specifications are provided in the furnace input data syntax. In
addition the control zone name and the furnace design operating conditions are specified by the furnace
inputs.
1.31.9.1 Inputs
1.31.9.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the furnace.
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Steam
AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatOnly ,
Gas Furnace 1, !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Air Loop Inlet Node , !- Furnace Air Inlet Node Name
Air Loop Outlet Node , !- Furnace Air Outlet Node Name
CycFanSchedule , !- Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name
80, !- Maximum Supply Air Temperature {C}
1.3, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
East Zone , !- Controlling Zone or Thermostat Location
Fan:OnOff , !- Supply Fan Object Type
Supply Fan 1, !- Supply Fan Fame
BlowThrough , !- Fan Placement
Coil:Heating:Fuel , !- Heating Coil Object Type
Furnace Coil; !- Heating Coil Name
Coil:Heating:Fuel ,
Furnace Coil , !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
0.8, !- Gas Burner Efficiency of the Coil
20000 , !- Nominal Capacity of the Coil {W}
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil_Air_Inlet_Node
Air Loop Outlet Node , !- Coil_Air_Outlet_Node
, !- Coil_Temp_Setpoint_Node
100, !- Parasitic Electric Load {W}
PLFCurveforGasFurnace , !- Part load fraction correlation (function of part load ratio)
10; !- Parasitic Gas Load {W}
Curve:Cubic ,
PLFCurveforGasFurnace , !- Name
0.8, !- Coefficient1 Constant
0.2, !- Coefficient2 x
0.0, !- Coefficient3 x**2
0.0, !- Coefficient4 x**3
0, !- Minimum Value of x
1; !- Maximum Value of x
Fan:OnOff ,
1358 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone1DirectAir , !-Direct Air Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Schedule name for on/off schedule
Zone 1 Inlet Node , !- Zone Supply Air Node Name
0.47; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone2DirectAir , !- Direct Air Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Schedule name for on/off schedule
Zone 2 Inlet Node , !- Zone Supply Air Node Name
0.36; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone3DirectAir , !- Direct Air Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Schedule name for on/off schedule
Zone 3 Inlet Node , !- Zone Supply Air Node Name
0.47; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
1.31.9.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio []
1.31.10 AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatOnly
The AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatOnly is identical to the AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatOnly model.
The heat-only unitary system is a “virtual” component that consists of a fan component (OnOff or Con-
stantVolume) and a Gas or Electric heating coil component. The blow through unitary system configuraion
is shown in the Figure below.
Links to the fan and heating coil specifications are provided in the unitary system input data syntax.
In addition, the control zone name and the unitary system design operating conditions are specified by the
unitary system syntax.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1359
1.31.10.1 Inputs
1.31.10.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the unitary system.
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Steam
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatOnly ,
Gas Unitary System 1, !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Air Loop Inlet Node , !- Unitary System Air Inlet Node Name
Air Loop Outlet Node , !- Unitary System Air Outlet Node Name
CycFanSchedule , !- Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name
80, !- Maximum Supply Air Temperature {C}
1.3, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
East Zone , !- Controlling Zone or Thermostat Location
Fan:OnOff , !- Supply Fan Object Type
Supply Fan 1, !- Supply Fan Name
BlowThrough , !- Fan Placement
Coil:Heating:Fuel , !- Heating Coil Object Type
Unitary System Heating Coil; !- Heating Coil Name
Coil:Heating:Fuel ,
Unitary System Heating Coil , !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
1362 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Curve:Cubic ,
PLFCurveforUnitarySystem , !- Name
0.8, !- Coefficient1 Constant
0.2, !- Coefficient2 x
0.0, !- Coefficient3 x**2
0.0, !- Coefficient4 x**3
0, !- Minimum Value of x
1; !- Maximum Value of x
Fan:OnOff ,
Supply Fan 1, !- Fan Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.7, !- Fan Total Efficiency
600.0 , !- Delta Pressure {Pa}
1.3, !- Max Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Air Loop Inlet Node , !- Fan_Inlet_Node
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node; !- Fan_Outlet_Node
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone1DirectAir , !-Direct Air Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Schedule name for on/off schedule
Zone 1 Inlet Node , !- Zone Supply Air Node Name
0.47; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone2DirectAir , !- Direct Air Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Schedule name for on/off schedule
Zone 2 Inlet Node , !- Zone Supply Air Node Name
0.36; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone3DirectAir , !- Direct Air Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Schedule name for on/off schedule
Zone 3 Inlet Node , !- Zone Supply Air Node Name
0.47; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
1.31.10.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio []
ratio reported here due the part-load performance of the unitary system’s heating coil (delay at start-up to
reach steady-state heating output). In general, runtime fractions are reported by individual components
where appropriate (e.g., Fan:OnOff).
1.31.11 AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:WaterToAir
The unitary water-to-air heat pump is similar to the unitary air-to-air heat pump except water is used
on the source side. Links to the fan, WaterToAirHeatPump cooling coil, WaterToAirHeatPump heating
coil, and supplementary heating coil specifications are provided in the heat pump’s input data syntax.
The heat pump switches between cooling and heating depending on the zone’s demand. The load side
(air) of the unitary water-to-air heat pump consists of an On/Off fan component, a WaterToAirHeatPump
cooling coil component, a WaterToAirHeatPump heating coil component, and a Gas, Electric, Steam, or
Hot Water supplemental heating coil component. The source side (water) of the heat pump is connected
to a condenser loop with a heat exchanger (ground heat exchanger or other type) or a plant loop with
a heating source such as a boiler and a cooling source such as a chiller or cooling tower. The diagram
below shows the setup and connection of the heat pump for the source side and load side for a ground heat
exchanger configuration. Note that on the load side, the WaterToAirHeatPump cooling coil must always
be placed before the WaterToAirHeatPump heating coil.
There are three type of WaterToAirHeatPump coil models available:
• Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation
• Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation
• Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
• Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
• Coil:Cooling:WatertoAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit
• Coil:Heating:WatertoAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit
In addition, the control zone name and the system design operating conditions are specified by the
heat pump inputs.
1.31.11.1 Inputs
1.31.11.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the unitary system heat pump.
Figure 1.152: Water to Air Heat Pump Schematic for a BlowThrough Configuration with Ground
Heat Exchanger
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1365
Figure 1.153:
Figure 1.154:
Figure 1.155:
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Steam
• On/Off fan
• Direct air unit for each zone served by the heat pump
It should be noted that the volumetric air flow rate specified in the direct air unit for the controlling
zone should properly reflect the fractional volumetric air flow rate specified in the heat pump object.
input in WaterToAir HeatPumps. When dehumidification control is active the heating and the reheat
load due to extra dehumidification are met with supplemetal heating coil. The supplemental heat-
ing coil capacity must be adequate enough to meet the heating coil load and offset the excess cooling
load due to extra dehumidification. The dehumidification control type CoolReheat works only with
Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit cooling coil type.
• Cycling
• Constant
• CyclingOnDemand
Cycling varies water flow through the coil based on the heat pump Part Load Ratio. This control
method is appropriate for modeling heat pumps that are outfitted with a soleniod valve which allows water
to flow through the coil only when the compressor is active. This is the default for EnergyPlus V8 and
later.
Constant provides a constant water flow regardless of heat pump operation. Remember that Ener-
gyPlus has two coils (a heating coil and a cooling coil) to approximate the operation of one coil that can
operate in either heating mode or cooling mode. Therefore, when the water flow mode is constant, there
will be full flow through either the heating coil or the cooling coil, but not both at the same time.
ConstantOnDemand provides full flow through the coil whenever there is a load. When there is no
load, there is zero flow through the coil. This control strategy represents the way EnergyPlus modeled
heat pump water flow prior to Version 8.
Following is an example of IDF usage:
AirLoopHVAC: UnitaryHeatPump:WaterToAir ,
DXAC Heat Pump 1, !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Mixed Air Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Air Loop Outlet Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
2, !- Supply Air Flow Fate {m3/s}
East Zone , !- Controlling Zone or Thermostat Location
Fan:OnOff , !- Supply Air Fan Object Type
Supply Fan 1, !- Supply Air Fan Name
Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation , !- Heating Coil Object Type
Heat Pump Heating Mode , !- Heating Coil Name
0.001 , !- Heating Convergence
Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation , !- Cooling Coil Object Type
Heat Pump Cooling Mode , !- Cooling Coil Name
0.001 , !- Cooling Convergence
2.5, !- Maximum Cycling Rate {cycles/hr}
60, !- Heat Pump Time Constant {s}
0.01, !- Fraction of On -Cycle Power Use
60, !- Heat Pump Fan Delay Time {s}
Coil:Heating:Fuel , !- Supplemental Heating Coil Object Type
Heat Pump DX Supp Heating Coil 1, !- Supplemental Heating Coil Name
50, !- Maximum Supply Air Temperature from Supplemental Heater {C}
21, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -Bulb Temperature for Supplemental Heater Operation
{C}
Outside Air Inlet Node , !- Outdoor Dry -Bulb Temperature Sensor Node Name
BlowThrough , !- Fan Placement
CyclingFanSch , !- Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name
CoolReheat; !- Dehumidification Control Type
1370 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Schedule:Compact ,
CyclingFanSch , !- Name
Fraction , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: AllDays , !- Field 2
Until: 24:00 , !- Field 3
0.0; !- Field 4
Coil:Cooling: WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation ,
Heat Pump Cooling Mode , !- Name
Scroll , !- Compressor Type
R22 , !- Refrigerant Type
0.0015 , !- Design Source Side Flow Rate {m3/s}
38000 , !- Nominal Cooling Coil Capacity {W)
0, !- Nominal Time for Condensate Removal to Begin {s}
0, !- Ratio of Initial Moisture Evaporation Rate and Steady State Latent Capacity
3000000 , !- High Pressure CutOff {Pa}
0, !- Low Pressure CutOff {Pa}
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side1 Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side1 Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
3.78019E+03,!- Parameter 1 {W/K}
2.80303E+03,!- Parameter 2 {W/K}
7.93591E-01,!- Parameter 3 {C}
1.91029E+03,!- Parameter 4 {W}
2.66127E+00,!- Parameter 5
1.06009E-02,!- Parameter 6
1.65103E+00,!- Parameter 7
9.73887E-03,!- Parameter 8
1.04563E+03;! - Parameter 9
Coil:Heating: WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation ,
Heat Pump HEATING Mode , !- Name
Scroll , !- Compressor Type
R22 , !- Refrigerant Type
0.0015 , !- Design Source Side Flow Rate {m3/s}
38000 , !- Nominal Heating Coil Capacity {W}
3000000 , !- High Pressure CutOff
0, !- Low Pressure CutOff {Pa}
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side2 Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side2 Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
SuppHeating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
3.91379E+03, !-Parameter 1 {W/K}
5.94753E-01, !- Parameter 2 {C}
2.49945E+03, !- Parameter 3 {W}
8.68734E-01, !- Parameter 4
7.23595E-03, !- Parameter 5
3.69126E+00, !- Parameter 6
1.75701E-05, !- Parameter 7
3.65348E+03; !-Parameter 8
Coil:Heating:Fuel ,
Heat Pump DX Supp Heating Coil 1, !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
0.8, !- Gas Burner Efficiency
32000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
SuppHeating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Air Loop Outlet Node; !- Air Outlet Node Name
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1371
BRANCH ,
Gshp Cooling Condenser Branch , !- Name
, !- Pressure Drop Curve Name
Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation , !- Component 1 Object Type
Heat Pump Cooling Mode , !- Component 1 Name
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side1 Inlet Node , !- Component 1 Inlet Node Name
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side1 Outlet Node; !- Component 1 Outlet Node Name
BRANCH ,
Gshp Heating Condenser Branch , !- Name
, !- Pressure Drop Curve Name
Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation , !- Component 1 Object Type
Heat Pump Heating Mode , !- Component 1 Name
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side2 Inlet Node , !- Component 1 Inlet Node Name
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side2 Outlet Node; !- Component 1 Outlet Node Name
Fan:OnOff ,
Supply Fan 1, !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.7, !- FanTotal Efficiency
300.0 , –! Pressure Rise {Pa}
2.0, !- Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Mixed Air Node , !- Air Inlet_Node Name
Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node; !- Air Outlet Node Name
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone1DirectAir , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 1 Inlet Node , !- Zone Supply Air Node Name
0.7; !- Maximum Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone2DirectAir , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 2 Inlet Node , !- Zone Supply Air Node Name
0.6; !- Maximum Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Uncontrolled ,
Zone3DirectAir , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 3 Inlet Node , !- Zone Supply Air Node Name
0.7; !- Maximum Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.31.11.2 Outputs
Energy use reporting for the water-to-air heat pump is documented under the heat pump coil object types:
• Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation
• Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation
• Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
1372 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
The heat pump demand as well as the compressor and fan part-load ratios may be obtained with the
output variables shown below.
• HVAC,Average, Unitary System Requested Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
• HVAC,Average, Unitary System Requested Latent Cooling Rate [W]
• HVAC,Average, Unitary System Requested Heating Rate [W]
• HVAC,Average, Unitary System Compressor Part Load Ratio []
• HVAC,Average, Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio
• HVAC,Average, Unitary System Dehumidification Induced Heating Demand Rate [W]
1.31.12 AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool:VAVChangeoverBypass
The changeover-bypass variable air volume (CBVAV) unitary system is a compound object made up
of other components. Each CBVAV system consists of an outdoor air mixer, direct expansion (DX)
cooling coil, heating coil, and a supply air fan as shown in the figures below. Zone thermostats
and terminal units are required in each zone served by this system. The terminal units are specific
to this system type and are either AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:Reheat or AirTermi-
nal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:NoReheat. A zone humidistat and single zone max humidity set point
manager may also be specified to help control high humidity levels. These individual components are
described elsewhere in this document. The CBVAV unitary system object coordinates the operation of
these components and is modeled as a type of air loop equipment (Ref. AirLoopHVAC).
Figure 1.156: Schematic of a CBVAV unitary system (draw through fan placement)
Links to the CBVAV system’s supply air fan, coils, and outdoor air mixer specifications are provided
in the object’s input syntax. Additional inputs include system and outdoor air flow rates during heating
and cooling operation, the priority control mode, and dehumidification control type. A description of each
input field for the CBVAV unitary system compound object is provided below.
1.31.12.1 Inputs
1.31.12.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a changeover-bypass VAV system.
Any reference to this system by another object will use this name.
Figure 1.157: Schematic of a CBVAV unitary system (blow through fan placement)
during that time period. This schedule may be used to completely disable the system (all of its coils and
the supply air fan) as required. If this field is left blank, the schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.
This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the system (i.e., through the Outdoor air
Mixer’s Outside_Air_Stream_Node) in cubic meters per second when the DX cooling coil is operating.
Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable. Note that the Cooling Outdoor
Air Flow Rate can be changed during the simulation using a multiplier schedule (Ref. Field: Outdoor
air volumetric flow rate multiplier schedule name). For any simulation timestep, the Cooling Outdoor Air
Flow Rate cannot exceed the system air volumetric flow rate during cooling operation.
1.31.12.1.8 Field: No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate When No Cooling or Heating is
Needed
This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the system (i.e., through the Outdoor
air Mixer’s Outside_Air_Stream_Node) in cubic meters per second when neither cooling nor heating is
required (i.e., the DX cooling coil and heating coil are off but the supply air fan operates). Values must be
greater than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable. Note that the no load outdoor air flow rate can be
changed during the simulation using a multiplier schedule (Ref. Field: Outdoor air volumetric flow rate
multiplier schedule name). For any simulation timestep, the no load outdoor air flow rate cannot exceed
the no load supply air flow rate. This field is only used when the unitary system’s supply air fan operating
mode is specified as continuous fan operation (Ref. Field: Supply air fan operating mode schedule name).
If the system’s supply air fan operating mode is specified as continuous fan operation and this value is set
to zero or the field is left blank, then the model assumes that the no load outdoor air flow rate is equal to
the outdoor air flow rate when the coils were last operating (for cooling operation [i.e. Cooling outdoor air
flow rate] or heating operation [i.e. Heating outdoor air flow rate]) and this field is not used.
name should match the outlet node name for the last component (furthest downstream) in this unitary
system. For blow through fan placement, the splitter air node is the outlet node of the heating coil. For
draw through fan placement, the splitter node is the outlet node of the supply air fan.
• OutdoorAir:Mixer
• Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
• Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed
• CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted
• Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWithHumidityControlMode
The input requirements for these cooling coil objects are described elsewhere in this document.
• Coil:Heating:Electric
• Coil:Heating:Fuel
• Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed
• Coil:Heating:DX:VariableSpeed
• Coil:Heating:Water
• Coil:Heating:Steam
The input requirements for these heating coil objects are described elsewhere in this document.
• CoolingPriority
• HeatingPriority
• ZonePriority
1378 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
If CoolingPriority is selected, the system operates to meet the cooling load if any zone served by this
system (air loop) requires cooling. If no zones require cooling, then the system operates in heating mode
if needed. If HeatingPriority is selected, the system operates to meet the heating load if any zone requires
heating. If no zones require heating, then the system operates in cooling mode if needed. If ZonePriority is
selected, the system operates based on the maximum number of zones requiring either heating or cooling.
If the number of zones requiring cooling is greater than the number of zones requiring heating, then the
system operates in cooling mode. If the number of zones requiring heating is greater than the number
of zones requiring cooling, then the system operates in heating mode. If the number of zones requiring
cooling equals the number of zones requiring heating, then the largest combined load (i.e., the sum of the
cooling loads for zones requiring cooling compared to the sum of the heating loads for zones that require
heating) sets the cooling or heating operating mode for the system during that simulation timestep.
• SetpointManager:SingleZone:Humidity:Maximum
• SetpointManager:MultiZone:Humidity:Maximum
• SetpointManager:MultiZone:MaximumHumidity:Average
objects. When extra dehumidification is required, the system may not be able to meet the humidity
setpoint if its full capacity is not adequate.
As shown in the example below, correct specification of the CBVAV unitary system requires specification
of the following objects in addition to the AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool:VAVChangeoverBypass object:
1) outdoor air mixer (OutdoorAir:Mixer)
2) fan (Fan:SystemModel, Fan:OnOff, or Fan:ConstantVolume)
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1379
AirLoopHVAC: UnitaryHeatCool:VAVChangeoverBypass ,
GasHeat CBVAV System , !- Name of unitary system
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability schedule name
1.8, !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.7, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.6, !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.32, !- Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.3, !- Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.27, !- No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Outdoor Air Multiplier Schedule , !- Outdoor air volumetric flow rate multiplier schedule name
Air Loop Inlet Node , !- Air inlet node name
Mixer Inlet Node , !- Bypass duct mixer node name
Heating Coil Air Outlet Node , !- Bypass duct splitter node name
Air Loop Outlet Node , !- Air outlet node name
OutdoorAir:Mixer , !- Outdoor Air Mixer Object Type
Outdoor air Mixer , !- Outdoor air mixer name
Fan:OnOff , !- Supply air fan type
Supply Fan 1, !- Supply air fan name
BlowThrough , !- Supply air fan placement
Fan OpMode Schedule , !- Supply air fan operating mode schedule name
Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWithHumidityControlMode , !- Cooling coil type
ACDXCoil 2, !- Cooling coil name
Coil:Heating:Fuel , !- Heating coil type
Furnace Heating Coil 1, !- Heating coil name
CoolingPriority , !- Priority control mode
10.0, !- Minimum outlet air temperature during cooling operation {C}
50.0, !- Maximum outlet air temperature during heating operation {C}
None; !- Dehumidification control type
OutdoorAir:Mixer ,
Outdoor air Mixer , !- Name
Mixed Air Node , !- Mixed Air Node Name
Outdoor air Inlet Node , !- Outdoor Air Stream Node
Relief Air Outlet Node , !- Relief Air Stream Node Name
Mixer Inlet Node; !- Return Air Stream Node Name
Fan:OnOff ,
Supply Fan 1, !- Fan Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.7, !- Fan Total Efficiency
600.0 , !- Delta Pressure {Pa}
1.8, !- Max Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Mixed Air Node , !- Fan\_Inlet\_Node
DX Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node; !- Fan\_Outlet\_Node
Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWithHumidityControlMode ,
ACDXCoil 2, !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule
DX Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil Air Inlet Node
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil Air Outlet Node
, !- Crankcase Heater Capacity {W}
, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -bulb Temperature for Crankcase Heater Operation {C}
2, !- Number of Capacity Stages
0, !- Number of Enhanced Dehumidification Modes
CoilPerformance:DX:Cooling , !- Normal Mode Stage 1 Coil Performance Object Type
ACDXCoil 2 Standard Mode -Stage 1, !- Normal Mode Stage 1 Coil Performance Object Name
CoilPerformance:DX:Cooling , !- Normal Mode Stage 1+2 Coil Performance Object Type
1380 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
ACDXCoil 2 Standard Mode -Stage 1&2; !- Normal Mode Stage 1+2 Coil Performance Object Name
Coil:Heating:Fuel ,
Furnace Heating Coil 1, !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
0.8, !- Gas Burner Efficiency of the Coil
35000 , !- Nominal Capacity of the Coil {W}
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil\_Air\_Inlet\_Node
Heating Coil Air Outlet Node; !- Coil\_Air\_Outlet\_Node
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:Reheat ,
Zone 1 VAV System , !- Name of System
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- System Availability schedule
Zone 1 Reheat Air Inlet Node , !- DAMPER Air Outlet Node
Zone 1 VAV Inlet Node , !-UNIT Air Inlet Node
0.583 , !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
0.25, !- Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction
, !- Control node
Coil:Heating:Electric , !- Reheat Component Object
Reheat Coil Zone 1, !- Name of Reheat Component
0.0, !- Max Reheat Water Flow {m3/s}
0.0, !- Min Reheat Water Flow {m3/s}
Zone 1 Reheat Air Outlet Node , !- UNIT Air Outlet Node
0.001; !- Convergence Tolerance
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:Reheat ,
Zone 2 VAV System , !- Name of System
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- System Availability schedule
Zone 2 Reheat Air Inlet Node , !- DAMPER Air Outlet Node
Zone 2 VAV Inlet Node , !-UNIT Air Inlet Node
0.583 , !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
0.25, !- Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction
, !- Control node
Coil:Heating:Electric , !- Reheat Component Object
Reheat Coil Zone 2, !- Name of Reheat Component
0.0, !- Max Reheat Water Flow {m3/s}
0.0, !- Min Reheat Water Flow {m3/s}
Zone 2 Reheat Air Outlet Node , !- UNIT Air Outlet Node
0.001; !- Convergence Tolerance
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:NoReheat ,
Zone 3 VAV System , !- Name of System
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- System Availability schedule
Zone 3 Reheat Air Outlet Node , !- UNIT Air Outlet Node
Zone 3 VAV Inlet Node , !-UNIT Air Inlet Node
0.584 , !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
0.25; !- Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction
1.31.12.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Unitary System Total Heating Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Unitary System Total Heating Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Unitary System Total Cooling Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Unitary System Total Cooling Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Unitary System Sensible Heating Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Unitary System Sensible Heating Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Unitary System Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Unitary System Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1381
and the condenser fans associated with the DX coil[s]), and the heating coil (if electric). This value is
calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep
being reported.
heating and cooling in different zones, and heat recovery from one zone to another. It may also lead to
more efficient operations during part-load conditions.
There are two alternative VRF models in EnergyPlus:
1. System curve based model (VRF-SysCurve). In this model, a number of system level curves
are used to describe the VRF system performance. This model corresponds to the AirCondi-
tioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow object.
2. Physics based model (VRF-FluidTCtrl). This model is able to consider the dynamics of more
operational parameters and is applicable for fluid temperature control. This model corresponds to
the AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl object.
(Please refer to the engineering reference for more technical details of the two models).
In the VRF system model, direct-expansion cooling and/or heating coils are configured in a zone
terminal unit, which is connected to a zone via the zone inlet and exhaust nodes. The zone terminal
units are identified in a ZoneTerminalUnitList object, the name of which is entered as an input to the Air-
Conditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow or AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl
object.
The Energyplus connection methodology is shown as dashed and greyed arrows in Figure 1.158 accord-
ing to the following rules:
• The zone inlet and zone exhaust node names are defined in a ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections
object (bottom of figure).
• A ZoneHVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow object will identify these zone exhaust and zone
inlet node names as the terminal unit’s air inlet and air outlet nodes, respectively.
• All zone terminal units that are connected to the same AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow or
AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl object are listed in a ZoneTermi-
nalUnitList object.
• The name of the ZoneTerminalUnitList object is an input to the AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow
or AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl object.
• The AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl or AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlo
object is not listed in an AirloopHVAC object, and therefore, can only be simulated if the
terminal units are connected to the AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow or AirCondi-
tioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl object using the ZoneTerminalUnitList.
• Secondary ZoneHVAC equipment objects may be used in the same zones as the terminal units for
other purposes (e.g., code compliance)
The following schematic demonstrates these connection rules.
Energyplus object type and object name, and node name relationships are also shown in the following
figure to aid in the assembly of this HVAC system type.
1.32.1 AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow
1.32.1.1 Inputs
1.32.1.1.1 Field: Heat Pump Name
This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a variable refrigerant flow
heat pump. Any reference to this heat pump will use this name. Since this object is not listed in an
AirloopHVAC object, the most likely use of this name would be for reporting purposes.
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1385
1.32.1.1.10 Field: Cooling Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of Low Temperature
Curve Name
This alpha field defines the cooling energy input ratio modifier at low outdoor temperatures. This curve
is a bi-quadratic equation with a weighted average indoor wet-bulb temperature and condenser entering air
dry-bulb temperature as the independent variables. If the Condenser Type is WaterCooled, then the cooling
energy input ratio modifier curve will be function of weighted average indoor air wet-bulb temperature
and outdoor condenser entering water temperature. This performance curve can be used to describe the
cooling energy input ratio at low outdoor temperatures (i.e., the following two curves are used) or can
be used to describe the performance for all outdoor temperatures (i.e., the following two curves are not
used). For this system type it is likely that all three of these performance curves will be required. See the
Engineering Reference for more discussion on using this input field.
1.32.1.1.12 Field: Cooling Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of High Tempera-
ture Curve Name
This alpha field defines the cooling energy input ratio modifier at high outdoor temperatures. This
curve is a bi-quadratic equation with weighted average indoor wet-bulb temperature and condenser entering
air dry-bulb temperature as the independent variables. This curve is used when the trend in cooling energy
changes dramatically as outdoor temperature changes. If the cooling energy does not change dramatically
with changes in outdoor conditions, this field may be left blank. See the Engineering Reference for more
discussion on using this input field.
1.32.1.1.13 Field: Cooling Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of Low Part-Load
Ratio Curve Name
This alpha field defines the cooling energy input ratio modifier (function of part-load ratio when PLR
is less than or equal to 1) curve name. This curve is a linear, quadratic or cubic equation with cooling part-
load ratio used as the independent variable. The cooling energy input ratio modifier curve is normalized
to 1 at a part-load ratio of 1 and is used only when the operating part-load ratio is less than or equal to 1.
1.32.1.1.14 Field: Cooling Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of HIgh Part-Load
Ratio Curve Name
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1389
This alpha field defines the cooling energy input ratio modifier (function of part-load ratio when PLR
is greater than 1) curve name. This curve is a linear, quadratic or cubic equation with cooling part-load
ratio used as the independent variable. The cooling energy input ratio modifier curve is normalized to 1
at a part-load ratio of 1 and is used only when the operating part-load ratio is greater than 1.
1.32.1.1.25 Field: Heating Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of Low Temperature
Curve Name
This alpha field defines the heating energy input ratio modifier at low temperature curve name. This
curve is a bi-quadratic equation with a weighted average indoor dry-bulb temperature and condenser enter-
ing air dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperature as the independent variables. Since manufacturers may provide
performance data using either outdoor dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperatures, either of these temperature
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1391
types may be used for heating performance curves as specified in the Heating Performance Curve Outdoor
Temperature Type input field below. This performance curve can be used to describe the heating energy
input ratio at low outdoor temperatures (i.e., the following two curves are used) or can be used to describe
the performance for all outdoor temperatures (i.e., the following two curves are not used).
1.32.1.1.27 Field: Heating Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of High Tempera-
ture Curve Name
This alpha field defines the heating energy input ratio modifier at high temperature curve name. This
curve is a bi-quadratic equation with a weighted average indoor dry-bulb temperature and condenser enter-
ing air dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperature as the independent variables. Since manufacturers may provide
performance data using either outdoor dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperatures, either of these temperature
types may be used for heating performance curves as specified in the Heating Performance Curve Outdoor
Temperature Type input field below. This curve is used when the trend in heating energy changes dramat-
ically as outdoor temperature changes. If the heating energy does not change dramatically with changes
in outdoor conditions, this field may be left blank.
1.32.1.1.29 Field: Heating Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of Low Part-Load
Ratio Curve Name
This alpha field defines the heating energy input ratio modifier (function of part-load ratio when PLR is
less than or equal to 1) curve name. This curve is a linear, quadratic, or cubic equation with heating part-
load ratio used as the independent variable. The heating energy input ratio modifier curve is normalized
to 1 at a part-load ratio of 1 and is used only when the part-load ratio is less than or equal to 1.
1.32.1.1.30 Field: Heating Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of High Part-Load
Ratio Curve Name
This alpha field defines the heating energy input ratio modifier (function of part-load ratio when PLR
is greater than 1) curve name. This curve is a linear, quadratic, or cubic equation with heating part-load
ratio used as the independent variable. The heating energy input ratio modifier curve is normalized to 1
at a part-load ratio of 1 and is used only when the part-load ratio is greater than 1.
1392 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.32.1.1.39 Field: Equivalent Piping Length used for Piping Correction Factor in
Cooling Mode
This numeric field defines the equivalent pipe length in meters between the farthest terminal unit and
the heat pump condenser. This value includes the gas refrigerant line length (for both horizontal and
vertical distances), fitting losses, pipe bends, and other connections that contribute to piping losses. This
field is used to calculate the piping correction factor in cooling mode. This value defines the head losses
due to the pipe length between the farthest terminal unit and the heat pump condenser and impacts the
maximum available capacity in cooling mode.
1.32.1.1.41 Field: Piping Correction Factor for Length in Cooling Mode Curve Name
This alpha field defines the linear, quadratic, or cubic curve name used to calculate the piping correction
factor for length in cooling mode. Piping losses are a function of piping length. If sufficient piping loss
information is available where piping losses are also a function of combination ratio (i.e., in addition to
length), a biquadratic performance curve may be used.
1.32.1.1.42 Field: Piping Correction Factor for Height in Cooling Mode Coefficient
This numeric field defines the coefficient used to calculate the piping correction factor for height in
cooling mode.
1394 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.32.1.1.43 Field: Equivalent Piping Length used for Piping Correction Factor in
Heating Mode
This numeric field defines the equivalent pipe length in meters between the farthest terminal unit and
the heat pump condenser. This value includes the liquid refrigerant line length (for both horizontal and
vertical distances), fitting losses, pipe bends, and other connections that contribute to piping losses. This
field is used to calculate the piping correction factor in heating mode. This value defines the head losses
due to the pipe length between the farthest terminal unit and the heat pump condenser and impacts the
maximum available capacity in heating mode.
1.32.1.1.44 Field: Piping Correction Factor for Length in Heating Mode Curve Name
This alpha field defines the linear, quadratic, or cubic curve name used to calculate the piping correction
factor for length in heating mode. Piping losses are a function of piping length. If sufficient piping loss
information is available where piping losses are also a function of combination ratio (i.e., in addition to
length), a biquadratic performance curve may be used.
1.32.1.1.45 Field: Piping Correction Factor for Height in Heating Mode Coefficient
This numeric field defines the coefficient used to calculate the piping correction factor for height in
heating mode.
and all additional compressors are assumed to be equally sized. This field is only used to calculate crankcase
heater power and has no impact on heat pump performance.
The value for this input field must be greater than or equal to 0. If this input field is left blank, the default
value is 0.
This numeric field defines the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature above which outdoor coil defrosting is
disabled. If this input field is left blank, the default value is 5 C. Defrost can be completely eliminated by
selecting a temperature lower than the minimum expected outdoor temperature found in the weather file.
If the user wishes to model an evaporative-cooled condenser AND they have performance curves that
are a function of the wet-bulb temperature of air entering the condenser coil, then the user should specify
Condenser Type = EvapCooled and the evaporative condenser effectiveness value should be entered as
1.0. In this case, the Cooling Capacity Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature) and the Cooling
Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature) input fields for this object should reference
performance curves that are a function of the wet-bulb temperature of air entering the condenser coil.
If the user wishes to model an air-cooled condenser that has evaporative media placed in front of it
to cool the air entering the condenser coil, then the user should specify Condenser Type = EvapCooled.
The user must also enter the appropriate evaporative effectiveness for the media. In this case, the Cooling
Capacity Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature) and the Cooling Energy Input Ratio Modifier
Curve (function of temperature) input fields for this object should reference performance curves that are
a function of outdoor dry-bulb temperature. Be aware that the evaporative media will significantly reduce
the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the condenser coil, so the Cooling Capacity and Cooling EIR
Modifier Curves must be valid for the expected range of dry-bulb temperatures that will be entering the
condenser coil.
must be used. This input is only used when Heat Pump Waste Heat Recovery is selected as Yes and the
system changes from cooling only mode to heat recovery mode.
This alpha field defines the heating energy modifier when heat recovery mode is active. This modifier is
used as a multiplier for operating heating energy, and when in heat recovery mode, this modifier is usually
greater than 1. This curve is a bi-quadratic equation using weighted average indoor temperature (i.e., the
indoor terminal units weighted average inlet temperatures) and condenser entering air temperature as the
independent variables. This performance curve can be used to describe the heating energy modifier as
either a constant (e.g., temperature term coefficients are 0), a heating energy modifier that varies with
indoor and/or outdoor temperatures (e.g., one or more temperature term coefficients are 0), or varies with
both indoor and outdoor temperatures (e.g., temperature term coefficients are non-zero). If this field is left
blank, and heat recovery operating mode is selected, the default constant modifier is 1.1. This modifier is
applied only when heat recovery mode is active. To model a heat recovery system which has no degradation
in heating performance when heat recovery mode is active, or if the degradation is not constant at different
operating conditions, a performance curve object must be used. This input is only used when Heat Pump
Waste Heat Recovery is selected as Yes and the system changes from heating only mode to heat recovery
mode.
AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow ,
VRF Heat Pump , !- Heat Pump Name
VRFCondAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
autosize , !- Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity {W}
3.16038 , !- Gross Rated Cooling COP {W}
-5, !- Minimum Outdoor Temperature in Cooling Mode {C}
43, !- Maximum Outdoor Temperature in Cooling Mode {C}
VRFCoolCapFT , !- Cooling Capacity Ratio Modifier Function of Low Temperature Curve Name
VRFCoolCapFTBoundary , !- Cooling Capacity Ratio Boundary Curve Name
VRFCoolCapFTHi , !- Cooling Capacity Ratio Modifier Function of High Temperature Curve Name
VRFCoolEIRFT , !- Cooling Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of Low Temperature Curve Name
VRFCoolEIRFTBoundary , !- Cooling Energy Input Ratio Boundary Curve Name
VRFCoolEIRFTHi , !- Cooling Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of High Temperature Curve Name
CoolingEIRLowPLR , !- Cooling Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of Low Part -Load Ratio Curve
Name
CoolingEIRHiPLR , !- Cooling Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of High Part -Load Ratio Curve
Name
1402 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.32.1.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Total Cooling Rate [W]
Heat Recovery:
Evap-cooled:
Water-cooled:
1404 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Electric defrost always used for Defrost Strategy = Resistive regardless of fuel type
Note: refer to the rdd file after a simulation for exact output variable names
0 in heating mode), and defrost consumption rate output variables are included in this calculation. This
value is specific to outdoor unit performance in heating mode, is calculated for each HVAC system time
step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step being reported.
1.32.1.2.23 VRF Heat Pump Terminal Unit Cooling Load Rate [W]
This output field is the sum of the terminal unit cooling coil loads in Watts for the current time step
being reported. This value is derived directly from the cooling coils and represents the total cooling load
on the VRF system after piping losses have been accounted for. The total cooling load will be less than the
variable refrigerant flow total cooling capacity reported when piping losses are modeled (i.e., when piping
losses are < 1).
1.32.1.2.24 VRF Heat Pump Terminal Unit Heating Load Rate [W]
This output field is the sum of the terminal unit heating coil loads in Watts for the current time step
being reported. This value is derived directly from the heating coils and represents the total heating load
on the VRF system after piping losses have been accounted for. The total heating load will be less than
the variable refrigerant flow total heating capacity reported when piping losses are modeled (i.e., when
piping losses are < 1).
1.32.1.2.27 VRF Heat Pump Evaporative Condenser Water Use Volume [m3]
This output is the amount of water used to evaporatively cool the condenser coil inlet air, in cubic
meters. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Water, End Use Key = Cooling,
Group Key = System (ref. Output:Meter objects).
1.32.1.2.28 VRF Heat Pump Evaporative Condenser Pump Electric Power [W]
This is the average electricity consumption rate of the evaporative condenser water pump in Watts for
the time step being reported.
1.32.1.2.29 VRF Heat Pump Evaporative Condenser Pump Electric Energy [J]
This is the electricity consumption rate of the evaporative condenser water pump in Joules for the time
step being reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key
= Cooling, Group Key = System (ref. Output:Meter objects).
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1409
The ratio of the total capacity of the system (heating and cooling capacity) to the effective power when
operating in the heat recovery mode. This value is specific to overall system performance, is calculated
for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step being
reported.
1.32.2 AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl
1.32.2.1 Inputs
1.32.2.1.1 Field: Heat Pump Name
This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a variable refrigerant flow
heat pump. Any reference to this heat pump will use this name. Since this object is not listed in an
AirloopHVAC object, the most likely use of this name would be for reporting purposes.
1.32.2.1.6 Field: Rated Compressor Power Per Unit of Rated Evaporative Capacity
This numeric field defines the rated compressor power per Watt of rated evaporative capacity. Rated
compressor power corresponds to the max compressor speed at rated conditions. The actual compressor
power is obtained by multiplying the rated power with the modification factor calculated by Compressor
Power Multiplier Function of Temperature Curve. The value must be greater than 0. If this field is left
blank, a default value of 0.35 W/W is assumed.
1.32.2.1.20 Field: Outdoor Unit Fan Power Per Unit of Rated Evaporative Capacity
This numeric field defines the outdoor unit fan power per watt of rated evaporative capacity. If this
field is blank, the default value of 4.25E-3 W/W is used.
1.32.2.1.21 Field: Outdoor Unit Fan Flow Rate Per Unit of Rated Evaporative Ca-
pacity
This numeric field defines the outdoor unit fan volumetric flow rate per watt of rated evaporative
capacity. If this field is blank, the default value of 7.50E-5 m3 /s-W is used.
1412 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.32.2.1.24 Field: Diameter of Main Pipe Connecting Outdoor Unit to the First
Branch Joint
This numeric field defines the diameter of main pipe connecting the outdoor unit to the first branch
joint. This value is used to calculate the piping loss of the refrigerant when going through the main pipe,
including the heat loss and pressure drop. If this field is blank, the default value of 0.0254m is used.
1.32.2.1.25 Field: Length of Main Pipe Connecting Outdoor Unit to the First Branch
Joint
This numeric field defines the length of main pipe connecting the outdoor unit to the first branch joint.
This value is used to calculate the heat loss of the refrigerant when going through the main pipe. The
value should be greater than 0. If this field is blank, the default value of 30m is used.
1.32.2.1.26 Field: Equivalent Length of Main Pipe Connecting Outdoor Unit to the
First Branch Joint
This numeric field defines the equivalent length of main pipe connecting the outdoor unit to the first
branch joint. This value is used to calculate the pressure drop of the refrigerant when going through the
main pipe. The value should be greater than the real pipe length specified in the above field. If this field
is blank, the default value of 36m is used.
1.32.2.1.27 Field: Height Difference Between Outdoor Unit and Indoor Units
This numeric field defines the height difference between the outdoor unit node and indoor unit node
of the main pipe. This value is used to calculate the piping loss of the refrigerant when going through the
main pipe. The value can be positive, zero, or negative. Positive means outdoor unit is higher than indoor
unit, while negative means outdoor unit is lower than indoor unit.
cumulated. For timed defrost control, the fractional amount of time the unit is in defrost is entered in
the input field “Defrost Time Period Fraction” described below. If on-demand defrost control is selected,
the defrost time period is calculated based on outdoor weather (humidity ratio) conditions. Regardless
of which defrost control is selected, defrost does not occur above the user specified outdoor temperature
entered in the input field “Maximum Outdoor Dry-bulb Temperature for Defrost Operation” described
above. If this input field is left blank, the default defrost control is timed.
This numeric field defines the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature above which outdoor coil defrosting is
disabled. If this input field is left blank, the default value is 5°C. Defrost can be completely eliminated by
selecting a temperature lower than the minimum expected outdoor temperature found in the weather file.
AirConditioner: VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl ,
VRF Heat Pump , !- Heat Pump Name
VRFCondAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
VRF Heat Pump TU List , !- Zone Terminal Unit List Name
R410A , !- Refrigerant Type
41300 , !- Rated Evaporative Capacity {W}
0.344 , !- Rated Compressor Power Per Unit of Rated Evaporative Capacity {W/W}
, !- Minimum Outdoor Air Temperature in Cooling Mode {C}
, !- Maximum Outdoor Air Temperature in Cooling Mode {C}
, !- Minimum Outdoor Air Temperature in Heating Mode {C}
, !- Maximum Outdoor Air Temperature in Heating Mode {C}
3, !- Reference Outdoor Unit Superheating Degrees {C}
3, !- Reference Outdoor Unit Subcooling Degrees {C}
VariableTemp , !- Refrigerant Temperature Control Algorithm for Indoor Unit
, !- Reference Evaporating Temperature for Indoor Unit {C}
, !- Reference Condensing Temperature for Indoor Unit {C}
6, !- Variable Evaporating Temperature Minimum for Indoor Unit {C}
13, !- Variable Evaporating Temperature Maximum for Indoor Unit {C}
42, !- Variable Condensing Temperature Minimum for Indoor Unit {C}
46, !- Variable Evaporating Temperature Maximum for Indoor Unit {C}
4.12E-3, !- Outdoor Unit Fan Power Per Unit of Rated Evaporative Capacity {W/W}
7.26E-5, !- Outdoor Unit Fan Flow Rate Per Unit of Rated Evaporative Capacity {m3/s-W}
OUEvapTempCurve , !- Outdoor Unit Evaporating Temperature Function of Superheating Curve Name
OUCondTempCurve , !- Outdoor Unit Condensing Temperature Function of Subcooling Curve Name
0.0508 , !- Diameter of main pipe connecting outdoor unit to the first branch joint {m}
30, !- Length of main pipe connecting outdoor unit to the first branch joint {m}
36, !- Equivalent length of main pipe connecting outdoor unit to the first branch
joint {m}
5, !- Height difference between the outdoor unit node and indoor unit node of the
main pipe {m}
0.02, !- Insulation thickness of the main pipe {m}
0.032 , !- Thermal conductivity of the main pipe insulation material {W/m-K}
33, !- Crankcase Heater Power per Compressor {W}
1, !- Number of Compressors
0.33, !- Ratio of Compressor Size to Total Compressor Capacity
7, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -bulb Temperature for Crankcase Heater {C}
, !- Defrost Strategy
, !- Defrost Control
, !- Defrost Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of Temperature Curve Name
, !- Defrost Time Period Fraction
, !- Resistive Defrost Heater Capacity {W}
, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -bulb Temperature for Defrost Operation {C}
4500000 , !- Compressor maximum delta Pressure {Pa}
3, !- Number of Compressor Loading Index Entries
1500, !- Compressor Speed at Loading Index 1 {rev/min}
MinSpdCooling , !- Loading Index 1 Evaporative Capacity Multiplier Function of Temperature
Curve Name
1416 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Curve:Quadratic ,
OUEvapTempCurve , !- Name
0, !- Coefficient1 Constant
6.05E-1, !- Coefficient2 x
2.50E-2, !- Coefficient3 x**2
0, !- Minimum Value of x
15, !- Maximum Value of x
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature; !- Output Unit Type
Curve:Quadratic ,
OUCondTempCurve , !- Name
0, !- Coefficient1 Constant
-2.91, !- Coefficient2 x
1.180 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
0, !- Minimum Value of x
5, !- Maximum Value of x
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature; !- Output Unit Type
Curve:Biquadratic ,
MinSpdCooling , !- Name
3.19E-01, !- Coefficient1 Constant
-1.26E-03, !- Coefficient2 x
-2.15E-05, !- Coefficient3 x**2
1.20E-02, !- Coefficient4 y
1.05E-04, !- Coefficient5 y**2
-8.66E-05, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for Y
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type
Curve:Biquadratic ,
MinSpdPower , !- Name
8.79E-02 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
-1.72E-04, !- Coefficient2 x
6.93E-05 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
-3.38E-05, !- Coefficient4 y
-8.10E-06, !- Coefficient5 y**2
-1.04E-05, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1417
Curve:Biquadratic ,
Spd1Cooling , !- Name
8.12E-01 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
-4.23E-03, !- Coefficient2 x
-4.11E-05, !- Coefficient3 x**2
2.97E-02 , !- Coefficient4 y
2.67E-04 , !- Coefficient5 y**2
-2.23E-04, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for Y
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type
Curve:Biquadratic ,
Spd1Power , !- Name
3.26E-01 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
-2.20E-03, !- Coefficient2 x
1.42E-04 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
2.82E-03 , !- Coefficient4 y
2.86E-05 , !- Coefficient5 y**2
-3.50E-05, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for Y
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type
Curve:Biquadratic ,
Spd2Cooling , !- Name
1.32E+00 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
-6.20E-03, !- Coefficient2 x
-7.10E-05, !- Coefficient3 x**2
4.89E-02 , !- Coefficient4 y
4.59E-04 , !- Coefficient5 y**2
-3.67E-04, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for Y
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type
Curve:Biquadratic ,
Spd2Power , !- Name
6.56E-01 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
-3.71E-03, !- Coefficient2 x
2.07E-04 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
1.05E-02 , !- Coefficient4 y
7.36E-05 , !- Coefficient5 y**2
-1.57E-04, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
1418 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.32.2.2 Outputs
In addition to the output variables described for the VRF-SysCurve model in Section 1.32.1, the VRF-
FluidTCtrl model also provides the following output variables:
• VRF Heat Pump Outdoor Unit Evaporator Heat Extract Rate [W]
• VRF Heat Pump Outdoor Unit Condenser Heat Release Rate [W]
Note: refer to the rdd file after a simulation for exact output variable names
1.32.2.2.8 VRF Heat Pump Cooling Capacity at Max Compressor Speed [W]
This output field is the maximum cooling capacity of the variable refrigerant flow system at particular
operational conditions, corresponding to the maximum compressor speed. This value is calculated for each
HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step being reported.
This output only applies for the VRF-FluidTCtrl model.
1.32.2.2.9 VRF Heat Pump Heating Capacity at Max Compressor Speed [W]
This output field is the maximum heating capacity of the variable refrigerant flow system at particular
operational conditions, corresponding to the maximum compressor speed. This value is calculated for each
HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step being reported.
This output only applies for the VRF-FluidTCtrl model.
1.32.2.2.10 VRF Heat Pump Outdoor Unit Evaporator Heat Extract Rate [W]
This output field is the heat extract rate of the VRF outdoor unit evaporator in Watts. This value is
calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step
being reported. This output only applies for the VRF-FluidTCtrl model.
1.32.2.2.11 VRF Heat Pump Outdoor Unit Condenser Heat Release Rate [W]
This output field is the heat release rate of the VRF outdoor unit condenser in Watts. This value is
calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step
being reported. This output only applies for the VRF-FluidTCtrl model. This output only applies for the
VRF-FluidTCtrl model.
1420 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.32.3 AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl:HR
1.32.3.1 Inputs
1.32.3.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a variable refrigerant flow heat
recovery system. Any reference to this system will use this name. Since this object is not listed in an
AirloopHVAC object, the most likely use of this name would be for reporting purposes.
1.32.3.1.6 Field: Rated Compressor Power Per Unit of Rated Evaporative Capacity
This numeric field defines the rated compressor power per Watt of rated evaporative capacity. Rated
compressor power corresponds to the max compressor speed at rated conditions. The actual compressor
power is obtained by multiplying the rated power with the modification factor calculated by Compressor
Power Multiplier Function of Temperature Curve. The value must be greater than 0. If this field is left
blank, a default value of 0.35 W/W is assumed.
1.32.3.1.26 Field: Outdoor Unit Fan Power Per Unit of Rated Evaporative Capacity
This numeric field defines the outdoor unit fan power per watt of rated evaporative capacity. If this
field is blank, the default value of 4.25E-3 W/W is used.
1.32.3.1.27 Field: Outdoor Unit Fan Flow Rate Per Unit of Rated Evaporative Ca-
pacity
This numeric field defines the outdoor unit fan volumetric flow rate per watt of rated evaporative
capacity. If this field is blank, the default value of 7.50E-5 m3 /s-W is used.
1.32.3.1.32 Field: Length of Main Pipe Connecting Outdoor Unit to the First Branch
Joint
This numeric field defines the length of main pipe connecting outdoor unit to the first branch joint.
This value is used to calculate the heat loss of the refrigerant when going through the main pipe. The
value should be greater than 0. If this field is blank, the default value of 30m is used.
1.32.3.1.33 Field: Equivalent Length of Main Pipe Connecting Outdoor Unit to the
First Branch Joint
This numeric field defines the equivalent length of main pipe connecting outdoor unit to the first branch
joint. This value is used to calculate the pressure drop of the refrigerant when going through the main
pipe. The value should be greater than the real pipe length specified in the above field. If this field is
blank, the default value of 36m is used.
1.32.3.1.34 Field: Height Difference Between Outdoor Unit and Indoor Units
This numeric field defines the height difference between the outdoor unit node and indoor unit node
of the main pipe. This value is used to calculate the piping loss of the refrigerant when going through the
main pipe. The value can be positive, zero, or negative. Positive means outdoor unit is higher than indoor
unit, while negative means outdoor unit is lower than indoor unit.
cumulated. For timed defrost control, the fractional amount of time the unit is in defrost is entered in
the input field “Defrost Time Period Fraction” described below. If on-demand defrost control is selected,
the defrost time period is calculated based on outdoor weather (humidity ratio) conditions. Regardless
of which defrost control is selected, defrost does not occur above the user specified outdoor temperature
entered in the input field “Maximum Outdoor Dry-bulb Temperature for Defrost Operation” described
above. If this input field is left blank, the default defrost control is timed.
This numeric field defines the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature above which outdoor coil defrosting is
disabled. If this input field is left blank, the default value is 5°C. Defrost can be completely eliminated by
selecting a temperature lower than the minimum expected outdoor temperature found in the weather file.
Curve:Quadratic ,
OUEvapTempCurve , !- Name
0, !- Coefficient1 Constant
6.05E-1, !- Coefficient2 x
2.50E-2, !- Coefficient3 x**2
0, !- Minimum Value of x
15, !- Maximum Value of x
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature; !- Output Unit Type
Curve:Quadratic ,
OUCondTempCurve , !- Name
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1429
0, !- Coefficient1 Constant
-2.91, !- Coefficient2 x
1.180 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
0, !- Minimum Value of x
5, !- Maximum Value of x
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature; !- Output Unit Type
Curve:Biquadratic ,
MinSpdCooling , !- Name
3.19E-01, !- Coefficient1 Constant
-1.26E-03, !- Coefficient2 x
-2.15E-05, !- Coefficient3 x**2
1.20E-02, !- Coefficient4 y
1.05E-04, !- Coefficient5 y**2
-8.66E-05, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for Y
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type
Curve:Biquadratic ,
MinSpdPower , !- Name
8.79E-02 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
-1.72E-04, !- Coefficient2 x
6.93E-05 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
-3.38E-05, !- Coefficient4 y
-8.10E-06, !- Coefficient5 y**2
-1.04E-05, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for Y
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type
Curve:Biquadratic ,
Spd1Cooling , !- Name
8.12E-01 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
-4.23E-03, !- Coefficient2 x
-4.11E-05, !- Coefficient3 x**2
2.97E-02 , !- Coefficient4 y
2.67E-04 , !- Coefficient5 y**2
-2.23E-04, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for Y
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type
Curve:Biquadratic ,
Spd1Power , !- Name
3.26E-01 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
-2.20E-03, !- Coefficient2 x
1.42E-04 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
2.82E-03 , !- Coefficient4 y
1430 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Curve:Biquadratic ,
Spd2Cooling , !- Name
1.32E+00 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
-6.20E-03, !- Coefficient2 x
-7.10E-05, !- Coefficient3 x**2
4.89E-02 , !- Coefficient4 y
4.59E-04 , !- Coefficient5 y**2
-3.67E-04, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for Y
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type
Curve:Biquadratic ,
Spd2Power , !- Name
6.56E-01 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
-3.71E-03, !- Coefficient2 x
2.07E-04 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
1.05E-02 , !- Coefficient4 y
7.36E-05 , !- Coefficient5 y**2
-1.57E-04, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for Y
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type
1.32.4 ZoneTerminalUnitList
The zone terminal unit list defines the names of the terminal units connected to a single variable refrigerant
flow air-conditioning system. The zone terminal unit list is used exclusively in the variable refrigerant flow
(VRF) air conditioner object (ref: AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow). Up to 20 terminal units may
be connected to a single VRF outdoor condensing unit. This list is extensible if additional indoor terminal
units are required. The name of this zone terminal unit list object is then input into the corresponding
variable refrigerant flow air conditioner object. The following figure demonstrates this concept.
1.32.4.1 Inputs
1.32.4.1.1 Field: Zone Terminal List Name
This alpha field specifies the name of the zone terminal unit list. This name must be specified in the
AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow object.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1431
ZoneTerminalUnitList ,
VRF Heat Pump TU List , !- Zone Terminal Unit List Name
TU3 , !- Zone Terminal Unit Name 1
TU4 , !- Zone Terminal Unit Name 2
TU1 , !- Zone Terminal Unit Name 3
TU2 , !- Zone Terminal Unit Name 4
TU5; !- Zone Terminal Unit Name 5
• ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Electric
• ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Water
• ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Steam
1432 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Electric
• ZoneHVAC:CoolingPanel:RadiantConvective:Water
• ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Water
• ZoneHVAC:HighTemperatureRadiant
• ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:ConstantFlow
• ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:Electric
• ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:VariableFlow
1.33.1 ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Water
The objective of this model is to calculate the convective and radiant heat transfer from water baseboard
heaters to the people and the surfaces within a zone so that surface heat balances can take into account
the radiant heat transfer to the surfaces and thus enhance the accuracy of thermal comfort predictions
within the space. The radiant heat gains are distributed to the surfaces by fractions defined by user input.
1.33.1.1 Inputs
1.33.1.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user assigned name for an instance of a hot water baseboard heater unit. Any reference to
this unit by another object will use this name.
|(Qbb,out − QZoneLoad )|
≤ ConvergenceT olerance (1.130)
QZoneLoad
The default is 0.001.
is distributed to people and specific surfaces using the remaining fields. Note that the sum of the fractions
in the remaining fields (people and surfaces) must equal 1.0 so that all the radiant power is distributed
properly. For more information on the specification of this parameter, please see the Engineering Reference
for EnergyPlus.
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Water ,
SPACE2 -1 Baseboard , !- Baseboard Name
ReheatCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
SPACE2 -1 Zone Coil Water In Node , !- Inlet\_Node
SPACE2 -1 Zone Coil Water Out Node , !- Outlet\_Node
76.67 , !- Average Water Temperature {C}
0.063 , !- Standard Water Mass Flow Rate {Kg/s}
HeatingDesignCapacity , !- Heating Design Capacity Method
3000.0 , !- Heating Design Capacity{ W }
, !- Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area{ W / m2 }
, !- Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity{ -}
0.0013 , !- Max Water Volumetric Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.001 , !- Convergence Tolerance
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1435
1.33.1.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Baseboard Total Heating Rate [W]
• HVAC,Meter,Baseboard:EnergyTransfer [J]
1.33.2 ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Steam
The objective of this model is to calculate the convective and radiant heat transfer from steam baseboard
heaters to the people and the surfaces within a zone so that surface heat balances can take into account
the radiant heat transfer to the surfaces and thus enhance the accuracy of thermal comfort predictions
within the space. The radiant heat gains are distributed to the surfaces by fractions defined by the user.
Users are requested to provide degree of sub cooling to estimate the outlet conditions of the condensate.
1.33.2.1 Inputs
1.33.2.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user assigned name for an instance of a steam baseboard heater unit. Any reference to this
unit by another object will use this name.
|(Qbb,out − QZoneLoad )|
≤ ConvergenceT olerance (1.132)
QZoneLoad
The default is 0.001.
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Steam ,
Zone1Baseboard , !- Baseboard name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- On/off schedule
Steam Inlet Node , !- Steam inlet node
Steam Outlet Node , !- Steam outlet node
HeatingDesignCapacity ,!- Heating Design Capacity Method
autosize , !- Heating Design Capacity{ W }
, !- Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area{ W / m2 }
, !- Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity{ -}
5.0, !- Degree of sub cooling in the coil {C}
autosize , !- Maximum steam volumetric flow rate {m3/s}
0.001 , !- Tolerance
0.3, !- Fraction radiant
0.3, !- Fraction of radiant energy that is incident directly on people
OuterWall , !- Surface 1 Name
0.4, !- Fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to surface 1
Ceiling , !- Surface 2 Name
0.1, !- Fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to surface 2
InnerWall , !- Surface 3 Name
0.1, !- Fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to surface 3
Floor , !- Surface 4 Name
0.1; !- Fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to surface 4
1.33.2.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Baseboard Total Heating Rate [W]
• HVAC,Meter,Baseboard:EnergyTransfer [J]
1.33.3 ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Electric
The electric baseboard heater is a component in the zone equipment simulation. Heat from this device is
radiated to people and surfaces and also convected to the surrounding air. The electric baseboard model
includes the impact of the radiant heat addition to people and surfaces so that the thermal comfort and
surface heat balances are impacted. The component is controlled to meet any remaining zone load not met
by other equipment baseboard operates to meet the remaining zone load and the total electric consumption
is calculated by dividing by the efficiency of the baseboard.
1.33.3.1 Inputs
1.33.3.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user assigned name for an instance of an electric baseboard heater unit. Any reference to
this unit by another object will use this name.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1441
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Electric ,
Baseboard 1, !- Name
BB Schedule , !- Availability Schedule Name
HeatingDesignCapacity , !- Heating Design Capacity Method
5000, !- Heating Design Capacity{ W }
, !- Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area{ W / m2 }
, !- Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity{ -}
0.97, !- Efficiency of the baseboard
0.3, !- Fraction radiant
0.3, !- Fraction of radiant energy that is incident directly on people
EastWall , !- Surface 1 name
0.3, !- Fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to surface 1
WestWall , !- Surface 2 name
0.1, !- Fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to surface 2
NorthWall , !- Surface 3 name
0.1, !- Fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to surface 3
SouthWall , !- Surface 4 name
0.1, !- Fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to surface 4
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1443
1.33.3.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Baseboard Total Heating Rate [W]
• HVAC,Meter,Baseboard:EnergyTransfer [J]
• HVAC,Meter,Heating:Electricity[J]
1.33.4 ZoneHVAC:CoolingPanel:RadiantConvective:Water
The radiant/convective cooling panel is a type of zone equipment. Chilled water is supplied by the plant
and circulated through the panel. Through radiation and convective heat transfer, the panel absorbs energy
contained within the zone to provide cooling. Control of the panel is achieved using the methodology used
for low temperature radiant systems—a piecewise linear control profile that varies the flow rate to the
panel based on a control parameter defined by the user. This is different than being controlled to meet any
remaining load like the air-based systems. However, due to the radiant nature of these devices, it is not
possible to control precisely on a zone air-based load since this will result in overcooling at the next time
step. Despite this, in addition to the piecewise linear controls that have been used with low temperature
radiant systems in the past, two new controls are available for this simple model: one that varies the
convective output of the system to meet the remaining zone load and one that varies the total convective
output of the system to meet the remaining zone load. In these two zone load control types, the user must
enter the typical zone thermostat object to replace the setpoint and throttling range input in this object. In
this component, control is accomplished by throttling the chilled water flow to the device. Capacity rating
information is required as input and is used to calculate a UA value of the unit. The unit is connected to
a chilled water loop (demand side) with an inlet and outlet node. The input data dictionary definition of
the unit is as follows.
1.33.4.1 Inputs
1.33.4.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user assigned name for this instance of a radiant cooling panel. Any reference to this unit by
another object will use this name.
• MeanAirTemperature
• MeanRadiantTemperature
• OperativeTemperature
• OutdoorDryBulbTemperature
• OutdoorWetBulbTemperature
• ZoneConvectiveLoad
• ZoneTotalLoad
Operative temperature for radiant system controls is the average of Mean Air Temperature and Mean
Radiant Temperature. If the user does not select a control type, MeanAirTemperature control is assumed by
EnergyPlus. See the throttling range and control temperature schedule fields below for more information.
• Off - EnergyPlus will not do anything other than produce a warning message when condensation is
predicted to occur. The program will simply continue on; no moisture will be removed from the zone
air and there will be no adjustment of the surface temperature as a result of the condensation.
• SimpleOff - the program will predict cases where condensation will occur and shut-off the radiant
system to avoid this situation. With this option, the user also has the option to adjust when the
system will shut down. This is specified with the next parameter (field: Condensation Differential
Parameter).
• VariableOff - the program will attempt to reduce the inlet temperature to the panel by locally
recirculating some of the water leaving the panel and mixing it with water from the overall demand
side flow. This also means that some of the demand side water will bypass the panel. In reality,
this would require a pump to achieve such mixing and recirculation, but due to the simple nature of
this model, no pump definition will be required. Like the SimpleOff option, the VariableOff option
uses the condensation dewpoint offset parameter to adjust when the system will try to adjust for the
possibility of condensation.
water temperature is the number of degrees Celsius above the dew-point temperature. This allows some
extra safety to avoid condensation. When this parameter is negative, the radiant system will shut down or
recirculate water when the inlet water temperature is the number of degrees Celsius below the dew-point
temperature. This strategy allows the user to simulate a situation where small amounts of condensation
are tolerable or the resistance of the panel from the water loop to the panel surface is being taken into
account as condensation would likely happen at the panel surface. The default value for this parameter is
1°C.
flexibility to have the radiant cooling panel interact with many potential surfaces. This first parameter in
the pair is the name of the surface defined by user input elsewhere in the input file. Note that the surface
must reside in the same zone as all of the other surfaces in the following list (that is, all surfaces listed
must be in the same zone).
ZoneHVAC:CoolingPanel:RadiantConvective:Water ,
Radiant Cooling Panel 1, !- Name
RCP Schedule 1, !- Availability schedule
RCP Water Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet node name
RCP Water Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet node name
5.0, !- Rated Water Inlet Temperature {C}
24.0, !- Rated Space Temperature {C}
0.063 , !- Rated Water Mass Flow Rate {kg/s}
5000.0 , !- Rated cooling capacity {W}
0.1, !- Maximum water flow rate {m3/s}
MeanAirTemperature , !- Temperature Control Type
1.0, !- Cooling Control Throttling Range
RCP Temp Schedule , !- Cooling Control Temperature Schedule Name
SimpleOff , !- Condensation Control Type
1.0, !- Condensation Control Dewpoint Offset
0.65, !- Fraction Radiant
0.2, !- Fraction of Radiant Energy Incident on People
Zone 1 Floor , !- Surface 1 Name
0.5, !- Fraction of Radiant Energy to Surface 1
Zone 1 West Wall , !- Surface 2 Name
0.25, !- Fraction of Radiant Energy to Surface 2
Zone 1 South Wall , !- Surface 3 Name
0.25; !- Fraction of Radiant Energy to Surface 3
1.33.5 ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Water
The hot water baseboard heater is a component of zone equipment. The component is controlled to meet
any remaining zone load not met by other equipment in the zone that have higher heating priority. The
control is accomplished by throttling the hot water flow. Input resembles that for the simple heating coil:
there is an availability schedule, an overall UA, and a maximum hot water mass flow rate. The unit is
connected to a hot water loop (demand side) with an inlet and outlet node. Finally, there is the convergence
tolerance, which is the tolerance on how closely the baseboard outlet will meet the zone load. Of course,
this tolerance is relative to the zone load.
1.33.5.1 Inputs
1.33.5.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user assigned name for an instance of a hot water baseboard heater unit. Any reference to
this unit by another object will use this name.
|(Qbb,out − QZoneLoad )|
≤ ConvergenceT olerance (1.137)
QZoneLoad
The default is 0.001.
An example IDF for the hot water convective baseboard is shown below.
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Water ,
Zone3Baseboard , !- name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- on/off schedule
Zone 3 Reheat Water Inlet Node , !- water inlet node
Zone 3 Reheat Water Outlet Node , !- water outlet node
HeatingDesignCapacity , !- Heating Design Capacity Method
autosize , !- Heating Design Capacity{ W }
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1453
1.33.5.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Baseboard Total Heating Rate [W]
1.33.6 ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Electric
The electric baseboard heater is a component in the zone equipment simulation. The component is con-
trolled to meet any remaining zone load not met by other equipment in the zone that have higher heating
priority. The control is accomplished by taking the remaining zone load and dividing by the efficiency of
the baseboard.
1.33.6.1 Inputs
1.33.6.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user assigned name for an instance of a electric baseboard heater unit. Any reference to this
unit by another object will use this name.
and user specified fraction. Design day sizing must be specified. This field may be left blank. Default
value is 1.0.
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Electric ,
Zone1Baseboard , !- Baseboard Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
HeatingDesignCapacity , !- Heating Design Capacity Method
5000, !- Heating Design Capacity{ W }
, !- Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area{ W / m2 }
, !- Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity{ -}
0.97; !- Efficiency of the BaseBoard
1.33.6.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Baseboard Total Heating Rate [W]
• HVAC,Meter,Baseboard:EnergyTransfer [J]
• HVAC,Meter,Heating:Electricity[J]
1.33.7 ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:VariableFlow
This low temperature radiant system (hydronic) is a component of zone equipment that is intended to
model any “radiant system” where water is used to supply/remove energy to/from a building surface (wall,
ceiling, or floor). The component is controlled to meet any remaining zone load not met by other equipment
in the zone that have higher priority. The control is accomplished by throttling the hot or chilled water
flow to the unit. Note that this system will only control based on the radiant system controls defined by
1456 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
this input syntax and not via a zone thermostat such as is used for forced air systems. Note also that
because this unit does not require a thermostat that in cases where no other systems are serving the zone
in which this system resides that it will use the heating equipment priority to determine which system will
run first. If the radiant system is serving a zone with forced air equipment, the radiant system will follow
the priority order established by the zone thermostat but will still base its response on the controls defined
by the user for the radiant system.
This model covers a wide range of low temperature radiant systems: heating and/or cooling, panel
or embedded pipes, etc. It is not intended to simulate high temperature electric or gas radiant heaters.
Those devices will be handled by a separate model and different input syntax. Low temperature radi-
ant systems that use electric resistance heating should also be defined using separate input syntax (ref:
ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:Electric).
1.33.7.1 Inputs
1.33.7.1.1 Field: Name
This field is an unique user assigned name for an instance of a hydronic low temperature radiant system.
Any reference to this unit by another object will use this name.
result in more heat will be transferred to/from the radiant surface to the circulating fluid. Note that if
the user elects to autosize this field that a standard zone thermostat such as would be used for a forced
air system must be defined as autosizing calculations are based on the zone thermostat value and not on
the radiant system control values. In addition, when the user opts to autosize this calculation, the tube
spacing from the construction of each surface associated with this system is used along with each individual
surface area to make an approximation of the tubing length.
• MeanAirTemperature
• MeanRadiantTemperature
• OperativeTemperature
• OutdoorDryBulbTemperature
• OutdoorWetBulbTemperature
Operative temperature for radiant system controls is the average of Mean Air Temperature and Mean
Radiant Temperature. If the user does not select a control type, MeanAirTemperature control is
assumed by EnergyPlus. See the throttling range and control temperature schedule fields below for more
information.
setpoint temperature based on the throttling range and the maximum heating flow rate parameters (see
above). It should be noted that this control schedule will allow different setpoint temperatures throughout
the year for heating. The control of the radiant system is based solely on the heating control temperature
schedule, the cooling control temperature schedule (see below), and the control temperature type listed
above. The radiant system will not use any zone thermostat that might be used by other systems serving
the zone in which the radiant system resides.
This field contains the name of the cold water inlet node to the radiant system. Note that this node
name must also show up in the branch description when defining the plant demand side network in a manner
identical to defining a cooling coil. As with the maximum cold water flow rate, this field is optional and
not required for a heating only system.
• Off - EnergyPlus will not do anything other than produce a warning message when condensation is
predicted to occur. The program will simply continue on, no moisture will be removed from the zone
air, and there will be no adjustment of the surface temperature as a result of the condensation.
• SimpleOff - the program will predict cases where condensation will occur and shut-off the radiant
system to avoid this situation. With this option, the users also have the opportunity to adjust when
the system will shut down. This is specified with the next parameter (field: Condensation Control
Dewpoint Offset).
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1461
• VariableOff - the program will determine whether condensation is predicted for the flow rate de-
termined by the unit control scheme. If condensation is predicted, the unit makes one attempt
to reduce the flow rate using linear interpolation between the controlled flow rate and a zero flow
rate to achieve a surface temperature that would match the dew-point temperature modified by the
condensation control dew-point offset (field: Condensation Control Dewpoint Offset). For example,
if the controlled flow rate results in a surface temperature of 10°C, a zero flow rate results in a
surface temperature of 12°C, and the modified condensation dew-point temperature is 11°C, then
the reduced flow rate would be half of the controlled flow rate. If this reduced flow approximation
does not result in condensation, then this reduced flow is used for the unit. If the reduced flow
approximation still results in condensation, then the unit is turned off to avoid excessive iterations.
ZoneHVAC: LowTemperatureRadiant:VariableFlow ,
SPACE1 -1 Zone Radiant Floor , !- Name
RADIANTSYSAVAILSCHED , !- Availability Schedule Name
SPACE1 -1, !- Zone Name
C1 -1, !- Surface Name or Radiant Surface Group Name
0.013 , !- Hydronic Tubing Inside Diameter {m}
autosize , !- Hydronic Tubing Length {m}
OperativeTemperature , !- Temperature Control Type
HeatingDesignCapacity , !- Heating Design Capacity Method
autosize , !- Heating Design Capacity{ W }
, !- Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area{ W / m2 }
, !- Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity{ -}
0.0004 , !- Maximum Hot Water Flow {m3/s}
SPACE1 -1 Zone Radiant Water Inlet Node , !- Heating Water Inlet Node Name
1462 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
SPACE1 -1 Zone Radiant Water Outlet Node , !- Heating Water Outlet Node Name
2.0, !- Heating Control Throttling Range {deltaC}
RADIANT HEATING SETPOINTS , !- Heating Control Temperature Schedule Name
CoolingDesignCapacity , !- Cooling Design Capacity Method
autosize , !- Cooling Design Capacity{ W }
, !- Cooling Design Capacity Per Floor Area{ W / m2 }
, !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Capacity{ -}
autosize , !- Maximum Cold Water Flow {m3/s}
SPACE1 -1 Cooling Water Inlet Node , !- Cooling Water Inlet Node Name
SPACE1 -1 Cooling Water Outlet Node , !- Cooling Water Outlet Node Name
2.0, !- Cooling Control Throttling Range {deltaC}
RADIANT COOLING SETPOINTS , !- Cooling Control Temperature Schedule Name
Off , !- Condensation Control Type
1.0, !- Condensation Control Dewpoint Offset
CalculateFromCircuitLength , !- Number of Circuits
106.7; !- Circuit Length
1.33.7.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Rate [W]
1.33.8 ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:ConstantFlow
This low temperature radiant system (hydronic) is a component of zone equipment that is intended to
model any “radiant system” where water is used to supply/remove energy to/from a building surface (wall,
ceiling, or floor). The component is controlled via control schedules as described in the syntax below and
does not require a zone thermostat. Note that because this unit does not require a thermostat that in
cases where no other systems are serving the zone in which this system resides that it will use the heating
equipment priority to determine which system will run first. If the radiant system is serving a zone with
forced air equipment, the radiant system will follow the priority order established by the zone thermostat
but will still base its response on the controls defined by the user for the radiant system.
The constant flow system differs from the hydronic system describe above in what it controls. The
hydronic system varies the flow rate through the radiant system based on some control temperature. The
constant flow system keeps flow rate constant via a local circulation pump and varies the water temper-
ature that is sent to the radiant system. This is accomplished with a mixing valve that is controlled by
a sensor. This model covers a wide range of low temperature radiant systems: heating and/or cooling,
panel or embedded pipes, etc. It is not intended to simulate high temperature electric or gas radiant
heaters. Those devices will be handled by a separate model and different input syntax. Low temper-
ature radiant systems that use electric resistance heating should also be defined using separate input
syntax (ref: ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:Electric). Low temperature radiant systems that vary
1464 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
the flow rate through the radiant system should also be defined using separate input syntax (ref: Zone-
HVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:VariableFlow)
One of the other differences between this model and the variable flow hydronic radiant system is that
the constant flow radiant system has a built-in local secondary loop. It will recirculate flow coming out
of the system and mix this with flow from the loop to arrive at the desired inlet temperature to the
radiant system (note that this model has the temperature sensor AFTER the pump to insure proper inlet
temperature to the radiant system). The local loop also contains a pump which is assumed to be upstream
of the radiant system and after the mixing valve. So, the local loop can have some recirculation. The flow
from the main loop may also bypass the radiant system if more than enough flow is available and the main
loop is also a constant flow system.
1.33.8.1 Inputs
1.33.8.1.1 Field: Name
This field is an unique user assigned name for an instance of a constant flow low temperature radiant
system. Any reference to this unit by another object will use this name.
result in more heat being transferred to/from the radiant surface to the circulating fluid. Note that if the
user elects to autosize this field that a standard zone thermostat such as would be used for a forced air
system must be defined as autosizing calculations are based on the zone thermostat value and not on the
radiant system control values. In addition, when the user opts to autosize this calculation, the tube spacing
from the construction of each surface associated with this system is used along with each individual surface
area to make an approximation of the tubing length.
• MeanAirTemperature
• MeanRadiantTemperature
• OperativeTemperature
• OutdoorDryBulbTemperature
• OutdoorWetBulbTemperature
Operative temperature for radiant system controls is the average of Mean Air Temperature and Mean
Radiant Temperature. If the user does not select a control type, MeanAirTemperature control is
assumed by EnergyPlus. See the throttling range and control temperature schedule fields below for more
information.
• Off - EnergyPlus will not do anything other than produce a warning message when condensation is
predicted to occur. The program will simply continue on; no moisture will be removed from the zone
air and there will be no adjustment of the surface temperature as a result of the condensation.
• SimpleOff - the program will predict cases where condensation will occur and shut-off the radiant
system to avoid this situation. With this option, the users also have the opportunity to adjust when
the system will shut down. This is specified with the next parameter (field: Condensation Control
Dewpoint Offset).
1468 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• VariableOff - the program will determine whether condensation is predicted for the flow rate de-
termined by the unit control scheme. If condensation is predicted, the unit makes one attempt to
avoid condensation by increasing the water inlet temperature to the system to match the dew-point
temperature modified by the condensation control dew-point offset (field: Condensation Control
Dewpoint Offset). For example, if a surface in the space is predicted to be 15°C and the modified
condensation dew-point temperature is 17°C, then the inlet water temperature to the unit is reset to
17°C and the system is simulated again with this new inlet water temperature. If this increased inlet
water temperature does not result in condensation, then the simulation continues using this operat-
ing condition for the system. If the increased inlet water temperature still results in condensation,
then the unit is turned off to avoid excessive iterations.
ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant :ConstantFlow ,
Resistive Zone Radiant Floor , !- name of CONSTANT FLOW low temperature radiant system
RadiantSysAvailSched , !- availability schedule
Resistive Zone , !- Zone name
Zn001:Flr001 , !- Surface name or group
0.012 , !- Hydronic tubing inside diameter {m}
400.0 , !- Hydronic tubing length {m}
MeanAirTemperature , !- temperature control type
0.0004 , !- maximum water volumetric flow rate {m3/s}
, !-schedule for flow rate (optional , non -existent means constant)
30000 , !-Rated Pump Head in Pa
50, !-Rated Power Consumption in W
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1469
1.33.8.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Cooling Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Zone Radiant HVAC Cooling Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Injection Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Recirculation Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Inlet Temperature [C]
• HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Outlet Temperature [C]
• HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Pump Inlet Temperature [C]
• HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Pump Electric Power[W]
• HVAC,Sum,Zone Radiant HVAC Pump Electric Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Pump Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Pump Fluid Heat Gain Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Zone Radiant HVAC Pump Fluid Heat Gain Energy [J]
• HVAC,Sum,Zone Radiant HVAC Moisture Condensation Time [s]
• HVAC,Sum,Zone Radiant HVAC Cooling Fluid Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Sum,Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Fluid Heat Transfer Energy [J]
1.33.8.2.14 Zone Radiant HVAC Pump Fluid Heat Gain Rate [W]
This field reports the rate at which heat is added to the fluid stream as it passes through the pump
in Watts. This heat is reflected in the radiant system inlet temperature which will be different from the
pump inlet temperature if this field has a non-zero value.
1.33.8.2.15 Zone Radiant HVAC Pump Fluid Heat Gain Energy [J]
This field reports the amount of heat energy added to the fluid stream as it passes through the pump
in Joules. This heat is reflected in the radiant system inlet temperature which will be different from the
pump inlet temperature if this field has a non-zero value.
1.33.8.2.17 Zone Radiant HVAC Cooling Fluid Heat Transfer Energy [J]
The heat transfer energy for the cooling fluid connection, in Joules.
1.33.8.2.18 Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Fluid Heat Transfer Energy [J]
The heat transfer energy for the heating fluid connection, in Joules.
1.33.9 ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:Electric
This low temperature radiant system (electric) is a component of zone equipment that is intended to model
any “radiant system” where electric resistance heating is used to supply energy (heat) to a building surface
(wall, ceiling, or floor). The component is controlled by the radiant system controls that are defined in
the syntax below and this control does not require the use of a zone thermostat unless the unit is being
autosized. Note also that because this unit does not require a thermostat that in cases where no other
systems are serving the zone in which this system resides that it will use the heating equipment priority to
determine which system will run first. If the radiant system is serving a zone with forced air equipment,
the radiant system will follow the priority order established by the zone thermostat but will still base its
response on the controls defined by the user for the radiant system.
The control is accomplished by varying the electrical power supplied to the unit. This model covers
either a radiant panel system or wires embedded in entire walls, floors, or ceilings. It is not intended to
simulate high temperature electric or gas radiant heaters. Those devices will be handled by a separate
model (ref: ZoneHVAC:HighTemperatureRadiant) and different input syntax. Low temperature radiant
systems that use water flowing through tubes to provide heat to the system should also be defined using
separate input syntax (ref: ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:VariableFlow or ConstantFlow).
1472 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.33.9.1 Inputs
1.33.9.1.1 Field: Name
This field is an unique user assigned name for an instance of an electric low temperature radiant system.
Any reference to this unit by another object will use this name.
• MeanAirTemperature
• MeanRadiantTemperature
• OperativeTemperature
• OutdoorDryBulbTemperature
• OutdoorWetBulbTemperature
Operative temperature for radiant system controls is the average of Mean Air Temperature and Mean
Radiant Temperature. If the user does not select a control type, MeanAirTemperature control is
assumed by EnergyPlus. See the throttling range and control temperature schedule fields below for more
information.
ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant :Electric ,
Zone 2 Radiant Floor , !- Name
RadiantPanelAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
EAST ZONE , !- Zone name (name of zone system is serving)
Zn002:Flr001 , !- Surface Name or Radiant Surface Group Name
HeatingDesignCapacity , !- Heating Design Capacity Method
10000 , !- Heating Design Capacity{ W }
, !- Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area{ W/m2 }
, !- Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity{ - }
MeanAirTemperature , !- Temperature Control Type (control on mean air temperature)
2.0 , !- Heating Throttling Range { deltaC }
Radiant Heating Setpoints ; !- Heating Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name
1.33.9.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average, Zone Radiant HVAC Electric Power[W]
1.33.10 ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:SurfaceGroup
A low temperature radiant system (hydronic or electric) may consist of multiple active surfaces that serve
to condition the space. Surfaces that act serially can be specified as multiple radiant systems using the
standard radiant system input described above. However, if the multiple surfaces act in parallel, the
Radiant System Surface Group input line is used to specify which surfaces are acting in a coordinated
fashion and how energy flow is split between the surfaces. This list of surfaces (the name it is assigned)
replaces the name of a single surface in the radiant system input described above. Note that all of the
surfaces within a single list must be a part of the same zone and that the zone of these surfaces must also
match the zone the radiant system is attempting to condition.
1.33.10.1 Inputs
1.33.10.1.1 Field: Name
This field is an unique user assigned name for the list of surfaces that are acting in coordination with
one another. Any reference to this list by a radiant system will use this name.
ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant :SurfaceGroup ,
Zone 1 Radiant Surfaces , !- name of surface list
Zn001:Flr001 , !- Surface name 1
0.75, !- Flow fraction for surface 1
Zn001:Roof001 , !- Surface name 2
0.25; !- Flow fraction for surface 2
1.33.11 ZoneHVAC:HighTemperatureRadiant
The high temperature radiant system (gas-fired or electric) is a component of zone equipment that is
intended to model any “high temperature” or “high intensity” radiant system where electric resistance or
gas-fired combustion heating is used to supply energy (heat) to a building occupants directly as well as
the building surfaces (wall, ceiling, or floor). The component is controlled by the radiant system controls
defined in the syntax below and this control does not require the use of a zone thermostat unless the unit
is being autosized. Note also that because this unit does not require a thermostat that in cases where
no other systems are serving the zone in which this system resides that it will use the heating equipment
priority to determine which system will run first. If the radiant system is serving a zone with forced air
equipment, the radiant system will follow the priority order established by the zone thermostat but will
still base its response on the controls defined by the user for the radiant system.
1476 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
The control is accomplished by varying the electrical power supplied to or gas consumed by the unit.
It is not intended to simulate low temperature electric or hydronic radiant systems. Those devices will
be handled by a separate model and different input syntax (ref: the low temperature systems described
elsewhere).
1.33.11.1 Inputs
1.33.11.1.1 Field: Name
This field is an unique user assigned name for an instance of the high temperature radiant system. Any
reference to this unit by another object will use this name.
• MeanAirTemperature
• MeanRadiantTemperature
• OperativeTemperature
1478 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• MeanAirTemperatureSetpoint
• MeanRadiantTemperatureSetpoint
• OperativeTemperatureSetpoint
If the user does not select a control type, OperativeTemperature control is assumed by EnergyPlus.
For the setpoint control strategies (those ending in Setpoint above), EnergyPlus will attempt to find the
correct heater output to meet the heating setpoint temperature (see below) through iteration and interpo-
lation. This will more closely match the operation of an actual thermostat, but it will require significantly
longer execution times. For more information on the standard piecewise linear control algorithm used by
the Mean Air Temperature, Mean Radiant Temperature, and Operative Temperature control types (the
“non-Setpoint” controls), see the throttling range and control temperature schedule fields below for more
information.
1.33.11.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average, Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Rate [W]
1.33.12 ZoneHVAC:VentilatedSlab
Ventilated slab systems in general use outdoor air to “precool” slabs with colder nighttime air. This
method of precooling the thermal mass of a space can be very effective when nighttime temperatures are
low and the mass of the system is high enough to provide a significant amount of cooling potential during
the day to counteract internal heat gains within a zone. Nearly all ventilated slabs are simple systems
such as that shown in the right side of Figure 1.161. The fan is shown in a blow through position, but the
model will allow either a blow or draw through configuration.
1.33.12.1 Inputs
1.33.12.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a unique user assigned name for an instance of a ventilated slab system. Any reference
to this unit by another object will use this name. Other objects that use this ventilated slab system will
reference it by this name.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1481
the radiant system to a particular surface and the contribution of the system to the heat balances of that
surface. If this field is a surface list, then the source or sink is attached to all of the surfaces in the list
with the radiant system surface group defining the breakdown of how flow rate is split between the various
surfaces. Only base surfaces (Walls, Roofs, Floors) are valid. Window/Door surfaces and Internal Mass
are not valid surface types for embedded radiant systems.
rate. If “FixedAmount” type is selected as the outdoor air control strategy, this field will be ignored and
be automatically set to be equal to the minimum outdoor air flow rate specified in the field above.
This field can have one of two meanings depending the type of control selected in the outdoor air control
type parameter above. If “VariablePercent” or “FixedAmount” was selected, then this field is a schedule
name (ref: Schedule) corresponding to a maximum air fraction schedule. Furthermore, if “FixedAmount”
type is selected as the outdoor air control strategy, this field will be ignored and be automatically set to be
equal to the minimum outdoor air fraction specified in the field below. Note that this is a fraction of the
maximum airflow rate field (see parameter above) for the ventilated slab. If “FixedTemperature” control
was selected, then this field is still a schedule name (ref: Schedule), but it corresponds to a schedule of
mixed air temperatures that the outdoor air control will try to attain.
• SlabOnly
• SlabAndZone
• SeriesSlabs
In the SlabOnly, the ventilation air is sent to the slab only and does not enter the zone. In the
SlabAndZone, the air first enters the slab and then is delivered to the zone before returning to the system.
With the SeriesSlabs option, the user specifies a list of slabs (ZoneHVAC:VentilatedSlab:SlabGroup). This
list determines the order of slabs through which the air passes. In this option, air is not delivered to any
zone.
• MeanAirTemperature
• MeanRadiantTemperature
• OperativeTemperature
• OutdoorDryBulbTemperature
• OutdoorWetBulbTemperature
• SurfaceTemperature
• ZoneAirDewPointTemperature
If the user does not select a control type, MeanAirTemperature control is assumed by EnergyPlus.
See the control temperature schedule fields below for more information.
• None
• Heating
• Cooling
• HeatingAndCooling
If None is selected, the ventilated slab does not have any coils, and any other input will be ignored.
If either Heating or Cooling is selected, only a heating or cooling coil, respectively, is present. Thus,
only four more inputs will be expected. If HeatingAndCooling is selected, both heating and cooling coil
input must be entered, and the ventilated slab will have both a heating and a cooling coil.
ZoneHVAC:VentilatedSlab ,
Zone4VentSlab , !- Name
VentSlabAvailability , !- Availability Schedule Name
SPACE4 -1, !- Zone Name
F4 -1, !- Surface Name or Radiant Surface Group Name
0.84, !- Maximum Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
VariablePercent , !- Outdoor Air Control Type
0.168 , !- Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
U2MinOASched , !- Minimum Outdoor Air Schedule Name
0.84, !- Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
VentSlabMaxOA , !- Maximum Outdoor Air Fraction or Temperature Schedule Name
SlabAndZone , !- System Configuration Type
0.050 , !- Hollow Core Inside Diameter {m}
15.0, !- Hollow Core Length {m}
50.0, !- Number of Cores
MeanRadiantTemperature , !- Temperature Control Type
VentSlabHotHighAir , !- Heating High Air Temperature Schedule Name
VentSlabHotLowAir , !- Heating Low Air Temperature Schedule Name
VentSlabHotHighControl , !- Heating High Control Temperature Schedule Name
VentSlabHotLowControl , !- Heating Low Control Temperature Schedule Name
VentSlabCoolHighAir , !- Cooling High Air Temperature Schedule Name
VentSlabCoolLowAir , !- Cooling Low Air Temperature Schedule Name
1488 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.33.12.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilated Slab Radiant Heating Rate [W]
1.33.13 ZoneHVAC:VentilatedSlab:SlabGroup
A ventilated slab system may consist of multiple active slabs that are serving to condition the zone. Slabs
that act serially can be specified as multiple radiant systems using the standard ventilated slab input
described above. This list of surfaces (the name it is assigned) replcaces the name of a single surface in
the ventilated slab system input described above.
1.33.13.1 Inputs
1.33.13.1.1 Field : Name of Ventilated Slab Surface Group
This field is a unique user assigned name for the list of surfaces that are acting in coordination with
one another. Any reference to this list by a ventilated slab system will use this name.
ZoneHVAC:VentilatedSlab:SlabGroup ,
Z125 , !- Name
SPACE1 -1, !- Zone 1 Name
C1 -1, !- Surface 1 Name
0.05, !- Core Diameter for Surface 1
30, !- Core Length for Surface 1
20, !- Core Numbers for Surface 1
Z1VentslabIn , !- Slab In Node Name for Surface 1
Z1VentSlabout , !- Slab Outlet Node Name for Surface 1
SPACE2 -1, !- Zone 2 Name
C2 -1, !- Surface 2 Name
0.05, !- Core Diameter for Surface 2
15, !- Core Length for Surface 2
20, !- Core Numbers for Surface 2
Z2VentSlabIn , !- Slab In Node Name for Surface 2
Z2VentSlabOut , !- Slab Outlet Node Name for Surface 2
SPACE5 -1, !- Zone 3 Name
C5 -1, !- Surface 3 Name
0.05, !- Core Diameter for Surface 3
30, !- Core Length for Surface 3
20, !- Core Numbers for Surface 3
Z5VentSlabIn , !- Slab In Node Name for Surface 3
Z5VentSlabOut; !- Slab Outlet Node Name for Surface 3
– Refrigeration:Case or
– Refrigeration:WalkIn or
– Refrigeration:CaseAndWalkInList objects .
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1493
The second approach requires more input objects but also allows the user to model more complex
systems. This detailed approach must be used whenever loads are transferred from one system to another,
such as with secondary loops, cascade condensers, or mechanical subcoolers. Again lists are used to enter
multiple load or compressor names.
For the detailed approach, the input objects needed are:
• At least one refrigeration load object which may include any combination of:
– Refrigeration:Case,
– Refrigeration:WalkIn,
– Refrigeration:CaseAndWalkInList (may include any combination of cases and walk in cooler
names, OR, a list of air chiller names)
– Refrigeration:SecondarySystem,
– Refrigeration:Condenser:Cascade (as a load, cooling a lower-temperature system) objects,
– Refrigeration:TransferLoadList (may include cascade condenser loads and/or secondary loop
loads)
– Refrigeration:AirChiller
• At least one Refrigeration:Compressor object (multiple compressors are entered using a Refrigera-
tion:CompressorList),
– Refrigeration:Condenser:AirCooled,
– Refrigeration:Condenser:EvaporativeCooled,
– Refrigeration:Condenser:WaterCooled, or
– Refrigeration:Condenser:Cascade (rejecting heat from this system)
• The object Refrigeration:Subcooler may optionally be included to describe either a liquid suction or
mechanical subcooler.
Output variables are also available to describe the total heat exchange between all refrigeration objects
and the zones containing these objects. These variables are described at the end of this section after all
the refrigeration objects.
1.34.1 Refrigeration:CompressorRack
The refrigeration compressor rack object works in conjunction with the refrigeration case and walkin
objects (Ref. Refrigeration:Case and Refrigeration:WalkIn) to simulate the performance of a refrigerated
case system. This object models the electric consumption of the rack compressors and the condenser fans.
Heat removed from the refrigerated cases, walkins, and compressor/condenser fan heat can be rejected
either outdoors or to a zone. Compressor rack waste heat can also be reclaimed for use by an optional air-
or water-heating coil (Ref. Coil:Heating:Desuperheater and Coil:WaterHeating:Desuperheater).
If heat is rejected outdoors, condenser cooling can either be accomplished by direct air flow, evaporative
water cooling, or a by water-cooled condenser with appropriate plant loop piping. With evaporative
cooling, water is sprayed through the air stream to effectively lower the air temperature experienced by the
1494 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
condenser coil as a result of water evaporation. The use of a water-cooled condenser requires the definition
of a plant loop to supply cooling to the condenser. Waste heat can be reclaimed and stored using a water
storage device.
The inputs for the compressor rack object include a name, the heat rejection location, the compressor
rack coefficient of performance (COP) at design conditions, the design condenser fan power, and the type of
condenser cooling. The model requires two curve objects to describe performance at off-design conditions.
If the condenser is water-cooled, the inlet and outlet node names as well as the water outlet temperature
schedule name are required. If the condenser has evaporative cooling, additional inputs for evaporative
condenser effectiveness, condenser air flow rate, basin heater parameters, water pump power, water source,
and an evaporative cooling availability schedule are available. The names of refrigerated cases and walkins
connected to the compressor rack are the final inputs to the model.
1.34.1.1 Inputs
1.34.1.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a refrigeration compressor rack. Any reference to this
compressor rack by another object will use this name.
obtain water directly from the mains (Ref. Water Mains Temperatures). If the name of a Water Storage
Tank object is used here, then the unit will obtain its water from that tank.
Refrigeration:CompressorRack ,
MediumTempRack , !- Name
Outdoors , !- Heat Rejection Location
1.7, !- Design Compressor Rack COP {W/W}
RackCOPfTCurve , !- Compressor Rack COP as a Function of Temperature Curve Name
1025.0 , !- Design Condenser Fan Power {W}
RackCondFanCurve , !- Condenser Fan Power as a Function of Temperature Curve Name
WaterCooled , !- Condenser Type
Condenser Inlet Node , !- Water -cooled Condenser Inlet Node Name
Condenser Outlet Node , !- Water -cooled Condenser Outlet Node Name
VariableFlow , !- Water -cooled Loop Flow Type
Cond Outlet Temp Sch , !- Water -cooled Condenser Outlet Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Water -cooled Condenser Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.003 , !- Water -cooled Condenser Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s}
55, !- Water -cooled Condenser Maximum Water Outlet Temperature {C}
, !- Water -cooled Condenser Minimum Water Inlet Temperature {C}
, !- Evaporative Condenser Availability Schedule Name
, !- Evaporative Condenser Effectiveness {dimensionless}
, !- Evaporative Condenser Air Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Basin Heater Capacity {W/K}
, !- Basin Heater Set Point Temperature {C}
, !- Design Evaporative Condenser Water Pump Power {W}
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1499
1.34.1.2 Outputs
If Condenser Type = Water Cooled:
• System,Average, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Condenser Refrigerant Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Pump Electric Power [W]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Pump Electric Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Basin Heater Electric Power
[W]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Basin Heater Electric Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Water Volume Flow Rate
[m3 /s]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Return Air Sensible Heating Rate [W]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Condenser Fan Electric Power [W]
• HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Condenser Fan Electric Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Total Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Total Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Pump Electric
Power [W]
• HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Pump Electric En-
ergy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Basin Heater
Electric Power [W]
• HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Electric PowerRefrigeration Air Chiller Com-
pressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Basin Heater Electric Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Water Volume
Flow Rate [m3/s]
• HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Water Volume [m3]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Zone Sensible Heating Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Zone Sensible Heating Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Return Air Sensible Heating Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Return Air Sensible Heating Energy [J]
1.34.1.2.21 Refrigeration Compressor Rack Return Air Sensible Heating Rate [W]
This field is the rate of sensible heating in Watts provided by condenser waste heat rejection to the
HVAC return air (zone return air path outlet node), which impacts the HVAC return air temperature. If
the HVAC system is off for a simulation timestep (no return air mass flow), then this sensible heating is
actually provided to the zone air instead (even though a non-zero value is reported here).
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1503
1.34.1.2.22 Refrigeration Compressor Rack Return Air Sensible Heating Energy [J]
This field is the sensible heating energy in Joules provided by condenser waste heat rejection to the
HVAC return air (zone return air path outlet node) for the timestep being reported. If the HVAC system
is off for a simulation timestep (no return air mass flow), then this sensible heating is actually provided to
the zone air instead (even though a non-zero value is reported here).
1.34.1.2.27 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Condenser Fan Electric Power
[W]
This output is the electric input to the rack condenser fan(s) in Watts.
1.34.1.2.28 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Condenser Fan Electric En-
ergy [J]
This is the electricity consumption of the rack condenser fan(s) in Joules for the timestep being reported.
This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration,
Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).
1.34.1.2.29 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Total Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate of the refrigeration compressor rack in Watts. It is the sum
of all of the heat transfer rates for the refrigerated cases and walk-ins that are connected to this rack. This
value does not include compressor or condenser fan heat.
1.34.1.2.30 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Total Heat Transfer Energy
[J]
This is the total heat transfer of the refrigeration compressor rack in Joules for the timestep being
reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = EnergyTransfer, End Use Key =
Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).
1.34.1.2.38 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Zone Sensible Heating Rate
[W]
This field is the rate of sensible heating in Watts provided to the zone by condenser waste heat rejection,
which impacts the zone air heat balance.
1.34.1.2.39 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Zone Sensible Heating Energy
[J]
This field is the sensible heating energy in Joules provided to the zone by condenser waste heat rejection
for the timestep being reported.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1505
1.34.1.2.40 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Return Air Sensible Heating
Energy [J]
1.34.1.2.41 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Return Air Sensible Heating
Rate [W]
These are the sensible heating energy, in Joules or Watts, provided to the HVAC system return air
node by condenser heat rejection at the compressor rack.
1.34.2 Refrigeration:Case
The Refrigeration Case object works in conjunction with a compressor rack, a refrigeration system,
or a secondary loop object (Refrigeration:CompressorRack, Refrigeration:System, or Refrigera-
tion:SecondarySystem) to simulate the performance of a refrigerated case system. The refrigerated
case model uses performance information at rated conditions along with performance curves for latent
case credits and defrost heat load to determine performance at off-rated conditions. Energy use for lights,
fans and anti-sweat heaters is modeled based on inputs for nominal power, schedules, and control type.
The refrigerated case model accounts for the sensible and latent heat exchange with the surrounding
environment (termed “case credits”) which impacts the temperature and humidity in the zone where the
case is located.
A dataset has been provided containing refrigerated case input data for a large number
of refrigerated cases from multiple manufacturers. See RefrigerationCases.idf.
The Refrigeration Case object inputs include a case name, an availability schedule name, the zone name
for the location of the case, and the temperature and relative humidity of the ambient (zone) air surrounding
the refrigerated case at the rating conditions for case performance. Additional inputs include the total
cooling capacity, latent heat ratio, and run time fraction of the refrigerated case at rated conditions. The
case length and operating temperature (average temperature of air/products within the case) must also be
specified.
The refrigerated case model requires two curves to describe performance at off-rated conditions (i.e.,
at different zone temperature and humidity levels): the latent case credit curve and the defrost energy
correction curve. The user must enter cubic performance curves with the independent variable being user
selectable (case temperature, zone relative humidity, or zone dewpoint temperature).
The user can select from eight case defrost types, with additional inputs being required depending on
the type selected. The user must enter a defrost schedule (unless Case Defrost Type = None), and an
optional defrost drip-down schedule can be specified to allow additional time for melted frost to drain from
the cooling coil following the regular defrost period.
Inputs are required for case fans, lights, and anti-sweat heaters. Case lighting can be controlled by
the user through entering a schedule. The case fans operate whenever the cooling coil is operating and
during defrost periods for certain case defrost types. Anti-sweat heater power can be controlled by several
methods which are user selectable. The model assumes that the fans are contained within the thermal
envelope of the case and provide a direct heat load on the case cooling coil. For lighting and anti-sweat
heaters, the user can specify the fraction of their respective heat loads that directly impact the case cooling
coil (with the remainder of their heat load impacting the surrounding zone air).
The user has the option of specifying a case restocking schedule and a schedule for modifying the case
credits if needed. Finally, the user can specify the under case HVAC return air fraction which determines
the portion of the case credits that directly impact the HVAC return air conditions (with the remainder
of the case credits impacting the zone sensible and latent loads).
1506 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.34.2.1 Inputs
1.34.2.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a refrigerated case. Any reference to this case by
another object will use this name.
entered value for this field must be greater than 0.0 and less than or equal to 1.0, and the default value is
0.85 if the field is blank.
• CaseTemperatureMethod
This method defines the variation in latent case credits as a cubic function of Case Operating Temper-
ature. The result from the cubic curve is multiplied by the difference between the rated ambient relative
humidity and the actual zone relative humidity, and one minus this value is multiplied by the Rated LHR
to give the operating LHR at the actual zone humidity condition. (Representative cooefficient values
for single-shelf horizontal and multi-shelf vertical display cases are given in the EnergyPlus Engineering
Reference.)
• RelativeHumidityMethod
This method defines the variation in latent case credits as a cubic function of ambient (zone) air relative
humidity.
• DewpointMethod
This method defines the variation in latent case credits as a cubic function of ambient (zone) air
dewpoint temperature.
The default curve type is the Case Temperature Method. Refer to the Engineering Reference for further
information on how latent case credits are modeled.
entered value for this field must be greater than or equal to zero, and the default value is 0 W/m if the
field is blank.
for each day of the year. The refrigerated case manufacturer typically provides this information with the
product literature. The use of Compact Schedules (ref. Schedules) are ideal for this purpose. In a typical
supermarket with many cases, it is important to diversify the defrost schedules in order to avoid large
swings in the load placed upon the remainder of the refrigeration system.
• None
This choice specifies that a defrost energy correction curve will not be used.
• CaseTemperatureMethod
This method defines the variation in defrost energy as a cubic function of Case Operating Temperature.
The result from the cubic curve is multiplied by the difference between the rated ambient relative humidity
and the actual zone relative humidity, and one minus this value is multiplied by the Case Defrost Power to
give the (average) operating defrost power at the actual zone humidity condition. (Representative cooef-
ficient values for single-shelf horizontal and multi-shelf vertical display cases are given in the EnergyPlus
Engineering Reference.)
• RelativeHumidityMethod
This method defines the variation in defrost energy as a cubic function of ambient (zone) air relative
humidity.
• DewpointMethod
This method defines the variation in defrost energy as a cubic function of ambient (zone) air dewpoint
temperature.
The default curve type is None. The methods described here (e.g. Case Temperature, Relative Hu-
midity, and Dewpoint) are applicable only to Electric with Temperature Termination, Hot-Gas with Tem-
perature Termination, and Hot-Brine with Temperature Termination case defrost types. Refer to the
Engineering Reference for further information on how the defrost energy correction types are modeled.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1511
Refrigeration:Case ,
Multi -Deck Dairy/Deli Merchandiser with Synergy -E, !- Name [Based on Hill Phoenix 6DMLH -NRG]
, !- Availability Schedule [Used to turn case on/off including all power draws (ie fans , lights ,
etc)]
UserProvideZoneName , !- Zone Name [Location of Fixture]
23.89 , !- Rated Ambient Temperature {C} [75øF]
55, !- Rated Ambient Relative Humidity {percent}
1394, !- Rated Total Cooling Capacity per Unit length {W/m} [1 ,450 Btu/hr/ft = 11 ,600 Btu/hr
]
0.30, !- Rated Latent Heat Ratio [ Rated Latent Capacity]
0.85, !- Rated Runtime Fraction
2.4, !- Case Length {m} [8 ft]
3.33, !- Case Operating Temperature {C} [38øF]
CaseTemperatureMethod , !- Latent Case Credit Curve Type
Multi_Shelf_Vertical_Latent_Case_Credit_Curve , !- Latent Case Credit Curve Name
27.3, !- Standard Case Fan Power per Unit Length {W/m} [8.3 W/ft]
27.3, !- Operating Case Fan Power per Unit Length {W/m} [8.3 W/ft = 67 W]
0.0, !- Standard Case Lighting Power per Unit Length {W/m} [0.0 W/ft]
114.8 , !- Installed Case Lighting Power per Unit Length {W/m} [35.0 W/ft = 280 W]
, !- Case Lighting Schedule Name
1.0, !- Fraction Of Lighting Energy To Case
0.0, !- Case Anti -Sweat Heater Power per Unit Length {W/m} [0.0 W/ft = 0 W]
, !- Minimum Anti -Sweat Heater Power per Unit Length {W/m} []
None , !- Anti -Sweat Heater Control Type
, !- Humidity At Zero Anti -Sweat Heater Energy {%}
, !- Case Height {m} []
1.0, !- Fraction of Anti -Sweat Heater Energy To Case
0.0, !- Case Defrost Power per Unit Length {W/m} [0.0 W/ft 0 W]
Off Cycle , !- Case Defrost Type
UserProvideDefSched6PerDay45MinEa , !- Case Defrost Schedule Name
UserProvideDefSched4PerDay42MinEa , !- Case Defrost Drip -Down Schedule
CaseTemperatureMethod , !- Defrost Energy Correction Curve Type
Multi Shelf Vertical , !- Defrost Energy Correction Curve Name
0.00, !- Under Case HVAC Return Air Fraction
, !- Refrigerated Case Restocking Schedule Name [Not modeling any restocking]
, !- Case Credit Fraction Schedule Name
-3.33, !- Design Evaporator Temperature or Brine Inlet Temperature {C} [26øF]
; !- Average Refrigerant Charge Inventory {kg/m} [ = ]
1.34.2.2 Outputs
• Zone,Average,Refrigeration Case Evaporator Total Cooling Rate [W]
mass flow), then this sensible cooling is actually provided to the zone air instead (even though a non-zero
value is reported here).
1.34.3 Refrigeration:CaseAndWalkInList
This object provides a list of all the refrigerated cases and/or walk in coolers cooled by a single refrigeration
system (ref: Refrigeraion:CompressorRack and Refrigeration:System). This list is extensible. Note that
the names of all cases, walk-ins,air chillers, and caseandwalkinlists must be unique. That is, you cannot
give a list the same name as one of the cases. Similarly, a walkin cannot have the same name as a case.This
list may contain a combination of case and walk-in names OR a list of air chiller names. Air chillers may
not be included in any list that also includes cases or walk-ins.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1517
1.34.3.1 Inputs
1.34.3.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a CaseAndWalkInList. Any reference to this list by
another object will use this name.
Refrigeration:CaseAndWalkInList ,
MediumTempCaselist , !- Name
UprightDairyCase , !- Refrigeration Case or WalkIn Name \#1
LunchmeatCase , !- Refrigeration Case or WalkIn Name \#2
MeatWalkIn , !- Refrigeration Case or WalkIn Name \#3
DeliCaseOne; !- Refrigeration Case or WalkIn Name \#4
1.34.4 Refrigeration:WalkIn
The Refrigeration WalkIn object works in conjunction with a compressor rack, a refrigeration system,
or a refrigeration secondary system object (Ref. Refrigeration:CompressorRack, Refrigeration:System, or
Refrigeration:SecondarySystem) to simulate the performance of a walk-in cooler. The walk-in cooler model
uses information at rated conditions along with input descriptions for heat transfer surfaces facing multiple
zones to determine performance. Energy use for lights, fans, and floor and anti-sweat heaters is modeled
based on inputs for nominal power, schedules, and control type. The walk-in cooler model accounts for
the sensible and latent heat exchange with the surrounding environment (termed “case credits”) which
impacts the temperature and humidity in each zone adjacent to the walk-in.
The walk-in cooler object inputs include a name, an availability schedule name, the rated cooling
capacity, the rated operating temperature, the rated cooling source temperature, the rated total heating
power and heating power schedule, the rated fan and lighting power and schedules, defrost type, defrost
control type, defrost schedule name, drip-down schedule name, defrost power, the portion of the defrost
energy used to melt ice (only for temperature termination control type), restocking schedule, refrigerant
inventory, and the floor area and U-value.
For each zone adjacent to the walk-in, the user must input the zone name and the insulated surface
area and U-value facing that zone. The user must also specify, for two types of doors, the door area, height,
U-value, door opening schedule name, and any door opening protection.
Under case HVAC return air fraction, available for refrigerated cases, is not available for walk-in coolers.
operate throughout the day (i.e., the schedule will contain 1 for all time periods); however, walkins require
maintenance and/or cleaning and this can be modeled accordingly using this schedule if desired. If this
field is left blank, the default schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.
brine defrost. Information provided for electric defrost power can be substituted here for walkins using
hot-gas or hot-brine defrost if other information is not available. Only electric Defrost Types consume
electricity during the defrost period. The entered value for this field must be greater than or equal to zero.
1.34.4.28 Field: Glass Reach In Door Opening Schedule Name Facing Zone <x>
The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes the fraction of time glass doors are open during a
given time period. The schedule values should be between 0 and 1.0. If no schedule is specified, the doors
are assumed to be open 5% of the time (corresponding to a schedule value of 0.05).
1.34.4.32 Field: Stocking Door Opening Schedule Name Facing Zone <x>
The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes the fraction of time stocking doors are open during
a given time period. The schedule values should be between 0 and 1.0. If no schedule is specified, the
doors are assumed to be open 5% of the time (corresponding to a schedule value of 0.05).
1522 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.34.4.33 Field: Stocking Door Opening Protection Type Facing Zone <x>
The type of stocking door opening protection used for this walkin. Valid choices are None, AirCurtain,
and StripCurtain. The default is AirCurtain if the field is blank. Use the type, StripCurtain, for both
hanging strips and airlock vestibules. Refer to the Engineering Reference for further information on how
the door protection types are modeled.
The following is an example input for a refrigeration walkin.
Refrigeration:WalkIn ,
WalkInFreezer , !- Name
CaseOperatingSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
4690. , !- Rated Coil Cooling Capacity {W}
-2.22, !- Operating Temperature {C}
-6.67, !- Rated Cooling Source Temperature {C}
0.0, !- Rated Total Heating Power {W}
CaseOperatingSched , !- Heating Power Schedule Name
735., !- Rated Cooling Coil Fan Power {W}
0.0, !- Rated Circulation Fan Power {W}
120., !- Rated Total Lighting Power {W}
CaseLightingSched2 , !- Lighting Schedule Name
Electric , !- Defrost Type
TimeSchedule , !- Defrost Control Type
CaseDefrostSched3 , !- Defrost Schedule Name
CaseDripDownSched3 , !- Defrost Drip -Down Schedule Name
5512. , !- Defrost Power {W}
, !- Temperature Termination Defrost Fraction to Ice {dimensionless}
WalkInStockingSched , !- Restocking Schedule Name
, !- Average Refrigerant Charge Inventory {kg}
13.0, !- Insulated Floor Surface Area {m2}
0.207 , !- Insulated Floor U-Value {W/m2 -C}
BackRoom , !- Zone Name
43.4, !- Total Insulated Surface Area Facing this Zone {m2}
.235, !- Insulated Surface U-Value Facing this Zone {W/m2 -C}
, !- Area of Glass Reach In Doors Facing this Zone {m2}
, !- Height of Glass Reach In Doors Facing this Zone {m}
, !- Glass Reach In Door U Value Facing this Zone {W/m2 -C}
, !- Glass Reach In Door Opening Schedule Name Facing this Zone
2.0, !- Area of Stocking Doors Facing this Zone {m2}
2.0, !- Height of Stocking Doors Facing this Zone {m}
, !- Stocking Door U Value Facing this Zone {W/m2 -C}
WIStockDoorOpenSch , !- Stocking Door Opening Schedule Name Facing this Zone
StripCurtain; !- Stocking Door Opening Protection Type Facing this Zone
“DairyWalkIn”, were exchanging energy with the zone, “SalesArea”, the output variable identification
would be “DairyWalkInInZoneSalesArea”.
1.34.6 Refrigeration:System
The refrigeration system object simulates the performance of a supermarket refrigeration system when
used along with other objects to define the refrigeration load(s), the compressor(s), and the condenser.
At least one refrigeration load object must be defined which may be one of four types of load, a
refrigerated case, a walk-in cooler, a chiller providing refrigeration to a secondary loop, or a cascade
condenser which absorbs heat rejected by a lower-temperature system (Ref. Refrigeration:Case, Refrig-
eration:WalkIn, Refrigeration:SecondarySystem, and Refrigeration:Condenser:Cascade) If multiple loads
are served by the same system , the user should use one or both of the list objects available to assign
loads to the system. The first list includes all cases and walkins cooled directly by this system (Ref. Re-
frigeration:CaseAndWalkInList). The second list includes any ‘transfer’ loads, that is refrigeration loads
borne by this system that are transferred from another refrigeration system via either a secondary loop
chiller or a cascade condenser (Ref. Refrigeration:TransferLoadList, see the Engineering Reference for more
information about these types of systems).
1526 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
The refrigeration system object is capable of modeling both single-stage and two-stage compression
refrigeration systems. The name of at least one compressor must be defined and a list object is avail-
able if the system is served by more than one compressor (Ref. Refrigeration:Compressor and Refrigera-
tion:CompressorList).
Heat is rejected outdoors in a condenser by direct air flow, evaporative water cooling, by a water-
cooled condenser with appropriate plant loop piping, or to a cascade condenser cooled by another refrig-
eration system(ref: Refrigeration:Condenser:AirCooled, Refrigeration:Condenser:EvaporativeCooled, Re-
frigeration:Condenser:WaterCooled, Refrigeration:Condenser:Cascade). With evaporative cooling, water is
sprayed through the air stream to effectively lower the air temperature experienced by the condenser coil
as a result of water evaporation. The use of a water-cooled condenser requires the definition of a plant loop
to supply cooling to the condenser. If a cascade condenser is specified, the refrigeration system absorbing
the rejected heat must also be defined.
The refrigeration system may also include a liquid suction and/or mechanical subcooler (Ref. Refrig-
eration:Subcooler).
The system object coordinates the energy flows between the other refrigeration objects and is used
to set system parameters. Compressor waste heat can also be reclaimed for use by an optional air- or
water-heating coil (Ref. Coil:Heating:Desuperheater and Coil:WaterHeating:Desuperheater).
The inputs for the refrigeration system object, in addition to the names of the other refrigeration objects
described above, include a name for this system, the minimum condensing temperature, the refrigeration
system working fluid, and the type of saturated suction temperature control. Optional input fields are also
provided for users seeking to keep track of refrigerant inventory and suction pipe heat gains.
1.34.6.1 Inputs
1.34.6.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a refrigeration system. Any reference to this refrigeration
system by another object will use this name.
zone. The heat balance of this zone will also be affected by the piping heat exchange. Additional output
variables are described at the end of this “Group-Refrigeration” section for the total impact of refrigeration
on zones, including suction pipe heat exchange.
Refrigeration:System ,
MediumTempSystem , !- Refrigeration System Name
MediumTempCaselist , !- Refrigeration Case or Walkin or CaseAndWalkInList Name
, !- Refrigeration Transfer Load or TransferLoad List Name
AirCooledCondenserA , !- Refrigeration Condenser Name
MediumTempCompressorlist , !- Refrigeration Compressor or CompressorList Name
25.0, !- Minimum Condensing Temperture {C}
R134a , !- Refrigeration System Working Fluid
ConstantSuctionTemperature , !- Suction Temperature Control Type
, !- Optional mechanical subcooler name
, !- Optional LSHX subcooler name
, !- Sum UA Distribution Piping {W/K}
, !- Distribution Piping Zone Name
MedTempRefrig; !- End -Use Subcategory
Refrigeration:System ,
LowTempSystem , !- Refrigeration System Name
LowTempCaselist , !- Refrigeration Case or Walkin or CaseAndWalkInList Name
, !- Refrigeration Transfer Load or TransferLoad List Name
AirCooledCondenserB , !- Refrigeration Condenser Name
LowStageCompressorList , !- Refrigeration Compressor or CompressorList Name
25.0, !- Minimum Condensing Temperture {C}
R404A , !- Refrigeration System Working Fluid
ConstantSuctionTemperature , !- Suction Temperature Control
, !- Optional mechanical subcooler name
, !- Optional LSHX subcooler name
, !- Sum UA Distribution Piping {W/K}
, !- Distribution Piping Zone Name
LowTempRefrig , !- End -Use Subcategory
2, !- Number of Compressor Stages
Shell -and -Coil Intercooler , !- Intercooler Type
0.7, !- Shell -and -Coil Intercooler Effectiveness
HiStageCompressorList !- High -Stage Compressor or CompressorList Name
1.34.6.2 Outputs
THE FOLLOWING OUTPUTS ARE AVAILABLE FOR SYSTEMS THAT SERVE CASES AND/OR
WALKINS:
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Total Cases and Walk Ins Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration System Total Cases and Walk Ins Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Total Transferred Load Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration System Total Transferred Load Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Total Suction Pipe Heat Gain Rate [W]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration System Total Suction Pipe Heat Gain Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Liquid Suction Subcooler Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Liquid Suction Subcooler Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Estimated High Stage Refrigerant Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• Zone,Sum,Refrigeration System Total High Stage Compressor Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• Zone,Average,Refrigeration System Total High Stage Compressor Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• Zone,Sum,Refrigeration System Total Low and High Stage Compressor Electric Energy [J]
• Zone,Sum,Refrigeration System Total Low Stage Compressor Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• Zone,Average,Refrigeration System Total Low Stage Compressor Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• Zone,Average,Refrigeration System Estimated Low Stage Refrigerant Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
THE FOLLOWING OUTPUTS ARE AVAILABLE FOR SYSTEMS THAT SERVE AIR CHILLERS:
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Compressor Electric Power [W]
• HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Compressor Electric Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Compressor Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Compressor Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Air Chiller Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Case and Walk In Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Transferred Load Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Transferred Load Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Suction Pipe Heat Gain Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Suction Pipe Heat Gain Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Net Rejected Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Net Rejected Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Liquid Suction Subcooler Heat Transfer Rate [W]
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1531
• HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Liquid Suction Subcooler Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Estimated Refrigerant Inventory Mass [kg]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Estimated Refrigerant Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Estimated High Stage Refrigerant Mass Flow Rate
[kg/s]
• HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total High Stage Compressor Electric Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total High Stage Compressor Electric Power [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total High Stage Compressor Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total High Stage Compressor Heat Transfer Rate
[W]
• HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Low and High Stage Compressor Electric Energy
[J]
• HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Low Stage Compressor Electric Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Low Stage Compressor Electric Power [W]
• HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Low Stage Compressor Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Low Stage Compressor Heat Transfer Rate
[W]
• HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Estimated Low Stage Refrigerant Mass Flow Rate
[kg/s]
1.34.6.2.4 Refrigeration System Total Low Stage Compressor Electric Power [W]
This output is the total electric power input to the system’s low-stage compressor(s) in Watts. This
output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.
1.34.6.2.5 Refrigeration System Total Low Stage Compressor Electric Energy [J]
This is the electricity consumption of the system’s low-stage compressor(s) in Joules for the timestep
being reported. The individual consumption for each compressor is also added to a meter with Resource
Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects). This
output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.
1.34.6.2.6 Refrigeration System Total High Stage Compressor Electric Power [W]
This output is the total electric power input to the system’s high-stage compressor(s) in Watts. This
output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.
1.34.6.2.7 Refrigeration System Total High Stage Compressor Electric Energy [J]
This is the electricity consumption of the system’s high-stage compressor(s) in Joules for the timestep
being reported. The individual consumption for each compressor is also added to a meter with Resource
Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects). This
output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.
1.34.6.2.8 Refrigeration System Total Low and High Stage Compressor Electric En-
ergy [J]
This is the total electricity consumption of the system’s low- and high-stage compressor(s) in Joules
for the timestep being reported. The individual consumption for each compressor is also added to a meter
with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter
objects). This output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.
1.34.6.2.12 Refrigeration System Total Low Stage Compressor Heat Transfer Rate
[W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate of the low-stage compressors in Watts. It is the sum of all
of the heat transfer rates for the refrigerated cases, walk-ins, secondary loops, cascade condensers, and
mechanical subcoolers that are cooled by this system. This value does not include compressor or condenser
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1533
fan heat. If specified as in input value, the suction pipe heat gains are included in this value. This output
is valid only for two-stage compression systems.
1.34.6.2.13 Refrigeration System Total Low Stage Compressor Heat Transfer Energy
[J]
This is the total heat transfer of the low-stage compressors in Joules for the timestep being reported.
This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = EnergyTransfer, End Use Key = Refrigeration,
Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects). This output is valid only for two-stage compression
systems.
1.34.6.2.14 Refrigeration System Total High Stage Compressor Heat Transfer Rate
[W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate of the high-stage compressors in Watts. It is the sum of
all of the heat transfer rates for the refrigerated cases, walk-ins, secondary loops, cascade condensers, and
mechanical subcoolers that are cooled by this system. This value does not include compressor or condenser
fan heat. If specified as in input value, the suction pipe heat gains are included in this value. This output
is valid only for two-stage compression systems.
1.34.6.2.15 Refrigeration System Total High Stage Compressor Heat Transfer Energy
[J]
This is the total heat transfer of the high-stage compressors in Joules for the timestep being reported.
This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = EnergyTransfer, End Use Key = Refrigeration,
Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects). This output is valid only for two-stage compression
systems.
1.34.6.2.16 Refrigeration System Total Cases and Walk Ins Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate from the refrigerated cases and walk-ins served directly by
this system in Watts. It is the sum of all of the heat transfer rates for the refrigerated cases and walk-ins
that are connected directly to this system. This value does not include compressor or condenser fan heat
or the heat transfer for cases and walk-ins served by any connected secondary systems.
1.34.6.2.17 Refrigeration System Total Cases and Walk Ins Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This output is the total heat transfer energy from the refrigerated cases and walk-ins served directly
by this system in Joules. It is the sum of all of the heat transfered for the refrigerated cases and walk-ins
that are connected directly to this system. This value does not include compressor or condenser fan heat
or the heat transfer for cases and walk-ins served by any connected secondary systems.
1.34.6.2.18 Refrigeration System Total Transferred Load Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This output is the sum of the heat transfer rates for any secondary loops, cascade condensers, and
mechanical subcoolers cooled by this system, minus the benefit of any mechanical subcooler providing
cooling to this system in Watts. Therefore, if the only transfer load between two systems is a mechanical
subcooler, the same amount will show as a negative value for the system receiving the cooling effect and
as a positive number for the system serving that cooling load. It also includes the pump energy for any
secondary loops and the compressor energy for any cascade condenser systems that are cooled by this
system. (See the Engineering Reference for more details about the loads placed by secondary systems
upon the primary system.)
1534 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.34.6.2.19 Refrigeration System Total Transferred Load Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This output is the sum of the heat transfered for any secondary loops, cascade condensers, and mechan-
ical subcoolers cooled by this system, minus the benefit of any mechanical subcooler providing cooling to
this system in Joules. Therefore, if the only transfer load between two systems is a mechanical subcooler,
the same amount will show as a negative value for the system receiving the cooling effect and as a positive
number for the system serving that cooling load. It also includes the pump energy for any secondary loops
and the compressor energy for any cascade condenser systems that are cooled by this system. (See the
Engineering Reference for more details about the loads placed by secondary systems upon the primary
system.)
1.34.6.2.20 Refrigeration System Total Suction Pipe Heat Gain Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate for suction piping served by this system in Watts. Note this is
an optional input, and is only available if the user has described the suction piping heat gain characteristics
in the input.
1.34.6.2.21 Refrigeration System Total Suction Pipe Heat Gain Energy [J]
This output is the total heat transfer rate for suction piping served by this system in Watts. Note this is
an optional input, and is only available if the user has described the suction piping heat gain characteristics
in the input.
1.34.6.2.24 Refrigeration System Liquid Suction Subcooler Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transferred from the liquid condensate before the thermal expansion valve
to the suction gas.
1.34.6.2.25 Refrigeration System Liquid Suction Subcooler Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This output is the total heat transferred from the liquid condensate before the thermal expansion valve
to the suction gas.
1.34.6.2.28 Refrigeration System Estimated Low Stage Refrigerant Mass Flow Rate
[kg/s]
This output is the calculated refrigerant mass flow through the low-stage compressors for this sys-
tem. This output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.
1.34.6.2.29 Refrigeration System Estimated High Stage Refrigerant Mass Flow Rate
[kg/s]
This output is the calculated refrigerant mass flow through the high-stage compressors for this sys-
tem. This output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.
1.34.6.2.37 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Compressor Electric Power [W]
This output is the total electric power input to the system compressor(s) in Watts.
1.34.6.2.39 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Low Stage Compressor Electric
Power [W]
This output is the total electric power input to the system’s low-stage compressor(s) in Watts. This
output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.
1.34.6.2.40 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Low Stage Compressor Electric
Energy [J]
This is the electricity consumption of the system’s low-stage compressor(s) in Joules for the timestep
being reported. The individual consumption for each compressor is also added to a meter with Resource
Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects). This
output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.
1.34.6.2.41 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total High Stage Compressor Electric
Power [W]
This output is the total electric power input to the system’s high-stage compressor(s) in Watts. This
output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.
1.34.6.2.42 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total High Stage Compressor Electric
Energy [J]
This is the electricity consumption of the system’s high-stage compressor(s) in Joules for the timestep
being reported. The individual consumption for each compressor is also added to a meter with Resource
Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects). This
output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.
1.34.6.2.43 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Low and High Stage Compressor
Electric Energy [J]
This is the total electricity consumption of the system’s low- and high-stage compressor(s) in Joules
for the timestep being reported. The individual consumption for each compressor is also added to a meter
with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter
objects). This output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.
1.34.6.2.45 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Compressor Heat Transfer Rate
[W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate of the Refrigeration Compressor rack in Watts. It is the sum
of all of the heat transfer rates for the refrigerated cases, walk-ins, secondary loops, cascade condensers,
and mechanical subcoolers that are cooled by this system. This value does not include compressor or
condenser fan heat. If specified as in input value, the suction pipe heat gains are included in this value.
1.34.6.2.46 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Compressor Heat Transfer Energy
[J]
This is the total heat transfer of the Refrigeration Compressor rack in Joules for the timestep being
reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = EnergyTransfer, End Use Key =
Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1537
1.34.6.2.47 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Low Stage Compressor Heat Trans-
fer Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate of the low-stage compressors in Watts. It is the sum of all
of the heat transfer rates for the refrigerated cases, walk-ins, secondary loops, cascade condensers, and
mechanical subcoolers that are cooled by this system. This value does not include compressor or condenser
fan heat. If specified as in input value, the suction pipe heat gains are included in this value. This output
is valid only for two-stage compression systems.
1.34.6.2.48 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Low Stage Compressor Heat Trans-
fer Energy [J]
This is the total heat transfer of the low-stage compressors in Joules for the timestep being reported.
This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = EnergyTransfer, End Use Key = Refrigeration,
Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects). This output is valid only for two-stage compression
systems.
1.34.6.2.49 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total High Stage Compressor Heat
Transfer Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate of the high-stage compressors in Watts. It is the sum of
all of the heat transfer rates for the refrigerated cases, walk-ins, secondary loops, cascade condensers, and
mechanical subcoolers that are cooled by this system. This value does not include compressor or condenser
fan heat. If specified as in input value, the suction pipe heat gains are included in this value. This output
is valid only for two-stage compression systems.
1.34.6.2.50 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total High Stage Compressor Heat
Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total heat transfer of the high-stage compressors in Joules for the timestep being reported.
This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = EnergyTransfer, End Use Key = Refrigeration,
Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects). This output is valid only for two-stage compression
systems.
1.34.6.2.51 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Air Chiller Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate from the refrigerated cases and walk-ins served directly by
this system in Watts. It is the sum of all of the heat transfer rates for the refrigerated cases and walk-ins
that are connected directly to this system. This value does not include compressor or condenser fan heat
or the heat transfer for cases and walk-ins served by any connected secondary systems.
1.34.6.2.52 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Case and Walk In Heat Transfer
Energy [J]
This output is the total heat transfer energy from the refrigerated cases and walk-ins served directly
by this system in Joules. It is the sum of all of the heat transfered for the refrigerated cases and walk-ins
that are connected directly to this system. This value does not include compressor or condenser fan heat
or the heat transfer for cases and walk-ins served by any connected secondary systems.
1.34.6.2.53 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Transferred Load Heat Transfer
Rate [W]
This output is the sum of the heat transfer rates for any secondary loops, cascade condensers, and
mechanical subcoolers cooled by this system, minus the benefit of any mechanical subcooler providing
1538 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
cooling to this system in Watts. Therefore, if the only transfer load between two systems is a mechanical
subcooler, the same amount will show as a negative value for the system receiving the cooling effect and
as a positive number for the system serving that cooling load. It also includes the pump energy for any
secondary loops and the compressor energy for any cascade condenser systems that are cooled by this
system. (See the Engineering Reference for more details about the loads placed by secondary systems
upon the primary system.)
1.34.6.2.54 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Transferred Load Heat Transfer
Energy [J]
This output is the sum of the heat transfered for any secondary loops, cascade condensers, and mechan-
ical subcoolers cooled by this system, minus the benefit of any mechanical subcooler providing cooling to
this system in Joules. Therefore, if the only transfer load between two systems is a mechanical subcooler,
the same amount will show as a negative value for the system receiving the cooling effect and as a positive
number for the system serving that cooling load. It also includes the pump energy for any secondary loops
and the compressor energy for any cascade condenser systems that are cooled by this system. (See the
Engineering Reference for more details about the loads placed by secondary systems upon the primary
system.)
1.34.6.2.55 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Suction Pipe Heat Gain Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate for suction piping served by this system in Watts. Note this is
an optional input, and is only available if the user has described the suction piping heat gain characteristics
in the input.
1.34.6.2.56 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Suction Pipe Heat Gain Energy
[J]
This output is the total heat transfer rate for suction piping served by this system in Watts. Note this is
an optional input, and is only available if the user has described the suction piping heat gain characteristics
in the input.
1.34.6.2.57 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Net Rejected Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This output is the total heat rejected by this system to the system condenser in Watts. It does
not include system heat rejection that has been recovered for useful purposes. However, if a water-cooled
condenser was used to provide heat to a separate water loop, the energy transferred to that loop is included
here.
1.34.6.2.58 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Net Rejected Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This output is the total heat rejected by this system to the system condenser in Joules for the timestep
being reported. It does not include system heat rejection that has been recovered for useful purposes.
However, if a water-cooled condenser was used to provide heat to a separate water loop, the energy
transferred to that loop is included here.
1.34.6.2.59 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Liquid Suction Subcooler Heat Transfer
Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transferred from the liquid condensate before the thermal expansion valve
to the suction gas.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1539
1.34.6.2.60 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Liquid Suction Subcooler Heat Transfer
Energy [J]
This output is the total heat transferred from the liquid condensate before the thermal expansion valve
to the suction gas.
1.34.6.2.61 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Mechanical Subcooler Heat Transfer En-
ergy [J]
1.34.6.2.63 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Estimated Refrigerant Mass Flow Rate
[kg/s]
This output is the calculated refrigerant mass flow through the compressors for this system.
1.34.6.2.64 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Estimated Low Stage Refrigerant Mass
Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output is the calculated refrigerant mass flow through the low-stage compressors for this sys-
tem. This output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.
1.34.6.2.65 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Estimated High Stage Refrigerant Mass
Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output is the calculated refrigerant mass flow through the high-stage compressors for this sys-
tem. This output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.
1.34.7 Refrigeration:TranscriticalSystem
The Refrigeration:TranscriticalSystem object allows users to model detailed transcritical carbon dioxide
(CO2 ) booster refrigeration systems used in supermarkets. The object allows for modeling either a
single stage system with medium-temperature loads or a two stage system with both medium- and low-
temperature loads.
The input objects required to model a detailed transcritical CO2 refrigeration system include the
following:
• One Refrigeration:TranscriticalSystem object,
• At least one refrigeration load object which may include any combination of the following:
• Refrigeration:Case,
• Refrigeration:WalkIn,
• Refrigeration:CaseAndWalkInList (may include both cases and/or walk-in cooler names),
• At least one Refrigeration:Compressor object (multiple compressors are entered using a Refrigera-
tion:CompressorList),
• One Refrigeration:GasCooler:AirCooled object,
Output variables are available to describe the total heat exchange between all the refrigeration objects
and the zones containing these objects. These variables are described at the end of this section.
At least one refrigeration load object must be defined which may be one of two types of loads, including
a refrigerated display case and a walk-in cooler, (Ref. Refrigeration:Case, and Refrigeration:WalkIn). If
multiple loads are served by the same system, the user should use the refrigerated case and walk-in
list object available to assign all cases and walk-ins cooled directly by this system (Ref. Refrigera-
tion:CaseAndWalkInList).
The name of at least one compressor must be defined and a list object is available if the system is
served by more than one compressor (Ref. Refrigeration:Compressor and Refrigeration:CompressorList).
Heat is rejected to the outdoors via an air-cooled gas cooler (Ref. Refrigeration:GasCooler:AirCooled).
The Refrigeration:TranscriticalSystem object coordinates the energy flows between the other refriger-
ation objects and is used to set system parameters.
The inputs for the refrigeration system object, in addition to the names of the other refrigeration
objects described above, include a name for this system, the receiver pressure, the subcooler effectiveness,
and the refrigeration system working fluid. Optional input fields are also provided for users seeking to
keep track of suction pipe heat gains.
A detailed description of the transcritical CO2 booster refrigeration system may be found in the Re-
frigeration section of the Engineering Reference.
1.34.7.1 Inputs
1.34.7.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a transcritical CO2 refrigeration system. Any reference
to this refrigeration system by another object will use this name.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1541
Refrigeration:TranscriticalSystem ,
TransRefrigSys , !- Name
TwoStage , !- System Type
MTLoads , !- Medium Temperature Refrigerated Case or Walkin or CaseAndWalkInList
Name
LTLoads , !- Low Temperature Refrigerated Case or Walkin or CaseAndWalkInList Name
RefrigGasCooler , !- Refrigeration Gas Cooler Name
HPCompressors , !- High Pressure Compressor or CompressorList Name
LPCompressors , !- Low Pressure Compressor or CompressorList Name
4000000 , !- Receiver Pressure
0.4, !- Subcooler Effectiveness
R744 , !- Refrigeration System Working Fluid Type
, !- Sum UA Suction Piping for Medium Temperature Loads
, !- Medium Temperature Suction Piping Zone Name
, !- Sum UA Suction Piping for Low Temperature Loads
, !- Low Temperature Suction Piping Zone Name
TransRefrigSys; !- End -Use Subcategory
1.34.7.2 Outputs
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Total High Pressure Compressor Electric Power
[W]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Total High Pressure Compressor Electric Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Pressure Compressor Electric Power [W]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Pressure Compressor Electric Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Medium Temperature Cases and Walk Ins Heat
Transfer Rate [W]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Medium Temperature Cases and Walk Ins Heat Trans-
fer Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Temperature Cases and Walk Ins Heat Trans-
fer Rate [W]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Temperature Cases and Walk Ins Heat Transfer
Energy [J]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Total Cases and Walk Ins Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Medium Temperature Suction Pipe Heat Transfer
Rate [W]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Medium Temperature Suction Pipe Heat Transfer
Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Temperature Suction Pipe Heat Transfer Rate
[W]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Temperature Suction Pipe Heat Transfer Energy
[J]
1544 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System High Pressure Compressor Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System High Pressure Compressor Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Pressure Compressor Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Pressure Compressor Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Net Rejected Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Net Rejected Heat Transfer Energy [J]
1.34.7.2.9 Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Temperature Cases and Walk Ins
Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate from the low temperature refrigerated cases and walk-ins
served directly by this system in Watts. It is the sum of all of the heat transfer rates for the low temperature
refrigerated cases and walk-ins that are connected directly to this system.
1.34.7.2.10 Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Temperature Cases and Walk Ins
Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This output is the total heat transfer energy from the low temperature refrigerated cases and walk-ins
served directly by this system in Joules. It is the sum of all of the heat transferred for the low temperature
refrigerated cases and walk-ins that are connected directly to this system.
1.34.7.2.11 Refrigeration Transcritical System Total Cases and Walk Ins Heat Trans-
fer Energy [J]
This output is the total heat transfer energy from all the low- and medium-temperature refrigerated
cases and walk-ins served directly by this system in Joules. It is the sum of all of the heat transferred for
all the refrigerated cases and walk-ins that are connected directly to this system.
1.34.7.2.20 Refrigeration Transcritical System Net Rejected Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This output is the total heat rejected by this system to the system gas cooler in Watts. It does not
include system heat rejection that has been recovered for useful purposes.
1.34.7.2.21 Refrigeration Transcritical System Net Rejected Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This output is the total heat rejected by this system to the system gas cooler in Joules for the timestep
being reported. It does not include system heat rejection that has been recovered for useful purposes.
1.34.8 Refrigeration:Compressor
The compressors are described here using manufacturer’s data for curves that provide the efficiency, cooling
capacity, and power consumption. The corresponding rated values for cycle superheat and subcooling are
also required.
A dataset has been provided containing the compressor rating data, including the per-
formance curve inputs, for a large number of compressors. See RefrigerationCompressor-
Curves.idf.
1.34.8.1 Inputs
1.34.8.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a compressor. Any reference to this compressor by
another object will use this name.
Refrigeration:Compressor ,
CompressorA , !- Name
PowerCurveCompA , !- Refrigeration Compressor Power Curve Name
CapCurveCompA , !- Refrigeration Compressor Capacity Curve Name
10.0, ! – Rated Superheat {delta C}
, !- Rated Return Gas Temperature {C}
, ! – Rated Liquid Temperature{C}
15.0, !- Rated Subcooling {delta C}
MedTempRefrig; !- End -Use Subcategory
1550 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.34.8.2 Outputs
THE FOLLOWING OUTPUTS ARE AVAILABLE FOR SYSTEMS THAT SERVE CASES AND/OR
WALKINS:
THE FOLLOWING OUTPUTS ARE AVAILABLE FOR SYSTEMS THAT SERVE AIR CHILLERS:
1.34.8.2.10 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Compressor Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This output is the heat removed from the refrigerated cases by the compressor in Watts.
1.34.8.2.11 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Compressor Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This is the heat removed from the refrigerated cases by the compressor in Joules for the timestep being
reported.
1.34.9 Refrigeration:CompressorList
This object provides a list of all the compressors included within a single refrigeration system (Ref: Re-
frigeration:System). Each list must contain at least one compressor. The order in which the individual
compressors are listed here will be the order in which the compressors are dispatched to meet the system
load. That is, at very low loads, only compressor #1 will be operating. As the load increases, the first
two compressors will be operating, and so on. This list is extensible.
1.34.9.1 Inputs
1.34.9.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a compressor list. Any reference to this compressor list
by another object will use this name. The compressor list cannot have the same name as any individual
compressor.
Refrigeration:CompressorList ,
MediumTempCompressorlist , !- Refrigeration Compressor List Name
CompressorA , !- Refrigeration Compressor Name \#1
CompressorB , !- Refrigeration Compressor Name \#2
CompressorC; !- Refrigeration Compressor Name \#3
1552 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.34.10 Refrigeration:Subcooler
Two types of subcoolers are modeled by the detailed refrigeration system. As described in the Engineering
Reference, the liquid suction heat exchanger uses cool suction gas to subcool the hot condensate after
it leaves the condenser and before it reaches the thermal expansion valve. For the liquid suction heat
exchanger, both the source and sink of energy are located within the same refrigeration system. In contrast,
a mechanical subcooler is used to transfer cooling capacity from one refrigeration system to another. The
mechanical subcooler is listed as a part of the system for which the condensate is cooled. However, the
input data for the mechanical subcooler includes a field that identifies the system that provides the cooling
capacity.
1.34.10.1 Inputs
1.34.10.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a subcooler. Any reference to this subcooler by another
object will use this name.
REFRIGERATION:SUBCOOLER ,
SampleLSHx , !Subcooler Name
LiquidSuction , !subcooler type
6, !design liquid suction subcooling {deltaC}
16, !design inlet temperature on liquid side {C}
0, !design inlet temperature on vapor side {C}
, !Refrigeration System Detailed Name providing cooling capacity
; !Control Temperature Out for subcooled liquid {C}
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1553
! Mechanical Subcooler (uses Med Temp System to cool low temp liquid to 10C)
REFRIGERATION:SUBCOOLER ,
SampleMSC , !Subcooler Name
Mechanical , !subcooler type
, !design liquid suction subcooling {C}
, !design inlet temperature on liquid side {C}
, !design inlet temperature on vapor side {C}
MediumTempSystem , !Refrigeration System Detailed Name providing cooling capacity
10; !Control Temperature Out for subcooled liquid {C}
1.34.10.2 Outputs
FOR SUBCOOLERS ON SYSTEMS SERVING CASES AND/OR WALKINS:
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Mechanical Subcooler Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Mechanical Subcooler Heat Transfer Energy [J]
1.34.10.2.6 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Mechanical Subcooler Heat Transfer En-
ergy [J]
This output is the cooling energy transferred from one system’s compressor group to the refrigerant
leaving the condenser for another refrigeration system in Joules.
1554 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.34.11 Refrigeration:Condenser:AirCooled
The refrigeration system requires a single condenser to reject the system heat. The air cooled condenser
object is one of four options for this condenser. In an air-cooled condenser, the total heat of rejection
is characterized by a linear relationship between the difference between the inlet air (usually the outside
drybulb) and condensing temperatures. This curve is commonly found in the condenser manufacturers’
literature. This rating curve, which corresponds to ARI 460 standards, also has an associated rated
value for subcooling that should be entered. The rated condenser fan power and fan speed control type
must be specified. If the condenser is not at ground level, the user may specify an air inlet node name
(ref: OutdoorAir:Node name). If the condenser is located inside a conditioned zone, the zone name may
be specified(ref: bbbZoneNamebbb). Optional input is provided to help the user compare refrigerant
inventories for different systems. These inputs represent the design values for the refrigerant inventory
within the condenser, within a receiver beneath the condenser, and in the liquid pipes between the condenser
and the refrigerated cases.
1.34.11.1 Inputs
1.34.11.1.1 Field: Name
Identifies a particular condenser that rejects heat for a one or more refrigeration system(s). The name
must be unique and will be validated against all the condenser names (ref: Refrigeration:Condenser:*) in
the input file, including names used for evaporative-cooled, water-cooled, and cascade-cooled condensers.
1.34.11.1.2 Field: Rated Effective Total Heat Rejection Rate Curve Name
This field is the name of a curve object defining the condenser heat rejection as a function of the dif-
ference between the condensing and entering air temperatures. The curve should be linear (Curve:Linear).
See the Engineering Reference for more discussion on the curve coefficients.
object where the height of the node is taken into consideration when calculating outdoor air temperature
from the weather data. Alternately, the node name may be specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList object
where the outdoor air temperature is taken directly from the weather data. If a zone name is entered, the
temperature of that zone is used.
Refrigeration:Condenser:AirCooled ,
MediumTempCondenser , !- Name of condenser
MediumTempCondenserHRCurve , !-name of condenser heat of rejection curve , linear
0., ! Rated subcooling {deltaC}
VariableSpeed , ! Fan speed control type
4000. , ! Design condenser fan power {W}
0.25, !Minimum air flow fraction through condenser fan {dimensionless}
Refrigeration MediumTempSystem CondenserNode , !- Condenser Air Inlet Node Name or Zone Name
MediumTempRefrig; !- End -Use Subcategory
1.34.11.2 Outputs
FOR CONDENSERS COOLING SYSTEMS SERVING CASES AND/OR WALKINS:
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer Rate [W] Zone, Sum,
Refrigeration System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat Transfer Rate [W]
1556 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Recovered for Non-Refrigeration Purposes Energy
[J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer Rate [W]
HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat
Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat Transfer
Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer Rate
[W]
• HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer Energy
[J]
1.34.11.2.6 Refrigeration System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for all purposes including defrost and
water or air heating.
1.34.11.2.13 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Fan Electric Power [W]
This output is the electric input to the system’s condenser fan(s) in Watts.
1.34.11.2.14 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Fan Electric Energy [J]
This is the electricity consumption of the system’s condenser fan(s) in Joules for the timestep being
reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key =
Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).
1.34.11.2.15 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This is the total heat transfer across the condenser (i.e., compressor energy and refrigeration load minus
any heat recovered for defrost or other purposes).
1.34.11.2.16 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total heat energy flowing across the condenser for the timestep being reported (i.e., com-
pressor energy and refrigeration load minus any heat recovered for defrost or other purposes).
1558 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.34.11.2.17 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Trans-
fer Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for all purposes including defrost and
water or air heating.
1.34.11.2.18 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Trans-
fer Energy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for all purposes including defrost and
water or air heating for the timestep being reported.
1.34.12 Refrigeration:Condenser:EvaporativeCooled
Each refrigeration system requires a single condenser. The evaporative cooled condenser object is one
of four options for this condenser. In an evaporative-cooled condenser, the total heat of rejection is
characterized by a four-factor relationship between the condensing temperature and the difference between
the outside wetbulb and condensing temperatures. This curve must be developed by regression from the
condenser manufacturers’ literature. This rating curve, which is based upon rated data taken according to
ARI 460 standards, also has an associated rated value for subcooling that should be entered. The rated
condenser fan power and fan speed control type must be specified. If the condenser is not at ground level,
the user may specify an air inlet node name (ref: OutdoorAir:Node name). Optional input is provided
to help the user compare refrigerant inventories for different systems. These input represent the design
values for the refrigerant inventory within the condenser, within a receiver beneath the condenser, and in
the liquid pipes between the condenser and the refrigerated cases.
Additional inputs are needed for basin heater parameters, water pump power, and water source. An
evaporative cooling availability schedule is available.
1.34.12.1 Inputs
1.34.12.1.1 Field: Name
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1559
Identifies a particular condenser that rejects heat for a one or more refrigeration system(s). The name
must be unique and will be validated against all the condenser names (ref: Refrigeration:Condenser:*) in
the input file, including names used for air-cooled, water-cooled and cascade-cooled condensers.
Refrigeration:Condenser:EvaporativeCooled ,
MedTempEvapCooledCondenser , !- Refrigeration Condenser Name
64800. , !- Rated Total Heat Rejection Effect , {W}
0. , !- Rated Subcooling
VariableSpeed , !- Condenser Fan Speed Control
746., !- Rated Condenser Fan Power
0.25, !- Minimum air flow fraction through condenser fan {dimensionless}
6.63 , !- Evaporative Condenser Approach Temp Const , {C}
0.468 , !- Evaporative Condenser Approach Temp HRCF Cooefficient
17.93 , !- Evaporative Condenser Approach Temp 1/ hrcf coefficient
-0.322, !- Evaporative Condenser Approach Temp Twb coefficient {1/C}
0.6 , !- Minimum Condenser Capacity Factor
4.8 , !- Maximum Condenser Capacity Factor
Outside Air Inlet Node , !- Condenser Air Inlet Node Name
1.79 , !- Rated Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
66.7 , !- Basin Heater Capacity {W/C}
1.0 , !- Basin Heater Set Point Temperature {C}
250. , !- Rated Water Pump Power {W}
EvapWaterStorageTank , !- Evaporative Water Supply Tank Name
EvapCondAvail , !- Evaporative Condenser Availability Schedule Name
, !- End -UseSubcategory
21.9 , !- Condenser Refrigerant Operating Charge {kg}
10. , !- Condensate Receiver Refrigerant Inventory
25. ; !- Condensate Piping Refrigerant Inventory
1.34.12.2 Outputs
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Fan Electric Power [W]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Basin Heater Electric Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Evaporated Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer Rate
[W]
• HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat
Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat Transfer
Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer Rate
[W]
• HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer Energy
[J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Pump Electric Power [W]
• HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Pump Electric Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Basin Heater Electric Power [W]
• HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Basin Heater Electric Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Evaporated Water Volume Flow Rate
[m3/s]
• HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Evaporated Water Volume [m3]
1.34.12.2.6 Refrigeration System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser refrigerant inlet flow for any purpose.
subkey category is also available, with default to the General end-use subcategory (Ref. Output:Meter
objects).
1.34.12.2.19 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Fan Electric Power [W]
This output is the electric input to the system’s condenser fan(s) in Watts.
1.34.12.2.20 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Fan Electric Energy [J]
This is the electricity consumption of the system’s condenser fan(s) in Joules for the timestep being
reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key =
Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).
1.34.12.2.21 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This is the total heat transfer across the condenser (i.e., compressor energy and refrigeration loads) in
Watts.
1.34.12.2.22 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total heat energy flowing across the condenser for the timestep being reported.
1.34.12.2.23 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Trans-
fer Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser refrigerant inlet flow for any purpose.
1.34.12.2.24 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Trans-
fer Energy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser refrigerant inlet flow for any purpose for the timestep
being reported.
1.34.12.2.29 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Pump Electric Power [W]
This is the electrical power requirement in Watts for the timestep being reported for the water pump
used with evaporative cooling of the condenser.
1.34.12.2.30 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Pump Electric Energy [J]
This is the electricity consumption in Joules of the water pump used with evaporative cooling of the
condenser for the timestep being reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type =
Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant. Use of an optional subkey category is also
available, with default to the General end-use subcategory (Ref. Output:Meter objects).
1.34.12.2.31 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Basin Heater Electric Power
[W]
This is the electrical power requirement in Watts for the timestep being reported for the water heater
in the basin of the evaporative system used to cool the condenser.
1.34.12.2.32 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Basin Heater Electric En-
ergy [J]
This is the electricity consumption in Joules of the water heater used to prevent freezing of the evapora-
tive cooling system for the condenser for the timestep being reported. This output is also added to a meter
with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant. Use of an optional
subkey category is also available, with default to the General end-use subcategory (Ref. Output:Meter
objects).
Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant. Use of an optional subkey category is also available, with
default to the General end-use subcategory (Ref. Output:Meter objects).
1.34.13 Refrigeration:Condenser:WaterCooled
The refrigeration system requires a single condenser. The water cooled condenser object is one of four
options for this condenser. Manufacturer’s data is required for the rated total heat rejection, the rated
condensing temperature, and the rated leaving liquid refrigerant temperature, all per ARI 450. These
values are used to calculate the subcooling included in the rated capacity. The inlet and outlet node names
as well as the water outlet temperature schedule name are required. Optional input is provided to help
the user compare refrigerant inventories for different systems. These input represent the design values for
the refrigerant inventory within the condenser, within a receiver beneath the condenser, and in the liquid
pipes between the condenser and the refrigerated cases.
1.34.13.1 Inputs
1.34.13.1.1 Field: Name
Identifies a particular condenser that rejects heat for one or more refrigeration system(s). The name
must be unique and will be validated against all the condenser names (ref: Refrigeration:Condenser) in
the input file, including names used for air-cooled, evaporative-cooled, and cascade-cooled condensers.
Refrigeration:Condenser:WaterCooled ,
MediumTempCondenser , !- Name
58000. , !- Rated Effective Total Heat Rejection Rate {W}
29.4 , !- Rated Condensing Temperature {C}
0.0 , !- Rated Subcooling Temperature Difference{deltaC}
10.0, !- Rated Water Inlet Temperature {C}
Condenser Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser Outlet Node , !- Water - Outlet Node Name
Variable Flow , !- Water -cooled Loop Flow Type
Cond Outlet Temp Sch , !- Water Outlet Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Water Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.003 , !- Water Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s}
55., !- Maximum Water Outlet Temperature {C}
, !- Minimum Water Inlet Temperature {C}
, !- End -Use Subcategory
30. , !- Condenser Refrigerant Operating Charge {kg}
65. , !- Condensate Receiver Refrigerant Inventory {kg}
20. ; !- Condensate Piping Refrigerant Inventory {kg}
1.34.13.2 Outputs
FOR CONDENSERS COOLING SYSTEMS SERVING CASES AND/OR WALKINS:
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer Rate [W] Zone, Sum,
Refrigeration System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Recovered for Non-Refrigeration Purposes Energy
[J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer Rate [W]
HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat
Transfer Rate [W]
1570 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
• HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat Transfer
Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer Rate
[W]
• HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer Energy
[J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Fluid Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
1.34.13.2.4 Refrigeration System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser refrigerant inlet flow for any purpose.
1.34.13.2.12 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This is the total heat transfer across the condenser (i.e., compressor energy and refrigeration loads) in
Watts.
1.34.13.2.13 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total heat energy flowing across the condenser for the timestep being reported.
1.34.13.2.14 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Trans-
fer Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser refrigerant inlet flow for any purpose.
1.34.13.2.15 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Trans-
fer Energy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser refrigerant inlet flow for any purpose for the timestep
being reported.
1.34.13.2.19 Refrigeration Chiller System Condenser Heat Energy Recovered for Re-
frigeration Defrost Energy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for defrost purposes within the refrigeration
system for the timestep being reported.
1.34.13.2.20 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Fluid Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This is the mass flow rate of the water used to cool the condenser in kg/s.
1572 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.34.14 Refrigeration:Condenser:Cascade
The refrigeration system requires a single condenser. The cascade condenser object is one of four options
for this condenser. The cascade condenser is unlike the other condenser options because it rejects heat to
another, higher-temperature, refrigeration system. That is, the cascade condenser acts as a heat rejection
object for one system, but acts as a refrigeration load for another system. Therefore, this object will be
referenced twice: first for the system rejecting heat (see the field Refrigeration Condenser Name for the
object Refrigeration:System), and second for the system absorbing the heat (see the input for the field
Refrigeration Transfer Load or TransferLoad List Name for the object Refrigeration:System or the field
Cascade Condenser Name or Secondary System Name for the object Refrigeration:TransferLoadList).
Manufacturer’s data is required for the rated condensing temperature and the rated approach tem-
perature difference. The user must also specify the condensing temperature control type. There are
two choices. The user can specify “Fixed” and the condensing temperature will be held constant at the
input value. The user can specify “Float” if they want the condensing temperature to be set by other
refrigeration loads served by the higher-temperature system.
The rated heat rejection capacity is not used except as a rough input value check on the overall
system sizing. Optional input is provided to help the user compare refrigerant inventories for different
systems. These inputs represent the design values for the refrigerant inventory within the condenser,
within a receiver beneath the condenser, and in the liquid pipes between the condenser and the refrigerated
cases.
1.34.14.1 Inputs
1.34.14.1.1 Field: Name
Identifies a particular condenser that rejects heat for a single refrigeration system. The name must be
unique and will be validated against all the condenser names (ref: Refrigeration:Condenser:*) in the input
file, including names used for air-cooled, evaporative-cooled, and water-cooled condensers.
Refrigeration:Condenser:Cascade ,
CascadeCondenser1 , !- Name
-4. , !- Rated Condensing Temperature {C}
3. , !- Rated Approach Temperature Difference {DeltaC}
20000.0 , !- Rated Effective Total Heat Rejection Rate {W}
Fixed; !- Condensing Temperature Control Type
1.34.14.2 Outputs
FOR CONDENSERS COOLING SYSTEMS SERVING CASES AND/OR WALKINS:
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]
1.34.14.2.5 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This is the total heat transfer across the condenser (i.e., compressor energy and refrigeration loads) in
Watts.
1574 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.34.14.2.6 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total heat energy flowing across the condenser for the timestep being reported.
1.34.15 Refrigeration:GasCooler:AirCooled
The transcritical refrigeration system requires a single gas cooler to reject the system heat. The total heat
of rejection is characterized by a linear relationship between the difference between the outside dry-bulb
and gas cooler outlet temperatures. The rated gas cooler fan power and fan speed control type must
be specified. If the gas cooler is not at ground level, the user may specify an air inlet node name (Ref.
OutdoorAir:Node name). Optional input is provided to help the user track refrigerant inventories. These
inputs represent the design values for the refrigerant inventory within the gas cooler, within a receiver, and
in the liquid pipes between the gas cooler and the refrigerated cases.
1.34.15.1 Inputs
1.34.15.1.1 Field: Name
Identifies a particular gas cooler that rejects heat for a single refrigeration system. The name must be
unique and will be validated against all the gas cooler names (Ref. Refrigeration:GasCooler:AirCooled) in
the input file.
Refrigeration:GasCooler:AirCooled ,
RefrigGasCooler , !- Name
GasCoolerHRCurve , !- Rated Total Heat Rejection Rate Curve Name
Fixed , !- Gas Cooler Fan Speed Control Type
6400, !- Rated Fan Power
0.2, !- Minimum Fan Air Flow Ratio
27.0, !- Transition Temperature
3.0, !- Transcritical Approach Temperature
10.0, !- Subcritical Temperature Difference
10.0, !- Minimum Condensing Temperature
, !- Air Inlet Node Name
RefrigGasCooler , !- End -Use Subcategory
, !- Gas Cooler Refrigerant Operating Charge Inventory
, !- Gas Cooler Receiver Refrigerant Inventory
; !- Gas Cooler Outlet Piping Refrigerant Inventory
1576 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.34.15.2 Outputs
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Fan Electric Power [W]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Fan Electric Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Outlet Temperature [C]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Outlet Pressure [Pa]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer Rate
[W]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer Energy
[J]
1.34.15.2.1 Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate from the gas cooler in Watts, and includes compressor energy
and the refrigeration load.
1.34.15.2.2 Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This output is the total heat transferred from the gas cooler to the surroundings, in Joules, for the
timestep being reported.
1.34.15.2.3 Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Fan Electric Power [W]
This output is the electric input to the system’s gas cooler fan(s) in Watts.
1.34.15.2.4 Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Fan Electric Energy [J]
This is the electricity consumption of the system’s gas cooler fan(s) in Joules for the timestep being
reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key =
Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).
1.34.16 Refrigeration:TransferLoadList
A refrigeration system may provide cooling to other, secondary, systems through either a secondary loop
or a cascade condenser (Ref. Refrigeration:SecondarySystem and Refrigeration:Condenser:Cascade). If
multiple transfer loads are served by a single primary system, use this list to group them together for
reference by the primary system (see the field “Refrigeration Transfer Load or TransferLoad List Name”
in the Refrigeration:System object).
1.34.16.1 Inputs
1.34.16.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a refrigeration transfer load list. Any reference to this
list by another object will use this name. In particular, the primary refrigeration system absorbing the
heat from all the loads listed here will use this name to reference those loads.
Refrigeration:TransferLoadList ,
MedTempTransferLoads , !- Name
CascadeCondFrozen , !- Cascade Condenser Name or Secondary System Name
SecondLoopDairy; !- Cascade Condenser Name or Secondary System Name
1.34.17 Refrigeration:SecondarySystem
A refrigeration secondary system works in conjunction with refrigerated cases and walkins (Ref. Refriger-
ation:SecondarySystem, Refrigeration:CaseAndWalkInList, Refrigeration:Case, and Refrigeration:WalkIn)
to simulate the performance of a secondary loop supermarket refrigeration system. Heat from the re-
frigeration loads served by the secondary loop is absorbed by a primary refrigeration system (ref: Re-
frigeration:System). The SecondarySystem object simulates a heat exchanger that is an evaporator, or
refrigeration load, on the primary refrigeration system.
The inputs for the refrigeration secondary system object include a name, which is also referenced to
identify the load placed upon the primary refrigeration system. The inputs that describe the loads placed
upon the secondary loop include the name of a single refrigerated case, the name of a single walk-in cooler,
or a list of cases and walkin coolers. The circulating fluid type specifies whether or not the secondary
fluid remains in the liquid state throughout the loop (e.g., a glycol or brine solution) or undergoes a partial
phase change while serving the refrigeration loads (e.g., a CO2 liquid overfeed system). The circulating
fluid name must also be specified and must correspond to a name used to provide the fluid properties.
If the secondary fluid remains a liquid, the heat exchanger between the primary and secondary systems
functions as an evaporator on the primary side and chills the circulating fluid on the secondary side. Inputs
that describe the evaporator performance at rated conditions are used to calculate the heat exchanger
effectiveness. These values include the rated evaporator capacity (which can be specified in terms of
energy or fluid flow rate), the rated evaporating temperature, the rated approach temperature difference,
and the rated range temperature difference.
1578 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
If the secondary fluid undergoes a partial phase change, the heat exchanger between the primary and
secondary systems functions as an evaporator on the primary side and as a condenser on the secondary side.
The evaporator capacity, evaporating temperature, and approach temperature difference, all at full-load
design conditions, are input.
The balance of the secondary system object describes the pumping system. The pumping options
include a single constant speed pump, multiple constant speed pumps, or a variable frequency-drive
pump. The user can also keep track of distribution piping and receiver shell heat gains.
1.34.17.1 Inputs
1.34.17.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a refrigeration secondary system. Any reference to this
refrigeration secondary system by another object will use this name. In particular, the primary refrigeration
system absorbing the heat from this system will use this name to define that load.
systems and the default is 2.5. If Total Pump Flow Rate is also defined, the PhaseChange Circulating
Rate will only be used to check whether the two values are consistent.
Refrigeration:SecondarySystem ,
SecondaryMedLoop , !- Name
MedTempCaseList , !- Refrigerated Case or Walkin or CaseAndWalkInList Name
FluidAlwaysLiquid , !- Circulating Fluid Type
ProGly30Percent , !- Circulating Fluid Name
3.5E4 , !- Evaporator Capacity {W}
0.0021 , !- Evaporator Flow Rate for Secondary Fluid {M3/s}
-12.6, !- Evaporator Evaporating Temperature {C}
2.7, !- Evaporator Approach Temperature Difference {DeltaC}
4., !- Evaporator Range Temperature Difference {DeltaC}
3, !- Number of Pumps in Loop
.0023 , !- Total Pump Flow Rate {M3/s}
, !- Total Pump Power {W}
2.09E5 , !- Total Pump Head {Pa}
, !- PhaseChange Circulating Rate
, !- Pump Drive Type
, !- Variable Speed Pump Cubic Curve Name
1.0, !- Pump Motor Heat to Fluid
21., !- Sum UA Distribution Piping {W/C}
SalesFloor , !- Distribution Piping Zone Name
, !- Sum UA Receiver/Separator Shell
, !- Receiver/Separator Zone Name
, !- Evaporator Refrigerant Inventory {kg}
; !- End -Use Subcategory
Refrigeration:SecondarySystem ,
SecondaryLowLoop , !- Name
LowTempCaseList , !- Refrigerated Case or Walkin or CaseAndWalkInList Name
FluidPhaseChange , !- Circulating Fluid Type
R744 , !- Circulating Fluid Name
, !- Evaporator Capacity {W}
, !- Evaporator Flow Rate for Secondary Fluid {M3/s}
-39.2, !- Evaporator Evaporating Temperature {C}
2., !- Evaporator Approach Temperature Difference {DeltaC}
, !- Evaporator Range Temperature Difference {DeltaC}
3, !- Number of Pumps in Loop
, !- Total Pump Flow Rate {M3/s}
, !- Total Pump Power {W}
2.09E5 , !- Total Pump Head {Pa}
2.5, !- PhaseChange Circulating Rate
Variable , !- Pump Drive Type
SecondaryVarSpeedPump , !- Variable Speed Pump Cubic Curve Name
1.0, !- Pump Motor Heat to Fluid
10.4, !- Sum UA Distribution Piping {W/C}
SalesFloor , !- Distribution Piping Zone Name
1.4, !- Sum UA Receiver/Separator Shell
BackRoom , !- Receiver/Separator Zone Name
1582 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.34.17.2 Outputs
FOR SECONDARY SYSTEMS SERVING CASES AND/OR WALKINS:
• HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Load Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Load Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Total Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Total Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Pipe Heat Gain Rate [W]
• HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Pipe Heat Gain Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Receiver Heat Gain Rate [W]
• HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Receiver Heat Gain Energy [J]
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1583
This output is the sum of the input inventory values for the cases and walkins and the refrigerant
circulating through the loop.
1.34.17.2.15 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Pump Electric Power [W]
This output is the total electric power input to the pump(s) in Watts.
1.34.17.2.16 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Pump Electric Energy [J]
This is the electricity consumption of the system’s pump(s) in Joules for the timestep being reported.
This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration,
Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).
1.34.17.2.17 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Load Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This is the amount of refrigeration provided to the air chillers served by the secondary loop in W.
1.34.17.2.18 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Load Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This is the amount of refrigeration provided to the air chillers served by the secondary loop in Joules
for the timestep being reported.
1.34.17.2.19 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Total Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This is the total amount of refrigeration load placed upon the primary refrigeration system (including
loads due to the air chillers plus the loads from the secondary loop pumps and any energy absorbed by the
loop via pipe heat gains) in W.
1.34.17.2.20 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Total Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total amount of energy placed upon the primary refrigeration system by the secondary loop
in Joules for the timestep being reported.
1.34.17.2.22 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Volume Flow Rate [m3/]s
This output is the calculated volume flow of coolant through the pumps for this secondary loop.
1.34.17.2.23 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Pipe Heat Gain Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transferred to the pipes in Watts.
1.34.17.2.24 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Pipe Heat Gain Energy [J]
This is the total heat transferred to the pipes in Joules for the timestep being reported.
1.34.17.2.25 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Receiver Heat Gain Rate [W]
1.34.17.2.26 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Receiver Heat Gain Energy [J]
This is the total heat transferred to the receiver in Joules for the timestep being reported.
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Latent Cooling Rate [W]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Latent Cooling Energy [J]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Cooling Energy [J]
• Zone,Average, Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Heat Transfer Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Sensible Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Sensible Heat Transfer Energy [J]
1.34.19.3 Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Latent Cooling Rate [W]
This output is the total latent heat transfer between all refrigeration objects located in the zone in Watts.
A negative value will be reported when the refrigeration equipment provides dehumidification (thereby
reducing the zone latent load).
Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Latent Cooling Energy [J]
This is the total latent heat transfer between all refrigeration objects located in the zone in Joules
for for the timestep being reported. A negative value will be reported when the refrigeration equipment
provides dehumidification (thereby reducing the zone latent load).
1.34.19.4 Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer (sensible plus latent) between all refrigeration objects located in the
zone in Watts. A negative value will be reported when the refrigeration objects cool (that is, remove heat
from) the zone.
Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total heat transfer (sensible plus latent) between all refrigeration objects located in the zone
in Joules for for the timestep being reported. A negative value will be reported when the refrigeration
objects cool (that is, remove heat from) the zone.
1.34.19.5 Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
This output is the total sensible cooling from all refrigeration objects located in the zone in Watts.
Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
This is the total sensible cooling from all refrigeration objects located in the zone in Joules for for the
timestep being reported.
1.34.19.7 Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Cooling Rate [W]
This output is the total cooling (sensible plus latent) from all refrigeration objects located in the zone in
Watts.
Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Cooling Energy [J]
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1587
This is the total cooling (sensible plus latent) from all refrigeration objects located in the zone in Joules
for for the timestep being reported.
1.34.19.11 Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Sensible Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This output is the total sensible heat transfer from all air chillers located in the zone in Watts. A negative
value will be reported when the refrigeration objects cool (that is, remove heat from) the zone.
1.34.19.12 Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Sensible Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total sensible heat transfer from all air chillers located in the zone in Joules for for the timestep
being reported. A negative value will be reported when the refrigeration objects cool (that is, remove heat
from) the zone.
1.34.19.14 Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Water Removed Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This is the total amount of water removed by all air chillers located in the zone in kg/s for for the timestep
being reported.
1.34.20 Refrigeration:AirChiller
The Refrigeration:AirChiller object works in conjunction with a refrigeration chiller set, compressor rack,
a refrigeration system, or a refrigeration secondary system object (Ref. ZoneHvac:RefrigerationChillerSet,
and a Refrigeration:CompressorRack, Refrigeration:System, or Refrigeration:SecondarySystem) to simulate
the performance of an air chiller, similar to one found in a refrigerated warehouse. The air chiller model
uses information at rated conditions along with the zone conditions to determine performance. Energy
use for fans and heaters is modeled based on inputs for nominal power, schedules, and control type.
The refrigeration chiller model accounts for the sensible and latent heat exchange with the surrounding
environment.
The refrigeration chiller cooler object inputs include a name, an availability schedule name, the rated
cooling capacity, the rated operating temperature, the rated cooling source temperature, the rated total
heating power and heating power schedule, the rated fan power and schedules, defrost type, defrost control
type, defrost schedule name, drip-down schedule name, defrost power, the portion of the defrost energy
used to melt ice (only for temperature termination control type), and refrigerant inventory.
Chiller coils are rated under multiple conventions. Each rating is typically based upon a selected
fin material and refrigerant cycle, with correction factors for other materials or refrigerants. Fields are
provided here for those correction factors. The performance of all chiller coils depends upon the inlet
air temperature, relative humidity, and flow rate. Multiple methods of expressing this relationship are
provided here to accommodate the way information is provided by different manufacturers.
1.34.20.1 Inputs
1.34.20.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a refrigeration chiller. Any reference to this refrigeration
chiller by another object will use this name.
coil capacity correction curve in tabular form using the Table:MultiVariableLookup object. An example of
this may be found in the RefrigeratedWarehouse.idf example file.
1.34.20.1.10 Field: Maximum Difference Between Inlet Air and Evaporating Temper-
ature
The maximum difference between the air entering the refrigeration chiller and the cooling source tem-
perature in °C used to limit capacity during pull-down. The default is 1.3 times the Rated Temperature
Difference DT1.
Refrigeration:AirChiller ,
Freezer_1AirChiller_1 , !- Name
AvailAllYear , !- Availability Schedule Name
UnitLoadFactorSensibleOnly , !- Capacity Rating Type
10900. , !- Rated Unit Load Factor {W/deltaC}
, !- Rated Capacity {W}
, !- Rated Relative Humidity
-26., !- Rated Cooling Source Temperature {C}
8., !- Rated Temperature Difference DT1 {DeltaC}
11., !- Maximum Temperature Difference DT1 {DeltaC}
, !- Material Correction Factor
, !- Refrigerant Correction Factor
LinearSHR60 , !- Capacity Correction Curve Type
, !- Capacity Correction Curve Name
1.5, !- SHR60 Correction Factor {dimensionless}
200., !- Rated Total Heating Power {W}
AirChillerDripDownSched1 , !- Heating Power Schedule Name
, !- Fan Speed Control Type
375., !- Rated Fan Power {W}
12.4, !- Rated Air Flow {m3/s}
, !- Minimum Fan Air Flow Ratio
Electric , !- Defrost Type
TimeSchedule , !- Defrost Control Type
AirChillerDefrostSched1 , !- Defrost Schedule Name
AirChillerDripDownSched1 , !- Defrost Drip -Down Schedule Name
55066. , !- Defrost Power {W}
, !- Temperature Termination Defrost Fraction to Ice
, !- Vertical Location
; !- Average Refrigerant Charge Inventory {kg}
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1593
Refrigeration:AirChiller ,
Freezer_1AirChiller_1 , !- Name
AvailAllYear , !- Availability Schedule Name
UnitLoadFactorSensibleOnly , !- Capacity Rating Type
10900. , !- Rated Unit Load Factor {W/deltaC}
, !- Rated Capacity {W}
, !- Rated Relative Humidity
-26., !- Rated Cooling Source Temperature {C}
8., !- Rated Temperature Difference DT1 {DeltaC}
11., !- Maximum Temperature Difference DT1 {DeltaC}
, !- Material Correction Factor
, !- Refrigerant Correction Factor
LinearSHR60 , !- Capacity Correction Curve Type
, !- Capacity Correction Curve Name
1.5, !- SHR60 Correction Factor {dimensionless}
200., !- Rated Total Heating Power {W}
AirChillerDripDownSched1 , !- Heating Power Schedule Name
, !- Fan Speed Control Type
375., !- Rated Fan Power {W}
12.4, !- Rated Air Flow {m3/s}
, !- Minimum Fan Air Flow Ratio
Electric , !- Defrost Type
TimeSchedule , !- Defrost Control Type
AirChillerDefrostSched1 , !- Defrost Schedule Name
AirChillerDripDownSched1 , !- Defrost Drip -Down Schedule Name
55066. , !- Defrost Power {W}
, !- Temperature Termination Defrost Fraction to Ice
, !- Vertical Location
; !- Average Refrigerant Charge Inventory {kg}
1.34.20.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Total Cooling Rate [W]
• HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Water Removed Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
Report for each Zone exchanging energy with the Air Chiller
• HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Water Removed Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
1.34.20.2.4 Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Sensible Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This field is the sensible cooling rate of the Air Chiller evaporator coil in Watts.
1.34.20.2.6 Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Sensible Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This field is the sensible cooling of the Air Chiller evaporator coil in Joules over the timestep being
reported.
1.34.20.2.9 Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Water Removed Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This field is the latent cooling (dehumidification) of the Air Chiller evaporator coil in kilograms per
second over the timestep being reported.
1.34.20.2.20 Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Zone Total Cooling Rate [W]
This field is the rate of total cooling delivered to the zone in Watts. A positive value is reported when
the zone is cooled by the air chiller, otherwise a zero is reported.
1.34.20.2.21 Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Zone Total Cooling Energy [J]
This field is the amount of total cooling energy delivered to the zone in Joules. A positive value is
reported when the zone is cooled by the air chiller, otherwise a zero is reported.
1.34.20.2.22 Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Zone Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
This field is the rate of sensible cooling delivered to the zone in Watts. A positive value is reported
when the zone is cooled by the air chiller, otherwise a zero is reported.
1.34.20.2.23 Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Zone Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
This field is the amount of sensible cooling energy delivered to the zone in Joules. A positive value is
reported when the zone is cooled by the air chiller, otherwise a zero is reported.
1.34.20.2.29 Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Water Removed Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This field is the rate of latent cooling (dehumidification) delivered to the zone in kg/s. A negative
value (or zero) will be reported when the Air Chiller provides dehumidification (thereby reducing the zone
latent load).
Thermostat:StagedDualSetpoint - This thermostat control works alone with “Dual Setpoint” type
only. The object provides heating and cooling setpoints, throttling range and offsets, so that zone tempera-
ture setpoint used for system load calculation is adjusted by the setpoint and throttling range based on the
zone temperature at the previous time step. The stage number is determined by the temperature difference
between the setpoint and zone temperature at the previous time step, and offset values. If this object and
other zone control thermostat and humidistat are assigned to the same controlled zone, this object takes
precedence when the controlled zone is specified in the Controlling Zone or Thermostat Location field of
the AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir:MultiSpeed object.
1.35.1 ZoneControl:Thermostat
The thermostatic zone control object is used to control a zone to a specified temperature. ZoneCon-
trol:Thermostat references a control type schedule and one or more control type objects which in turn
reference one or more setpoint schedules. The example at the end of this section illustrates a complete
zone thermostat specification including the control type and setpoint schedules.
The control type schedule and the list of control type/name pairs are directly related. The schedule
defines the type of control that is to be used throughout the simulation. Valid Control Types are:
0 - Uncontrolled (No specification or default)
1 - Single Heating Setpoint
2 - Single Cooling SetPoint
3 - Single Heating/Cooling Setpoint
4 - Dual Setpoint (Heating and Cooling) with deadband
Thus, if the schedule referenced in the ZoneControl:Thermostat statement has a control type of 4 for a
particular time period, this indicates that during that time period “Dual Setpoint with deadband” control
is to be used. The specific “Dual Setpoint (Heating and Cooling) with deadband” control object to be
used is specified in the list of control type/name pairs. Then the specific control type objects reference
the thermostat setpoint temperature schedule to be used. Because only one control can be specified for
each control type in a ZoneControl:Thermostat statement, there are only four pairs possible in a particular
ZoneControl:Thermostat type/name list. This is because individual controls can be defined throughout
the simulation, thus giving the user a full range of flexibility. Since putting in the name of the control type
directly in the schedule would be very cumbersome, the control types are assigned a number which is used
in the schedule profile.
1.35.1.1 Inputs
1.35.1.1.1 Field: Name
Unique identifying name for the thermostat.
End If
Note that this option should be used in caution. Following recommendations may be used to input the
value of Temperature Difference Between Cutout And Setpoint:
1. The heating and cooling setpoints must be separated by at least 2 times the Temperature Difference
Between Cutout And Setpoint or there will be a fatal error.
2. The thermostat setpoint not met hours are incorrect with this option.
3. This option will cause excess operation of heat pump system supplemental heating coils.
ZoneControl:Thermostat ,
AllControlledZones Thermostat , !- Name
AllControlledZones , !- Zone Name
Zone Control Type Sched , !- Control Type Schedule Name
ThermostatSetpoint:SingleCooling , !- Control 1 Object Type
CoolingSetPoint , !- Control 1 Name
ThermostatSetpoint:SingleHeating , !- Control 2 Object Type
HeatingSetpoint , !- Control 2 Name
ThermostatSetpoint:DualSetpoint , !- Control 3 Object Type
DualSetPoint; !- Control 3 Name
A complete zone thermostat example showing this statement and all of the objects it must reference is:
! Control type objects these may be used in more than one zone
ThermostatSetpoint:SingleCooling ,
Cooling Setpoint with SB ,
Cooling Setpoints;
ThermostatSetpoint:SingleHeating ,
Heating Setpoint with SB ,
Heating Setpoints;
For: AllDays ,
Until: 7:00, 15.,
Until: 17:00 ,20. ,
Until: 24:00 ,15.;
1.35.1.2 Outputs
Outputs available from controlled zones. The “key” in the below is the Zone Name.
• HVAC,Average,Zone Predicted Sensible Load to Heating Setpoint Heat Transfer Rate [W]
• HVAC,Average,Zone Predicted Sensible Load to Cooling Setpoint Heat Transfer Rate [W]
1.35.1.2.1 Zone Predicted Sensible Load to Setpoint Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This is the predicted sensible load in W required to meet the current zone thermostat setpoint. A
positive value indicates a heating load, a negative value indicates a cooling load. This is calculated and
reported from the Predict step in the Zone Predictor-Corrector module. For nearly all equipment types, the
Predictor-Corrector evaluates the active heating and/or cooling setpoints, determines if the zone requires
heating or cooling or is in the deadband, and then passes this single load to the equipment. This value is
not multiplied by zone or group multipliers.
1602 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.35.1.2.2 Zone Predicted Sensible Load to Heating Setpoint Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This is the predicted sensible load in W required to meet the current zone thermostat heating setpoint.
A positive value indicates a heating load, a negative value indicates a cooling load. This is calculated and
reported from the Predict step in the Zone Predictor-Corrector module. This value is not multiplied by
zone or group multipliers.
1.35.1.2.3 Zone Predicted Sensible Load to Cooling Setpoint Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This is the predicted sensible load in W required to meet the current zone thermostat cooling setpoint.
A positive value indicates a heating load, a negative value indicates a cooling load. This is calculated and
reported from the Predict step in the Zone Predictor-Corrector module. This value is not multiplied by
zone or group multipliers.
1.35.1.2.9 Zone Heating Setpoint Not Met While Occupied Time [hr]
Hours when the zone temperature is lower than 0.2 (default) degrees C below the heating setpoint
and when people are present in the zone. To change the reporting range from 0.2 degrees C, see the
OutputControl:ReportingTolerances object.
1.35.1.2.11 Zone Cooling Setpoint Not Met While Occupied Time [hr]
Hours when the zone temperature is greater than 0.2 (default) degrees C above the cooling setpoint
and when people are present in the zone. To change the reporting range from 0.2 degrees C, see the
OutputControl:ReportingTolerances object.
1.35.1.2.13 Facility Heating Setpoint Not Met While Occupied Time [hr]
Hours when the zone temperature is lower than 0.2 (default) degrees C below the heating setpoint and
when people are present in any one or more zones. To change the reporting range from 0.2 degrees C, see
the OutputControl:ReportingTolerances object.
1.35.1.2.15 Facility Cooling Setpoint Not Met While Occupied Time [hr]
Hours when the zone temperature is greater than 0.2 (default) degrees C above the cooling setpoint
and when people are present in any one or more zones. To change the reporting range from 0.2 degrees C,
see the OutputControl:ReportingTolerances object.
the minimum system timestep the same length of time can also cause more oscillations. What amount of
oscillations is considered excessive is difficult to quantify. One approach is comparing the number of oscil-
lations to the case with 15 minute zone timesteps (4 per hour) and 1 minute minimum system timesteps.
Often this variable is used as an indicator of the validity of the results when trying to decrease the time
needed to perform the simulation.
1.35.3 ThermostatSetpoint:SingleHeating
This would be for a heating only thermostat. The setpoint can be scheduled and varied throughout the
simulation but only heating is allowed with this control type.
1.35.3.1 Inputs
1.35.3.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name for this control type.
1.35.4 ThermostatSetpoint:SingleCooling
This would be for a cooling only thermostat. The setpoint can be scheduled and varied throughout the
simulation but only cooling is allowed.
1.35.4.1 Inputs
1.35.4.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name for this control type.
1.35.5 ThermostatSetpoint:SingleHeatingOrCooling
This would be for heating and cooling thermostat but only heating or cooling can be scheduled at any
given time period. The setpoint can be scheduled and varied throughout the simulation for both heating
and cooling.
1.35. GROUP - ZONE CONTROLS - THERMOSTATS AND HUMIDISTATS 1605
1.35.5.1 Inputs
1.35.5.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name for this control type.
1.35.6 ThermostatSetpoint:DualSetpoint
This would be for heating and cooling thermostat where both a heating and cooling setpoint can be
scheduled for any given time period. The setpoint can be scheduled and varied throughout the simulation
for both heating and cooling.
1.35.6.1 Inputs
1.35.6.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name for this control type.
1.35.7 ZoneControl:Thermostat:OperativeTemperature
This object is used to modify the program’s behavior for ZoneControl:Thermostat objects. One input
object is used for each thermal zone to indicate if that zone’s thermostat control mode should be over-
ridden to effect operative temperature control rather than traditional air temperature control. Zone Con-
trol:Thermostatic and related setpoint objects also need to be included in the input file. When this object
is used, the zone can be controlled by a weighted mixture of radiant and air temperatures (rather than
just air temperatures).
When using this object, the setpoint temperature values (e.g. input in schedules named in Thermostat-
Setpoint:DualSetpoint objects) become targets for the desired operative temperatures. As of version 8.7
new options are added that allow automatically generating values for the setpoint temperature, as a func-
tion of outdoor air temperatures, using various adaptive comfort models based on ASHRAE Standard
55-2010 and CEN 15251-2007. The adaptive comfort model relates the zone operative temperature set-
point to the recent history of the outdoor air temperatures. The adaptive comfort models only apply to
cooling mode and generate a single setpoint value for each day. During summer time in hot climates,
the zone thermostat setting can be higher than the traditional thermostat setting based on the adaptive
thermal comfort model, which results in energy savings of HVAC systems.
This thermostatic operative temperature, TOP , is defined as:
1606 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
When the adaptive comfort model is selected, the thermostat setpoint temperature schedule for space
cooling will be overwritten with the calculated operative temperature based on the selected acceptability
limits of the comfort model defined in ASHRAE 55-2010 or CEN 15251-2007. The ASHRAE adaptive
comfort model is only applicable when the running average outdoor air temperature for the past 30 days
is between 10.0 and 33.5°C; while the CEN 15251-2007 adaptive comfort model is only applicable when
the running average outdoor air temperature for the past 7 days is between 10.0 and 30.0°C. The user can
choose whether to overwrite the cooling setpoint temperature only when the adaptive setpoint is higher
than the user input one for the purpose of energy saving.
Reference:
• Niu and J. Burnett. 1998. Integrating Radiant/Operative Temperature Controls into Building
Energy Simulations. ASHRAE Transactions Vol. 104. Part 2. page 210. ASHRAE. Atlanta, GA.
• ASHRAE Standard 55-2010. Thermal environment conditions for human occupancy. ASHRAE,
Atlanta.
1.35.7.1 Inputs
1.35.7.1.1 Field: Thermostat Name
Name of ZoneControl:Thermostat object defined elsewhere in the input file whose operation is to be
modified to effect control based on operative temperature. If the ZoneControl:Thermostat references a
ZoneList (set of zones) then, this operative temperature thermostat will be applied to each of those zones.
If only a single thermostat/zone is desired, then the name to be put here is <zone name> <Thermostat
Name> where the Thermostat name is the thermostat that referenced the set of zones.
ZoneControl:Thermostat ,
AllControlledZones Thermostat , !- Name
AllControlledZones , !- Zone Name
Zone Control Type Sched , !- Control Type Schedule Name
1608 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
ZoneControl:Thermostat:OperativeTemperature ,
AllControlledZones Thermostat , !- Thermostat Name
CONSTANT , !- Radiative Fraction Input Mode
0.4; !- Fixed Radiative Fraction
ZoneControl:Thermostat ,
AllControlledZones Thermostat , !- Name
AllControlledZones , !- Zone Name
Zone Control Type Sched , !- Control Type Schedule Name
ThermostatSetpoint:SingleCooling , !- Control 1 Object Type
CoolingSetPoint , !- Control 1 Name
ThermostatSetpoint:SingleHeating , !- Control 2 Object Type
HeatingSetpoint , !- Control 2 Name
ThermostatSetpoint:DualSetpoint , !- Control 3 Object Type
DualSetPoint; !- Control 3 Name
ZoneControl:Thermostat:OperativeTemperature ,
SPACE3 -1 AllControlledZones Thermostat , !- Thermostat Name
CONSTANT , !- Radiative Fraction Input Mode
0.4; !- Fixed Radiative Fraction
1.35.7.2 Outputs
• Zone,Average,Zone Thermostat Operative Temperature [C]
1.35.8 ZoneControl:Thermostat:TemperatureAndHumidity
This object is used to modify the behavior of ZoneControl:Thermostat objects (control types Thermostat-
Setpoint:SingleCooling and ThermostatSetpoint:DualSetpoint only) based on zone air humidity conditions.
Specifically, this TemperatureAndHumidity zone control resets the ZoneControl:Thermostat s cooling set-
point temperature downward when the zone air relative humidity exceeds the Dehumidifying Relative
Humidity Setpoint defined in this object. The reduced cooling setpoint temperature typically results in
longer cooling coil runtimes and additional dehumidification. The rate at which the cooling setpoint tem-
perature is reduced is dictated by the user-specified Overcool Control Ratio. The maximum reduction
in cooling setpoint temperature is defined by the user-entered OverCool Range (user choice of a constant
value for the entire simulation or a schedule that can define how the overcool range varies over time). For
details regarding the calculations, see the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference.
Note: As described above, this ZoneControl:Thermostat:TemperatureAndHumidity control ob-
ject modifies the cooling setpoint temperature of ZoneControl:Thermostat objects. The ZoneCon-
trol:Thermostat:TemperatureAndHumidity object works independently of the ZoneControl:Humidistat
1.35. GROUP - ZONE CONTROLS - THERMOSTATS AND HUMIDISTATS 1609
object; that is, it does not replace the need for, or coordinate its input fields with, ZoneControl:Humidistat
objects that are required for other types of high humidity control (e.g., ZoneControl:Humidstat objects
are required for ZoneHVAC:Dehumidifier:DX objects, AirLoopHVAC:Unitary* objects with CoolReheat
or MultiMode dehumidification control types, etc.)
1.35.8.1 Inputs
1.35.8.1.1 Field: Thermostat Name
Name of ZoneControl:Thermostat object defined elsewhere in the input file whose operation
is to be modified to effect temperature control based on zone air humidity conditions. If the
ZoneControl:Thermostat references a ZoneList (set of zones), then simply enter the name of the
ZoneControl:Thermostat object and this TemperatureAndHumidity thermostat control will be applied
to all zones in the ZoneList. If the ZoneControl:Thermostat references a ZoneList but it is desired that
only a single zone within the ZoneList be controlled based on TemperatureAndHumidity control, then the
name to be put here is <zone name> <Thermostat Name> where the Thermostat Name is the name of
the ZoneControl:Thermostat object.
ZoneControl:Thermostat:TemperatureAndHumidity ,
Zone Thermostat , !- Thermostat Name
Seasonal Relative Humidity Sch , !- Dehumidifying Relative Humidity Setpoint Schedule Name
Overcool , !- Dehumidification Control Type
Constant , !- Overcool Range Input Method
1.7, !- Overcool Constant Range {deltaC}
, !- Overcool Range Schedule Name
3.0; !- Overcool Control Ratio {percent/K}
1.35.9 ZoneControl:Thermostat:StagedDualSetpoint
The thermostatic zone control staged dual setpoint object is used to control a zone to a specified tempera-
ture based on multiple stages. The other types of ZoneControl:Thermostat objects reference a control type
schedule and one or more control type objects which in turn reference one or more setpoint schedules. This
control object does not require a control type schedule and associated one or more control type objects.
Instead, the object is defined as a Dual Setpoint type only and has two fields to provide heating and cooling
setpoints. The object also provides two fields to specify heating and cooling throttling temperature ranges,
so that predicted zone loads may be varied within the throttling ranges for both heating and cooling. The
number of stages for both heating and cooling varies from 1 to 4 for the time being to match the number of
speeds used in the AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir:MultiSpeed object. The number of stages
may be expanded later to accommodate other objects with the number of speeds higher than 4. The object
requires inputs temperature offsets for both heating and cooling based on the number of stages. The stage
number is determined by the temperature difference between the setpoint and zone temperature at the
previous time step, and offset values. The staged number will be assigned to the speed number for the
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir:MultiSpeed system type.
It should be pointed out that If this object and other zone control thermostat and hu-
midistat are assigned to the same controlled zone, this object takes precedence when the con-
trolled zone is specified in the Controlling Zone or Thermostat Location field of the AirLoopH-
VAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir:MultiSpeed object.
1.35. GROUP - ZONE CONTROLS - THERMOSTATS AND HUMIDISTATS 1611
1.35.9.1 Inputs
1.35.9.1.1 Field: Name
Unique identifying name for the staged dual-setpoint thermostat.
Offset. The heating temperature offset fields are used to determine the heating stage number for Air-
LoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir:MultiSpeed object. When the temperature difference between
the heating setpoint and the controlled zone temperature at previous time step is less than Stage 3 off-
set value and greater than Stage 4 offset value, the heating stage number is 3. When the AirLoopH-
VAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir:MultiSpeed object is called, Speed 3 is specified.
Note: If the stage number is not equal to the number of heating speed in the AirLoopH-
VAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir:MultiSpeed object, the minimum value is set to the speed number for
the heat pump object.
ZoneControl:Thermostat:StagedDualSetpoint ,
ZoneThermostat , !- Name
AllZones , !- Zone or ZoneList Name
2, !- Number of Heating Stages
Heating Setpoints , !- Heating Temperature Setpoint Schedule Name
1.1, !- Heating Throttling Temperature Range {deltaC}
0.0, !- Stage 1 Heating Temperature Offset {deltaC}
-0.5, !- Stage 2 Heating Temperature Offset {deltaC}
-1.0, !- Stage 3 Heating Temperature Offset {deltaC}
-1.5, !- Stage 4 Heating Temperature Offset {deltaC}
4, !- Number of Cooling Stages
Cooling Setpoints , !- Cooling Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name
1.1, !- Cooling Throttling Temperature Range {deltaC}
0.0, !- Stage 1 Cooling Temperature Offset {deltaC}
1.0, !- Stage 2 Cooling Temperature Offset {deltaC}
2.0, !- Stage 3 Cooling Temperature Offset {deltaC}
3.0; !- Stage 4 Cooling Temperature Offset {deltaC}
1614 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.35.10 ZoneControl:Humidistat
The humidistat zone control object is used to control a zone to a single relative humidity setpoint schedule,
or to dual humidity setpoint schedules (humidifying/ dehumidifying setpoints with deadband). The single
setpoint humidistat requires single setpoint input only, and the dual-setpoint humidistat requires inputs
of both humidifying and dehumidifying setpoints. The schedules consist of relative humidities, expressed
as a percentage (0-100), to be used during the simulation for that zone s moisture prediction calculation.
Only one humidistat control statement can be specified for each zone. For a single setpoint humidistat,
if the zone relative humidity is below the control relative humidity setpoint and the equipment specified
can humidify then that equipment will try and meet the zone s humidification load. The opposite is
true if the zone relative humidity is above the control relative humidity setpoint and the equipment can
dehumidify. For a dual setpoint humidistat, if the zone relative humidity is below the humidifying relative
humidity setpoint and the equipment specified can humidify then that equipment will try and meet the
zone s humidification load. The opposite is true if the zone relative humidity is above the dehumidifying
relative humidity setpoint and the equipment can dehumidify.
If the ZoneControl:Humidistat is used by a furnace or unitary system (Ref. Furnace and Unitary
Systems) no other objects are required. The signal from the humidistat is used directly by that compo-
nent. If the Zone Control:Humidistat object is used to control a Humidifier or used in conjunction with a
Controller:WaterCoil object with control variable TemperatureAndHumidityRatio or HumidityRa-
tio, the following objects are required to determine a setpoint for those components for a single setpoint
humidistat:
• SetpointManager:SingleZone:Humidity:Minimum
• SetpointManager:MultiZone:MinimumHumidity:Average
• SetpointManager:MultiZone:MaximumHumidity:Average
• SetpointManager:MultiZone:Humidity:Minimum
• SetpointManager:MultiZone:Humidity:Maximum
• SetpointManager:SingleZone:Humidity:Minimum
For a dual setpoint humidistat, both a maximum humidity setpoint manager object:
• SetpointManager:SingleZone:Humidity:Maximum
• SetpointManager:MultiZone:MaximumHumidity:Average
• SetpointManager:MultiZone:Humidity:Maximum
• SetpointManager:SingleZone:Humidity:Minimum
• SetpointManager:MultiZone:MinimumHumidity:Average
• SetpointManager:MultiZone:Humidity:Minimum
are required to determine the setpoints for the corresponding humidification and dehumidification
components.
1.35. GROUP - ZONE CONTROLS - THERMOSTATS AND HUMIDISTATS 1615
1.35.10.1 Inputs
1.35.10.1.1 Field: Name
Unique identifying name for the humidistat.
ZoneControl:Humidistat ,
Zone 2 Humidistat , !- Humidistat Name
EAST ZONE , !- Zone Name
Min Rel Hum Set Sch , !- Humidifying Relative Humidity Setpoint SCHEDULE Name
Max Rel Hum Set Sch; !- Dehumidifying Relative Humidity Setpoint SCHEDULE Name
Schedule:Compact ,
Min Rel Hum Set Sch , !- Name
Humidity , !- ScheduleType
Through: 12/31 , !- Complex Field \#1
For: AllDays , !- Complex Field \#2
Until: 24:00 , !- Complex Field \#3
30.0; !- Complex Field \#4
Schedule:Compact ,,
Max Rel Hum Set Sch , !- Name
Humidity , !- ScheduleType
Through: 12/31 , !- Complex Field \#1
For: AllDays , !- Complex Field \#2
Until: 24:00 , !- Complex Field \#3
55.0; !- Complex Field \#4
1.35.10.2 Outputs
Outputs available from the ZoneControl:Humidistat:
• HVAC,Average,Zone Predicted Moisture Load to Humidifying Setpoint Moisture Transfer Rate [kg-
Water/s]
1.35.11 ZoneControl:Thermostat:ThermalComfort
The thermal comfort zone control provides a method to control a zone to a dry-bulb temperature setpoint
based on a thermal comfort model (e.g. Fanger) and a user-specified thermal comfort setpoint schedule.
This object references a control type schedule and one or more thermal comfort control type objects
which in turn reference one or more setpoint schedules. The example at the end of this section illustrates
a complete zone thermal comfort control specification including the control type and setpoint schedules.
The control type schedule and the list of control type/name pairs are directly related. The schedule defines
the type of control that is to be used during for each hour. Valid Control Types are
0 - Uncontrolled (No thermal comfort control)
1 - Single Thermal Comfort Heating Setpoint:Fanger
2 - Single Thermal Comfort Cooling Setpoint:Fanger
3 - Single Thermal Comfort Heating Cooling Setpoint:Fanger
4 - Dual Thermal Comfort Setpoint with Deadband:Fanger
Thus, if the schedule referenced in the ZoneControl:Thermostat:ThermalComfort statement has a value
of 4 for a particular hour, this indicates that during that hour “Dual Thermal Comfort Setpoint with
Deadband:Fanger” is to be used. The specific “Dual Thermal Comfort Setpoint with Deadband:Fanger”
control object to be used is specified in the list of control type/name pairs. Then the specific control
type objects reference the thermal comfort control setpoint schedule to be used. Because only one control
can be specified for each control type in a ZoneControl:Thermostat:ThermalComfort statement, there are
only four pairs possible in a particular ZoneControl:Thermostat:ThermalComfort type/name list. This is
1.35. GROUP - ZONE CONTROLS - THERMOSTATS AND HUMIDISTATS 1617
because individual controls can be defined hourly, thus giving the user a full range of flexibility. Since
putting in the name of the control type directly in the schedule would be very cumbersome, the control
types are assigned a number which is used in the hourly schedule profile.
The ZoneControl:Thermostat:ThermalComfort object can be used alone, or with a ZoneCon-
trol:Thermostat object. When both control objects co-exist for a specific zone and the thermal comfort
control type value in the thermal comfort control type schedule is non-zero the thermal comfort object
will override the value from the zone thermostat object. If the thermal comfort control is specified as
Uncontrolled (thermal comfort control type value of 0) for a particular period, then control will revert to
thermostat control if specified. If the thermal comfort control is specified as Uncontrolled for a particular
period and thermostat control is not specified in the input, then conditions will float.
This object currently allows only Fanger comfort control (Ref. Thermal Comfort in Engineering Ref-
erence). It requires one or more people objects in a specific zone. It also requires inputs of Fields Activity
Level Schedule Name, Work Efficiency Schedule Name, Clothing Insulation Schedule Name and Air Velocity
Schedule Name in the people object(s). When thermal comfort control is used in a zone, the air velocity
entered in the Air Velocity Schedule (Ref. People) should be greater than or equal to 0.1 and less than or
equal to 0.5 m/s. A warning message will be issued if thermal comfort control is active and the air velocity
is outside this range.
This object reads input PMV values from a given PMV setpoint schedule to calculate a dry-bulb
temperature setpoint based on the selected thermal comfort model. The dry-bulb temperature setpoint
calculation uses zone air humidity ratio at the previous system timestep and surface temperatures at the
previous zone timestep, along with other conditions at the current timestep (e.g., activity level, clothing
level and air velocity from the PEOPLE object).
1.35.11.1 Inputs
1.35.11.1.1 Field: Name
Unique identifying name for this thermal comfort control object.
This field specifies the minimum dry-bulb temperature setpoint allowed for this zone. If the dry-bulb
temperature calculated by the thermal comfort setpoint model is below this value, then the temperature
setpoint will be set to this value. The default value is 0 ˚C.
1.35.11.1.8 Field Set (Thermal Comfort Control Object Type, Thermal Comfort Con-
trol Name)
Up to four pairs of Thermal Comfort Control Type and Thermal Comfort Control Type Name fields
may be listed to specify which thermal comfort control type objects are used for this zone. This list is not
order-dependent, and the position in this list has no impact on the control type schedule. In the control
type schedule, a value of 1 always means “Single Thermal Comfort Heating Setpoint:Fanger”, even if that
control type is not first in this list.
ZoneControl:Thermostat:ThermalComfort ,
Zone 2 Comfort Control , !- Thermal Comfort Control Name
EAST ZONE , !- Zone Name
SpecificObject , !- Averaging Method for Zones with Multiple People
Objects
EAST ZONE , !- Object Name for Specific Object Averaging
Method
1.35. GROUP - ZONE CONTROLS - THERMOSTATS AND HUMIDISTATS 1619
ZoneControl:Thermostat:ThermalComfort ,
ControlledZones Comfort Control , !- Name
AllControlledZones , !- Zone Name
PeopleAverage , !- Averaging Method
, !- Specific People Name
12.8, !- Minimum Dry -Bulb Temperature Setpoint {C}
40.0, !- Maximum Dry -Bulb Temperature Setpoint {C}
Zone Comfort Control Type Sched , !- Thermal Comfort Control Type Schedule Name
ThermostatSetpoint:ThermalComfort:Fanger:SingleHeating , !- Thermal Comfort Control 1 Object Type
Single Heating Comfort Setpoint , !- Thermal Comfort Control 1 Name
ThermostatSetpoint:ThermalComfort:Fanger:SingleCooling , !- Thermal Comfort Control 2 Object Type
Single Cooling Comfort Setpoint , !- Thermal Comfort Control 2 Name
ThermostatSetpoint:ThermalComfort:Fanger:SingleHeatingOrCooling , !- Thermal Comfort Control 3 Object
Type
Single Heating Cooling Comfort Setpoint , !- Thermal Comfort Control 3 Name
ThermostatSetpoint:ThermalComfort:Fanger:DualSetpoint , !- Thermal Comfort Control 4 Object Type
Dual Comfort Setpoint; !- Thermal Comfort Control 4 Name
1.35.11.2 Outputs
Three outputs are available from the ZoneControl:Thermostat:ThermalComfort object. Two output vari-
ables used primarily for the ZoneControl:Thermost object are also described here to explain their meaning
when using thermal comfort control.
ZoneControl:ThermalComfort
ZoneControl:Thermostat
1.35.13 ThermostatSetpoint:ThermalComfort:Fanger:SingleHeating
This would be used for heating only thermal comfort control. The PMV setpoint can be scheduled and
varied throughout the simulation but only heating is allowed with this control type.
1.35.13.1 Inputs
1.35.13.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name for this control type.
1.35. GROUP - ZONE CONTROLS - THERMOSTATS AND HUMIDISTATS 1621
1.35.14 ThermostatSetpoint:ThermalComfort:Fanger:SingleCooling
This would be used for cooling only thermal comfort control. The PMV setpoint can be scheduled and
varied throughout the simulation but only cooling is allowed with this control type.
1.35.14.1 Inputs
1.35.14.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name for this control type.
1.35.15 ThermostatSetpoint:ThermalComfort:Fanger:SingleHeatingOrCooling
This would be used for heating and cooling thermal comfort control but only heating or cooling can be
scheduled at any given time period. The PMV setpoint can be scheduled and varied throughout the
simulation for both heating and cooling.
1.35.15.1 Inputs
1.35.15.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name for this control type.
1.35.16 ThermostatSetpoint:ThermalComfort:Fanger:DualSetpoint
This would be used for heating and cooling thermal comfort control where both a heating and cooling
PMV setpoint can be scheduled for any given time period. The PMV setpoint can be scheduled and varied
throughout the simulation for both heating and cooling.
1.35.16.1 Inputs
1.35.16.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name for this control type.
ThermostatSetpoint :ThermalComfort:Fanger:SingleHeating ,
Heating Comfort Setpoint ,!- Name
Heating PMV Setpoints; !- Setpoint Temperature SCHEDULE Name
ThermostatSetpoint:ThermalComfort:Fanger:SingleCooling ,
Cooling Comfort Setpoint ,!- Name
Cooling PMV Setpoints; !- Setpoint Temperature SCHEDULE Name
ThermostatSetpoint:ThermalComfort:Fanger:SingleHeatingOrCooling ,
Heating Cooling Comfort Setpoint ,!- Name
Heating Cooling PMV Setpoints; !- Setpoint Temperature SCHEDULE Name
ThermostatSetpoint:ThermalComfort:Fanger:DualSetpoint ,
Dual Comfort Setpoint , !- Name
Heating PMV Setpoints , !- Fanger Thermal Comfort Heating Setpoint PMV SCHEDULE Name
Cooling PMV Setpoints; !- Fanger Thermal Comfort Cooling Setpoint PMV SCHEDULE Name
1.35.17 ZoneControl:ContaminantController
The ZoneControl:ContaminantController object is used for any of the following two purposes based on the
system outdoor air method specified in the Controller:MechanicalVentilation.
1) To control a zone to a specified indoor level of contaminants. When this zone is served by an
AirLoopHVAC, the other zones served by the same AirLoopHVAC will have the same specified in-
door level, if no objects in the other zones served by the same AirLoop are specified. Currently,
the available contaminant controls are carbon dioxide and generic contaminant controls. The spec-
ified carbon dioxide setpoint is used to calculate the required outdoor airflow rate through the
HVAC system to reach the setpoint. The AirLoopHVAC system outdoor flow rate is realized by the
Controller:MechanicalVentilation object with System Outdoor Air Method = IndoorAirQualityPro-
cedure.The specified generic contaminant setpoint is used to calculate the required outdoor airflow
rate through the HVAC system to reach the setpoint. The AirLoopHVAC system outdoor flow
rate is realized by the Controller:MechanicalVentilation object with System Outdoor Air Method =
IndoorAirQualityProcedure-GenericContaminant.
2) To specify minimum or maximum CO2 concentration schedule name for a zone. The AirLoopHVAC
system outdoor flow rate is realized by the Controller:MechanicalVentilation object with System
Outdoor Air Method = ProportionalControlBasedonOccupancySchedule or ProportionalControl-
BasedOnDesignOccupancy or ProportionalControlBasedOnDesignOARate. Carbon Dioxide Control
Availability Schedule Name determines the availability of ProportionalControl .
For the first purpose above, when multiple zones are served by an AirLoop, those zones that do not
have a contaminant controller object specified in the input data file are automatically assigned a carbon
dioxide setpoint. Zone objects entered in the input data file are internally assigned an index number from
1 to n (first defined Zone object = 1, next Zone object defined in the input file = 2, etc.). For zones served
by an AirLoop that do not have a contaminant controller specified, the zone s carbon dioxide setpoint
will be the same as the zone with the next highest zone index number that has a contaminant controller
specified. If a zone with a higher index number and contaminant controller specified does not exist, then
1.35. GROUP - ZONE CONTROLS - THERMOSTATS AND HUMIDISTATS 1623
the zone with the next lowest zone index number that has a contaminant controller specified will be used.
For example, assume an AirLoop serves zones 1 through 5, but one ZoneControl:ContaminantController
object is specified for zone 2, a second ZoneControl:ContaminantController object is specified for zone 4,
and no ZoneControl:ContaminantController objects are specified for zones 1, 3 and 5. In this case, zone 1
will be assigned the carbon dioxide setpoint schedule that was specified for zone 2, and zones 3 and 5 will
be assigned the carbon dioxide setpoint schedule that was specified for zone 4.
The ZoneControl:ContaminantController object is also used for any of the following two purposes based
on the outdoor air method specified in the DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir.
1) To control a zone to a specified indoor level of contaminants. When this zone is served by a dedicated
outdoor air system AirLoopHVAC through a terminal unit, some type of terminal units are able to
call a DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir object with Outdoor Air Method = IndoorAirQualityProce-
dure, so that the required outdoor airflow rate to reach the zone air setpoint can be assigned to the
terminal unit. The total outdoor air flow in the AirLoopHVAC is a sum of all terminal units. In this
way, each zone served by the same AirLoopHVAC can reach the zone air CO2 setpoint precisely.
2) To specify minimum CO2 concentration schedule name for a zone. When this zone is served by a dedi-
cated outdoor air system AirLoopHVAC through a terminal unit, some type of terminal units are able
to call a DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir object with Outdoor Air Method = ProportionalControl-
BasedonOccupancySchedule or ProportionalControlBasedOnDesignOccupancy. The outdoor airflow
rate is determined by one of proportional control procedures. Then, the calculated outdoor airflow
rate is assigned to the terminal unit. The total outdoor air flow in the AirLoopHVAC is a sum of all
terminal units. In this way, each zone served by the same AirLoopHVAC will receive the outdoor
airflow rate based on terminal unit request.
1.35.17.1 Inputs
1.35.17.1.1 Field: Name
Unique identifying name for the ZoneControl:ContaminantController.
ZoneControl:ContaminantController ,
CO2 Controller1 , !- Name
EAST ZONE , !- Zone Name
CO2AvailSchedule , !- Carbon Dioxide Control Availability Schedule Name
CO2SetpointSchedule , !- Carbon Dioxide Setpoint Schedule Name
, !- Minimum Carbon Dioxide Concentration Schedule Name
, !- Maximum Carbon Dioxide Concentration Schedule Name
GCAvailSchedule , !- Generic Contaminant Control Availability Schedule Name
GCSetpointSchedule; !- Generic Contaminant Setpoint Schedule Name
1.35.17.2 Outputs
The following output variables are available when the ZoneControl:ContaminantController object is spec-
ified.
• HVAC,Average,Zone Air CO2 Predicted Load to Setpoint Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• HVAC,Average,Zone Generic Air Contaminant Predicted Load to Setpoint Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
1.35.17.2.1 Zone Air CO2 Predicted Load to Setpoint Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output is the average predicted outdoor airflow rate in kg/s required to meet the current zone
carbon dioxide setpoint for the time step being reported. This value is calculated and reported from
the Predict step in the Zone Contaminant Predictor-Corrector module. The calculated outdoor airflow
rate will be specified in the Controller:MechanicalVentilation object with System Outdoor Air Method =
IndoorAirQualityProcedureto provide enough outdoor ventilation air to keep the zone air carbon dioxide
concentration level at or below the setpoint.
1.35.17.2.3 Zone Generic Air Contaminant Predicted Load to Setpoint Mass Flow
Rate [kg/s]
This output is the average predicted outdoor airflow rate in kg/s required to meet the current zone
generic contaminant setpoint for the time step being reported. This value is calculated and reported from
the Predict step in the Zone Contaminant Predictor-Corrector module. The calculated outdoor airflow
rate will be specified in the Controller:MechanicalVentilation object with System Outdoor Air Method =
IndoorAirQualityProcedure-GenericContaminant****to provide enough outdoor ventilation air to keep the
zone air generic contaminant concentration level at or below the setpoint.
in which the conditioned zones connect to the return plenum inlets and the return plenum s outlets connect
to a single AirLoopHVAC:ZoneMixer.
Both the zone supply and return plenums are solved in the heat balance as thermal zones which couple
through heat conduction with adjacent zones. Since they are solved as thermal zones the solution scheme
involves the zone predictor-corrector technique which will lag the temperature at the system timestep in
every zone. See Summary of Predictor-Corrector Procedure in the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference.
Below are the descriptions of the zone supply and return path statements. Note that each statement
type has an identifying name, a single inlet/outlet node name, and a list of component type/name pairs.
For a single zone being served by an air loop, the inlet to its air distribution unit and the zone return air
outlet can be the zone equipment inlet and outlet nodes directly, thus eliminating the need to specify an
AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPath and an AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPath.
1.36.2 AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPath
The AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPath lists one or more AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter and AirLoopH-
VAC:SupplyPlenum components comprising the path. The components are listed in flow order:
upstream to downstream and may be in series, parallel, or both. Connectivity is established by means of
the individual component inlet and outlet nodes.
1.36.2.1 Inputs
1.36.2.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name to identify the supply air path..
1.36.3 AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPath
The AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPath lists one or more AirLoopHVAC:ZoneMixer and AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPlenum
components comprising the path. The components are listed in flow order: upstream to downstream
and may be in series, parallel, or both. Connectivity is established by means of the individual
component inlet and outlet nodes. At this time there can only be 1 AirLoopHVAC:ZoneMixer in an
AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPath.
1.36. GROUP – AIR PATH 1627
1.36.3.1 Inputs
1.36.3.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name to identify the return air path.
AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPath ,
SupplyAirPath 1, !- Name
Zone Equip In Node , !- Supply Air Path Inlet Node Name
AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPlenum , !- Component 1 Object Type
Supply -Plenum -1, !- Component 1 Name
AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter , !- Component 2 Object Type
Zone Supply Air Splitter 1; !- Component 2 Name
AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPath ,
ReturnAirPath1 , !- Name
PLENUM -1 Out Node , !- Return Air Path Outlet Node Name
Zone Return Plenum , !- Component 1 Object Type
Return -Plenum -1; !- Component 1 Name
1.36.4 AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPlenum
The simple building shown in the figure below consists of a controlled zone and a return plenum zone
that is used for the return air. This simple configuration contains a ground floor controlled zone with a
window and a return plenum zone which handles the roof load. The return air plenum is a special type
of component since there is both a heat balance connection and building description and a system airflow
connection that transfers the airflow directly from the controlled zone to the return plenum zone in the
system air simulation. The input described in this section is mainly just for the system airflow connections
in the HVAC algorithms. In addition the return plenum zone must be fully input as a zone object for the
heat balance calculation. The zone description needs to contain the wall descriptions - the interzone ceiling
and floor, and for this simple case the roof. All the other attributes of a zone that can be specified in the
building description can be used with a return plenum zone if necessary: scheduled loads, windows, etc.
After all the building zone attributes are specified, the AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPlenum object is specified
and included as one of the named components in an AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPath.
1628 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.36.4.1 Inputs
1.36.4.1.1 Field: Name
A unique identifying name identifying the AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPlenum system component.
AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPlenum ,
Return -Plenum -1, !- Name
PLENUM -1, !- Zone Name
PLENUM -1 Node , !- Zone Node Name
PLENUM -1 Out Node , !- Outlet Node Name
PLENUM -1 Induced Air Nodes , !- Induced Air Outlet Node or NodeList Name
SPACE1 -1 Out Node , !- Inlet 1 Node Name
SPACE2 -1 Out Node , !- Inlet 2 Node Name
SPACE3 -1 Out Node , !- Inlet 3 Node Name
SPACE4 -1 Out Node , !- Inlet 4 Node Name
SPACE5 -1 Out Node; !- Inlet 5 Node Name
NodeList ,
PLENUM -1 Induced Air Nodes , !- Name
SPACE1 -1 ATU Sec Node , !- Node 1 Name
SPACE2 -1 ATU Sec Node , !- Node 2 Name
SPACE3 -1 ATU Sec Node , !- Node 3 Name
SPACE4 -1 ATU Sec Node; !- Node 4 Name
Below is an example of the AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPath for the simple case shown above.
AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPath ,
ReturnAirPath1 , !- Name
PLENUM -1 Out Node , !- Return Air Path Outlet Node Name
AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPlenum , !- Component 1 Object Type
Return -Plenum -1; !- Component 1 Name
1.36.5 AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPlenum
The building shown in the figure below consists of three controlled zones served by an AirLoopH-
VAC:SupplyPlenum beneath the floor.
The AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPlenum has a heat balance connection and building description, and a sys-
tem airflow connection which transfers the airflow from the supply plenum zone to the controlled zones in
the system simulation. The input described in this section is mainly just for the system airflow connections
in the HVAC algorithms. In addition the supply plenum zone must be fully input in the building zone
description. The supply plenum zone description needs to contain the wall descriptions, the interzone
ceiling and floor, and the ground connection. All the other attributes of a zone that can be specified in the
building description can be utilized with a supply plenum zone if necessary, i.e. scheduled loads, windows,
etc.
After all the building zone attributes are specified, the AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPlenum object is specified
and included as one of the named components in an AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPath.
1.36.5.1 Inputs
1.36.5.1.1 Field: Name
A unique identifying name identifying the AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPlenum system component.
The zone name specified in the heat balance portion of the input. This piece of input connects the
AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPlenum system component to the heat balance data structure.
AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPlenum ,
Supply Plenum 1, ! Name
SUPPLY PLENUM ZONE , ! Zone Name
Supply Plenum 1 Zone Node , ! Zone Node Name
Zone Equipment Inlet Node , ! Inlet Node Name
Supply Plenum 1 Outlet Node; ! Outlet 1 Node Name
AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPath ,
TermReheatSupplyPath , ! Name
Zone Equipment Inlet Node , ! Supply Air Path Inlet Node Name
AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPlenum , ! Component 1 Object Type
Supply Plenum 1, ! Component 1 Name
AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter , ! Component 2 Object Type
Zone Supply Air Splitter; ! Component 2 Name
1.36.6 AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter
The AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter is a component that splits airflow from a single inlet to multiple outlets.
This component must be referenced in an AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPath object. The input contains only node
connection information.
1.36.6.1 Inputs
1.36.6.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name for this zone splitter.
AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter ,
Zone Supply Air Splitter , ! Name
Zone Equipment Inlet Node , ! Inlet Node Name
Zone 1 Damper Inlet Node , ! Outlet 1 Node Name
Zone 2 Damper Inlet Node , ! Outlet 2 Node Name
Zone 3 Damper Inlet Node; ! Outlet 3 Node Name
1.36.7 AirLoopHVAC:ZoneMixer
The AirLoopHVAC:ZoneMixer takes the air from multiple inlets and mixes the streams together to be sent
out of a single outlet node. This is a simple process of summing flows and averaging the air properties. This
compoment may be part of an air loop return path or part of an induction terminal unit. When used as a
return air mixer, this component must be listed in an AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPath object, and the inlets may
be zone return air nodes or AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPlenum outlet nodes. When used in an induction termi-
nal unit (ref. AirTerminal:SingleDuct:SeriesPIU:Reheat, AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ParallelPIU:Reheat, and
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:FourPipeInduction), one inlet node is the supply (primary) air
inlet from the central air handler, and the second inlet node is the induced (secondary) air inlet. These
node names should match equivalent node names in the terminal unit.
1.36.7.1 Inputs
1.36.7.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name for this zone mixer.
AirLoopHVAC:ZoneMixer ,
Zone Return Air Mixer , ! Name
Return Air Mixer Outlet Node , ! Outlet Node Name
Zone 1 Outlet Node , ! Inlet 1 Node Name
Zone 2 Outlet Node , ! Inlet 2 Node Name
Zone 3 Outlet Node; ! Inlet 3 Node Name
non-zone equipment object called LoadProfile:Plant. This object places a scheduled demand load on the
plant.
Non-zone equipment allows the option of performing a plant-only EnergyPlus simulation, i.e. without
any zones. This can be useful for comparing the performance of various plant configurations or components
without the added complexity of a full building description.
1.37.1 LoadProfile:Plant
The LoadProfile:Plant object is used to simulate a scheduled demand profile. This can be useful when
the building loads are already known. Demanded load and flow rate are schedules specified in the object
definition. The load profile can specify heating and cooling loads. Cooling loads are entered as negative
numbers. The actual load met is dependent on the performance of the supply loop components.
The LoadProfile:Plant object must be connected on the demand side of the plant loop. It should be
located on a Branch with its control type set to Active. If desired, multiple LoadProfile:Plant objects can
be combined in series and/or parallel.
1.37.1.1 Inputs
1.37.1.1.1 Field: Name
The unique name of the LoadProfile:Plant object.
LoadProfile:Plant ,
Load Profile 1, !- Name
Demand Load Profile 1 Inlet Node , !- Inlet Node Name
Demand Load Profile 1 Outlet Node , !- Outlet Node Name
Load Profile 1 Load Schedule , !- Load Schedule Name {W}
0.003 , !- Peak Flow Rate {m3/s}
Load Profile 1 Flow Frac Schedule; !- Flow Rate Fraction Schedule Name
1634 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.37.1.2 Outputs
The following output variables and meters are reported for the LoadProfile:Plant object:
1.37.1.2.4 Plant Load Profile Cooling Energy [J]Plant Load Profile Heating Energy
[J]
These report the overall cooling or heating energy that the load profile object places on the plant loop,
in Joules.
The inlet and outlet node temperatures and mass flow rates can be monitored using the system node
output variables:
1.38.1 SolarCollector:FlatPlate:Water
The flat-plate solar collector model simulates glazed, unglazed, and tubular (i.e. evacuated tube) collec-
tors. The SolarCollector:FlatPlate:Water object represents a single collector module connected to the plant
loop. The thermal and optical properties of the collector module are taken from the referenced SolarCol-
lectorPerformance:FlatPlate object. A surface or shading object defines the collector tilt, azimuth, and
gross area. The collector surface participates normally in all shading calculations if the “FullExterior,”
“FullInteriorAndExterior,” FullExteriorWithReflections , or FullInteriorAndExteriorWithReflections flags
are set in the Solar Distribution field of the Building object. Inlet and outlet nodes are specified for plant
connections on the demand side of the plant loop.
1.38.1.1 Inputs
1.38.1.1.1 Field: Name
The unique name of the SolarCollector:FlatPlate:Water object.
SolarCollector:FlatPlate:Water ,
Collector 1, !- Name
ACR Solar International Fireball 2001, !- Solar Collector Performance Name
Collector Surface , !- Surface Name
Collector Inlet Node , !- Inlet Node Name
Collector Outlet Node , !- Outlet Node Name
0.00005; !- Maximum Flow Rate (m3/s)
1.38.1.2 Outputs
The following output variables are reported for the SolarCollector:FlatPlate:Water object:
• Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Solar Radiation Rate per Area [W/m2]
• Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate per Area [W/m2]
• Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per Area [W/m2]
• Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Ground Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per Area [W/m2]
The temperatures at the inlet and outlet nodes and the collector mass flow rate can be monitored using
the system node output variables:
1.38.2 SolarCollectorPerformance:FlatPlate
The SolarCollectorPerformance:FlatPlate object contains the thermal and optical performance parameters
for a single collector module. These parameters are based on the testing methodologies described in
ASHRAE Standards 93 and 96. The Solar Rating and Certification Corporation (SRCC) applies these
standards in their rating procedures of solar collectors. The ratings for commercially available collectors
in North America are published in the Directory of SRCC Certified Solar Collector Ratings. The SRCC
database has also been converted into an EnergyPlus data set of SolarCollectorPerformance:FlatPlate
objects that is included with the program (see SolarCollectors.idf in the DataSets folder).
The coefficients for the energy conversion efficiency and incident angle modifier allow first order (linear)
or second order (quadratic) correlations. To use a first order correlation, the second order coefficient must
be left blank or set to zero.
In order for the model to work correctly, the test conditions for which the performance coefficients were
measured must be specified in the fields: Test Fluid, Test Volumetric Flow Rate, and Test Correlation
Type. Currently, only water is allowed as the Test Fluid.
For more detailed information about the performance coefficients, see the EnergyPlus Engineering
Reference Document.
1.38.2.1 Inputs
1.38.2.1.1 Field: Name
The unique name of the SolarCollectorPerformance:FlatPlate object.
SolarCollectorPerformance :FlatPlate ,
Alternate Energy Technologies AE -32, !- Name
2.9646 , !- Gross Area {m2}
WATER , !- Test Fluid
0.0000388 , !- Test Flow Rate {m3/s}
INLET , !- Test Correlation Type
0.691 , !- Coefficient 1 of Efficiency Equation {dimensionless}
-3.396, !- Coefficient 2 of Efficiency Equation {W/m2 -K}
-0.00193 , !- Coefficient 3 of Efficiency Equation {W/m2 -K2}
-0.1939 , !- Coefficient 2 of Incident Angle Modifier
-0.0055; !- Coefficient 3 of Incident Angle Modifier
1.38.2.2 Outputs
This object does not generate any output; see SolarCollector:FlatPlate:Water Output
1.38.3 SolarCollector:IntegralCollectorStorage
The Integral-Collector-Storage (ICS) solar collector model simulates glazed collectors with integral storage
unit. The SolarCollector:IntegralCollectorStorage object represents a single collector module connected
to the plant loop. The thermal and optical properties of the collector module are calculated from in-
puts in SolarCollectorPerformance:IntegralCollectorStorage object. A surface or shading object defines
the collector tilt, and azimuth. The collector surface participates normally in all shading calculations
if the “FullExterior,” “FullInteriorAndExterior,” FullExteriorWithReflections , or FullInteriorAndExte-
riorWithReflections flags are set in the Solar Distribution field of the Building object. Inlet and out-
let nodes are specified for plant connections on the demand side of the plant loop. The SurfaceProp-
erty:ExteriorNaturalVentedCavity, object is required to describe the surface properties, the characteristics
of the cavity and opening for natural ventilation if OtherSideConditionsModel is specified as the collector
bottom surface outside boundary condition type.
1.38.3.1 Inputs
1.38.3.1.1 Field: Name
The unique name of the SolarCollector:IntegralCollectorStorage object.
SolarCollector:IntegralCollectorStorage ,
Collector 1, !- Name
ICS Solar Collector , !- Solar Collector Performance Name
ICS Collector Surface , !- Surface Name
OtherSideConditionsModel , !- Bottom Surface Boundary Conditions Type
ICS OSCM , !- Boundary Condition Model Name
Collector Inlet Node , !- Inlet Node Name
Collector Outlet Node , !- Outlet Node Name
0.00005; !- Maximum Flow Rate (m3/s)
1.38.4 SolarCollectorPerformance:IntegralCollectorStorage
The SolarCollectorPerformance:IntegralCollectorStorage object contains the thermal and optical perfor-
mance parameters for a single collector module. The transmittance-absorptance product of the absorber
and cover system is determined from optical properties specified. For more detailed information about the
calculation procedure, see the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference Document.
1.38.4.1 Inputs
1.38.4.1.1 Field: Name
The unique name of the SolarCollectorPerformance:IntegralCollectorStorage object.
1640 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
SolarCollectorPerformance :IntegralCollectorStorage ,
ICS Experimental , !- Name
RectangularTank , !- ICS Collector Type
0.37275 , !- Gross Area {m2}
0.0195875 , !- Collector Water Volume {m3}
0.10, !- Bottom Heat Loss Conductance
1.00, !- Side Heat Loss Conductance
0.8, !- Collector Aspect Ratio {dimensionless}
0.08, !- Collector Side Height {m}
5800.0 , !- Thermal Mass of Absorber Plate {J/m2K}
1, !- Number of Covers {dimensionless}
0.05, !- Cover Spacing {m}
1.526 , !- Refractive Index of Outer Cover {dimensionless}
0.0125 , !- Extinction Coefficient Times Thickness of Outer Cover {dimensionless}
0.88, !- Emissivity of Outer Cover
1.126 , !- Refractive Index of Inner Cover {dimensionless}
0.0126 , !- Extinction Coefficient Times Thickness of Inner Cover {dimensionless}
0.88, !- Emissivity of Inner Cover {dimensionless}
0.96, !- Absorptance of Absorber Plate {dimensionless}
0.60; !- Emissivity of Absorber Plate {dimensionless}
1642 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.38.4.2 Outputs
The following output variables are reported for the SolarCollector:IntegralCollectorStorage object:
1.38.5 SolarCollector:FlatPlate:PhotovoltaicThermal
This object is used to model hybrid photovoltaic-thermal (PVT) solar collectors that convert incident solar
energy into both electricity and useful thermal energy. This object describes the PVT solar collector by
referencing other objects that provide more detail or connections to other parts of the EnergyPlus model.
The PVT solar collectors need to be connected to either an HVAC air system or a plant loop for
collected thermal energy to be utilized. The input field for the type of thermal working fluid informs the
program how the PVT collector is expected to be connected. If the the working fluid is air, then the
PVT collectors are modeled as a ventilation air pretreatment component and connected to an outdoor air
system. If the working fluid is water, then the PVT collectors are modeled as a hot water solar collector
and are connected to a plant loop with a water thermal storage tank.
1.38.5.1 Inputs
1.38.5.1.1 Field: Name
This field should contain a unique name chosen by the user to identify a specific PVT collector in the
building model.
SolarCollector:FlatPlate:PhotovoltaicThermal ,
PVT: 1_Ceiling , !- Name
1_Ceiling , !- Surface Name
30 percentPVThalfArea , !- Photovoltaic -Thermal Model Performance Name
PV: ZN_1_FLR_1_SEC_1_Ceiling , !- Photovoltaic Name
Air , !- Thermal Working Fluid Type
, !- Water Inlet Node Name
, !- Water Outlet Node Name
ZN_1_FLR_1_SEC_1:Sys_OAInlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
PVT: ZN_1_FLR_1_SEC_1_Ceiling Outlet , !- Air Outlet Node Name
Autosize ; !- Design Flow Rate
1.38.5.2 Outputs
The output variables that are available for flat plate PVT include the following.
1.38.6 SolarCollectorPerformance:PhotovoltaicThermal:Simple
This object is used to provide performance details for the simple PVT model. This is a simple user-defined
efficiency model. Thermal conversion efficiency is a constant or scheduled value. There are no output
variable for this object, reporting is done by the parent PVT object.
1.38.6.1 Inputs
1.38.6.1.1 Field: Name
This field is the unique name for this object.
SolarCollectorPerformance :PhotovoltaicThermal:Simple ,
20 percentEffPVhalfArea , !- Name
0.5 , !- Fraction of Surface Area with Active
Thermal Collector
Fixed , !- Thermal Conversion Efficiency Input Mode
Type
0.2 , !- Value for Thermal Conversion Efficiency
if Fixed
, !- Name of Schedule for Thermal
Conversion Efficiency
0.84 ; !- Front Surface Emittance
heating, the Use Side Inlet and Use Side Outlet nodes must be connected to another plant loop to serve
zone and non-zone equipment. (See the WaterHeater:Mixed object documentation for more information.)
NOTE: The EnergyPlus plant simulation requires the pump to be the first component on the supply
side. This may be different from the way the solar heating system is actually configured. This should not
affect the validity of the simulation results.
In order to realize energy savings with a solar heating system, it is best to use a two-tank system with
a storage tank and auxiliary water heater. The storage tank gathers heat directly from the solar collectors
and stores it for later use. The storage tank is modeled using a WaterHeater:Mixed object with the Heater
Maximum Capacity set to zero. The auxiliary water heater is positioned downstream of the storage tank
on the supply side of the main plant loop. The auxiliary water heater, or booster water heater, provides
additional heat if the storage tank water is not hot enough. The auxiliary water heater can be modeled
as an instantaneous/tankless water heater or as a standard tanked water heater with heating source (see
WaterHeater:Mixed).
Another strategy to consider for solar heating systems is to allow the storage tank to reach a much
higher temperature than necessary for the end use. This allows the tank to store more energy from the
solar collectors, when it is available. However, for applications such as domestic hot water, it is undesirable
and unsafe to supply excessive hot water temperatures at the point of demand. To take advantage of
higher storage temperatures, yet still avoid scalding temperatures at the faucet, the hot water leaving the
storage tank can be tempered with cold water using a three-way valve to achieve the target temperature.
See the TemperingValve object documentation for more details.
A complete two-tank solar heating system with tempering valve is shown below.
Flow Rate Schedule of the pump. If the schedule is omitted, the pump and system will run all the time
(without any other controls specified). This is usually not the best way to operate a solar heating system.
To better control the collector loop, a differential thermostat can be used to compare the temperature in
the water heater to the temperature in the collector so that the pump is only turned on when there is a useful
heat gain. The differential thermostat is simulated using the AvailabilityManager:DifferentialThermostat
object. For a typical system, the Hot Node Name field refers to an outlet node of one of the collector
modules. The Cold Node Name field refers to the Source Side Outlet node, i.e. the cold storage water
leaving the water heater. The fields Temperature Difference On Limit and Temperature Difference Off
Limit are usually 8 12 C and 1 3 C respectively. If the two temperature differences are too close, it is
possible for the system to turn on and off rapidly without much useful heat gain. This can also occur if the
flow rate through the collector is too high. Without flow the fluid in the collector heats up more quickly;
when high flow is turned on, all of the hot fluid is removed and the temperature drops, forcing the system
off again.
Another control method is to use a photovoltaic panel to power the pump. The system begins pumping
when there is enough solar radiation to operate the pump. This is not yet implemented in EnergyPlus.
AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList ,
Collector Loop Availability Manager List , !- Name
AvailabilityManager :HighTemperatureTurnOff , !- Availability Manager 1 Object Type
High Temperature Turn Off Availability Manager , !- Availability Manager 1 Name
AvailabilityManager :HighTemperatureTurnOn , !- Availability Manager 2 Object Type
Low Temperature Turn On Availability Manager , !- Availability Manager 2 Name
AvailabilityManager :DifferentialThermostat , !- Availability Manager 3 Object Type
Differential Thermostat Availability Manager; !- Availability Manager 3 Name
The AvailabilityManager:DifferentialThermostat object must always be the last manager in the avail-
ability manager list. See the AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object documentation for more informa-
tion.
1.38.9 SolarCollector:UnglazedTranspired
This object is used to model unglazed transpired solar collectors (UTSC) used to condition out-
door air. These collectors are generally used to heat air drawn through perforated absorbers that
are heated by the sun and also recover heat conducted out through the underlying wall. The
SolarCollector:UnglazedTranspired object represents a single collector attached to one or more Build-
ingSurface:Detailed objects and to one or more outdoor air systems. Therefore the transpired collector
is part of both the thermal envelope and the HVAC system. An example file is provided called
TranspiredCollectors.idf.
The area and orientation of the collector is obtained from BuildingSurface:Detailed objects, which
are referenced by name. Although the collector surface itself is slightly detached from the underlying
building wall (or roof), no additional surface object is needed to represent the collector itself. When
modeling transpired collectors, it is important to consider the size of the collector when developing the
building model s BuildingSurface:Detailed objects because the underlying surfaces must match the collector.
For example, if the collector covers only part of the wall, then that wall should be split into separate
surfaces where one matches the size of the collector. A single collector can be associated with as many
BuildingSurface:Detailed objects as desired (although if you need to use more than 10 surfaces, then the
IDD will need to be extended). The collector can be arranged at any tilt angle by describing the surfaces
appropriately. The surfaces need not be contiguous nor have the same orientation, but the program will
issue warnings if surfaces have widely ranging tilts and azimuths.
The collector conditions outdoor air and is connected to the outdoor air system using the usual method
1652 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
of specifying node names. Using the UTSC model requires specifying a relatively complete HVAC air
system that includes an outdoor air path. This will typically require using a set of objects that, at a
minimum, will include: AirLoopHVAC:ControllerList, AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem:EquipmentList,
AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem, OutdoorAir:NodeList, OutdoorAir:Mixer, SetpointManager:MixedAir,
and Controller:OutdoorAir. A single UTSC can serve more than one outdoor air system but requires also
using a separate object, called SolarCollector:UnglazedTranspired:Multisystem to specify node connections.
Controls for the UTSC involve setting the rate of air flow and the status of a bypass damper. If the
bypass damper is open, then all the ventilation air goes straight into the outdoor air mixer; if it closed, then
all the air first passes through the UTSC. The bypass damper is modeled as completely open or completely
closed. The UTSC bypass damper control is determined by an availability manager, the airflow set by the
outdoor air mixer controls, and thermostatic type controls that decide if heating is useful. An availability
schedule is used to bypass the collector for certain times of the year, eg. summer cooling season. The
air flow rates are set by controls associated with the outdoor air mixer (see SetpointManager:MixedAir,
and Controller:OutdoorAir). Thermostatic type control decides if the collector will provide useful heating
based on either of two types of setpoints. The first type of temperature setpoint is managed by Setpoint-
Manager:MixedAir, where the UTSC model looks at a control node, usually the mixed air node. The
second type is an extra setpoint especially for free heating that is managed within this object where the
UTSC model looks at the zone air node.
1.38.9.1 Inputs
1.38.9.1.1 Field: Name
This field contains a unique name for the unglazed transpired solar collector.
Black 0.94
Classic Bronze 0.91
1654 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.38.9.1.18 Field: Ratio of Actual Collector Surface Area to Projected Surface Area
This field is used to enter a factor that accounts for the extra surface area resulting from corrugations
in the collector surface. Corrugations help stiffen the collector. The projected surface area is obtained by
the program from the (flat) underlying surfaces. If the collector is flat then this ratio is 1.0. If the collector
is corrugated, then this ratio will be greater than one. A typical value might be 1.165.
SolarCollector:UnglazedTranspired ,
Shop OA UTSC ZN11 , ! Name
UTSC OSCM ZN11 , ! Boundary Conditions Model Name
HeatingAvailSched , ! Availability Schedule Name
Outside Air Inlet Node ZN11 , ! Inlet Node Name
UTSC Outlet Node ZN11 , ! Outlet Node Name
Mixed Air Node ZN11 , ! Setpoint Node Name
ZN11 Node , ! Zone Node Name
ShopFreeHeatingSetpoints , ! Free Heating Setpoint Schedule Name
0.0016 , ! Diameter of Perforations in Collector
0.01689 , ! Distance Between Perforations in Collector
0.9, ! Thermal Emissivity of Collector
Surface
0.9, ! Solar Absorbtivity of Collector
Surface
4.0, ! Effective Overall Height of Collector
0.1, ! Effective Gap Thickness of Plenum
Behind Collector
2.0, ! Effective Cross Section Area of Plenum
Behind Collector
Triangle , ! Hole Layout Pattern for Pitch
Kutscher1994 , ! Heat Exchange Effectiveness Correlation
1.165 , ! Ratio of Actual Collector Surface Area to Projected
Surface Area
MediumRough , ! Roughness of Collector
0.00086 , ! Collector Thickness
0.25, ! Effectiveness for Perforations with
Respect to Wind
0.5, ! Discharge Coefficient for Openings with Respect to Buoyancy
Driven Flow
ZN11_Shop_1:ExtWall:South; ! Surface 1 Name
1.38.9.2 Outputs
In addition to related output that can be obtained for air nodes and surfaces, these outputs are available
for UTSC systems:
• Zone,Meter,SolarAir:Facility [J]
• Zone,Meter,SolarAir:HVAC [J]
• Zone,Meter,HeatProduced:SolarAir [J]
1.38. GROUP SOLAR COLLECTORS 1657
1.38.9.2.13 Solar Collector Wind Natural Ventilation Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
The part of mass flow rate of natural ventilation air exchange between the plenum and ambient when
the collector is inactive due to wind-driven forces.
1.38.9.2.14 Solar Collector Buoyancy Natural Ventilation Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
The part of mass flow rate of natural ventilation air exchange between the plenum and ambient when
the collector is inactive due to buoyancy-driven forces.
1.38.10 SolarCollector:UnglazedTranspired:Multisystem
This object is used to model unglazed transpired solar collectors (UTSC) that are connected to multiple
outdoor air systems. This object supplements the SolarCollector:UnglazedTranspired object and is only
necessary if more than one air system is connected to a single transpired collector. After the name field,
there are sets of four node names used to define the connections of each air system. Each set contains
node names for inlet, outlet, control, and zone. If more than five air systems are needed, this object is
extensible.
1.38.10.2 Field Set: Inlet Node, Outlet Node, Mixed Air Node, Zone Node
The following four fields form a repeating set of four fields. One set is used for each outdoor air system
that is connected to the collector.
1.39. GROUP PUMPS 1659
SolarCollector:UnglazedTranspired:Multisystem ,
OFFICE MultiSystem OA UTSC , ! Solar Collector Name
Outside Air Inlet Node ZN1 , ! Outdoor Air System 1 Collector Inlet Node
UTSC Outlet Node ZN1 , ! Outdoor Air System 1 Collector Outlet Node
Mixed Air Node ZN1 , ! Outdoor Air System 1 Mixed Air Node
ZN1 Node , ! Outdoor Air System 1 Zone Node
Outside Air Inlet Node ZN2 , ! Outdoor Air System 2 Collector Inlet Node
UTSC Outlet Node ZN2 , ! Outdoor Air System 2 Collector Outlet Node
Mixed Air Node ZN2 , ! Outdoor Air System 2 Mixed Air Node
ZN2 Node , ! Outdoor Air System 2 Zone Node
Outside Air Inlet Node ZN3 , ! Outdoor Air System 3 Collector Inlet Node
UTSC Outlet Node ZN3 , ! Outdoor Air System 3 Collector Outlet Node
Mixed Air Node ZN3 , ! Outdoor Air System 3 Mixed Air Node
ZN3 Node , ! Outdoor Air System 3 Zone Node
Outside Air Inlet Node ZN4 , ! Outdoor Air System 4 Collector Inlet Node
UTSC Outlet Node ZN4 , ! Outdoor Air System 4 Collector Outlet Node
Mixed Air Node ZN4 , ! Outdoor Air System 4 Mixed Air Node
ZN4 Node , ! Outdoor Air System 4 Zone Node
Outside Air Inlet Node ZN5 , ! Outdoor Air System 5 Collector Inlet Node
UTSC Outlet Node ZN5 , ! Outdoor Air System 5 Collector Outlet Node
Mixed Air Node ZN5 , ! Outdoor Air System 5 Mixed Air Node
ZN5 Node; ! Outdoor Air System 5 Zone Node
1.39.1 Pump:VariableSpeed
Pumps are needed in both plant and condenser loops. The syntax for a variable speed pump is given below.
1.39.1.1 Inputs
1.39.1.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying a unique name for the pump.
1.39.1.1.28 Field: Design Shaft Power per Unit Flow Rate Per Unit Head
This field is optional. This input is used when the input field Design Power Consumption is set to
autosize and the Design Power Sizing Method is set to PowerPerFlowPerPressure. It allows setting the
efficiency of the impeller and drive assembly when calculating the pump power consumption for the design
flow rate, motor efficiency, and pump head. If omitted the default value of 1.282051 W/((m3 /s)-Pa) will
be used.
Pump:VariableSpeed ,
HW Circ Pump , !- Name
HW Supply Inlet Node , !- Inlet Node Name
HW Pump Outlet Node , !- Outlet Node Name
autosize , !- Design Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s}
179352 , !- Design Pump Head {Pa}
autosize , !- Design Power Consumption {W}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
0.0, !- Fraction of Motor Inefficiencies to Fluid Stream
0, !- Coefficient 1 of the Part Load Performance Curve
1, !- Coefficient 2 of the Part Load Performance Curve
0, !- Coefficient 3 of the Part Load Performance Curve
0, !- Coefficient 4 of the Part Load Performance Curve
0, !- Minimum Flow Rate {m3/s}
Intermittent; !- Pump Control Type
Pump:VariableSpeed ,
Circ Pump , !- Name
CW Supply Inlet Node , !- Inlet Node Name
CW Pump Outlet Node , !- Outlet Node Name
.0011 , !- Design Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s}
300000 , !- Design Pump Head {Pa}
500, !- Design Power Consumption {W}
.87, !- Motor Efficiency
0.0, !- Fraction of Motor Inefficiencies to Fluid Stream
0, !- Coefficient 1 of the Part Load Performance Curve
1, !- Coefficient 2 of the Part Load Performance Curve
0, !- Coefficient 3 of the Part Load Performance Curve
0, !- Coefficient 4 of the Part Load Performance Curve
0, !- Minimum Flow Rate {m3/s}
Intermittent; !- Pump Control Type
1.39.1.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Pump Electric Power [W]
1.39.2 Pump:ConstantSpeed
Pumps may be found in both plant and condenser loops. The syntax for a constant speed pump is given
below.
1.39.2.1 Inputs
1.39.2.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the pump.
availability managers (ref. AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList) may override this control by forcing the
pump to be on or off.
ψ = C4 × φ4 + C3 × φ3 + C2 × φ2 + C1 × φ + C0 . (1.141)
In this equation, the two dimensionless parameters, X and X are defined in terms of physical pump
and flow parameters as:
∆P
ψ= (1.142)
ρN 2 D2
ṁ
φ= (1.143)
ρN D3
Where Delta P is the pressure drop, mdot is the fluid mass flow rate, rho is a representative fluid
density, N is the rotational speed of the pump, and D is the pump impeller diameter.
Since the user may not need a full fourth order expansion of this, the user may use linear (first order),
quadratic (second order), cubic (third order), or full quartic (fourth order). These are available in the
objects Curve:Linear, Curve:Quadratic, Curve:Cubic, Curve:Quartic.
Once this curve is input properly (along with the following two fields), the pump will respond to the
plant loop pressure drop when resolving the flow rate. Note that this simulation method will likely result
in a plant loop that does not exactly hit the setpoint as the current simulation method does. This is due
to the loop flow rate now being pressure-based and not decision-based .
1.39.2.1.18 Field: Design Shaft Power per Unit Flow Rate Per Unit Head
This field is optional. This input is used when the input field Design Power Consumption is set to
autosize and the Design Power Sizing Method is set to PowerPerFlowPerPressure. It allows controlling the
efficiency of the impeller and drive assembly when calculating the pump power consumption for the design
flow rate, motor efficiency, and pump head. If omitted the default value of 1.282051 W/((m3 /s)-Pa) will
be used.
Pump:ConstantSpeed ,
Circ Pump , !- Name
CW Supply Inlet Node , !- Inlet Node Name
PumpChiller Node , !- Outlet Node Name
0.0011 , !- Design Flow Rate
300000 , !- Design Pump Head
700, !- Design Power Consumption
0.87, !- Motor Efficiency
0.0, !- Fraction of Motor Inefficiencies to Fluid Stream
Intermittent; !- Pump Control Type
1668 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.39.2.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Pump Electric Power [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Pump Electric Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Pump Shaft Power [W]
• HVAC,Average,Pump Fluid Heat Gain Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Pump Fluid Heat Gain Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Pump Outlet Temperature [C]
• HVAC,Average,Pump Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• HVAC,Average,Pump Zone Total Heating Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Pump Zone Total Heating Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Pump Zone Convective Heating Rate [W]
• HVAC,Average,Pump Zone Radiative Heating Rate [W]
1.39.3 Pump:VariableSpeed:Condensate
The Pump:VariableSpeed:Condensate object can only be used in steam system simulation for the conden-
sate side of the loop. This is a variable speed pump, which pumps the condensate back to the steam boiler.
The syntax for condensate pump is given below.
1.39.3.1 Inputs
1.39.3.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying unique name for the pump.
1.39.3.1.18 Field: Design Shaft Power per Unit Flow Rate Per Unit Head
This field is optional. This input is used when the input field Design Power Consumption is set to
autosize and the Design Power Sizing Method is set to PowerPerFlowPerPressure. It allows setting the
efficiency of the impeller and drive assembly when calculating the pump power consumption for the design
flow rate, motor efficiency, and pump head. If omitted the default value of 1.282051 W/((m3 /s)-Pa) will
be used.
Pump:VariableSpeed:Condensate ,
Steam Boiler Plant Steam Circ Pump , !- Name
Steam Boiler Plant Steam Supply Inlet Node , !- Inlet Node Name
Steam Boiler Plant Steam Pump Outlet Node , !- Outlet Node Name
0.36, !- Design Steam Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
179352 , !- Design Pump Head {Pa}
400, !- Design Power Consumption {W}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
0.0, !- Fraction of Motor Inefficiencies to Fluid Stream
0, !- Coefficient 1 of the Part Load Performance Curve
1, !- Coefficient 2 of the Part Load Performance Curve
0, !- Coefficient 3 of the Part Load Performance Curve
0; !- Coefficient 4 of the Part Load Performance Curve
Pump:VariableSpeed:Condensate ,
Steam Boiler Plant Steam Circ Pump , !- Name
Steam Boiler Plant Steam Supply Inlet Node , !- Inlet Node Name
Steam Boiler Plant Steam Pump Outlet Node , !- Outlet Node Name
0.36, !- Design Steam Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
179352 , !- Design Pump Head {Pa}
autosize , !- Design Power Consumption {W}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
0.0, !- Fraction of Motor Inefficiencies to Fluid Stream
0, !- Coefficient 1 of the Part Load Performance Curve
1, !- Coefficient 2 of the Part Load Performance Curve
0, !- Coefficient 3 of the Part Load Performance Curve
0; !- Coefficient 4 of the Part Load Performance Curve
1.39.3.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Pump Electric Power [W]
1.39.4 HeaderedPumps:ConstantSpeed
Headered pumps are components with more than one identical pumps connected in parallel. The syntax
for HeaderedPumps:ConstantSpeed is as follows.
1.39. GROUP PUMPS 1673
1.39.4.1 Inputs
1.39.4.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the pump bank.
on the loop. Applicable availability managers (ref. AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList) may override this
control by forcing the pump to be on or off.
1.39.4.1.17 Field: Design Shaft Power per Unit Flow Rate Per Unit Head
This field is optional. This input is used when the input field Design Power Consumption is set to
autosize and the Design Power Sizing Method is set to PowerPerFlowPerPressure. It allows setting the
efficiency of the impeller and drive assembly when calculating the pump power consumption for the design
flow rate, motor efficiency, and pump head. If omitted the default value of 1.282051 W/((m3 /s)-Pa) will
be used.
HeaderedPumps:ConstantSpeed ,
Chilled Water Headered Pumps , !- Name
CW Supply Inlet Node , !- Inlet Node Name
CW Pumps Outlet Node , !- Outlet Node Name
autosize , !- Total Design Flow Rate
2, !- Number of Pumps in Bank
SEQUENTIAL , !- Flow Sequencing Control Scheme
179352 , !- Design Pump Head
autosize , !- Design Power Consumption
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
0.0, !- Fraction of Motor Inefficiencies to Fluid Stream
INTERMITTENT , !- Pump Control Type
CoolingPumpAvailSched ; !- Pump Flow Rate Schedule Name
1.39.4.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Pump Electric Power [W]
• HVAC,Sum, Pump Electric Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Pump Shaft Power [W]
• HVAC,Average, Pump Fluid Heat Gain Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum, Pump Fluid Heat Gain Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average, Pump Outlet Temperature [C]
• HVAC,Average,Pump Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
• HVAC,Average,Number of Pumps Operating []
• HVAC, Average, Pump Zone Total Heating Rate [W]
• HVAC, Sum, Pump Zone Total Heating Energy [J]
• HVAC, Average, Pump Zone Convective Heating Rate [W]
• HVAC, Average, Pump Zone Radiative Heating Rate [W]
1.39.5 HeaderedPumps:VariableSpeed
Headered pumps are components with more than one identical pumps connected in parallel. Currently
this object may be found only in plant loops. The syntax for a HeaderedPumps:VariableSpeed pump is
given below.
1.39.5.1 Inputs
1.39.5.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field contains the identifying unique name for the pump bank.
1.39.5.1.22 Field: Design Shaft Power per Unit Flow Rate Per Unit Head
This field is optional. This input is used when the input field Design Power Consumption is set to
autosize and the Design Power Sizing Method is set to PowerPerFlowPerPressure. It allows setting the
efficiency of the impeller and drive assembly when calculating the pump power consumption for the design
1.39. GROUP PUMPS 1679
flow rate, motor efficiency, and pump head. If omitted the default value of 1.282051 W/((m3 /s)-Pa) will
be used.
HeaderedPumps:VariableSpeed ,
Chilled Water Headered Pumps , !- Name
CW Supply Inlet Node , !- Inlet Node Name
CW Pumps Outlet Node , !- Outlet Node Name
autosize , !- Total Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
2, !- Number of Pumps in Bank
SEQUENTIAL , !- Flow Sequencing Control Scheme
179352 , !- Design Pump Head {Pa}
autosize , !- Design Power Consumption {W}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
0.0, !- Fraction of Motor Inefficiencies to Fluid Stream
0, !- Coefficient 1 of the Part Load Performance Curve
1, !- Coefficient 2 of the Part Load Performance Curve
0, !- Coefficient 3 of the Part Load Performance Curve
0, !- Coefficient 4 of the Part Load Performance Curve
0.1, !- Minimum Flow Rate {m3/s}
INTERMITTENT , !- Pump Control Type
CoolingPumpAvailSched ; !- Pump Flow Rate Schedule Name
1.39.5.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Pump Electric Power [W]
1.40.1 Coil:Cooling:Water
The water cooling coil (Coil:Cooling:Water) has the ability to give detailed output with simplified in-
puts, inputting complicated coil geometry is not required by the user for this model instead the coil is
sized in terms of auto-sizeable thermodynamic inputs. The coil requires thermodynamic inputs such as
temperatures, mass flow rates and humidity ratios.
The coil is sized using auto-sized/user design input conditions and the UA values are calculated from
the design conditions. A rough estimate of the coil area is provided along with percentage of surface wet
and/or dry. This model uses the NTU-effectiveness approach to model heat transfer and has two types of
flow arrangements cross-flow or counter-flow.
The basic underlying idea is - use auto sizable thermodynamic design inputs, calculate the coil UA
s, use these UA values and operating conditions from the nodes connections, calculate the outlet stream
conditions, and calculate the heat transfer rates.
See section Cooling Coil Model in the EnergyPlus Engineering Document for further details regarding
this model.
1.40.1.1 Inputs
1.40.1.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a cooling coil. Any reference to this cooling coil by
another object will use this name.
The maximum possible water volume flow rate (m3 /sec) through the coil. This is an auto sizable design
input.
1.40.1.1.17 Field: Design Water Temperature Difference This input field is optional. If
specified, it is used for sizing the Design Water Flow Rate. If blank or omitted, the Loop Design Temperature
Difference value specified in Sizing:Plant object is used for sizing the Design Water Flow Rate.
Examples when auto sized in an IDF are as below:
Coil:Cooling:Water ,
Main Cooling Coil 1, !- Coil Name
CoolingCoilAvailSched , !-Availability Schedule Name
autosize , !- Design Water Volume Flow Rate of Coil {m3/s}
autosize , !- Design Air Flow Rate of Coil {m3/s}
autosize , !- Design Inlet Water Temperature {C}
autosize , !- Design Inlet Air Temperature {C}
autosize , !- Design Outlet Air Temperature {C}
autosize , !- Design Inlet Air Humidity Ratio(kgWater/kgDryAir)
autosize , !- Design Outlet Air Humidity Ratio(kgWater/kgDryAir)
Main Cooling Coil 1 Water Inlet Node , !- Coil_Water_Inlet_Node
Main Cooling Coil 1 Water Outlet Node , !- Coil_Water_Outlet_Node
Mixed Air Node 1, !- Coil_Air_Inlet_Node
Main Cooling Coil 1 Outlet Node; !- Coil_Air_Outlet_Node
Coil:Cooling:Water ,
Main Cooling Coil 1, !- Coil Name
CoolingCoilAvailSched , !-Availability Schedule Name
0.0022 , !- Design Water Volume Flow Rate of Coil {m3/s}
1.45, !- Design Air Flow Rate of Coil {m3/s}
6.1, !- Design Inlet Water Temperature {C}
25, !- Design Inlet Air Temperature {C}
10, !- Design Outlet Air Temperature {C}
0.012 , !- Design Inlet Air Humidity Ratio
0.008 , !- Design Outlet Air Humidity Ratio
Main Cooling Coil 1 Water Inlet Node , !- Coil_Water_Inlet_Node
Main Cooling Coil 1 Water Outlet Node , !- Coil_Water_Outlet_Node
Mixed Air Node 1, !- Coil_Air_Inlet_Node
Main Cooling Coil 1 Outlet Node; !- Coil_Air_Outlet_Node
1.40.1.2 Outputs
Following are the list of possible output output variables from this coil model:
1.40.2 Coil:Heating:Water
This simple heating coil model only does sensible heating of the air. The simple heating coil uses the
Effectiveness-NTU algorithm and assumes a cross-flow heat exchanger.
1.40.2.1 Inputs
1.40.2.1.1 Field: Name
A unique identifying name for each coil.
1.40. GROUP HEATING AND COOLING COILS 1685
where q is the heat transferred from water to the air in watts; Twater,avg is the average water temper-
ature in degrees C; and Tair,avg is the average air temperature in degrees C. Or the LMTD temperature
difference can be used. This field is used when Performance Input Method = UFactorTimesAreaAndDe-
signWaterFlowRate.This field is autosizable.
ηf (hA)air
ratio = (1.147)
(hA)water
where,
ηf is the fin efficiency, (dimensionless)
h is the surface convection heat transfer coefficient
A is the surface area
Coil:Heating:Water ,
SPACE3 -1 Zone Coil , !- Coil Name
ReheatCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
, !- UA of the Coil {W/K}
, !- Max Water Flow Rate of Coil {m3/s}
SPACE3 -1 Zone Coil Water In Node , !- Coil_Water_Inlet_Node
SPACE3 -1 Zone Coil Water Out Node , !- Coil_Water_Outlet_Node
SPACE3 -1 Zone Coil Air In Node , !- Coil_Air_Inlet_Node
SPACE3 -1 In Node , !- Coil_Air_Outlet_Node
NominalCapacity , !- Coil Performance Input Method
10000. , !- Gross Rated Heating Capacity
0.55; !- Rated Ratio for Air and Water Convection
1.40. GROUP HEATING AND COOLING COILS 1687
1.40.2.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Sum, Heating Coil Heating Energy [J]
1.40.3 Coil:Heating:Steam
The simple steam to air heating coil model only does sensible heating of the air. The steam to air coils
condenses the steam and sub cools steam at loop pressure and discharges the condensate through steam
traps at low pressure condensate line.
1.40.3.1 Inputs
1.40.3.1.1 Field: Name
A unique identifying name for each steam coil.
Coil:Heating:Steam ,
VAV SYS 1 Heating Coil , !- Coil Name
ReheatCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.06, !- Max Steam volume Flow rate
5.0, !- Deg of Subcooling Desired
15.0, !- Loop Subcooling Desired
VAV SYS 1 Heating Coil Steam Inlet , !- Coil Steam Inlet Node
VAV SYS 1 Heating Coil Steam Outlet , !- Coil Water Outlet Node
VAV SYS 1 Cooling Coil Outlet , !- Coil Air Inlet Node
VAV SYS 1 Heating Coil Outlet , !- Coil Air Outlet Node
TemperatureSetPointControl , !- field Coil Control Type
VAV SYS 1 Heating Coil Outlet; !- field Coil Temp Setpoint Node
Coil:Heating:Steam ,
SPACE1 -1 Reheat Coil , !- Coil Name
ReheatCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
1.40. GROUP HEATING AND COOLING COILS 1689
1.40.5 Coil:Heating:Electric
The electric heating coil is a simple capacity model with a user-inputted efficiency. In many cases, this
efficiency for the electric coil will be 100%. This coil will be simpler than shown in Figure 1.168 since it
will only have air nodes to connect it in the system. The coil can be used in the air loop simulation or in
the zone equipment as a reheat coil. Depending on where it is used determines if this coil is temperature
or capacity controlled. If used in the air loop simulation it will be controlled to a specified temperature
1690 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
scheduled from the SetPoint Manager. If it is used in zone equipment, it will be controlled from the zone
thermostat by meeting the zone demand.
1.40.5.1 Inputs
1.40.5.1.1 Field: Name
A unique identifying name for each coil.
Coil:Heating:Electric ,
AHU Reheater , !- Name
2, !- Availability Schedule Name
0.99, !- Efficiency
600000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
DOAS Supply Fan Outlet , !- Air Inlet Node Name
AHU Reheater Outlet , !- Air Outlet Node Name
AHU Reheater Outlet; !- Temperature Setpoint Node Name
1.40.5.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Sum,Heating Coil Heating Energy [J]
1.40.6 Coil:Heating:Electric:MultiStage
The multi stage electric heating coil is a simple capacity model with a user-inputted efficiencies at different
stages. In many cases, the efficiencies for the electric coil will be 100%. This coil will only have air nodes
to connect it in the system. The coil can be used in the air loop simulation or in the zone equipment as
a reheat coil. Depending on where it is used determines if this coil is temperature or capacity controlled.
If used in the air loop simulation it will be controlled to a specified temperature scheduled from the
SetPoint Manager. If it is used in zone equipment, it will be controlled from the zone thermostat by
meeting the zone demand. For the time being, this coil model can only be called by the parent object
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir:MultiSpeed.
1.40.6.1 Inputs
1.40.6.1.1 Field: Name
A unique identifying name for each coil.
Coil:Heating:Electric:MultiStage ,
Heat Pump Heating Coil 1, !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
SuppHeating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
, !- Temp Setpoint node name
3, !- Number of Stages
1, !- Stage 1 Efficiency
Autosize , !- Stage 1 Nominal Capacity {W}
1, !- Stage 2 Efficiency
Autosize , !- Stage 2 Nominal Capacity {W}
1, !- Stage 3 Efficiency
Autosize; !- Stage 3 Nominal Capacity {W}
1.40.6.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Sum,Heating Coil Heating Energy[J]
1.40.7 Coil:Heating:Desuperheater
A simplified approach is used to determine the performance of this air heating coil. The model
assumes that the heating energy provided by this coil is reclaimed from the superheated refriger-
ant gas leaving a compressor (i.e., a desuperheating refrigerant-to-air heating coil) and does not
impact the performance of the compressor. This coil can be used in air loop simulations but
can t be used by certain compound objects (e.g., AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir, Air-
LoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:WaterToAir, or Dehumidifier:Desiccant:NoFans) or any air distribution
equipment (e.g., AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:Reheat, AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat,
or AirTerminal:SingleDuct:SeriesPIU:Reheat).
The desuperheater heating coil input requires a coil name, an availability schedule, and a heat reclaim
recovery efficiency. The reclaim recovery efficiency determines the amount of heat available for use by this
heating coil. Approximately 25-30% of the energy rejected by typical refrigeration system condensers is to
reduce the superheated refrigerant vapor temperature to the condensing temperature. Recovery efficiencies
higher than 30% may cause the refrigerant gas to condense which in turn impacts the performance of the
refrigeration system. For this reason, the maximum heat reclaim recovery efficiency for this coil is 30%
for most sources of waste heat, including refrigeration compressor racks. The one exception to this 30%
limit is a condenser that is part of a detailed refrigeration system. In a detailed refrigeration system, the
portion of the rejected heat that lies within the superheated region is explicitly calculated. Therefore, the
desuperheater coils supplied by a condenser attached to a detailed refrigeration system are subject to a
maximum reclaim recovery efficiency of 90% of the heat within the superheated region.
The next two input items for the desuperheater heating coil are the node names for the inlet and
outlet air streams. The following two input fields define the source of heating energy for the coil. This
desuperheater heating coil may only be used with direct expansion (DX) cooling or refrigeration equipment.
The first of these two inputs is the heating source object type while the second defines the name of the
heating source. For proper modeling, the desuperheater heating coil must be placed downstream of a
DX cooling coil when reclaiming heat from that cooling coil. Desuperheating heating coil placement is
unrestricted when reclaiming heat from a Refrigeration:CompressorRack or Refrigeration:Condenser.
The next input field is optional and defines the set point node name if the desuperheater heating coil is
to be controlled based on temperature. When a load-based control scheme is used, this field is left blank.
A final optional input is used to model parasitic electric energy use of auxiliary equipment associated with
the desuperheater heating coil (e.g., solenoid valve).
1694 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.40.7.1 Inputs
1.40.7.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a desuperheater heating coil.
Any reference to this desuperheater heating coil by another object will use this name.
• Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
• Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoSpeed
• Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWithHumidityControlMode
• Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed
• Refrigeration:CompressorRack
• Refrigeration:Condenser:AirCooled
• Refrigeration:Condenser:EvaporativeCooled
• Refrigeration:Condenser:WaterCooled
When the heating coil source is a DX Coil, the air loop’s supply air fan control mode may be auto
fan (cycling fan cycling coil), constant fan, or variable volume. When the heating source is a compressor
rack for refrigerated cases or a refrigeration condenser, the supply air fan control mode should be either
variable volume or constant fan.
1.40. GROUP HEATING AND COOLING COILS 1695
NOTE: Use of the desuperheater heating coil in variable air volume systems should be done with
caution since the model assumption of a fixed heat reclaim recovery efficiency may not be valid if the air
flow rate over the coil varies significantly.
Coil:Heating:Desuperheater ,
DesuperheaterCoil , !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule
0.3, !- Heat Reclaim Recovery Efficiency
Cooling Coil Air Outlet Node , !- Coil Air Inlet Node Name
Air Loop Outlet Node , !- Coil Air Outlet Node Name
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed , !- Heating Source Type
Furnace ACDXCoil 1, !- Heating Source Name
, !- Coil Temperature Setpoint Node
Name
0.1; !- Parasitic Electric Load {W}
1.40.7.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average,Heating Coil Heating Rate [W]
1.40.8 Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow
The variable refrigerant flow (VRF) DX cooling coil model is nearly identical to the single-speed DX
cooling coil model (Ref. Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed). For this reason, an adaptation of the single-
speed DX cooling coil model is used to model the variable-speed compression system used in VRF AC
systems. The model inputs are quite similar to the input requirements for the single-speed DX cooling
coil model, however, the location of a majority of the inputs have been moved to the variable refrigerant
flow air conditioner object since multiple DX cooling coils will use the same DX compression system (Ref.
AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow).
1.40.8.1 Inputs
1.40.8.1.1 Field: Coil Name
This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a VRF DX cooling coil. Any
reference to this DX cooling coil by another object will use this name. This cooling coil name must be
entered in the AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow object. No other sytem type uses this specific coil.
1.40. GROUP HEATING AND COOLING COILS 1697
1.40.8.1.7 Field: Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve Function of Flow Fraction Name
This alpha field defines the name of a linear, quadratic or cubic performance curve (ref: Performance
Curves) that parameterizes the variation of total cooling capacity as a function of the ratio of actual air
flow rate across the cooling coil to the rated air flow rate (i.e., fraction of full load flow). The output of
this curve is multiplied by the gross rated total cooling capacity and the total cooling capacity modifier
curve (function of temperature) to give the gross total cooling capacity at the specific temperature and air
flow conditions at which the coil is operating. The curve is normalized to have the value of 1.0 when the
actual air flow rate equals the rated air flow rate.
COIL:Cooling:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow ,
TU1 VRF DX Cooling Coil , !- Coil Name
VRFAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
autosize , !- Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity {W}
autosize , !- Gross Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
autosize , !- Rated Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
VRFTUCoolCapFT , !- Cooling Capacity Ratio Modifier Function of Temperature Curve Name
VRFACCoolCapFFF , !- Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve Function of Flow Fraction Name
TU1 VRF DX CCoil Inlet Node , !- Coil Air Inlet Node
TU1 VRF DX CCoil Outlet Node; !- Coil Air Outlet Node
1.40.8.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average, Cooling Coil Total Cooling Rate [W]
Evaporative-cooled condenser:
• Zone,Meter,Condensate:OnSiteWater [m3]
1.40.9 Coil:Heating:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow
The variable refrigerant flow (VRF) DX heating coil model uses performance information at rated con-
ditions along with performance curves for variations in total capacity, energy input ratio and part load
fraction to determine performance at part-load conditions. The impacts of defrost operation is modeled
based a combination of user inputs and empirical models taken from the air-to-air heat pump algorithms
in DOE-2.1E.
The VRF DX heating coil input requires an availability schedule, the gross rated heating capacity and
the rated air volume flow rate. The rated air volume flow rate should be between 0.00008056 m3 /s and
0.00002684 m3 /s per watt of gross rated heating capacity.
Two performance curves are required. The first performance curve defines the heating capacity as a
function of indoor air dry-bulb and outdoor condenser entering air dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperature. The
outdoor air temperature type is specified in the variable refrigerant flow air-to-air heat pump object. The
second performance curve defines the change in heating capacity as a function of air flow fraction. Each
of these performance curves are further discussed here.
The heating capacity modifier curve (function of temperature) can be a function of both the outdoor
wet-bulb temperature and indoor air dry-bulb temperature. The curve is normalized to 1 at 21.11 C indoor
dry-bulb temperature and if a biquadratic curve is used also at 6.11 C outdoor wet-bulb or 8.33 outdoor
dry-bulb temperature. The outdoor air temperature type is specified in the variable refrigerant flow air-
to-air heat pump object. Users have the choice of a bi-quadratic curve with two independent variables or a
1700 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
tri-quadratic curve with three independent variable. The tri-quadratic curve is recommended if sufficient
manufacturer data is available as it provides sensitivity to the combined total capacity of all indoor units
connected to the heat pump condenser and a more realistic output. The output of this curve is multiplied
by the gross rated heating capacity to give the gross heating capacity at specific temperature operating
conditions (i.e., at an outdoor or indoor air temperature different from the rating point temperature) and
the combination ratio of the installed system.
The heating capacity modifier curve (function of flow fraction) is a quadratic or cubic curve with the
independent variable being the ratio of the actual air flow rate across the heating coil to the rated air
flow rate (i.e., fraction of full load flow). The curve is normalized to have the value of 1.0 when the
actual air flow rate equals the rated air flow rate. The output of this curve is multiplied by the gross
rated heating capacity and the heating capacity modifier curve (function of temperature) to give the gross
heating capacity at the specific temperature and air flow conditions at which the coil is operating.
1.40.9.1 Inputs
1.40.9.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a VRF DX heating coil. Any
reference to this DX heating coil by another object will use this name.
1.40.9.1.8 Field: Heating Capacity Ratio Modifier Function of Flow Fraction Curve
Name
This alpha field defines the name of a linear, quadratic or cubic performance curve (ref: Performance
Curves) that parameterizes the variation of heating capacity as a function of the ratio of actual air flow
rate across the heating coil to the rated air flow rate (i.e., fraction of full load flow). The output of this
curve is multiplied by the gross rated heating capacity and the heating capacity modifier curve (function
of temperature) to give the gross heating capacity at the specific temperature and air flow conditions at
which the coil is operating. The curve is normalized to have the value of 1.0 when the actual air flow rate
equals the rated air flow rate.
Following is an example input for the object.
COIL:Heating:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow ,
TU1 VRF DX Heating Coil , !- Coil Name
VRFAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule
autosize , !- Gross Rated Heating Capacity {W}
autosize , !- Rated Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
TU1 VRF DX CCoil Outlet Node , !- Coil Air Inlet Node
TU1 VRF DX HCoil Outlet Node , !- Coil Air Outlet Node
VRFTUHeatCapFT , !- Heating Capacity Ratio Modifier Function of Temperature Curve Name
VRFACCoolCapFFF; !- Total heating capacity modifier curve Function of Flow Fraction
1.40.9.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average, Heating Coil Heating Rate [W]
1.40.10 Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl
This coil object is specifically designed for the physics based VRF model applicable for Fluid Temper-
ature Control (VRF-FluidTCtrl). It describes the performance of the indoor unit coil of the VRF sys-
tem operating at cooling mode. The name of this object is entered as an input to the object Zone-
HVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow. The outdoor unit part of the VRF system is modeled sep-
arately (refer to AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl object).
1.40.10.1 Inputs
1.40.10.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a VRF DX cooling coil. Any
reference to this DX cooling coil by another object will use this name. This cooling coil name must be
entered in the AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl object. No other system
type uses this specific coil.
Curve:Quadratic ,
IUEvapTempCurve , !- Name
0, !- Coefficient1 Constant
0.843 , !- Coefficient2 x
0, !- Coefficient3 x**2
0, !- Minimum Value of x
15, !- Maximum Value of x
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature; !- Output Unit Type
1.40.10.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average, Cooling Coil Total Cooling Rate [W]
Evaporative-cooled condenser:
• Zone,Meter,Condensate:OnSiteWater [m3]
1.40.11 Coil:Heating:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl
This coil object is specifically designed for the physics based VRF model applicable for Fluid Temper-
ature Control (VRF-FluidTCtrl). It describes the performance of the indoor unit coil of the VRF sys-
tem operating at heating mode. The name of this object is entered as an input to the object Zone-
HVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow. The outdoor unit part of the VRF system is modeled sep-
arately (refer to AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl object).
1.40.11.1 Inputs
1.40.11.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a VRF DX heating coil. Any
reference to this DX heating coil by another object will use this name. This heating coil name must be
entered in the AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl object. No other system
type uses this specific coil.
Curve:Quadratic ,
IUCondTempCurve , !- Name
-1.85, !- Coefficient1 Constant
0.411 , !- Coefficient2 x
0.0196 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
0, !- Minimum Value of x
20, !- Maximum Value of x
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature; !- Output Unit Type
1.40.11.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Average, Heating Coil Heating Rate [W]
1.40.12 Coil:Heating:Fuel
The fuel heating coil is a simple capacity model with a user inputted gas burner efficiency. The default
for the burner efficiency is 80%. This coil will be simpler than shown in Figure 1.168 since it will only
have air nodes to connect it in the system. The coil can be used in the air loop simulation or in the zone
equipment as a reheat coil. Depending on where it is used determines if this coil is temperature or capacity
controlled. If used in the air loop simulation it will be controlled to a specified temperature scheduled from
the Setpoint Manager. If it is used in zone equipment, it will be controlled from the zone thermostat by
meeting the zone demand.
1.40.12.1 Inputs
1.40.12.1.1 Field: Name
A unique identifying name for each coil.
1.40.12.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Sum,Heating Coil Heating Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Heating Coil Heating Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Heating Coil Gas Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Heating Coil <Fuel Type> Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Heating Coil Electric Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Heating Coil Electric Power [W]
• HVAC,Average,Heating Coil Runtime Fraction []
• HVAC,Sum,Heating Coil Ancillary <Fuel Type> Energy [J]
• HVAC,Average,Heating Coil Ancillary <Fuel Type> Rate [W]
1.40. GROUP HEATING AND COOLING COILS 1709
1.40.13 Coil:Heating:Gas:MultiStage
The multi stage gas heating coil is a simple capacity model with a user inputted gas burner efficiencies at
different stages. This coil will only have air nodes to connect it in the system. The coil can be used in the
air loop simulation or in the zone equipment as a reheat coil. Depending on where it is used determines
1710 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
if this coil is temperature or capacity controlled. If used in the air loop simulation it will be controlled to
a specified temperature scheduled from the Setpoint Manager. If it is used in zone equipment, it will be
controlled from the zone thermostat by meeting the zone demand. For the time being, this coil model can
only be called by the parent object AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir:MultiSpeed.
1.40.13.1 Inputs
1.40.13.1.1 Field: Name
A unique identifying name for each coil.
Coil:Heating:Gas:MultiStage ,
Heat Pump Heating Coil 1, !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
SuppHeating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
, !- Temp Setpoint node name
, !- Part Load Fraction Correlation Curve Name
, !- Parasitic Gas Load
3, !- Number of Speeds
0.92, !- Speed 1 Gas burner Efficiency
Autosize , !- Speed 1 Nominal Capacity {W}
, !- Stage 1 Parasitic Electric Load {W}
0.88, !- Speed 2 Gas burner Efficiency
Autosize , !- Speed 2 Nominal Capacity {W}
, !- Stage 2 Parasitic Electric Load {W}
0.84, !- Speed 3 Gas burner Efficiency
Autosize , !- Speed 3 Nominal Capacity {W}
; !- Stage 3 Parasitic Electric Load {W}
1.40.13.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Sum,Heating Coil Heating Energy[J]
• HVAC,Average,Heating Coil Heating Rate[W]
• HVAC,Sum,Heating Coil Gas Consumption [J]
• HVAC,Average,Heating Coil Gas Consumption Rate [W]
• HVAC,Sum,Heating Coil Electric Consumption [J]
• HVAC,Average,Heating Coil Electric Power [W]
• HVAC,Average,Heating Coil Runtime Fraction
• HVAC,Sum,Heating Coil Parasitic Gas Consumption [J]
• HVAC,Average,Heating Coil Parasitic Gas Consumption Rate [W]
1.40.14 Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry
This detailed flat fin coil model is for continuous plate fins. First, found in Type 12 from MODSIM, but
now programmed directly from Elmahdy, A.H. and Mitalas, G.P. Then there was a discontinuity in their
original model that was fixed in the EnergyPlus implementation. Now this model can be used in an interval
halving solution technique for controlling this coil without the problems of non-convergence.
“A Model for Cooling and Dehumidifying Coils for Use in Energy Requirements for Buildings” ASHRAE
Transactions, Vol. 83, Part 2, pp. 103-117 (1977). For fin efficiency see K.A. Gardner, “Efficiency of
Extended ,” Transactions ASME, Vol. 67, pp. 621-631, 1945.
The following figures illustrate the geometry and circuits in a cooling coil.
1.40.14.1 Inputs
1.40.14.1.1 Field: Name
A unique identifying name for each coil.
where Afr is the frontal area of the heat exchanger, and (Amin/Afr) is the ratio of the minimum airflow
area to frontal area.
1.40.14.1.24 Field: Design Water Temperature Difference This input field is optional. If
specified, it is used for sizing the Design Water Flow Rate. If blank or omitted, the Loop Design Temperature
Difference value specified in Sizing:Plant object is used for sizing the Design Water Flow Rate.
Examples of these statements in an IDF are:
Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry ,
Detailed Cooling Coil , !Name of cooling coil
CoolingCoilAvailSched , !Cooling Coil Schedule
0.0011 , !Max Water Flow Rate of Coil m3/sec
6.23816 , !Tube Outside Surf Area
6.20007018 , !Tube Inside Surf Area
101.7158224 , !Fin Surf Area
0.300606367 , !Min Air Flow Area
0.165097968 , !Coil Depth
0.43507152 , !Coil Height
0.001499982 , !Fin Thickness
0.014449958 , !Tube Inside Diameter
0.015879775 , !Tube Outside Diameter
386.0 , !Tube Thermal Conductivity
204.0 , !Fin Thermal Conductivity
0.001814292 , !Fin Spacing
0.02589977 , !Tube Depth
6, !Number of Tube Rows
16, !Number of Tubes per Row
NODE_32 ,NODE_33 , !Coil Water Side Inlet & Outlet Node
NODE_5 , NODE_6; !Coil Air Side Inlet & Outlet Node
1.40.14.2 Outputs
• HVAC,Sum,Cooling Coil Total Cooling Energy [J]
1.40.15 Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
This DX cooling coil input requires an availability schedule, the gross rated total cooling capacity, the
gross rated SHR, the gross rated COP, and the rated air volume flow rate. The latter 4 inputs determine
the coil performance at the rating point (air entering the cooling coil at 26.7 °C drybulb/19.4 °C wetbulb
and air entering the outdoor condenser coil at 35 °C drybulb/23.9 °C wetbulb). The rated air volume flow
rate should be between .00004027 m3 /s and .00006041 m3 /s per watt of gross rated total cooling capacity
(300 to 450 cfm/ton).
The rated volumetric air flow to total cooling capacity ratio for 100% dedicated outdoor air (DOAS)
application DX cooling coils should be between 0.00001677 (m3/s)/W (125 cfm/ton) and 0.00003355
(m3/s)/W (250 cfm/ton).
Pumped refrigerant economizer integrated with the single speed DX cooling coil model will use exactly
the same model except that performance curves use lookup table to cover the pumped refrigerant econo-
mizer and the compressor operating ranges. One or two independent variables may used to represent the
performance data.
This model requires 5 curves as follows:
1. The total cooling capacity modifier curve (function of temperature) is a curve with two independent
variables: wet-bulb temperature of the air entering the cooling coil, and dry-bulb temperature of
the air entering the air-cooled condenser coil (wet-bulb temperature if modeling an evaporative-
cooled condenser). The curve is normalized to 1 at 19.44 C indoor wet-bulb temperature and 35 C
outdoor dry-bulb temperature. The output of this curve is multiplied by the gross rated total cooling
capacity to give the gross total cooling capacity at specific temperature operating conditions (i.e.,
at temperatures different from the rating point temperatures). This curve is typically a biquadratic
but any curve or table with two independent variables can be used.
2. The total cooling capacity modifier curve (function of flow fraction) is a curve or lookup table with
the independent variable being the ratio of the actual air flow rate across the cooling coil to the rated
air flow rate (i.e., fraction of full load flow). The curve is normalized to have the value of 1.0 when the
actual air flow rate equals the rated air flow rate. The output of this curve is multiplied by the gross
rated total cooling capacity and the total cooling capacity modifier curve (function of temperature)
to give the gross total cooling capacity at the specific temperature and air flow conditions at which
the coil is operating. This curve is typically a quadratic or cubic but any curve or table with one
independent variables can be used.
1.40. GROUP HEATING AND COOLING COILS 1719
3. The energy input ratio (EIR) modifier curve (function of temperature) is a curve with two indepen-
dent variables: wet-bulb temperature of the air entering the cooling coil, and dry-bulb temperature
of the air entering the air-cooled condenser coil (wet-bulb temperature if modeling an evaporative-
cooled condenser). The curve is normalized to 1 at 19.44 C indoor wet-bulb temperature and 35 C
outdoor dry-bulb temperature. The output of this curve is multiplied by the rated EIR (inverse of
the rated COP) to give the EIR at specific temperature operating conditions (i.e., at temperatures
different from the rating point temperatures). This curve is typically a biquadratic but any curve or
table with two independent variables can be used.
4. The energy input ratio (EIR) modifier curve (function of flow fraction) is a curve or lookup table
with the independent variable being the ratio of the actual air flow rate across the cooling coil to the
rated air flow rate (i.e., fraction of full load flow). The curve is normalized to have the value of 1.0
when the actual air flow rate equals the rated air flow rate. The output of this curve is multiplied
by the rated EIR (inverse of the rated COP) and the EIR modifier curve (function of temperature)
to give the EIR at the specific temperature and air flow conditions at which the coil is operating.
This curve is typically a quadratic or cubic but any curve or table with one independent variables
can be used.
5. The part load fraction correlation (function of part load ratio) is a curve or a lookup table with
the independent variable being part load ratio (sensible cooling load / steady-state sensible cooling
capacity). The output of this curve is used in combination with the rated EIR and EIR modifier
curves to give the effective EIR for a given simulation timestep. The part load fraction (PLF)
correlation accounts for efficiency losses due to compressor cycling. The curve should be normalized
to a value of 1.0 when the part-load ratio equals 1.0 (i.e., the compressor(s) run continuously for the
simulation timestep). This curve is typically a quadratic or cubic but any curve or table with one
independent variables can be used.
The curves are simply specified by name. Curve inputs are described in the curve manager section of
this document (see Performance Curves in this document).
The next four input fields are optional and relate to the degradation of latent cooling capacity when
the supply air fan operates continuously while the cooling coil/compressor cycle on and off to meet the
cooling load. The fan operating mode is determined in the partent object and is considered to either be
constant (e.g. CoilSystem:Cooling:DX) or can be scheduled (e.g. AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool). When
scheduled, the schedule value must be greater than 0 to calculate degradation of latent cooling capacity.
At times when the parent object s supply air fan operating mode schedule is 0, latent degradation will be
ignored. When modeling latent capacity degradation, these next four input fields must all have positive
values.
The next input specifies the outdoor air node used to define the conditions of the air entering the outdoor
condenser. If this field is left blank, the outdoor temperature entering the condenser is taken directly from
the weather data. If this field is not blank, the node name specified must be listed in an OutdoorAir:Node
object where the height of the node is taken into consideration when calculating outdoor temperature from
the weather data. Alternately, the node name must be specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList object where
the outdoor temperature entering the condenser is taken directly from the weather data.
The next input describes the type of outdoor condenser coil used with the DX cooling coil (Air Cooled
or Evap Cooled). The following three inputs are required when modeling an evaporative-cooled condenser:
evaporative condenser effectiveness, evaporative condenser air volume flow rate, and the power consumed
by the evaporative condenser pump. Crankcase heater capacity and cutout temperature are entered in the
next two input fields. These two fields for this object define the name of the water storage tank for supply
and condensate collection. See section DX Cooling Coil Model in the EnergyPlus Engineering Document
for further details regarding this model.
1720 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
The last two input fields following the Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name are the Sensible Heat
Ratio (SHR) modifier cruve names for temperature and flow fraction. These two input fields are optional
and used only when a user intends to override SHR calculated using the apparatus dew point (ADP) and
bypass factor (BF) method. See section SHR Calculation Using User Specified SHR Modifier Curves in
the EnergyPlus Engineering Document for further details.
1.40.15.1 Inputs
1.40.15.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a DX cooling coil. Any reference to this DX coil by
another object will use this name.
air entering the outdoor condenser coil at 35 °C drybulb/23.9 °C wetbulb, and the rated air volume flow
rate defined here.
1.40.15.1.7 Field: Rated Evaporator Fan Power Per Volume Flow Rate
This field is the electric power for the evaporator (cooling coil) fan per air volume flow rate through the
coil at the rated conditions in W/(m3 /s). The default value is 773.3 W/(m3 /s) (365 W/1000 cfm) if this
field is left blank. If a value is entered, it must be > = 0.0 and < = 1250 W/(m3 /s). This value is only
used to calculate Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER), Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER), Integrated
Energy Efficiency Ratio (IEER) and the Standard Rating (Net) Cooling Capacity which will be outputs in
the EnergyPlus eio file (ref. EnergyPlus Engineering Reference, Single Speed DX Cooling Coil, Standard
Ratings). This value is not used for modeling the evaporator (cooling coil) fan during simulations; instead,
it is used for calculating SEER, EER, IEER and Standard Rating Cooling Capacity to assist the user in
verifying their inputs for modeling this type of equipment.
1.40.15.1.11 Field: Total Cooling Capacity Function of Flow Fraction Curve Name
The name of a quadratic or cubic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that parameterizes
the variation of the gross total cooling capacity as a function of the ratio of actual air flow rate across
the cooling coil to the rated air flow rate (i.e., fraction of full load flow). The output of this curve is
multiplied by the gross rated total cooling capacity and the total cooling capacity modifier curve (function
of temperature) to give the gross total cooling capacity at the specific temperature and air flow conditions
at which the coil is operating. The curve is normalized to have the value of 1.0 when the actual air flow
rate equals the rated air flow rate.
1.40.15.1.13 Field: Energy Input Ratio Function of Flow Fraction Curve Name
The name of a performance curve (Ref: Performance Curves) that parameterizes the variation of the
energy input ratio (EIR) as a function of the ratio of actual air flow rate across the cooling coil to the
rated air flow rate (i.e., fraction of full load flow). The EIR is the inverse of the COP. The output of this
curve is multiplied by the rated EIR and the EIR modifier curve (function of temperature) to give the
EIR at the specific temperature and air flow conditions at which the cooling coil is operating. This curve
is normalized to a value of 1.0 when the actual air flow rate equals the rated air flow rate. This curve is
typically a quadratic or cubic but any curve or table with one independent variables can be used.
If the user wishes to model no efficiency degradation due to compressor cycling, the part load fraction
correlation should be defined as follows:
PLF = 1.0 + 0.0( PLR)
1.40.15.1.17 Field: Ratio of Initial Moisture Evaporation Rate and Steady State La-
tent Capacity
Ratio of the initial moisture evaporation rate from the cooling coil (when the compressor first turns off,
in Watts) and the coil’s steady-state latent capacity (Watts) at rated airflow and temperature conditions.
Suggested value is 1.5; zero value means the latent degradation model is disabled. The default value
for this field is zero. The supply air fan operating mode must be continuous (i.e., the supply air fan
operating mode may be specified in other parent objects and is assumed continuous in some objects (e.g.,
CoilSystem:Cooling:DX) or can be scheduled in other objects [e.g., AirloopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool]); and
this field, the previous field and the next two fields must have positive values in order to model latent
capacity degradation.
temperatures. The output of this curve is multiplied by the rated SHR and the SHR modifier curve (func-
tion of flow fraction) to give the SHR at the specific coil entering air temperature and air flow conditions
at which the cooling coil is operating. This curve is normalized to a value of 1.0 at the rated condition.
This input field is optional.
1.40.15.1.33 Field: Sensible Heat Ratio Function of Flow Fraction Curve Name
The name of a quadratic or cubic normalized curve (Ref: Performance Curves) that parameterizes
the variation of the sensible heat ratio (SHR) as a function of the ratio of actual air flow rate across the
cooling coil to the rated air flow rate (i.e., fraction of full load flow). The output of this curve is multiplied
by the rated SHR and the SHR modifier curve (function of temperature) to give the SHR at the specific
temperature and air flow conditions at which the cooling coil is operating. This curve is normalized to a
value of 1.0 when the actual air flow rate equals the rated air flow rate. This input field is optional.
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed ,
Zone1WindACDXCoil , ! Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! Availability Schedule
10548 , ! Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity
0.75, ! Gross Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
3.0, ! Gross Rated Cooling COP
0.637 , ! Rated Air Flow Rate (m3/s)
773.3 , ! Rated Evaporator Fan Power Per Volume Flow Rate {W/(m3/s)}
Zone1WindACFanOutletNode , ! Coil Air Inlet Node
Zone1WindACAirOutletNode , ! Coil Air Outlet Node
WindACCoolCapFT , ! Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of temperature)
WindACCoolCapFFF , ! Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of flow fraction)
WindACEIRFT , ! Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature)
WindACEIRFFF , ! Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of flow fraction)
WindACPLFFPLR , ! Part Load Fraction Correlation (function of part load ratio)
1000. , ! Nominal Time for Condensate Removal to Begin {s}
1.5, ! Ratio of Initial Moisture Evaporation Rate and Steady -state Latent
Capacity
3.0, ! Maximum ON/OFF Cycling Rate {cycles/hr}
45.0, ! Latent Capacity Time Constant {s}
, ! Condenser Air Inlet Node Name
AirCooled , ! Condenser Type
, ! Evaporative Condenser Effectiveness
, ! Evaporative Condenser Air Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
, ! Evaporative Condenser Pump Rated Power Consumption {W}
30., ! Crankcase Heater Capacity {W}
10.; ! Maximum Outdoor Dry -bulb Temperature for Crankcase Heater Operation
{C}
1.40.16 Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoSpeed
This component models a two-speed (or variable speed) DX compressor and fan. The method is based on
the model used for the cycling, single speed DX unit. The single speed unit is described by single full load
capacity, SHR, COP, and air flow rate at rated conditions. Off rated full load performance is obtained by
the use of 4 modifier curves. At partial load the unit cycles on/off and the cycling losses are described by
a part load fraction curve.
1.40. GROUP HEATING AND COOLING COILS 1727
The multispeed unit is described by specifying the performance at two states: high speed compressor,
high speed fan; and low speed compressor, low speed fan. When the unit load is above the high speed
capacity, the unit runs with high speed compressor and fan. When the load on the unit is below the high
speed capacity but above the low speed capacity, the unit will run with performance intermediate between
high speed and low speed. When the load is less than the low speed capacity, the unit will cycle on/off
just like the single speed unit.
The multispeed unit model requires 2 full sets of performance data. There must be a high and low speed
capacity, SHR, COP, and evaporator air flow rate; as well as high and low speed performance curves total
cooling capacity modifier curve (function of temperature) and energy input ratio modifier curve (function
of temperature).
The multispeed DX component should be used for all cases in which a DX VAV system is being
simulated. Obviously this model in which performance is obtained by interpolating between 2 specified
states - is an oversimplification of how real multi-speed and variable speed DX cooling units are controlled.
But detailed descriptions of how actual units perform and are controlled are not available. This model
should give a good average prediction of multispeed and variable speed DX cooling unit performance. The
last four input fields following the Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name are the Sensible Heat Ratio
(SHR) modifier cruve names for temperature and flow fraction for high and low speed DX cooling coils.
These four input fields are optional and used only when a user intends to override SHR calculated using
the apparatus dew point (ADP) and bypass factor (BF) method. See section SHR Calculation Using User
Specified SHR Modifier Curves in the EnergyPlus Engineering Document for further details..
1.40.16.1 Inputs
1.40.16.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a multispeed DX cooling coil. Any reference to this
DX coil by another object will use this name.
operating conditions (i.e., at temperatures different from the rating point temperatures). The curve is
normalized to have the value of 1.0 at the rating point. This curve is used for performance at the high
speed compressor, high speed fan operating point.
1.40.16.1.11 Field: Total Cooling Capacity Function of Flow Fraction Curve Name
The name of a quadratic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that parameterizes the variation
of gross total cooling capacity as a function of the ratio of actual air flow rate across the cooling coil to
the rated air flow rate (i.e., fraction of full load flow). The curve is normalized to have the value of 1.0
when the actual air flow rate equals the rated air flow rate. The output of this curve is multiplied by the
gross rated total cooling capacity and the total cooling capacity modifier curve (function of temperature)
to give the gross total cooling capacity at the specific temperature and air flow conditions at which the
coil is operating. This curve is applied only at the high speed compressor, high speed fan operating point.
There is no corresponding curve for the low speed operating point.
1.40.16.1.13 Field: Energy Input Ratio Function of Flow Fraction Curve Name
The name of a quadratic performance curve (Ref: Performance Curves) that parameterizes the variation
of the energy input ratio (EIR) as a function of the ratio of actual air flow rate across the cooling coil to
the rated air flow rate (i.e., fraction of full load flow). The curve is normalized to have the value of 1.0
when the actual air flow rate equals the rated air flow rate. The EIR is the inverse of the COP. The output
of this curve is multiplied by the rated EIR and the EIR modifier curve (function of temperature) to give
the EIR at the specific temperature and air flow conditions at which the cooling coil is operating. This
curve is normalized to a value of 1.0 when the actual air flow rate equals the rated air flow rate. This curve
is applied only at the high speed compressor, high speed fan operating point. There is no corresponding
curve for the low speed operating point.
A typical part load fraction correlation for a conventional, single-speed DX cooling coil (e.g., residential
unit) would be:
PLF = 0.85 + 0.15( PLR)
If the user wishes to model no efficiency degradation due to compressor cycling, the part load fraction
correlation should be defined as follows:
PLF = 1.0 + 0.0( PLR)
1.40.16.1.19 Field: Low Speed Total Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve
Name
The name of a biquadratic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that parameterizes the vari-
ation of the gross total cooling capacity as a function of the wet-bulb temperature of the air entering the
cooling coil, and the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the air-cooled condenser (wet-bulb tempera-
ture if modeling an evaporative-cooled condenser). The output of this curve is multiplied by the gross rated
1.40. GROUP HEATING AND COOLING COILS 1731
total cooling capacity to give the gross total cooling capacity at specific temperature operating conditions
(i.e., at temperatures different from the rating point temperatures). The curve is normalized to have the
value of 1.0 at the rating point. This curve is used for performance at the low speed compressor, low speed
fan operating point.
1.40.16.1.20 Field: Low Speed Energy Input Ratio Function of Temperature Curve
Name
The name of a biquadratic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that parameterizes the vari-
ation of the energy input ratio (EIR) as a function of the wetbulb temperature of the air entering the
cooling coil and the drybulb temperature of the air entering the air-cooled condenser (wetbulb temper-
ature if modeling an evaporative-cooled condenser). The EIR is the inverse of the COP. The output of
this curve is multiplied by the rated EIR (inverse of rated COP) to give the EIR at specific temperature
operating conditions (i.e., at temperatures different from the rating point temperatures). The curve is
normalized to a value of 1.0 at the rating point. This curve is used for performance at the low speed
compressor, low speed fan operating point.
where
Tcondinlet = the temperature of the air entering the condenser coil (C)
Twb,o = the wet-bulb temperature of the outdoor air (C)
Tdb,o = the dry-bulb temperature of the outdoor air (C)
The resulting condenser inlet air temperature is used by the Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve
(function of temperature) and the Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature). The
1732 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
default value for this field is 0.9, although valid entries can range from 0.0 to 1.0. This field is not used
when Condenser Type = Air Cooled.
If the user wants to model an air-cooled condenser, they should simply specify AirCooled in the field
Condenser Type. In this case, the Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of temperature) and the
Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature) input fields for this object should reference
performance curves that are a function of outdoor dry-bulb temperature.
If the user wishes to model an evaporative-cooled condenser AND they have performance curves that
are a function of the wet-bulb temperature of air entering the condenser coil, then the user should specify
Condenser Type = Evap Cooled and the evaporative condenser effectiveness value should be entered as 1.0.
In this case, the Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of temperature) and the Energy Input
Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature) input fields for this object should reference performance
curves that are a function of the wet-bulb temperature of air entering the condenser coil.
If the user wishes to model an air-cooled condenser that has evaporative media placed in front of it to
cool the air entering the condenser coil, then the user should specify Condenser Type = Evap Cooled. The
user must also enter the appropriate evaporative effectiveness for the media. In this case, the Total Cooling
Capacity Modifier Curve (function of temperature) and the Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function
of temperature) input fields for this object should reference performance curves that are a function of
outdoor dry-bulb temperature. Be aware that the evaporative media will significantly reduce the dry-bulb
temperature of the air entering the condenser coil, so the Total Cooling Capacity and EIR Modifier Curves
must be valid for the expected range of dry-bulb temperatures that will be entering the condenser coil.
1.40.16.1.26 Field: High Speed Evaporative Condenser Pump Rated Power Consump-
tion
The rated power of the evaporative condenser water pump in Watts at high compressor/fan speed. This
value is used to calculate the power required to pump the water used to evaporatively cool the condenser
inlet air. The default value for this input field is zero, but it is autosizable (equivalent to 0.004266 W per
watt [15 W/ton] of rated high-speed total cooling capacity). This field is not used when Condenser Type
= Air Cooled.
where
Tcondinlet = the temperature of the air entering the condenser coil (C)
Twb,o = the wet-bulb temperature of the outdoor air (C)
Tdb,o = the dry-bulb temperature of the outdoor air (C)
The resulting condenser inlet air temperature is used by the Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve,
low speed (function of temperature) and the Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve, low speed (function of
1.40. GROUP HEATING AND COOLING COILS 1733
temperature). The default value for this field is 0.9, although valid entries can range from 0.0 to 1.0. This
field is not used when Condenser Type = Air Cooled. See field Evaporative Condenser Effectiveness, High
Speed above for further information.
1.40.16.1.29 Field: Low Speed Evaporative Condenser Pump Rated Power Consump-
tion
The rated power of the evaporative condenser water pump in Watts at low compressor/fan speed. This
value is used to calculate the power required to pump the water used to evaporatively cool the condenser
inlet air. The default value for this input field is zero, but it is autosizable (equivalent to 0.001422 W per
watt [5 W/ton] of rated high-speed total capacity). This field is not used when Condenser Type = Air
Cooled.
1.40.16.1.36 Field: Sensible Heat Ratio Function of Flow Fraction Curve Name
The name of a quadratic or cubic normalized curve (Ref: Performance Curves) that parameterizes
the variation of the sensible heat ratio (SHR) as a function of the ratio of actual air flow rate across the
cooling coil to the rated air flow rate (i.e., fraction of full load flow). The output of this curve is multiplied
by the rated SHR and the SHR modifier curve (function of temperature) to give the SHR at the specific
temperature and air flow conditions at which the cooling coil is operating. This curve is normalized to a
value of 1.0 when the actual air flow rate equals the rated air flow rate. This input field is optional.
1.40.16.1.37 Field: Low Sensible Heat Ratio Function of Temperature Curve Name
The name of a biquadratic normalized curve (Ref: Performance Curves) that parameterizes the varia-
tion of the sensible heat ratio (SHR) as a function of DX cooling coil entering air wet-bulb and dry-bulb
temperatures. The output of this curve is multiplied by the rated SHR and the SHR modifier curve (func-
tion of flow fraction) to give the SHR at the specific coil entering air temperature and air flow conditions
at which the cooling coil is operating. This curve is normalized to a value of 1.0 at the rated condition.
This input field is optional.
1.40.16.1.38 Field: Low Sensible Heat Ratio Function of Flow Fraction Curve Name
The name of a quadratic or cubic normalized curve (Ref: Performance Curves) that parameterizes
the variation of the sensible heat ratio (SHR) as a function of the ratio of actual air flow rate across the
cooling coil to the rated air flow rate (i.e., fraction of full load flow). The output of this curve is multiplied
by the rated SHR and the SHR modifier curve (function of temperature) to give the SHR at the specific
temperature and air flow conditions at which the cooling coil is operating. This curve is normalized to a
value of 1.0 when the actual air flow rate equals the rated air flow rate. This input field is optional.
Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoSpeed ,
Main Cooling Coil 1, !- Name
CoolingCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
autosize , !- Gross Rated High Speed Total Cooling Capacity {W}
0.68, !- Gross Rated High Speed Sensible Heat Ratio
3.0, !- Gross Rated High Speed Cooling COP
autosize , !- Rated High Speed Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Unit Internal Static Air Pressure Drop {Pa}
Mixed Air Node 1, !- Air Inlet Node Name
Main Cooling Coil 1 Outlet Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
VarSpeedCoolCapFT , !- Total Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve Name
PackagedRatedCoolCapFFlow , !- Total Cooling Capacity Function of Flow Fraction Curve Name
VarSpeedCoolEIRFT , !- Energy Input Ratio Function of Temperature Curve Name
PackagedRatedCoolEIRFFlow , !- Energy Input Ratio Function of Flow Fraction Curve Name
VarSpeedCyclingPLFFPLR , !- Part Load Fraction Correlation Curve Name
autosize , !- Rated Low Speed Total Cooling Capacity {W}
0.69, !- Rated Low Speed Sensible Heat Ratio
4.2, !- Rated Low Speed COP
autosize , !- Rated Low Speed Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
VarSpeedCoolCapLSFT , !- Low Speed Total Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve Name
VarSpeedCoolEIRLSFT , !- Low Speed Energy Input Ratio Function of Temperature Curve Name
Main Cooling Coil 1 Condenser Node; !- Condenser Air Inlet Node Name
Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoSpeed ,
Main Cooling Coil 1, !- Name
CoolingCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
autosize , !- High Speed Rated Total Cooling Capacity {W}
0.68, !- High Speed Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
3.0, !- High Speed Rated Cooling COP
autosize , !- High Speed Rated Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Unit Internal Static Air Pressure Drop {Pa}
Mixed Air Node 1, !- Air Inlet Node Name
Main Cooling Coil 1 Outlet Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
VarSpeedCoolCapFT , !- Total Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve Name
PackagedRatedCoolCapFFlow , !- Total Cooling Capacity Function of Flow Fraction Curve Name
VarSpeedCoolEIRFT , !- Energy Input Ratio Function of Temperature Curve Name
PackagedRatedCoolEIRFFlow , !- Energy Input Ratio Function of Flow Fraction Curve Name
VarSpeedCyclingPLFFPLR , !- Part Load Fraction Correlation Curve Name
autosize , !- Low Speed Rated Total Cooling Capacity {W}
0.69, !- Low Speed Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
4.2, !- Low Speed Rated Cooling COP
autosize , !- Low Speed Rated Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
VarSpeedCoolCapLSFT , !- Low Speed Total Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve Name
VarSpeedCoolEIRLSFT , !- Low Speed Energy Input Ratio Function of Temperature Curve Name
Main Cooling Coil 1 Condenser Node; !- Condenser Air Inlet Node Name
, !- Condenser Type
, !- High Speed Evaporative Condenser Effectiveness {
dimensionless}
, !- High Speed Evaporative Condenser Air Flow Rate {m3/s
}
, !- High Speed Evaporative Condenser Pump Rated Power
Consumption {W}
, !- Low Speed Evaporative Condenser Effectiveness {
dimensionless}
, !- Low Speed Evaporative Condenser Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Low Speed Evaporative Condenser Pump Rated Power
Consumption {W}
, !- Supply Water Storage Tank Name
, !- Condensate Collection Water Storage Tank Name
, !- Basin Heater Capacity {W/K}
, !- Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature {C}
, !- Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name
DOAS DX Coil SHR -FT , !- High Speed Sensible Heat Ratio Function of Temperature Curve Name
DOAS DX Coil SHR -FF , !- High Speed Sensible Heat Ratio Function of Flow Fraction Curve Name
DOAS DX Coil SHR -FT , !- Low Speed Sensible Heat Ratio Function of Temperature Curve Name
DOAS DX Coil SHR -FF; !- Low Speed Sensible Heat Ratio Function of Flow Fraction Curve Name
1736 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
Curve:Quadratic ,
DOAS DX Coil SHR -FF , !- Name
0.9317 ,
!- Coefficient1 Constant
-0.0077 ,
!- Coefficient2 x
0.0760 ,
!- Coefficient3 x**2
0.69,
!- Minimum Value of x
1.30;
!- Maximum Value of x
Curve:Biquadratic ,
DOAS DX Coil SHR -FT , !- Name
1.3294540786 , !-
Coefficient1 Constant
-0.0990649255 , !-
Coefficient2 x
0.0008310043 , !-
Coefficient3 x**2
0.0652277735 , !-
Coefficient4 y
-0.0000793358 , !-
Coefficient5 y**2
-0.0005874422 , !-
Coefficient6 x*y
24.44 ,
!- Minimum Value of x
26.67 ,
!- Maximum Value of x
29.44 ,
!- Minimum Value of y
46.1,
!- Maximum Value of y
0.6661 ,
!- Minimum Curve Output
1.6009 ,
!- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !-
Input Unit Type for X
Temperature , !-
Input Unit Type for Y
Dimensionless; !-
Output Unit Type
1.40.17 Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWithHumidityControlMode
The multimode DX coil is functionally equivalent to Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed but with multiple per-
formance modes. It is capable of modeling two-stage DX units and units with an enhanced dehumidifi-
cation mode such as coil bypass or subcool reheat. This object contains one-time specifications for the
DX unit such as node names and crankcase heater specifications. It references one or more CoilPerfor-
mance:DX:Cooling objects which define the performance for each mode of operation. It can have up to 4
performance modes to accommodate a 2-stage 2-mode unit.
The multimode DX coil can be used only as a component of CoilSystem:Cooling:DX or AirLoopH-
VAC:UnitaryHeatCool:VAVChangeoverBypass (parent object). These parent objects pass a load and de-
humidification mode to this coil. If the coil has 2 capacity stages, the multimode coil model determines
the stage sequencing.
1.40. GROUP HEATING AND COOLING COILS 1737
1.40.17.1 Inputs
1.40.17.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a DX cooling coil. Any reference to this DX coil by
another object will use this name.
1.40.17.1.11 Field: Normal Mode Stage 1+2 Coil Performance Object Type
1.40.17.1.12 Field: Normal Mode Stage 1+2 Coil Performance Object Name
This pair of fields specifies the object type and name for the coil performance object which specifies
the DX coil performance for stage 1+2 operation (both stages active) without enhanced dehumidification
(normal mode). The only valid performance object type is CoilPerformance:DX:Cooling.
This pair of fields specifies the object type and name for the coil performance object which specifies
the DX coil performance for stage 1 operation with enhanced dehumidification active. The only valid
performance object type is CoilPerformance:DX:Cooling.
Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWithHumidityControlMode ,
DOAS Cooling Coil , !- Name
HVACTemplate -Always 1, !- Availability Schedule Name
DOAS Supply Fan Outlet , !- Air Inlet Node Name
DOAS Cooling Coil Outlet , !- Air Outlet Node Name
, !- Crankcase Heater Capacity
, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -Bulb Temperature for Crankcase
Heater
2, !- Number of Capacity Stages
1, !- Number of Enhanced Dehumidification Modes
CoilPerformance:DX:Cooling , !- Normal Mode Stage 1 Coil Performance Object Type
DOAS Standard Perf 1, !- Normal Mode Stage 1 Coil Performance Name
CoilPerformance:DX:Cooling , !- Normal Mode Stage 1+2 Coil Performance Object Type
DOAS Standard Perf 1+2, !- Normal Mode Stage 1+2 Coil Performance Name
CoilPerformance:DX:Cooling , !- Dehumidification Mode 1 Stage 1 Coil Performance Object
Type
DOAS Dehumid Perf 1, !- Dehumidification Mode 1 Stage 1 Coil Performance Name
CoilPerformance:DX:Cooling , !- Dehumidification Mode 1 Stage 1+2 Coil Performance
Object Type
DOAS Dehumid Perf 1+2; !- Dehumidification Mode 1 Stage 1+2 Coil Performance Name
1740 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE
1.40.18 Coil:Cooling:DX:MultiSpeed
This component models a DX cooling unit with multiple discrete levels of cooling capacity. Depending
on input choices, the user can model a single compressor with multiple operating speeds, or a unit with
a single cooling coil fed by multiple compressors (e.g., row split or intertwined coil circuiting). Currently,
this cooling coil can only be referenced by a AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir:Multispeed object.
Refer to Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWithHumidityControlMode if the user wishes to model a cooling coil
with discrete levels of cooling and the possibility of air bypass during low speed operation (e.g. face-split
coil circuiting), or if cooling coil operation based on dehumidification requirements is desired.
The multispeed DX cooling coil can have from two to four operating speeds. When the coil operates at
Speed 1 (the lowest speed), its performance is very similar to the single speed DX coil where the impacts of
part-load ratio and latent capacity degradation can be included. When the coil operates at higher speeds
(above Speed 1), the linear approximation methodology is applied. The coil outputs at two consecutive
speeds are linearly interpolated to meet the required cooling capacity during an HVAC system timestep.
When the coil performs above the lowest speed, the user can chose if they want to include part-load ratio
and latent capacity degradation impacts at the higher speeds.
The multispeed unit is described by specifying the performance at different operating speeds. Each
speed has its own set of input specifications: full load capacity, SHR, COP and air flow rate at rated
conditions, along with modifier curves to determine performance when actual operating conditions are
different from the rated conditions.
The coil operates to meet the sensible capacity being requested. When this requested capacity is above
the sensible capacity of the highest operating speed, the coil runs continuously at the highest speed. When
the requested capacity is between the sensible capacities of two consecutive speeds, the unit will operate
a portion of the time at each speed to meet the request. When the requested capacity is less than the low
speed (Speed 1) capacity, the unit will cycle on/off as needed.
1.40.18.1 Inputs
1.40.18.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a multispeed DX cooling coil. Any reference to this
DX coil by another object will use this name.
is taken into consideration when calculating outdoor air temperature from the weather data. Alternately,
the node name may be specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList object where the outdoor air temperature is
taken directly from the weather data.
feeding individual refrigerant circuits), then the user may chose to specify YES and the latent capacity
degradation model will be applied for speeds 2 through 4 as appropriate. The selection for this input field
does not affect latent capacity degradation between speed 1 and off.